PROCEEDINGS

ACADEMY OF NATUEAL SCIENCES

PHILADELPHIA.

1869.

PHILADELPHIA:

PRINTED FOR THE ACADEMY.

1869.

(^^^1

LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS,

II7//( references to the several Articles contributed Iiy each.

Austin, Coe F. Characters of some new Hepaticiv (mostly North Ameri-
can), togetliei' with Notes on a few imperfectly described species... 218

Cope, E. D. Third Contribution to the Fauna of the Miocene Period of

the United States 6

A Review of the Species of the Plethodontida^ and Desmognathidse 93

Coues, E. On variations in the Genus ^^giotlins 180

On the Classification of Water Birds. -193

Ennis, J. The Auroral Display of April 15, 186!i 173

Lea, I. Notes on .Microscopic Crystals included in some Minerals 4

Further Notes on Microscopic Crystals in some of the Gems 119

Descriptions of Six New Species of Fresh-water Shells 124

Leidy, Jos. Notice of some e.xtinct \"ertebrates from Wyoming and Dakota. 63

Meehan, Thos. Se.xual Law in the Conifera? 121

On the production of Bractea in Larix 176

The Law of Development in the Flowers of Aml)rosia Artcmisitefolia. ... 189

Meek, F. B , and A. H. Worthen. Description of new Crinoidea and Echi-
noidea, from the Carboniferous rocks of the Western States, with

a Note on the Genus Onychaster 67

Ridgway, R. Notices of certain ob.scurely known Species of American

Birds 125

Scammon. C. M. On the Cetaceans of the Western Coast of N. America.. 13

) 8 3 /^

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES

PHILADELPHIA.

1869.

Jan. 5th.
The President, Dr. Hays, in the Chair.
Twenty-nine members present.

Jan. 12th.
The President, Dr. Hays, in the Chair.
Thirty-one members present.

Jan. 19th.

Dr. Bridges in the Chair.

Thirty-three members present,

A committee having been appointed to draught resolutions with
reference to the death of John Cassin, late Vice-President and Cura-
tor of the Academy, the following were offered and adopted :

The members of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia having
learned with great regret of the decease of their late Vice-President and Cura-
tor, John Cassin, do, in commemoration of the bereavement they have suffered,
resolve,

1. That in the death of Mr. Cassin the Academy has lost a member and
officer whose thoughts and acts were ever devoted to its interests and pros-
perity.

2. That in addition to the devotion thus manifested, they have been de-
prived of the counsel and exertions of one who was always ready to aid in
every enterprise tending to the objects of the institution.

3. That in this unexpected termination of the scientific pursuits of their
deceased associate, science has suffered a loss which cannot be repaired ; the
loss of one who, more than any other student of Natural History in America,

1869.]

7

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

has advanced the science of Ornithology, and whose matured and well culti-
vated mind enabled him to render cheerfully and generously much assistance
to younger students and to institutions of learning in that and other branches
of knowledge.

4. That we deeply sympathize with the family of our respected colleague
in this severe afiBiction.

5. That the Recording Secretary be directed to transmit a copy of these
resolutions to the family of the deceased.

Jayi. IQth.
Dr. Bridges in the Chair.
Fifty-five members present.

Pursuant to the By-Laws, an election of members of the Standing
Committees for the ensuing year was held, with the following result :
ETHNOLOGY. UERPETOLOGY AND ICHTHYOLOOY.

J. AiTKEN Meigs, Edw. D, Cope,

S. S. Haldeman, S. Weir Mitchell,

F. V. Hayden. Thaddeus Norris.

ENTOMOLOGY AND CRUSTACEA.
John L. LeConte,
Geo, H. Horn,
Tryon Reakirt.

COMP. AN AT. AND GEN. ZOOLOGY.
Jos. Leidy,
Harrison Allen,
S. B. Howell,

ORNITHOLOGY.
Bernard A. Hoopes,
W. P. Turnbull,
E. Sheppard,

MAMMALOGY.
Harrison Allen,
Edw, D. Cope,
R. S. Kenderdine.

CONCHOLOGY.
•Oeo. W. Tryon, Jr,,
E. R. Beadle,
C, F. Parker.

GEOLOGY.
Isaac Lea,
F. V, Hayden,
T. A, Conrad.

PHYSICS.
RoBT. Bridges,
R, E. Rogers,
Jacob Ennis.

LIBRARY.
Jos. Leidy,
J. L. LeConte,
Robt. Bridges.

BOTANY.
Elias Durand,
Thos. Meehan,
Elias Diffenbaugh.

MINERALOGY.

Wm. S. Vaux,
S, R. Roberts,

Jos. WiLLCOX.

PALEONTOLOGY.
T. A. Conrad,
Wm. M. Gabb,
Horatio C. Wood, Jr.
Dr. W. S. W. Ruschenberger was elected Vice-President, and
rmember of the Publication Committee, and Geo. W. Tryon, Jr.,

[Jan.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPniA. 3

was elected Curator, thus filling the vacancies caused by the death of
Mr. Cassin.

The following gentlemen were elected members :
R. J. Levis, M. D., John J. Stevenson, Wm. M. Wilson, and
Caleb S. Hallowell.

The following were elected correspondents :

Col. E. B. Carling, U. S. A. ; Wm. Blackmore, of London.

Feb. 9th.
Mr. Jos. Jeanes in the Chair.
Twenty-two members present.

Feb. 16th.

Dr. Ruschenberger, Vice-President, in the Chair.

Thirty-four members present.

The following paper was presented for publication :
Note on Microscopic Crystals contained in some minerals. By
Isaac Lea.

The death of Chas. N. Bancker was announced.

Professor Cope made some rem<arks on a new series of fossils, from the lime
stone caves in the Southern States. He enumerated the species of extinct
mammals, reptiles and fjshes, discovered by him in the lime-stone breccia,
■which is the remnant of a cave in Wythe Co., Virginia.

He gave twenty species of mammalia, of which nine only could be demon-
strated to be different from existing species. These were Megalouyx J e f f e r-
s n i i, Stereodectes tortus Cope, Dicotyles nasutus, iMixophagus spe-
laeus Cope, gen. et sp. nov., Sciurus panolius Cope, sp. nov., Tamias
laevidens Cope, sp, nov., Tapirus haysii, Ursus a m p 1 i d e n s.
Hemiacis pe r d ici da Cope, sp. nov. Stereodectes was stated to be based
on incisor teeth, which are more solid than in existing allied genera. Its pulp
cavity is almost entirely closed throughout a large part of the length of the
tooth. General character similar to those of the Marmot; size that of the
porcupine.

[Feb. 2Sd.
The President, Dr. Hays, in the Chair.
Thirty-six members present.

The report of the Biological and Microscopical Section was pre-
sented.

The following gentlemen were elected members : Wm. Dutty,
Gen. Hector Tyndale, Charles Morris, Theodore Cuyler.

On favorable report of the Committee, the following paper was
ordered to be published :
1869.]

■* PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

I^otes on MICBOSCOPIC CRYSTALS included in some Minerals.
BY ISAAC LEA.

During some j^ears past I have given much attention to the examination of
minerals under the microscope, and some of the observations were published
in the Proceedings of the Academy in 1866.

About a jear since, in the examination of a thin fractured piece of a large
garnet from North Carolina, I was surprised to observe a number of very
minute acicular crystals, which generally took two or three directions. This
induced me to examine more closely into the varieties of garnets which were
accessible to me, and supposing these crystals might have been observed by
others, I referred to the principal works on mineralogy which have been pub-
lished in France, Germany and in this country.

In none of these have I found any mention of these inclusions. But in that
excellent work "Repertoire D'Optique Moderne," by M. I'Abbe Moigno, where
he treats of optical mineralogy, I found that he states IM. Babinet to have ex-
amined ''■ star garnets" [Granats asteriques) some with four and some with six
branches. He says that the star garnets with four branches are not very rare,
— 20 to 30 in 1000 to 1200— but that the star of six rays he found only one in
6000 specimens. Whether the yi7rtwe?iM or _^ie7-«, as M. Babinet callsthe aste-
roid reflections, are the same as the acicular crystals observed by me 1 cannot
say, but certainly these latter are more common so far as my observation has
extended, and 1 have observed no asterisms whatever.

In 154 specimens of Bohemian polished garnets, 1 found 48 with acicular
crystals! This far exceeds the proportion stated by M. Babinet.

In the precious garnet from Green's Creek, Delaware Co., Penn., (uncut
specimens), I found in the close examination of 310 specimens that 75 were
possessed of acicular crystals, being nearly 25 per cent. — a very much larger
percentage than mentioned by M. Babinet. Of the Brazilian Pyrope I examined
40 specimens. They were very pure and free from spots and cavities. I could
not find a single acicular crystal in any one of them.

In Essonite I found no acicular crystals in the few specimens which I had it
in my power to examine, nor in grossularite, ouvarovite, colophonite or massive
magnesium garnet.

C'nnamon-stone from Dixon's, near Wilmington, Del., was carefully examined
in nearly 60 specimens, none of which showed any trace of acicular crystaliza-
tiou.

Spinelle ruhg, of which I examined 28 specimens, produced no microscopic
crvstalized forms.

It will be difficult to ascertain what composes these microscopic crystals in
garnets, but they may prove to be rutile when chemical analysis shall
l»e able to resolve the difficulty.

3Iarch 2d.
The President, Dr. Hays, in the Chair.
Thirty members present.

71/arc/i 9th.
The President, Dr. Hays, in the Chair.
Thirty five members i:)resent.

The Iblk^wing papers were presented for publication :
Third Contribution to tlie Fauna of the Miocene Period of the
United States. By Edw. D. Cope.

[March,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PniLADELPHIA. ^

On the Cetaceans of the Western Coast of North America. By
C. M. Scaranion. Edited by Edw. D. Cope.

Thomas Meeluiu presented some hickory nuts sent by Mr. W. H Ravenel, of
Aiken, South Carolina, supposed to he a hylirid between Carya olira'fonim and
Cart/a agualica, because they were produced from trees raised from seed of the
former which had trees of the hitter growing near them ; and because the
fruit exhibited had the characters of both. Mr. Meehan said that there wa? a
great difference of opinion amongst botanists whether the numerous forms of
hickory nuts, so puzzling to botanists who attempted to classify them, were
the result of hybridization, or were produced by the plant's own innate jiower
of change by ordinary external circumstances acting on a supposed germ ot
form, hxact experiments were ditHcult, on account of the many years it
would take to get at the results. He thought this instance furnished by Mr.
Ravenel useful, as being one of the nearest he had known to an actual fact
that hybridization has some influence on these varying forms.

Prof. Cope exhibited a specimen of the Heloderraa h o r ri d u m, of Wicg-
maun, from Tehuautepec, belonging to the Smithsonian Institution. He stated
that the Heloderma of the Sonoraa region proved, on comparison, to be a differ-
ent species, diflering in the more numerous scales on the head and body, in
the shorter tail, and in coloration. He said it had been well figured by Baird
in the Mexican boundary survey. He called it H. s u s p e c t u m. He stated
that though the lizards of this genus could not be proven to inflict a poisoaons
bite, yet that the salivary glands of the lower jaw were emptied by an efferent
duct which issued at the basis of each tooth, and in such a way that the saliva
would be conveyed into the wound by the deep groove of the crown.

March 16th.
The President, Dr. Hays, in the Chair.
Twenty -eight members present.

March 2Sd.
The President, Dr. Hays, in the Chair.
Twenty-nine members present.
The 'death of Jason L. Fenemore was announced.

March ZOfh.
The President, Dr. Hays, in the Chair.
Thirty-three members present.

The Report of the Biological and Microscopical Section was read.

The following gentlemen were elected members :

Col. Jas. Greer, of Dayton, Ohio, Dr. Douglas R. Bannan, U. S.
N., Geo. Henszey, John Birkinbine.

On favorable report of the Committee, the following paper wiis
ordered to be published :

1869.]

b PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Third Contribution to the Fauna of the Miocene Period of the ITnited States.

BY EDWARD D. COPE.

PLATANISTW^.

A more than usually complete skeleton of Tretosphys grandajvus fur-
nishes some characters, whkh, taken in connection with others known to exist
in many others species of our Miocene dolphins, suggest that the true position
of all of the latter is in or near the family above named.

In the skeleton mentioned there are preserved some twenty-four ribs, more
or less completely, and the anterior segment of the sternum. No pieces can
be referred as osseous hsmapophyses. The sternal piece also presents no pita
for articulation with such hfemapophyses, either anteriorly or posteriorly,
but rugose surfaces only. The probabilities are, therefore, that these elements
were cartilaginous, a feature which Flower considers to be characteristic of the
family Platanistida;. The ribs present the same type. The cnpiiulum and tubercle
are well developed to near the posterior part of the vertebral column, where
they become approximated, neither disappearing more than the other, la
the Physeteridae the tuhei'culum disappears posteriorly, while in the Delphin-
ida; the capilulum vanishes. In the Platanistidse both remain and become
united.

The cranium of Lophocetus exhibits features of the same family. The
pterygoids are long, flat and extended anteriorly. The cavity which they roof
is long and narrow, not short and inflated as in the Delphinidse. The nasals
and frontals are elongate as in Pontoporia.* In another cranium of uncertain
reference, but probably of the same type, these elements are rather more short-
ened.

The species referred to this family, which are so abundant in our miocene
beds, appear, so far as known, to have the cervical vertebrae, all distinct, and
generally much more elongate than in any recent forms. This peculiarity has
been observed in Priscodelphinus a tropins, and P. conradi, in Tretosphyg
grandaevus, as well as in several smaller species of the family. The only
cervical vertebra referable to those of Ixacanthus ca;lospondylus are
less elongate, and nearly as thin as some of those of Beluga canadensis;
the reference to that species is, however, quite uncertain. Of an even more
attenuated form is the cervical of Pontogeneus prisons Leidy, a Delphinoid
from the tertiary of Louisiana.

The teeth of Tretosphys are known, and these show some afiinity to those of
Squalodon, in the striate enamel surface, and anterior and posterior edge sep-
arating the inner and outer faces. The fang is cylindric, the crown regularly
conic, the two together strongly curved.

A cast of a tooth of Lophocetus calvertensis is quite similar in form to
the preceding, and small for the size of the animal.

Such teeth belong, perhaps, to T. g r a n d aj v u s. The muzzle of a species
of similar size, also from Shiloh, N. J., is very long, narrow and depressed, the
intermaxillaries forming a broad obtuse elevation. The fragments of the muz-
zle of T. la c e rt s u s, and those of some of the Maryland Priscodelphini in-
dicate a similar form. Lophocetus Cope presents a somewhat similar form.
This genus (Proceed. A. N. Sci., 1867, p. 146) will perhaps be found to be
identical with one of the four which I have recognized through vertebral
characters among the miocene Dolphins ; but to which this reference is to be
made is not as yet certain. When the portions of crania at present in my pos-
session are carefully studied, this identification can no doubt be readily made.

The compressed roots of the teeth of Rhabdosteus distinguish them from
those of the above genera, and constitute a point of resemblance to the exist-
ing Platanistidse.

*A fine specimen of the cranium of this species from Montevideo is in the Museum
of the Academy.

[March,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. <

TRETOSPHYS Cope.

Proc. Acad. N. Sci., Phila., 1868, p. 18C, 100.
Dclphinapierus " Lesson," Cope, Proc. A. N. Sci. Phila., 18G8, 189.

Tlie species of this genus I foruierh' referred to Lesson's genus as above,
the Beluga of Gray, as one of the ^^^w genera of existing Delphinidre, in which
the cervical vertebrae are all similarly distinct. I could find no characteristic
feature by which to separate the two. I am, however, now entirely able to
separate the miocene from the recent species, in respect to generic structure.
The new genus is defined as follows, so far as known :

(Jervical vertebra; elongate as in the seals, and all distinct. Their di- and
parapophyses all united and embracing a small foramen for the vertebral ar-
tery.

In the existing genus the cervical vertebrae are thin and disc like, and none
but the anterior one or two embrace a foramen, and that rarely. In the genus
Tretosphys the structure is quite similar to that seen among the seals, and has
given the species a physiognomy quite distinct from the modern dolphins.
They have evidently had a well marked neck, endowed with considerable
flexibility. This constitutes an approach to the Zeuglodonta, which is
still more marked in the genus Priscodelphinus. In this also there is the
same elongate series of cervical vertebra?, and well enclosed cervical canal.

The species of the genus may be defined briefly as follows :

I. But few and only posterior caudals Avith venous foramen at base of dia-
pophysis.

a. Posterior lurabars three-sixteenths or less, longer than wide before dia-
pophyses.
** Neural canal with obtuse epapophysial ridge.
Articular surface with incised median impression, central rugulose disc, and
broad circumference with raised concentric stria? ; lumbars straight and strong-
ly keeled below ; caudals short and broad ; large T. lacertosus.

Articular surface without striic, and with a deep punctiform median impres-
sion which is below the middle; most lumbars concave below; caudals more

elongate, 35 lines long in young : smaller T. grandaevus.

Articular face without strise, and with punctiform impression (on caudal) ;

caudal stouter, 24 lines long in adult ; smallest T. gabbii.

aa. Posterior lumbars i longer than width before diapophyses.
Articular face with punctiform impression, and no raised striae ; an epapo-
physis ; caudal narrow, 39 lines long in adult T. uraeus.

II. An anterior caudal with vascular foramen at base of diapophysis.
Articular face of lumbar with weak incised impression, smooth ; below

weakly keeled ; length in adult 21 lines; the smallest species.

T. rcschenbergeri.
The species which I described as Delphinapterus tyrannus (Proc. A. N. Sci.
Phila., 18G8, 189,) probably belongs to the toothless whales, and would cor-
respond in size with the Eschriclitius pu si 11 us. The collation of differ-
ent parts of each of these species must be left for future opportunities. The
vertebrae are distinguished by having the neural canal without epapophysis,
the articular face with open median impression, and no strife. The epiphysial
ridges are much interrupted and slightly tuberculiform.

Tretosphys lacertosus, Delphinapterus [Tretosphys) laceriosus and D. hnw-

khisii Cope, 1. c. p. 190.

This species is known by portions of two individuals from Charles Co.,
Marj'land, of one from the mouth of the Patuxent, and of five at least from the
marl pits of John Hummel, Henry Ware and others, near Shiloh, Cumberland
&b., N. J. Portions of crania with teeth, etc., are mingled with the vertebrae,
and furnish material for a partial analysis of the characters of the species.

1869.]

8 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Tretosphys GRAND.EV0S Cope. Delphinnpterns grandseviis Cope, Proc. A. N.

S. 1868, 191. Friscodalpliinus grand»:vus Leidy, 1. c. 18, 51, 327.

The caudals of Ibis dolphin were the parts of it first discovered. Since then
a lumbar of one, and a large part of the skeleton of another individual have
been received by the Academy, all being from the same locality, Shiloh, Cum-
berland Co., N. J. Unfortunately the last series contained no caudal verte-
bra? ; its reference to this species is not entirely established, though the cor-
rectness of the same is very probable.

The remains of the most perfect individual consist of seven cervical, nine
dorsal, and seven lumbar vertebrse ; there are twenty-four ribs and the anterior
element of the sternum. The distinctive features of the vertebras have been
already given. The manubrium of the sternum is T-shaped, and is somewhat
expanded jjosteriorly. The anterior (inferior) face is plane, (slightly concave
antero-posteriorly) ; the margins rounded. The superior face is roof-shaped
to a median keel, which disappears posteriorly.

Tketosphys gabbii, Delphinapterus gahbii Cope, 1. c. 191.

No material characteristic of this species has been found since its descrip-
tion.

Tretosphys ur.eus Cope, sp. nov.

This species is established on a lumbar vertebra from the miocene- of Shiloh,
Cumberland Co., N. J., with which I have associated a caudal vertebra from
near the mouth of the Patuxent, which was lent me for determination by Philip
P. Tysun, State Geologist of Maryland.

The character of elongation seen in the genus Zarhachis strikes the eye at
once in this species. Although not carried so far a? in tiiat genus, it exceeds
considerably species of this, or of Priscodelphinus, with which we are ac-
quainted ; hence, thongh the material is slight, there can be no doubt that it
represents an animal not previously known.

The articular face of the lumbar is not complete in all its outlines, but has
evidently been as deep as wide, and perhaps nearly round. The median im-
pression is punctiform and remarkably strong. The profile of the inferior out-
line is concave and is constituted by an obtuse keel, on each side of which is
a short longitudinal depression. The diapophyses have been broken off, but
their bases are both broad and deep, slightly filling the concavity of the infero-
lateral face. Supero-lateral face strongly- concave in both directions.

Lines.

Length of centrum '. 39

" " basis neurapophysis 28-5

" " basis diapophysis 20

Width neural canal 4

The caudal has broad diapophyses and the band-like impression passing in
front of them, and converging the centre of the median line below, a character
seen in many species of the genus The points of attachments of chevron
bones are well marked ; they entirely disappear on the middle portion of the
centrum. The articular face is similar to that of the lumbar, but is a little
broader than high. The surfaces are everywhere concave, and are not marked
by any longitudinal ridges.

The same vertebraj of T. g ra n d se v us present many ridges ; those of T.
lacertosus are variable.

Lines.

Total length 39

Length basis neurapophysis 25

" " diapophysis 24

Width neural canal 2-6

" articular face 25-5

Depth articular face 21-3

This is probably the second of the genus length, and the third in bulk.

[March,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. ^

Trktosphys rv^sciienbercebi, Delphinaptcrus ruschmbcTgeri Cope, Proc. A. N.

Sci., Pliila., 1868, 189.

This is the smallest of the genus. It is known only from a caudal and
lumbar vertebra of one individual, from Charles Co., Maryland.

ZARHACHIS Cope.
Proc. A. N. Sci. 1868, 189.

Examination of additional material renders it necessary to correct the
characters of this genus as originally given. It was stated to diO'er from
Priscodelphinus in that, while some caudals had spinous diapophyses, others
possessed them flat, hut imperforate. A vertebra supposed to indicate the
latter characters I am now compelled to refer to another species and probably
a genus. Other vertebrfe assigned to Z. flagel later, must be referred
elsewhere. A lumbar vertebra represents another species of probably the
same genus, while a third has evidently pertained to still a third species. The
genus will be characterized by the extraordinary length and slenderness of the
lumbar vertebrae, and similar, though slightly abbreviated form of the caudals.
The latter have spinous diajjophyses, and in one species the former also.
While the width of the articular faces of the centra of these vertebraj in the
typical Priscodelphinus is but few lines less than the length, in the species of
this genus the diameter of the same is only from four-sevenths to one half the
length. The nearest approach is made by Priscodelphinus s t e n u s, m.,
where this diameter is 6-7ths of the length.

The three species of Zarhachis may be distinguished as follows :

I. Median or anterior caudal with a strong longitudinal keel above the diapo-
physis — which is therefore probably present on the distal lurnbars.

Epiphysis thicker, larger Z. flagellator.

II. No longitudinal keel on lumbars. Diapophyses broad, flat; epiphyses
thin; large Z. tysonii.

Diapophyses narrow, subspinous; epiphyses thin; small Z. velox.

Zarachis flagellator Cope, Proceed. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phil., 1808, 189, pars.

The caudal vertebra, described as above, is the only indication which we
have as yet of this large adolphin.

Miocene, Charles Co., Md.

Zarhachis tysonii Cope, sp. nov.

This species is established on one posterior lumbar vertebra only, but its
form is so characteristic as to render its identification a comparatively simple
matter. The attenuated form characteristic of the genus is accompanied by
broad diapophyses, showing that, as in Priscodelphinus, the species differ in
the number of the posterior vertebrae which exhibit the contraction of the
diapophyses.

The sjjeciraen preserved belonged to an adult animal. It was apparently
one of the most posterior lumbars, as there are two feeble longitudinal ridges
beneath, whose interval is again obtusely ridged and perforate by several
foramina. The inferior outline is stronglj^ concave in longitudinal section,
and all the planes are concave in transverse section. The articular faces are
a little wider than deep. The neurapophyses occupy a base of -75 the length
of the centrum. The diapophyses are about equidistant between them and the
nearest inferior ridge.

Lines.

Total length centrum 48

Transverse diameter articular face 29

Vertical " " " 27

Width neural canal (internal) 5

" between inferior ridges ,■ 8

This specimen was found at the miocene beds at the mouth of the Patuxent
River, Maryland. It is water worn, and has been probably washed from the
clitfs, and been covered by the tide.

1869.]

10 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

The animal to which it belonged was not less attenuated in the posterior part
of the vertebral column than the great Basilosaurus.

Zarhachis velox Cope.

This species is likewise only represented by a single vertebra, which is from
the lumbar series anterior to the position of that of Z. tysonii just de-
scribed. It has pertained to an adult animal of half the size of the preceding,
and one which carried the narrowed subs])iiious diapophyses forward, though
perhaps not so markedly as the Friscodelphinus s p i n o s u s, m.

The inferior outline is straight, and is the edge of a very strong thin keel, whose
greater median prominence is due to the strong concavity of the inferior sur-
faces. The same concavity with that of the upper surface causes the existence
of a strong longitudinal lateral keel, from the middle of which springs the
diapophysis. The basis of the neural arch is thin and does not extend over
more than -6 the length of the centrum.

The articular faces are discoid, and if one diameter exceed another it is the
vertical ; they have a somewhat expanded appearance from the concavity of
the sides. Surfaces smooth.

Lines.

Length centrum 33

Transverse diameter of extremity 17

Vertical " " 17

Internal width of neural canal 31

Length of basis of diapophysis 8

This species was taken from the rniocene marl from the pits of Reuben
Ayers, near Shiloh, Cumberland Co., N. Jers.-y.

It indicates an even more slender and snake-like cetacean than the preced-
ing, of much smaller size.

ESCHRICHTIUS Gray.

There is in the Thomas collection a portion of the cranium of a small
Balspnoid, which from its resemblance to those of the existing tinner whales,
its small size, locality, and black color, I attribute provisionally to the Esch-
richtius p u s i 1 1 u s. It serves to confirm the affinities expressed in the name
established on the ramus of the mandible. The alisphenoids present a deep,
smooth posterior excavation, as in Sibbaldius, while the infero-lateral processes
of the basioccipital are stronger than in that genus. The conchs of the per-
otic bones are preserved ; they are characterized by the possession of a hooked
process turned outward, on the outer and more elevated margin.

An examination of additional material of these extinct Bal^nidie, has
enabled me to trace the affinities of species of which little has been hitherto
known. Thus the Balsena prisca Leidy appears nearly affined to species re-
ferred by me to Eschrichtius through intermediate forms. Vertebrae very sim-
ilar to those referred to the Mcgaptera expansa Cope are accompanied by man-
dibular rami of the same general type, and would be better referred to the
same genus, in the absence of evidence to the contrary. It appears that there
are six sfiecies of the genus, whose characters offer nothing as yet to separate
them from the scarcely extinct type E. r o b u s t u s Lillj. Five of these can
be characterized from the forms of their mandibular rami, and are therefore
compared in the following table. The other species, E. leptocentrus, m.,
is indicated by vertebra? alone.

Much compressed, outer face little convex; superior margin a narrow ridge
without any truncation, with a series of foramina on each side, the inner ex-
tending for a very short distance only ; no marginal groove ; inferior edge
narrow. Very large E. cephalu.s.

Upper edge broad, with outer series of foramina, and meeting inner-edge at
a right angle, which is the highest line, and with inner series of foramina just
below it ; most convex externally. Large fi--- E. piuscus.

[March,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 11

Upper edfre broad behind only, and these bearing only the inner series of
foramina. Elsewhere with a median ridgre and rows of foramina below on
each side ; much decurved ; less convex externally. Medium... E. expanscs.

Upper edge nowhere broad, and with a deep or shallow groove below it on
inside; less decurved, less convex externally ; small E. pcsillus.

EscHRicHTiDS LEPTOCENTRUS Copc, Procecd. Ac. N. Sci., Phil., 1807, 147.

The largest of the miocene species, the vertebrae considerably exceeding
corresponding ones of the E. c e p h a 1 u s.

ESCHRICHTR-S CEPHALtJS Cope, loc. cit. p. 148.

Indicated by a large part of the cranium and other parts of the skeleton,
■with flipper, etc., from Charles Co., Md., and by a portion of the mandible of
a second individual from near the mouth of the Patuxent River, Md.

EscHRiCHTius PRiscus Leidy. Bahenn prison Leidy, Pr. A. N. S. Phil., 1851,

308. Balirnoptera prisca Cope, 1. c. 1867, 144.

A portion of a mandibular, ramus of this species furnishes all that we know
of it. In size it is intermediate^^between the two here preceding and follow-
ing it.

The miocene of Westmorland Co., Va.

EsCHRiCHTius EXPANSUS Copc. Meguptera evpansa Cope, 1. c , 1868, 193.

In addition to numerous vertebrff", portions of the limbs and of three man-
dibular rami of two individuals have been discovered. The latter present, for
a marked distance on the proximal portion, a flat plane on the upper face, in-
stead of the usual argulate ridge, which is equally distinct from the outer
and inner faces. In E. p r i s c u s the superior plane is only a continuation of
the outer convex face, and accordingly the external series of nutritious fora-
mina extends along it. The plane is occupied on the other hand, in the E. e i-
p a n s u s, by the inner series.

The inferior margin is a rather obtuse angle ; the general form is not com-
pressed, nor much convex externally, as in E. p r i s c u s.

Inches.

Depth ramus 2-75

Thickness " 1-65

Foramina (internal) two in 2-.50

From the mouth of the Patuxent, coll. of P. T. Tyson, State Geological Sur-
vey of Maryland.

EscHRiCHTius PCSILLUS Cope, Procced. Acad. Nat. Sciences, Philada., 1868,

159, 191.

A ramus of the mandible of this species from the mouth of the Patuxent
River differs from the type in having the inner groove of the superior margin
much less marked ; the inner face is plane, but leaves the superior groove
"with a marked convexity. The outer face is gently convex, and the outer
foramina open externally. Slightly decurved, as well as curved longitudinall3^
Behind the foramina, the superior margin rises to a well marked base for a
coronoid process, which is not preserved.

Inches. Lines.

Depth ramus 1 io-5

Thickness 1 2-5

Foramina (internal) intervals !•

CROCODILIA.

THECACHAMPSA Cope.

Further investigation shows that this genus is gavial-like, and that the
peculiarity which characterizes its dentition also belongs to Plerodon Meyer
of the European Miocene. Thoracosaurus, of the American Cretaceous, pre-
sents also the same character. Plerodon differs from the American form in

1869.]

12 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

being like Crocodilus in cranial characters, while Thecacharapsa is a gavial.
The species of the latter are T. skkicodon Coite, abundant in New Jersey, at
Shiloh and elsewhere, with long curved cyliiidric teeth. T. sicaria Cope,
from Maryland, with much compressed crown of the tooth, with prominent
cutting edges. T. antiqua [Crocodilus Leidy,) with teeth less curved, cylindric
and with very short cutting ridges. From Virginia.

The characters of the three species may be thus compared:

The crowns of the teeth not compressed, with short cutting edges.

T. a n t i q u a.

Crowns cylindric, curved, with long and delicate cutting edges.

T. s e r i c o d n.

Crowns compressed with very prominent crenulate cutting edges, on a mar-
ginal base T. sicaria.

The last named also possesses a large maxillary tooth, near the position of
the ninth of Crocodilus, which fits a corresponding concavity between two of
the mandibular teeth, resembling in this the existing genus Tomistoma.

TESTUDINATA.'

TRIONYX GeofiF.
Trionyx lima Cope, sp. nov.

Represented by one costal-bone from Shiloh, N. Jersey. It is massive, and
strongly sculptured by numerous approximated narrow raised ridges, which
extend across the bone, with little inosculation, and which leave intervals
between them a little wider than themselves.

The characters may be compared with those of the three species from the
cretaceous of New Jersey, as follows:

Costal bone transversely figured by narrow elevated ridges T. 1 i m a.

Costal bone with thick, low, transverse ridges, which are connected by cross-
ribs which leave series of pits T. p r i s c u s.

Costal bones with transverse irregular grooves proximally which remain
along the sutures only distally, leaving an area of a shallow honey-comb pat-
tern medially T. p e n n a t u s.

Costal bones with a shallow coarse honey-comb pattern, tending to conflu-
ence distally T. h a 1 p h 11 u s.

April 6th.
The President, Dr. Hays, in the Chair.

Twenty-six members present.

The following papers were presented for publication :

Notice of some Extinct Vertebrata from Wyoming and Dakota.
By Jos. Leidy, M. D.

Description of new Crinoidea and Echinoidea from the Carboni-
ferous Rocks of the Western States, with a note on the Genus Oay-
chaster. By F. B. Meek and A. H. Worthen.

Remarks on the Blastoidea with descriptions of ii-ew species. By
F. B. Meek and A. H. Worthen.

The publication of the fifth number of the Proceedings for 1868,
was announced.

April ISth. ^ ^

The President, Dr. Hays, in the Chair.
Twenty-two members present.

[April,

NATURAL SCinXCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 13

April list.
Dr. Bridges iu the Chair.
Fifteen members present.

Mr. Kedfield called the attention of the meeting to the following
Memoranda attached to specimens of Schizsea pusilla, in the Herba-
rium of N. Y. Lyceum of Nat. Hist.

" First discovered by Dr. C. W. Eddj-, near Quaker Bridge, in the pine bar-
rens of New Jersey, about 30 miles from Philadelphia. Dr. E. was in company
with J. LeOonte, Pursh and C. Whitlow, and though he and Mr. LeConte
found all the specimens, Pursh has claimed the honor of the discovery him-
self."

Signed, Toerey and Cooper.

1868.
Above is in handwriting of Dr. Torrcy.

"First found in 1805; not found again till detected by me in company with
Dr. Torrey, in June, 1818."

Signed, Cooper.

April 21th.
The President, Dr. Hays, in the Chair.

Twenty-three members present.

The issue of the sixth number of the Proceedings for 1868 was
announced.

The following gentlemen were elected members:

Isaac S. Fogg, John C. Sinclair, Rev. J. L. Withrow and Henry
Bower.

The following were elected correspondents :

Albany Hancock, of Kew-Castle-upon-Tyne, England ; and Bre-
vet-Major F. Curtis, M. D.

On favorable Report of the Committees the following papers were
ordered to be published :

On the CETACEANS of the Western Coast of North America.
BY C. M. SCAMMON, UNITED STATES MARINE.

Edited by Edward D. Cope.

Introductory note by the Editor.

The present article, by Capt. Scammon, is the result of many years' obser-
vation in an almost unexplored and with difficulty explorable department of
zoology. It ■WIS submitted by the author to the Smithsonian Institution, with
the request that it might be rendered beneficial to science. The Secretary,
Prof. Henry, referred it to the editor, with a request to puljlish such parts as
should be deemed valuable to zoology, and to add such elucidation and expla-
nation as would contribute to the same end.

In the carrying out of these views of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Insti-
tution, a gt'ileral classification has bees made, and a systematic record of the
species and genera mentioned in the essay has been prefixed A few species
have been inserted from other sources, and the opportunity improved to give
descriptions of some species from the Atlantic coasts.

1869.^

14 PBCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF

The scientific student will await with interest the receipt by our national
institution of further materials, so that the structure and affinities of these re-
markable beings may be fully made known.

Part I.

SYSTEMATIC SYNOPSIS

Of the species of the Cetaceans of the West Coast of North America. By Prof. E. D.
Cope, Corresponding Secretary of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Fhiladel-
phia.

CETACEA.

Two sub-orders of this order are known to exist at the present period, which
differ as follows :

Mtsticeti.

Mandibular rami distinct from each other, without symphysis. Teeth none
in either jaw. A series of transverse corneous laminae on each side of the roof
of the mouth.

Denticeti.

Mandibular rami united distally by a symphysis. Teeth present in one or
both jaws. No corneous laminae in the mouth.

I. MYSTICETE.

There is but one family of this group, characterized as follows :

Spiracles two. Front of cranium plane, much raised above the orbital pro-
cesses ; no transverse or longitudinal crest on the cranium Balsenidx.

I. BALJENID^.

Of this family numerous genera and species have been discovered and de-
scribed. It embraces the most gigantic of vertebrated animals, and some of
the most useful. They inhabit all oceans, but are rarer in the equatorial re-
gions, abounding most in the frigid and temperate seas. Their pursuit givea
occupation to many men of all nations.

Owing to their vast bulk and the want of appreciation on the part of those
who are engaged in their capture, their study has been one of great difficulty.
It is only within a few years that a sufficiently extended amount of material
has been accumulated to enable the genera and species to be properly discrim-
inated. The works of Gray, Eschricht, Reinhardt, Lilljeborg, Van Beneden,
Flower and the writer, contain the most recent results of these investigations.

The genera are as follows :

I. Cervical vertebrae coossified ; fingers five.

No dorsal fin or gular folds ; coracoid rudimental.

Ribs single headed ^. Balxna.

First rib double headed ..Ilunterius,

II. Cervical vertebrae free ; fingers four.

A. The throat without plicai ; no dorsal fin; ribs? single headed.

No acromion Rhachianectet,

An acromion Ayaphelus,

B. Throat and breast plicate ; a dorsal hump or fin.

a. The vertebral canal not closed by the processes of the cervical verte-
brae ; ribs single headed.

No acromion Megaptera.

A well developed acromion Eschrichtius,

tta.. The canalis vertebralis enclosed by diapophyses and parapophysea
of cervical vertebrae; both acromion and coracoid.

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 15

Anterior ribs single headed ...Balrenoptera.

Anterior ribs double headed Sibbaldius.

Those engaged in the pursuit of whales recognize these natural groups with-
out difficulty, as evidenced by their vernacular names of long standing. Thus
the species of div. I are " right whales," of II A, " scrag whales ;" of II B a,
" humpback whales ;" and the Balajuopteras, etc., " finner whales." The last
are most numerously represented by species.

BAL^^NA Linn.

Two species of this genus have been described by authors as inhabiting
the North Pacific Ocean, though the materials upon which their identification
has been based is of the most slender description. I am as yet unable to de-
termine to which of them the right whale mentioned by Capt. Scaramon should
be referred. I therefore enumerate both here. A third species, the Bow Head
of American whalers, is stated to pass south of Behring's Straits at certain
seasons of the year, according to Capt. Scammon. I enumerate it as the same
as the Greenland Right Whale of English authors, which is the " bow-head "
of the Eastern American whalers, in contradistinction to the Right whale, (B.
c i s a r c ti c a),

Bal.'Kna mysticktus Linn.

Bow-head. Catal, Whales and Seals, Brit. Mus. p. 81.

Bal/Ena sieboldii Gray.

Cat. B. M. 96, Balenna auslralis Temm. Faun. Japon. t. 28, 29, (from Japanese
model).

BaLvENA cdllamach Chamisso.

Nova Acta, Acad. Curs, xii, 251 Tab. (from Aleutian model). Cope, Pr. A. N.
Sci. Phil. 1868, 225.

RHACHIANECTES Cope.

This genus is now first characterized. Its only known species I originally
united with Agaphelus Cope, but the form of the scapula is so different that
it must be distinguished. While that of Agaphelus is identical with that of
Balaeuoptera, it is in the present genus quite like that of Baliicna.

Rhachianectes glaucus Cope.

Agaphelus glaucus Cope, Proceed. Academy Nat. Sciences, Philada. 1868, p.

225. The California Gray Whale.

This species was originally described from specimens by Wm. H. Dall, of
San Francisco.

MEGAPTERA Gray.

In this genus the rudiment of a dorsal fin exists as a hump on the posterior
part of the dorsal region. The fins are longer than in any other genus, and
two or more of the cervical vertebriE are occasionally more or less coossified.
The following species are known more or less imperfectly : M. longimaaa
Rudolphi, from the Arctic Seas ; M. o s p h y i a Cope, from the Western At-
lantic ; M. brasiliensis Gray, [Balxnoptera Gray), from the coast of Bra-
ail ; M. 1 a 1 a n d i i Fischer, from the Cape of Good Hope : M. k u z i r a Gray,
from the Western Pacific. The full measurements and description of Capt.
Scammon enable me to add another species, viz.:

Megapteua veksabilis Cope.

Spec. nov. The North Pacific hump-back.

This species possesses pectoral fins, apparently intermediate in length be-
tween those of ihe M. longimaaa and the species with shorter fins, as M.

1869.]

16 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

osphyia and M. k u z i r a. They are between one-third and one-fourth
the length ; in the two last mentioned, between one-fourth and one-fifth. It
has 26 pectoral and gular folds. Siebold states that the M. kuzira pos-
sesses but ten. In this animal the warts extend to the top of the front, a
character not ascribed to any Atlantic Megaptera. It differs also from M. 1 o n-
g i m a n a, and resembles M. 1 a 1 a n d i i and M. kuzira, in having the pec-
toral black on the external face ; in the Greenland species and in the model
of the Aleutian Islanders, described by Chamisso, it is white. The character-
istic color of the belly, in the most typical form, is said to be entirely black.
In this respect it differs from all other Megapterte, which present more or less
white or grey, on the inferior surfaces at least.

BALJSNOPTERA Lacep.

Many species of this genus inhabit the immense area of the ocean. They
are regarded as pertaining to two genera by Gray. Thus the known species
fall into two groups, viz.: I, those in which the dorsal fin is at the commence-
ment of the third fourth of the length from the head ; and II, those where this
fin measures only the second third. To the first belong certainly only B. r o s-
t r a t a and B. v e 1 i f e r a : to the second B. p h y s a 1 u s, B. d u g u i d 1 and
B. sibbaldii G ra.y (Cuvierius Gray), all Atlantic. There is not enough
known of the following species to determine their characters in this respect:
B. a r c t i c a Schlegel, N. West Pacific ; B. swinhoei Gray, China Seas ; B.
patachonica Gray, S. W. Atlantic ; B. antarctica Gray, New Zealand
Sea. The following species have been named : B. f asc i a ta (Physalus Gr.),
B. australis Desmoul. The species of the North West 'coast of North
America is sufficiently described and figured by Capt. Scammon to furnish
means of comparison with most these species. It diff"ers from these, and may
be called

BaLTENOPTERA VELIFERA Cope.

The Finner Whale of the Oregon coasts.

This species differs from all that have been described in that . respect, in the
color of the baleen ; from the B. a r c t i c a of the Japanese Seas, the colora-
tion of the body separates it ; in the latter the sides are spotted- black and
white, in the present shaded from the brown of the upper to the white of the
lower surfaces. The large size of the dorsal fin and its anterior position are
marked characters ; the northern species, with larger fin, is still more diff'er-
ent from the B. arctica, tlie only one with wiiich it would be probably
identical.

The more southern form, with very small fin, may be another species — pos-
sibly a Sibbaldius. The B. ve li f e ra cannot unfortunately be compared with
the B. swinhoei and B. patachonica, as no similar parts are figured or
described.

The baleen, says Capt. Scamraon, is of a light lead color, streaked with
black, and its surface is marked with transverse roughening. In the B. phy-
salus the whalebone is, according to Gray, slate-colored on the inner side,
white streaked; on the outer side nearly black and with still darker streaks.
In the B. r s t r a t a it is nearly all white, with some black at the base.

SIBBALDIUS Gray.

Species of tjiis genus have been discovered in arctic, antarctic and tropical
seas. S. b r e a 1 i s [Flmverius Lilljeborg), the most gigantic of the finners,
occurs in the northern Atlantic and Polar Seas, but appears to be rather rare.
S. 1 a t i c e p s, a much smaller species, has, so far as known, a high arctic
range, while S. tu b e ro s u s, sp. nov., has been found on the eastern North
American coast. S. s ch 1 e ge 1 i i is known to occur on the coast of Java.
A doubtful species has been named S. antarcticus. The species may be
divided into three groups, thus : I, the dorsal tin of ordinary form, two-thirds

, [April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

17

the length from the muzzle ; dorsal line behind it smooth. S. tectirostris
Cope, 8. I a t i c c p s Gray. II, the dorsal a small conical mass, situated well
j)Osteriorly ; the dorsal line with several humps behind it; several cervicals with
complete cervical canal ; 8. tuberosus Co))e. Ill, the dorsal fin a small
conic mass situated three-fourths the length from the muzzle, the dorsal line
smooth behind it; the axis only, with complete cervical canal; {Floweriua
Lillj.) S b o r e a 1 i s Fisch.

The S. TOBERosiTs m. ditters from the S. 1 a t i c e p s as above, and probably
in its five or six humps above the caudal portion of its vertebral column. The
latter peculiarity is not mentioned in authors' descriptions of S. 1 a t i c e p s,
and though its existence is not denied, it is probably wanting. I have hereto-
fore considered this whale as the latter species, and described it as such. — •
Proceed. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 18G6, 297.

The tinner whale, above mentioned as Sibbaldius tectirostris Cope, is es-
tablished on a nearly complete specimen of a young 9 ^^ the Museum of the
Academy. Its'leugth when fresh, in a nearly straight line from the end of the
muzzle to the emarginatioa of the flukes, is between 47 and 48 feet. This de-
pends on independent observations of several persons. The skeleton as pre-
served lacks a number of caudal vertebrae* and a few dorsals. Restoring those
that are at present wanting, from the obvious extent of interruption, and the
last caudals, according to Flower's estimates for the S. 1 a ti c e p s, we have
the following total length :

No.

Cervicals 7

Dorsals \ 11

Lumbosacrals* 16

Caudals — diapophyses perforate 4 -

Cranium.

— diapophyses imperforate 10 J

— no diapophyses 1

Length.

ft. in.

2 6

Restored.

ft. in.

2

28 10

1

3

6

10

Restol-e^.

41 7
3 6

Total n 45 7

The individpal is in the young stage, since not only are all the epiphyses of
the vertebrae separated, but those of the humerus also. According to Flower,
the coossification of the epiphysis of the humerus takes place when the animal
has developed somewhat beyond one-half the adult dimensions. This animal
may therefore be considered as being at least half grown, which renders a
length of 70 — 80 feet probable for the adult. The present specimen was a fe-
male, according to those who had seen it in the flesh, and who described to
me the mamma; and the vulva. In its larger dimensions it thus exceeds the B.
1 a t i c e ps, and especially the B. t u b e r o s u s, as the latter is adult at about
the size of this young specimen.

The atlas has not yet reached the Museum. The axis presents below no
surface adapted to a tubercuhim atlantis. The median portion of the anterior
face of the centrum presents a low conic projection, the processus odontoideus.
The di- and parapophyses are united distally, embracing a large ring, whose out-
side longitudinal diameter is two-thirds the transverse diameter of the centrum
of the same. The neural arch presents no spine, but a pair of lateral promi-
nences like rudimental zygapophyses. The parapophyses of the remaining
cervicals are long, exce[)t on the seventh, where they are almost wanting. The
diapophyses are long in all, longest and decurved on the seventh, where it

* All are in possession of the Academy, but those alluded to are yet in a. compost heap
and unfit to handle.

1868.J 2.

18 PEOCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

Stands above the parapophysis of the sixth. They are nearly united with the
parapophysis on the third cervical, and are no doubt fully so in mature age.
The fourth cervical is lost, but it is scarcely jjrobable that it presented a com-
plete ring for the transmissal of the vertebral artery, etc. There are no rings
attached to the vertebra; from the fifth inclusive. The centra are all trans-
versely oval.

Inches.

Height centrum and arch of axis r2-25

" centrum 7- 1

Transverse extent of axis 25*

" " centrum of do 11- 5

" " neural canal 5-75

" " of third cervical 23'

" " centrum do !!•

Length parapophysis sixth cervical 5-

Vertical diameter centrum (? 5th) dorsal 7*

Length centrum do 6*

Vertical diameter centrum second caudal, with perforate diapophyses... 10-5

Length centrum do 10'5

Height spine and arch middle lumbosacral 14-5

" from floor canal to top anterior zygapophysis do 6-

There is no neural spine on the second, third and fourth cervicals, and it is
rudimental and small on each of the remainder. Those of the dorsals and-
lumbars are not particularly elevated.

The humerus is very short and thick, and the hand remarkably small.
The scapula, as in other Sibbaldii, has considerable antero-posterior extent,
and well developed acromion and coracoid. The disk is divided into three
areas on the inside, by two slight ridges.

Dimensions.

Inches.

Antero-posterior width , 33-

Vertical " 21-

Length acromion 7*5

" coracoid 4-5

Diameter of glenoid cavity 8-

The muzzle is elongate, and with a narrow acumination. The supraorbital
plates of the frontal are

Each nasal is as wide as long medially; anteriorly concave above, the line
of junction of the two in one plane, forming a median ridge, which is prolonged
into a prominent median point. The otic bulla; are slightly compressed and
carinate below, and their surface is not markedly rugose. The malars are in
shape something like first ribs ; that is, with an enlarged head, with promi-
nences imitating capitulum and tubercle, a short narrowed shaft, and expanded
distal extremity. The distal third is occupied by an ovate ? articular surface,
thinning out the margin on one side. The shaft is thin and concave, both lon-
gitudinally and transversely, on one side.

The inner margin of the palatine bones is regularly continuous with the
short pteiygoids, which are very short, and do not approach near tiie otic bul-
la; ; Rudolphi represents the latter as prolonged to beyond the extremitj- of the
bulla. The posterior plate of the vomer in S. tectirostris extends much
further posteriorly than Rudolphi represents for the S. laticeps, and though
there is no doubt some variation in this respect in the same species, the differ-
ence is here very considerable. In S. 1 a t i c e p s it extends to a little behind
the anterior margiu of the bulla ; in S. t e c t i r o s t r i s to behind the poste-
rior margin, concealing much of the basioccipital.

The mandibular ramus is strongly curved, and very convex externally, less
so internally. The vascular foramina are very large externally, and very much
reduced in size on the inner face. The coronoid process is strongly elevated,

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 19

curved outwards, and acuminate. There is a distinct angular process below
the condyle.

Measurements.

Ft. In.

Length of cranium (axial) 10 6-

Greatest width of occipitals 3 7-

Width at supraorbital plate 4 4-

" of each maxillary at middle 975

" of supraorbitals above orbit 13-

" (least) of frontal region 13-5

" of nasals..... 43

" intermaxillaries at middle S-3

Length nasal 6-

" malar ,

" maxillary above 7 6*

" ramus mandibuli (in curve) 10

" " " to coronoid 19"

Depth " " at condyle. 8-5

" " " at coronoid 13*

" " " at middle 9-

Length otic bulla... 5-2

The baleen is short, and of a dark lead color, the inner and shorter margin
white for varying widths. The bristles are fine for the size of the animal, and
not nearly so coarse as in Megaptera osphyiaor Rhachianectes g 1 a u c u s.

In.

Length of longest plates with gum 15

Width at base , 10

No. plates in four inches 10

Whole number plates on one side, 126 preserved — add about 24

lost from extremity 150

Most of the ribs are yet in process of cleaning, and will be introduced into
the final monography and illustration of the North American Cetacea in course
of preparation. That which by its deeply bifurcate head indicates the generic
affinities of the species, is in form much like the first of S. I a t i c e p s. It
measures in

Ft. In.

Total length , 3

Distal width.., 7-25

The anterior head is the narrower, and its line of junction with the posterior
extends to near the middle of the length of the same.

The animal's color above was a uniform black ; the exterior face of the flip-
pers and stripes along the gular plica were also black. The belly was white.
Separated, according to my informant, from the black abruptly, forming a
" water line." The posterior face of the flippers white for the distal half. The
under side of the caudal fluke white also. These points I derived from Joshua
Carey, who stripped the carcass.

The dorsal fin was not seen by me, but was described by a number of parties,
whose statements agreed. It was of the usual form and elevation common
among finner whales, compressed, with a long base, and eighteen inches in
height^ the dorsal line behind it clean and smooth.

The species appears to be most nearly allied to the S. laticeps of Gray, of the
Arctic Seas. It differs distinctly in the following points : 1. The nasal bones
of the latter are longer, more parallelogrammic, and not strongly keeled and
mucronate, 2. The coronoid process of the mandible is less elevated. 3d.
The cervical vertebra;, including the axis, are furnished with well developed
spinous processes. 4. The mandibular ramus is more compressed. 5. The
vomer is more, and (6) the pterygoids are less prolonged posteriorly.

The difference from the S. tuberosus is found ia the form of the dorsal

1869.J

20 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

fin and character of the dorsal line ; it is marked, and of a kind which Lillje-
borg has regarded as generic in the case of S. gig as (S. b o r e al i s), but
which appears to me to be specific in this case. This species is distinctly
smaller than the S. t e c t i r o s t r i s, and presents a tuberculum atlantis articu-
lating with the epistrophseus below, which is not indicated by the latter in S.
tectirostris.

In many respects the species appear to be quite similar. The deposit of the
specimen of S. t u b e r o s u s in the Museum of the Academy having been de-
layed, the nearer comparison must be made when it arrives, which will be in a
short time, it is anticipated.

As compared with the S. g i g a s there is a marked difference in the form
of the nasal bones, if Dubar is to be relied on ; he represents them as even
more elongate than in the S. 1 a t i c e p s. The first rib of this animal is appa-
rently much wider. The annulate cervicals are less numerous. The dorsal
fin has a different form and position.

The type of the S. tectirostris came ashore duringthe winter of the present
year, on the coast near Sinepuxent Bay, on the Maryland peninsula. It had
been dead some time ; the stomach contained bflt little, and that a mixture of
finely divided scaly and stringy material, not readily recognizable. Bottles
dropped at numerous points off the coast of Maryland and Virginia by the
Coast Survey, were always carried ashore in the caurse of a few days or weeks,
to the south-west of the point where dropped. It is therefore probable that
this whale is a native of the ocean from which it drifted, and that it is one of
the " fin-backs " of the Western Atlantic.

The species described by Capt. Scammon, if of this genus, belongs to the
sub-group of the S. bo re alls, so far as the proportions and position of
the dorsal fin are concerned ; the cervical vertebrae are not yet known. Its
size would also distinguish it from the species of the other groups, as well as
from the S. s c h 1 e ge 1 i i Flower, from the Malaysian Seas.

SiBBALDIUS SDLFUREU3 CopC.

The Sulphur-Bottom of the North West Coast.

This immense whale is as yet too insufficiently known to be distinguished as
fully as desirable, but the marked peculiarity of coloratjion separates it from
the only species with which a comparison is necessary — the S. b o r e a 1 i s or
gigas of the North Atlantic. Capt. Scammon describes it to be a gray or
brown above, paler than in the Balaenoptera v e 1 i f e r a, and beneath, a sul-
phur yellow. Length from seventy to ninety feet.,. The colors of the S. b o-
realis are described as polished black above, milky white beneath, by
Dubar.

DENTICETE.

Three f;imilies of this order are known, which differ as follows, according to
Flower :

Costal cartilages not ossified. The hinder ribs losing their tubercle and
retaining their capitular articulation with the vertebrae. The greater number
of the cervical vertebrae ancylosed together. Pterygoid bones thick, produced
backwards, meeting in the middle line, and not involuted to form the outer
wall of the postpalatine air-sinus Physeteridae.

Costal cartilages not ossified. The tubercular and capitular articulations of
the ribs blending together posteriorly. Cervical vertebrae all free. Pterj-goid
bones thin, not conforming in their mode of arrangement with cither of the
other sections , Platanistidae.

Costal cartilages firmly ossified. Posterior ribs losing their capitular articu-
lation, and only uniting with the transverse processes of the vertebrae by the
tubercle. Anterior (2 — (5) cervical, in most, ancylosed together. Pterygoid
bones short, thin involute, to form, with a process with the palatine bone, the
outer wall of the postpalatine air-sinus Delijliinidne.

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PniLADELPHIA. 21

DELPUINIDJE.

This family is most numerously represented by species in the order. The
genera are also numerous. Those represented in the ocean bordering North
America are the following:

I. The phalanges numerous.

Pectoral fins, long narrow, on the lower part of the sides ; cervical vertebrae
consolidated; the teeth few, obtuse; dorsal tin Globiocephalus.

II. The phalanges not more than 4 — 5 in the same digit.

«. Two or more cervical vertebra consolidated.

Si. Teeth cylindric.

i. Beak of skull short, broad ; teeth few. large ; a dorsal fin.

Teeth early deciduous Grampus.

Teeth permanent, acute Orca,

(AT. Beak of skull elongate, exceeding brain case; teeth small, numerous.

Dorsal fin present; teeth long, more or less acute Delphinus.

Dorsal fin none; teeth as last Delphinapterus.

Dorsal fin ? teeth short, obtusely rounded Sagmatias.

/?/?. Teeth compressed, spade-shaped.

Dorsal fin present '. Phocfcna.

Dorsal fin none ." Neomeris.

a*. Cervical vetebra; all distinct.

/?. No dorsal fin.

Teeth little deciduous; incisors normal Beluga.

Teeth deciduous, except one incisor, which is prolonged into a tusk.

Monodon.

GLOBIOCEPHALUS Gray.

The "black-fish" of whalers are included in this genus; the species repre-
sent it in all seas as yet known. They differ less in remote regions than the
species of some other genera do. The species of the eastern coasts of North
America appears to be the same as that found on the coasts of Europe, the G.
m el as. The species of the Pacific coasts is fortunately so fully described by
Capt. Scammon, that it can be distinguished very readily from those hereto-
fore recorded.

Globiocephalus scammonii Cope.

For details of character of this abundant species I refer to Capt. Scaramon'a
description, and only contrast it here with the species to which it is allied. It
pertains to the section of the genus characterized by the absence of white
band or other mark on the abdomen, and is among these one of the most uni-
formly black species. Its more numerous teeth 'g**!!! distinguish it from G.
machrory nc hus of the South Seas. In Gray's Catalogue three species
remain for comparison, the G. c h i n e n s i s, which probably does not belong
to the genus ; the G. s i e b o 1 d i i, which, not being described, cannot be re-
garded as valid ; and G. in die us Blyth. The measurements of the latter
indicate a much wider pectoral fin, a longer and lower dorsal fin, and consid-
erably wider flukes. The measurements given by Blvth are as follows :

Ft. In.

Total length 14 2

Width flippers 2 6

Length dorsal 2 6

Depth " 11

Extent of flukes 3

It inhabits the Bay of Bengal.

The present species is named in honor of Capt. Scammon, who has furnished
us with a mass of information on the subject of the Marine Mammalia, and an
amount of novelty in connection with it seldom equalled in the history of
zoology.

1869.]

22 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

ORCA Gray.

The species of this genus are the wolves of the ocean, and occur in all. seas,
swimming in small companies, and living by violence and plunder.

Two species of the genus are described briefly by Capt. Scammon, which
differ from each other much as the two Atlantic species do, in respect to the
form of the dorsal fin. In one in each case the fin is exceedingly high and
erect, in the other broader, more oblique and less elevated.

OrCA RECTIPINNA Cope.

The dorsal fin extremely elevated — " six feet or more in the larger males,"
whose length "averages 25 feet" at right angles to the axis of the body, and
one-third the length from the end of the muzzle. Muzzle slightly acuminate.
Color black, more or less white below (" most in females") with white lines on
the sides from the eye sometimes to the hinder margin of the dorsal fin. ? No
large white spot behind eye. This species appears to be distributed from Cali-
fornia southwards.

Orca ater Cope.

The dorsal fin much shorter, wider, and more obliquely direltted. Black,
with a large white spot behind the eye. Muzzle ? not acuminal'e. ? A brown
dorsal crescent behind fin.

The North West coasts from Oregon to the Aleutian Islands.

The species of this genus from the Atlantic Ocean, whose colors are known,
reverse the arrangement existing in the Pacific species. According to Lillje-
borg, the 0. gladiator has the straight elevated fin, and the large white
spot on the side, while the 0. e s c h r i c h t i i, which has the less elevated and
oblique fin, does not present this peculiar mark. In both these animals the
belly is white, as is also the case with 0. eschrichtii. In 0. a t e r the
inferior surfaces appear to be entirely black, or nearly so.

It will no doubt be found to be the case with both these Orcas that their fe-
males will have less elevated dorsal fins than the males. This is known to be
the case with the Atlantic species, as described by Eschricht and Reinhardt.

DELPHINUS.

Many species of true dolphins have been described as inhabiting the Pacific
Ocean, by French and American travellers. Those enumerated by Capt. Scam-
mon are not sufficiently described to be identified. They are probably the fol-
lowing :

Delphinus obliquidens Gill.

Lagenoihynchis obliquidens Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1865, \%1. The
Bottle Nose Grampus, Scammon.

? Delphinus styx Gray.

Zoology, Erebus and Terror, Tab. Cope, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila, 186G, 201.
Common Porpoise, Scammon. ^

The cranium described by me as above accompanied one of the Phocaena
V o m e r i n a Gill, and was, like it, covered with a dark varnish, which is not
the case with any other specimen in the Museum of the Academy. Whether
it really came from the California coast or not is entirely uncertain. It is
equally uncertain whether it is the species mentioned by Capt. Scammon, iu
case this should prove to be the fact. It is a species of the size and propor-
tions of the typical dolphins or porpoises.

DELPHINAPTERUS Less.
Delphinapterus borealis Peale.
Cassin's Mammalogy, U. S. Expl. Ex. 30, Tab. vii, 2.

This species was taken in the North Pacific, nearer the coast of Oregon than
any other laud. It may possibly be the Right Whale Porpoise of Scammon.

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 23

PHOC^NA Cuvier.

PnOCiKNA VOMERINA Gill.

Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Pliila. 1865, 178.

This well defined species is the Bay Porpoise of the present essay.

I5ELUGA Lacep.

Capt. Scammon has not p;iven any definite characters by which the species
of thig genus occurring in Northern Pacific waters may be distinguished. I
take, however, the present opportunity to make public descriptions of two spe-
cies of this genus from the Arctic Seas. They have been already described by
me, but rather briefly. First is the Beluga rhinodon Cope, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci.
Phil., 18G.5, 278.

The cranium is peculiar for the breadth and shortness of the muzzle and its
sudden contraction ; the fewness of the teeth ; the large extent of the vomer
])roduced behind the palatines : and the long proportion of the maxillaries in
front of •tlije nares uncovered by the intermaxillaries.

The length of the muzzle to the notch equals the distance from the latter
point to- the crest at the inner extremity of the os parietale ; its breadth at the
same point is about three-fourths the length and less than the width of the
cranium at the orbits. The prenarial exposed portion of the maxillaries is
parallelogrammic, the length about two and a half times the width, and ex-
tends very nearly to a line connecting the fundus of the maxillary notches.
The maxillaries present ho other carina than a short one on each side the
o. 0. nasalia.

Tl>e premaxillaries terminate opposite the posterior extremitj- of the vomer,
and are deeply grooved for the outlines of the " triangle," which terminates
with the basal third of the muzzle. They are one-third wider than the max-
illaries (from a vertical view) at the middle of the muzzle, where the contrac-
tion is strongest, and form with them an arch of neaily 180° width at the in-
ternal fpiamen three-fifths width from outer margin to notch of maxillary.

The median portion of the palatines is narrowed, and with an inner angle
just prevent the contact of the maxillaries and vomer. The outer wing is also
narrow, and impressed externally with a broad groove ; it extends as far as
opposite" the squamosal process. The latter bone is not in contact with the
postorbital process, and presents a large internal lamina, which overlaps
without touching the alisphenoid. Posterior upper vomer plate with the deep
corner emarginations seen in Phocaena.

Posterior^'emporal crest not developed; exoccipitals flat, slightly concave
externalljiiytj. Supraoccipital with two large fontanelles and above the foramen
two impressions for insertion of muscles. Line to the weak spine straight,
Crest not diiveloped ; frontal band broad, flat ; knob above nasals slight.

In. Lin.

Length frolo end of muzzle to concavity of occ. condyle 16 0-8

" " " occipital spine 14 8-8

» If" " nares 9 10

'^-' " " maxillary notch 7 7-5

', of temporal fossa 5 1

" " of orbit 1 11-4

"•Vof ramus mandibuli 12

" ^«f gonys 1 9-5

Breadth at distal 2-5ths of muzzle 2 5

" at notch 5 6

" at orbits 8 11-4

" at frontal margins 8 68

*• of foramen magnum 2 2-5

V* of paroccipital alifi 7 2-8

^> " of external nares 2 2-2

Teeth |

1869.]

24

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

Fig. 1.

Behind the alveoli of the 0. m a x i 1 1 a r e is an indication of a groove, as
though a full series of teeth had existed in early life, and been shed, and the
alveoli obliterated by deposit of bone. This appearance is, however, deceptive,
as the teeth in these animals are not develojjcd from deep seated capsules, but
more su[)erficial]y ; perhaps a few very weak teeth were supported by the in-
leiument posteriorly. In B. d e c 1 i v i s, where the posterior teeth are mainly
so belli in position, the alveoli are very distinct.

In the teetli of the B. rhino don certain specific characters may be
noticed ; thoupjh the animal is much smaller than the B. d e c 1 i v i s, the teeth
are quite as laige and as much worn. The median or vertical mandibulars, in-
stead of a conic or curved crown, terminate in a broad, rounded, slightly ele-
vated summit ; the form of these teeth is clavate. A pair of the oblique man-
dibulars have a similar form.

In. Lin.

Cervical vertebrae 7 4|

Dorsal vertebr;^ 10 17

Lumbar (imperforate) 12 30|

Caudal (perforate by lateral foramen) 6 Ill-
Caudal from first wanting neural spine 11 14.|

With cranium 16

Total 7 ft. 102 in-

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 25

Tlie atlas is characterized by the nearly equal width of the portion of the
neural canal above and below the constriction, the narrowness of the wing
outside the articulating surfaces, and the elongation of the latter. The infe-
rior apophysial articular surface is broad, rounded, and separated by a high
ridge from the anterior face of the inferior limb. The inferior lateral pro-
cess is opposite the middle of the articulating surface ; it is short, obtuse ; the
superior is small, acute.
Width of canal above constriction 2 2-6

" " below " 2 2-6

" wing from posterior articular surface 6

Vertical diameter of posterior articular surface 2 3

The body of the axis is short, and the lateral alas longer and thinner than in
the a ng u s t ata, though not extending so far beyound the articular facets.
The inferior articular surface is longer than broad and occupies two-thirds the
surface of the body. The neural spine is short, flat, and terminates obtusely,
over the penultimate cervical. The zygapophysial articulation marks three-
fifths the distance between the external alar angle and the tip of the neural
spine.

In. Lin.

Total transverse diameter 6 10-2

" of centrum 2 4.

Heighth of neural canal 1 8-2

Length of neural spine 2 1-2-

Of the remaining cervical vertebrie, the third is distinct, and has very short
lateral processes, the superior longer, originating with the neurapophysis from
a very broad base. Its neural arch is completed above bya loose suture. The
superior lateral process diminishes and is reduced to notliing on the filth, ap-
pears higher up on the sixth, and commencing at the zygapophysis on the
seventh is very elongate and much recurved, its extremity being opposite the
articulation of the fourth or fifth. The inferior lateral process increases to the
fifth, where they are nearly cylindrical, three-quarters inch long by a half broad,
and directed downwards at an angle of 45°, These processes rapidly diminish
and are reduced to nothing on the seventh vertebra.

Dimensions of seventh cervical vertebra :

In. Lin.

Length of body 7-4

Transverse diameter of same 2 62

" " of neural canal 2 7 8

" extent of diapophysis from canal I 10-8

Height of neural canal 1 7-4

The dorsal, as well as the other vertebrae, are distinguishable from those of
the other species by their great breadth as compared with their length. The
costal articular surfaces of the centra are not distinct.

Dimensions of the third dorsal :

In.

Length of body 1|

Anterior vertical diameter 1 4-8

Anterior height of canal 2 1-8

Breadth canal at diapophysis 2 6-8

In.

Span of neural arch 3^

Width " "

Heighth neural spine (from be-
hind).

The lumbar vertebrae possess longer diapophyses than those of the an g u s-
t a t a and c o n c r e t a, which are also less dilated distally on the anterior
margin. That of the first is nearly truncate.

Hs dimensions are :

In.

Length body 2 3-16

Anterior transverse diameter. 2^

Height canal (anteriorly) 1 15-16

Width at diapophyses 1|

Epiphysis to anler. extremity

of diapophysis 2 15-16

1869.]

In.
Same to posterior extremity.. 3j
Floor of canal to zygapopl\y-

sis 2 1-16

Zygap. to apex of neural

spine 2 7-16

26 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

The fifth or typical lumbar offers the following proportions:

In.

Length of body 2 7-16

Anterior breadth 2|

Length of diapophysis 4^

In.

Breadth diapophysis distally 1 13-16

Heiglit of canal If

Zygapophysis to apex neural

spine 2f

The series of candals diminishes gradually in size to the last.
The dimensions of the fourth (perforated) are :

In.

Length body 1 3-16

Transverse anterior diameter 2f

Neural arch and spine If

The neural canal is laterally compressed, or oval. The articulating ridges
of the epiphyses and corresponding vertebral bodies are fewer, coarser, and
more elevated in this species than in the augustata. In the latter they
are more delicate, and have a less number of complete radii.

There are ten pairs of ribs as in the c a t o d o n, one pair less than in the
cone ret a. The first is destitute of the anteriorly curved angular process
of the c a t o d o n, but the tubercle is on an elevated base. The sixth, seventh
and eighth ribs are flat on the posterior face ; the last three are without neck
and head, and this portion of the seventh is much less than the same of the
sixth ; in the seventh also the angle is furthest from the tubercle. The ante-
terior ribs are not so dilated at the extremities as in the a u g.u status.

In. Lin.

First rib ; head to angle 3 5

" " angle to extremity 5 1

Seventh rib; length 17 10

" " " 12 6

The stylohyal of the specimen of this species is of relatively the same size as
tliat of the an gn s tat a, but is flatter, less narrowed at its anterior extremitj',
not swollen on its posterior border, nor constricted at its posterior extremity.
Its hinder border is somewhat rugose. The body and posterior hyoid cori^cra.
are much like those of the angustata and d e c 1 i v i s and c o o s s i f i ca-.

In. ^, Lin.

Length of body 2 1

" " stylohyal 4 1

Expanse of posterior cornua 6 6*

The sternal pieces are separate. The anterior has been found like that ip
the angustata, with equally strong lateral vertical processes. The ha;ma-
pophyses are relatively shorter than in concreta; the fourth wants the pro-
duced thin anterior margin of the third, and is about the same length as tlje
fifth. Sixth, slender, flattened.

In. Lin

Length of first haemapophysis 4 8
Width " " (medially) 1 2

In. Lin.

Length fifth 6 3

'' sixth 6 4

" anteriorsternal segment 4
Breadth " " " 3 11

The scapula is not different from that of the angustata. The brachial
and antebrachial elements are in this species also identical with those of .the
angustata; in the specimen from Upernavik the epiphysis of the humerus
has not coalesced, while it is eomi)letely united in that of the latter species.
In both the exterior (bicipital) process is more prominent and occupies a less
portion of the circumference than in the concreta. The humerus is also
much constricted in both except on the exterior aspect.

In. Lin.

Length of humerus 3 lU-9

Diameter at condyle , 1 11

" at distal articular surface 1 10-9

Length of radius 3 3-5

Breadth " 1 8

Habitat, Baflin's Bay.

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 27

A skeleton of this species in the Museum of the Academy of Natural Sciences
was brought by Dr. Isaac I. Hayes, from Upernavik, Greenland, in lat. 74°.

I was at first disposed to regard this as a young individual of one of the
species under observation, perhaps of B. a n g u s t a t a or d e c 1 i v i s. A very
brief study was sufficient, however, to reveal its manifold differences from
these. In cranial features it resembles most the B. d e c 1 i v i s, but I am sat-
isfied that no such difference in the form of the muzzle of the cranium as
obtains here can exist between young and adult of the same species.

Beluga declivis Cope, Proc. Acad., Phila., 18G5, 278.

This species resembles the a n g u s t a t a in the general proportions of the
cranium ; the muzzle is relatively shorter in the specimen, and its margins
decurved toward the end ; it therefore resembles also the catodon, which has
much less marked maxillary notches, a different prenarial space and shorter,
heavier mandible. The inferior view presents some analogy with that of the
B. r h i n d n, in the largely developed vomerine tablet ; but the palatines
are even further separated by an interval of three-quarters of an inch. The
horizontal palatal surface of these bones mark a narrow incurved longitudi-
nal process only, and they appear in the inferior half of the anterior wall of
the nasal meatus, as narrow strips lying next to the vomer. The pterygoids
are nearly exactly parallelogrammic, their exterior angles alone in contact
on the horizontal plane. The exposure of the premaxillaries extends, as in the
other species, to beyond opposite the fifth maxillary tooth. Of the superior por-
tion of the palatines the anterior portion extends to opposite the notch ; the
vertical portion of the posterior ala is broader than the horizontal. The mid-
dle of the palate is prominent without lateral angulation. The proportions
are explained by the following measurements.

In. Lin.

Length from end of muzzle to convexity of condyle 22

"•j» " " " occipital crest 21 5

'/ " " " nares 15 3

« .. " " " maxillary notch 10 7

" " •" foramen magnum to occipital crest 4 5

"•" . of temporal fossa 7

" '" orbit 2 8

" , " ramus mandibuli 16 7

<^ " gonys 2 9

Breadth at distal two-fifths muzzle... 3 6

'■ " notch of maxillary 7 7

" " orbits 11 6

" " frontal margins

" of foramen magnum 2

" " external nares 2 9

" ■ between apices of paroccipital crests 9

Teeth i^o

The sella turcica is little marked, and the suture between the sphenoid and
presphenoid distinct, as indicated in the figure in Huxley's Elem. Compar.
Anat. 277. The teeth are relatively much smaller than in the concreta, and
the posterior but loosely attached to the alveohe, being principally held in posi-
tion by the palatal integument. The anterior above are considerably worn
on their inner faces.

*The tympanic and periotic elements are much like those of the rhinodon,
and though the latter is known from a much smaller animal, its tympanic bone
is about the size of that of the former. The only noticeable difference is the
greater elevation of the prootic.

The corresponding portions of the Beluga an gu s tat a are larger and consider-
ably heavier, though the cranium is a little less in all dimensions than that
of the d e c 1 i v is. The opisthotic process is more prolonged than in the

1869.]

28 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Others, and the region around the foramen for the seventh pair is very rugose
and gives rise to a process behind the formen. The prootic is acuminate ante-
riorly, and ends in an acute process. The inner lip of the t^-mpanic is much
elevated at its anterior extremity, causing the protile of this extreme of the
bulla to be truncate instead of accuminate ; the Rustachian sinus is thus
shorter and broader. Of the longitudinal lobes of the inferior surface of the
bulla, the interior is weaker and the external more prominent and narrower
than in the de cli v is. The anterior end of the inferior view is broader,
more oblique, and more truncate than in the other species.

angustata. declivis. rhinodon. Steno frontatus.*

Length of tympanic bulla 1 in. 111. 1 10 1 9-^ 1 7-5

" " other elements 2 3-5 1 11-5 1 10 1 4-5

Total depth 2 1 8 1 7'5 1 3

General 3Ieasurements.

No. In. Lin.

Cervical vertebrje 7 7 3

Dorsal " 11 28 7

Lumbar (to 1st chevron bone) 10 40

Caudal (imperforate) 1 3 7

Caudal (perforate) 18 31 9

Caudal (from first wanting neural spine) (11)

With cranium 22

Total 11 ft. 1 in. 2 1. 133 2

The cervical vertebrae are in general similar to those of B. angustata;
they present the same acute infero-posterior process of the atlas, short trun-
cate inferior lateral processes and longer but weak superior lateral. As in
it the last is longest and recurved to opposite the sixth. There is nowhere a
vertebral foramen. They differ from those of the a n g u s t a t a in the heavier
proportions of the atlas and axis, and the high compressed carinate neural
spine of the latter. The axis is also peculiar in that the inferior (circular)
surface of articulation with the atlas process occupies a median position of
the inferior face, and is separated by a deep groove from an anterior trans-
verse articular surface, which belongs to an apparently decurved odontoid
process. The latter fits a corresponding and separate surface just behind the
margin of the spinal canal of the atlas.

Width of spinal canal above 2 8.5

" " " below 1 8

Transverse diameter of atlas 7 10-5

Vertical " " 4 1

Transverse diameter of axis 7 0-8

" " of centrum of do 2 105

Height of neural canal 1 8

Length of neural spine (superiorly) 3 5 7

The neural canal is rather depressed, and angulate above ; the arches of the
fourth and seventh are incompletely united above, and the latter has a trace
only of neural spine. Its dimensions are

Length of body 11

Transverse diameter of same 2 6-4

" " " neural canal 2 9-5

" extent of diapophysis from canal 1 11

Heighth of neural canal 2 2

The dorsal vertebrae are not so short as in the B. rh i n o d o n, and the neural
spines are low ; seven of them furnish an entire articular surface near their
posterior border for the ribs, commencing with the second pair.

The lumbars are heavy, and have long diapophyses which are dilated dis-

* From specimens described in Proc. Acad., Phila., 18G5, p. 204.

[April,

Same to posterior extremity.... 5 10
Floor canal to zygapophysis.... 2 9
Zygai)opliysis to apex of neu-
ral spiue 4 1

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 29

tally, anteriorly, as in angustata and cone r eta. The diapophysis of
the first is obliquely truncate, and furnishes a ligamentous attachment to the
angle of the last rib.
Its dimensions are :

In. Lin. i In. Lin.

Length body 3 6

Anterior transverse diameter... 2 10

Height of canal 2 1

Width do. at diapophyses.. 1 10
Epiphysis to anter. extrem. of do 4 7

Of the caudals, the last five are transverse.

The dimensions of the fourth perforated are as foUovrs :

In. Lin.

Length of centrum 2 9

Transverse anterior diameter 3 4

Neural arch and spine 1 10

Hcemal arch and (very low) spine (from centrum) 1 7

" " length 1 10

Diapophysis projection 8

The neural canal is compressed.

The radiating ridges of the epiphysial articulations on all the vertebrae are
very coarse and much broken up into mammillae.

The coossified body and lesser cornua of the os hyoides do not resemble those
of the angustata as much as the latter do those of the r h i n o d o n. The
body is not so long as its greatest breadth, and the surface articulating veith
the cornua the shortest of all. Viewed from below, the posterior area is one-
half the anterior (equal in angustata) has a heavy double posterior margin,
and is marked by a median process. The cornua are of nearly equal width
throughout, and not expanded on the margins. Their proximal extremities
would have a trigonal section, owing to their inferior thickened angle.

In. Lin.

Length body 3 1

Breadth " 3 7

Length of cornu 3 7

Expanse of cornua 8 9

There are eleven ribs, of which the three posterior have no head, and the first
articulates by head with the seventh cervical vertebrae. The first, like that of
B. angustata, has the tubercle on a backward curved process. The superior
half of the shank of this rib is thin and expanded on its outer margin, while
on the lower half it is obliquely flattened. The ribs from the second to the
fifth are considerably dilated distally ; the posterior aspects of sixth, seventh
and eighth are rounded.

In. Lia.

First rib ; head to base of angular process 1 10

" length of " " 8

" base of process to dist. extremity 7 10

Seventh rib; length 24 5

Last " " IG 10

Seven pairs of ribs are attached to bony haemapophyses, of which five pairs
articulate immediately with the sternum. The first is smooth, flat, and di-
lated distally; the second narrower and thickened distally ; the third is dilated
and sharp edged on the middle of the anterior border. The penultimate has a
slight curvature, and the last is cylindrical and very slender. The sternum is
yet distinguished into three principal pieces, the last narrowest and longitu-
dinally divided. The articular cavities are at the sutures except the two an-
terior, which are close together at the front of the anterior piece. The latter
has a cordate anterior outline, no cornua, and a convex posterior suture.

1869.]

80

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

Dimensions :

Length of first haemapophysis

fifth "

last "

anterior sternal segment
median " "

posterior " "

Breadth of anterior " "

Fig, 3.

[April ,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 31

One of the chief peculiarities of this species, and that from which it derives
Its -name, is seen in the scapula. On placing the glenoid cavity in the same plane
with that of the scapula of the angustata, the acromion is observed to be
in the general plane of the scapula, and not deflected inward, and to be shorter
and much decurved. The coracoid is also decurved so as to be nearly parallel
with the acromion; the extremities of the two are connected by a strong liga-
ment. This direction of the coracoid is the opposite of what is seen in most
other Delphinidas, and all others of this genus, where it is recurved and acumi-
nate.

The superior sinus, while more deeply incised than that of the augustata,
is much more open, having divergent, instead of parallel outlines.

In. Lin,

Greatest length of scapula... 12 10

■Glenoid cavity to anterior angle 7 9

End of coracoid " " 5

The deltoid process of the humerus is as wide as the condyle. Olecranon
distinct. There are two large carpals opposite the inferior digits, and three
smaller of the outer row, opposite the second, fourth and fifth respectively.
The three inferior digits are more closely approximated in the fluke than the
two superior. Phalanges (counting from above), 3 — 4 — 5 — 4 — 3 ; fourth digit
longer than second.

In. Lin.
Length humerus, .>,. 5 1

" ulna and radius 4 2

" carpus and third digit 7 7

Breadth at carpus 4 7

The only specimen of this species at my disposal is not fully adult, as the
vertebral and humeral epiphyses are not yet anchylosed. It was brought by
Dr. Elisha K. Kane, on his return from the arctic regions, from what precise
locality is not stated. He presented it to the Museum of Comparative Zoology,
Cambridge, Mass., whence it was kindly lent me by Dr. Alexander Agassiz, to
whom my acknowledgements are due.

PHYSETERID^E.
HYPERAODON Lacep.

No species ef this genus from the Pacific Coasts is mentioned by Scammon,
but the present is embraced as an opportunity of alluding to the species of the
Eastern coasts of North America.

In the Proceedings of the Academy 1865, p. 280, I characterized briefly a
whale of this genus under the name ofH. semijunctus, which is repre-
sented by a specimen in the Museum of the College of Charleston, So. Ca.
The characters furnished are meager, and it was anticipated that opportunity
would soon have occurred to amplify them. This has been, however, disap-
pointed, but is still looked forward to.

Two years ago two individuals of this genus entered the harbor of Newport,
R. I., and after a lively chase one of them was captured. It measured twenty-
seven feet in length. Its bones were preserved, and some of them, including the
cranium, have been sent to the Academy of Natural Sciences, through the at-
tention of its member, Saml. Powell, of Newport. He has also sent numer-
ous photographs of its carcass, taken just after its capture, from various
points.

These render it evident that the species is quite distinct from that described by
European authors as H. rostratus (or H. bidens). Its most striking feature
Is the relatively longer and more slender beak, and less elevated and prominent
front. This is obvious on comparison with the figures of Hunter, of Deslong-
•champs (Mem. Soc. Normandie) of Gray, (Zool. Erebus and Terror) and of F.
Guvier (Cetacea) and constitutes a material distinction. Thus, in the New-
port specimen, it is one-twelfth of the length, or 2\ feet; equal three-fourths
ihe distance between the eye and the spout hole. In a Cape Cod specimen

1869.]

32 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

it measures twenty-two inches in a lengtli of twenty-four feet. The promi-
nent swollen front is in the Newport whale, considerably compressed, and the
eye is placed in a strong longitudinal prominence on each side of the head.

The dorsal fin, as in Deslongchamp's specimen, is small, and posterior. The
caudal fluke is not emarginate. The color is dark, deeper above than below.
It remains a question whether this is the H. semijunctua. The principal
character on which that species rests is the non-coossification of the posterior
four cervical vertebrae, a very remarkable character, and one which leads to
the question of its pertinence to the genus. The cervical vertebrae of the
Newport specimen are entirely cocissified. The same character is furnished by
a second specimen.

This is the skeleton preserved in the Museum Compar. Zoology at Cam-
bridge, Afass , of an individual cast ashore during the winter of the present
year, at Dennis, near Cape Cod, Massachusetts. It was stripped of its blubber
by Perez Hall, of that place, who kindly sent me a sketch of it. He stated its
length to be twenty-four feet, of which the muzzle measured twenty-two
inches : the expanse of the flukes was six feet. The stomach was filled with
the beaks of cuttle fish. On inquiry of J. A. Allen, of Cambridge, well known
as a naturalist there, I learn that the cervical vertebrte of the animal are solid-
ly coossified, as in the H. rostra t us. It is therefore distinct from the H.
s e m i j u n c t u s. The photographs are figured for the further illustration of
the species. The characters derived from the portions of the skeleton sent
by Sanil. Powell are as follows :

PHYSETER Linn.

Physeter macrocephalus Linn.

The sperm whale.

This species is one of the few that appear to be distributed over all oceans.
Flower does not find those from Australian to differ specifically from those
from British seas, and I find no peculiarities by which to distinguish a speci-
men from our own coast from the latter. This is known from a cranium
which was found on the coast of New Jersey and is in the Mus. Compar. Zool-
ogy, Cambridge.

Part II.

NATURAL HISTORY

Of the Cetaceans of the seas off the N'orth-West Coast of America, with an account
of the Elephant Seal appended.

PREPACK.

Being on the coast of California in 1852, when the ^'^ gold fever" raged, the
force of circumstances compelled me to take command of a brig bound on a
'• sealing, sea-elephant and whaling voyage," or abandon sea life — at least
temporarily.

Finding the object of pursuit in such vast numbers, and observing their
natural habits in connection with their capture, it may not be surprising that
it led to the study of their history. The few works treating the subject within
reach were sufficient to prove that correct knowledge of the different species
of whales was very meager, hence it appeared that, by industrious observation,
one might rea.sonably expect to add something to the little known of their
habits.

It IS to be regretted that among the number of intelligent and observing
American whaling masters, none have hitherto attempted to contribute any
thing of moment to the history of whales ; nevertheless it has in no wise de-
terred me from putting my observations on paper and, if eventually this
humble treatise shall add to what is already known about Cetacea, it will be
regarded as an ample reward.

The drawings of the different species where a scale is attached may be re-

[ April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 83

garded as correct in proportions, careful measurements having been taken.
All others are the best representations of proportions, and peculiar marks that
could be drawn from data obtained.

I have endeavored to confine myself to the simplest and plainest language
in description, but in so doing have used whaling terms freely, the definition
of which will be fouud as indicated by reference marks.

Fam. BALJENIDJE,
I. BOWHEAD WHALE.

BalyKna mysticetus Linn.

This whale has a geographical distribution east and west, extending from
Nova Zembla to the coast of Eastern Siberia. It is rarely seen further south
in Behriug Sea than the 55th parallel, and in the Okhotsk its southern range
is about the latitude of 54°.

The northern limit of the Bowhead remains undefined.

In tracing its history we can revert back to the Dutch and Russian fishery
about Spitzbergen anterior to 1615,* and as j'ears passed on it was pursued
westward on the Atlantic side to the icy barriers in Davis Strait, and the adja-
cent waters uniting with the Frozen Ocean.

Right whales were pursued for several years on the North West coast, on
the coast of Kamschatka, about the Kurile Islands, and in the Japan Sea, be-
fore Bowheads were known to exist in that part of the Arctic Ocean adjoining
Behring Strait, or in the Okhotsk Sea.

In the year 1848 Capt. Ress, in the American bark " Superior," was the first
whaling master to work his vessel through Behring Strait into the Arctic
Ocean, and then found whales innumerable, some of which yielded 200 barrels
of oil.

The habits of the Bowhead are much like those of the Humpback, being ir-
regular in its movements, in its respirations, and in the periods of time either
above or below the surface of the water. When going gently along, or lying
quietly, it shows two portions of the body: the spoutholes, and a part of the
back, on account of the high conical shape of the former, and the swell of the
latter, which is about midway between the spoutholes and flukes.

The Bowhead of the Arctic may be classed as follows: 1st. The largest
whales, of a brown color, average yield of oil 200 barrels. 2d class, smaller,
color black, yield of oil 100 barrels. 3d class, the smallest, color black, yield
of oil 75 barrels. f This last named class are generally found amongst the
broken ice the first of the season, and they have been known to break through
when it was three inches in thickness, that had formed over previously upon
water between the floes. They do this by coming up under and striking it
with the arched portion of their heads. Thence they have been sometimes
called "ice-breakers." In point of color, all are found with more or less
white on the under side, especially about the throat and fins. The Arctic
Bowheads may average from 40 to 65 feet in length.

I am indebted to Capt. J. F. Poole, of the whaling bark " N. S. Perkins," for
the following measurements and memoranda of one taken in the Arctic, Au-
gust, 1867 :

Sick female, color black on back and sides, throat white, also occasional
white spots on under side of body. Yield of oil, 80 barrels. (The whale was
judged large enough ordinarily to have j'ielded 150 barrels.

Ft. In.
Length of animal 47 o

* Subsequent datum enables me to date back to 1008.

t We do not mean to convey the idea of sjMcies when mentioning classes, as all observ-
ers of our acquaintance agree that the difference in size and shade of color arises from
difference in age.

1869.J 3

34 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Ft. In.

Length of pectorals 8

Breadth " 4

Distance from nib end to spoutholes 16

Length of spoutholes 1

Distance from corner of mouth to nib end IG

Breadth of flukes 19

Thickness of blubber 16

Average thickness of blubber 11

Thickness of black skin on back 1

Length of genital slit 1 10

Dist. from " " to arms 4

" " " " to flukes ■ 9

Length of longest bone or baleen 10 6

" of fringe or hair on bone 2*

Breadth of widest bone ,.....^. 13

Bone is embedded in the gum of the jaw ten inches.

Weight of largest slab of bone, seven pounds.

Number of layers of bone on each side of jaw, 330.f

Bone extends back of spoutholes in throat, three feet ; falls short of nib end
one foot.

Number of teats, two. -

The tongue is very fat, yielding one-tenth as much oil as the whole of the
" body blubber."

All Bowheads found on this cruising ground are quite free from parasitic
crustaceans, as well as barnacles.

Whalers bound to the Arctic are generally at the "edge of the ice," which
is met with, near lat. 60°, about the 1st of May. They then work their way
north svard as fast as the ice will permit, keeping as near shore as practicable
in order to be on the best " whale-ground," and also to avoid the ice. Many
whales were formerly taken off Karaginski Island, lat. 59°, on the coast of
Kamsc.hatka.

Behring Strait is sufficiently clear of ice from the 1st to the 20th of July for
ships to navigate with comparative safety. A large fleet collect, and grope
their way through ice and fog into the Arctic (as termed), and frequently reach
the high latitude of 72° N. Occasionally an open season occurs, when they
hazard their ships around Point Barrow. Capt. Roys entered the ocean the
middle of July, and left the 28th of August, but at the present time ships re-
main till October.

The principal herding places of the Bowheads in the Okhotsk are at the extremi-
ties of this great sheet of water, the most northern being the North-East Gulf
(Gulf of Ghijghi), the most southern, Tchantar Bay. The whales do not make
their appearance in North-East Gulf so soon as in the bay. Whalers endeavor
as soon as possible to get to the head of Tchantar Bay, where they are sure to
find the objects of pursuit in the intermediate water between the ic»and shore,
long before the main body of the congealed mass is broken upt'and before
the shi])S can get between the ice and the shore, even at high .titjf, the boats
being sent forward weeks previous to the ships. Soon after tlje ship's arrival
the whales avoid their pursuers by going under the main body of ice
situated in the middle of the bay, finding breathing holes among the conglom-
erate floe. The boats cruise about the edge of this barrier watching for them
to emerge from their cover, which occasionally they do, and are given chase
to instantly. Frequently, in sailing along this field of ice, you hear distinctly
the sound of whales blowing among it, when no water is visible at the point
from whence the sound comes. The first of the season, before the ice breaks

* Two feet may be regarded as nearly twice the usual length.

f ,'no may be a fair average, and 370 is the highest number we have counted.

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 35

up and disappears, when there are "no whales about," the question is fre-
quently asked, " where are the whales ?" and as often answered, " they are iu
the ice," and " when do you think they will come out ?" " when the ice leaves,"
It has been established beyond question that this species pass from the At-
lantic to the Pacific, or rather, if we may be allowed the expression, from the
Atlantic Arctic to the Pacific Arctic, by the north ; and, too, it is equally cer-
tain that numerous air holes always exist iu the ice that covers the arctic
waters, even in the coldest latitudes. Tiiese fissures are caused by the rise
and fall of the tides, aud storms acting upon the water hundreds of miles dis-
tant has its influence in rending asunder the icy fetters of those frozen seas.
It appears to us not improbable that the Bowhead or Polar Whale has a feed-
ing and breeding ground in an open polar sea. And as they have never been
seen during the winter months in any other quarter of the globe except as
before mentioned, it would appear that they must either remain among the
rough water, and broken ice at the southern edge of the winter barrier, or
migrate to some remote sea unknown to man. Hence may not the clear water
that Kane saw after passing the coldest latitudes as he pressed northward, be
the winter home of vast numbers of these gigantic animals ?

,, Okhotsk Sea Bowheads.

The pi'eceding remarks have been confined chiefly to the Bowheads of the
Arctic iu the vicinity of Behring Strait, north and south.

The Okhotsk Sea at one time equalled, if not surpassed, the Arctic as a pro-
ductive whaling ground. Our memorandum does not state with certainty
what year Bowheads were first taken in tlie Okhotsk. It however was not ear-
lier than 1847, nor later than 1849.*

They were found to be easy of capture, and yielded a large amount of oil and
bone. Ou making further exploratious the whales appeared in great numbers,
and, from the peculiar shape of the head, the spoutholes terminating in a sort
of cone, they we're at that time called '• steeple-tops."

But few years elapsed before a large fleet were pursuing the auimals through-
out the whole extent of this vast inland water.

Tchantar Bay, Taousk and Penjinsk Gulfs soon became noted whaling-
grounds, as well as several other points about the coasts. The whales of this
sea, as far as known, are the same species as those of the Arctic, although in
the bays are found, in addition, a very small whale called the Poggy, which
yields but little oil (20 to 25 barrels). f Many whalemen are of the opinion

* Capt. J. H. Swift, who was cruising iu Behring's Sea about the year 1847, Is quite posi-
tive that tlie French ship "Asia" was the first to take Bowheads in the Okhotsk (in 1847).
Capt. Roys, of Arctic notoriety (spoken of in this paper), in a recent interview seemed
equally certain that the -'Asia" was not the first to take Bowheads in the sea. He thinks
none were taken till 1848 or 1840, and that the American ship " Huntsville," Capt. Freeman
Smith, was about the first, if not i\\B first, to take Bowheads in that region.

In justice to both of these experienced and very intelligent whaling masters, it is de-
sired to makgjftentioti that I am under much obligation to them for valuable data in rela-
tion to several species of eetaeea, more especially as they are regarded as very correct and
close observers of the habits ofwhaits.

t We are convinced that there are two species of Bowheads, which are found on the
same ground. The difference from the animal above described is a bun-ch or sort of hump
which rises t*orn the top of the small, which is situated about six feet forward of the
flukes, aud extending along the top of the back or small two to three feet, aud in some in-
dividuals rises in"the highest place about six inches. The accompanying sketch will bet-
ter represent the difference in shape, perhaps, than a written description. Capt. Roys says
he has frequently taken them in the Arctic as well as in the Okhotsk. They have been
frequently taken in the North East Gulf (^Okhotsk sea). Our personal observation was
only on a dead one in Tchantar Bay (1SIJ2), and upon that individital the protuberance was
so slight that it would not have been noticed unless our particular attention had been
called to it. Capt. Randolf. of the American whaleship "South Boston" (18132), informed
me at the the time that nearly all the whales he had taken that sea, oain the N. E. Gulf
were of that description, and yielded a very large amount of bone in proportion to yield
of oil.

Capt. Roys also mentioned that one season he took numbers of them, and to distinguish
them from others they were then called " Bunch Backs." Several whaling masters who

1869.]

36 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP

that these are a diiferent species. There is little doubt, however, of their be-
ing young whales of the same species, as their blubber is close and fine, pro-
ducing but little oil in proportion to size of body, as is the case with all calves
or young whales of every description.*

BowHEAD Whaling.

In the Arctic and about Behring Sea the whalmg is done from the ship, as it is
termed, i. «., the vessels cruise and the look-out is kept aloft as usual, and
when whales are seen, the boats are lowered and the pursuit is carried on in
sight from the ship, unless obscured by fog. In the Okhotsk much of the whal-
ing is about the bays, particularly Tchantar Bay, and contiguous waters. The
nature of the enterprise is such, in these localities, that the modus operandi ia
quite different.

Vessels bound to Tchantar Bay endeavor to approach the land of Aian if the
ice will permit, which is generally sufficiently broken and scattered by the 20th
of June; then, working along between the ice and the Siberian coast to the
southward as far as practicable with the ships, they dispatch boats to follow
along the shore and if possible to reach the head of Tchantar Bay, where
whales in former years were expected to be found in large numbers. These
boat expeditions were attended with excessive labor, much exposure, as well
as risk to the crews. Frequent instances have been known of boats leaving
the ships off Aian, then threading their way along the coast, between the
masses of ice, or between the ice and shore, as the ebb or flood tides would
permit, till they reached the head of Tchantar Baj'. As soon as arrived there,
finding whales plenty they would immediately commence whaling, and by the
time the ships arrived, in several instances, whales enough had been taken to
yield 1000 barrels of oil. The elapsed time from leaving the ship till again
joining the vessel in the bay would vary from one to three weeks. All this
time the boats' crews lived in or around their boats, beng afloat when making
the passage or when engaged in whaling ; and when driven to the shore by the
ice or by stormy weather, or resorting thither to cook their food or sleep, the
boats are hauled up and turned partially over for shelter, and tents are pitched
with the sails. Fallen trees or drift wood furnish abundance of fuel, and by a
rousing fire all sleep soundly when opportunity offers; but if whales are in
abundance, the less sleep for the whalemen, in those high latitudes, where day-
light lasts nearly the twenty-four hours of each day during the summer.

Tchantar Bay Whaling.

Arrived on the ground, whales being plenty, all surplus provisions and out-
fits are quickly landed, and the chase begins. Frequent spouts in the air tell
that the animals are all around. One of the number breaks the smooth surface
of the water, between the land and ice, and is at once pursued, but before the
boat can reach within dai'ting or shooting distance, perhaps, the animal goes
down. Then comes an impatient waiting for it to rise agairf. As the Bowhead
is irregular in its course, when next seen it may be in\anotber direction.
Quickly the boat is headed for it, and before approaching near enough the
whale goes down again. In this way the chase is frequently prolonged, some-
times abandoned and other whales pursued ; or, it may be, when nearly within
■.reach the animal glides under a floe of ice, and evades his pursuers ; or, if har-

have taken them have observed that the spout-holes are usually higher than on those not
having the bunch. This statement is corroborated by Capt. Swift. [The figures do not
present any characters to distinguish this whale from the common bowhead"— Ei>.]

* Capt. Roys is of the opinioji tliat the Bowheads breed but slowly. Bloreover his obser-
vations of many years in northern whaling goes to shovv' that the young of this species
suck but a short tune compared witli other cetaceous animals.

This opinion seems quite eoDclusive when we compare the immense head and long bal-
leen of even the smallest individuals with those of other species, as though nature had
provided them with immensely capacious moutlis to gather insect food instead of draw-
ing sustenance from tjie dam.

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 37

pooned, it may run for the floe, and before being killed reaches it, and escapes
with harpoons, lines, &c. If the pursuit proves successful, the captured whale
istoweil to the beach at high tide, aud a scarf is cutthrougli the blubber along
the body, a tackle is made fast on shore and hooked to the blubber, then as the
tide falfs the animal is literally skinned of its oily hide, the carcass rolling down
the bank as the process of skinning goes on. The bone is extracted from the
mouth as the body rolls over, and presents the best opportunity. As soon as
the blubber is taken off it is rafted* and lies in the water till taken on board
ship. The water being very cold, the blubber remains in its natural state for
a long time, retaining the oil with but small loss. While the whaling is going
on in this wise, the captain with the ship-keepers improves every opportunity to
work the ship to the whales. If there is an opening seen between the ice and
shore, the ship is at once worked through either by towing, kedgingor sailing,
and if meeting an adverse tide or wind the vessel is anchored with a very light
anchor, so that if beset by ice unexpectedly in the night or during the dense
fogs that prevail, the vessel will drift with the floe, thereby avoiding the dan-
gers of being cut through. Heavy fogs prevail until the ice disappears, and
the circumscribed clear water being crowded with ships and boats, much care
aud manoeuvering is exercised to prevent accident. These fogs frequently are
so dense that no object can be seen much more than a ship's length ; conse-
quently at such times cruising and whaling in the bays is full of excitement and
anxiety. A ship may be laying quietly at anchor one moment, and the next
she is surrounded by a field of ice, or the splashing of water under the bow of
a passing vessel tells of her close proximity. Then comes the blowing of horns,
the ringing of bells, the firing of guns, or pounding on empty casks, to indicate
the vessel's position, in order to avoid collision.

Neither fog or drifting ice, however, prevents the whalers from vigorously
prosecuting their work. In thick weather, when the spout of the whale or the
animal itself cannot be seen, its hollow-sounding respiration can be heard a
long distance. In such instances the boats approach as near as can be judged
where the sound was heard, and if the animal is found and captured it is at the
risk of the boats coming in contact with passing ships, ice or what not, and,
too, not knowing with any degree of certainty what part of the bay they may
be in, the first and main object beingto capture the whale at all hazards. This
being done it is taken in tow by the boats or is anchored. If taken in tow and
not finding their own ship, but meeting with another, the custom is to go on
board to eat or sleep, if necessary, and when recruited, or the fog lifts so as to
find their own vessel, they are supplied with provisions, if needed, till they can
reach her. If anchored, one boat always remains with the whale while the
others go in search of the ship. As soon as found the master, learning of the
capture, makes every eff'ort to work his vessel to the dead animal; or, if that
cannot be done, every favorabte tide is improved to tow the whale to the ship,
where it is cut in and tried out in the usual manner. As the season ad-
vances the ice disappears, leaving more room for cruising with the vessels,
when the fleet becomes more scattered, and the feature of the whaling changes ;
the boats are kept more with the vessels, look-outs being stationed at the mast-
heads, and the whaling is principally done from the ship (as it is called) ; some-
times two boats are sent from a vessel to look for whales in an adjoining bay.
Meanwhile the nights have become longer. Then comes the night whaling.
The phosphorescent light caused by the whale's movements in the water show
quite distinctly his whereabouts, and, the Bowhead whales being easy of cap-
ture compared with other kinds, niyht ivhaliny has been pursued successfully.

We have spoken of the Bowheads as being comparatively easy of capture, but
it must not be inferred that the pursuit is not often tedious or unsuccessful, or
the attack made without risk of life and limb, as well as in other kinds of
whaling.

* Tied together with ropes in a sort of raft.

1869.]

38 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

The Bowhead, compared with the other species of ■whales that are pitrsued,
is considered very shy and timid.

After the ice leaves the bays, until the fall winds begin, much calm weather
is experienced ; and, although we have frequently seen large numbers of whale
spouting among a large number of boats scattered over the water, not a single
animal could be approached near enough to dart at with the hand harpoon, or
to present a fair chance to shoot a bomb lance into it, notwithstanding the
boats were rigged with extra large sails in order to take advantage of the light
airs or winds that may prevail in midsummer. The use of oars or paddles
would be quite sure to frighten the whales, and when there is not sufiicient
wind to sail on to them there is but little or no chance of getting fast. After the
?>ons are firmly planted in the animal, or, as we frequently hear whalemen say,
after the ichale has tjeen fastened to, good and solid, down the creature ^lay go on
to the bottom, and there rolls till either the irons are torn from its body or the
line is wound about it, and the valuable prize may be lost.

The breeding places of the Bowheads seems to be a matter of- conjecture
among the most observing and experienced -rfhaling masters. The only place
known has already been mentioned, in the vicinity of Tchantar Bay, and a dif-
ference of opinion exists as to whether the Poggies before mentioned are calves
or whether they are not a scrag species that have a corresponding relation to
the full-grown Bowheads that the scrag Right Whale has to the larger grades
of that species. Admitting, however, that they are the young^anes, their num-
bers are comparatively few to the numerous progeny that is supposed to be
brought forth by the cows during each season. Another singular fact is that
no Bowhead of the Okhotsk Sea have ever been seen passing in or out the pas-
sage of the Kurile Islands, or from the Okhotsk to Behring Sea, or Arctic
whales passing to the Okhotsk. According to statements of the most experi-
enced whaling captains, a Bowhead with a calf never has been seen by any
whalers in the Arctic or Behring Strait, and where this species of cetacean re-
sort to bring forth their young, or where the young remain till grown to a con-
siderable degree of maturity, is not definitely known. The general opinion,
however, is that an open Polar Sea must exist, where they resort, or some other
open water not known to whalemen.

II. The Eight \^hale of the North- West Coast.
? Baljena cullamach Cham.

Numerous species of whales frequent the coast of California at different
seasons of the year, and both deep sea, bay and shore whaling has been prose-
cuted for many years. The shore and bay whaling, however, did not begin
till about the time that Upper California became a part of U. S. Teiritory, and
the shore whaling was not pursued to much extent till 1856. The first shore
})arty was established at Monterey, 1852. The varieties of the larger Cetaceans
found along the coast are known under the following names: California Gray,
Humpback, Finback, Sulphur-bottom, Right Whale, Sperm Whale. The first
five mentioned are of the Balasna family, and their natural food is zoophytes,
animalcules, "(brit)" mollusks, crustaceans, and small fish.

The Right Whales found on the coast are but few, compared with the num-
bers found on what is termed the Kodiak ground; the limits of which maj- be
regarded as extending from Vancouver's Island, northward to the Aleutian
Chain, and from the coast westward to longitude 150°. The small number
frequenting the coast of California are supposed to be only a few stragglers
from that region. They have been taken as far south as the Bay of St. Se-
bastian Viscaino, and off the north point of Cedros or Cerros Island, both
within the parallels of 27° and 29° N. The season of the year when seen was
from February to April. This animal is thought to be a distinct species from
the southern Right Whale, and is frequently called the North-West Whale,
being larger, and in several particular points differing from the former. It has

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 39

ever been a matter of mysterious conjecture with tlie most philosopliical
■whalemen where this species go to bring forth their young, and where they
migrate during the winter months. That they do not go into the southern
hemisphere is certain, and it is equally certain that but a few stragglers even
reach within a number of degrees of the northern tropic in their wanderings.
The same mystery hangs over the breeding place or winter resort of the si>ecies
of Balffina known as the Bowhead.

The Eskemo about the North Western shores of Behring's Sea speak about
that species coming into the bays when the " small ice comes," and they look
forward to that season as a time of plenty, and reap a kind of marine harvest
by catching numbers of them, which yield an abundant supply of food for
winter store ; so it seems beyond question that this species is quite at home in
the begincMng of the arctic winter in that region, and the immense numbers of
Bowheads and Right whales that would necessarily appear in the temjierate
latitudes i| they migrated southward would be sure to arrest the attention of
passing na?:igators, who frequently go far north, even in the winter season, to
make their passages from China and Japan. Some have asserted that they
probably congregate around the borders of the drifting or field ice, which joins
the open water of the Pacific about the Kurile, and Aleutian Islands. All
agree that they do not pass the tropics and reach the southern hemisphere.
The southern Right Whales resort to the bays in that region to bring forth
their young, and formerly were sought for in those inland waters, where many
a shij) has quickly completed her cargo by baj'-whaling in high southern lati-
tudes. But no bay has yet been discovered north of the equator in the Pacific
where the North-West Right Whales goto calve; and, as before mentioned,
nothing is definitely known of their winter resort. The last seen of them in
high latitudes by whalemen is on their return from the Arctic Ocean, when
they are found about St. Paul's Island, Behring's Sea, in the month of Octol^er,
and those found then are usually very large. In the Okhotsk Sea the Right
Whale is found toward the northern limits, in the early part of the season ;
later the ships cruise in the southern part, about the Kurile Islands.

For much of the information about the habits of the Right Whale, and for
some of the measurements which have guided us in making our drawing, we
are indebted to Capt. Poole, commanding the Bark N. S. Perkins, of San
Francisco, and Capt. Baker, of Brig L. P. Foster, which sails from the same
port, and Cap^t. J. M. Green, long known as an experienced whaling master.

The avei'age length of this species may be calculated at sixty feet, the two
sexes varj'ing but little in size ; average yield of oil 130 barrels, average thick-
ness of blubber ten inches, which appears quite white ; yield of bone about
1400 lbs. to a hundred barrels of oil.

The Right Whale is found singly, or in pairs ; at times scattered about as far
as the eye can reach from the mast head. The last of the season they are
sometimes seen in large numbers, crowded together. These herds are called
" gams," and they are regarded by experienced whalemen as an indication that
the whales will soon leave the ground.

The general habit of this animal is to spout seven to nine times to a " ris-
ing," then turning flukes (elevating them s^ or eight feet out of the water) it
goes down, and remains twelve to fifteen niinutes. It is remarked, however,
since they have been so generally pursued by whalemen, that their action in
this respect has somewhat changed. When "gallied" by the close approach
of a boat thej^ have a trick of hollowing the back, which brings the blubber
slack, preventing the harpoon from penetrating. Many whales have been
" missed" by the boatsteerer's darting at this portion of the body. Having
been chased every successive season for years, these animals have become
very wild, and difficult to get near, especially in calm weather. The manner
of propelling the boat at such times is by paddling, and when there is a breeze,
by sailing, if practicable, using the oars only when it is not possible to use
sails or paddles. Among Right Whalemen there is a difference of opinion

1869.]

40 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

about "going on to a whale,"* ■whether it is best to get out of or into it3
wake to avoid gallying it; and as regards safety, some prefer to liave a good
breeze, then, setting all practicable sail, run over the animal to leeward, at the
same time that the harpoon is thrown. The whale, after being struck, often
runs to windward, thrashing its flukes in every direction, and after going a
short distance frequently stops, or "brings to," "sweeping," as it is said, from
"eye to eye," and at the same time making a terrific noise through its spout
holes, called bellowing ; this sound is compared to that of a mammoth bull,
and adds much to the excitement in its chase and capture ; others will not
stop until they are hamstrung, as it were, by " spading." The spading process
is performed by hauling the boat near enough to cut the cords that connect
the body and flukes, either on top or underneath, as the attitude of the fish
may be ; a large vein runs along the under side of the "small," terminating
at the junction of the caudal fin, which, if cut, will give the animal its death
wound. The instrument used for cutting is called a boat spade, which may
he compared to a very wide chisel, with a handle six or eight feet long; some-
times the cords are so effectually severed that the flukes become entirely use-
less, and still the animal slackens its speed hardly perceptibly, showing evi-
dentl}' that its pectorals are its principal propellers. Another mode of stopping
them is by throwing a number of harpoons (detached from the line) into its
small, a kind of torture that-would seem, if the bleeding victim could speak,
it would entreat its tormenters to put an end to its misery. But when once
" brought to " it will remain nearly stationary for a few minutes or roll from
side to side, giving the officer of the boat a good opportunity to shoot a bomb-
lance, or use the hand lance with good effect, which soon dispatches it. But
sometimes one of these huge animals, in spite of bomb guns, har]>oons, and
all the Avhaling craft combined, will, after being fastened to, make the best of
its way to windward with the boat, taking it so far from the ship as to oblige
the men to cut the line and give up the chase. Of late Greener's gun has
been used to some extent in its capture. But before harpoon or bomb guns
came into general use, the whaleman of the North-West coast made such havoc
among these marine animals (which were regarded the most gigantic and
vicious of their kind,) as to have nearly annihilated them or have driven them
to some unknown feeding ground.

III. THE CALIFORNIA GREY WHALE.
Rhachianectes glaucus Cope.

Agaphelus glaucus Cope, Pr. A. N. Sci. Phil. 1868, 225.

The California Gray is unlike other species of Balajna in its color, being of a
mottled gray; some individuals, however, of both male and female, are nearly
black. The jaw is curved downward from near the spoutholes to the "nib end,"
or snout, and is not so wide as that of the other species in proportion to the size
of body. The length of tlie female is from forty to forty-four feet,f the fully
grown varying but little in size ; its greatest circumference twenty-eight to
thirty feet, its "flukes" thirty inches in depth and ten feet broad. It has no
dorsal fin. Its pectorals are six and a half feet in length and two and a half
feet in width, tapering from near the middle toward the end, which is quite
pointed. J It has a succession of ridges, crosswise along the back, from oppo-
site the vent to the flukes.

The coating of fat, or blubber, is six to ten inches in thickness, and of a red-
dish cast. The average yield of oil of the female is forty barrels. The whale-

*" Going on to a whale," is a whaleman's term for getting near enough to dart the har-
poon.

t Forty-four feet, however, would be regarded as large, although some individuals have
been taken that were much larger, and yielding sixty or seventy barrels of oil.

I The size of tlnkes and fins usually varies but little in proportion to the whale; the
side view illustration is to represent the largest extreme of those parts of the animal.

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 41

bone, or "baleen," of which the loiifrest is fourteen to sixteen inclics, is of a
light brown color, the grain very coarse ; the hair or fringe on the bono, like-
wise, is much coarser and uot so even as that of the Right Whale or Hump-
back.

The male may average thirty-five feet in length, but varies more in size than
the female, and the average quantity of oil it produces may be reckoned at
twenty-five barrels.

The California Grey is only found in north latitude, and its migrations have
never been known to extend lower than 20° north. It fequents the coast of
California from November to May. During these months the " cows " enter
the lagoons on the lower coast to calve, having one young at a birth ;* while
the males remain outside, along the sea shore. Occasionally a male is seen in
the lagoons with the cows the last of the season, and soon after both male and
female, with their young, will be seen working their way northward, following
the shore so near that they often pass through the kelp near the beach. It is
seldom they are seen far from land.

Their habits are strikingly different from those of other species of Balaena, in
resorting to shoal bays and lagoons to bring forth their young. In summer
.they congregate in the Arctic Ocean and Okhotsk Sea. It has been said that
this species of whale is found on the coast of China, but this report needs con-
firmation. In October and November they appear off the coast of Oregon and
Upper California, on their way back to their tropical haunts, making a quick,
low spout at long intervals, showing themselves but little till they reach the
smooth lagoons of the lower coast, where, if not disturbed, they congregate in
large numbers, passing into and out of the estuary, or slowly raising their
massive forms midway out of their element and falling over on their sides,
dashing the water into foam and spray about them. At times in calm weather
they are seen lying on the water quite motionless, keeping one position for an
hour or more.

The first time we were in Scammon's Lagoons the boats were lowered several
times for them, we thinking that the whales when in that position were dead
or sleeping, but before the boat approached within darting or even shooting
distance they were on the move again.

About the bar and shoais at the mouth of one of the lagoons, in 1860,
we saw large numbers of California Grays; it was at the low stage of the
tide, and the shoal places were plainly marked by the constantly foaming
breakers. To our surprise, we saw numbers of these " Grays " going through
the surf where there could barely have been depth to float them. We could
see in many places, by the white sand coming to the surface, that thej^must be
near to or touching the bottom. One in particular lay for a half hour in the
breakers playing, as we have often seen seals in a heavy surf, turning from
side to side with half extended fins, and moved apparently by the heavy ground
swell which was breaking, at times making a playful spring with its bending
flukes, throwing its body clear of the water, coming down with a heavy splash,
then making two or three spouts, then settling under water, and perhaps the
next moment his head would appear, and with the heavy swell the animal
would roll over in a listless manner, to all appearance enjoying the sport in-
tensely. We passed close to this playful fellow, and had only thirteen feet of
water.

Hunt, Chase, and Capture — Dangers of Lagoon Whaling.

As the season approached for the whales to bring forth their young, which

* Two or three calves have been seen with one whale, but these instanoes have only oc-
curred in lagoons where there had been great slaughter among the cows, leaving their
offspring motherless, which straggle about, sometimes following other whales, or congre-
gating by themselves, a half a dozen together at times. We know of one instance when a
whale was killed close to the ship which had a calf perhaps a month old. When the mo-
ther was taken to the ship to be cut in, the young one followed, and remained playing
about for two weeks, but whether it lived to come to maturity is a matter of conjecture.

1869.]

42 PROCEEDIKGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

is from December to March, they formerly collected at the most remote ex-
tremities of the lagoons, huddled together so thickly that it was difficult for a
boat to cross the waters without coming in contact with them accidentally.
Frequent instances have been known of their getting aground, and lying for
three or four hours with but two or three feet of water around them, without
apparent inconvenience or injury from lying heavily on the sandy bottom till
the rising tide floated them again.

In February, IS-'iO, we found two aground in Magdalena Bay. Each had a
calf playing about ; there being sufficient depth for the young ones, while the
mothers lay hard on the bottom.

When attacked the smaller of the two old ones laid motionless, and the boat
approached near enough to "set" the hand lance into her "life," dispatching
her at a single dart. The other, however, when approached would raise head
and flukes above the water, supporting herself on a small portion of the belly,
turning easily, and heading towards the boat, which made it very difficult to
capture her. It appears to be their nature to get into as shallow water as will
float them when their calves are young. For this reason, the whaling vessels
anchor a considerable distance, sometimes two or three miles, from \vhere the
crews go to hunt them. Several vessels are often in the same lagoons. The
first streak of dawn is the signal for lowering the boats, all pulling for the head
waters, where the whales with their calves are found. As soon as one is seen,
the officer who first discovers it sets a waif in his boat, heads for the whale, and
gives chase. Boats belonging to other vessels do not interfere, but go on in
search of more whales. When the boats are in chase, great care is taken to
keep behind and a short distance from the whale, till driven near the head of
the lagoon or into shallow water; then the men in the boats nearest spring to
their oars in the exciting pursuit. At such times the animal swims so close to
the bottom as to impede its progress, thereby giving the boat a decided advan-
tage ; but occasionally the whale will suddenly change its course, or dodge,
especially if she has a calf that is old enough to swim fast. Under such cir-
cumstances the chase will frequently last for hours, the boats cutting through
the water at their utmost speed. At other times, when the calf is young and
weak, the movement of the mother is very slow, keeping close to her young
and giving it all the protection and assistance which her nature affords. It is
an unusual occurrence for the mother to forsake her offspring when molested.
When within " darting distance " (sixteen or eighteen feet), the boat steerer
darts the "irons," and when the whale is struck it dashes about, lashing the
water into foam, frequently even staving the boats. As soon as the boat is
"fast" the officer goes into the head,* and watches a favorable opportunity to
shoot a bomb lance into it. If it enters a vital part and explodes, it kills in-
stantly, but it is not often this good luck occurs ; oftener two or three bombs
are shot which paralyze the animal to some extent, then the boat is hauled
near enough to use the hand lance. After repeated thrusts the whale becomes
sluggish in its motions; then, going "close to," the lance is set into its "life,"
which completes the capture ; the whale rolling over on its side, with fins ex-
tended, dies without a struggle, or will circle around in a small compass, or
make a zigzag course, heaving its head and flukes above the water, and either
roll over, fin out, or die under water and sink to the bottom.

My remarks thus far have been confined principally to the females as they
are found in the lagoons. Mention has been made, however, of the general
habit of both male and female, in making their passage between their northern
and southern feeding grounds, of keeping near the shore. This fact becoming

* Whalemen pall the forward part of a whaleboat the head, difFering from niorehant-
men, who term it the bow ; still the oar next to tlie forward one in a whaleboat is named
the bow-oar; likewise when the boat is hauled elose to the whale by heaving the line out
of the "bow-choeks," and taking it to one side against a cleat placed a few feot aft of the
extreme bow, it is called "bowing on."

• [April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 43

generally known, and the bomb gun* coming into general use, has changed
the mode of capture along the coast.

Parties of whalemen have for several years established themselves along
the shore at the most favorable points where the thickest beds of kelp are
found, and there lay in wait watching for a good chance to shoot the animals
as they migrate to their southern breeding grounds and return again to the
north.' This by whalemen is called "kelp-whaling." The first year or two
that this kind of whaling was pursued, many of them passed through or along
the edge of the kelp, giving the gunners an opportunity to choose their own
distance for a shot. This manner of capture, however, soon developed the
sagacity of these periodical visitors. At first the ordinary whale boat was
used, but the keen-eyed devil-fish soon found what would be the consequence
of getting too near the long dark-looking object, as it lay nearly motionless
in the kelp, only rising and falling with the rolling swell.

A very small boat, with one man to shoot and another to scull, was then
used instead of the whale boat and crew ; this proved successful for a time,
but as season after season passed the whales worked more off shore, and at
the present time the boats anchor a little outside the kelp as a general rule.
The whale being seen approaching at a distance far enough for the experi-
enced gunner to judge pretty nearly where the animal will "breakwater,"'
near to this place the boat is sculled to await the "rising." If the whale
"shows a good chance," it is frequently killed instantly and sinks to the bot-
tom, or receives its death-wound by the bursting of the bomb-lance. Conse-
quently the stationary position or slow movement of the animal enables the
whaler to get a harpoon into it before sinking. To the harpoon a line is at-
tached, with a buoy at the end, which indicates the place where it lies on the
bottom. Usually in the course of twenty-four hours, and often in much less
time, the whale rises to the surface, and is then towed to the shore, the blub-
ber taken off, and tried out in pots set for that purpose on the beach.

Another mode of capture along the coast is by the ships cruising a little
way offshore, sending the boats inshore, towards the line of kelp, and as the
whales pass to the southward, the boats being provided with extra large sails
and the whalemen taking advantage of the strong northerly winds which
prevail, run their boats before the wind, sailing near enough to dart the or-
dinary hand harpoon into the animal, getting fast this way. The whale is
killed in deep water, and if inclined to sink, it can usually be held up by two
boats, till the ship comes to them, when a large "fluke-rope" is made fast or
the "fin-chain" is fastened on its fins, the "cutting tackle" hooked, and the
whale "cut in" immediately. This manner of taking the whale is called
" sailing them down."

Still another way of catching them is with Gruner's Harpoon Gun, which
is similar to a small swivel gun. It is of one and a half inch bore, and three
feet long in the barrel, and when stocked and complete weighs seventy-five
pounds. The harpoon, four feet and a half long, is projected with consider-
able accuracy to any distance under eightj^-four yards. It is mounted on the
bow of the boat, and was formerly fired by the boat steerer who pulls the
harpooner's oar. This was the old Scotch plan, the gun being first used by
the Scotch whalers ; but at the present time it has been more successfully
managed by the oflScer in charge of the boat, who takes the boat steerer's
place for the time. A variety of manoeuvres are practised with the boat when
using the harpoon gun; at times lying at anchor as in deep whaling, at other

* The bomb gun is made of iron, stock and all. It is three feet long, the barrel of ^yhieh
is twenty-three inches in length ; diameter of l)ore, one and one-eighth of an inch ;
weight, twenty-four pounds. It shoots a bomb lance twenty-one and a half inches long,
and of a size to fit the bore. It is pointed at the end, with sharpened edges, in order to
cut its way through the fibrous fat and flesh, and is guided by three elastic feathers,
which are attached along the fuse tulie, folding around it when in the barrel. The gun is
fired from the shoulder, in the same way as a musket.

1869.]

44 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF ]

times drifting about for a chance shot, or paddling quietly if ia calm weather,
and when a breeze comes sailing after the animal. When the whale is judged
to be ten fathoms off, the gunner sights eighteen inches below its back ; if
fifteen fathoms, eight or ten inches below; if eighteen or twenty fathoms dis-
tant the gun is pointed at the top of the back. Twenty fathoms is considered
a long range, as there is constantly more or less motion to the boat.

Gruner's gun, as a general thing, has not been brought into successful use
among American whalemen, except for this peculiar species of whale, along
this coast, where much of the time the water is quite smooth — during the
winter months. It has been used of late with great success, the harpoon be-
ing so effective a weapon as often to give the whale a death-wound, and in
some instances killing instantly.

Still another strategic plan has been practised with successful results,
called " whaling along the breakers." Mention has been made of one pro-
minent habit of these periodical visitors to the coast, evidently taking great
delight in playing their uncouth gambols through or along the breakers that
front the mouths of the lagoons. This the watchful eye of the whaler was
quick to see could be turned to his advantage and to the destruction of this
interesting marine animal, when exhibiting its natural habits. They will
pass through the surf where there is scarcely water to float them, and fre-
quently are seen along the edge of the breakers, and in making their passage
north and south they follow along the outlying shoals as they once did along
the kelp.

After years of pursuit by waylaying them around the beds of kelp, the wary
animals learned to shun those points of death, and seemingly made a wide
deviation in their course to enjoy the sport among the rollers of the lagoons'
mouths, as they passed them either way. But the civilized whaler, their
greatest enemy, ever ready to destroy for gain, anchors his boats as near the
roaring surf as safety will permit, and the unwary "fish" that comes in reach
of the deadly harpoon, or bomb, is very sure to pay the penalty with its life.
If the whale comes within darting distance, he is harpooned, and as they al-
most invariably run " off shore " they are soon in clear deep water, where
the pursuer makes his capture with comparative ease; or, if passing within
range of the bomb gun, one of the explosive missiles is planted into its side.
This usually so paralyzes the animal that the first boat's crew, who have been
resting at anchor, taking to their oars, soon overtakes the wounded animal,
which is fastened to and despatched in a summary manner.

The casualties occurring in connection with the coast and kelp whaling are
nothing to be compared with the accidents that have been experienced by
those engaged in taking them in the lagoons. Hardly a day passes but that
there is upsetting or staving of boats, the crews receiving bruises, cuts, and
in many instances having limbs broken, and repeated accidents have hap-
pened where men have been instantly killed or received mortal injury. The
reasons of the increased dangers in lagoon-whaling are, first, the sandy bot-
tom being continually stirred by the strong currents mixing with the water,
making it difficult to see an object to any considerable depth ; the quick and
deviating movements of the animal, and its unusual sagacity. When a whale
is struck at sea there is generally but little difficulty in keeping clear. When
it is first irritated by the wound of the harpoon, it endeavors to escape by
"running," or descends to the depths below, taking out more or less line in
its course, the direction of which and the movements of the boat indicate the
whereabouts of the animal. The clear water likewise renders an object visi-
ble a considerable distance below the surface, so that in any event the careful
" boat-header" has comparatively but little difficulty in keeping clear of the
whale when first struck.

But in a lagoon the object of pursuit is in narrow passages, where fre-
quently there is a swift tide, and the turbid water precludes seeing far be-
neath the boat. Should the chase happen to be made ivitli. the current, if the

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 45

whale is struck, it often stops suddenly, and the speed of the boat, together
■with the influence of the running water, prevents it from being kept clear,
notwithstanding the utmost caution and exertion to avoid accident, the boat
shooting against or over the animal, when it is dashing the water in every
direction. The whales that are given chase to have a calf with them, and
the mother, in her endeavors to avoid the pursuit of herself and offspring,
will sometimes lose sight of her calf in the thick water. Instantly she stops,
" sweeping" around in search of the lost one, and at such times if the boat
comes in contact with her, it is almost certain to be stove. Another great
danger is in killing the calf. At times, when the harpoon is thrown or the
lance darted at the mother, the calf, in its innocent gambols about the parent
animal, will get in the way of the weapon, and receive the wound, killing it
instead of the intended victim. In such cases the whale in her frenzy will
chase the boats, and overtaking them will overturn them with her head or
dash them in pieces with a stroke of her flukes. Sometimes the calf is fas-
tened to instead of the cow. In such instances the mother maj' have been an
old frequenter of the "ground," and before chased perhaps suffered from at-
tack, consequently is more difiicult to capture, staving the boats and escapino-
after repeatedly receiving wounds. One instance occurred in Magdalena La-
goon, in 1857, where, after several boats were stove, they being near the
beach, the men in those remaining afloat managed to pick up their swimmino-
comrades and in the meantime to run the line to the shore, hauling the calf
into as shallow water as would float the "dam,"' she keeping near her
troubled young one, giving the gunner a good chance for a shot with his
bomb-gun from the beach. A similar instance occurred in Scammon's La-
goon in 1859.

The testimony of many officers of whaling vessels furnishes abundant proof
that this species of whale is possessed of unusual sagacity, and their inordi-
nate affection for their offspring is beyond question. Numerous contests
with them prove frhat after the loss of their young the enraged animal has
given chase to the boats, which only found security by pulling into shoal
water or to shore. The many mishaps that have been experienced araono- a
class of men that are fond of listening to tales of adventure or relating their
own exploits have been the sources from which many a marvellous thouoh
truthful tale has sprung.

Indian Whalemen of the North-West Coast. — Indian Whaling Canoe — .Indian Whalin<^
Craft — Indian Whaling. — Disposition of the Whale after Captured. — Description of the

Eskemo Whaleboat. — Eskemo Whaling Implements. — Division of the Captured Whale.

Closing Remarks.

After evading the civilized whaler and his instrnments of destruction, or
suffering from wounds received while in their southern haunts these
migratory animals of both sexes begin their northern journey.

The mother with her young, grown to half the size of maturity, but want-
ing in strength, make the best of their way along the shores, avoidinc/ the
rough sea by passing between or near the rocky islets which stud the p°oints
and capes. But scarcely have they quitted their southern homes before they
are surprised by the Indians about the Strait of Juan De Fuca, Vancouver's
and Queen Charlotte's Island. Like enemies in ambush, ihey glide in canoes
from island, bluff, or bay, rushing upon them with whoop and yell launch-
ing their instruments of torture into them, like hounds worryino- the last
life-blood from their vitals, and then trains of canoes tow the captured ones to
shore in triumph. The whalemen among the Indians of the north-west coast
are those fond of the height of adventure, and likewise of becomino- worthy
of the greatest consideration among their fellows. The one amono- them
that could boast of killing a whale formerly had the most exalted mark of
honor conferred upon him by a cut across his nose.*

* This custom is no longer practiced.

1869.]

46 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

The whaling canoe is from thirty to thirty-five feet long; eight men in-
variably make the crew, each wielding a paddle five and a half feet long.
The whaling craft consists of harpoons, lances, lines, and sealskin buoys, all
of their own workmanship.

The harpoon is much the shape of the head of the common lance used by
our whalers, adding two pieces of pointed bone projecting from one of the
edged sides of the weapon. Its length is six and a half inches and its width
two and a half inches. It is composed of sheet iron, bone, the fibers of cedar
roots, or of the wild nettle, and gum. The iron forms the principal and cut-
ting part, and is perforated from midway to the end that joins the line.
" Formerly the muscle-shell was used to make this blade." The horns of
bone which extend from one edged side as before mentioned, are placed one
on each flat side of the iron ; the rope unlaid and marled on with the pieces
of bone, through the boles in the sheet iron blade, and the whole covered with
a coating of gum. The rope, bones, and seizings, form a cavity, into which
the pointed end of the harpoon pole or staff is inserted. This pole— made of
yew — is eighteen feet long and weighs about nineteen pounds. It serves the
double purpose of harpoon-staff and lance-pole.

The lance is of the same shape as the harpoon, without the barbs or horns,
and adding the socket, for the lance-pole. The blade is made of a muscle-
shell, and the socket is formed of cedar bark " woulded " or " served " with
fibrous roots, the whole gummed in like manner as the harpoon. Its length
is seven inches, and it is two and a half inches wide.

The line is made of cedar withes, twisted into a three-strand rope five-
eighths of an inch in diameter, and looking very much like coir rope; the
usual length of the line is fifty to sixty feet for the first harpoon, but the
buoys attached to the harpoons subsequently thrown have only about five
feet of line.

The buoys are prepared seal skins with flipper holes and mouth secured air
tight; one flipper hole is fitted with a nozzle, for the purpose of blowing it
up when required for use. These buoys are fancifully painted, according to
the taste of the owner of the canoe to which they may belong, care being
taken that each canoe's buoys are differently marked.

Their whaling grounds are limited, as the Indian whalers rarely venture
seaward far out of sight of the smoke from their habitations by day, or be-
yond view of their bonfires at night.

The number of canoes engaged in the chase is from two to five, each one
of the crew being from among the chosen men of the tribe, who can with
silent stroke paddle the sharp, symmetrical cauim* close to the rippling
water along the sides of the animal. The bowman then, with sure aim,
thrusts the harpoon into it, and heaves the line and buoys clear of the canoe.
The whale diving deeply, sometimes takes the buoys out of sight, but from
the long stretch of line, and the pursuit being usually near the coast, on com-
paratively shoal soundings, there is but little time when the inflated seal-
skins do not indicate the animal's whereabouts. The instant they are seen
by the nearest canoe a buoy is elevated on a pole, and all dash with shout
and t/runt toward the object of pursuit. The chase then becomes one of great
excitement, each boat being provided with implements alike ; in order to en-
title it to a full share of the prize when captured, its crew must get their
harpoon into the animal with the buoys attached to the line. After the
whale is struck, the strife that ensues to be the next to launch the prize-
weapon, creates a scene of brawl and agility peculiar to these piscatory ad-
ventures. One canoe after another approaches, and its bowman hurls his
missile deep into the side of the huge animal. At length the victim, becom-
ing weakened by loss of blood and strength, slackens its speed. The canoe
is then carefully paddled near, and the lance is used with unerring precision

* Cauim is the name for canoe among these tribes.

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF rniLADELPHIA. 47

— the rude weapon being cautiously bandied to prevent accident to the craft
by contact with the dashing flukes and fins of the whale. This careful
manoeuvring subjects the bleeding animal to a system of torture character-
istic of the savage horde about it, and eventually, bleeding its last blood from
a lacerated heart, it writhes in convulsions and expires. Immediately after
the whale is dead, the whole fleet of canoes assist in towing it to the shore.
As soon as the prize is brought to the beach a division is made, and all the
inhabitants of the village gorge themselves upon its fat and flesh till their
greedy appetites are satisfied. After the feast, what oil can be extracted
from the remaining blubber is put in skin« or bladders, and becomes an
article of traffic with neighboring tribes, or the white traders that frequently
visit them.

This whale of passage, when arrived among the scattered floes of the Arctic
Ocean, is rarely pursued by the whaleship's boats, consequently thev rest in
some degree of security; but even there, when a favorable opportunity offers,
the watchful Eskemos steal upon them and with their rude weapons and
torturing process, the whnle pursued, at last yields to the combined enemies
about it. and supplies food and substance for its captors. , ^Z~L. ,< .^i^

The Eskemo whaling boat, although to all appearances simple in its con-
struction, will be found, after careful investigation, to be admirably adapted
to the purpose, as well as for all other uses necessity demands. It is not
only used to accomplish this the most important undertaking within their
frozen imaginations, but in it they pursue the walrus, shoot game, and make
their long summer voyage about the coast, up the deep bays and long rivers,
for the purpose of traffic with coast and interior tribes.

When they prepare for whaling, the boat is cleared of all passengers and
their effects, nothing being allowed in it but the whaling implements and
boat gear. Eight picked men make the crew.* Their boats are twenty-five
to thirty feet in length, flat on the bottom, with flaring sides and tapering
ends; there are four thwarts which are placed about midway between the
bottom and the gunwales. The frame is of wood, and consists of fourteen
or sixteen ribs, a center-piece along the bottom, stern and bow timbers and
strips run along each side to receive the thwarts and give shape to the craft.
The frame is lashed or served together, with the fibres of whalebone and thongs
of walrus' hide, the latter article being the covering or planking to the boat.

The whaling implements are one or more harpoons of their own make,
four seal-skin buoys, a line made of walrus hide, one end of which is fastened
to the harpoon, the other to one of the buoys, a boat mast that serves the
triple purpose of spreading the sail, and furnishing the staff for harpoon and
lance, a large knife or two, and eight paddles.

The harpoon is made out of the walrus tusk, with a piece of stone or iron
fitted in the end for a point; it is nine inches long, three-fourths of an inch
in average thickness; width one inch and three-eighths, tapering a little
towards the pointed end. The socket end is of a diagonal shape, the better
to catch the flesh ; in the middle or nearer the socket end, a hole is made to
receive the strap of walrus hide to which the line is fastened. The point end
has a triangular-shaped piece of thin iron or stone inserted in it — as before
mentioned-^which completes the weapon. In the socket end of this harpoon
the small end of the boat mast is fitted, and serves as the harpoon staff. A
common butcher knife, the blade fourteen or sixteen inches long— which they
purchase from whale ships or trading vessels — lashed to the boat mast con-
stitutes the lance.

The boat being in readiness the chase begins. As soon as the whale is
seen and its course ascertained, all get behind it; not a word is spoken, nor
will they take notice of a passing ship or boat, when once excited in the chase.

*It is said by Capt. Norton, who commande<l tlie ship "Citizen," wrecked in the .\rctic
severai years since, that the women engage in the cliase.

1869.]

48 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

All is slleat aad motionless till the while spouts, when with instant dash all
paldle towards it. The moment the spouting is over, every paddle is raised
from the water. Again the spout is seen, or in thick weather heard through
the fog — again they spring to their paddles. In this manner the animal is
approached near enough to dart the harpoon, when all shout at the top of
their voices and make all the noise possible. This is said to have the effect
of checking the animal's progress, till the harpoon is planted in its body with
line and buoy attached. The chase is continued in like manner until a num-
ber of weapons are fastened, causing the whale much effort to get under
water and still more to remain down ; consequently it soon rises again, and
is attacked with renewed vigor. In a short time it becomes so much ex-
hausted that the boat can, without much risk, go close to it. It is an ac-
knowledged right with them for the man that first harpoons the whale to
take command of the whale party. Accordingly, as soon as the proper time
arrives his " baidarra " is paddled close to the whale, and with surprising
quickness he cuts a piece of blubber from its side large enough to admit a
knife and the boat mast to which it is lashed. Then the cutting and pierc-
ing begins, and is continued till the whale is in his death struggles. The
capture being made and the whale towed to the shore, it is divided as follows :
Each member of the party receives ten slabs of bone, and a like proportion
of the blubber and entrails;, the owners of the canoes take the remainder.

The choice pieces for a dainty repast with them are the flukes, lips and
fins. The oil is a great article of trade with the interior tribes of reindeer
men ; it is sold in skins, containing about fifteen gallons each, a skin of oil
being the price of a reindeer. The entrails are made into a kind of sauce by
pickling them in a liquid extracted from a root that imparts an acrid taste.
The preparation is a savory dish among them as well as a preventative of the
scurvey. The lean flesh of the whale supplies food for their dogs, the whole
canine horde of the village assembling where the carcass lies, fighting,
feasting, growling and howling, as only Eskemo dogs can.

Many of the prominent habits of the California Gray are widely different
from those of other species of Balxna. It makes its regular migrations from
the hot southern latitudes to beyond the Arctic circle, and in these passages
between the antipodes of climate it follows the general trund of an irregular
coast so near that it is exposed to attack from the savage tribes inhabiting
the sea-shores, who pass much of their time in the canoe, and make the cap-
ture of this piebald animal a feat of the highest distinction. As it approaches
the genial waters of the torrid zone it presents an opportunity to the civilized
whalemen, at sea, along the shore, and in the lagoons, to practice their dif-
ferent modes of strategy, that hasten its annihiliation. It manifests inordi-
nate affection for its young and seeks the quiet waters of the estuaries lying
under a tropical sun, as if to warm its oflFspring into activity and promote
comfort in their native element until grown to the degree that nature de-
mands for their first northern visit. When the parent animals are attacked
they show a degree of resistance and tenacity of life that distinguish them
from all others of the great cetacean family.

Many expert whalemen have been made to suffer in the encounter, and, as
before mentioned, there is no lack of instances where the daring pursuer has
either been killed or received serious injury. Once captured, however, they
yield the coveted reward to their enemies. They furnish sustenance for the
Eskemo whaler from such parts of the animal as are of little value to others.
The oil extracted from their fatty covering is exchanged with remote tribes
of reindeer men for their fur clad animals, of whieh the flesh affords the vendors
a feast of the choicest food, and the skins form an indispensable article of
clothing. The North-West Indians realize the same comparative benefit from
the captured animals as do the Eskemo, and look forward to its periodical
passage through their circumscribed whaling grounds as a season of exploits
and profit.

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 49

The civilized whaler seeks the hunted unimal farther seaward, as frona
year to year it learas to shun the fatal shore. No species of the whale tribe
is so constantly and variously pursued as the one we have endeavored to
describe, and the large bays and lagoons where once these animals congre-
gated, brought forth and nurtured their young, are now nearly deserted.
Their mammoth bones lie bleaching on the shores of those placid waters,
and are strewn along the broken coasts from K<istern Siberia to the Gulf of
California. Ere long the California Gray will be known only as one of the
extinct species of Cetacea recorded in history.

IV. THE HUMPBACK.

MeGAPTERA VERSABILIS CopC.

Description of the Animal — Measurements — Vermin Infesting Whales — Barnacles — Time
of Bringing- Forth the Young— How Captured — Favorite Feeding Grrounds on the Coast

The Humpback is one of the species of Whale that roam through every
ocean, generally preferring to feed and play its uncouth gambols near exten-
sive coasts, or about the shores of islands, in all latitudes except the frozen
polar regions.

It is irregular in its movements, seldom going a straight course for any
considerable distance ; at one time moving about in large numbers, scattered
over the sea as far as the eye can discern from the masthead, at other times
sinffli/, seeming as much at home as if it were surrounded by hundreds of its
kind ; at will performing the varied actions of breaching, rolling, fining, lop-
tailing, or scooping ; or, if a calm sunny day, perhaps lying motionless on the
molten-looking surface, as if life were extinct.

Its shape, compared with the symmetrical forms of the Finback, California
Grey, or iSulphurbottom, is decidedly ugly, a short body with immense belly,
and frequently diminutive "small," inordinately large pectorals and flukes.
A protuberance, of variable shape and size in different individuals, placed on
the back about one-fourth the length from the flukes, is called the hump.
All combined impress the observer with the idea of abnormal proportions.
The top of its head is dotted with irregular rounded bunches, that project
above the surface about a half inch, each covering about two inches of
space.

The following measurempnts and memoranda were taken by Capt. F.. S.
Redfield, of the whaling and trading brig " Manuella," while cruising in Beh-
ring Sea, September nth, 1866:

Ft. In.

Extreme length •. 49 7

Length of pectorals 13 7

Breadth " 3 2

Distance from snout to pectorals 12

" " corner of mouth to snout 12

" " eye to snout 12 6

" " spoutholes to snout 10

Breadth of flukes 15 7

Depth " 3 4

Distance from arms to flukes 11 6

" " genital slit IT

Length of folds on belly 16

Whole breadth of folds on belly 10

Distance from flukes to hump 12 3

Length of hump along the back 3

Height of hump 1

Depth of small close to flukes 2 6

Thickness of small close to flukes 1 6

1869.] 4

50 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

Number of folds on the belly twenty-six, avercaging in width from four to
eight inches. Thickness of blubber five to ten inches. Color a yellowish
white. Yield of oil forty barrels.*

Color of body black, under side of pectorals white. Frequently the under
side of the flukes is white likewise, and sometimes the greater portion of the
belly. The Humpback, as well as all other whales except the Bowhead or
Arctic whale, are infested with parasitic crustaceans, which collect about the
head, particularly near the spoutholes, and if there are any scars or sores on
the animal's body, this vermin is sure to find them.f They vary from as
small as can be discerned with the naked eye to one inch in length, and are of
a straw color, furnished with numerous legs, disposed in a row on each side
of the body, and a mouth that at least gives a sharp bite to human flesh.

The Humpback has also growing on its body what are termed barnacles,
which appear to collect most on the fins, flukes, and head. This barnacle is
entirely diff"erent from that found on a vessel's bottom, timber, rocks, &c.,
being flat on the side that adheres to the skin, the edges forming a circle, the
mouth or opening being in the centre and protected by a rounded, bony or
flinty substance, the exterior of which is creased into a rough surface, and in
color nearly white, or mottled with black. The size of the barnacle varies
from half an inch to two and a half in diameter, and from one-fourth to three-
fourths of an inch in thickness.

The peculiar undulating movement of the Humpback, its frequent round-
ings, turning flukes, and irregular course, are characteristic habits that the
quick and practised eye of the whaler can distinguish at a long distance.
Like all other whales it has two spoutholes, and when it respires, the breath
and vapor ejected through these apertures forms the " spout," which rises in
two separate columns, joining in one as it ascends and expands. When its
enormous lungs are brought into full force the spout rises twenty feet or more.
When the whale is going to windward the influence of the breeze upon the
vapor is such that a low " bushy " spout is all that can be seen. The number
of " spoutings to a rising" is exceedingly varied, sometimes blowing only
once, at another six, eight or ten, and from that up to fifteen or twenty
times.

From observations made along the coasts of the North and South Pacific in
:regard to their times and places of resort for the jjurpose of bringing forth
their young, we deduce the following:

In the year 1852 — 3 large numbers of Humpbacks resorted to the Gulf of
Guayaquil, coast of Peru, to calve, and the height of the season was during
the months of July and August. The same may be said of the gulfs and bays
situated near the corresponding latitudes north of the equator ; still, instances
are not unfrequent when a cow with her young one is seen at all other seasons
of the year about the same coast. In the Bay of Valle de Banderas, coast of
Mexico, latitude 2C° 30^, in the month of December, we saw numbers of Hump-
backs with calves but a few days old. In May, 1855, at Magdalena Bay, coast
of Lower California, about lat. 24° 30'', we found them in like numbers, and
with very large calves.

Our belief is that the females of this species may resort in large numbers to
favorite inland waters, connected with the ocean, to bring forth their young ;
but there are many exceptions to this rule, and on account of their roving

* The Humpback probably varies more in size and yield of oil than any others of the
whale family ; we having frequently taken those that made but eight or ten barrels, and
from that up to seventy-five. Their length would vary from twenty-five to sixty-five feet.
We have reliable account of one being taken in Monterey Bay, in 1858, whicli produced
one hundred and forty-five barrels of oil.

+ On the coast, in 18.50, we took a whale that had many patches of vermin upon his
body, several of them three or four feet in e.vtent. It proved to be what is called a " dry
skin," the blubber yielding no oil; and the lean condition of the animal was attributed to
:the unusual number of those troublesome creatures upon it.

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 51

habit they are found on different coasts in all latitudes between the freezing
points, from the young one but a few days old to those of extreme maturity.
They are captured with the common hand harpoon and lance, adding the
use of the bomb-gun, and as they are very liable to sink when dead, every
exertion is made to get the harpoons in before the gun is discharged. The
best points for Humpback whaling on the coast have been Magdalena, Balle-
nas, and Monterey Bays.

V. THE SULPHURBOTTOM.

SlBBALDIDS SULFURBDS Cope.

The largest whale found upon the coast, if not the largest known, is the
Sulphurbottom.

Never having had an opportunity of obtaining an accurate measurement of
its proportions, I can only state them approximately.

Length seventy to ninety feet ; the body is comparatively more slender than
the California Gray; the pectorals and caudal fin may be regarded as being
in like proportion to the body as those of the Finback and the " Gray." The
color is somewhat lighter than in the former on its back and sides, but under-
neath it is of a yellowish cast, or sulphur color: hence the name Sulphur-
bottom is supposed to have been given. The dorsal fin is much smaller than
that of the Finback, and is a little nearer the flukes, but the head, throat and
bone in shape is similar to that species.

A Sulphurbottom is found in the Atlantic as well as in the Pacific. The
Pacific species occurs at all seasons on the coasts of the Californias. During
the months from May to September they are often found in large numbers
close in with the shore, at times playing' about ships at anchor in the open
roadsteads, near islands or capes, but as a general rule they do not approach
vessels with the degree of boldness that the Finback does.

The Sulphurbottom is considered the swiftest whale afloat, and for this
reason is but seldom pursued and still more rarely taken. Capt. Thomas, of
the bark Lagrange, in 1857, off St. Bartolme Bay, caught one by first shooting
a bomb-lance into a vital part; and, although the whale ran a long distance
before "turning up," they were enabled to keep trace of it among the large
number around by its spouting blood. When the animal was nearly exhausted,
the boats approached near enough to get fast, which was done and the capture
completed. This one yielded about ninety barrels of oil, and measured eighty-
five feet in length. The schooner "Page," of San Francisco, succeeded in
taking several near Ascension Island, the vessel laying at anchor under the
lee of it, the capture being made with the bomb-gun and lance. Notwithstand-
ing that a large proportion of these whales sank as soon as dead, they were
enabled to save them, the water being of moderate depth, in consequence of
which the whales rose to the surface before decomposition was far advanced.
The size and yield of those taken by the " Page " compared favorably with the
one taken by the "Lagrange."

Several days' trial was made in the brig " Boston," in 1858, off Cenos Island,
to capture these animals. It was the month of July, and the sea, as far as the
eye could discern, was marked with their huge forms and towering spouts.
Ten were bombed by the best shooters, who affirmed that they chose their
'• chance," but as soon as the gun was discharged the whale would disappear,
and that was the last trace seen of it, except a patch of foam, sometimes
mixed with blood. On the last day of pursuit, toward the evening, another
vessel appeared in the offing and approached within a mile or less, when the
last trial bomb was fired and the men in the boats looked eagerly to the rising
of the wounded whale, bnt in vain. A signal was made from the approach-
ing ship that they had seen it, as it " broke water" close to the vessel, and it
soon rolled over and sank. The swiftness of this animal, under water, as
demonstrated at this time, appeared to make it impracticable to pursue them.

1869.]

52 PEOCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEJIY OF

Doubtless several of those fired at received mortal wounds, or were killed
outright, but their propensity to sink, and also to " run under water," baffled
the skill of the whalers to secure them.

VI. THE FINBACK.

Bal^noptera velifera Cope.

Another species of the Whale tribe is known as the Finback.

One picked up by Capt. Poole, of the bark " Sarah Warren," of San Fran-
cisco, aflFords us the foUowino^ memoranda: Length sixty-five feet. Thick-
ness of blubber seven to nine inches. Yield of oil seventy-five barrels. Color
of blubber a clear white. Top of head quite as flat and straight as that of the
Humpback. Baleen, the longest two feet four inches, greatest width thirteen
inches, its color a light lead streaked with black, and its surface presents a
ridgy appearance crosswise ; length of fringe to bone two to four inches, and
in size this may be compared to a cambric needle.

Its side fins and flukes are in like proportion to the body as in the Califor-
nia Gray. Its throat and breast are marked with deep creases or folds, like
the Humpback. Color of back and sides black or blackish-brown ; belly a
milky white. Its back fin is placed nearer to the caudal than the hnmp on
the Humpback, and in shape approaches to a right-angled triangle, but
rounded on the forward edge, curved on the opposite one, and the longest
side joins the back in some individuals ; in others the anterior edge is the
longest.

The habits of the Finback in several points are peculiar. When it respires
the breath passing through its spoutholes produces a sharp sound that is
quite distinguishable from that of other whales of the same genus. It fre-
quently gambols about vessels at sea, in mid ocean as well as close in with
the coast, darting under them or shooting swiftly through the water on either
gide, at otie moment upon the surface, belching forth its quick ringing spout,
and the next instant submerged deep beneath the waves. In beginning the
descent it assumes a variety of positions, sometimes rolling over nearly on its
side, at other times rounding or perhaps heaving its flukes out and assuming
nearly a perpendicular attitude. Frequently it remains on the surface, mak-
ing a regular course and several uniform blows. Occasionally they congre-
gate in schools of fifteen to twenty or less. In this situation we have usually
observed them going quickly through the water, several spouting at the same
instant. Their uncertain movements, however, often showing themselves
twice or thrice, then disappearing, and their swiftness, make them very difli-
cult to capture. The results of several attempts to catch them were as fol-
lows: One was shot from the ship with a bomb-gun, which did its work so
effectually that, although the boat was in readiness for instant lowering, be-
fore it got within darting distance the animal, in its dying contortions, ran
afoul of the ship, giving her a shock that was very sensibly felt by all on
board, and likewise a momentary heel of about two streaks. We got quite a
good look at the under side of the whale as it made several successive rolls
before disappearing, and our observations agreed with those noted on board
the "Sarah Warren" in relation to color of belly and the creases on throat
and breast. The under side of fins was white also. At another time the
whale died about ten fathoms under water, and after carefully hauling it up
. in sight, the " iron drawed and away the dead animal went to the depths be-
neath." Frequently we have "lowered" for single ones that were placing
about the ship, but by the time the boats were in the water nothing more
would be seen of them, or, if seen, they would be a long way off and then
disappear.

An instance occurred in Monterey Bay, in 1865, of five being captured un-
der the following circumstances : A " pod " of whales were seen in the offing,
and the whalemen from their station on shore immediately embarked in their

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 53

boats and gave chase. On coming up with them they were found to be Fin-
backs. One was harpooned, and, although it received a mortal wound, they
all "run together" as before. One of the gunners, being an expert, managed
to shoot the whole five, ami they were all ultimately secured, yielding to the
captors a merited prize. We have noticed more of these whales along the coast
during the summer months, and they seem to be more together then ; but, as
the opportunities for observing their habits have been much greater at that
season of the year, we may have been led into error in this particular point.
On the northern coast the FinbaclvS, in many instances, have a much larger
fin than those in warmer latitudes, and I am fully satisfied that these are a
distinct species, confined to the northern waters.

We have had but little opportunity to observe the Finbacks that frequently
rove about the Gulf of Georgia and Juan de Fuca Strait. Several have been
seen, however, in May and June, on the coasts of California and Oregon, and
in Fuca Strait in June and July of the present year ; these observations satisfy
me that the dorsal fin of tliis, the northern species referred to, is strikingly
larger than in the more southern Finbacks.

Appended is a sketch of one individual of several seen in Queen Charlotte
Sound in February, 1865, which is a fair representation of them all. Those I
have noticed about Fuca Straits seem to have the back fin modified in size
between the extremely small found on Lower California and the one here rep-
resented.

Further investigation, which I hope to have the opportunity of before very
long, may settle this question.

VII. THE DOLPHIN FAMILY.
DELPHINID^i:.

In addition to the Whales which have been described as frequenting the
coast, many species of Cetacea of the Dolphin family are also found. Those
coming under our observation are known as the Bottlenose, Grampus, Black-
fish, Killer, Cowfish, Right-whale Porpoise, Finback or common Porp use, and
Bay Porpoise. All these species are covered with a coating of fat or blubber,
varying in thickness from half an inch upwards, according to their size and
degree of fatness.

THE BAY PORPOISE.
Phoc^ena vomerisa Gill.

Proceed. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1865, p. 178.

The habits of this animal differ from those of the other species found in the
open sea or along the coast. Their home seems to be in the discolored waters
between the limits of the pure ocean element and the fresh rivers. They are
rarely seen on either side of these boundaries. Our observation proves that
they are found as far south as the Valle de Banderas Bay, about the mouths
of the river Piginto, on the coast of Mexico, which is in lat. 20° 30^, and as far
north as Columbia River, lat. 40° 16''. In the winter season they are seen off
Astoria, and in Cathlamet Bay, twenty miles above ; but during the spring
and summer, when the river is fresh to its mouth, and in some instances for
miles at sea, they leave the Columbia, following in the vein of mixed water.
They are never found in schools, but occasionally six or eight may be seen
scattered about, appearing on the surface alternately, singly or two or three
at the same instant. They do not make those playful gambols and leaps that
the other species do, their general habits being to make a quick turn as soon
as appearing above water, apparently choosing the darkness below rather
than the light above. It is not from shyness, however, for they are met with
about roadsteads and harbors, among the shipping, and frequently play their
odd turnings close about vessels under way or at their moorings. By night,
when at anchor, we have known them to play about the vessel's rudder.

1869.]

54

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Sometimes they are seen among the breakers on the bars which front harbor
mouths, darting through or along the crest of the rollers as if excited into
unusual action by the dashing waves surrounding them.

They feed on small fish, and are occasionally taken in the seines that are
hauled about the shores of San Francisco Bay by the Italian fishermen.

BOTTLENOSE GRAMPUS.

The Bottlenose Grampus is probably the largest of the species of Cetaceans
reckoned among the Dolphin or Porpoise family. Its color approaches nearer
to brown than black. The fin on the back is comparatively small, angular
in shape, with the longest side attached to the body, and placed much nearer
the caudal fin than on other species. The name Bottlenose is said to have
been given it by reason of the head resembling the upper portion and neck of
a junk-bottle ; if so, from our observation of them (which was many times,
from the vessel's deck or masthead) in their different natural positions, the
bottle must have been one with a very large but exceedingly short neck; still
the comparison is not inappropriate. The Grampus has habits such as nearly
preclude capture, and but little is known about its peculiarities. They are
generally seen two or three together, "rounding" to "go down" as soon as
coming to the top of the water and spouting, and when rising to the surface
the next time may be beyond view. It is said they have been taken with a
line upward of three hundred fathoms long.

The largest of the species are not less than twenty-five feet long, and other-
Avise of similar proportions with the Blackfish. The head appears to be inter-
mediate between that of the Blackfish and Porpoise, having a shoi*t snout, or
round-pointed beak.

I met with a related species on the coast of Lower California, in July and
August.

An exception to this, however, occurred on the coast in July and August,
1856, between Cape St. Lucas and Cerros Island, at which time we saw large
numbers of them going in schools, ten, twenty or thirty together, nearly all
being of the largest growth, and their actions were a good imitation of a
school of small sperm whales — spouting several times up, and only remaining
down the usual time of sperm whales of their apparent size. Several fruit-
less trials were made to capture one. In two instances the harpoon was fast-
ened effectually, and the consequence was that the animal immediately dived
down with great velocity, each taking a line in its descent one hundred and
fifty fathoms long almost before the boats' crews knew what they were
about.

In March, 1853, off Panama Bay, on board the bark Rio Grande, we cap-
tured what was supposed to be two small Blackfish, but on making an exami-
nation concluded that they were a species of Grampus.

Our notes are as follow: Length of largest one, 10 feet. Fin on back in
same place as the Blackfish. Shape of fin — upper end more pointed, and the
whole fin taking nearer the form of the dorsal fin of the common Porpoise.
Body less in circumference in proportion to length than the Blackfish.

Form of head somewhat pointed, approaching to a beak. Color a uniform
black. Average thickness of blubber about an inch, and quite red ; the oil
when extracted retained the same cast, and appeared watery.

The jaws were narrower at the base, more elongated, but furnished with
teeth like those of the Blackfish.

FINBACK OR COMMON PORPOISE.

The Finback or common Porpoise is ordinarily — feet long, and its body
of similar proportions with the Right-whale and Bay Porpoise. Its dorsal fin
is longer and more pointed in proportion to its size than that of the Bay Por-
poise. Its color on back and sides blackish-brown. Belly white or yellow-

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 55

ish-white. We have observed this species to have a wider rans^e, to congre-
gate iu larger numbers and exhibit more activity than others of lh3 Dolphin
family. They are seen in numbers varying from a dozen up to many hun-
dreds, tumbling over the surface of the sea, or making arching leaps, plung-
ing again on the same curve, or darting high and falling diagonally sidewise
upon the water with a spiteful splash.

When a brisk breeze is blowing they frequently play about the bow of a
ship going at her utmost speed, the animal cutting across the bow and shoot-
ing ahead, or circling around the vessel, apparently sporting at CHse.

They are found in every ocean, and are often seen in considerable numbers
about the large bays and lagoons along this coast, that have no fresh water
running into them. They abound more along coasts where small fish are
found than in mid ocean, as they prey upon the smaller finny tribes, and to
obtain them shoot swiftly through the water, seizing the object of pursuit
with the slightest effort. Occasionally a large school of them will get into a
shoal of fish, frightening them so much that they will dart around in all
directions, taking no regular course to escape their pursuers, and finally get
so bewildered as to lose nearly all control over their movements. At such
times the Porpoise is manifestly the "sea swine," filling itself to repletion.

In perfectly calm weather they are sometimes seen huddled togetiier on the
glaring surface, their heads slightly raised, or reclining a little on their sides,
as if resting from their constant activity ; but such instances are not frequent.
Generally they are seen in large numbers rushing over and through the undu-
lating sea, exhibiting their active habits and propensity to roam over an
unlimited extent of ocean.

RIGHT-WHALE PORPOISE.

The Right-whale Porpoise in form and habit is nearly the same as the Fin-
back, except it has no fin on its back, and is rather more slender in proportion
to its length. They are not seen in as large numbers, and are seldom found in
shallow bays and lagoons. We have met with animals of this genus from
about Cape Horn as far north as Behring Sea, showing plainly that their feed-
ing grounds embrace the whole coasts of North and South America on the Pa-
cific side, if no more.

THE COW-FISH.

A species of Porpoise, larger than the Finback or Right-whale kind, is
known under the name of Cow-fish. It is longer also in proportion to its
greatest girth, but its head is not as long. Its teeth are larger, less in number,
and it differs in its color, being of a dull black, lightened a little on the belly.
This description is based upon two momentary observations — the first at St.
Bartolme Bay, in 1853, and the other in Ballena's Lagoon, in 1859. In its
habits, likewise, as observed on the coasts of California, Mexico and Peru, it
shows a striking difference. They are often remarked upon by whalemen as a
"mongrel breed," of doubtful character, often seen in company with Black-
fish, sometimes with Porpoises, and occasionally with Humpbacks, when the
latter are found in large numbers on an abundant feeding ground. They are
met with likewise in the lagoons along the coast, sometimes singly, or in pairs
or fives and sixes — rarely a larger number together — straggling about in a va-
grant manner through the winding estuaries, subsisting on the fish that abound
in them. At times they are seen moving lazily along under the shade of the
mangroves that fringe the shores in many places, at other times lying about in
listless attitudes among the plentiful supplies of food surrounding them, con-
sisting of many varieties of the finny herds that swarm in those waters.

THE KILLER.
Oeca rectipinna Cope.
The Killer is a peculiar species of Cetacean, that is found wherever the Ba-

1869.]

56

PBOCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Iffina Whales resort, and about islands and rocks that are the breeding places
of seals; consequently their feeding ground is as vast as that of the Hump-
back.

Their average length is about twenty feet for the males and fifteen for the
females, a long dorsal fin distinguishing them from all others of the Dolphin
tribe, as well as the shape of their head, which is more pointed than that of
the Blackfish, and with a still shorter beak than in the common Porpoise.
Their color is black or black with streaks of white on the forward part of the
sides from near the eye, extending as far as the end of the back fin in some cases.
A greater portion of the belly is almost invariably white in the females. We
never have seen but one of the species dead (a female, fifteen feet long, which
answers to the above description). The back fin, on account of its extraordi-
nary length, gives tiie fish a very singular appearance when moving along in
its usual manner. It measures six feet or more with the larger males, who
maj^ always be known by the extremity' of the fin turning over on one side as
represented in the accompanying illustration. This protuberance vibrating in
the air as the animal rolls to and fro or makes its tumbles over the waves, ap-
pears as though it was a great burden and required much effort for the animal
to keep right side up. But from what we have observed in different latitudes
we are inclined to the opinion that there must be more than one species of
Killer on the Pacific coast. Those about the shores of California to all ap-
pearance are rather slender animals, with a long dorsal fin of dagger shape
projecting from the back about one third of the distance between the extreme
end of the head and the "flukes.'" The covering of fat on the one that was
taken did not exceed three-fourths of an inch in average thickness, and was
very white. The yield of oil was one and a half barrels, and nearly as clear
as spring water.

Although diminutive in size compared with the different species of whales,
they prey upon them all, except the Cachalot, the lips and tongues of the ani-
mals often affording them a bountiful repast. These Killers may be not in-
aptly styled the cannibals among the whale kind, being the only species that
destroys individuals of their own race to afford them food. It is a most sur-
prising sight to witness three or four Killers about a whale. The sight of them
before making any attack seems to nearly paralyze the huge monster, who
frequently remains nearly stationarj', submitting to the attacks of its enemies
on either hand, and making little if any resistance.

The mode of attack is to keep about the whale's head, seizing it by the lips,
hauling it under water, and it is said to eat out the tongue. We once saw the
attack made by three of these voracious animals on a " cow and calf," in a la-
goon on the coast of Lower California. The whale was of the species known
as the California Gray, and her young one was grown to three times the bulk
of the largest Killer. The three made the attack, which lasted for an hour or
more, alternately on the old whale and her offspring, finally killing the calf,
which sunk to the bottom where there were about five fathoms depth. During
the melee the mother became nearly exhausted, having received several
wounds about the lips. As soon as the prey was on the bottom the Killers de-
scended, bringing up large pieces of the flesh, and devoured it after coming to
the surface. While gorging themselves in this manner the old whale made
her escape. The scene took place within about two hundred yards of the ves-
sel, our observations being made from the deck, and during the time the
whales and killers kept nearly a stationary position. Instances have been
known where Killers have attacked whales that had been killed by whalemen,
and were being towed to the ship, in so determined a manner that, notwith-
standing they were frequently lanced, or cut with a bow spade, they took the
animal from its human captors and hauled it under water out of sight. But
the Killer does not always live on whales. For several seasons we had noticed
them about the seal islands along the coast, and came to the conclusion that
they subsisted on the fish found around the edge of the kelp. By chance,

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 57

howeirer, we were so fortunate as to take one of them, as before mentioned,
and on examining, to satisfy our curiosity about the character of its food,
found that it consisted of young seals. At the time it was the sealing season,
aud the beaches about the island were covered with innumerable herds, and,
although there were sealing j)artics about the shores from early dawn till dark,
no one ever saw these savage animals molest the seals that were continually
swimming about in large numbers.

Compared with other species of the Dolphin family, the Killers are not nu-
merous. Their mating season, or time of gestation, is a matter of conjecture ;
probably in this respect they are similar to the Sperm Whale. We have met
with them in mid winter about the Gulf of Georgia, and along the northern
coast as far as Sitka, as often as at any other season of the year, showing
plainly that they are not confined to warm latitudes, nor migrate from the
colder climates during the rigorous months, and, in whatever region found,
they seem to be always prowling for prey.

THE SHORT-FINNED KILLER.
Orca ater Cope.

The Killers I have noticed in the Gulf of Georgia, about the northern end of
Vancouver Island, and as far north as the Aleutian Islands, appear to have
more white on the sides and are of a dull black on the back, the dorsal fin
shorter and much wider at the base. Their habits, however, are the same,
being almost invariably seen going along, with an undulating movement, three,
four, six, or eight together. They are generally irregular in their course, and
are much more of the time below than upon the surface of the water.

November 7th, 1868, we saw, in the Strait of Juan de Fuca, off Port Ange-
los, a number of Killers moving rapidly up the strait. We noticed one of the
number peculiarly marked on the side with a white spot of shape as shown in
the sketch. They were marked on the back also, with a brown spot approach-
ing a crescent shape, just behind the dorsal fin ; but we did not see them long
enough to ascertain the shape with any degree of accuracy. The pectorals of
the Killers seem to be farther from the head in proportion to their length of
body than any others of the Dolphin family. This seems to be a provision of
nature to facilitate their attacks on the whales, as when inserting the head be-
tween the lips of the Balaena, to eat out its tongue, these side fins of the former
are not in the way.

^ I am full}- convinced that there are at least two species of Killers on
the coast between the latitudes of 20° and 60° north : one with a dorsal fin ex-
cessively long, narrow at the base, standing very erect ; the other species with
a shorter fin, somewhat curved, much broader and slanting backward.

THE WHITEFISH.
Beluga sp.?

My opportunities for observing the habits of the Whitefish, as termed by the
American whalemen, have been as follows: In the Okhotsk Sea, along the
coast of Eastern Siberia, during the summer of 1862 ; in Plover Bay, lat. 64°
26^ N. long. 173° 07^ W., September, 1865, and in the same place and month of
1866; in Norton Sound Sept., 1865.

Their habits are similar to those of the Blackfish in many respects, being
seen in schools of various but usually less numbers than the former. When
pursued they appear to be wild and to avoid the boats. One striking peculi-
arity I observed was their going along one after the other in a sort of train, com-
ing to the surface and spouting irregularl}', showing but little of the body
above water. It was unusual to see more than two or three abreast, undulat-
ing through the water, at the same time. They often make a noise when com-
ing to the surface that may be compared to the faint low of an ox, but the

1869.]

58 PROCEEDINGS OE THE ACADEMY OF

Strain not so prolonged. Sometimes tliey gambol about vessels as do por-
poises. We know of only one instance, however, which was in Tchantar Bay,
during calm weather, in August, 1862. All our efforts to capture one proved
fruitless. We learned from the natives that they were less shy about the
mouths of rivers, where they resort frequently during the warm season, and
even ascend into fresh water where the depths permit. Only one chance of
getting a view of the animal was in the water close alongside the ship, and it
answered to the description of those found in the Arctic Ocean, the head and
neck appearing much smaller in proportion than that of any other species of
the Dolphin family. Their length may average ten feet, color white or yellow-
ish white.

THE BLACKFISH.
Globiocephalus scammonii Cope.
The Blackfish is found wherever sperm whales are, but in many instances
they congregate in much larger numbers, and are nearer to the coast than the
regular feeding grounds of the latter.

Although subsisting almost entirely on the same kind of food, the "squid,"
still, at times, when they visit bays or lagoons, they prey upon small fish found
there. In Magdalena Bay we have seen them in small schools, appearing as
much at home miles from sea as the Porpoise or Cowfish.

They are seen in schools of from ten or twenty to hundreds, going along
with less of the rising and falling movement than the Porpoise, and usually
spouting eight or ten times before " going down." If moving quickly much of
the head and body is exposed. When seen by whalemen in this wise they call
it going " eye out." In low latitudes, during perfectly calm weather, it is not
unfrequent to find them lying quite still, huddled together promiscuously, mak-
ing no spout, and seemingly taking a rest.

The l-lth December, 1862, on the coast of Lower California, in lat. 31°, land
ten miles ofl^, a school of Blackfish were "raised." We lowered the boats and
gave chase ; three were taken. The largest was measured accurately, and the
dimensions were as follows :

Ft. In.

Length 15 6

Depth of body 3 6

Circumference of body B 9

Breadth of flukes , 3 6

Depth of flukes 10

Distance from end of head to spoutholes 1 6

" " eye 1 4

'■ " dorsal fin 4 6

Length of pectorals 2 10

Distance from end of head to pectorals 2 9

Extreme width of pectorals 1

Length of mouth 1 4

" dorsal fin along the back 2

Extreme length of dorsal fin, upper edge 2 4

" width " 1

Distance from flukes to arms 5

" " abdomen 6

Length of spouthole across the head 4

The accompanying sketch exhibits the proportions of the animal. Its
color is black. The profile of head shows its shape laterally, and the spout-
hole, which is of a half circular shape, opening like a valve when the spout
ascends, closing as it escapes. The jet is not visible above two or three feet,
and rises perpendicularly when not affected by the wind. The number of teeth
on each side of the upper jaw varies from ten to twelve, in the lower jaw from
eight to ten ; the exposed parts one-fourth to three-fourths of an inch long.

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 59

The breadth of the head where cut from the body — just forward of the side fins
— was twenty-two inches. P'rom all we can learn of their breeding liabits, they
brint^ forth their young at any time, or in any part of the ocean, as necessity
may require. Off the Gulf of Dulce, coast of Guatemala, in February, 1853, a
calf taken from one was three feet long, the mother measuring thirteen feet.
In the same school it was taken from we saw several young ones apparently
about the same size as that above named, hence doubtless this foetus, had it
not been disturbed, would have soon ])layed in its native element.

The Blackfish is taken for its oil, which is however much inferior to sperm,
and the yield is small compared with its size, which may be calculated as
varying from ten to twenty-five feet in length, and the production of oil from
half a barrel to ten, the coating of fat or blubber varying in thickness from
one to three inches, and nearly white.

The flesh is like coarse beef, and after being exposed to the air for a few
daj's, then properly cooked, is by no means unsavory food, and is often used
by whalemen as a substitute for the fresh meat of land animals. The same
may be said of the different species of Porpoises.

Formerly Blackfish were found in large numbers on the coast of Lower
California, particularly about Cape St. Lucas and up the Gulf, but, probably
from the same cause as made mention concerning Sperm Whales, these grounds
are now but little frequented by them.

The Pursuit and Killing.

Although the Blackfish is taken for its oil, it is not an object of pursuit by
the whaler, as is the Balaena and Cachalot. Sperm whalers do not lower
their boats for Blackfish when on Sperm Whale ground, unless the day is far
spent or there is little prospect of " seeing whales."

The northern or polar whaleships pay but little attention to them, except it
may be when passing the time "between seasons," cruising within or about
the tropics. Occasionally a small vessel is fitted out for blackfishing and sperm
whaling, carrying a proportionately limited crew, thereby making blackfishing
profitable.

When a ship's boats are lowered for blackfish the chase begins as for other
whales, although the masters of many ships have their boats all ready, and run
just ahead of or into the school with the ship before lowering, by which means
they are generally so much frightened or " gallied," that they " bring to," that
is, stop for a short time, or move but slowly in all directions, giving the boats,
which are instantly lowered, a good chance to "get fast." The harpoon fre-
quently kills the fish ; if not, a few darts with the hand lance dispatches it.
As soon as dead they almost invariably sink ; therefore, if the ship is close to,
the fish is towed to the vessel at once ; but if a considerable distance off it is
either made fast to the loggerhead at the stern of the boat, or a buoy is tied
to it and left, the boats continuing the chase. In this way quite a number are
captured from one school.

Their favorite resorts along the coasts of North and South America, on the
Pacific side, are off Guatemala, Equador and Peru.

VIII. PHYSETERIDJE.

THE SPERM WHALE.

Physeter macrocephalus Linn.

The Sperm Whale in form and habits is in many respects the opposite of the
Balajna. Its color is a dull black, and in some individuals, particularly the
old males, approaches nearer to gray.

Its principal food is "squid," the flesh of which is tender, destitute of bones,
and as white as that of the sun-fish. "The upper portion of the head em-
braces a large cavity, separated and covered by cartilages, and filled with an

1869.]

60 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

oil which becomes fixed as it cools, and is known under the name of sperma-
ceti. The body yields sperm oil. The substance known under the name of
ambergris is a concretion found in the intestines of Sperm Whales."

The Sperm Whale is found usually in the deep open sea, or, as whalemen
term it, "off soundings," but many instances are known of their being seen in
large numbers, and captures have been made on soundings. This has been
the case to our knowledge off St. Bartolme Bay and Ballenas Bay, on the
Lower California coast, the depth of water at these places varying from forty
to eighty fathoms.

Many have the impression that the Sperm Whale is found but rarely out of
the limits of tropical or temperate waters, but we have known of the larger
class being often taken as far south as 50° of latitude, both in the Pacific and
Atlantic, and as far north in the Pacific as Cape Ommany, which is in latitude
56° W.

The Sperm Whale is usually found in schools numbering from fifteen up to
hundreds, females with their young predominating; sometimes the large males
are found alone, at other times in schools, either alone or in company. The
sperm whale is very regular in its spoutings, the volume of vapor being
ejected forward in one column at nearly a right angle with the body, and the
time it remains under water after it has made its habitual number of blows is
marked with great unifoi-rnity also. The spout-hole is situated at a point
formed by the superior and anterior surfaces of its head, a few inches on the
left side.

The one referred to as being taken off the Galapagos Islands in 1853,
spouted (or blowed) fifty-five times while on the surface (ten minutes), and
when he descended to the depths below, turned his flukes a few feet out of
water and was not visible again for fifty-five minutes; at the expiration of
which time he was seen as before, and when his spoutings were out, which
occurred at regular intervals, he again disappeared in the same manner. This
whale was pursued from eleven o'clock A. M. to four P. M., during which time
he did not deviate in his course, and the number of respirations at each rising
and the time of remaining under water after turning flukes were alike.

The smaller and j'ounger whales spout a less number of times, remain
under water a shorter period, and are not quite so regular in their habits.
This class of them usually remain above water one-fourth or one-fifth of the
time, making from thirty to forty spouts at each rising, and remain under
water about twenty minutes.

But when the Cachalot becomes alarmed, or is sporting on the ocean, it ex-
hibits widely different actions, sometimes thrashing the water with its flukes
(i. e. " loptailing,") at times descending below the surface, then giving itself
a shoot out of the water at an angle of about forty-five degrees, falls ou its
side, raising the water into a pile of foam that may he seen from the masthead
in clear weather fifteen miles. This singular antic is accounted for by its
pursuers, that it is to rid itself of" suck fish " and "crab-lice," but after ex-
amining these marine vermin, the reason appears to be an improbable one.
The Sperm Whale is seen not unfrequently in a perpendicular posture with the
head above water ; it has a habit likewise of rolling over many times in suc-
cession ; this it does occasionally after being harpooned, winding the line
around its body ; when " gallied "* it frequently " sweeps " around to ascertain
whether there is any object within reach; this " sweeping " is performed by
moving its tail from side to side. When feeding it is said to move through
the water with its under jaw hanging down perpendicular to its body, and
when any substance comes in contact with it the jaw is instantly shut ; but
when on the surface, if the animal attacks a large object like a boat, it turns
over on its back to bite.

Its time of gestation is not known, but is supposed to be ten months, and it

* Frightened.

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 61

brings forth its young in any part of the ocean it may be in, seldom having
more than one at a time, never more than two.

Formerly this species was found in great numbers along the coast of Upper
Californhi. The ships cruising for them kept in a belt of water extending
about one hundred miles from the land and closing in with the shore.

The frequent passing of steamers and the large increase in the number of
sailing vessels on the coast seems to have driven them from these feeding
grounds, and consequently at the present time this old cruising ground is
nearly abandoned. In their capture the bomb-gun and lance is used by
American whalers in addition to the ordinary hand harpoon and lance.
Greene's gun is much used by English colonial whalers in addition to the old
method.

IX. PINXEPEDIA.— THE SEA-ELEPHANT.

Macrorhinus angustirostris, Gill.

Proceedings of the Essex Institute v, 1866.

Proceed. Chicago Ac. Nat. Sci. ? loc.

A species of seal was in former years found along the coast from Cape St.
Lazarus to Point Reyes, herding on sandy or shingle beaches in great numbers,
and were known as the sea elephant. This animal, in form, resembles the
common seals, only materially differing in its mammoth proportions. Fre-
quently those unacquainted have mistaken " rookeries " of sea-lions for
elephants.

The extreme length of the oldest males will average fourteen or fifteen feet ;
the longest we have ever seen measured twenty-two feet from tip to tip, but
frequently individuals have been met with that gave seventeen to eighteen
feet from extreme end of trunk to that of posterior flippers. Its color is a
light brown, when the hair is grown to full length ; but immediately after
" shedding " it becomes of a leaden color, similar to the land elephant. The
hair on the body is very short and thin : about the under side of the neck in
the oldest males, the animal appears to undergo a change with age, the hair
falls off, the skin thickens and becomes wrinkled, the furrows crossing each
other, producing a checkered surface, and sometimes the throat is more or
less marked with white spots. Its proboscis extends from opposite the angle
of the mouth forward (in the large males) about fifteen inches when the ani-
mal is in a state of quietude, and the upper surface appears ridgy ; but when
it makes an excited expiration the trunk becomes more elongated and the
ridges nearly disappear. The average thickness of the skin that covers the
body is fully equal to that of the largest bullock. The mouth is furnished
with teeth similar to those of the Sea-Lion, the lower and largest canines
being from four to five inches long, the exterior portion conical, and present-
ing a smooth surface, the part imbedded in the jaw slightly curved and ridgy ;
the whole tooth is nearly solid, a small cavity only appearing at the lower end.
The females average ten feet between extremities and are destitute of the
proboscis, the nose being like the seals, except that it projects considerably
more over the mouth. The canine teeth are shorter, smoother below the
sockets, larger at the base and hollow nearly to the upper point. The sailors
on one voyage not having a supply of pipes, made them of cow-elephants
teeth, and the quills or leg-bones of the pelican; the former furnishing the
bowls and the latter the stems.

Our observations on the Sea-elephant show that they were found in much
larger numbers from February to June than during the other months of the
year: but more or less were on shore at all seasons upon their favorite
beaches, which were about Santa Barbara, Cerros, Guadaloupe, St. Bonites,
Natividad, St. Roque and Ascension islands, and a few of the most inaccessible
points on the main land between Ascension and Cerros. The first seen of
them would be coming up out of the water near the beach, then crawling up

1869.]

62 PEOCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

by degrees, frequently reclining as if to sleep, then again moving up or along
the shore, appearing not content with their last resting place. In this man-
ner they would ascend ravines or low intervals half a mile or more. They
are not so active on shore as the seals, but when excited to inordinate exertion
their motions are quick, the whole body quivers in their semi-vaulting, crawl-
ing gait, and the animal at such times manifests great fatigue ; notwithstand-
ing its unwieldiness we have sometimes found them on broken and elevated
ground fifty or sixty feet above the sea. The principal seasons of their coming to
shore are when they are about to shed their coats, and the females to bring forth
their young (which is one at a time, rarely two), and the mating season. These
seasons for "hauling up," as it is termed, are more marked in southern latitudes,
as I have learned from ship masters who have taken seals about Kerguelen's
Land, the Crozets and Hurds Islands. The different periods were known as the
pupping cow season, the brown cow, bulls and cows, and march bull seasons.
But in the species of our coast, either from the influence of climate, or some
other cause, we have noticed young pups with their mothers at quite the op-
posite months. The time of gestation is supposed to be three-fourths of the
year. The continual hunting of these animals may have possibly driven them
to irregularities. The most marked season, however, that we could discover
was that of the matured males, which shed their coats later than the younger
ones, and the females ; still, among the largest herd of these gregarious crea-
tures taken on Sta. Barbara Island, in June 1852, were several cows* with
pups apparently but a few days old. When they come on shore for the pur-
pose of '' shedding," if not disturbed, they remain out of the water till the old
hair falls off; by the time this change comes about, the animals are supposed
to lose at least half their fat. In the stomach of the Sea-elephant a few peb-
bles are found, which has given rise to the saying that " they take in ballast
before going down," (returning to the sea). On warm sunny days we have
watched them come up singly on a smooth beach and burrow in the dry sand,
throwing the loose particles that collected about the fore limbs over their
backs, nearly covering themselves from view. The largest number we ever
found in one herd was one hundred and sixty-five, which lay promiscuously
along the beach or up the ravine near by. The mode adopted to capture them
is to land in front of the " rookery," getting between them and the water,
with clubs and lances in hand, then raising a loud noise and moving slowly
toward them, they retreat back, appearing in a great state of alarm. Occa-
sionally an overgrown male will give battle, or attempt to escape, but a ball
from a musket through his brain despatches him, or some one with a lance
checks his progress by thrusting it into the roof of his mouth, which causes
the animal to throw back its head and settle on its haunches ; meanwhile
two men with heavy oaken clubs give it repeated blows about the head until
it is stunned or killed. After dispatching those that are disposed to show
resistance the party rush on to the main body, and the onslaught creates so
complete a panic among these harmless creatures, that losing all control of
their actions they will climb, tumble or roll over each other, when prevented
from further retreat by the projecting cliffs. One instance occurred where a
rookery of sixty-five were captured, and several were found that had neither
been clubbed or lanced, but were smothered by numbers of their kind piled
upon them. The whole flock when attacked manifest alarm by uttering their
peculiar roar, the sound of which among the large males is nearly as loud as
the lowing of an ox, but more prolonged in one strain, hoarser, and accom-
panied with much rattling in the throat.

The quantity of blood in this species is supposed to be double that con-
tained in a neat animal in proportion to its bulk. After the capture the flay-

* The term " cow and calf" are whalemen's names for mother and offspring of those
animals. Sealers apply the term clapmatch to the female seals, and to the young, pup.
Between whalers and sealers has originated cow for the female sea-elephant, wliile her
ottspring is called a "pup."

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 63

ing begins. First, with a large knife the skin is ripped on the upper side of
the' body its whole length, then skinned down as far as practicable without
rolling it over. The coating of fat that lays between the skin and the flesh,
being from one to seven inches in thickness, according to the size and con-
dition of the animal, is cut off into " horse pieces " about eight inches wide by
twelve to fifteen long, and a puncture made in each piece large enough to pass
a rope through. After Jiensing the upper side the animal is rolled over and
cut all around as above described. Then the horse pieces are strung on a
raft-rope,* which is taken to the edge of the surf and a long line made fast to
it, the end being thrown to a boat that lies just outside of the rollers. They
are thus hauled through the breakers and towed to the vessel, where they are
tried out on board.

The oil produced is superior to whale oil for lubricating purposes. The
individual jield may be less than a barrel with the smaller males and females,
but the larger males make from three to seven. Owing to the continual pur-
suit of these animals they have become nearly, if not quite, extinct, or have
fled to some isolated, unknown points for security. The latter conjecture,
however, seems hardly probable, for the Sea-elephant, it is said, has never been
found in the north Pacific, ex'cept on the coasts of the Galifornias.

Notice of some extinct VERTEBRA.TES from Wyoming and Dakota.
BY JOSEPH LEIDY, M. D.

1. Omomys Carteri.

On several occasions, Mr. J. Van A. Carter, of Fort Bridger, Wyoming, sent
to me a number of fossils consisting of small blackened fragments of bones
together with casts of fresh water shells, obtained from a tertiary formation.
In one of his letters, Mr. Carter remarks that the country in his vicinity is
covered with buttes, composed mostly of a gray sandstone, easily worn by the
weather, wind and snow. Particular strata of a greenish gray cast contain
the fossils.

Portions of rock accompanying the fossils consist of a crumbly, greenish
gray, granular material, with few imbedded fragments of soft and more homo-
geneous rock. Some of the specimens contain multitudes of minute whitish
concretions having a concentric arrangement. The fossil shell casts for the
most part consist of what appear to be a species of Melania and of Planor-
bis. The bone fragments consist of remains of teliost fishes but mainlv of
reptiles, generally too imperfect for specific identification. The reptilian re-
mains, mostly of turtles, indicate several species of Trionyx, Emys, etc. ; a
Crocodilian is also represented.

Among the fossil bones from the same formation, Mr. Carter sent me a por-
tion of the cranium of a small mammal reduced to indeterminate fraoments
€xcept a few pieces, which indicated apparently the skull of a carnivorous
animal about the size and general form of that of the Mink. Fragments of
the parietals and contiguous bones adherent to a portion of matrix, exhibit
a long, low sagittal crest separating a capacious pair of temporal fosste with
surfaces almost as convex as in the Mink. A portion of the supra-occipital
and condyles, adherent to another portion of matrix, enclose a foramen four
lines in transverse diameter.

As Dr. Carter informed me that he had obtained the fossil cranium from its
position in the rock, at my solicitation he examined the locality for other por-
tions of the skull, and had the good luck to discover the greater part of the
right ramus of the lower jaw, apparently of the same animal. This specimen
indicates an insectivorous mammal, probably belonging to the family of the
hedge-hogs. Among living insectivora, described and figured by DeBlainville,

* A rope three fathoms long, with an eye spliced in one end.

1869.]

64 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Gervais, Peters, Mivart, and others, the jaw fragment approaches most
nearly in size and form the corresponding portion in the representations
of Tupaia ferruginea^ of Java and neighboring isles. It likewise nearly
resembles in size and form the corresponding portion of a fossil jaw,
found in a miocene formation of Sansan, France, and referred to an insectivorous
animal with the name of Galerix viveroides. The extremities of the ramus are
lost, and the remaining portion contains four molar teeth. The depth of the
jaw below the position of the latter measures about two lines and is nearly
uniform. The base is but slightly convex fore and aft, below the position of
the teeth. Back of these to the broken end of the specimen it is slightly con-
cave. The mental foramen is below the position of the second premolar, and
the symphysial articulation reached as far back as the third. The masseteric
impression is well marked, and well defined about two lines back of the
position of the second true molar.

Seven molar teeth, in an unbroken series, appear to have occupied the side
of the jaw. Four appear to have been double-fanged premolars with laterally
compressed conical crowns. Only the third and fourth of the latter are pre-
served. The alveoli of the second are retained, and also the inner side of what
appears to be a pair for the first premolar.

The last true molar, which has lost its crown in the specimen, appears to
have been a double fanged tooth, constructed like those in advance.

The teeth in the specimen from the third premolar to the second true molar
successively, and after the former, gradually decline in height or prominence.
The third and fourth premolars nearly resemble in general form and propor-
tions the second and third premolars of the Opossums. The true molars are
constructed on the same general pattern as those of the genera Sorex, Erina-
ceus, Gymnura, Potomogale, Galeopithecus, and the Opossums. All the teeth
are provided externally with a basal cingulum or ridge, nowhere elevated into
points or cusps.

The crown of the third premolar, more prominent than in any other tooth,
is triangular, longer than broad, pointed, and thicker posteriorly. Its anterior
border is acute and slightly convex in the length ; the posterior outline, formed
by the back part of the outer convex surface, is slightly concave. The inner
surface, narrower than the outer, presents at its fore part below, a narrow
ledge feebly continuous forward as an element of the basal cingulum. This
is best developed as a talon at the back of the crown, and least externally and
postero-internally. The outer surface of the crown, convex transversely, is
continuous posteriorly.

The fourth premolar has nearly the same form as the preceding tooth, but
its crown is lower and wider. The basal cingulum is rather better developed
externally and less so antero-internaliy. The inner surface is sensibly con-
cave, and the ridge defining it from the postero-external surface exhibits a
feeble tendency to form an accessory point.

The crowns of the two succeeding true molars, retained in the specimen,
are nearly alike in size and form, though the first is in a trifling degree wider
and higher. They are bounded by a well marked basal cingulum externally,
nearly half their depth, reaching across the median valley and also anteriorly,
but ceasing and becoming obsolete behind.

Two cusps or lobes project at the outer part of the crown of the true mo-
lars, and three smaller ones internally. Of the outer cusps the anterior is the
higher and narrower. Of the inner ones the posterior two are nearly equal and
the anterior is the smallest; most so in the second molar. They are all three-
sided pyramids, each with one face directed inwardly and two outwardly.
Their height is not greater than their width, nor are tliey very sharply pointed.
The borders defining the inner surface of theantero-external cusps conjoin the
antero-internal two cusps, including a small depression. Of the borders defin-
ing the inner concave surface of the postero-external cusp, the front one joins
the posterior surface of the antero-external cusp, while the back one joins
the postero-internal cusp.

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 65

The space occupied by the mohir series was about 6} lines. The length of
the crown of the third premolar is one and one-lifth lines ; the breadth 1 line.
Length of crown of second premolar five-sixths of a line, breadth one and one-
fifth lines. Breadth of first true molars \\ lines.

Unlike the corresponding part of any other insectivorous animal known to
me, I have referred the jaw fragment to a new genus, and have dedicated the
species to its discoverer, with the name of Omomys Carleri.

2. NaNOHYUS P0UCINU8.

In the expedition of Dr. F. V. Hayden, in the summer of 1866, to the Mau-
vaises Terres of White River, Dakota, among tlie fossil vertebrate remains
previously noticed or described, he discovered a fragment of the left ramus of
the lower jaw of a small mammal, supposed to be nearly allied, if not belong-
ing to the suiline family.

The teeth in the fragment consist of the last temporary molar ; the suc-
ceeding two permanent molars in functional position, and the anterior por-
tion of the third molar partially protruded. The interior of the jaw beneath
the temporary molar is occupied by the crown of the last premolar, which,
judging from the appearance of the exposed outer part, has the same form and
size as the molars behind.

The temporary molar is inserted by a pair of widely separated fangs, and
its crown presents the usual greater breadth than in the succeeding pair of those
of the teeth behind, as in pachyderms generally. The crown is trilobate ex-
ternally and internally, and this condition probably corresponds with three
constituent pairs of lobes, the distinction of which is for the most part oblite-
rated by wearing. The median division of the crown is largest, and that in
advance is the smallest. The abraded summit of the former presents an
irregularly transverse quadrate surface of exposed dentine continuous with a
smaller subreniform tract upon the anterior division. The posterior division
of the crown still exhibits the distinction of a transverse pair of lobes, of
which the outer one is much the larger. This presents on its abraded summit
a crescentoid surface of exposed dentine, and the inner one a minute circular
islet of the same substance, and both are considerably below the level of the
worn surfaces of the divisions of the crown in front.

The two permanent true molars preserved in the specimen are alike in
form and size, and the anterior portion of the last molar agrees in character
with the corresponding portion of the teeth in advance.

The crown of the first and second true molars is composed of two transverse
pairs of conical lobes of which the anterior are about a third higher than the
posterior, and are separated from them by a deep transverse valley. The
inner and outer lobes are separated by a valley almost half the depth of the
former, closed at the fore and back part of the crown by a small tubercle. The
front tubercle is most conspicuous, and receives a feeble offset or ridge from
the antero-external lobe. A similar offset from the postero-external lobe ends
in the middle of the transverse valley of the crown. A basal ridge exists no-
where except at the fore part of the crown, where it is most conspicuous exter-
nally and is there associated with the tubercle closing the front of the fore
and aft valley of the tooth.

A minute circular islet of exposed dentine occupies the summits of the
anterior lobes of the crown of the first true molar.

The breadth of the crown of the last temporary molar is 2\ lines. The
breadth of the crown of the second unworn permanent true molar is If lines,
and its height at the anterior division is the same.

The depth of the jaw fragment below the first permanent true molar is one
fourth of an inch. The base is moderately convex fore and aft.

Though I have found it difficult to ascertain, by comparison with figures, how
far the fossil described difiFers from the corresponding portion of other known
animals, it nevertheless appears to me to do so sufiBciently to refer it to a dis-
tinct genus and species, for which I have proposed the name of Nanohyus por-
cinus.

1869.] 5

Ob PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

3. Trionyx guttatds.

Remains apparently of the same species of Trionyx as that indicated by
the small fragments above mentioned, were discovered by Dr. F. V. Hayden
in a Tertiary deposit at Church Buttes, ner.r Fort Bridger, Wyoming. The
most characteristic specimen obtained by Dr. Hayden, during a geological sur-
vey on account of the Commissioners of the General Land Office at Wash-
ington, belongs to the Geological Cabinet of that Office, and has been sub-
mitted to my inspection by its Secretary, Dr. A. R. Roessler.

The specimen consists of the portion of a carapace adherent to a homo-
geneous, greenish gray, argillaceous rock. It retains the third to the seventh
vertebral plates inclusively entire, Avith part of the second one; and the 6th
and 7th right costal plates, together with parts of those of the second to the
fifth inclusively of the same side, and smaller portions of several of the
same plates of the left side.

The plates are for the most part marked by distinct or separate circular pit-
tings, which only run into one another more or less at the outer third of the
costal plates.

The carapace appears to have been longer than broad, and has approxi-
mated about 14 inches in length by about a foot in breadth. The fourth and
fifth costal plates appear to have been unusually expanded or widened out-
wardly. The sixth costal plates conjoin in the median line, though their inner
angles are separated by the sixth and seventh vertebral plates. The breadth
of the last costal plate is within half an inch of its length.

The third vertebral plate is six-sided or coffin-shaped in outline. It mea-
sure 23 lines long, 5 lines wide at the fore part, gradually widening to a little
over an inch, and then rapidly narrowing to 8 lines at its back part.

The second vertebral plate appears to have had the same form and a some-
what greater size.

The fourth vertebral plate in the specimen is rather irregular at the sides,
and the right posterior angle is twice as long as on the left side. Its length
is 20^ lines ; its width where greatest posteriorly is 10^ lines.

The fifth vertebral plate is smaller than the former and has its lateral
borders approaching in a curve at the hinder extremity. Its length is 19^
lines ; its anterior border is 7 lines wide , and its greatest breadth is 8i lines.

The sixth vertebral plate is cordiform or five-sided in outline, and is almost
10 lines in length and breadth.

The seventh vertebral plate is lozenge-shaped and occupies the interval
between the approximate angles of the 6th and 7th pairs of costal plates. It
is 5i^ lines long and 5 lines wide.

The last costal plates include a deep wide emargination behind, and each
exhibits a deeper and more abrupt notch at the outer extremity. The length
of the plate from the back angle of the last vertebral plate to its outer end, in
a straight line is 25 lines ; its breadth is 19 lines.

The length of the sixth costal plate along the middle is 41 lines. It is
narrowest at the middle, where it measures 16 lines. At the inner extremity
it is 19 J lines wide ; at the outer end 18 lines.

The length of the fifth costal plate along the middle is 57 lines ; its breadth
internally 22 lines ; externally 40 lines. The species may be distinguished by
the name of Trionyx guttatus.

4. Emys Wyomingensis.

An episternal bone, among the specimens, obtained by Mr. Carter near Fort
Bridger, Wyoming, indicates a species of Emys about as large as the living
Emys^Trachemys) scabra or E. [Ptychemys] rugosa, but it possessed a pro-
portionately thicker shell than in either of these species. The bone is re-
markably like the corresponding one of Eir.ys petroki (Pr. A. N. S. 1868, 176)
from Harden Co., Texas, but is shorter along the median suture, propor-
tionately broader and rather less produced at its fore part.

The portion of the bone impressed by the gular scutes projects abruptly for-

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 67

ward about a fourth of an inch, and ends in a transverse truncate border,
which in the entire sternum would measure two inches in width. The
position of the ento-sternal plate, of the usual form, at the suture of the epi-
and hyo-sternal plates would measure 22 lines in breadth. The depth of
the episternal to the ento-sternal is 11 lines; the breadth at the posterior
suture 14 lines. In the specimen near the median suture there exists a
groove, apparently indicating a long narrow scute intervening between the
gular scutes, but not reaching the anterior border of the sternum within four
lines. This last mark may perhaps be an anomalous one.

5. Crocodilus aptus.

Dr. A. R. Roessler, in charge of the Geological Cabinet of the General Land
Office, Washington, has submitted to my inspection a specimen from the col-
lection consisting of a cervical vertebra of a Crocodile. The specimen was
found by Col. John H. Knight, U. S. A., near South Bitter Creek, where it
crosses the stage route about 70 miles west of the summit of the Rocky
Mountains, in western Wyoming. It is thorougly petrified, and the bone
appears to have been of mature age. It has lost the greater part of the neural
arch with the dependent processes, but is otherwise perfect. It belonged to an
animal about the size of the Mississippi Alligator, and the bone bears a near
resemblance with the corresponding sixth or seventh cervical vertebra of that
species. The hypapophysis has the same character, projecting obliquely from
the fore part of the centrum, but the latter is less carinated back of the pro-
cess.

Length of centrum in its axis IG lines ; height and breadth in front 14 lines.
Length of hypapophysis below the anterior articular concavity of the centrum
5 lines.

Probably the vertebra may belong to the same species as less character-
istic fragments of bone, found by Mr. Carter, near Fort Bridger, in the same
territory.

Descriptions of new CRINOIDEA and ECHINOIDEA, from the Carboniferous
rocks of the "Western States, with a note on the Genns ONYCHASTER.

BY F. B. MEEK AND A. H. WORTHEN,

Of the Illinois State Geological Survey.

Genus SYNBATHOCRINUS, Phillips, 1836.
Synbathocrinus Wachsmdthi, M. and W.

Body below the top of the first radial pieces nearly semi-globose, or ap-
proaching semi-oval, being about twice as wide as high, and rounding to the
column below. Base forming one-third to nearly one-half the height, somewhat
basin shaped, and obscurely pentagonal in outline as seen from below ; basal
pieces, with the two larger divisions wider than high, and hexagonal in outline,
and the smaller about as wide as high, and pentagonal in form. First radial
pieces two-thirds to three-fourths as high as wide, with a general quadrangu-
lar outline, but two of those on the anal side, have each one of the superior
lateral angles slightly truncated to form a notch for the reception of the first
anal piece, so as to give each an additional angle. Second radial pieces of
nearly the same size as the first, but not tapering upward as much as the first do
downward, quadrangular in outline, and generally about three-fourths as long
as wide. First anal piece about half as wide as long, pentagonal in form and
equaling the length of the second radial pieces; second anal piece nearly half
as long as the first, on the truncated upper end of which it rests ; trigonal in
outline, the upper angle being acute.

Arms very long and very gradually tapering, angular along the middle of
the dorsal side, and each composed of more than thirty quadrangular pieces,

1869.]

68

PEOCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

that are somewhat wider than long, and provided with a very deep ambulacral
furrow within. Minute ambulacral pieces extending up the furrows of the
arms, from five to seven to each arm-piece, in each row, the two rows arching
over the deep furrow. Proboscidiform ventral tube very long, slender, cylin-
drical, and composed of apparently not more than two or three vertical
ranges of oblong curved pieces, about half as long as those of the arms.

Column comparatively rather stout, rounded, and composed near the base
of more or less irregular pieces, gradually becoming thicker farther down, and
all pierced by a small rounded or subpentagonal central canal.

Surface, when well preserved, showing under a strong magnifier minute
granulations, with a tendency to run together into a kind of vermicular style
of marking.

Height of body of a medium sized specimen, to the top of the first radial
pieces, 0-16 inch ; breadth 0-28 inch ; height to top of second radial pieces,
0-30 inch. Length of arms, about 3 inches ; breadth of same at the base, C-15
inch. Thickness of column, 0-10 inch.

This species will be at once distinguished from all the others known to us, by
having its body obtusely rounding under to the column below, instead of ex-
panding upward from the same, with straight or concave sides. By this char-
acter alone of its body, exclusive of the second radials, when found detached,
it can be readily distinguished from S. dentattis,Oyven and Shumard, as well as
from S. Wortheni and S. papilla tus, Hall.

We have elsewhere noticed the occurrence of a long pipe-stem-like ventral
tube in this genus, and a double series of minute ambulacral pieces extending
up, and apparently arching over, the ambulacral furrow of each arm.* These
characters were first observed in this species, in which the ventral tube seems
to be nearly as long as the arms. We have also seen indications of the same
characters in 8. Wortheni, and fragments of other undetermined species, and
hence have little doubt that they occur in all the species of the genus, when
well preserved. There is perhaps scarcely any other type of all the various
geaei-a of Crinoids, in which one would less expect to find such an elongated
ventral tube, than in this.

Locality and Positton. Upper division of the Burlington group, Burlington,
Iowa. Lower Carboniferous. No. 335, of Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

Synbathocrinus brevis, M. and W.

Body small, expanding rather rapidly, with nearly straight sides from the
base to the top of the first radial pieces, thence contracting very slightly to
the top of the second radials. Form and arrangement of the body pieces very
nearly as in the last. Arms comparatively short, and tapering rather rapidly
at the extremities, angular or subcariuated along the middle of the dorsal side,
the carina being interrupted, or obsolete near the sutures between the arm-
pieces, so as to j)resent, as seen in outline, a subcrenate appearance ; arm-
pieces eighteen to each arm ; excepting the first one, slightly wider than long.
Column slender, round and composed of alternately thinner and thicker pieces
near the base ; some of those 0-25 in. farther down, however, being as long
as wide, all marked with strong radiating striae on their articulating surfaces,
and pierced by a small, apparently round, central canal. Surface finely
granular.

Height of body to the top of the first radial pieces, 0-15 inch, to top of second
do., 0-20 inch ; breadth, 0-21 inch ; length of arms, 1-35 inches.

This species will be readily distinguished from S. Wortheni^ S. denfatus and
/S. papillatus, by its much shorter arms, which have scarcely two-thirds as many
pieces as in those species. Its body is also rather less spreading, and slightly

♦Sometimes these pieces are thrown apart along the middle, as if they had been mova-
able and articulated so as to open or close together over the ambulacral furrows. So
far as we have been able to see there would appear to be no pinnulse in this genus.

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 69

more inclined to round in to the column below, but not near so much so as in
the last described species, from which it also differs in having much shorter
arms.

Locality and FosUion. Lower Burlington beds, Burliugtou, Iowa. Lower Car-
boniferous. No. 33G of Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

Genus DICHOCRINUS, Munster, 1839.
DiCHOCRiNus LiNEATus, M. and W.

Body ovoid-subglobose, about as wide as long, not rounded below, but
abruptl}' tapering to the column ; widest near the middle, and but slightly
contracted above. Base forming very nearly half the height, and expanding
rapidly, so as nearly to equal, at the top, the greatest breadth of the body ;
margins faintly sinuous for the reception of the next range of pieces ; sutures
a little furrowed, but anchylosed. Radial pieces quadrangular, generally
nearly or quite as wide as long ; sinns above, for the reception of the second
radials, shallow, rounded, and equaling about half the breadth of the upper
margin, marked with fine radiating strise at the outer margin. Anal piece as
wide below as the first radials, but narrower above, and slightly shorter ; sub-
pentagonal in form, being but very obtusely angular in the middle below.
(Succeeding parts unknown.)

Surface ornamented with numerous sharply elevated lines, slightly less than
the furrows between. Of these lines, on the base, a part near each lateral
margin run parallel to the same ; while other series farther from the margins,
although parallel with each other, on each side of the middle, run obliquely
so as to connect with the lateral ones, and with each other, along the middle,
in such a manner as to form three divaricating series on each piece : near the
upper margins there are also traces of a few very fine crowded striie running
parallel to the same. On the first radial and anal plates there are also a few
fine transverse stri^, near and parallel to the lower margins; while on a tri-
angular central space, with its most acute angle terminating near the middle
of the top, there are vertical or slightlj^ converging striae of the same size as
the divaricating series on the base ; and on each upper latter space, on each
side, anotlier series runs tip and down, parallel to the lateral margins. Column
rather small, round, and provided with a very minute central perforation.

Height of body to top of first radials, 0-65 inch ; breadth, 0-Gi3 inch ; height
of base about 0-30 inch.

This species seems to be somewhat intermediate in its characters between
D. ovatus and D. slriatus, of Owen and Shumard. From the first it differs in
having distinct, sharply defined, continuous lines on the body plates, instead
of merely rows of depressed granules ; and these lines also run diff"erently on
the basal pieces from the rows of granules on that part of D. ovatus, which are
described as forming a series of hexagons, one within the other, instead of
forming three series of triangles, as the lines on our species show a tendency
to do. The lines are also as well defined on the radial and anal pieces of our
species as on the base, while the surface of these parts of D. ovatus is described
as being merely " corrugated."

In having continuous, well defined, raised lines, it agrees more nearly with
D. striatus, of Owen and Shumard ; but it is easily distinguished from that
species by having these lines very much finer and more crowded, as well as
greatly more numerous, there being about ten of them in the space of 0-20
inch, which only includes four or five of those on Z>. slriatus.

Locality and Position. Lower Burlington beds, Burlington, Iowa. Lower
Carboniferous. Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

DicHOCRiNcs pisuM, M. and W.
Body small, somewhat cup-shaped, approaching sub-globose, rather de-
pressed or flattened below, and from one-fourth to one-third longer than wide,

1869.J

70 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

slightly contracted at the top. Base nearly flat, or presenting a shallow dish-
shape, sub-circular outline ; facet for attachment of the column very small.
First radial plates generally slightly longer than wide, and nearly quadrangu-
lar in form, comparatively moderately thick ; sinus in the upper margin of each,
for the reception of the second radials, very shallow, and about half as wide
as the upper margin. Anal plate wider below than any of the first radials,
but narrowing upward ; provided with a very obscure angle at the middle of
the under side, so as to present a sub-pentagonal outline. (Arms and vault
unknown.)

Surface ornamented with comparatively strong, rounded costae, wider than
the furrows between. On the base these are arranged in three divaricating
series, the lateral costae being parallel to the lateral margins, and the diver-
gence upward. On the radial and anal plates there are 7 or 8 of these costce
which run nearly vertically and parallel, the lateral ones, however, converging
above, so as to leave small triangular spaces on the superior lateral corners,
on which there are a few short costs not properly connected with the others.

Height of body, 0-30 inch ; breadth, 0-37 inch. Cost<e on radial plates, six
or seven in the space of 0-20 inch.

In the coarseness of its costaj this species is nearest like D. striatus, of
Owen and Shumard, but it differs in having its costse rather smaller, more
rounded and separated by furrows, distinctly smaller than the costae them-
selves, which are also without the numerous little asperities seen on those of
D. s'riatus. It is also a smaller, shorter species, with a much more depressed
or nearly flat base.

Locality and Position. Upper division of the Burlington group at Burling-
ton, Iowa. Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

Genus ERISOCRINUS, M. and W. 1865.

This genus was originally proposed by us for the reception of two A'ery
similar forms, one of which, from the upper part of the Coal-Measures of Il-
linois, we called E. typus, and the other, from the same horizon in Nebraska,
we called E. Nebrascensis. The specimens then known consisted only of the
body up to the summit of the first radials. This part of these forms is sub-
hemispherical in outline, being rounded below, and evenly truncated above,
with five minute, or very small basal pieces, surrounded by, and alternating
with, somewhat larger subradials, which in their turn alternate with, and sup-
port, five larger, thick first radials, with articulating facets occupying their
entire breadth above for the reception of the next range of radials. These
radials being in contact with each other all around, leave no spaces for anal
or interradial pieces. All the specimens then known had lost the arms, but
those of other species now before us are seen to be simple from their origin
on the second radial pieces, and each composed of a single series of trans-
versely oblong pieces.

Subsequently another species was found in the same beds in Illinois, pre-
senting an obconic form of body, with a protuberent base, and we were so
much impressed with its resemblance to an East Indian Carboniferous type
described by Dr. de Koninck, under the name Philocrinus, in 1863, that we
were led to think our genus not distinct, and his name having priority of date
we referred the two forms we had first described to it.* In doing this, how-

* Our later comparisons of other specimens have led to the conclusion that these are
only varieties of one species. Good specimens of a form described by us in the Proceedings
for Aug. 1865, from a number of detached plates, under the name E. tuherculatus, also show
that it does not belong to this genus, as it has a large oblong subanal, and a true anal
piece, resting on the upper truncated edge of one of the subradials. Hence, although
it agrees exactly in all its other known parts with Erisorrinus, it cannot properly be re-
tained in that genus, but would brlniig to Cyatlincrinus, giving that group the limits gen-
erally admitted. It is not a typical Ci/at/nirriniis, however, but nearer the group BanjcriJius,
and yet differs from the typical forms of that group, in Iiaving its second radials as wide
as the lirst, and articulating by broad transversely fin-rowed facets, instead of merely
resting in comparatively small sinuses in the upper edge of the latter.

[April

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 71

ever, we thought it desirable to change the specific name of our species typ^l,s,
it not being the type of the genus I'hilocrinus.

We were led to regard our species as not being generally distinct from
Philocrinus, because they agree exactly in all their known generic characters,
unless the lower range of pieces shown in the figure of Fliilocrinm reallj'' are
the basal pieces, which would make that genus without subradial pieces.
As the typical specimen, however, seems, from the figure, to be a little defec-
tive at the lower extremity, and the lowest range of j)ieces represented, if
really prolonged to the bottom of the body, would have to present a very
remarkably elongate cuneiform outline, we were strongly impressed with the
probability of there being another smaller series of true basal pieces below
the lowest range represented (but not visible in consequence of the con-
dition of the specimen), especially as these forms appear to agree so nearly
in other respects. If so, there would be no generic differences between
Philocrinus and Erisocrinus, and the American species would have to stand
under the former name. If Philocrinus, however, really has no subradial
pieces, then, of course, Erisocrinus must be an entirely distinct genus. Until
all doubts on this point, however, can be removed, we finally concluded to
retain our name Erisocrinus.

The close similarity of the body of some species of this genus, and that
of another allied form, found in the upper members of the Coal-Measures of
Nebraska, to the corresponding parts of the genus Encrinus, and tlieir wide
difference from all the then known Lower Carboniferous Crinoids of America,
have been appealed to as facts sustaining an opinion, maintained by some, that
these Nebraska beds belong to the age of the Permian of Europe, instead of
to the Coal Measures. The fact, however, that we now have the species of
this genus described in this paper, from the lower part of the lower Carboni-
ferous or Mountain Limestone at Burlington, ought, we should think, to be
sufficient evidence that no such conclusions can be properly based on this
type of fossils.

Erisocrinus antiquus, M. and W.

Body small, much depressed, somewhat basin shaped, or very rapidly ex-
panding from the base to the summit of the first radial pieces, at the connec-
tions of which it is very faintly sinuous around the margins, as seen from be-
low. Base small, subpentagonal, almost entirely covered by the round, flat
facet for the attachment of the column ; basal pieces exposing very small pen-
tagonal surfaces, three or four times as wide as long. Subradial pieces each
about one-half to two-thirds as large as the whole base, all uniformly pentag-
onal (there being no visible angle at the middle of the base), and with the up-
per sloping sides each about twice the length of the lateral margins. First
radial pieces about twice as large as the subradials, half as long as wide, and
all equally pentagonal, with the lateral and inferior sloping edges of nearly
equal length, and the straight, upper truncated side equaling the entire breadth ;
articulating upper edge very thick, deeply notched at the middle on the inner
edge, and provided with the usual transverse ridge and furrows. Second
radials as wide as the first, and about three-fourths as long as wide, angular
in the middle on the dorsal side, and constricted on each lateral margin ; pen-
tagonal in form, and supporting on their superior sloping sides the first arm
pieces, which are quadrangular, slightly constricted on each side, and a little
wider than long; arms beyond these simple (as far as they can be traced in
the specimen), two to each ray, or ten in the whole series, and composed of
somewhat shorter quadrangular pieces, provided with a well defined ambula-
cral furrow within. Surface merely finely granular.

Height of body to the top of the first radials, 0-12 in.; breadth, 0-23 in.

This little species will be readily distinguished from those already known
from the coal measures, by its much more depressed, rapidly expanding body,
as well as by its proportionally longer and constricted second radial pieces.

1869.]

72 PK0CEEDING8 OP THE ACADEMY OF

Locality and position. Lower division of the Burlington group, at Burling-
ton, Iowa. Lower Carboniferous. Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

Erisocrincs Whitei, M. and W.
Body of moderate size, very much depressed, or almost dish-shape, below
the top of the first radials, being about three times as wide as high. Base
very small, and entirely hidden by the slender, round column, when it is at-
tached. Subradials small, forming together a nearly flat pentagonal disc.
First radials comparatively large, thick and presenting a general quadrangular
outline, there being scarcely any visible angle at the middle of the under side,
which is distinctly shorter than the straight transverse upper edge, and about
as long as the divergiuglateral margins. Second radial pieces as large as the
first, which they equal in breadth ; broadly rounded on the outer or dorsal
side, pentagonal in form, and each supporting on its superior sloping sides
two arms, thus making ten to the whole series. Arms simple from their ori-
gin, flat on the outside, and composed of quadrangular pieces, the first of which
is nearly as long as wide, and the others about half as long as wide, with
scarcely any tendency to assume a wedge shape. Surface merely finely gran-
ular.

Height of body to the top of first radial pieces, measuring to their inner
edges, 0-14 inch; breadth, 0-.40 inch; breadth of column, 0'G8 inch.

This species will be distinguished from the last by its more depressed body,
which has its under side between the top of the first radial pieces and the
column, slightly convex in outline, instead of concave, which results from the
greater prominence of the basal and subradial pieces of the latter. The spe-
cies under consideration likewise has its radial pieces proportionally wider,
particularly the second radials, which also differ in being broadly rounded
instead of angular on the dorsal side, and not constricted on their lateral
margins. Its arm pieces are also flat, instead of convex, on their outer
side.

Owing to the fact that the column entirely hides the very small base of this
species, and the sutures between the subradials, or first range of pieces around
the summit of the column, are rather obscure, and really look as if there were
only three instead of five of these pieces, we were led to suspect that these
might be the basal pieces, which would remove the species entirely from the
genus Erisocriiius. On removing the column, however, we have been able to see
what we believe to be five minute basal pieces within the first series surround-
ing the end of the column, which would necessarily have to be succeeded by
five pieces in the next range. Hence, we think we can scarcely be mistaken
in supposing the appearance of only three suture lines between the plates we
regard as the subradials, as merely an abnormal condition, resulting from two of
the suture lines being anchylosed, or accidentally obliterated. This supposi-
tion is also strengthened by the near specific relations between this and the
last described species, in which all the basal, subradial and other plates are
clearly and distinctly seen.

In case our genus Erisocrinus is not distinct from Fhilocrinus, with which we
have already suggested it may be identical, then the names of the species here
described will have to be written Philocriniis antiquus and P. Whitei.

The specific name of this species is given in honor of Dr. C. A. White, the
able State Geologist of Iowa.

LocalUy and position. Upper division of the Burlington Group, at Burling-
ton, Iowa. Lower Carboniferous. Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

Genus CALCEOCRINUS, Hall.

Calceocrinus, Hall, 1852. Palaeontology N. Y. Vol. 11, p. 352.

? Clieirocrinus, Hall, 1860. Thirteenth Report Regents University N. Y. (State

Cab. N. H.), p. 122 ; (not Clieirocrinus, Eichwald 185G, Bull. Soc. des Nat.

Mosc. vol. 29, p. 123, and Leth. Ross. vol. 1, p. 645, pi. xxxii, fig. 1, a, b.,

1860).

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 73

Dr. Shumard has sufigested, in his Catalogue of North Americau Palaeozoic
Echinedermata (Trans. Acad. Sci. St. Louis, ii, p. 358, 1866), that the curious
genus of Crinoids described by Prof. Hall, in the Report of the Regents, cited
above, under the name Cheirocrinus, may be the same type for which Prof.
Hall had previously proposed the name Calccocri/ws, in the second volume of
the Palaeontology of N. Y. The name Calceocrinus was proposed by him for
some subtrigonal pieces of a Crinoid, which, judging from his figures and de-
scription, certainly resemble very closely the basal piece of the subsequent-
ly proposed genus Cheirocrinm, — so closely indeed, that we are much inclined
to adopt Dr. Shumard's suggestion that they may belong to the same type.
Still it seems very improbable that Prof. Hall, with the original typical speci-
mens of liis Calceocrimts (of which he says many specimens, all agreeing in
form, have been found) at hand for comparison, should have been less liable
to understand their true relations to his subsequently described type than
others, with only his figures and description of Calceocrinus accessible for com-
parison, and consequently proceeded to redescribe the same genus under
another name, that he had previously called Calceocrinus.

The synonymy is also unfortunately still farther complicated, by the fact
that Prof. Hall happened to select for one of the above mentioned genera,
proposed by him, the name Cheirocrinus, which had been used by Eichwald in
1856 for a genus of Cystidians. Eichwald's proposed genus seems to be nearly
related, as he has stated, to Echino-encriniles, though it is very probably dis-
tinct. H' so, then the name Cheirocrinus would have to stand for his type, and
could not be retained for that described by Prof. Hall, even if distinct from
his Calceocrinus. In that case, to avoid confusion, the form here under con-
sideration might be called Eucheirocriniis.

Until these questions of synonymy can be cleared up, however, we prefer
to describe our species, provisionally, under the name Calceocrinus ; although, if
the type of that genus is distinct from Chcirocrifnis, and the latter name can
stand, they would have to be ranged under it, as they are clearly congeneric
with the types for which it was proposed.

It is evident that this remarkable genus differs so widely from all the other
known types, that it must be regarded as belonging to an entirely distinct and
unnamed family, which might be called Calceocrinidse, as it is almost a cer-
tainty that Calceocrinus, even if generically distinct from the forms here under
consideration, would at least belong to the same family, and if they are gen-
erically identical, Calceocrinus being the older name, would have to stand for
the typical genus.

Calceocrinus ? Bradleyi, M. and W.

Body exclusive of the base subquadrangular, with the upper lateral angles
obliquely truncated, and the sides rather deeply sinuous, or constricted
above the middle ; compressed antero-posteriorly, and rather distinctly con-
cave in the central region of the dorsal side below the middle. Lower dorsal
plate triangular, and more than twice as wide as high. Dorso-lateral pieces
twice as high as wide, presenting an irregular pentagonal outline, with sloping
sides above diverging at an angle of about 90 degrees. Upper dorsal plate
about half the size of the lower, subtriangular, or nearly semicircular,
slightly more than half as long as wide, and scarcely more than filling the
notch between the inner sloping sides of the dorso-lateral pieces. Dorsal
arm slender, rounded, and composed first of five pieces, the lower of which is
expanded below so as to be nearly three-fourths as large as the upper dorsal
piece ; while the succeeding pieces are narrow and slightly longer than wide,
excepting the fifth one, which is a little wider than the others, pentagonal in
form, and supports upon its superior sloping sides two equal divisions, which
are slender, rounded simple, and composed of pieces about twice as long as
wide. Lateral divisions of the rays (or perhaps, more properly, supports of
lateral arms) composed of pieces that are wider than long, and rapidly dimin-

1869.]

74 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF

ishingin size from the first to the terminal one ; of these, three can be counted
on one side, but there may have been one or two more ; each supporting an
erect arm, more slender than the dorsal one, and dividing first on the third
piece, the inner division being smaller than the other and remaining simple,
while the larger one bifurcates again on the fourth piece, the subdivisions
being equal and of the same size as the inner branch at the first bifurcation.
All the axillary pieces are expanded and more protuberant at the upper end
than any of the others, though all of the other pieces are slightly projecting
at the upper end. (Ventral side unknown.)

Column comparatively rather stout, or slightly thicker than the dorsal arm
below its bifurcation ; composed, two or three inches from the body, of round,
nearly equal, moderately thick pieces, but near the body showing a slight
tendency to become pentagonal, and apparently composed of more irregular,
somewhat roughened pieces. Surface rather distinctly granular, particularly
on the dorsal side of the body.

Length of body exclusive of the basal piece, 0-48 inch ; breadth, 0-47 inch ;
length of dorsal arm to the first bifurcation, 0-62 inch ; entire length about
1-80 inch ; breadth of do., near the middle, 0*10 inch. Length of upper dorsal
platCj 0.15 inch ; breadth of do., 0-20 inch.

Compared with Prof Hall's figure of the body of his C. tunicatus, and with
specimens we have identified with that species, this form differs in having the
body not narrowing upward, being as wide across, just above the constriction,
as at the base of the dorsal-lateral pieces ; the constriction of its sides is also
distinctly above, instead of at the middle ; while the outer sloping sides of
its dorso-lateral pieces are proportionally shorter, and directed more obliquely
outward. Its dorsal side, instead of being "flattened," is also distinctly con-
cave below the middle. Again its upper dorsal plate is proportionally smaller,
being considerably less, instead of more, than half the breadth of the body
above the middle, and only just large enough to fill the depression in which
it rests, without projecting al30ve ; while its lower sloping margins are rounded,
so as to give it a semicircular outline, instead of being straight.

Compared with C. nodo.sus, Hall, the only other described species from this
horizon, it will be at once distinguished by the nodose character of the latter.
It likewise differs in the details of its structure from the various other species
described by Prof. Hall from other horizons.

The specific name is given in honor of Prof. Frank H. Bradley, of Hanover
College, late of the Illinois Geological Survey, who discovered the typical
specimens, and numerous other fossils, at the same locality.

Locality and Position. Crawfordsville, Indiana. Keokuk division of the
tx)wer Carboniferous series.

Calceocrincs ? Wachsmuthi, M. and W.

Body small, compressed antero-posteriorly ; above the base appproaching
an oblong outline, being longer than wide, a little concave in the middle of
the dorsal side, and with the lateral margins of the dorso-lateral pieces con-
stricted in the middle, and rounded and curving inward or forward, so as to
form a part of the ventral side. Basal piece subtrigonal, about twice as wide
as high, truncated its entire breadth above, for connection with the succeeding
piece by a widely gaping suture, evidently constructed so as to permit it to be
opened out on a line with the body, though in the specimens seen, it is always
folded close in against the ventral side ; facet for the attachment of the col-
umn truncating the lower end, concave and equaling about half the breadth.
Column comparatively rather stout, composed near the base of alternately
thicker and thinner pieces ; becoming more slender, and composed of longer
and more uniform pieces farther down ; central cavity pentagonal. Body
plates closely anchylosed; lower dorsal plate triangular, about one third as
large in the middle as the dorso-lateral pieces, which are between three and

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 75

four times as long on the outer side, as wide. Upper dorsal plate subtri^onal,
with the lateral angles a little truncated obliquely outward, about twice as
wide as high, and truncated about three-fourths its breadth above, for the re-
ception of the middle or dorsal arm ; more than filling the broad triangular
notch between the upper ends of the dorso-latcral pieces.

Dorsal arm simple, and comi)oscd, above the first piece, of oblong pieces,
that are rounded on the outer side, and about one third longer than wide.
Lateral divisions of the rays supported on the superior latter sloping side of
each dorso-lateral piece, composed each of (as far as can be seen) five pieces
in a direct range, extending out laterally and curving around toward the ven-
tral side ; of these pieces the first is very short and does not support an arm,
while each of the other bears an erect arm above. Each of these lateral arms,
as far as can be seen, gives off a small division on the dorsal side of the third
piece above the base, while the main division of each bifurcates again on the
fourth piece above, the bifurcating pieces being a little tumid. All the arms
have a deep ambulacral furrow within.

Pieces of the ventral side unknown.

Length of base, 0-10 inch ; length of body exclusive of base 0-35 inch :
breadth do., 0-27 inch; length of arms 1 inch.

This species is related to C. dactglus, Hall, but differs in having its dorsal
arm simple, instead of bifurcating ; and its lateral arms bifurcating first on
the third, instead of the fourth piece. From C. ventricosus, Hall, it also differs
in having the dorsal arm simple, instead of bifurcating, while its upper dor-
sal piece is distinctly shorter in proportion to breadth than in tliat species.

If farther comparisons should show these forms to be generically distinct
from Calceocrimis, and Cheirocrinus is found to be tenable, this and the pre-
ceding species would have to be called Cheirocrinus Wachsmuthi and C.
Bradleyi.

The specific name is given in honor of Mr. Charles Wachsmuth of Burling-
ton, Iowa, to whom we are indebted for the use of the specimens from which
the description was made out.

Locality and position. Upper Burlington beds of Lower Carboniferous, at
Burlington, Iowa. Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

Genus GILBERTSOCRINUS, Phillips.

Subgenus Goniasteroidocrinus, Lyon and Casseday, 1859.

Syn. Trematocrinus, Hall, 1860.

Goniasteroidocrinus tenuiradiatus, M. and W.

The only specimen of this species we have seen is too much crushed to ad-
mit of a detailed description of the structure of its body. It evidently at-
tained a medium size, however, and has unusually long, slender, pseudo-
brachial appendages, or false arms ; while its subradial pieces are produced
into short pointed spines. Its false arms are each composed, near the body, of
a double series of alternating semi-elliptic pieces, which are joined together
by their straight sides, and each pierced by a small central canal. At a dis-
tance of about three or four pairs of these pieces from the body, each series
of pieces diverges from the other at an angle of about fifty degrees, thus form-
ing two very long, slender, rounded, gradually tapering branches, composed
each of a single series of round pieces, generally less than twice as wide as
long, with a small central canal. These pieces have their articulating sur-
faces radiately striated, and could not be in any way distinguished from the
joints of the column of many crinoids, if found detached.

From Prof. Hall's species <?/;?m.s* (which also belongs to the section of the genus

*As this species is neither the type of the genus Gilh'rtsocrinus, nor of the .subgenus
Goniasteroidocrinvs, the name iypus can only serve to confuse and mislead the student in
regard to tlie history and synonymy of the genus, and hence ought to be changed.

1869.]

76 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

with the pseudo-brachial appendages composed, near the body, of a double al-
ternating series of pieces, and bifurcating farther out into two rounded branches,
composed each of a single range of pieces pierced by a small central canal),
the species under consideration will be readily distinguished by its much
longer and more slender pseudo-brachial appendages, which have their pieces
merely rounded and finely granular, instead of being each provided with a
row of small tubercles around the middle. From G. tuberculosus, Hall, (sp.),
which, if correctly identified among the specimens before us, has its pseudo-
brachial appendages constructed, at the base at least, in the same way, it will
be distinguished by having its subradial pieces produced into short pointed
spines, instead of being merely tuberculiform. The same character, as well
as its larger size, and more robust appearance, will also distinguish it from
our G.fiscellus and G. reliculatus, Hall (sp.)

The specimen is too much crushed to afford measurements of the body, but
the false arms measure 60 inch from the body out to the point of bifurcation,
and 0.35 inch in breadth. Each of the branches near the point of bifurca-
tion measures only 0-18 inch in thickness, while one of them can be traced
to a length of 2 inches, where it is broken off, and measures 0-13 inches in
thickness, the whole length of each branch being probably not less than three
inches.

Locality and Position. Lower division of the Burlington group, Burling-
ton Iowa. Lower Carboniferous. No. 308 of Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

GONIASTEROIDOCRINUS OBOVATUS, M. and W.

Body rather large, truncato-obovate, being narrow below, with convex sides,
and truncated above ; height a little greater than the breadth. Base small,
and very deeply concave; basal pieces entirely within the concavity of the
under sides, and hidden by the column, when it is attached ; apparently com-
pletely inverted by the pushing in, as it where, of the column, around which
they are folded down with their outer sides inward, while their edges that join
to the subradials are turned downward. Subradials of moderate size, very
tumid or tuberculiform, but not pointed; curving into the concavity below
and upward at the outer ends, while their tumid central part forms the base
upon which the body stands when placed upon a plane surface; all heptagonal
in form, if we count an obtuse angle at the middle of the base of each.
First radial pieces about as large as the subradials, tumid, and of nearly equal
length and breadth ; all heptagonal in outline. Second radial pieces generally
smaller than the first, and proportionally a little narrower, rather tumid, and
all hexagonal in form. Third radial pieces of about the same size as the
second, or sometimes slightly larger, equally convex, pentagonal or hexagonal
in outline, and each supporting on their superior sloping sides, convex second-
ary radials, the second of which is sinuous above, so as to form the under side
of the openings to which the pendent true arms connect, while on their outer
sloping sides they connect with a series of small pieces, which unite with others
coming in the same way from the adjacent ray, so as to form the under side of
the base of the false arms over each intcrradial and anal space.

Anal and interradial areas of an oval outline, and scarcely distinguishable
from each other, each occupied by twelve to fourteen more or less convex, or
tumid pieces, the first of which is hexagonal, about as large as the second
radials, and rests as usual on the upper truncated side of a subradial ; above
these there are usually three arching ranges of three each, and three or four
other pieces still farther up, more or less irregularly arranged.

Vault flat, not quite equaling the greater breadth of the body below, and
composed of irregular tumid pieces, generally of rather small but unequal
sizes, with a more or less marked depression opposite each false arm ; opening
apparently nearly central. False arms composed at their bases of four rows
of small pieces above and two below, arranged so as to inclose two distinct
canals which do not pierce any of the pieces themselves.

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 77

Surface very finely granular. [Impressions at the corners of the plates
also sometimes cause the appearance of a tendency to form a short obtuse
radiating rib at each side of some of the plates, but this character is too faintly
marked to attract attention.

Height of body about 1-70 inch, breadth, 1-60 inch.

The most marked feature of this species is its rather obovate form, produced
by the narrowness of its lower part and its convex sides, and sliglit contraction
near the top. The narrowness of its lower part results from the small size
of its basal, subradial, and first radial pieces. The deeply sunken character
of its base also contributes to the same result, as it is not near so wide as it
would be if its pieces extended out horizontally from the column, instead of
being folded down with their backs against it. It seems to resemble G. tub-
erculostis, Hall (sp.), more nearly in general appearance than any other species
known to us, but will be readily distinguished, not only by its different form,
but by the proportionally smaller size of its basal, subradial, and first radial
pieces, but more particularly by the structure of its false arms, which are each
composed at the base of six ranges of pieces, instead of only two.

Locality and Position. Upper division Burlington Group, Burlington, Iowa.
Lower Carboniferous. No. 379 of Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

Genus LEPIDOCENTRUS, Muller (?) 1856.

Entire form unknown. luterambulacral plates rather thin, very irregular
in size and form, all strongly imbricating apparently from below, and toward
the lateral margins of the areas ; arranged in five or more rows, only the outer
two of which seem to be continued to the extremities of the areas, all occupied
with generally obscure secondary granules, and most of those on the lower (?)
side of the body also provided with large primary central tubercles and
spines ; primary tubercles sometimes showing'a small pit in the top, surrounded
by two smooth rings, separated by an annular furrow, and all without any
ring, depression or prominence around the base ; on the upper (?) side of the body,
only the marginal rows provided with primary tubercles. Ambulacral areas
wide, and occupied by six or more irregular rows of unequal, irregular pieces,
some of which are as large as the smaller interambulacral plates, and all strongly
imbricating in the opposite direction from the interambulacral series ; each
pierced by two pores, and the larger ones usually marked with one or two
additional pits, which, with the pores, are surrounded by a large circular im-
pression, while some of them sometimes show a tubercle intermediate in size
between the primary and secondary series. Apical disc unknown, but a single
rather large plate believed to belong to it is seen to have six or seven pores
circling around near its outer margin, and a small tubercle in the middle.

This type is related to several of the other palteozoic genera, but cannot
be properly referred to any of them. In the great irregularity of its interam-
bulacral plates, both in size and form, as well as in the absence of primary
spines, excepting on the marginal rows (at least on the upper (?)side of the body)
it seems to be very similar to Perischodomus of McCoy. It differs, however,
clearly from that group in the much greater breadth of its ambulacral areas,
the greater number of ranges of ambulacral pieces and their greater irregular-
ity, as well as in the much larger sizes of some of them, and their peculiar
circular impression around the two pores. If Perischodomus has its plates
not imbricating, that would also be another important difference, but although
that character is not mentioned in the description, we suspect it may really
exist, because we find it to occur in all the analogous types in this country.

From Lepidechinus it is also readily distinguished, by the much greater breadth
of its ambulacral areas, and its more numerous rows of ambulacral pieces and
pores, as well as by the larger size and the other pecularities of these species.

In the breadth of its ambulacral areas, and the number of rows of pieces
occuping the same, it is more nearly related to our Lepidesthes ; but it differs

1869.]

78 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACABEMY OP

in the great irregularity of these pieces, both in size and form, as well as in
the curious circular impressions of the same: also in the possession of large
primary tubercles and spines on some of the interambulacral pieces.

It is probably more nearly related to the form referred in this paper, doubt-
fullj' to Eocidaris, but it differs materially in the much greater breadth of its
ambulacral areas, more numerous ranges of ambulacral plates, and the larger
sizes, and other pecularities of these species ; as well as in not having primary
spines and tubercles on all of its interambulacral plates.

Note. — After preparing the foregoing description, with the view of propos-
ing a new genus for the reception of this fossil, our attention was called by
Prof. Alexander Agassiz to a very similar type, that was published by Miiller
under the name Lepidoccntrus^ in 1856, from the Eifel Limestone (Aus den
Abhandlungen der Konigl. Akad. der Wissenschaften zu Berlin, p. 258, taf. iii) ;
but which has been entirely overlooked by subsequent authors. After com-
paring our specimens with the figures and description in Miiller's paper (a
copy of which Prof. Agassiz was kind enough to loan us), we find our type
agrees so nearly with his genus, in all the parts known to him, that we have
concluded to refer it provisionally to the same. Miiller, however, knew no-
thing of the nature of the ambulacral pieces of his type, and we have there-
fore no means of comparing these important parts. As it is already known
that there are various genera of these older types, agreeing in some characters
and differing in others, it is quite probable our fossil may belong to a distinct
genus. If so, we would propose to call it Pholidocidaris.

Lepidocentrus iRREGuiiARis, M. and W.

The specimens of this fossil that we have had an opportunity to study are
too much crushed and broken to give a clear idea of its general form, or to
admit of being systematically described. It seems to have attained a rather
large size, however, and if of a depressed subglobose form, may even have
measured as much as three and a half to four inches in its transverse diameter.
Some specimens show from five to six ranges of interambulacral plates lying
together, so as to indicate that there were at least that many ranges between
the ambulacra at that point. These six ranges, as they lie flattened by pres-
sure, measure about two inches across.

All of these interambulacral plates are thin and sharp at the edges, and of
only moderate thickness in the central region, while they present such a variety
of forms that it would scarcely be possible to give a correct idea of their out-
lines, without describing each individual plate. They are generally a little
longer than wide, however, and on what appears to be a part of the body below
the middle, most of them have the primary tubercles more or less distinctly
developed, though on some they are obsolete, or not easily distinguished from
the obscure secondary ones.

On what appears to be the upper side of the body, no traces of any but the
small secondary tubercles covering the surface of all of these plates are visible,
excepting, as already stated, on those of the marginal rows. These marginal
plates on this side, are generally each as large as three or four of those adjoin-
ing them, and in some instances measure 1 inch in length, and about 060
inch in breadth, being of an elliptic form. The primary tubercle of each is
placed about midway of the length, and between the middle and the ambulacral
side. In many instances these tubercles are rounded off, as if the spines had
been dropped during the life of the animal, and the tubercles partly absorbed
away.

The ambulacral plates are apparently even more irregular in size and form
than those of the interambulacral series. In one crushed specimen, showing
a part of the fossil composing apparently the under side, extending an inch
or more away from the supposed oral opening, portions of three of the ambu-
lacral and two of the interambulacral series of plates are seen, apparently

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 79

nearly in their relative positions, excepting that they are all spread almost on
a plane, and more or less displaced and broken by accidental pressure. Here,
near the ends of the areas, there are apparently only two rows of interambu-
lacral plates in each series, the two ranges measuring together only about 0-40
inch in breadth ; soon, however, they pass into three or four ranges. The am-
bulacral areas, at about one inch from the apparent position of the oral orifice,
measure nearly an inch in breadth, and, as near as can be counted, there appear
to be there six or more ranges of ambulacral plates. These plates appear to
increase in size and decrease in number toward the end of the areas, so that
some of them are there nearly as large as the adjacent interambulacral plates.
They are generally wider than long, and as they lie together present more or
less rhombic faces, arranged somewhat like the scars on the surface of some
species of Lepidodendron. This similarity is also increased by the pores, and
some little pits in the central region, surrounded by the circular depression.
Some of the larger of these plates have the pores near one end, and a tubercle
occupying the middle, nearly as large as the primary tubercles on the adjacent
interradials. These probably belong to the middle ranges.

The larger primary spines attained a length of about one inch, and a thick-
ness of 0-10 inch at the head, which is a little swollen; above this they taper
rather gradually, are rounded, nearly straight, and marked by minute, crowded,
longitudinal striae. Among the ambulacral plates there are also seen lying
scattered about a number of other spines, from one-fourth to one third the
size of those described, and of very nearly the same form. These seem to be-
long to the ambulacral plates, on most of which we see a tubercle larger than
the secondary tubercles of the interambulacral plates. Many much smaller
spines than the latter are likewise seen, that probably belong to the secondary,
or perhaps, more properly, tertiary series.

Locality and position. Hamilton and near Nauvoo, Illinois ; in the Keokuk
division of the Lower Carboniferous Series.

EociDAUis? SQUAMOSA, M. and W.
Body attaining a large size, apparently depressed-subglobose in general
form. Interambulacral plates rather thick, in eight or more longitudinal rows
near the middle of each area,* but apparently only the two outer rows con-
tinued to the oral aperture; all presenting the usual hexagonal form, except-
ing the pentagonal marginal rows, and distinctly imbricating apparently from
the lower side upward, f as well as inward toward the central row, excepting
the two outer rows on each side, the lateral imbrication of which is outward,
that is, the outer row laps the edge of the ambulacral series, and the next
range laps the edge of the outer row, while its inner edge laps that of the next
row within, and so on to the middle row, which is lapped on both sides ; each
with a comparatively large, smooth, saucer-shaped depression, occupying the
central region, from the edges of which the surface is distinctly beveled off in
every direction to the margins, the beveled edges that pass under the edges of
the adjacent plates, however, being distinctly wider than those lapping the
adjacent pieces, these lapping edges being as if ground off obliquely under, or
in other words, beveled on the inner side ; tubercles for the support of the
primary spines smooth, prominent, rather large, and rising in the middle of
the saucer-shaped central depression, narrowing upward to near the top, where
there is a circular depression surrounding a very narrow, prominent, perfo-
rated, central process, for the immediate articulation of the primary spines;
most convex part of each plate surrounding the smooth, saucer-shaped depres-

* Eight rows are seen in the specimen at the widest part, but we are not sure this is the
middle of the a^ea, owing to the imperfection of the specimen.

t This imbricating character, as well as several others mentioned in the above
description, may be of more than specific value, and they are mentioned here, along with
specific characters, because we are in doubt in regard to the generic relations of the
fossil.

1869.]

80 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF

sion, ornamented with a few very small pustules, upon which small secondary
spines probably articulated. Primary spines, apparently one inch or more in
length, rounded, slender and nearly or quite straight, with the articulating
end perforated and a little enlarged, so as to form an undefined ring: surface
ornamented with minute, crowded, longitudinal striae, only visible by the aid
of a good magnifier.

Ambulacra narrow, or only about equaling the breadth of the marginal
rows of interambulacral plates on eacli side, slightlj"- convex. Ambulacral
pieces slightly imbricating in the opposite direction from the interambulacral
series, of very unequal size and form, and irregularly arranged, most of those
starting from the mesial zigzag suture, extending out so as to connect with
the crenated lapping margins of the outer ranges of interambulacral plates,
while many of those starting from the latter inward, wedge out more or less
abruptly between the others, at various distances before reaching the mesial
suture, so as to present the appearance of a strong tendency to run into two
rows of pieces on each side of the mesial suture; each pierced by two pores,
which, owing to the irregular arrangement of the plates, present the appear-
ance of forming two double rows along near each lateral margin of each
ambulacrum, or four rows to each of these areas. They might, however, with
probably almost as much propriety, be counted as one double, strongly zigzag
row on each side.

Near what appears to be the position of the oral opening, there is adhering
to the specimen one half of a stout jaw, 0-60 inch in length. On its outer side
it is cuneiform, a little arched, and provided with a broad, longitudinal, ex-
centric furrow ; its lateral margins are smooth, and near 0-30 inch in breadth
at the base, and converge to a sharp edge within. We have now tolerable
good evidence that all the different genera of the Perischoechinidx are pro-
vided with strong jaws.

The specimen is too imperfect to give a good idea of its general form or size.
As it shows one of the interambulacral areas, however, to be near two inches
broad, it is probable the entire fossil was not less than four and a'half inches in
its transverse diameter. The largest interambulacral plates measure 'about 0-35
inch in length and breadth, while those of the outer rows next the ambulacra
are proportionally narrower. The primary spines seem to be about one inch
or more in length, though we have seen none entire. The longest fragments
we have seen, are about half an inch long, 0-10 inch in thickness at the
articulating end, and 0-06 inch in diameter a little above, but without any
taper toward the broken end. The ambulacral areas are only about 0-20 inch
in breadth at the widest place, near the middle, and about four to six of their
pieces fit into the crenulations of each of the marginal interambulacral plates.
We have been somewhat puzzled in regard to the generic characters of this
species. Its interambulacral plates are each provided with the large central
tubercle and spine, characterizing Archeeocidaris and Eocidaris, though these
tubercles agree with those of Eocidaris in having no ring or slight projection
around the base, as in Archeeocidaris. At first we were inclined to believe it
related to Prof. Hall's genus Lepidechinus, on account of the decidedly imbri-
cating character of its plates ; but judging from the brief published descrip-
tion of the type of that group (which has not yet been figured), it would seem
to belong even to a different family, or sub-family, as nothing is said in the
description of that type in regard to a large central tubercle for the articula-
tion of a larger spine, on each of the interambulacral plates, the surface being,
on the contrary, merely described as crowded with "irregular granules." In
addition to this Prof. Hall places his group as a sub-genus under I'alivchinus,
one of the distinguishing features of which is the presence of numerous small
imperforate tubercles covering all the plates, without any larger central perfo-
rated tubercle.

It is worthy of note, however, that Prof. Hall has since figured and described
another species [L. rarispinus, Twentieth Rep. Regents Univ. N. Y. on State

[April,

EXPLANATION OF THE CUTS AND OF THE LITHOGRAPH.

Fig. 1. Beluga rhinodon Coi)e cranium, from above ; from Upernavili.

Fig. la. Beluga rhinodon teeth.

Fig. 2. Beluga declivis Cope scapula.

Fig. 3. Beluga angustata Cope scapula.

Fig. 4. Bala?na c u 1 1 a m a c h Chamisso ; from north west coast ; propor-
tions approximate. (Capt. Scammon does not represent the re-
curved rictus figured hy Chamisso.

Fig. 5. Megaplera versabilis Cope; from California coast ; drawn to a
scale of -25 inch to a foot. This and all the remaining cuts re-
duced to two-thirds of the proportions given.

Fig. 6. Megaptera versabilis, from below.

Fig. 7.. Rhachianectes g 1 a u c u s ; from the Californian coast ; scale -25 inch
. to a foot.

Fig. 8. Rhachianectes g 1 a u c u s Cope, from below.

Fig. 9. Bala^noptera v e 1 i f e r a Cope, approximate proportions; from coast
of California.

Fig. 10. Balsnoptera velifera, approximate proportions; from Queen
*■, Charlotte Sound, February, 1865.

Fig. 11. Sibbaldius sulfureus Cope, approximate proportions; from Cali-
fornia coast.

Fig. 12. Globiocephalus scamraonii Cope; coast of California; about -5
inch to the foot.

Fig. 13. Same, from below.

Fig. 14. "Bottle-nose Grampus ;" California coast ; scale near -5 inch to the
foot.

Fig. 15. Orca rectipinua Cope, male; approximate proportions; Cali-
fornia coast.

Fig. 16. Orca rectipinua Cope, female; same scale and locality.

Fig. 17. Orca ater Cope; Juan de Fuca Straits, 1868.

Plate I. Hyperaodon from the shore of Narragansett Bay, near Tiverton, Rhode
Island ; from photographs obtained by Samuel Powell, formerly
Secretary of the Academy, at Newport, Rhode Island.

3:

Pror. A . K S.F/jlla. ^ 7ii6'£^.

jPLJ

■3feM^»..«»-TS'mfe!'ly*i'*W- AtJiOt^

^*»

,»/v». .M*^*?

lIype7^ciodoTi oi^ N^cirrcf^ rcn^e^.

Fi^.6

Fi^.lS

Fi6.14

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 81

Cab. N. H.) in which some of the interambulacral plates are provided with a
large central tubercle, while others apparently have none. We are not in-
formed whether these larger tubercles are perforated at the end, as in Archa-
ccidaris and Eosidaris, or whether they are without such perforation, as in
Palxchinus ; but if it belongs to the same family as that including Palxchimis,
of which Lepidechinus is supposed to be a sub-genus, it is almost certain that
its tubercles are not perforated.

At any rate, our fossil differs from L. rarispinis in the following characters,
that seem to be of more than specific importance. In the first place, it differs
materially in the very irregular nature of its ambulacral pieces, which show a
strong tendency to pass into, and in fact do, at some places, actually pass into
two rows on each side of the mesial zigzag suture, instead of having clearlj'
but a single row on each side, with each piece extending entirely across from
the mesial suture to the lateral margins. Again, it dilTers in having a large
central tubercle and spine on each one of all the plate of the entire interambu-
lacral series. The lateral imbrication of the plates, in our type, is also different,
the direction of the imbrication being inward, excepting in the two outer
rows on each side, instead of outward in the whole series, the middle row
being clearly lapped on each side, instead of lapping those on each side of it.

The strongly imbricating character, especially of the interambulacral plates
in our type, is a very raarlied feature throughout ; the lapping edges being
sometimes at least one-fourth the entire breadth of these pieces, and yet,
owing to the accuracy with which they are beveled, they lie so evenly together
that this peculiarity is scarcely apparent where the plates have not been dis-
placed. We are not aware whether this imbricating character of the plates
has been observed in any of the European types on which the genera Eocida-
ris and Archxocidaris were founded.* It is certainly more or less marked,
however, in several of the American forms now before us that have been' re-
ferred to the latter genus. For instance, it is clearly seen in the typical speci-
men of A. Agassizi, of Hall, and less distinctly in his A. Shitmardi. We can
also see indications of it in A. Wortheni, of Hall, though owing to the thinness
of its plates, the beveling of their edges is less apparent. All these species
have the peculiar ring or prominence around the base of the tubercles sup-
porting the primary spines, seen in the true Archieocidaris, and distinguishing
it from Eocidaris. It seems therefore probable that this character may be
more or less marked in both Archceocidaris and Eocidaris^ but most apparent in
species which, like that we have here described, are provided with plates of
more than the usual thickness. f

So far as we are aware no European species of Eocidaris showing the struc-
ture and arrangement of the ambulacral series of pieces has been discovered;
at least we have seen no figures or descriptions of such. Prof. Hall, however,
has described a species from the Chemung group of New York (Twentiet)i
Report Regent's Univ. p. 298), to which Vanuxem had given the name Echinus
Drydenensis, but which is said to be an Eocidaris. In this the ambulacral
plates are described as being in two ranges without any intercalated pieces, if
we understand the description correctly.

From all that is therefore known in regard to the several types mentioned,
we are much inclined to believe that our fossil will be found to belong either
to a distinct subgenus under Eocidaris, or to an allied new genus. In either
case we would propose for the group the name of Lepidocidans.

Locality and position, — Lower beds of the Burlington group, Burlington,
Iowa. Lower Carboniferous. No. 404 of Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

* Some of Prof. Desor's figures of the plates of Eocidaris appear to show indications of
marginal beveling, while others do not.

t Since this was written we have been led to believe this imbricating character of the
plates is more or less defined in all the Archaocidaridie as well as in some of these older
types, apparently not belonging to that family.

1869.J 6

82 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

PALiECHiNus GRACILIS, M. and W.

Body small, and apparently oval or subglobose. Interambnlacral areas a
little convex. Interambnlacral plates in seven rows at the middle, but appar-
ently only the marginal rows of pentagonal pieces are continued to the upper
and lower extremities of the areas, the intermediate hexagonal pieces running
out at various distances between the middle and the ends of the areas; thick-
ness of each about half the breadth of the largest ; all ornamented with closely
set granules, of which 25 to 30 may be counted on each of the larger pieces.
Ambulacral areas slightly convex, and equaling in breadth the first and second
rows of interambulacral plates on each side ; composed of very short pieces,
which are a little thinner than the interambulacral plates, and about three
times as wide as long, the widest part of every alternate one being at the outer
end, which is received into a little sinus in the adjacent marginal interam-
bulacral plate (there being generally three of these little sinuses to each of
these plates), while the intermediate pieces usually wedge out rather abruptly
before quite reaching the lateral margins; the two pores at the outer end of
each piece arranged so as to form two zigzag or undulating rows along the
lateral margins of each ambulacral area ; surface of the whole series occupied
by granules of the same size as those of the interambulacral plates.

Entire dimensions unknown ; greatest breadth of interambulacral areas
0-76 inch ; do. of ambulacra, 0-22 inch; number of ambulacral pieces in 0-10
inch, on each side of the mesial suture, ten.

This species will be readily distinguised from our P. Burlingtonensis by the
proportionally greater breadth of the ambulacra, and the smaller size, and
greater number of its interambulacral pieces, there being seven rows of the
latter pieces at the widest part of the area, at a point equaling the breadth of
these areas in P. Burlingtoi^ensis, where there are only four or five rows of
these pieces. Again its ambulacral areas are equal in breadth to the first and
second rows of interambulacral plates on each side, taken together ; while
those of P. Burlijigtonemis are scarcely wider than the single marginal row on
each side.

Localily and position. — Upper division of the Burlington group, Burlington
Iowa. Lower Carboniferous. No. 407 of Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

Note on the Genus ONYCHASTER, M. and W.

The borrowed specimens from which we made out the outline cuts and de-
scription of this type, published in the third volume of the Illinois Geological
Report, p. 526, had been, to a great extent, denuded of their outer covering in
cutting away the rather hard, firmly adhering matrix, before coming into our
hands. Since preparing these cuts and descriptions we have had an oppor-
tunity to examine other specimens of this fossil, in part belonging to Mr.
Wachsmuth's collection, and others among the collections at Springfield, all
from the original locality. From these it is evident that, in well preserved
examples of this type, the granular outer covering seen on the arms, or free
rays of some of the specimens first examined, actually covers the dorsal side
of the small body also. We likewise observe the presence of a layer of thin
small imbricating scales under the scattering granules on the dorsal side of
the body; while some specimens certainly show clearly such scales under
the granules on the arms. The fact that this granular covering, and this
layer of thin imbricating scales, overspread the dorsal side of the body, would
certainly show that the appearance of a large central, dorsal opening, which we
had marked as an " anal ?" aperture, could not be such. The appearance of
pores in some of the pieces around the central opening is also deceptive,
and due rather to deep pits than to actual perforations passing through these
pieces.

From the specimens we have since had an opportunity to examine, we are
led to think it almost certain that the parts seen around the central opening

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 83

in the specimen illustrated by us are the oral and adjacent pieces acci-
dentally pushed upward, and seen from the upper or inner side after the re-
moval of the dorsal side or covering ; and that the central opening is the
oral aperture. At an}' rate we know of no other way to account for the
very diiferent appearances presented by these fossils, when examined in different
conditions.

Since we have had some specimens of this type at hand which we have felt
at liberty to grind and cut into, so as to reveal more clearly their structure, we
find that the arm-pieces, which in the denuded specimen first examined by us
presented the appearance of becoming isolated, deeply furrowed lanceolate
pieces, at a little distance from the body, and of very little thickness or depth,
really appear, when ground ofi', to extend nearly all the way down from the
dorsal to the ventral sides of the arms, and to be connected and articulated
together, like those nearer the body by little processes and sockets; the com-
paratively thin furrowed dorsal edges becoming thicker farther in.

Sometimes these arm-pieces appear as if consisting of two rows joined in
pairs at their inner ends along the middle of the dorsal side, there being a
rather large pore (or possibly only a deep pit) at the junction of the two pieces
forming each pair. In other instances, as seen detached, these pairs of pieces
are found to be firmly anchylosed so as to form single pieces, extending
across the whole breadth of the arms, without, however, obliterating the ap-
pearance of a rather large mesial dorsal pore.

We have not yet had an opportunity to see the under side of the body or
arms in any of the Crawfordsville specimens, but Mr. Wachsmuth has a speci-
men from the Burlington division of the Lower Carboniferous beds of Bur-
lington, which would seem to belong to this genus, though specifically distinct.*
This is the form Prof. Hall has described in some preliminary notices of fossils
(issued at Albany, N. Y., in 18G1), under the name Prolaster? Barrisi. This
fossil has, so far as we have been able to see, essentially the same structure,
and shows along the under side of the arms a broad shallow depression in the
arm-pieces, somewhat like an ambulacral furrow. None of the specimens of
either species we have seen show any indications of any proper extended disc,
the body being comparatively small. It also evidently differs in several points
of structure from Frotaster.

So far as its structure is yet known, it seems to be a true Ophiurian. We
only know the species, Onychaster Jiexilis.

Remarks on the BLASTOIDEA, with Descriptions of New Species.

BY F. B. MEEK AND A. H. WORTHEN,

Of the Illinois State Geological Survey.

In regard to the nature of the functions for the performance of which the
openings in the summit of this group of fossils, as the specimens are usually
found, were designed, authors do not entirely agree. The central opening has
been most generally regarded as the mouth, and the others surrounding this
(excepting one that is always larger than the others) as ovarian apertures ;
while the larger one is usually supposed to be the anal aperture, with, in some
types, two of the supposed ovarian apertures opening into it, one on each
side.f

*We have not yet, however, seen any of the little articulating knobs on the scales of
this Burlington species. These impart the granular appearance to the surface of our
typical species, in which each scale has one of these little knobs articulated in its middle.
If the Burlington species did not have these, it may belong to another, but allied genus.

f In the genus I'eiUremites, as specimens are usually found, there are live of these open-
ings of the summit, surrounding a central pentagonal aperture. Of these live surround-
ing openings, four are known to be divided within into two each, and the lifth one into
three, the middle one of these three being generally supposed to be the anal opening,

1869.]

84 PEOCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Dr. F. Roemer, who ia 1852 published a beautiful and valuable monograph of
most of the species of this group then known, giving accurate illustrations of al-
most the entire anatomy of the genus Pentremites, including the arms or pin-
nulae, and other parts not previously illustrated, regarded the summit openings
in that genus as stated above. He noticed, however, that in Nucleorinus
(= E/iccrinus, Roemer) the central opening is covered in by a series of small
plates, and that in Cadaster, the openings corresponding to the so-called ovarian
apertures of I'entremites seem to be absent.* At that time Dr. R. was appa-
rently not aware of the fact that Owen and Shumard had, in 1850, announced
that all of the summit openings in Pentremites Godoni are, in perfect specimens,
covered by minute plates, f as had been shown by himself to be the case with
the central opening in Nudeocrinus, since he seems to have regarded this char-
acter as one of the distinctions between the latter genus and Pentremites.

Dr. Shumard has also since shown that this character not only occurs in
other true Pentremites, such as P. conoideus, P. sulcatus,X etc., but that at least
the central hiatus in several species of the genus Granatocrinus (= Pentremites,
section Elliptici, of Roemer), such as G. Sai/i, G melo and G. Nortvoodii, is also
known to be covered in the same way, in perfectly preserved specimens.

Dr. C. A. White, the present able State Geologist of Iowa, also announced,
in a very interesting paper on the summit structure of the Blastoidea, pub-
lished in 1863, that in well preserved specimens of Pentremites steUiformis the
central and anal openings are both covered by small pieces^ He likewise
stated in the same paper that he had seen si)eciuiens of Granatocrinus JVor-
u'oociii with the central hiatus covered by small pieces, and that from this cov-
ering a double series of minute alternating pieces could be seen extending out
the mesial furrow of each pseudo-ambulacral area for some distance. ||

We have also seen specimens of Pentremites steUiformis, Granatocrinus melo, G.
Korwoodii and G. Sayi (most of them belonging to Mr. Wachsmuth's collection),
showing the central opening covered by small pieces, and continuing out from

and the other two, one on each side of this, like those of other lateral openings, are most
generally viewed as ovarian apertures. In some species of Granatocrinus, however, the
■openings corresponding to the four in /'>jtirf?;i*'«, divided into two each witliin, actually
appear at the surface as four pairs of distinct openings ; while in other types, such as i\'«-
choriiius, and some species apparently allied to Chdastcr (more properly Codonaster), the
supposed ovarian apertures appear as five pairs of separate openings, all distinct from
each other, as well as from the anal opening.

As was first illustrated by Dr. Roemer, tliese so-called ovarian pores are known to con-
nect with a series of compressed tubes within the cavity of the body, extending down
along the inner side of each pseudo-ambulacrum so as to connect with the numerous
minute pores passing through the lateral margins of these areas. Of these tubes we have
ascertained tliat, in Granalncrinus melo, G. Norwoodii, and a new species described in this
paper (which are all of this genus in which we have seen them), there are two pairs to
each pseudo-ambulacral area ; while in Ptntremiies Godoni, P. pyriformis and P. liheinwardiii
there seem to be eight tubes to each field, and in the so-called Pentremites steUiformis
twelve to each field. We are therefore inclined to think thenumber of these tubes may be
found constant, or nearly so, in each genus, since the area occupied by the twelve tubes in
I'enliemiies steUiformis is not so wide as that occupied by eight in some i^e^itremt^es proper.

* We have not had an opportunity, recently, to examine good specimens of any of the
typical forms of Cudaster, but it has frequently occurred to us that possibly the deep linear
furrows seen on the upper surface of these fossils, running parallel to the pseudo-ambu-
lacra, and which Prof. McCoy and others seem to have supposed to be punctured at the
inner ends, may connect, by these punctures, with the tubes within, and thus represent
the so-called ovarian openings in the other Blastoids. The fact that these openings cer-
tainly are represented in Pentremites stdltfurmis of Owen and Shumard, by linear slits,
seems to favor this conclusion. But as there is only a single one of these slits on each side
of each of the pseudo-ambulacra in the last-mentioned type, instead of four to six, and
they exist in the anal, as well as the inter-ambulacral areas, it is evident that tliese and
other differences are of sufficient importance to warrant the separation of this species
from Cadaster, to which it has sometimes been referred. And as it differs from Pentremites,
in having the so-called ovarian pores represented by ten distinct slit-like openings, and in
other characters, we would propose to establish for its reception a new genus, witli the
name Codonites.

t Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad. vol ii (quarto series), p. G5.

t Trans. St. Louis Acad. Sci. vol. i, p. 243, pi. 9, fig. i, 1858.

g Jour. Boston Soc. N. H. vol. vii, p. 482, va&i.

II Missouri Geol. Report, p. 18G, 1855.

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 85

these, a double series of minute alternating pieces a short distance along the
mesial furrows of each pseudo-ambulacral area, as Dr. White mentions seeing
in Granalocrinus Norwoodii* These little pieces do x\oi fill the linear furrows,
however, but cover them over, so as to leave a small canal passing along under
them, and under the little vault covering the central opening, in such a manner
as to communicate through the latter with the visceral cavity within the body.

From all that is therefore now known, we think there is little room for
doubting that at least the little central opening seen in these fossils, in the
condition in which the specimens are usually found, is really, in perfect exam-
ples, always covered by small pieces in all the different genera. We also re-
gard this little covering of minute pieces as corresponding to the ventral disc,
or vault, of the typical Crinoids, this part being here reduced, as it were, to its
minimum size by the closing in of the surrounding parts. Hence we incline to
concur with Dr. White in the opinion that the pieces composing this disc, at least
in Nucleocrinus, Granatocri?ms und Pentremi/es stelliforjiiis, if not indeed in all the
Blastoids, were not constructed or arranged for being opened and closed at
will, to admit food into the mouth, whatever may have been the nature of those
covering the other openings. f

In 1862 M. M. Dujardin and Hupe, who were not aware that any of the
openings in the summits of these fossils, excepting the central one in Nucleocri-
nus, were ever covered by small pieces, expressed the opinion, in their valuable
work on the Echinodermata, that the so-called ovarian apertures in the Blas-
toids are not such, but that they and the internal tubesj with which they con-
nect, along with the pseudo-ambulacral pores, constitute the respiratory appa-
ratus of these animals, while the aperture usually regarded as the anal opening
they consider the ovarian orifice. From the fact that they seem to believe that
the typical palaeozoic Crinoids were probably nourished by surface absorption,
or through the agency of the column, rather than by food taken into a diges-
tive apparatus through a mouth, we infer that they suppose the Blastoids had
neither anal nor oral aperture.

In regard to the existence in the palaeozoic Crinoids of a well developed
digestive sack, however, analagous to that seen in the existing Criuoids, the
discoveries made in this country certainly seem to leave little room for
doubts, while it appears to us more in accordance with all that is now
known in regard to the general anatomical structure, and the arrangement of
the reproductive organs of the living types of the Crinoidea, to suppose that the
opening usually regarded as the anus in the Blastoids was really such, or as
Dr. White and Mr. Billings maintain, both mouth and vent, than that it was
an ovarian aperture. The fact, too, that there certainly seems to have
been no direct passage or communication whatever, so far as we have been
able to see, between the interior of the internal tubes under the pseudo-ambu-
lacra and the general visceral cavity, would also appear to be an objection to
the conclusion that they and the external openings with which they connect
were really respirator}' organs.

• These minute pieces we believe extended all the way down the ambulacral furrows
in some, if not all types of the Blastoidea, and we even suspect that another series covered
the little transverse furrows extending across to the bases of the pinnulse, and possibly
up the ambulacral furrows of the latter, as we have seen in the piunute of Balocrinus
Christy i.

t In Pentremites conoicleus, as figured by Dr. Shumard, the small pieces covering the cen-
tral opening have, as suggested by him, in their regularity of form and arrangement,
much the appearance of the pieces closing the so-called ovarian aperture of the Cydoidea;
from which it might be inferred that in this genus these pieces might possibly have been
movable, so that they could have opened and closed, as valves. We doubt, however, very
much that they could have formed so striking an apparent exception to the corres-
ponding parts of other types of the group. We tliink it probable that small openings ex-
ist under this little group of plates, at the upper terminations of the ambulacral furrows.
This seems the more probable because Dr. S. describes these little pieces as being very
differently arranged in Pentremites sulcatus.

t These are generally more properly folds of a thin calcareous plate, but in the so-called
Pentremites stelli/ormis, and other types, each separate fold connects with the inner wall
all the way down, excepting at the upper end, so as to form a distinct compressed tube.

1869.]

86 PEOCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Dr. White bas made the ingenious suggestion (See Bost. Proceedings already
cited, that these internal tubes and the openings and pores passing into them*
may have been for the purpose of drawing in water and injecting it into the pin-
nulte, in order to elevate and move them at will, without the agency of a complex
muscular system, apparently so inconsistent with the structure of a being so low
in the scale of animal life. It is true the unelastic, rigid nature of these little
calcareous tubes would seem to be an objection to this view, but this objection
would doubtless apply with equal force against the opinion that they were
respiratory organs. f Possibly, however, this apparent difficulty may have been
obviated by the presence of thin membranaceous sacks within these tubes, sus-
ceptible of contraction and expansion to the extent of their internal cavities.

Our own observations, both of the tj'pical Crinoids and of the Blastoids,
have, as already stated, led us to believe that the series of small pieces, prob-
ably always originally covering the small central opening seen in imperfect
specimens of the latter group, represents the vault, or ventral disc, of the typi-
cal Crinoids. We likewise agree with Dr. White and others who reject the
opinion that any of the other openings in these fossils were ovarian apertures.

In all the types of the Blastoidea yet known, these little mesial furrows of the
pseudo-ambulacra are distinctly seen leading to the central opening, precisely
as the ambulacral furrows on the disc of Comatula lead to the mouth ; aud in
the few types we have yet seen with this little central opening covered by mi-
nute vault pieces these furrows could be distinctly traced, as already stated,
under the covering, into the central opening. Now, from the exact analogy of
these furrows to those we have seen passing inward from the arm bases, under
the small vault pieces covering the central opening in Cyathocrinus, and as dis-
tinct apparently tubular canals, made up of minute interlocking pieces, con-
verging upward from the arm openings in Actinocrinus prohoscidialis, to connect
with the upper extremity of the convoluted digestive sack, nearly under the
middle of the vault, we think the furrows alluded to in the Blastoids may be
properly called ambulacral furrows.

In the true Pentremites, with wide lancet pieces, J the numerous little trans-
verse furrows seen passing outward from these mesial longitudinal furrows,
and along the pore pieces to the bases of the slender pinnula3, are merely late-
ral branches of the central aiubulacral furrow. In a specimen now before us,
supposed to be Pentremites elegans, of Lyon and Casseday, the little pinnulae,
some of which are more than twice as long as the body, are each composed of
a double series of alternately arranged pieces and provided with a distinct
longitudinal furrow along the inner side, exactly corresponding to the ambu-
lacral furrows in the arms and pinnuke of the typical Crinoids. It is there-
fore probable, as suggested by Dr. White, that these furrows, in at least a por-
tion of the pinnula;, were provided with receptacles for the ova as in the true
Crinoids.

As widely different as the Blastoids appear to be from the typical Crinoids,
it is easy to see that they really possess essentially the same elements of struc-
ture ; though in several respects they seem to be more nearly allied to the
types composing the section Cystoidea than to the typical Crinoids. In trying
to trace out the relations of their several parts to those of the Crinoids proper,
■we have sometimes thought that the lancet pieces might be modified second
radials, deeply inserted in the profound sinuses of the first radials. It seems
nearly as probable, however, that they may belong to the vault series. In a
conversation with Mr. Wachsmuth respecting the structure of these fossils, he

* We have not seen posi7n'e evidence that the pseudo-ambulacral pores pass into the in-
ternal tubes, but we can scarcely doubt that they dc.

t Currents of water, however, "might have passed into them, by means of the action of
cilia.

X We use the term "lancet pieces," instead of "lanceolate pieces," often applied to these
parts, because they are by n" means always lanceolate in form, but often linear, hence i«.
would be an awkward expression to describe "the lanceolate pieces" as being "linear in
form."

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 87

suggested an idea that had sometimes occurred to us, that probably tlie pore
pieces of the pseudo-ambulacral areas correspond to the recumbent arms in the
Cj'stoidea.* This certainly seems very probable, as it may be seen that the
ranges of these pieces merely lap, as it were, down the sides iqjon the lancet
pieces, and really form no part of the body, properly speaking. If this view is
correct, each of the ranges of pore pieces of each pseudo-ambulacral area must,
in the true Pentremites with wide lancet pieces, represent half an arm, the two
halves being, as it were, split apart by the wide lancet pieces coming to the
surface between. In Gr(jnatocri?ius, Nudeorinus, and some other groups with
merely linear lancet pieces, however, the two ranges of pore pieces meet along
the mesial furrow of each pseudo-ambulacrum, and alternately interlock, just
like the arm pieces in Actinocrinus, and other types in which the arms are com-
posed of double rows of pieces. If these suggestions are correct, the little
delicate free appendages often regarded as arms, would correspond to the pin-
nulai, sometimes called tentacles in descriptions of fossil Crinoids proper, and
Cystoids. The fact that these little appendages are themselves, at least in
some types, composed each of a double series of minute pieces, would be no
objection to this view, because this is exactly the structure of the piunulffi in
most of the Cystoidea with recumbent arms. The next question, then, would
be in regard to supplementary pore pieces. These, if the so-called pore piecesf
can be viewed as arm pieces, may be merely the first pieces of the pinnulae
modified to adapt them to the peculiar structure of the other parts.

Supplementary Note to the foregoing remarks.

A few days before receiving the proof-sheets of this paper from the printer,
we were provided, through the politeness of Mr. Billings, with an advance
copy of a very interesting and important paper of his on the Structure of the
Crinoidea, Cystoidea and Blastoidea, to appear in the July number of the Ameri-
can Journal of Science and Arts. We cannot state here in detail the various
points in which he agrees with or differs from us, but we will mention a few
of the latter. In the first place, he does not concur in a suggestion made by
us, in our paper read before the Academy in December, 1868, that certain facts
seemed to indicate that in the paleozoic Crinoids the ambulacral canals might
have been organized so that, in addition to their reproductive and other func-
tions, they could have conveyed microscopic objects through the arm-openings,
under the vault, to the digestive sack. He also thinks the convoluted internal
organ and canals radiating from the summit of the same to the arm-openings,
belong to the respiratoiy, and not to the digestive system.

With respect to the first suggestion, we would merely state that we are not
disposed to insist upon it, as it was not stated by us as a demonstrated fact,
but we rather intended to state facts that seemed to us to point to that con-
clusion. We were led to do so, in part, by the statements of Bronn, and Du-
jardin and Hup^, that the food of the recent Crinoids was probably conveyed
along the ambulacral canals, by the action of cilia, to the mouth ; and partly
by the fact that in the palaeozoic types, there seems to be no opening what-
ever in the vault, at the point to which the ambulacra converge, and where,
from all analogy among recent Echinoderms, the mouth ought to be situated.
We are aware, however, that there are some strong and perhaps insuperable
objections to such a conclusion. And yet, there seems to be others of nearly
or quite as much weight, against the conclusion that the single opening seen
in the vault of these older Crinoids, always performed the double function of
mouth and vent. Amongst these may be mentioned the fact that this opening

*Sinoe this was written we learn that Mr. Billings had arrived at the same conclusion
in regard to the corresponding pieces in Cadaster.

t The t«rm pore pieces could not, of course, be applied to any of the pieces of the pseu-
do-ambulacra in the same sense that we would call tne ambulacral pieces of an Echinoid
pore pieces, because the pores in the Blastoids do not pierce these little pieces as tliey
do in the Echinoids, but merely pass in between them.

1869.]

88 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

is never situated at the point of convergence of the ambulacral canals, where
the mouth ought to be, but more or less removed from it, so that if it per-
formed both the offices of mouth and vent, it would be, as it were, the anal
opening that did so, instead of the mouth, as in all of those cases among the
existing Echinodermata with but one opening to perform both functions. In
addition to this, we have, as we believe, demonstrative evidence that species
of I'latycrinus and Goniasteroidocrinus could, and did live, in some way, with
the only opening (excepting the arm-openings) covered by a Plaiyceras that
grew there, and sometimes not only so as to cover the opening, but in the case
of the Goniasteroidocrinus, so as to cover nearly the whole vault. That these
shells did not merely grow upon dead Crinoids lying at the bottom of the sea,
is evident from the fact that these Crinoids thus found in such numbers, with
a Platycems attached, at Crawfordsville, always have the arms and most deli-
cate pinnulae perfectly preserved ; and in some other instances where the
Plaiyceras is attached to the top of the vault, the arms of the Crinoid are found
folded over the shell, as they would naturally fold together by the contraction
of the muscles at death. Had these Crinoids remained uncoved by sediment
at the bottom of the sea long enough after death for the Plaiyceras to grow
upon them, their arms and pinnulse would have fallen to pieces. If the only
opening in the vault ©f these Crinoids was the vent only, we could readily
understand how the excrementitious matter might have escaped under the foot
of the Plaiyceras ; but if it was both mouth and vent it is difficult to under-
stand how, in such a case, food could have passed in.

Again, in many of the Actinocrinida, the only opening in the vault (except-
the arm-openings) is situated at the extremity of a long, slender, straight tube,
rising from near the centre of the vault, though never from directly over the
point of convergence of the ambulacral canals. And it is a remarkable fact,
that of the hundreds of specimens we have seen with more or less of this tube
preserved, we have never yet seen one that had its extremity unbroken. In
several instances we have seen it from one to three inches in length, and so
attenuated in the latter cases, that the internal cavity was not more than 0-05
inch in diameter, even in large specimens ; and in others we have seen it scarce-
ly more than one hundredlh of an inch in diameter, and still the end of the tube
in all cases broken. How small this canal must be at the end of an unbroken
tube, we cannot say, but it must evidently be very small. If this little pore-
like opening, situated at the extreme end of this long, straight, rigid tube,
performed the functions of both mouth and vent, it would certainly seem to
be a very unnatural and inconvenicHt structure.

In regard to the internal convoluted organ seen in so many of the Actino-
cridie belonging to the respiratory instead of the digestive system, we would
remark that its large size seems to us a strong objection to such a conclusion.
In many instances it so nearly fills the whole internal cavity that there would
appear to be entirely inadequate space left for an organ like a digestive sack,
outside of it, while the volutions within would preclude the presence of an in-
dependent digestive sack there. In addition to this, the entire absence, so far
as we can ascertain, of any analogous, internal respiratory organ in the whole
range of the recent Echinodermata, including the existing Crinoids, would appear
to be against the conclusion that this is such, unless we adopt the conclusion
of Dujardin and Hupe, that the Palteozoic Crinoids had no internal digestive
organs, and were nourished by absorption over the whole surface. We should
certainly think it far more probable that this spiral organ is the digestive sack,
than a part of a respiratory apparatus.

Genus GRANATOCRINUS, Troost.

Granatocrinos melonoides, M. and "W.

Body rather under medium size, globose in form. Base very small, nearly
even with the prominent lower extremities of the pseudo-ambulacral areas.

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 89

Radial pieces nearly equaling the entire length of the body, and divided
almost to their base by the pseudo-ambulacral areas, each with a broad deep
sulcus extending up on each side of the pseudo-ambulacral areas, the entire
length ; while between this sulcus and each lateral margin, the surface swells
out into a broad rounded ridge, widest near the middle of the body and nar-
rowing upward and downward, these ridges on each two contiguous pieces
being separated by a deeply sulcated suture. Interradial and anal pieces very
small, subtriangular or cuneate-quadrangular, only about one-sixth the length
of the body, measuring over the curve of the sides. Pseudo arabulacral areas
very narrow or sublinear, with sides parallel, equaling the entire length of the
body, slightly impressed above, but quite as prominent as the immediate
margins of the radial pieces on each side below, if not wider; pore pieces
about fifty on each side of the mesial furrow; supplementary pore pieces
unknown ; lancet pieces apparently not exposed externally. Openings of the
summit small, but not clearly seen in the specimen.

Body of the typical specimen 0-45 inch in height; breadth, 0-5 inch.

The surface of the typical specimen of this species is not well enough pre-
served to show fine markings, but another individual of apparently the same
species shows the lower half of the radial pieces to be ornamented with rather
fine granules, so arranged as to look like fine transverse strife under a magni-
fier, while a few stronger longitudinal strife are also seen on this part of the
body. In this specimen, however, the surface of the radial pieces is less con-
vex between their lateral margins and the broad sulcus on each side of the
pseudo-ambulacra, than in the typical form.

In form and the narrowness of its pseudo-ambulacra this species reminds
one of G. Sayi, of Shumard, but it is at once distinguished by the very much
larger anal and interradial and shorter radial pieces of that species, as well as
by the canaliculate character of the sutures between the latter, with a rounded
ridge on each side of this suture. In the comparative size of its radial and
interradial pieces, as well as in the canaliculated sutures between its radial
pieces, it agrees more nearly with G. melo, of 0. and S., but is not only distin-
guished from that species by its subglobose form (a little wider than long) and
merely even instead of concave base, but by its much more prominent pseudo-
ambulacral areas below the middle of the body, and deep broad rounded sulci im-
mediately on each side of these, and swollen surface between these sulci and the
canaliculated suture separating the radial pieces. It moreover comes from the
upper division of the Burlington group, while the vastly more common G. melo
is only found in the lower beds.

Locality and position. — Upper beds of Burlington group, Burlington Iowa.
Lower Carboniferous. No. 398 of Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

Granatocrinds pisum, M. and W,

Body small, oval — subglobose, being slightly longer than wide. Base very
small, rather deeply concave, and distinctly pentagonal in outline. Radial
pieces long, truncato-subelliptical in general outline, with tlie lower end nar-
row, forming a nearly flat surface across between the pseudo-ambulacral fields,
excepting below the middle, where these surfaces are concave ; all divided
nearly to their very bases by the pseudo-ambulacra, and without even the
faintest trace of a furrow along up the sutures between their lateral margins.
Interradial and anal pieces strongly incurved above, cuneate-subtrigonal in
form and longer than wide, the length being about one fourth that of the
whole body, measuring over the curve of the sides. Pseudo-ambulacra narrow,
or sublinear, with very nearly parallel sides, there being a slight taper from
above downward; all quite as convex as the slightly raised linear margins of
the radial pieces on each side ; pore pieces about twenty-six on each side of
the distinct mesial furrow, along which their inner ends are minutely crenate,
comparatively rather large, and ranging obliquely outward and downward ;

1869.]

90 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

supplementary pore pieces unknown ; lancet pieces apparently not visible
externally, unless it is along the bottom of the mesial furrow.

Summit, when the minute pieces that doubtless closed the central region
are removed, with a pentagonal opening of about the size of the anal aperture ;
so-called ovarian pores very small, and situated one on each side of each
interradial piece, and two others doubtless as usual opening into the anal
aperture, which is nearly circular and much larger than the pores.

Surface finely granular, the granules being smaller and more crowded on
a lanceolate area, extending up the radial pieces between the pseudo-amlnila-
cra, and terminating just before reaching the interradials, and on each side,
and above this space.

Height of body, 0-30 inch; breadth, 0-28 inch.

This little species might be mistaken for a small specimen of O. melo, by a
hasty observer. It may be readily distinguished, however, by its longer inter-
radial pieces, less numerous and proportionally larger pore pieces, much more
prominent pseudo-ambulacra, and particularly by not having even a trace of
a linear furrow along up the sutures separating the radial pieces, and these
pieces flat instead of convex across between the pseudo-ambulacra. The little
projecting points at the bases of its pseudo-ambulacra are also directed more
downward.

Locality and position. Upper part of the Burlington group, Burlington,
Iowa. Lower Carboniferous. No. 397 of Mr. Wachsrauth's collection.

Geanatoorinus neglectus, M. and W.

Body small, varying from oval to subglobose. Base slightly projecting,
pentagonal in outline. Radial pieces scarcely equaling two-thirds the entire
length, and deeply divided by the pseudo-ambulacral areas. Interradial pieces
more than one-third the length of the body, cuneate-subtrigonal in form. Anal
piece of about the same size as the interradials, but its upper extremity is erect
and distinctly projecting, so as to form around the anal opening protuberant
margins. Pseudo-ambulacral areas narrow, with nearly parallel sides, almost
equaling the entire length of the body, nearly as prominent as the slightly
raised margins of the radial pieces on each side; pore pieces twentj^-five to
thirty on each side of the mesial furrow ; supplementary pore pieces unknown ;
lancet pieces apparently not visible externally.

Mesial opening of the summit very small ; so-called ovarian apertures minute
and situated one on each side of the interradial pieces ; anal opening compara-
tively large, with very prominent margins.

Surface of the radial plates between the pseudo-ambulacral areas longitudi-
dinally granulo-striate, while that of the interradial and anal pieces is marked
in the same way transversely with a downward curvature.

Length of one of the oval specimens, 0-36 inch ; breadth, about 0-28 inch ;
breadth of pseudo ambulacra 05 inch. Length of a smaller, proportionately
shorter specimen, 0-28 inch ; breadth, 0-25 inch.

This is another species having much the general appearanre of G. melo, from
which, however, it is at once distinguished by its comparatively much larger
interradial and anal pieces, flat spaces between the pseudo-ambulacra, without
any furrow along the mesial suture, and its more protuberant base and anal
pieces.

It is more nearly allied, however, to the last described species in several of
these characters, though sufiiciently distinct to be readily separated on compa-
rison. For instance, its anal and interradial pieces are nearly twice as large as
in that species. Again, its base is proportionally two or three times as large,
and so protuberant as to be seen in a side view, instead of being concave ;
while its pseudo-ambulacral areas do not extend so far down, and the little
projections of the radial pieces at the lower extremities of these areas point
out horizontally, instead of being directed nearly downward, like five little

[April,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 91

legs, upon which the body stands when placed an an even surface, as in the
last.

We have seen five specimens, all of which agree in the characters given.

Locality and position. — Lower division of the Burlington group, at Burlington,
Iowa. Lower Carboniferous. No. 396 of Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

Granatocrinus olaber, M. and W.

Body very small, pentagonal-subglobose, being somewhat wider than long
and rather broadly truncated below, with the spaces between the rather promi-
nent pseudo-ambulacral areas almost flat near the middle, and more or less
concave below. Base about even with the most prominent part of the lower
ends of the radial pieces, nearly flat, and very distinctlj' pentagonal, or almost
pentapetalous in outline. Radial pieces forming about three-fourths the actual
height of the body, abruptly incurved below to connect with the base, and all
divided quite to the lower side of the body by the pseudo-ambulacral areas.
Interradial pieces of moderate size, or about one-third as long as the body,
measuring over the curve of the sides from their upper ends to the base ;
triangular in form and nearly as wide as long, all strongly incurved above ;
anal piece shorter than the interradials below the anal opening. Pseudo-
ambulacral areas rather narrow, tapering slightly from above, and nearly as
convex as the margins of the radials on each side. Pore pieces about twenty-
five to thirty on each side of the mesial furrow of each area ; supplementary
pore pieces unknown ; lancet pieces apparently not showing externally.
Summit depressed in the middle ; central and anal openings comparatively
rather large ; so-called ovarian pores of moderate size, situated one on each
side of the inner end of each interradial piece, and of course two others as
usual opening into the anal aperture.

Surface apparently quite smooth, even as seen under a magnifier, but proba-
bly when entirely unworn, marlied by microscopic longitudinal strife.

Height of one of the largest specimens, 0-21 inch; breadth, 0-23 inch ; breadth
pseudo-ambulacral areas, 0-04 inch ; do. of spaces between the same, at the
widest part, 0-13 inch.

This little species is so very clearly distinct from all others known to us, that
it is unnecessary to compare it with any of those yet described. Its most
characteristic features are its small size, smooth surface, flat space between the
pseudo-ambulacral areas, and nearly even pentapetalous base.

We have before us nine specimens, of various sizes, all agreeing in the char-
acters given excepting one, which, from abnormal development, has only four
pseudo-ambulacral areas. As this agrees with the others, however, exactly,
in all its specific characters, it is evidently a monstrosity of the same species,
produced by the non-development of one of the radial pieces, by which means
two of the pseudo-ambulacral fields are, as it were, welded together, to form
one larger than any of the other three.

Locality and position. — Saint Louis division of the Lower Carboniferous
series, in Hardin County, Illinois.

May Uh.
Jos. Jeanes in the Chair.
Twenty-seven members present.
The following paper Avas presented for publication :
" A review of the species of Plethodontidse and Desmognathidse."
By E. D. Cope.

Mr. J. H. Redfield stated that on the 22d of April, in company with Mr. C.
F. Parker, he had visited Cedar Bridge, Ocean Co., N. J., in search of Corema
Conradii. This plant occurs in Newfoundland, on islands near Bath, Maine,

1869.]

92 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

at Plymouth, Cape Cod, and near Islip, Long Island, and was first discovered at
Cedar Bridge by Prof. S. W. Conrad. This locality was visited by Dr. Torrey,
about 1835, and carefully indicated by him in Ann. N. Y. Lye. Nat. Hist, iv
83 — so that there was no difBculty in finding the precise points mentioned ; but
Mr. R. was sorry that no trace of the plant could now be found there, and it
has doubtless been eradicated by animals or by unscrupulous collectors, or
has been otherwise unable to maintain its foothold in " the struggle for exis-
tence." The vicinity was also carefully examined, but without success. The
plant is said to have once existed near Peraberton Mills, N. J., but as that
neighborhood is now entirely under cultivation, there is no evidence that the
Corema Conradii now exists south of Long Island. If it is again to be dis-
covered in New Jersey, it will probably be in the wide sandy waste a few miles
west of Cedar Bridge, near the boundary between Burlington and Ocean coun-
ties, where a succession of elevated ancient ocean beaches offer conditions
similar to those of Cape Cod.

Prof. Cope exhibited bones and teeth of the large extinct Chinchilla of the
island of Anguilla, W. I., Amblyrhiza i nun data, and with them teeth of
a second and new species, which he called Loxomylus 1 o ngid en s. It was
also allied to the Chinchillas, and of large size. They were accompanied by
a shell implement of human manufacture, which was, so far as discover}' in
an earthy matrix, and the color, etc., were evidence, of the same age as the
Rodents.

May nth.

Dr. Ruschenberger, Vice-President, in the Chair.

Twenty-eight members present.

The following papers were presented for publication :

" Further notes on Microscopic Crystals." By Isaac Lea, L.L. D.

" Sexual Law in the Conifera." By Thos. Meehan.

May 18th.
Dr. Ruschenberger, Vice-President, in the Chair.
Twenty-five members present.

The following paper was presented for publication :
" An attempt to ascertain the average weight of the Brain in the
different races of Mankind." By Joseph Barnard Davis.

3fay 25th.
Prof. Frazer in the Chair.
Twenty.seven members present.

The new By-Laws were called up for a third reading, and, on mo-
tion to that effect, were adopted as the laws governing the Academy.
The following deaths were announced :

Frederick Cailliaud, Herman von Meyer and George J. Durham.
The following gentlemen were elected members :
Rev. Dr. Wm. Rudder and Persifor Frazer, Jr. Wm. H. Dall,
of Washington, D. C, was elected a correspondent.

The Committee on paper entitled " An attemjit to ascertain the

[May,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 93

average weight of the Brain in different races of Mankind," by Jos.
Barnard Davis, rej^orted in favor of its publication in the Journal.

On favorable report of the Committees, the following papers were
ordered to be published :

A Beview af the species of the FLETHODONTID^ and DESUOGNATHIO^.

BY E. D. COPE, A, M.

Family PLETHODONTID^.

Gra,y Catalogue Batrachia Gradieatia Brit. Mus. 1850, 31. Exclusive of the
Amblystoma and Desmognathus.

Plethodontidffi Cope, Journ. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil., 1866, 105.

Spelerpirue Cope, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1859, 123.

Plethodontidse, Bolitoglossidae and Hemidactyliidse, Hallowell, Journ. Ac.
N. Sci. Phil., 1858, 338, 339.

No anterior axial bone ; palatines not prolonged over parasphenoid; bearing
teeth on the posterior portion. No postorbital arch.

Dentigerous plates on the parasphenoid.

Carpus and tarsus cartilaginous.

Verlebrffi amphicoelian.

Occipital condyles sessile.

Prefrontals present, pterygoids wanting.

Prefrontals not prolonged or embracing frontals ; parietals slightly embrac-
ing.

Orbitosphenoids separated by membrane from prootic.

Vestibule, inner wall osseous.

The preceding diagnosis includes the characters assigned to the family by
the writer in 1866, excepting one, i.e. the presence of the premaxillary fonta-
nelle, which I find to be wanting in the genus Stereochila m.

In the characters of the scapular and pelvic arches this family does not dif-
fer from the Amblystomidie and Salamandridse. The foramen which separates
the coracoid from the procoracoid is well marked and intermarginal : in the
Amblystomida; it is smaller, and in the Salamandridae marginal. The femur
always presents a strong trochanter ; it is weak in Stereochila marginata.
In Uemisalamandra and Diemyctylus it is quite weak, but in Salamandra
strong.

la most of the genera of this family the enamel does not cover the entire
crown of the tooth. In Spelerpes rubra, longicauda and b e 1 1 i i, and
Plethodon glutinosus and c i n e r e u s, the external part of the crown
terminates in a transverse cutting edge, while the inner extremity is more pro-
longed, leaving a transverse depression between the two. In Sp. bell i i, the
inner apex is transverse and prolonged a little beyond the external, while in
the other Spelerpes and the Plethodon glutinosus the inner crown ii
more prolonged and incurved conic. In P. erythronotus it is a little
more obtuse. In Desmognathus and the Amblystomidie the two apices are
of equal height, and are both transverse cutting edges, the outer narrowed
in the former. In the larvai of Plethodontidse that I have examined, the
crowns are more simple. The teeth of Anaides are more like those of the
Coecilia or of Hylonomus of the coal measures, and distinguish the genus from
•other Plethodonlidffi.*

This family is more remote in its skeletal characters from the Salamandridae
and Pleurodelidae, than is the Amblystomidae. Thus the absence of parasphe-
noid brushes, the ossification of the tarsus and carpus, and the j)ersiste"nce of
the pterygoid bones are characters common to the two latter, and wanting in

♦See Proceed. Acad. N. Sci. Phila., 1859, 124.

1869.]

94 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

the present family. On the other hand, the non-prolongation posteriorly of
the vomers, and the amphicoslian vertebrae, belong to this family and the Am-
blystomidaj only. The position of the latter family is therefore between the
Plethodontidae and the Salamandridse. The Amblystomidaj and Plethodon-
tidce may be thus compared with reference to the developmental character of
the features which distinguish them.

Amblystomid.e. Plethodontid^.

Superior. Inferior.

Carpus and tarsus osseous. Carpus and tarsus cartilaginous.

Premasillary fontanelle closed. Prema.xillary fontanelle open.

Inferior. Superior.

0. pterygoideum persistent. 0. pterygoideum obliterated.

The inferiority of some Plethodontidae is seen in the non-distinction of the
digits (Geotriton), the thinness of the ossification of the parietal membrane
boues (Batrachoseps), and in Opheobatrachus 1 i n e o 1 u s m, from Vera Cruz,
the persistence of the membranous cranium by the limitation of the parietal
bones to two small lateral scales, and the wide divarication of the posterior
extremities of the frontals.

Most characters of this family are those of low development, and approxi-
mations to the larval condition, except the loss of the pterygoid : two of the
species exhibit a subocular cirrhus, which occurs in some of the Gymnophidia
(Coecilia) and Dactylethra among Anura. It is probably the persistence of
that long subocular tentacle characteristic of the early larval stage of Sala-
mandridie and Pleurodelidaj (e. g., Salamandra Notophthalmus), and of a
later larval stage of Dactylethra (vid. Wyman and Gray), where they resemble
the appendages of the Silurida. They have been called crochets by Rusconi,
and homologized with the cylindric cephalic processes of the larval Rana,
with what correctness remains to be proven by observations on other types,

Eschscholtz correctly represents Batrachoseps attenuatus as without
prefrontals. An elongate process of the frontal occupits only part of its place,
forming no suture with the maxillary ; this is quite different from Desraogna-
thus, where the orbit is completed by the union of frontal and maxillary. la
Batrachoseps quadridigitatus the prefrontal occupies this depression
as an elongate vertical scale.

In Spelerpes rubra the quadratum presents a small internal anterior ala,
which has a superficial resemblance to a pterygoid. In this species there is
apparently an azygus bone behind the premaxillaries ; this is, however, only
the exposed extremity of their united spines, which are nearly or quite isola-
ted by the approximation of the anterior parts of the nasale. It does not
occur in the Gyrinophilus salmoneus.

The genera embraced in this family appear to be as follows :
Section I. The tongue attached from the central or posterior pedicel to the
anterior margin in narrower or wider band. (Plethodontae).
A. Two premaxillary bones.
Digits 4 — 5 ; maxillary bone regular, with numerous small teeth ; parietals

fully ossified Plethodom.

Digits 4 — 4 ; maxillary as above, parietals fully ossified. Hemidactylium.
AA. One premaxillary.
a.. Digits 4 — 4.
Maxillary regular, with small teeth ; parietals not ossified.. Batrachoseps.

eta.. Digits 4 — 5.
Maxillary normal, teeth small, very numerous ; no premaxillary fontanelle.

Stereochila.

Maxillary edentulous posteriorly, decurved, forming a cutting edge ; teeth

few, large, knife-shaped; a premaxillary foutanelle Anaides.

[May,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 95

Section II. The tongue free all around, attached by its central pedicel only.
(Spelerpes).

A. Two premaxillary bones (with fontanelle).

Digits 4 — 5, closely united by a broad palmar membrane Geotbiton.

Digits 4 — 5, entirely free Gtkikophilus.

AA. One premaxillary bone (with fontanelle).
a. Digits 4 — 4.

Digits free, parietal and palatine bones well ossified Manculus.

eta. Digits 4 — 5.

Digits little distinct j parietal cartilages not ossified ; two patches on para-
spbenoid teeth , Opheobatrachus.

Digits entirely confounded as an undivided palm or sole ; cranial bones
well ossified CEdipos.

Digits all free, cranial bones well ossified Spelerpes.

The generic relationships of the above named groups are exceedingly sim-
ple, and the ease with which the animals can be analysed, renders the case clear
from the doubts which constantly arise in discussions of generic relationships
as to the probable omission of characters from the argument. Here it can be
safely asserted that, as far as the skeletons are concerned, there exist no
other generic distinctions than those given above. If now any principles can
be derived from consideration of the osseous system, that which of all others
presents us with by far the greatest number of minute modifications of struc-
ture, the same may be with considerable probability inferred for the other
systems.

The primary groups are distinguished by the different degrees of attach-
ment of the tongue. That form which is most attached, represents, and is
identical with, an immature stage of the species of Sect, second, where it is
more extensively free, as any one may satisfy himself by the examination of a
larva of Spelerpes at a certain period. The tongue will be found to be that
of Plethodon.

The secondary groups are distinguished by the separation or confluence of
the premaxillary bones. Those presenting the latter type exhibit separate
premaxillaries during the early portion of larval life, though the union often
takes place very early. The number of digits distinguishes groups of genera
of less value ; in some the hind limb has five digits, in ethers four. In an
early larval stage all possess but four digits, and in some of those with five
the inner consists of one phalange only, even at maturity , (Spelerpes c h i r o p-
ter u s, et aff.), not having as complete a series of larvae of Spelerpes and
Plethodon, as of Amblystomap u n c t a t u m,the development of the digits in the
latter will indicate the meaning of variations in the same at maturity. At a
length of 1-2 mm. the fore limb only is projected, and bears two digits only,
as in the genus Proteus. At 1-5 mm. sometimes the posterior limbs are de-
veloped, sometimes not; and from this size to 2-5 mm. the number of digits
bears little relation to the size of the animal, an additional digit sometimes
appearing earlier, sometimes later. Their numbers are then at first 2 — ; then
always 3 — ; with the hind foot divided, they are 3 — 2, and then 3 — 3. Some-
times the anterior digits are complete in number before the hind limb appears,
and we have combinations of numbers from 4 — to 4 — 3, 4 — 4, and the full
number 4 — 5, which is found in all specimens of 2.5 mm. and upwards.
Genera which exhibit reduced digits are in all other respects Spelerpes (i. e.
Manculus) or Plethodon (Hemidactylium) or Hemidactylium with unossified
parietal bones and consolidated premaxillaries (Batrachoseps). Applying the
case of Amblystoma to these, we could not assert that Hemidactylium, for in-
stance, is identical with the undeveloped stags of Plethodon, since when Am-
blystoma exhibits digits 4 — 4, it is branchiferous. But making the more

1869.]

96 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP

legitimate comparison with Plethodoa itself, I find that the complete number
of posterior digits appears much later in life than in Amblystoma, that devel-
opment in this regard is retarded, while in respect to the gills it is accelerated.
Thus in Plethodon e ry th r n t u s the exterior digit is longer than the in-
terior ; in specimens of 2-4 mm. the outer digit is the shorter; in those of 1*8
mm. which are without gills, it is a very minute tubercle on the outer meta-
tarsus. In a little earlier stage it cannot but be wanting, though this I have
not seen, and I have little doubt that it is then a Hemidactylium, unless in-
deed the parietal bones be not ossified.

Another foetal condition rendered permanent is seen in the generic charac-
ter of the genus ffidipus, which differs from Sptlerpes solely in the foetal non-
separation of the digits. In the larva of Sp, rubra, the digits are early
entirely distinct, so that so far as this species is concerned Qildipus presents an
inexact parallelism, but they are also more distinct than in the mature Speler-
pes bellii, where, as might be supposed, the foetal union is delayed to ma-
turity in other respects, as in a specimen from Orizava, Mex., of 16-5 1. in
length. Here the union is about as extensive as in CEdipus m o r i o. In the
young of Thorius pennatulus the digits are not distinguished in specimens
of -66, the full size, and otherwise entirely mature. In the adult they are dis-
tinct for half their length. The digits in the young larva of Gyrinophilus
salmoneus are as distinct as in those of Spelerpes rubra; in one example
I find the simple foot of earlier stages retained, resembling exactly that of
CEdipus, excepting that there are emarginations for but three toes, instead of
five. Genera which have no premaxillary fontanelle at maturity have it in
the larval stage. Finally closely allied genera, which only differ in the degrees
of ossification of the parietal and palatine bones, represent simply the relation
between undeveloped and developed conditions of the same form.

The relations of the genera may be expressed as follows : Those of the first
or Plethodontine section are related to those of the second or Spelerpine, by
an inexact parallelism, excepting Anaides, whose peculiarities exclude it from
the comparison. Those in each section differing in the union or separation of
the premaxillary bones, are related in the same way to each other. The nearly
allied genera in the Plethodontine group are Hemidactylium and Plethodon,
and Batrachoseps and Stereochila. In the first case we have only inexact
parallelism, because while Plethodon has the four digits of Hemidactylium, its
parietal bones are unossified, though an acceleration of development in this
respect would render the relation one of exact parallelism. This is apparently
the relation between Batrachoseps and Stereochilus, for with the foetal digits
of the latter, the former preserves also its foetal cranium. It only remains to
ascertain whether Stereochilus loses its branchia; before or after acquiring the
normal number of digits. From the very small size of one at least of these,
the former case seems probable, but I have not yet been able to prove it by
direct observation. Should it be so, we would have a case of exact paral-
lelism.

In the Spelerpine group the relation between Geotriton and Gyrinophilus is
again one of inexact parallelism, since when the digits of the latter are only sepa-
rated at the extremities, as in the former, the animal is still branchiferous and
possesses the larval tongue, etc. The same occurs in Spelerpes when certain of its
species present but four hind toes as in Manculus; therefore the relation of these
two is also of inexact parallelism. The relation of Oplieobatrachus is, however,
one of exact parallelism, for its characters are all found in some young Speler-
pes at an immature age, subsequent to the absorption of the branchiae. With
CEdipus, if the condition be not that of exact parallelism with some species of
Spelerpes, the approach to it is close, as above observed. It is chiefly pre-
vented by the fact that the ossification of the parietal bones in most species of
the latter takes place after the extremities are fully developed. It is to be
observed in this connection that, as has been above pointed out, the separation
of the digits takes place at very different periods in the history of the different

[May,

NATUEAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

97

species of the same genus. Thus in Spelerpes rubra they are entirely dis-
tinct at a very early period of larval life, while in S. cephalicus and S.
b e 1 1 i i, which much more nearly resemble the species of (Edipus in the dis-
position of the vomerine teeth and cylindric form of the tail, this separation
is much retarded.

These genera may be parallelized also in the following manner, in illustra-
tion of the law of heterology :*

Plethodontae. Spelerpese.

A. one premaxillary.

No fontanelle.

Stereochila.

Anaides,

Batrachoseps.

Hemidactylium.
Plethodon,

A. fontanelle.
Toes 4—5.
Teeth large.

Teeth small.

Toes 4—4.

AA. Two premaxillaries.
Toes free.

Toes united.

The minor relations may be more readily expressed thus :

Plethodontae.

Plethodon.
Anaides,

Hemidactylium.
Batrachoseps.

Or thus :

two premaxillaries ;

Oyrinophilus.

Plethodon.

Oeotriton.

Hemidactylium.

Digits 4 — 5,
Digits distinct.

Two premax.

One premax.
Digits united.

Two premax.

One premax.
Digits 4 — 4.

Digits 4 — 5.
a. distinct.
Tongue free.

Tongue attached.

«*. united.

Digits 4 — 4.

Spelerpes.
Manculus.

Gyrinophilus,
Geotriton.

Spelerpeae.

Gyrinophilus, .
Spelerpes.

Oeotriton..
(Edipus.

Manculus.

one premaxillary.

Spelerpes.
Stereochila.
(Edipus.

Manculus.
Batrachoseps.

The above genera present, within restricted limits, not only the relations
which will be found to characterize genera elsewhere, but the relations between
all natural groups of whatever rank, or in other words, between groups defined
by structural peculiarities. From such simple cases we may derive the following
rationale of classification with reference to characters above the specific : First,

1869.]

•See origin of Genera, p. 53.

7

98 PEOCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

those characters are highest which cover the greatest number of cases, ( i. e. of species.)
Second, the extent covered bg each of a given number of characters being equal or
nearly so, that is highest which expresses modifications of those characters which dis-
tinguish the group which embraces them all, from other groups of similar high rank.
Third, the loivest grade of characters, except the specific, i. e. those tvhich distinguish
nearest allies, are always those ivhich are assumed latest in the life history of each.

These rules are without significance if they do not point to a derivative
hypothesis.

BATRACHOSEPS Bonap.

Tongue adherent anteriorly. Digits 4 — 4. A large parietal fontanelle.
Premaxillary pierced by a fontanelle, single.

This genus embraces the forms which may be considered the lowest in the
family, if Necturus be excluded. It difters from Hemidactylium nearly as Opheo-
batrachus does from Spelerpes, i. e., in the non-ossification of the parietal bones.
This low grade of development is here seen in the extremities also, which are
much reduced, and the snake-like form of one of the species. The species are
three, as follows :

I. Costal plicai 18; the toes well developed, palmate.

Outer posterior toe well developed ; hind limb extending over 7-5 costal
interspaces, fore limb to orbit; tail equal body and head to orbit, more slender
than the body; belly yellowish B. pacificus.

II. Costal plicae 20 — 1 ; toes very rudimental, little distinct.

Hind limb extending over six costal interspaces ; fore limb nearly to orbit ;
tail as long as body and head to orbit ; width of head seven times from muzzle

to groin ; belly black ' B. nigriventris.

Hind limb extending over four costal interspaces ; fore limb not to angle of
mouth ; tail thick as body, as long as body and head plus the length from
muzzle to axilla; width of head eight times from muzzle to groin ; belly brown.

B. attenuatus.
Batrachoseps nigriventris Cope.

This small species resembles the first in general proportions, but is nearer
the next in the rudimental condition of the limbs.

Muzzle shorter than oi'bit ; upper lip slightly angulated. A groove from the
orbit posteriorly ; a gular fold. Costal grooves extending to vertebral line,
but not curved forwards there as in H. scutatum; extending across abdo-
men. Body slightly compressed. The tail as stout as the body at the base,
subquadrate in section, becoming compi-essed at the tip, strongly annulate,
not swollen. Inner digits on both feet minute. Vomerine series well devel-
oped ; sphenoidals as in the others.

Lines.

Total length 22

Do., exclusive of tail from vent 13-5

Muzzle to axilla 3-5

Width head 1-7

Length fore limb , l-S

" hind " 2

Color above deep brown, separated abruptly from the black of the lower
surfaces ; tail black.

Two specimens of this species were brought to the Museum of Academy
Natural Sciences from Ft. Tejon, California. One of these, Mus. Smithsonian,
is No. 6734, 1 specimen, Ft. Tejon, Cal. 1865, Acad. Nat. Sciences. Geo. H.
Horn, M. D.
Batrachoseps attenuatus Eschscholtz.

Salamandra attenuata Esch., Zoological AtJas, pt. v, pi. 21, figs 1 — 14.
Batrachoseps attenuata Bonap., Fauna Italica, ii, 1841. Baird, Journ. Ac. Nat.
Sci. Phil, i, 288. Gray, Cat. Brit. Mus. p. 41. Hallowell, J. A. Nat. Sci. Phil.
1858, 348.

[May,

NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 99

Batrachoseps pacificus Cope.

Hemidactylium pacificum Cope, Proceed. Acad. Nat. Sciences, Phila. 1865, p.
195.

HEMIDACTYLIUM Tschudi.

Classif. der Batrachier Trans. Neuchatel, 1838, p. 54 — 94. Bonap., Fauna
Ital. ii, 131, No. 10. Fitzinger, Syst. Rept. 33. Baird, Journ. Ac. Nat. Sci.
Phila. i, 284, 1849. Hallowell, 1. c. 1858, 3(55. Gray, Cat. Brit. Mus. 1850, 41.
Desmodactylus Dum, Bibr. Erp. Gen. 8 p.

Tongue adherent anteriorly. Digits 4 — 4. Parietal bones fully ossified,
without fontanelle? Two premaxillaries, with fontanelle.

This genus is only distinguished from Plethodon by the deficiency of its hind
foot in digits. Those that remain are quite rudimental. There is but one
species known, and its habits are entirely terrestrial.

Hemidactylium scutatum Schlegel.

Salamandra scutata iich.\Qg%\,},i\xs.'L^jCi. Abbildungen, t. 40, f. 4, 6, 1837.
Fauna Japonica, ii, 119. Hemidactylium scutatum Tschudi 1. c, Bonaparte 1. c,
Baird, Hallowell, Gray 1. c. Salamaiidra melanosticta Gibbes, Bost. Journ. Nat.
Hist. V, 89, t. 10. Desmodactylus melanostictus Dum., Bibr., viii. Salamandra
fusca Green, Journ. A. N. Sci. Phil, i, 337, 1818, not S.fusca Raf.

PLETHODON Tschudi.

System d. Batrachier Trans. Neuchatel, 1838, 59 — 92. Bonap., Fauna Italica,
ii, 131. Baird, Journ. Ac. N. Sci. Phil, i, 292. Hallowell, ib. 1858, 342. Cope,
Proc. A. N. Sci. Phil. 1859, 124.

Tongue attached by the median line below, from the glossohyal bone to
near the anterior margin ; pterygoid teeth in two patches, more or less ap-
proximated ; a large fontanelle between the spines of the separate premaxillary
bones. Toes 4 — 5, normal. Anterior teeth not enlarged. Cranium well ossi-
fied. Two premaxillary bones, their spines embracing a fontanelle.

This genus is highly characteristic of the Regio Nearctica, where three
species represent it on the Pacific slope, and two in the Eastern district. A
species from Japan, named P. p e r s i m i 1 i s by Gray, is shown by Mivart not
to belong to this genus.* The species are all terrestrial in their habits, and
three which I have observed (P. oregonensis, P. glutinosus, P. ery-
thronotus) undergo their metamorphosis while quite small. The last
named, and probably P. glutinosus, never enter the water, but are hatched
in damp places on land. The branchias have therefore no functional service.

St. The pterygoid patches in contact throughout ; vomerine series well
separated medially.
Costal plicas 16 to 19 ; form slender, tail cylindric, limbs weak, inner toes
rudimental ; vomerine series not extending beyond nares externally ; belly
brown marbled ; above plumbeous or with a red longitudinal band.

P. erythronotus.

Costal plicae 13 ; form slender, tail well compressed ; limbs weak, inner toes

rudimental ; vomerine series not extending outside of nares ; belly brown

marbled ; above with a red dorsal band P. intermedins.

Costal plicae 14 ; form stout, tail rounded ; limbs short, stout ; inner digits
distinct ; vomerine series extending outside of inner nares ; black, usually with
gray lateral blotches and smaller dorsal spots P. glutinosus.

A:t. The pterygoid patches well separated, vomerine series closely approxi-
mated medially.

* Mivart calls it Pectoglossa, but gives no character by which it can be separated from
Amblystoma.

1869.]

100 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP

Costal plicse 13 ; form stout, head large, wide ; lower jaw wider than upper ;
muzzle broadly truncate ; tail slender subcylindcic ; black, limbs, belly, and
spots of back, orange P. croceater.

Costal pliese 10 — 11 ; form stout, head wide, maxillaries wider than mandi-
ble ; muzzle narrowly truncate ; tail slender, subcylindrical ; light brown
above ; limbs and below yellow P. oregonensis.

Plkthodon EBYTHHONOT08 Green.
Var. a. cineretis,
Sal. c. (Sept. 1818) Green, J. A. N. S. i. 356.
P. c. (1838) Tsch., Class, der Bat. Baird, Journ. A. N. Sci. (2) 1 p.

Var. /?. erythronotus.
Sal. e. (Sept. 1818) Green, J. A. N. S. i. 356. (1838) Holb. Herp. III. 13,
pi. 27. (1842) 2d ed. v. 43, pi. 11. (1840) Storer, Mass. Kept. 245. (1842)
Dekay, N. Y. Kept. 75, pi. 16, f. 38.

Plethodon erythronotus Baird 1. c, Hallowell 1. c, 1858, 343.

N.B. — Green quotes this species from Raf , whose description I cannot find.

Var. y. dorsaUs, Baird, M. S.
3776. Louisville, Ky. ; Salem, Mass.

Plkthodon intbrmbdius Baird.

Proceedings Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1857, 209.
Vancouver I.

Plethodon glutinosub Green.

Sal. g. (Sept. 1818) Green, J. A. N. S. i. 357. (1838) Hoi. Herp. 1st ed. ii,
129, pi. 30. (1842) 2d ed. v. 39, pi. 10 ? ? (1849) Storer, Mass. Kept. 259,
an. A. Jefifersoniana ? (1842) Dekay N. Y. Kept. 81, pi. 17, f. 42 (very
young).

Sal. variolata, (Dec. 1818) Gilliams, J. A. N. S. i. 460, p. 18, f, 1.

Sal. cylindracea, (Nov. 1825) Harl., J. A. N. S. v. 156.

Triton porphyriticus, (1842) Dekay, N. Y. Kept. 83, pi. 16, f. 37.

P. g. (1838) Tschudi, Class, der Bat.

Whole eastern district R. nearctica.

Plethodon oregonensis Girard.

Heredia oregonensis Girard, Proc. Acad. Nat Sci. Phila. viii, 1856, 235. Gi-
rard, U. S. Expl. Ex. Herpet. 1858, 11. Hallowell, Pr. A. N. S. Phil, viii, 1856,
235.

Plethodon ensatus Cope, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil. 1867, 167, e Triton en-
satus Esch. = Ensatina eschsckoltzii Gray = Heredia oregonensis Girard fide
Mivart nee Eschscholtzii species 1

Oregon, California.
Plethodon croceater Cope.

Proceed. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. 1857, p. 210.

Lower California.

STEREOCHILUS Cope.

Char. Tongue attached along the median line to the anterior margin. Pte-
rygoid teeth in two elongate patches. Toes 4 — 5. Premaxillary bones COU"
fluent, with a simple spine, without fontanelle.

This genus is represented by but one species of the Eastern district of the
Nearctic region. It ia evidently of aquatic habits and is of larva-like propor-
tions and appearance, but has the cranium fully developed, and in some re-
spects more solidly than its allies. In the only skeleton I have examined, the
prefrontal is present on one side and wanting on the other. The premaxillary
bone is like that of Desmognathus, while the tongue is slightly freer than in
Plethodon. The species exhibits weak extremities. It is from S. E, Georgia,
and is quite rare.

[May,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 101

Costal plicae 17 ; elongate, head narrow, width more than seven times to
groin, more than twice to axilla; no canthus rostralis ; tail compressed from
base, finned; small; pale yellow, brown lined S. m a r g i n a t u m.

Stereochilus marginatcm Hallowell.

Pseudotriton marginatus Hallowell, Proceedings Ac. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1856,
p. 130.

MANCULUS Cope.

Tongue free all round, boletoid. Toes 4 — 4. Parietal bones ossified, and
without fontanelle. Premaxillaries co-ossified.

This genus only differs from Spelerpes in the absence of a digit from the
hind foot, standing thus in the same relation to it that Hemidactylium does to
Plethodon. Its only species was formerly referred to Batrachoseps, but besides
the great difference in the tongue, the latter has a parietal fontanelle and lacks
the prefrontal bone. The latter point is indicated by Eschscholtz in his Atlas.
In the present genus that bone is present;

But one species is as yet known, which has a limited distribution. It is the
smallest North American Salamander.

Manculus quadridigitatus Holbrook.

Salamandra quadridigitata Holbrook, N. Amer. Herpetology, 2d ed. v, 65,
tab. 21. Batrachoseps quadridigitahis Baird, J. A. N. Sci. Phila. 1842, p. 287 ;
Gray, Catal. Brit. Museum, 1850; Hallowell, J. A. N. S. Phil. 1858, p. 348.

South East Georgia.

OPHEOBATRACHUS Gray.

Annals and Magazine Nat. Hist. 1868, p. 297. Spelerpes Spec. Cope, 1865.
(Edipina Keferstein, Archiv. fur Naturgeschichte, 1868, 299.

This genus differs from Spelerpes in the larval character of the cranium ;
its diagnosis is as follows:

Tongue free all round, boletoid. Digits 4 — 5, very short, distinct. Sphe-
noidal series of teeth not united. Cranium membranous above, parietal bones
separated, scale-like. Internal nares enclosed except at the external fissure.

Gray gives the generic name to the 0. v e r m i c u 1 a r i s, on account of its re-
markable vermiform shape. This is, however, among animals with reduced
limbs, always a more or less variable character, and when constant in a species
is certainly not of higher value. The relative elongation of the body and tail
is a marked specific character in Amblystoma, Plethodon and Spelerpes, and
in many Lacertilian genera, e. g. Gerrhonotus. It distinguishes species other-
wise nearly identical, and in some cases, as in G. mul t i car inat us, mere
varieties of the same species.

The species of this genus are very similar to those of Spelerpes in all respects ;
the difference is not quite the same as that between Batrachoseps and Hemi-
dactylium. They are weak and of small size. The type species are distin-
guished by elongate tails. None are known outside of the Mexican zoological
district, in the broad sense.

The generic characters were first indicated by the writer in the Journ. A. N.
Sci. Phila. 1866, p. 100.

Costal plicae fourteen 0. lineolus.

Costal plicas nineteen 0. ve r m icu 1 ar i s.

Opheobatrachos lineolus Cope,

Spelerpes lineolus Cope, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. 1865, 196.

Char. Fourteen costal plicae ; vomerine teeth in long series, extending behind
internal nares ; tail twice as long as head and body, cylindric. Three median
toes, subequal.

Though the carpus and tarsus in this species are cartilaginous, the repre-

1869.]

102 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

sentatives of the bones present in the osseous types (Amblystoma and others)
are developed as they are in many other species of this family. The phalanges
are 1 — 2 — 2 — 2 — 1 on the feet. The metatarsals are not fully ossified medi-
ally.

From Eastern Mexico.

Opheobatrachus VERMicuLAHis Gray.

Annals and Magazine Nat. History, 1868, p. 297. (Edipina uniformk Ke-
ferst., Archiv. f. Naturgesch. 1868, 299.

I had formerly supposed this species to be the same as the preceding, till I
read Dr. Keferstein's description, where the specific characters are for the first
time pointed out.

Guatemala, Costa Rica.

GEOTRITON Gene.

Bonaparte, Fauna Italica, t. 31, No. 14.

Tongue attached by the glossohyal pedicel only. Two premaxillary bones,
which embrace a fontanelle ; parietals ossified, palatines well developed. Dig-
its 4 — 5, united, extensively connected by membrane.

But one species of this genus is known, which is interesting as being the
only species of the Plethodontidse which occurs in Europe. Its characters are
quite identical with the ffidipus of the warmer parts of America, except in re-
spect to the distinction of the two premaxillary bones, which are consolidated
in (Edipus. Until I determined the existence of this character, I regarded the
latter name as a synonyme of Geotriton.

*. Two phalanges, free.
Costal plicae ten ; head wide, width less than five times to groin ; parasphe-
noid patches widely separated from vomerine teeth ; pale brown above.

G. fu scu g.

Geotriton fcscus Gesner.

Salamandra fusca Gesner. S. tavii Gosse. S. genet Schlegel. Oeotriton genei
Tsch. O.fusea Bonap.

Sardinia.

(EDIPUS Gray

Catal. Batr. Sal. Mus. Britt. 1850, 47, num Tschudii, Bonapartii et aliorum?

Tongue attached only at the glossohyal pedicel ; digits 4 — 5, united by a
broad dermal expansion, the phalanges little ossified. Premaxillary bones an-
chylosed and embracing a fontanelle. Parietal bones well ossified.

This genus is remarkably characterized by the structure of its feet, in which
the digits, though possessed of the usual number of phalanges, are not ossified
until and are not distinguished by the external division of the integuments. This,
as is well known, is the condition of the extremities in one of the early stages
of digit-bearing vertebrates, and in their number and proportions resemble es-
peciallj' fcetal mammalia and Batrachia, at different periods of embryonic and
larval life.

The species are found from Northern Mexico to the mountains of New Gren-
ada.

o. One phalange free.

Body rather stout, head width a little more than five times in length to groin ;
thirteen costal folds ; parasphenoid teeth approximating the vomerines ; black
below paler with whitish specks .0. m o r i o'

AA. No phalanges free.
Body elongate, width of head more than six times in length to groin ; costal
plicae thirteen ; parasphenoid teeth in contact, and much produced anteriorly;

[May

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 103

black below, dorsal region yellow to orbits, with black spots ; sometimes form-
ing a median band 0. carbonarius.

" Body short, stout ; plicse ? ; bead width more than one-sixth length to groin ;
black, with pale specks, which may form series or not" (Peters).

0. adspersus.

Body short, stout; twelve costal plicte ; vomerine series commencing within
inner nares ; width of head less thaii five times in length to groin ; black
above ; brown, white speckled below 0. rufesc e n s.

OEdipus morio Cope.

Geotriton carbonarius (black variety) Cope, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1868,
313.

This species is near the G. carbonarius, and differs almost entirely in
its free terminal phalanges, shorter body, and in coloration.

The muzzle is slightly truncate and the head flat, and not so wide as in G.
fuscus; its width enters the length to the groin 5-33 times, indicating a
shorter body than in 0. carbonarius. The plicas of the sides are, how-
ever, equal in number and well marked. Similar folds mark the sides of the
tail. Those behind the eye are similar to those of G. fuscus, but less
marked. The vomerine series are well arched, and nearly meet medially;
they are nearly approached by the prolonged poimt of the parasphenoid
patches, which together form a triangle, with the (posterior) basal angles
rounded. The patches are separated by a groove for only about half their
length. The distances between inner and outer nares are the same. The end
of the muzzle projects beyond the mandible.

The limbs appressed leave two intercostal intervals between them. The in-
ner toe is not free on either foot ; one phalange of the others is free, »xcept the
median, where 1^ phalanges project. The free termination has a rounded
thickening below.

Tail thickened, round, tapering.

Color. Black above ; leaden black below ; the under surfaces and lower
parts of sides, with outer faces of limbs, speckled with indistinct whitish dots.

Measurements. No.

Inches.

Length (axial) from end muzzle to orbit '105

" " " canthug oris '22

" " " axilla. -63

" " '< groin 1-66

" " " end vent 1-94

" " " end tail 3-29

" fore limb , "45

" " foot -145

" hind limb , '45

" " foot 17

Width " " (sole) -IV

" head -28

" body -28

" sacrum "22

The only specimen I have ^een is the following:

No. 6888, 1 specimen. Mountains of Guatemala, Dr. Van Patten.

(EoiPtTS CARBONARIUS Cope.

Proceed. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1860, p. 373.

? ^^ Salamandra platyclactyla Cuvier, Mus. Paris," not described.

?" (Edipus platydactylus Tschudi, Classif. der Batrachier, p. 93, 1838, not de-
scribed,

Bolitoglossa Mexicana Dumeril, Erp. Gen. vol. ix, p. 93, 1854 (specimens from
Vera Paz) pi. 105, fig. 1.

1869.]

104

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

CEdipits adspersus Peters.

(Edipiis adspersus Monatsberichte, Acad. Wiss. Berlin, 1863, 468. Oeotriton
do. Cope, Pr. A. N. Sci. Phil. 1865, 196.

Habitat. Near Bogota, New Grenada.

Interesting as the most southern of the American salamanders.

CEdipus rdfescens Cope.
Sp. noT.
This species is near the 6. carbonarius, but is notably more abbreTi-
ated, and has a different coloration. The vomerine series is shorter, and there
is a lateral plica less.

Muzzle truncate with prominent subnarial projections; its length 1-5 line,
the width between anterior canthus of eyes. Oppressed limbs, separated by
two and a half costal spaces. Plicse eleven, with a twelfth indistinct axillary
fold. Width of head 5-4 in length to groin. Tail short, thickened, cylindric,
equal from end vent to shoulder.

The vomerine do not extend outside of the inner nares, and nearly meet. The
parasphenoids are as in other species, in two approximate patches, narrowing
in front and but little divided behind.

Color. Sides and above black, the back and top of head with a rufous cast.
Under surfaces brown, white specked.

Inch.

Length to axilla -39

" groin 1-04

" end tail -92

« fore limb -26

" hind " , -26

From Vera Cruz, Mexico.

No. 6886, 1 specimen, Orizava, Mexico, F. Sumichrast.

The CEdipus variegatus Gray, Catal. Brit. Mus. p. 48, may belong to this
genus, or even to one of the species here described — as the present one. It is
described in the following language ; " Yellow brown, with three irregular
slightly inosculatory dorsal streaks." Gray.

SPELERPES, Rafinesque.

Atlantic Journal, i, p. 22, 1832. Cylindrosoma Tschudi, Nat. Syst. Batra-
icher Neuchatel, 1838. Cylindrosoma et Bolitoglossa, pars Dum^ril Erp. Gen.
ix. Spelerpes et Fseudotriton Baird, J, A. N. Sci. i ; Hallowell 1. c, iv. Spe-
lerpes Gray, Catal. B. M. 1850, 43.

The tongue free, except at the glossohyal support. Palatine and parietal
bones fully ossified ; premaxillaries consolidated, and their spines embracing
a fontanelle. Teeth small ; toes 4 — 5. Pterygoid patches distinct from each
other.

This is a natural genus, and is abundantly represented by individuals in
the eastern district of the Nearctic Region, and the Mjexican of the Neotropi-
cal. Its digital characters only distinguish it from Manculus, and some of the
Mexican species approach that genus in the great reduction of the inner digit,
which results from a diminution in the number of phalanges. The consoli-
dation of the premaxillaries, a marked character, appears very early in the
developmental history of such of the species as I have been able to study (S.
ruber, S. bilineatus). The Mexican species pass their metamorphoses
soonest, then such as S. bilineatus, and the S. ruber remains longest a
larva.

I. Vomerine teeth not continued back to pterygoid patches ; extended out-
wardly beyond nares.
a. Costal fold 11 — 12, tail cylindric, inner toes rudimental.
PlicjBl2; extremities of inner toes free, others short, thick, subequal ; a
canthus rostralis, muzzle truncate, vomerine series in contact ; lead colored,
usually with two dorsal series of red spots ; largest S. be 11 ii.

[May,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 105

Plicffi 12 ; inner toe and joint distinct, otlier toes well developed, cylindric ;
widtli head 5 to 6 times head to axilla, 2-5 to 3 times to groin ; tail generally
more elongate ; black, sides, tail, and often back, grey varied ; larger.

S. 1 e p r o s u s.
Plicte 11 ; inner toe not distinct, other toes very short, margined ; width of
head 4 2-5 to axilla, 1-3 to groin ; tail short ; black, unspotted ; medium.

S. c e p h al i c u s.

II. Vomerine teeth not continued posteriorly to the pterygoid patches, nor

exteriorly to beyond the nares.
a. Tail round, costal grooves 11 — 12, inner toes rudimeutal.
Plicae 11 (without inguinal) ; width of head 45 length to axilla, 2-5-6 times
in length to groin; tail rather short; upper lip more or less truncate and

angulate S. c h i r op t er u 3.

aa. Tail subround, costal grooves 21, inner toes minute.
Width of bead near 1-Y length to axilla, -33 of length to groin ; limbs
short; tail thick at base; brown, dorsal region darker; small.

S. multiplicatus.
aaa. Tail compressed, costal grooves 13 — 14, inner toes longer.
Plicae usually 14; width of head less than one-sixth to groin ; head to ax-
illa well over -33 of the same; body longer, tail not keeled above proximally,
comparatively short, vomerine series turned obliquely backwards. Yellow,
with two latero-dorsal black lines; tail dark laterally; belly immaculate;
small S. b ill n eat us.

Plicae 13 ; width of head equal one-sixth length to groin ; muzzle to axilla
more than one-third the same; tail long, keeled above. Yellow, sides
many black spotted, a median dorsal series of spots ; tail yellow, black bar-
red ; belly immaculate ; large S. longicaudus.

PlicfB 13 ; width of head greater than one-sixth length to groin ; from
muzzle to axilla considerably more than -33 length to groin ; tail long,
keeled above. Yellow, with three black bands; tail black, yellow barred ;
belly mottled; large S. g ut t o 1 i ne a tus.

III. Vomerine series of teeth continuous posteriorly, with the pterygoid

brushes, and originating behind nares.
Costal plica; 15 — 16; head wide, not more than seven times to groin, not
more than twice to axilla; no canthus rostralis; tail rounded at base, not
finned; large; Vermillion red, black or brown spotted S, ruber.

Spelerpbs bellii Gray.

Catalogue British Museum, p. 46. Cope, Proc. Acad. N. Sci. Phil. 1860,
372. (Edipus platydactylm " Tsch." Baird, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1850,
pp. 282, 286. Bolitoglossa 3Iexicana Dumeril, Bibron Erp. Gen. ix, 93, 1854
(exclus. synonymy).

North Eastern Mexico.

Spelerpes leprosus Cope.
Species nova.

This salamander is one of the numerous additions made to herpetology by
Sumichrast's explorations in the mountains of Eastern Mexico. Of the seven
species of Urodeles which he found in that region, this appears to be the
third in size ; it approaches in this respect, and in some degree in coloration,
the Plethodon glutinosus.

The form is stout, the head broad with short muzzle, and the tail cylindric
and glandular ; it is not unfrequently swollen at the base. In the largest
specimens, selected as the stoutest, the length of the head from the postorbital
line is only 3-5 the width at the same point. The fore limb extended reaches
to the posterior margin, or to the middle of the orbit, for in extreme speci-

1869.]

106 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

mens there is a difference in the degree of elongation of the body to the fol-
lowing amount : In the stouter, the length to axilla enters 2§ to groin ; in the
more slender 2|; in the former the width of head goes 5 times in length to
groin ; in the latter 6-25 times. There is no axillary costal fold ; the inguinal
is not marked ; the plica; do not extend on the back (where there is a faint
median groove), but are distinct on the belly ; tail annulate. The feet are
very wide and the toes short, but not so much so as in S. cephalic us.
The inner digit is developed on both feet, though short, especially the poste-
rior; the outer is also larger than in the species just named. The toes are
thickened at the extremities. The hind limb extends over 6-5 intercostal
spaces from groin. The gular fold is well marked, while the longitudinal
post-orbital groove is not or scarcely visible. The upper lip is slightly trun-
cate, and with small subnareal angles.

The color is black as a ground, less obscured below, where it, however, va-
ries to brown. The gular region splotched or speckled with gray.

The sides of the body with the tail are splotched lichen-like with light gray,
the same sometimes covering the dorsal region. In one specimen there is a
pale red dorsal band. Head black.

Measurements.
No. 6340, Type.

Inches.

Length from snout to gape -IS

" " axilla -59

" " groin 1"V5

" " end vent ... 2.

" " " tail 3.5

" forelimb _ -42

" " foot -12

" hind limb -433

" " foot -16

Width head -3

" body at sacrum '18

Like other Mexican Spelerpes this animal seems to pass its metamorphoses
early; a young one sent with the adults measures 21 lines in length. The
largest specimen measures 4-4 inches.

This species, according to Sumichrast, is confined to the Alpine region, in
Vera Cruz, Mexico. In life, the light tints are of a pale yellow.
No. 6340, 6 specimens, Orizava, Mexico, Pr. Fr. Sumichrast.

Spelerpes cephalicus Cope.
Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1865, 196.
N. E. Mexico.

Spelerpes chiropterus Cope.

Proceed. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1863, p. 54. Spelerpes orculus Cope, Proc.
A. N. S. 1865, 196, and 1866, p. 132.

N. E. Mexico.

Spelerpes multiplicatus Cope.
Species nova.

This small species resembles in general proportions Hemidactylium s c u-
tatum. It is well characterized in this geuus by its numerous costal plicffl,
and thickened, scarcely compressed tail.

The width of the head enters the length to the groin 6-'75 times ; the length
to axilla enters thrice. The hind limb extended passes six intervals from the
groin; the foot is wide, and the toes short, especially the inner and outer;
the inner has but one minute joint free. The same may be said of the ante-
rior digits. The tail is compressed a little, and considerably thickened ; in

[May,

NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 107

the smallest specimen the terminal -TS above and '33 below are keeled ; in
others the superior keel is more distal.

Upper lip moderately truncate, with infra-nareal angles, and in one, rudi-
mental cirri. The muzzle is rather thick and short, the head flat ; in one
smaller specimen the former is a little longer than in the others, and the
width of the head relatively less. The vomerine teeth form short series, each
rather suddenly bent backwards ; the pterygoids two narrow patches, not
approaching the vomerines, the relations in this respect being as in S. b i 1 i-
n e a t u s.

The color in four specimens is an unspotted brown, the inferior surfaces
paler, especially the gular region. In the smaller specimen above mentioned,
which seems to constitute a variety, the brown color forms a broad dorsal
band, with dark points ; the sides are of a pinkish gray, and the under sur-
faces light yellow.

Measurements of the largest specimen, on the axis of the body :

Inches.

Length from muzzle to orbit , -05

" " rictus -12

" " axilla -425

" " groin , 1'53

" " end of tail 3-24

" of fore limb 2-33

" " foot -08

" hind limb -29

" •' foot -133

Width head at anterior angle orbits •!

" " rictus -22

" body at sacrnm ' '15

The form of this species would indicate it to be terrestrial in its habits.
Of its geographical range we have as yet little information.

No. 4038, 5 specimens. Red River, Arkansas, Dr. L. A. Edwards.

Spelerpes bilineatus Green.

Salamandra bilineata Green, J. A. N. S. i, 352, 1818 ; Holbrook, Herpetology,
1st ed. ii, 127, tab. 29 — 2d ed. v, 55, pi. 16, 1842. Salamandra flavissima Har-
lan, Sill. Journ. x, 286, 1826. Spelerpes bilineata Baird, Journ. A. N. S. i, 287 ;
Gray, Catal. Brit. Mas. 44, 1850; Hallowell, Journ. A. N. Sci. (2)iv, 346. Sala-
viandra cirrigera Green, Journ. A. N. Sci. iv, 253 ; Harlan, Med. Phys. Res. 99.
Spelerpes cirrigera Baird, J. A. N. Sci. i, 287 ; Gray, Cat. B. M. 44; Hallowell
l."c , iv, 34 7..

Habitat. — From Maine to Wisconsin, to Florida and Louisiana.

Spelerpes longicaudus Green.

Sal. I. (Sept. 1818) Green, J. A. N. S. i, 351 ; (1838) Hoi. Herp. 1st ed. iii,
111, pi. 26; (1842) 2d ed. v. 61, pi. 19; (1842) Dekay, N. Y. Rept. 78, pi. 17,
fig. 41.

Spelerpes lucifuga (1832) Raf., Atlantic Journal, No. 1, p. 22.

Cylindrosoma longicauda (1838) Tsch., Class, der Bat.

Spelerpes longicauda Baird, J. A. N. S. (2) i, 287 ; Hallowell 1. c, 345 ; Gray
L c, 43.

Habitat. — Same as the last species.

Spelerpes guttolineatus Holbrook.

/SaZamawc^ra ^u<<oZ«neafa Holbrook, Amer. Herpetol. 1st ed. ii, 61, t. 12 — 2d
ed. V. 29, t. 7. Spelerpes guttolineata Baird 1. c, 287 ; Gray 1. c. 45 ; Hallowell
1. c, 346.

Habitat. — South Carolina, Georgia. Alabama.

Spelerpes ruber Daudin.

Sal. rubra (1803) Daud., Hist. Rept. viii, 227, pi. 97, f. 2 ; (1842) Holb
Herp. 2d ed. v. 35, pL 9; (1842) Dekay, N. Y. Rept. 80, pi. 17, f. 43.

1869.]

108

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Sal. rubriventris (Sept. 1818) Green, J. A. N. S. i, 353 (ad. living).

Sal. 7iiaculaia (Sept. 1818) Green, J. A. N. S. i, 350 (bleached in spirits).

Sal. subfusca (Sept. 1818) Green, J. A. N. S. i, 351 (ad. in spirits?)

Pseudotriton subfuscus (1838) Tscli., Class.

Myceioglossa ruber Bibron fide Bon. Fauna Italica.

Siren operculata (1796) Pal de Beauv. Am. Phil. Trans, iv, 279, pi. — , f. 3
(larva).

Proteus neocsssariensis (Sept. 1818) Green, J, A. N. S. 1, 358 (larva bleached
in spirits).

Pseudoiriton ruber Baird, Journ, A. N. Sci. Phil, i, 286; Hallowel! 1. c, 347.

Spelerpcs ruber Gray, Cat.B. M. 1850, 45.

There are several varieties of this species, which, though quite distinct, pass
into each other :

Var. P. r. sticticeps Baird, S. Carolina.

Var. P. r. flavissimus Hallowell ; Pseudotriton flavissimus Hallowell,
Proceed. A. N. Sci. Phil. 1850, 130, Georgia.

Var. P. r. montanus Baird ; Pseudoiriton montanus Baird, Journ. A. N. S.
i, 287 — 293; Gray 1. c, 46. The Allegheny Mountain region from Pennsyl-
vania to S. Carolina.

Habitat. — The Spelerpes ruber is distributed over the Eastern district of
North America from Maine to Minnesota, and to Texas and Florida.

GYRINOPHILUS Cope.

Tongue supported only by the glossohyal pedicel, boletoid ; cranium fully
ossified, the premaxillary bones remaining distinct, and embracing a fonta-
nelle. Digits entirely distinct, 4—5.

This genus is now first distinguished from Spelerpes, on account of the
marked peculiarity ef the premaxillary bone, in which it resembles Plethodon
rather than the first named. But one species is as yet known. It has a super-
ficial resemblance to the Spelerpes ruber, but differs in several osteological
peculiarities. Its nasal bones are well separated, and the prootic squamosal
crests are peculiar. The anterior or prootic crest is short, distinct and curved
inwards and backwards ; that on the proximal e.xtremity of the squamosal
curves towards it, but leaves a considerable interspace. This is occupied
by two osseous processes like two teeth of a comb. In S. ruber the an-
terior crest only is present, and forms a rectangle, the anterior limb being
transverse, and the angle inwards. The nasal bones also are in contact
across the premaxillary spines.

The type of the genus remains for a more than usually long period in the
larval condition, and just before its metamorphosis is quite identical in its
osteological characters with the genus Necturus.

Costal plicse 1 ; head wide, width less than seven times to groin, not over
twice to axilla; a strong canthus rostralis ; tail rounded at the base, not fin-
ned; large; uniform purple-gray above G. porphyriticus.

Gtrinophilus porphyeiticus Green.

Sahrmandra porphi/ritica Green, Cont. Mac. Lye 1827, vol. i, pi. 1, fig. 2.
Holbrook, N. Am. Herpet. 2 ed, v, 83, pi. 28.

Sal. salmonea, (1838), Storer in Hoi. Herp. 1st ed. iii, pi. 22. (1842) Hoi.
Herp. 2d ed. v, 33. pi. 8. (1840) Storer, Mass. Rep. 248. Dekay N. Y. Rept.
76, pi, 16, f. 39. Pseudotriton sabnoneus Baird, J. A. N. Sci. i, 287. Hallowell
1. c. iv, 347. Spelerpes salmoneus Gray, Catal. B. M. 1850 — 46. Cope, Journ.
A. N. Sci. Phil. 1856, 99. Sp. porphyriticus Gray, 1. c.

There can be little doubt that, as Baird has suggested, this is the Salaman-
dra porphi/ritica of Green. The angulation and pale color of the canthus ros-
tralis is described accurately, as well as the color. The large larva, four
inches long, is only referable to this species. The Amblystoma m i c r o s t o-
mum, which Holbrook and Hallowell have imagined to be Green's species,

[May,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 109

is not indicated by Green's description. It is not so large, has not the can-
thus rostralis, the larva is very small, and the coloration is quite diiferent.
Green's figure represents it well, though the Amblystoma jeffersonia-
n u ro, on the same plate, is represented as larger, a relation of size, the
reverse of what usually holds in nature.

This is the only one of our eastern Salamanders which attempts self de-
fence. It snaps fiercely but harmlessly, and throws its body into contortions
in terrorem. It prefers the coolest localities throughout the Alleghany Moun-
tain region from New York to Alabama. It is aquatic, but prefers the still
waters of swamps or springs to running streams. It is common in the
region whence Green procured it, while A. microatomum is rare if
existing at all.

ANAIDES Baird.

Iconographic Encyclopaedia, ii, 1849, 256. Girard, United States Expl. Ex-
ped. Herpetology p. 8, tab. i, f, 18 — 25.

Tongue attached from glossohyal to anterior margin, on the median line ;
considerably free. One premaxillary bone. Pterygoid teeth on a single plate.
Vomerine teeth on a ridge which is continuous between the interior nares.
Maxillary teeth* longer on the anterior than posterior part of the arch, com-
pressed, knife-shaped, with entire enamel ; mandibular teeth of similar
form and large development, few in number, and confined to the anterior
half of the ramus. Toes 4 — 5, obtuse and slightly dilated at tip.

This curious genus is furnished with by far the most powerful dentition of
any existing Salamander, and resembles in this respect the genera of the
coal measures, Brachydectes, Hylerpeton and Hylonomus. In other points
there is little difference between it and Plethodon. One marked feature
brings it nearer Desmognathus than any other genus of Plethodontid». The
? opisthotics are each furnished with a high longitudinal crest over which
the temporal muscle passes from its origin on the atlas. It has, however, the
usual origin from the median line of the parietals, which scarcely exists in
Desmognathus. This line is marked in A. 1 u g u b r i s by an elevated crest.
The end of the muzzle in that species bears evidence to a habit similar to that
which accompanies the singular structures of Desmognathus, viz., that of
burrowing or rooting among stones or other resisting objects. The derm is
similarly adherent to the bone, and the latter is exostosed and rugous. The
prefrontal bones are well developed.
No species has yet been found east of the Californian or Pacific Coast region.

Large, stout; thumb developed, fingers short; pterygoid series narrow,
vomerines strongly curved backwards; width of head 4'5 to groin; light
brown above, with yellow spots A. 1 u gu b r i g.

Smaller, slender; thumb not distinct, fingers long, slender; pterygoid
series wider, vomerine series scarcely recurved; width of head 6-33 times in
length to groin A. f er r ens.

Anaides lugubbis Hallow.

Salamandra ZM^fMSm Hallow., Proceed. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. iv, 1848,126.
Anaides lugubris, Baird, Iconogr. Encycl. ii, (1st ed.), 1849, 256 ; B. and G. in
Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philada. vi, 1853, 302. Taricha lugubris Gray, Catal.
Amph. Brit. Mug. Parts ii, 1850, 26.

Habitat. — California from Ft. Tejon to Oregon.

Anaides ferreus Cope.
Spec. Nov.
This is a smaller and more slender species than the last, not being very

* Girard 1. c. describes the teeth as not fixed to the jaw, and capable " of a depression
backwards." This is only true of successional teeth, or teeth about to be shed : the func-
tional teeth are firmly anchylosed,

1869.]

110 PEOCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

differeut in proportions from Plethodon intermedius, but with a broader
and more flattened head.

The head is an elongate oval, slightly truncate in front; the nostrils are
antero-lateral, and with a delicate groove connecting with the commissure
of the mouth. Canthus rostralis not marked. The muzzle is aa long as the
fissure of the eye, while the length of the commissure of the mouth (diagonal
line) is equal to the width of the head at the rictus. The tongue is largely
free, the posterior portion rather narrowly. The inner nares are nearer to-
gether than the outer. The vomerine teeth commence behind the nares and
form a single series of eight on a ridge, which is gently arched backwards
on the median line. The parasphenoid patch does not extend quite forwards
to the middle of the orbits ; it is much flatter and wider anteriorly than in
A. lugubris, and contains opposite the posterior margin of the orbits
ten longitudinal series of teeth, those of adjacent rows alternating.

Gular fold well marked ; costal folds fourteen, not continued on back or
abdomen. The limbs, and especially the digits, are slender ; appressed to the
side they fail to meet by the length of the fingers. The form of the body is
slender and cylindric, and the width of the head enters the total length of
the groin seven times. The tail is as in A. lugubris, equal to the head
and body in length, cylindrical, slender, and slightly compressed at tip.

The thumb possesses a short phalange, but no part of it is free as in A.
lugubris; on the other hand, all the phalanges of the other toes of both
feet are more slender than the A. 1 u g u b r i s, and the distal ones distinctly
truncate and slightly emarginate, with dermal thickening below tip. All are
quite free. Number of phlanges 1 — 2—3—2, 1 — 2—3—3 — 2.

Coloration. — Sides and nape greenish gray; top of head and dorsal region
behind in the form of a serrate band, with the tail black ; below yellowish
brown. Limbs black above, brown below. Inferior regions unspotted.

Measurements.

Inch.

Length (axial) from snout to rictus oris -42

" " axilla •TO

" " groin l-VS

" " end vent 2

" " end tail 3-65

fore limb -5

" foot -2

hind limb -55

" foot. -26

Width " " (sole) -11

head at rictus oris "28

body at middle -24

" " sacrum -2

The maxillary bone displays the same sudden decurvature anterior to and
below the orbit which the A. lugubris does, but it is less marked ; in conse-
quence the commissure of the mouth is less sinuate. The long mandibular
and maxillary teeth, while of similar structure, are less developed ; perhaps
larger specimens of this species may be found where they may be larger, as
in small specimens of A. 1 u gub r i s, they are nearly similar in propor-
tions.

Though nearly allied to the A. 1 ugu b r i s, the present species will never
be confounded with it. It is a much weaker form, and does not display the
characters of the genus in so striking a degree. But one specimen has come
under my observation, as follows:

No. 6794; one specimen ; Fort Umpqua, Oregon, Dr. Vollea.

TIIORIID.E.
Palatines not prolonged over parasphenoid bone; no postorbital arch.

[May,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. Ill

Vertebral opisthoccElian.

Carpus and tarsus osseous.

Dcntigerous plates oa the paraspheniod.

This family combines the peculiarities of the Desmognathidae, Plethodontidae
and Amblystomidae in a remarkable manner. The well developed opisthocce-
liaa vertebrae are characteristic of the first named and of the Salamandridas,
the fully ossified tarsus and carpus of the Amblystomidae. The dentition is
entirely that of the PlethodontidcC. This was the less to have been anticipated,
as the general characters of the only genus are those of the genus Spelerpes.
The history of the metamorphosis is as yet unknown. The only known genus
is Mexican.

THORIUS Cope.

Parietal and palatine bones rudimental, represented by cartilage and mem-
brane. Posterior nares therefore not separated from orbit; sphenoidal patches
of teeth entirely united ; tongue boletoid, free in front. Toes distinct, rudi-
mental, 4 — 5.

The tarsal bones consist of astragalus, calcaneum, a scaphoid and three
minute cuneiform bones. The metatarsals and phalanges are fully ossified,
as are the corresponding elements of the fore limbs.

This genus is higlily interesting, as indicating the lowest grade of ossific
deposit found among the tailed Batrachians, accompanied by characters of full
development in other respects. Thus, while the cranium is but imperfectly
ossified, and less developed than in a comparatively early larval stage of Ambly-
stoma, the tongue, vertebral column, and extremities have advanced far
beyond its larval condition, which is permanent in the latter genus, and the
branchial apparatus disappears while the individuals are but little more than
half their adult size.

It is represented as yet by but one species, from Mexico, of terrestrial
habits.

Thorius PENNATULua Cope.

American Naturalist, 1869, 222.

This is a small species, with smooth skin, very weak limbs, and stout tail.
The head is scarcely wider than the neck ; it is not flattened, the loreal region
is rather elevated and distinct, and the muzzle slightly prominent. The upper
lip is sometimes truncate, with infranarial angle prominent, sometimes regu-
larly rounded. The nostril is larger than any known salamander, its diameter
equalling half that of the pupil.

The vomerine teeth are situated on a transverse, elevated crest, which is a
little behind between the inner nares, and though curved backwards, is but
little interrupted medially. Each half contains four teeth, perhaps five when
complete. The sphenoidal series is large, pyriform, the anterior extremity
narrowed and prolonged to opposite ihe middle of the orbits.

There are thirteen costal folds ; three and one-half of their interspaces are
covered by the extended hind limb, from its origin. The toes are very
small ; only the three median behind and three outer before are developed be-
yond the metatarsus. The phalanges are, anteriorly — 2 — 2 — 1 ; posteriorly
— 2 — 2 — 2 — 0. Their extremities are distally free; that of the median poste-
rior projects more beyond those adjacent than in 0. lineolus. The costal
plicaB are not marked on the dorsal, and only on the ventral in the color vari-
ety mentioned. The tail is stout, and for a short distance at the base subquad-
rate in section, and nearly as thick as the body ; distally it is more compressed,
but is not keeled; length equal to that of head and body. The width of the
head enters 6-5 times, and the length in front of the axillae 3-33 times the
length to the groin.

The color is brown, yellowish and clouded below, the dorsal region covered
with a gray band, which extends to the end of the tail. This band is particu-
larly light and slightly metallic on its margins, which are undulate or serrate,

1869.]

112 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF

and which are in strong contrast to the black of the lateral regions. The lat-
ter graduates into the brown of the belly. The gray dorsal band is marked by
a number of short divergent spots, which are in pairs and open backwards, V-
shaped, one to each costal interval. One specimen constitutes a color variety,
as I find no other points of peculiarity. It differs in being nearly black above,
in having the sides longitudinally streaked, and the gular region specked with
white ; a whitish incomplete triangle on the front and muzzle.

Measurements (axial).
No. 6341. Type 9

Inches.

Length from snout to rictus oris '11

" " axilla -3

'« «' groin -866

" " end vent 1-016

" " " tail 1-95

Width head behind.. -133

" body at sacrum "133

Length fore limb , '14

" hind " 17

" " foot -05

The specimen measured is the largest ; it contained numerous eggs in the
oviducts, which have attained a diameter of a line, without indication of em-
brj'O. This size is remarkable when compared with that in the Pleurodelidae,
and other salamanders. As the body is little above six lines in length, the
number discharged at any one time must be small. The smallest specimen
measures "6 inch from muzzle to groin, so that it appears that this species
passes its metamorphosis quite early. F. Sumichrast, to whom we are in-
debted for this species, says of it :
No. 6341, 6 specimens, Orizava, Mexico, F. Sumichrast (No. 48).
No. 6744, 1 specimen, " " " Color var.

DESMO ON A THID^.

Cope, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1866, 107.

Prefrontals and pterygoids wanting.

Parietals not embracing frontals.

Orbitosphenoid separated by membrane from prootic.

Vestibule, internal wall osseous. .

Dentigerous plates on the parasphenoid.

Carpus and tarsus cartilaginous.

Vertebrae opisthocoelian.

The peculiarity of the vertebras chiefly distinguishes this family from the
Plethodontidas. In the only genus which represents it there are numerous
peculiarities, which are not found elsewhere. Should other genera be found
which do not possess them, the above diagnosis would probably be the proper
test of their family affinities.

The distribution is confined to the eastern district of the nearctic fauna so
far as yet known.

DESMOGNATHUS Baird,

Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. i, 282, 285. Gray, Catal. Brit. Mus. 1850, 40.

Premaxillaries united, embracing a fontanelle ; parietal bones ossified.
Occipital condyles on cylindric pedestals. Temporal arising only from the
atlas, with a tendinous external margin and insertion ; passing freely over
the parietal and prootic bones. Tongue attached, except by its lateral and
posterior margins. Vomerine and sphenoidal teeth present. Digits distinct,
4—5.

The absence of o. prefrontale does not appear to be the result of its conflu-

[May,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 113

ence at any late period, with the nasale ; its ordinary positioa is traversed by
the frontal suture. The frontal bone is decurved, and closes the preorbital
aspect of the superpalatal vacuity, usually open.

This marked genus, so abundantly represent'^d by individuals in the eastern
district of North America, is not admitted by either Dumeril or Hallowell,
probably because it does not differ in external characters from Plethodon. It
is an excellent illustration of the error of adhering to external characters
only, in the explanations of the relations and affinities of organized beings,
except for a limited range. Tlie examination of the slieleton of species of
this genus utterly changes the impressions produced by a consideration of
the external characters. It may be stated as characteristic of the Batrachia
in general, that their affinities cannot be determined without study of the
skeleton.*

There are no dermal appendages developed in this genus at the breedini?
season.

I. Males with posterior half mandible concave and edentulous.
Inferior lateral series of pores imperfect or wanting, superior none ; no

tubercule in canthus oculi. Tail rounded. Fourteen costal plicte. A yellow-
ish dorsal band ; belly immaculate. Size small D. o c h r o p h as a.

II. Males with mandibular alveolar margin continuous and completely

toothed.
Inferior lateral series of pores well developed, superior irregular or want-
ing ; a tubercle in canthus oculi; tail compressed, and keeled; four-
teen costal plicae. Above dark spotted, below marbled. Size medium.

D. f u s c a.
Two well developed lateral series of pores, a marked tubercle in the can-
thus of the eye ; tail flattened, finned above, attenuate ; twelve costal folds.
Black above and below. Size large D. nigra.

Desmognathus ochroph^a Cope.

Proceed. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1859, 122.

This small species bears a strong resemblance to the Spelerpes b i 1 i n e a-
tu s Green, and apart from generic characters, may be known from it by the
rounded tail, the paler colored abdomen, and the light bar from the eye to
angle of the mouth. Its proportions are stouter than in Plethodon e r y t h r o-
n t u 3, to which it also bears some resemblance.

The costal folds are thirteen, but fourteen, if that which is immediately
above the groin be counted. The first falls immediately into the axilla. This
is the characteristic arrangement in D. f u s c a also, while in D. u i g r a the
fold above the groin usually extends to it, and is the twelfth, while that which
corresponds to the first of the species before named falls just in advance of
the axilla. Though this is typical of D. n i g r a, occasionally another plica
appears above the groin, and the twelfth is slightly in front of it.

The pores in D. ochrophasa are very difficult to observe; in a fevf
specimens I have seen a few of those of the lower series, the upper I believe
to be wanting. The gular fold is distinct, and another vertical fold com-
mences behind its extremity, and turning longitudinally extends more or less
distinctly to the orbit. As in other species the derm adheres closely to the
frontal bones and is more or less rugulose. The head is oval with rounded
depressed muzzle; its greatest width enters the length to the groin 5f times.
The commissure of the mouth is slightly flexuose.

The appressed limbs fail to meet by four intercostal spaces. The inner digits
of both feet are short, but free ; longer than in Plethodon species of similar
size; the other digits are also longer and more distinct; proportions, I — 4 — 2

* The skeletons on which the present observations are based are in large part the prep"
arations of Prof. Baird.

1869.J 8

114 PEOCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

— 3 ; 1 — 5 — 2 — 4 — 3 ; only three phalanges in longest toes. The tail is quite
slender, and only compressed at the tip ; in some there is a keel above on the
distal third, but never any dermal fin.

The vomerine teeth are very few and small when present; they are often
wanting. Their basal line is on a ridge which is convex backwards, nearly
continuous medially. The parasphenoid teeth stand on two narrow plates
which are well separated, especially behind, and are shortened ; anteriorly
they only reach to near the middle of the orbits. The mandibular teeth pre-
sent peculiarities in the male, by which it may be readily distinguished from
the female. In a large number of specimens the oral commissure is but little
undulate, and the mandibular teeth, though longer medially, are continued to
near the basis of the coronoid process. The males exhibit a strongly flexuous
commissure, and the alveolar margin of the mandible is deeply concave below
the front of the orbit, and edentulous. The distal portion is abruptly convex
and armed with long teeth. The margin is slightly concave anterior to this
point, and finally rises again at the symphysis, which is prominent and pro-
tected externally by a pad of crypts as in D. fuse a. The structure of the
males is in the mandibular dentition quite that of the genus Anaides, the A.
ferreus m. presenting the characters but little more strongly. No such
sexual difference can be found in the D. fusca, though the commissure
only may be sometimes more flexuous in males. The jaws and dentition in the
D. ni gr a do not differ in the two sexes. 1 have observed that two of the
many males of D. ochrophaea, possess the female dentition. The tongue
in D. c h r o p h ffi a is an elongate oval, considerably free behind.

The color of the females is a bright brownish yellow, fading to a dirty
white below, with a dark brown shade on each side from the eye to the end
of the tail which is darkest above, and gives the dorsal hue the character of a
band. There is an irregular series of brown dots along the vertebral line.
Males are rather longer and usually darker in color; thus the dorsal band is
brownish, the lateral bands blackish, and the dorsal spots more distinct, la
most specimens of both sexes there is a light band from the eye to the rictus
oris, and the belly is always immaculate, the gular region nearly always. The
testes and vas deferens are covered with black pigment; no pigment on the
peritonaeum of the female.

This species scarcely attains half the size of the D. f u s c a, as indicated by
the numerous females with developed eggs in our collections. As the eggs
are equal in size to those of D. f u a c a when ready to be discharged, and as
the species is only half the size of the same, the eggs in the oviduct of a gra-
vid female at one time are only half as numerous. I have only found from
6 — 10 iu D. o c hr op h fB a, in each oviduct, while from 18 to 30 maybe
counted on one side in D. f u s c a.

Measuremenls.

Inches.

Length (axial) from snout to rictus oris -2

" " " axilla -46

« " " groin .... 1-29

" " " end vent 1-51

" " " end tail 3-01

" fore limb -3

" " foot -08

" hind limb -36

" " foot -17

"Width " " sole -8

'' head at rictus oris -2

" body at middle '22

Jlabttat, etc. — This Salamander is chiefly abundant in the chain of the Alle-
ghenies and their outlying spurs ; I have never seen it in the hill country of

[May,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 115

Pennsylvania, or the lower plains of New Jersey and Maryland. Nor have I
observed it in the Alleghenies of south-western Vii-ginia ; the most southern
locality yet known is the Broad Top Mountain in Southern Pennsylvania, from
which the Academy possesses numerous specimens from Dr. Leidy. In
northern Pennsylvania and the Adirondack it is very abundant. The Academy
has numerous specimens from Warren county, Penn., from Dr. Randall.

The habits of this animal are terrestrial. It occurs under the bark of every
fallen log of hemlock (Abies canadensis), and in the debris of the dark damp
forests of the north. I never saw one in the water of streams and runs, the
habitat of the other species of the genus.

Prof. Eaird was familiar with this species before I described it. I published
his suggestions expressed in a letter, that it was the S. haldemanii of Holbrook.
Holbrook's figure does not represent this species in any degree, nor is his
description more conclusive as to the reference of this species to it rather than-
some others. He says it is marked wi>th spots on the upper surfaces, which
are " disposed without much regularity," but the largest are on the flanks.
There are but few spots above in this animal, and they are in a regular series.
The sides are banded.

No. 3917, 10 specimens, Alleghany Co., N. Y., Dr. Stevens,
No. 40-il, 3 specimens, Bradford Co., Pa., C. C. Martin.
20 specimens, Meadville, Pa., Prof. Williams.
No. 4539, 5 specimens, Susquehanna Co., Pa., Prof. Cope.

Variety — A specimen with the dentition, coloration and proportions of body
and tail of this species was sent to the Smithsonian Inst., from Georgia, by Dr.
Jones. It approaches the D.fusca in having a small tuberculum canthus oculi
and a well developed inferior series of mucous pores.

Desmognathus fusca, Rafinesque.

Triturus, (March 1, 1820), Raf. Annals of Nature. Sal. intermizta, (Aug.,
1825), Green, Hall's Portfolio, Vol. 20, p. 159. (Jan. 1827), Green, Cont. Mac.
Lye. No. 1, vol. 1. Sal. picta, (Nov. 1823), Harlan. J. A. N. S. v. 136. (1840),
Storer, Mass. Rept. 251. Sal. quadramatuLata, (1842), Hoi. Herp. 2d. ed. v. 49
pi. 13.

This, perhaps the most abundant Salamander in North America, is quite
variable in coloration, but not in proportions and structural peculiarities.
Those of the latter which characterize it are the presence of fourteen costal
plicre ; one well, and one little developed lateral series of mucous pores ; the
equal and regular distribution of teeth in the mandible of males ; the com-
pressed tail, keeled above, and finned distally ; the presence of a tubercle in
the anterior canthus of the eye ; the marbled color of the belly. In many
quarts of specimens I find four specimens from southern localities — two in
Academy from Charleston, two in Smithsonian from Biloxi, Miss., which have
fifteen plicse, but one of the latter has fourteen on one side. In specimens
which have been preserved in too strong spirits the pores are rendered invisi-
ble ; the same occurs when the spirit is impure or weak. In soft specimens
the canthal tubercle sometimes disappears, and in many young specimens and
some adult females it does not appear to exist.

The head is more depressed and the muzzle prolonged than in species
of the other genera. The eyes are prominent ; the plicae behind them strongly
marked. These consist of one on each side the head and nape, which con-
verge posteriorly and then turn abruptly outwards to be continued into the
gular plica. A second plica extends from the mandible across the rictus oris
to the upper plica. A second longitudinal plica extends from this to the gular
enclosing an ovate enlarged area; and a short one to the orbit encloses a post-
orbital subround and smaller area.

The commissure of the mouth is more undulate in males than in females,
but both present a slight elongation of the symphysis produced externally by

1869.] '

116 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

a pad of crypts. The width of the head enters the length 5-66 times. The
vomerine teeth are often wanting, and when present, minute and few. Their
basis is a ridge which extends from behind the middle of the posterior nares,
across the palate with a posterior convexity. The parasphenoid patches are
small and not in contact ; they do not extend to opposite the middle of the
orbits.

The median toes are elongate and as in D. ochrophasa; they fail to meet
by four interspaces when pressed to the side. The tail has a characteristic
form, which is invariable at all periods ; near the base the section is trigonal ;
the dorsal keel increases in elevation, and becomes a narrow fin posteriorly ;
the extremity is attenuated. Its length is just equal to that of the remainder
of the animal.

There are two color varieties which blend together so as to indicate that no
higher value can be attached to them ; one of these is the Salamandra auricu-
lata of Holbrook.

Above brown with gray and pink shades; sides and belly marbled, the
pale predominating ; no red spots on sides var. /usca.

Above and sides black ; the latter with a series of small red spots ; a red
spot from eye to canthus of mouth present or absent ; belly marbled, the
dark predominating var. auriculata.

The latter variety occurs only in the Southern States ; the tubercle of the
angle of the eye and the upper lateral pores are often better developed in it
than in var. fusca, therefore approaching D. n i g r a. It is, however, easily
distinguished from the latter.

Sundry specimens lack the red spots, and others have paler bellies, resem-
bling thus the darker f u s c i. The size is the same.

In the young of D. f u s c a there is a series of pinkish incompletely sepa-
rated alternating spots, in two series, covering the whole dorsal region ; tliey
are rarely so well distinguished or so bright as in the specimen of the same
which furnished the type of Holbrook's yS. quadrimaculata. The pink fades to
orange brown or ochre, and to pale brown with age, and at the fullest matu-
rity all are lost in a uniform blackish.

Measurements, No. 6832.

Inches.

Length (axial) from snout to rictus oris -3

" " " axilla. -71

" " " groin 1-95

'• " " end vent 2-3

«' " " " tail 46

" fore limb -43

" " foot -15

" hind limb...., -62

" " foot -26

Width sole do -16

" head at rictus oris -375

" body at middle -55

Habitat, etc. — This species lives chiefly among the stones in the many
shallow rivulets and springs of the hilly and mountainous regions of the
country. It is not so partial to deeper and stiller waters as the Spelerpes
ruber, but prefers the rapid and shallow streamlets ; here it may be found
under every stone, or its delicate larva may be observed darting rapidly from
place to place, seeking concealment among mud and leaves. The D. f u s ca
is one of the most active and vigorous of our species. The peculiar structure
of the temporal muscle and its tendon, and of the occipital condyles, with the
strength of the bones of the front, enable it to burrow among stones and in
earth more readily than the species of other genera. When pursued it runs

* [May,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

117

and wriggles out of sight with the greatest rapidity, and is qviickly concealed
by assistance of its dusky colors.

Prof. Baird originally noticed the curious disposition of the eggs in this
species, which I have verified on a few occasions. As in the Anurous genus
Alytes, the eggs on emission are connected by an albuminous thread, which
soon contracts and hardens. One of the sexes protects this rosary by
wrapping it several times round the body, and remaining concealed in a com-
paratively dry spot. How long this guard continues is not known.

The most eastern specimen I have seen is from Essex Co., Mass. Besides
a great number of specimens in the Museum of the Academy, the following
form the Smithsonian basis of the examination.

No.

2 specimens, Summerville, S. Ca., ?

3678,

2 specim

3769,

3 "

3880,

8 "

3876,

2 "

3883,

25 "

3882,

5 "

3896,

10 "

3892,

3 "

3893,

8 "

3891,

7 "

3904,

15 "

3919,

1 "

3909,

9 "

3914,

6 "

3910,

4 "

3912,

1 "

3905,

1 "

3925,

3 "

3708,

5

3921,

1 "

4718,

2 "

4843,

1 "

5039,

1

3901,

10 "

4717,

2 "

6830,

5 "

6831,

2 "

6832,

4 "

Philadelphia, Pa., J. Richard.
Anderson, S. Ca., Miss Paine.
Summerville, N. Ca., J. McNair.
Meadville, Pa., Prof. Williams.
Orange, N. J., ? '

Columbus, Ohio, Leo Lesquereaux.
Clark Co., Va., Dr. Kennerly.
Pittsburg, Pa., S. F. Baird.'
Mississippi, B. L. C. Wailes.
Abbeville, S. Ca., J. B. Barratt, M.D.
Salem, N. Ca., J. Liueback,
a n u II

Highland Co., Ohio, ?

KnoxviUe, Tenn., Prof. J. B. Mitchell.

Adirondack, N. Y., R. Clark.

Columbia, Co., Pa., Dr. Henderson.

Gloucester Va., ?

Eutaw, Ala., ?

Dayton, Ala., Edgeworth.

Georgia, Dr. Jones.

Brookville, Ind., Dr. R. Raymond.

Georgia, Dr. Jones.

Riceboro, Ga., Dr. Jones, var. auriculata.

Georgia, " " " "

Georgia, ? " "

Biloxi, Miss., C. Billman, var. fusci.

Georgia, Dr. Jones, " "

DESMOGNATHtrs NIGRA, Green,

Sal. n., (Sept. 1818), Green, J. A. N. S. i. 352. Triton n., (1842), Holb.
Herp. V. 81, Ph. 27. Desmognathus nigra, Baird, Journ. A. N. Sci. i, p. Gray,
Catal. Brit. Mus. 1850, p. Pkthodon niger, pars, Hallowell, J. A. N. Sci.
Phil. 1858, p. 344.

This is the most robust Salamander of the eastern regions of our Zoologica
district ; it is not so slender as the Gyrinophilus p o r p h y r i t i c u s, but a much
stronger animal. As compared with the D. f u s c a, it is much larger, the tail
is more compressed and extensively finned, and the color is uniformly different.
Besides the characters already pointed out in the table, it differs from D.
f u s c a, as follows. The paraspheuoid patches of teeth are prolonged more
anteriorly, and approach very near the vomerines in most instances ; they are
always prolonged beyond the middle of the orbits ; their prolongation
is at the same time narrowed, and in most, the patches are not distinguished
at this point. The vomerine series are better distinguished (though not
always) being oblique, separate, and not extending beyond nares. The tongue

1869.] •

118

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

is, in eight specimens examined, nearly round, while it is always a long oral
in the two other Desraognathi ; finally the only male does not possess the
black pigment coat of the testes, always present in the others, though as in
them the vas deferens is black. The body is stouter, and the width of the
head enters the length to the groin less than five times ; in the others always
more ; this is also expressed by the existence of only twelve costal plicffi, and
the fact that the appressed limbs are only separated by 2^- intercostal spaces.

The postorbitnl plicte are not strongly marked. The mucous pores are well
developed, and the two lateral series are often distinct in alcoholic specimens
by their white color ; when they become dry they are difficult to observe.
There are two rather distinct gular series within the mandibular rami on each
side, and one on each side extending inwards and forwards from the gular
plica. The superior lateral series extends from the orbit to near the end of
the tail ; the inferior turn round the humeri to each side the pectoral region.

The proportions of the fingers are as in D. f u sea ; they are entirely free.
The eyes are prominent, with thick, opake palpebrae. A tubercle occupies the
anterior angle, which, after an examination of that in D. f u s c a, is a dis-
memberment of the superior eyelid.

The coloration is uniform in about twenty specimens examined. It is sim-
ple, viz., uniform black above and below, except the muzzle from between the
ejes, the lower jaw, the end of the tail aud the soles of the feet, which are
brown.

Measurements of 3923.

Inche.'".

Length (axial) from end muzzle to orbit .... -29

" " " canthus oris "55

" " " axilla 122

•' " " groin 3-23

" " " end vent 3'76

" " " " tail 6-96

" of fore limb 69

" " foot -26

" of hind limb 1-02

" " foot -47

Width " " (sole) -27

" between eyes in front -3

" at canthusoris -65

" of body -75

" " at sacrum -oi

Habits, etc. — This creature is aquatic ; but after the fashion of the D. f u s c a
it occurs only in shallow stony brooks. It is, so far as known, confined to the
Alleghany Mountain ranges from Pennsylvania southwards. It is abundant
in the streams of the rocky ravines and cold springs in the remotest depths of
the forest, where its retreat is cool and dark. It seeks concealment under
loose stones and slabs of slate with great activity, and is not easily caught.
Its habitat does not seem to be shared by any species but the D. f u s c a ; the
Gyrinophilus p o r p h y r i t i c u s, the other characteristic Alleghany species,
haunting standing springs and bogs where stones are not so numerous. Green
described it from Pennsylvania, but Baird who is familiar with the Alleghany
fauna of our State, says he has not observed it near Carlisle. Nor have I
met with it north of Virginia, where- it is common. Besides Green's type, and
specimens from near the Kanawha River in S. W. Virginia, in the Academy of
Mus. ; the Smithsonian contains the following;

No. 3886, 2 specimens, Georgia, Dr. Jones.
" 3923, 4 " Abbevile, S. Ca., ? ?

^2 " Giles Co., Va., E. D. Cope.

* [May,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

119

Further Notes on MICROSCOPIC CRYSTALS in some of the Gems, fee.
BY ISAAC LEA.

In a paper which I recently read to the Academy, I mentioned having found
acicular crystals in Precious Garnets. Since then I have had the opportunity of
examining a number of cut specimens o^ Sapphire in the forms oi Aster ia, Catseye,
&c. I have also examined many specimens of Cinnamon Stone from Ceylon,
brought by Dr. Ruschenberger, of the United States Navy, also, among others,
a very fine specimen of bluish Sapphire, in tlie collection of Prof. Leidy.

Having made microscopic drawings of these and other species, having in-
cluded microscopic crystals, I propose to present them with as nearly correct
illustrations as possible.

The whole subject of microscopic mineralogy has been of great interest to
me, and I hope these short notes may induce some student to pursue the sub-
ject to a greater extent than I have had it in my power to do. It cannot fail
that, with the use of the numerous admirable microscopes now made in this
country, working with so much more facility than with those we have been
accustomed to from abroad, observers may continue to bring to our know-
ledge much that has been heretefore unknown and very little suspected in this
branch of science.

In my former paper I stated the proportional number among Bohemian Gar-
nets vrhich I found to contain microscopic crystals. I now propose to give
descriptions and figures of the appearance of these crystaline forms, and with
this view I have made drawings of their apparent forms under a power of
about 100 diameters.

Sapphire. A very remarkably beautiful Asteriated bluish Sapphire, procured by
Dr. Ruschenberger when in Ceylon, presented to the naked eye the six rays
which in the sun were sharp and of great beauty. The specimen being set as
a gem of luxury, I could not get a view by transmitted light, but by reflected
light, with great care, the exceedingly minute crystals were distinctly seen.
They are very short, of pearly lustre, at three different equal angles, thus pro-
ducing the bands which form the rays in three directions of 60° each. The
reflection from the sides of these minute crystals cause, of course, the asterism of
six rays over any point of the curved polished surface of the specimen. These
rays are formed on the same principal precisely as the asterism in Phlogopite,
which I have mentioned elsewhere.

Fig. 1 represents the delicate, numerous, minute crystals in the beautiful
.4s<e7-ia referred to above belonging to Dr. Ruschenberger. The acicular crys-
tals are so small that it was with great difiSculty I obtained their position as
here represented.

The variety of Sapphire (Corundum) which goes under the name of Catseye,
has irregular coarse stria;, which have the appearance of being Asbestus as is
generally supposed. In this gem there is a single band which varies accor-
ding to the position it may be placed in, and by no means has the beauty of
the asteriated Sapphire. Several of these are now before me which came
from Ceylon.

Fig. 2 represents the crystals which I observed in a fine small bluish Sap-
phire, in Prof. Leidy's fine collection of gems. The cuneiform or arrow-headed
crystals are very extraordinary, and they may be simply twin crystals of some
substance of which at present we can have no perfect idea. They remind us
in their form of Selenite crystals, such as are found in the Paris Basin, and at
once we recognise the similarity to the cuneiform character stamped on the
bricks of Babylon, and cut in the alabaster monuments of Nineveh. The group
which I have drawn represents six of these cuneiform crystals, and six acicu-
lar crystals. Of the former six, four had a bluish tinge and two were pinkish.
The acicular crystals were disposed to take three different directions, parallel

1869.]

120 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

to the primatic hexagon sides of Corundum. Both sets of these crystals ar«
enlarged to about 200 diameters, for the purpose of giving distinctly their very
singular form.

Specimens of Oarnet examined from all localities obtainable, presented very
different aspects. When crystals were found in them they always proved to
be acicular in form, but by no means similarly regular or of the same length,
direction, or of the same size.

Fig. 3. A Bohemian cut GarTiei presented three sets of numerous, thickly set,
parallel, acicular crystals, which crossed at an angle of 120°, forming a very
regular lattice-work appearance.

Fig. 4. A Bohemian cut Garnet presented only two sets of acicular crystals,
which were usually at right angles, but some were inclined from perpendicu-
larity and they Avere not so long as those of figure 3.

Fig. 5. A Bohemian cut Garnet presented a very different set of crystals.
They were generally short, comparatively, and pointed in every possible direc-
tion.

Fig. 6. Garnet from Ceylon — Cinnamon-stone — fractured portions, not cut and
polished. The acicular crystals were much shorter, rather thicker and much
more bluntly terminated than in Fig. 5. They are placed at all angles. Ten
specimens only in 80 examined had any thing like crystals, while all had
irregular rifts or cavities within.

Fig. 7. Precious Garnet = Pyroju? from Green'.s Mill, Delaware Co., Penn.,
presented acicular crystals somewhat like Bohemian Garnet, fig. 3, but the
three sets, while they take the same three directions, are shorter and left in-
terspaces as shown in the figure.

Fig. 8. Garnet from North Carolina. A thin fracture from a compact garnet
of large size, perhaps two inches in diameter. The acicular crystals are not
very numerous — they are thin and not continuous. Connected with these are
a few dark crystals. These take no particular direction like the others, but
seem to be interspersed throughout.

Fig. 9. Labradorite. This specimen is a small polished one from Ceylon,
and belongs to Dr. Ruschenberger. Besides the usual play of pavonine colors
in Labradorite, I have found in all the specimens! have examined from various
other localities, very minute reflecting crystals like those in Sunstone, and
which are no doubt the same, but differing in size, being smaller so far as I have
observed. The microscopic forms as figured will be observed to consist of two
sets apparently distinct. The larger are rather irregular and black. The thinner
are rather shorter and more delicate. These are not the reflection of the plates
of Got/lite,* they aie the black crystals which are usually in dark Feldspar.

Fig. 10. Black Feldspar. A small specimen of black Feldspar, translucent
in thin pieces, from Chester Co., Penn., presented quite a different appearance
from Labradorite in its minute, black included crystals. They are very numer-
ous, very short, opake black, and irregular in form. They are closely set and
irregular in their direction. There were no reflections from any of these in-
cluded crystals.

Fig. 11. Barite, fvom Antwerp, Jefferson Co., New York, a represents some
opake crystals observed in a small prismatic crystal. They cannot be, I think,
rifts, and yet they are evidently without planes, b represents singular impres-
sions on the surface of one of the prismatic planes, and their singular form,
like the common horse-shoe magnet, induces me to call attention to them.

Fig. 12. Amethyst. A specimen from Thunder Baj-, Lake Superior, presents
very remarkable globules, some of an orange-yellow and some of a dark-
green. These are very visible to the naked eye, and in the figure they are not

* The plates of Giitliite when held at a proper angle may easily be seen by the naked
eye.

[May,

NATUEAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 121

very greatlj magnified. Thej vary somewhat in size, and the orange-colored
ones are most numerous in the specimen before me. There is ft cloudiness in
these yellow globules and a few are not completely spherical, presenting a
cup-shaped form. To the naked eye the green globules appear to be black,
but under the microscope they are evidently dark green. The composition of
the two sets are no doubt the same, and the color probably depends on their
being in a different state of oxidation. In a few cases I observed the two
colors in the same globule. In another specimen from the same locality I
found the globules to be much smaller and the green ones to prevail.*

Fig. 13. An Asteriated Sapphire, also belonging to Dr. Le Conte, of an obtuse
conical form, and of unusual beauty, presented very remarkable microscopic
crystals of a white silken hue. The larger of two sets were generally, though
not always, cuneate and lay in three directions, differing somewhat in size.
In the smaller set the crystals are very minute, having the same pure white,
silken appearance. These fill up the interstices of the larger crystals.

A Sapphire of large size and peculiar beauty, in the possession of Dr. Le
Conte, presented a few distant, white silk-like lines, running in one direction,
and parallel to each other. It is of unusual brilliancy and fine color and is
thirteen-twentieths by eleven-twentieths of an inch in size.

Fig. 14. A Pyrope from New Mexico, in which the microscopic crystals differ
from any of the many Garnets I have examined. In other specimens from this
locality — of which I have examined twenty in the collections of Prof. Frazer
and Dr. Le Conte — acicular crystals alone were found. In this specimen the
crystals are much larger, less in number and of an entirely different character.
Some are geniculate and transparent, while some are dark or semi-transparent.
A very short and rather thick crystal seems to present three sides of an hex-
agonal prism. These New Mexican Pyropes are of uncommon beauty and per-
fection. This specimen is in the collection of Prof. Frazer. His other seven
specimens have acicular crystals. Of Dr. Le Conte's twelve specimens, six
had acicular crystals, and six presented no appearance of inclusions. "When
the acicular crystals are examined in the direct rays of the sun at right angles
to their axis, they reflect all the spectral colors in a very beautiful manner.

A small brilliant Ruby, which has the appearance of being oriental, but which
may be a Spinel Ruby, was found to be very full of long acicular crystals
which were observed to be in all directions, and were to all appearances
the same as observed in Precious Garnets. A larger specimen has the same
kind of acicular crystals, but in this specimen these crystals take generally
two directions and are oblique to each other.

Two out of four other very beautiful small Oriental Rubies = Sapphire were
found to have very minute acicular crystals. In one of them these crystals
were in three directions; in the other they were in two directions. Both these
gave that peculiar changable band observed in the " Catseye " Sapphires. All
these rubies were cut as brilliants and were of great beauty.

It is apparent that the microscopic crystals in the various minerals above
described, cannot all be of the same substance. Their forms and appearance
forbid that, and chemical analysis will never probably reach, with any degree
of satisfaction, their ultimate constituents. Spectral analysis may, however,
be able to give us some results when properly applied, which may in some
measure satisfy us in regard to the composition of these interesting included
microscopic crystals.

Sexual Law in the CONIFER.^.
BY THOMAS MEEHAN.
In some various papers last year before this and other bodies, I was able to
prove, I believe, to the satisfaction of my fellow botanists, that the true leaves

* The Amethysts of Chester County, Penna., very frequently have minute acicular crys-
tals of Rutile.

1869.]

122 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

of Conlfera are mostly adherent to the branches, and that the degree of adhe-
sion is in exact proportion to specific or i?idividual vigor. I believe I can now
show that the production of the sexes is influenced by the same law, — that a
high stage of vitality, or vigor, is favorable to the production of female
flowers ; and a low stage, or comparative weakness, to the production of male
ones.

Every one must have noticed that the cones of these trees are always on
the strong vigorous branches towards the top of the tree, or on the ends of the
strong laterals. Only this year did I observe that the male flowers are never
on these strong branches, seldom near the ends of the main shoots, but down
amongst the lowermost and weakest branches, and in the more interior parts
of the trees.

My observations have been confined to Pi'wus and Thuja. I have examined
many hundreds of trees ; and so clearly does this law universally prevail, that
I am certain I have but to point it out in order to obtain a ready assent to it.

The effects of vigor in bringing about these different sexual relations are very
interesting. Taking the Scotch, Austrian and Table Mountain Pines, which I
have had daily before me, the young shoot commences its axial growth early
in spring. Its base is the weakest part of it, being partially formed late in
the previous season, when vitality was about to take its annual rest. There-
fore, according to the laws of adnation or cohesion which I have before indi-
cated, there are no branches, but the leaves are mostly free, taking the form of
long chaffy scales. As the shoot grows it gathers strength, the leaves be-
come more and more adnate with the stem, and after a few inches of such
growth the branchlets in the shape of phylloid shoots or fascicles of " pine
needles '" appear. These gather strength as the shoot progresses, as shown by
their increasing length, until if the axis or shoot is very strong, a female cone
appears. The whole process exhibits a regularly increasing vigor, during
which the leaves are first suppressed, and ultimately both leaves, stem, and
axis with the culmination of vigor are suppressed or metamorphosed into a
female cone.

Turning again to another and weaker branch, pushing forth into spring growth,
we find the base, instead of being bare of all except the free leaf scales, has
little conical heads of male flowers pushing from the axils of the leaf scales,
and which, if higher up, and when the shoot has attained more vigor, would be
phylloid fascicles. These male heads of flowers are evidently metamorphosed
branch fascicles, the first transformation of which commenced the year previ-
ous when active vitality was about to cease. It might occur here to inquire
why lingering vitality would not produce in the fall rudimentary changes of
the embryo fascicles at the base of the strong and ultimately cone-bearing
shoots, as well as the weaker ones'? This must be left to future examinations.
Possibly, to hazard a guess, strong shoots may have the power of more rapidly
maturing in the fall than the other ones.

Another very interesting fact in connection with this subject is the loss of
power to branch, which the formation of male flowers induces. Taking a
branch of a Scotch Pine, if it lay not the foundation of a series of male
flowers in the fall, it will provide at least three smaller buds around one
stronger and central one, from which to make its axial growth next season.
But if these rudimentary male flowers are formed, no side buds appear; very
seldom at least do we find one weak spike along side the main and stronger one.

What that force is which I have called vigor, or by what laws it is governed,
I do not pretend to say. I know it only by its effects. In the one case I see
a strong axial growth, associated with strong vigorous branchlets, and sup-
pressed foliage, culminating in the formation of female flowers ; on the other
hand I see a more weak axial development, associated with fewer cotemporary
axes, weaker branchlets and greater freedom of the foliage from cohesion, aud
together with this the production of male flowers. The law is apparent : the
nature of the law must be left to further explorers.

[May,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 123

June \st.
The President, Dr. Hays, in the Chair.

Twenty-one members present.

Prof. Cope exhibited some specimens of extinct reptiles of interest. One
of these was the cranium, minus a portion of the muzzle of a gavial, from the
New Jersey Green Sand, previously described under the name of Thoracosau-
rus brevispinus, hat which this specimen demonstrated to belong to another
genus, since it did not present the lachrymal foramina of the former. He
applied the name Holops to it, and stated that he had evidence that Crocodi-
lustenebrosus Leidy, and probably C. o b s c u r u s L., also belonged to it.

He also exhibited drawings with measurements of portions of the limbs of
a very large Dinosaur, in the collection of Dr. Samuel Lockwood, of Keyport,
Monmouth County, N. J. It was discovered by this gentleman in the lower
cretaceous clays on the shores of Raritan Bay. It consisted of the extremity
of the tibia with astragalus and fibula. He said it indicated the second genus
of his suborder Symphj'poda, and was thus allied to Compsognathus, differing
in the remaining indication of suture between astragalus and tibia, which dis-
appeared in Compsognathus. The astragalus thus entirely anchylosed was
also confluent with the calcaneum, forming a continuous condyloid surface for
the tibia. In an anterior projection externally, the extremity of the fibula re-
posed by a condyloid extremity, the shaft lapping over the outline of the tibia.
This demonstrated what he had already stated, that the fibulae of Iguanodon
and Hadrosaurus had been reversed. The length of the fragment was sixteen
inches, the fractured section was a transverse oval, the medullary cavity nearly
filled with cancellous tissue. The transverse width of the extremity 12 in.;
oblique diameter 14 in. This form he called Ornithotarsus im m an i s, and
placed it between Hadrosaurus and Compsognathus.

He made some observations on a fine fragment of the muzzle of a large
Mosasauroid, which pertained to a cranium of near five feet in length. The
pterygoid bones were separated from each other, and support nine teeth. A
peculiarity of physiognomy was produced by the cylindric prolongation of the
premaxillary bone beyond the teeth, and a similar flat prolongation of the ex-
tremity of the dentary. He referred the species to Macrosaurus Owen, under
the name of.\I. proriger. The specimen he stated belonged to Prof. Agassiz,
who obtained it from Western Kansas, probably from the No. 3 of the Upper
Cretaceous of Hayden.

The follo^nng paper was presented for publication :

" Description of new Carboniferous Fossils from the United

States." By F. B. Meek and A. H. Worthen.

Mr. Jeanes having resigned his position as Auditor, on motion,

Dr. Bridges was nominated and elected to fill the vacancy.

June 8th.

The President, Dr. Hays, in the Chair.

Twenty-seven members present.

The following paper was presented for publication :

" On the production of Bractese in Larix." By Thos. Meehan.

June lofh.
Prof. Frazer in the Chair.
Twenty-four members present.
1869.]

124

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

The following paper was presented for publication :
" Description of six new species of Fresh Water Shells." By
Isaac Lea.

June 22d.

Dr. Euschenberger, Vice-President, in the Chair.

Twenty-three members present.

The death of Dr. Charles D. Meigs was announced.

The following paper was presented for publication :

" Notice of certain obscurely known species of American Birds,

based on specimens in the museum of the Smithsonian Institution."

By Robt. Ridgway.

June 29th.

The President, Dr. Hays, in the Chair.

Twenty-five members present.

The report of the Biological and Microscopical Section was
presented and referred to the Publication Committee.

On permission being granted, Mr. Warner spoke upon the mathematical rep-
resentation of organic forms. Such limitations, he said, might serre to narrow
the field of research into the physical causes of organic forms, and perhaps
furnish the suggestion of a rational theory of these causes. If no other ad-
vantage were derivable from imitations of this kind, they might, he thought,
be useful for description and classification.

He exhibited a representation of the longitudinal section of ap egg by a
curve which he called the hyper-ellipse, and of the section of an embryo by
another curve which he termed a deformed lemniscate. Of the egg curve, he said
that it very closely resembled an ideal section of an egg taken from a standard
modern work. Of the curve representing the embryo he said that it not im-
probably marked the boundary of matter lying within it, in a diflfereut state of
temperature, density, or tension from the matter lying without. These repre-
sentations were verified by the members present. The speaker expressed the
intention of making these representations the subject of a future paper, in
which he would give drawings and formulae.

The following gentlemen were elected members :

Dr. N. R. Bradner, U. S. N. ; Charles B. Nancrede, M. D., and
Harry Emlen.

Alexander Carte, of Dublin, was elected a correspondent.

On favorable report of the Committees, the following papers were
ordered to be published :

Descriptions of six new species of FRESH WATEE SHELLS.

BY ISAAC LEA.

Unio Macnielii. — Testa sulcata, oblonga, valde infequilaterali, antice sub-
rotunda, postice obtuse biangulata; valvulis crassiusculis, antice crassioribus;
natibus prominulis ; epidermide fusca vel luteola, postice viridi radiata ; den-

[June,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 125

tibus cardinalibus parviusculis, compressis crenulatisque ; lateralibus sub-
longis lamellatisque ; margarita argentea et valde iridescente.

Hab. — Rio Gigillillo, Corcuera, Nicaragua, Cen. Am., Mr. J. A. McNiel.

GoNioBASis BAC0LOIDE3. — Testa Isevi, cylindracea, subtenui, luteola, qnadri-
vittata ; spira valde elevata ; suturis irregulariter impressis ; anfractibus plan-
ulatis ; apertura parva, rhomboidea, intus vittata et caeruleo-alba ; labro
acuto, vii sinuoso ; columella vix incrassata, contorta.

Hab. — Coosa River, Alab., Dr. Schowalter.

GoNiOBASis Lawrencii. — Testa leevi, subcylindracea, subcrassa, tenebroso-
cornea, dilute vittata vel evittata ; spira elevata ; suturis impressis ; anfrac-
tibus planulatis ; apertura par viuscula, rhomboidea, intus albida ; labro acuto,
sigmoideo ; columella incrassata et cortorta.

Hab. — Washita River, near Hot Springs, Arkansas, Dr. Lawrence.

ScHizosTOMA Lewisii. — Testa crebrissima striata, subcylindracea, subtenui,
luteo-fusca, imperforata ; spira conica, plicata ; suturis valde impressis ; an-
fractibus instar septenis, ultimo grandi ; fissura obliqua brevique ; apertura
grandi, rhomboidea, intus vittata ; labro crenulato, sinuoso ; columella alba,
incrassata et contorta.

Hab. — Coosa River, Alab., Dr. Schowalter.

Physa Carltonii. — Testa laevi, obtuse fusiformi, inflate, valde polita, tenui,
subpurpurea ; spira exserta, acuminata ; suturis impressis ; anfractibus senis,
ultimo pergrandi ; apertura ovata, grandi ; labro .expanse, intus marginato ;
columella impressa et contorta.

^a6.— Mount Diablo, California, W. G. W. Harford.

Phtsa Wolpiana. — Testa subrotunda, valde inflata, polita, tenui, tenebroso-
cornea ; spira valde obtusa ; suturis impressis ; anfractibus quaternis, ultimo
pergrandi; apertura ovata, grandi; labro expanso ; columella medio parum
impressa et parum contorta.

Hab.— Eoi Springs, Colorado Ter., Prof. J. W. Powell.

Notices of certain obscurely known species of American BIRDS.

(Based on epeoimena in the Museum of the Smithsonian Institution).
BY ROBERT RIDQWAY.
Introdcctort Remarks.

The following notes comprise the result of some examinations in the exten-
sive series of North American birds in the Museum of the Smithsonian Insti-
tution, to which I was kindly allowed access by Professor Henry. They were
made especially in connection with the determination of collections gathered
by myself as Zoologist to the U. S. Geological Survey of the 40th Parallel,
nnder Mr. Clarence King, principally in California, Nevada and Utah.

Crossing so wide an extent of country as that indicated, it so happened that
the operations of the party allowed of extensive examination of the region
along the lines of junction of the three great " Provinces " of Professor Baird's
paper on the migration and distribution of North American birds, and I had
frequent occasion to confirm, and in some cases to extend his remarks rela-
tive to the affinities of the species of the different regions, and especially to
their hybridization, and to learn to what extent this may take place, and
therein tend to perplex the naturalist in his endeavors to determine the exact
character of his collections. When to this is added the change which con-
fessedly the same species undergoes under diflFerent climates, elevation, and
geographical distribution, it is no wonder that many cases exist in which
even our best critics may reasonably confess themselves at fault as to the pre-
cise name of the specimen, especially in view of the fact that many of them

1869.]

126 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

are hastily prepared by persons of little skill in such matters, and are more or
less deteriorated by packing and transportation.

The first question upon which we propose to treat is the line to be drawn
distinguishing " species " from " varieties." I do not, however, intend to dis-
cuss at any length this difficult and perplexing point, but only as it touches
more directly upon the birds to be noticed, and in the case of several of them
it may possibly well be left (as the matter now stands) entirely to one's dis-
crimination, whether he is to regard them as valid "species" or subordinate
" varieties."

Now we must and do admit a certain extent of variation, influenced by dif-
ferent agencies, as age, season, and locality, when the cause of such variations
can be thus satisfactorily explained. It does not follow, however, that, be-
cause we have a series connecting by a gradual transition two extremes, we
are to consider the whole as one species, the discrepancies indicating different
varieties. The difference between these extreme examples is often too great
to admit of this ; and when we have traced a species through all its variations
to a certain point where the discrepancy from the typical style is too great
and uniform to be accounted for by any physical cause, it becomes us as nat-
uralists to assign to such extreme conditions a specific rank. What more
can we do ? and what is more in accordance with the laws of nature ? There-
fore we cannot do better than to accept as valid these representative forms,
when they can be assigned distinctive habitats; and where they are substan-
tiated by a sufficiency of specimens, to such we may allow a reasonable ex-
tent of vuriation, not, however, beyond the limit controlled by physical
causes.

We find that in all cases where individuals occur which apparently connect
the approaching extremes of two well defined representative forms, that such
are almost always from localities inhabited by each, or from the region where
their respective habitats overlap. It is under such circumstances that we
must a.dm[t ht/bridization among birds, and abundant evidence can be adduced
that such hydridization does occur between congeneric species, and that it is
not only occasional but general ; indeed an instance will hardly be found
where, by collecting in the region where an eastern species and its western
representative are found together, the collector will not obtain hybrid speci-
mens. Such has been the case with myself respecting several species, as well
as with nearly all others who have made ornithological collections in the
West.

What more conclusive evidence of hybridization need we have than an ex-
amination of the numerous examples of such a condition of Colaptes from the
upper Missouri region, where the ranges of eastern C. auratus and western C.
mexicanus adjoin. In this instance we have specimens showing as gradual
transition between the two extremes as in any other instance where hybridi-
zation is usually less evident, because the species are more obscurely colored
and the pattern less sharply defined. If we are to consider the C. auraius as
one extreme of a single species, the C. mexicanus^ its representative of the op-
posite side of the continent, the other, Colaptes chrysoides, another " sport," and
the hybrid specimens from intervening ground the connecting links, all
merely variations accruing from changes that might be wrought by longitudi-
nal distribution, etc., we may as well give up the idea of species in birds, and
in fact their study in detail entirely.

Besides the case of Colaptes we have other abundant proof of hybridization
in specimens which combine the character of an eastern species and its west-
ern representative, or two closely allied species, or even two of different gen-
era. Of this category I may mention the following couplets, which are repre-
sented in individuals in the Smithsonian collection : Fims villosus and 1'. har-
riiii — P. pubescens and P. gairdneri — Sphyrapicus ruber and S. nuchalis —
Chrysomiiris mexicana and C. psaltria — Zonotrichia leucophrys and Z. gambelli
— Junco oregonus and J . caniceps — J. oregonus and J. hycmalin — I'ipilo ery-
throphthalmus and F. arcticus — Agelaius phoeniceus and A. gubernator — Stur-

[June,

NATURAL 8CIENCE3 OF PHILADELPHIA. 127

nella magna and S. neglecia — Ci/anura stelleri and C. macrolopha — Cyanocitta
californica and C. ivoodhousii — Anser gambelii and Bernicla huichinsii, and many
others which, I need not here mention — all, I may again say, from the regions
■where the habitats of the two representative species overlap.

Premising these general considerations I proceed to discuss in detail some
closely allied species to which my attention has been specially called in the
course of the investigations referred to.

1. The North American Wood Thrushes.
Genus HYLOCICHLA, Baird.

Some authors seem inclined to doubt the validity of several species of this
group, as characterized by Professor Baird. These are the H. aliciie, Baird, IT.
ustulaius, Nutt., H. nanus, Audubon, and H. audtibonii, Baird, these being refer-
red to sivainsonii, Ceibn.n\s, fuscescens, Stephens, and pallasi, Cabanis. A careful
examination of the very extensive series of these birds in the Smithsonian
collection has, however, convinced me that they are all (with perhaps the ex-
ception of audubonii) justly to be regarded as distinct species.

I do not propose to speak here at any length in regard to the characters of
these species, as they have been well presented by Professor Baird, in his
work on the "Birds of North America," and in his later "Review of Ameri-
can Birds," but intend merely to give a few additional features which the
species constantly present in distinction from one another. The more im-
portant synonyms only are given.

The species I arrange according to the following synopsis :

A. Upper surface much brightest anteriorly, the rufous of the crown being
decidedly more intense than the olive of the posterior portions; white be-
neath continuous ; spots large, sharply defined, pure black, and extending
far back.

This style is represented by a single species, the well known T. musleiinus,
Gm., which needs no comparison with any other.

B. Olive of back uniform from head to tail, but varying in shade.

T. fuscescens, T. iisliilatus, T. sivainsoni and T. alicise are of this pattern.

C. Olive of the back passing very sensibly, or even abruptly, into reddish on
upper tail coverts and tail.

The species representing this style are the T. pallasi, T. audubonii and T.
nanus.

TuROnS FUSCESCENS.

Turdus fuscescens, Stephens, Shaw's Gen. Zool. Birds, X, i, 1817, 182 — Baird,
Birds N. Am. 1858, 214. — Turdus i^Hylocichla) fuscescens, Baird, Rev. Am. Birds,
I, 1864, 17.

Sp. ch. Above tawny rufescent olive, uniform on all parts, but occasion-
ally with a tendency to a greater intensity on dorsal region. Pectoral aspect
peculiar; throat with a series of faint brown dashes on each side, these
continuing down sides of neck and extending very sparsely across the breast,
where they become more sharply defined ; the region of these markings with
a fine cream colored tinge, quite different from the buff of ustulaius and
mvainsonii. Like the T. aliciss, this species lacks entirely the yellowish or
lighter orbital ring.

Turdus ustulatus.

Turdus ustulaius, Nuttall, Man. I, 1840, 400— Baird, Birds N. Am. 1858, 275,
pi. Ixxvi, fig. 1. — Turdus {Hylocichla) ustulaius, Baird, Rev. Am. Birds, I, 1864,
18.

Sp. ch. General appearance of fuscescens, but with pattern of swainsonii, the
buff orbital ring as conspicuous as in latter. The olive above is more brotvn
than in this, and less yellowish than in fuscescens, becoming decidedly more

1869.]

128 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

nifescent on wings and less observably so on tail. Pectoral aspect different
from fuscescens, the spots narrow and cuneate, sharplj^ defined, and arranged
in longitudinal series ; in color they are a little darker than the crown.

This well marked and perfectly distinct species is to be compared with
swainsonii, not with fuscescens, as has generally been done ; the latter, except
in shade of colors, it scarcely resembles at all ; still greater evidence that
such is its affinity is that the T. ustulatus builds its nest on a tree, and lays a
spotted egg, like swainsonii, while fuscescens nests on or near the ground, per-
haps never in a tree, and lays a plain blue egg.

TURDUS SWAINSONII.

Tardus swainsonii, Cabanis, Tschudi, Fauna Peruana, 1844, 46, 188 — Baird,
Birds N. Am. 1858, 216. — Tardus (^Hylocichla) swainsonii, Baird, Rev. Am.
Birds, i, 1864, 19.

Sp. ch. Olive above dark and pure, of a continuous shade throughout; in
extreme western examples, with a clear dark greenish tint. A very broad,
conspicuous ring of buff around the eye, running forward over the lore, and
a very decided tinge of the same on breast. Pectoral spots well defined,
deltoid, becoming more transverse posteriorly, dull black.

Specimens examined from the northern regions (Gt. Slave Lake, Mackenzie's
Eiver and Yukon) to Guatemala; from Atlantic States to East Humboldt
Mts., Nevada, California, and from intervening localities. The extremes of
variation are the brownish olive of eastern and clear dark greenish olive of
remote western specimens. There is no observable difference between a
Guatemalan skin and one from Ft. Bridger, Utah.

TuRDUS ALICIA.

Tardus alicise, Baird, Birds N. Am. 1858, 217, pi. 81, fig. 2— Cones, Pr. Ac.
Nat. Sciences, Phil. Aug. 1861, 217. — Tardus [Hylocichla) alicise, Baird, Rev.
Am. Birds, I, 1864, 21.

Sp. ch. The olive above, similar to that of swainsonii, is scarcely more green-
ish, but is generally decidedly darker, and often with the slightest possible
tinge of rich sepia or snuff brown, this becoming gradually more appreciable
toward the tail; in these typical examples this tint is quite peculiar; when
the shade approaches that of swainsonii it is generally when there are other
unmistakable evidences of hybridism. There is in this species not a trace of
a lighter loral stripe and orbital ring, so characteristic of swainsonii, this whole
region being grayish, scarcely different from the cheek; with the exception of
the lack of decided buffy tinge, the pectoral aspect is that of sivainsonii.

A specimen from Costa Rica is undistinguishable from typical examples
from the eastern U. S.

This bird and the robin are the only species of our thrushes that cross the
Arctic circle to any distance, or reach the shore of the Arctic Ocean. It oc-
curs in from Labrador, all round the American coast, to the Aleutian Islands,
everywhere bearing its specific character as indicated above. It is extremely
abundant on and near the Arctic coast, between the mouth of the Mackenzie's
River and the Coppermine, more than 200 specimens (mostly with their eggs)
having been sent thence to the Smithsonian Institution by Mr. MacFarlaue.
In all this number there was not a single bird that had any approach to the
characters of T. swainsojiii, as just given. From the Slave Lake region, on the
other hand, T. swainsonii -vf&a received in nearly the same abundance, and un-
mixed during the breeding season with T. alicix.

TdRDUS PAIiLASI.

Turdas pallasi, Cabanis, Wieg. Arch. 1847, i, 205 — Baird, Birds N. Am. 1858,
212. — Turdus [Hylocichla) pallasi, Baird, Rev. Am. Birds, 1, 1864, 14.

Sp. ch. Olive above almost exactly that of ustulatus. Rufous of the tail,
upper tail coverts and lower part of rump, uniform. Olivaceous of neck con-
tinuing along sides; spots on breast sharply defined, and nearly pure black.

[June,

NATUKAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 129

Tdrdcs nanus.

Tardus nanus, Audubon, Orn. Biog. V, 1839, 201— Baird, Birds N. Am. 1858,
213. — Turdus [Hylocichla) nanus, Baird, Rev. Am. Birds, I, 1864, 15.

Sp. ch. Above witli the clear darli olive of swainsonii, but this even purer
and more plumbeous. Upper tail coverts (but not lower part of rump) becom-
ing more rufous, the tail abruptly darker, richer and more purplish rufous,
approaching to chestnut. The clear olive of the neck passes into brownish
plumbeous along sides ; pectoral spots more sparse and less pure black than in
pallasi. The white beneath is of an almost snowy purity, appreciably dif-
ferent from the cottony white of pallasi. A very tangible and constant char-
acter possessed by this perfectly distinct species is the more slender and de-
pressed bill, as compared with that of 7>(?Wa««. Specimens vary only in inten-
sity of colors ; these variations very limited, and corresponding with those of
pallasi. In all cases, however, their precise pattern and peculiar distribution
is retained.

TCRDUS AUDUBONII.

Turdus (^Hijlocichld) audubonii, Baird, Rev. Am. Birds, I, 1864, 16.

Sp. Ch. — Relative proportions of nanus, but much larger even than pallasi,
the bill much more elongate and slender. Plumage similar to that of pallasi
but lighter and more grayish ; the rufous posteriorly more restricted and more
yellowish even than in pallasi ; pectoral spots larger and more sparse than in
pallasi, clove brown instead of nearlj^ black, breast and neck almost entirely
destitute of any yellowish tinge. This species, the validity of which may by
some be questioned, diflers principally from pallasi in being much larger and
more slender, with the arrangement of colors as in nanus, although the shades
are more as in pallasi.

In regard to the above mentioned thrushes, the discussion as to whether thev
be all descended from as many primitive creations, whether there be three
species with several varieties each, or finally whether all be merely modifica-
tions of one original type, would involve the opening of the whole question of
the origin of species, and what constitutes genera and species and need not be
prosecuted here. Whether one naturalist calls them species, and another
races or varieties, so much is, I consider, well established — that there are
seven forms of N. American thrushes requiring names, all of definable charac-
ters, and all having a well marked region of distribution. Also, that these
forms are permanent over a large area, but that as in many other instances
where the areas of two overlap, we have suddenly intermediate or hybrid
birds that are with difficulty to be referred to either; and that these interme-
diate birds mixing with the others in their migrations tend to obscure the
series ; but that, as a general rule, specimens taken in the breeding season are
distributed geographically and colored, as stated above.

2. On the uniformly red species of Pijranga, with descriptions of a new JV. American

species or variety.

In treating of the species of this form of the genus Pyranga, I have en-
deavored to be as conservative as possible in my conclusions, and have, after
careful consideration of the species, represented in all their various conditions
by the immense series of specimens before me, made due allowance for the
variations which may accrue from natural causes, as difference of habitat, &c.,
and in designating the species, have allowed to each the widest possible limit,
including all varieties as subordinate.

Of the present group we find two styles, one with the Pyranga sestiva, Vieillot,
as type, characterized by large light colored bill, without conspicuous tooth on
commissure, and with no marked contrast between tints of upper and lower
surface. This group contains, besides the P. lestiua, the P. saira, Sclater, and
P. cooperi. The other, with the Pyranga hepatica, Swainson, as type, is distin-
guished by plumbeous-black bill with prominent commissural tooth, and tlie

1869.] 9

130

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

13160

upper surface of body being quite different in tint from the lower. Tlie species,
besides the type, which belong to this group, are the P. tesiacea, Sclater, and
Salviu, and F. azarm.

Of all the species the sestiva has the widest range of habitat, this including
the "Eastern Province" of the United States, Eastern Mexico, Central Amer-
ica, and the northern part of South America. In Western Mexico, and the
southern "Middle Province" of the United States, the oestiva is replaced by
the closely allied P. cooperi. The P. hepatica belongs to the mountain regions
of Mexico, extending along the elevated lands into the southern Rocky
Mountains of the United States ; allied to this are the P. tesiacea of Central
America, and P. azarne of south-eastern South America. The South Ameri-
can representative of the P. xsiiva, is the P. saira, of Brazil.

Pyranga jsstiva, Yieillot.

Tanagra cestiva, Gmelin, Syst. Nat. I, 1788, 889. — Pyranga sestiva, Baird, B.
N. A. 1858, 301.— Aud., Birds Amer. II, pi. 209.

Sp. CT.— Length 7-25, extent 12-00,
wing 3-81, tail 296, culmen -70, tar-
sus -68. Bill dilute, horn color, dark-
er towards culmen, paler along com-
missure. Prevailing tint pure vermi-
lion, the whole upper surface more
dusky purplish red, uniform from bill
to tail, perhai)S a little more reddish on ujjper tail- coverts and lower part of
rump. Exposed tips of primaries, and inner webs of upper secondaries pure
umber-brown.

Female — Yellowish olivaceous, purer dull yellow beneath ; above more olive
greenish.

This species is one of wide distribution, its habitat in the United States,
including the "Eastern Province," is north to Nova Scotia, and west toward the
Rocky Mountains, along the streams watering the plains, through Texas, into
Eastern Mexico, Central America, the northern part of South America, as well
as some of the West India islands.

In the different regions of its habitat the species undergoes considerable
variations as regards shades of color, and proportions. Specimens from Texas
and Eastern Mexico exhibit a decided tendency to longer bills and more
slender forms than those of the eastern United States ; the tails longer and
colors rather purer. In Central America and New Grenada the species acquires
the greatest perfection in the intensity and purity of the red tints, all specimens
being in this respect noticeably different from those of any other region.*

Specimens from Peru (39849(5>, 39849(^, and 39850 9, head-waters Huallaga
River,) are undistinguishable from specimens from the eastern United States.

Pyranga Cooperi, Ridgway, n. s.

Sp. ch. Length 8-60, extent 13-50, wing 4-24, tail 3-68, culmen -84, tarsus

•80. -j- Generally rich pure vermi-
lion, similar to that of cestiva, but
brighter than in eastern exaruples
of this, and less rosaceous than in
Central American specimens. Up-
per surface scarcely darker than
lower, the head above being scarce-
ly different from the throat, and

abruptly lighter than the back, which, with the wings and tail, is of a much

* Of this highly colored form, the average length of five specimens is 7-55; of twelve
the wing is 3-67, tail 2-80, culmen -GT. Thus the size is seen to be slightly smaller than
the .fstira of the north. The bills also appear to be a little darlcer, but tliere are no other
diflferences.

3434-4-

t The mean of six specimens is somewhat less— wing 4-00, tail 3-58, culmen -82.

[June,

NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 131

lighter dusky red than in xsdva : exposed tips of primaries pure slaty umber, ,
primaries faintly margined terminally with paler, (in the type, this charac-
ter is not apparent, owing to the feathers being somewhat worn ; in other
specimens, however, it is quite a noticeable feature, although possibly not to
be entirely relied on.

Female. — Above orange olivaceous, beneath more yellowish, purest medially;
crissum richer yellow than other lower parts, being in many individuals in-
tense indian-yellow, with the inner webs of the tail feathers margined with
the same ; quite distinct line of orange yellow over the lores.

Habitat. — Southern "Middle Province" of U. S, south of 35th parallel,
and between 104th and 106th meridians. Pacific slope of Mexico.

This species, or at least very well marked race, which I dedicate to Dr.
J. G. Cooper, so well known for his researches in the Natural History of
AVestern North America, appears to be well established, and quite distinct
from cestiva, to which it is most nearly related. From this it may readilj-^ be
distinguished, however, by larger size, (length 8*60, instead of 7-25 ; wing 4-24
instead of 3-81, etc.), the bill especially being much larger, (-84 instead of
•70), as well as more swollen ; the wing is more pointed, the primaries ex-
tending 1-16 beyond the secondaries, instead of about -84, as in lestiva. The
third quill is generally longest, but in some specimens the second and third
are equal ; in icsiiva the second is usually longest.

The most perfect representatives of this species are three specimens ob-
tained within the limits of the United States ; these are a pair (Xos. 34344^,
and 343459, "-"OS Pinos, New Mexico), collected by Dr. Coues, and an imma-
ture male, collected by Dr. Cooper, at Ft. Mohave, on the Colorado River.
These specimens have, owing to their peculiar habitat, a faded, or worn
plumage, somewhat different from the perfect stage represented in specimens
from Western Mexico, but diftering from the typical style only in a bleached
or faded appearance, more or less characteristic of all birds of the southern
portion of the Great Basin.

Ptranga saira, Spix.

Tanagra saira, Spix, Av. Bras. II, pi. 48, f. 1. — Pijranga saira, Sclater,
Catal. Am. Birds, 80. — Pyranga mississippiensis, Lafr., and D'Orb. — P. coccinea,
Burmeister.

Sp. ch. Wing 4-12, tail 3-52, culmen -81, tarsus -72 ; 2d and 3d quills
longest, 1st intermediate between 3d and 4th. Bill shaped much as in Cooptri;
the upper aspect is almost precisely the same in the present bird, being,
however, rather broader at the base ; the lateral aspect is, however, quite
different in the two ; the present species having the culmen less regularly
arched, the terminal curve being
more abrupt, the lower mandible is
decidedly inferior in depth to the

upper. There is quite a decided ^^ ^,— -^J\ '^^^^CT ">^SORG'*

indication of a tooth about the mid-
dle of the commissure. In this spe-
cies the color of the bill is much
darker than in either of the other
species of the group, in this respect approaching more nearly the hepatic'^
style ; the upper mandible being dark sepia, the lower much paler and more
bluish.

Above rich dark purplish red, almost exactly as in xsiiva, but becoming
bright scarlet on the forehead, this continuing back over the eye in a quite
conspicuous superciliary stripe. Lower parts rich fine scarlet, very pure and
clear, somewhat tinged with brownish laterally.

Female. — The graduation of the tints exactly as in the male, the scarlet of
which is replaced by gamboge yellow, the dusky red by golden greenish oliva-
ceous. The superciliary stripe is in both sexes a conspicuous feature.

1869.]

132 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP

nab.— Brazil. (Type 50994(J', and 50995 9. Brazil, Sr. Don Fred. Albu-
querque.

This species, although belonging to the sestiva style, is nevertheless a well
marked one, and one for the identification of which a comparison with the
others is scarcely necessary. In uniformity of colors, as well as in general
style of color, it mueh resembles xstiva ; the superciliary stripe, however, at
once distinguishes it from this. The red of this species is also very different
from that of any other, being purer and richer, approaching in fineness and
tint that of Pyranga rubra.

Pyranga hepatica, Swainson.

Pyranga hepatica, Swainson, Phil. Mag. I, 1827, 438— Baird, B. N. A. 1858,
302. — Pyranga dentata, Licht. — P. azarie, Woodhouse, Sitgreave's Report.

Sp. ch. " Length 8-00," wing 4-12, tail 3'36, culmen -68, tarsus -84. Second
quill longest, first intermediate between fourth and fifth. Bill somewhat

shorter than that of csstiva, but
broader and higher at the base, be-
coming compressed toward the end ;
a distinct prominent tooth on com-
issure. Color plumbeous-black,
paler, or more bluish plumbeous on
lower mandible. Head above brown-
ish red, purer anteriorly ; rest of up-
per parts and sides brownish ashy, tinged with reddish ; edges of primaries,
upper tail-coverts and tail, more reddish. Beneath, medially, fine light scar-
let, most intense on the throat, growing gradually paler posteriorly. Lores
and orbital region grayish white ; eyelids pale-red ; ear-coverts ashy red.

Female. — Above ashy greenish olivaceous, brightest on forehead ; edges of
wing feathers, upper tail-coverts and tail, more ashy on the back; beueath
nearly uniform olivaceous yellow, purer medially ; lores ashy ; a superciliary
stripe of olivaceous yellow. Young male similar to the female, but forehead
and crown olivaceous-orange, brightest anteriorly ; superciliary stripe bright
orange, whole throat, abdomen and breast medially rich yellow, most intense
and tinged with orange-chrome on throat.

Hub. — Mountain regions of Mexico and Southern Rocky Mountains of U.S.
This species differs from all the others in the great restriction of the red ;
this being confined to the head above, and median lower surface, the lateral
and upper parts being quite different reddish-ashy. The shade of red is
also peculiar, this being very fine and light, of a red-lead cast, and most in-
tense anteriorly.

Pyranga azar^, D'Orb.

Pyranga azarse, D'Orb., Voyage, 264.

Sp. ch. Wing 3-60, tail 3-32, culmen -64, tarsus 80. Bill smaller than in

hepatica, and narrower ; commissural tooth

obsolete or, in fact, not observable ; color

^^ blackish plumbeous, as in hepatica. Sec-

^^ — - — ^!^^^^V^ '^C!.,,^^ ^20625 Qjj(j quill longest: first scarcely shorter

than third.

General tint below dull light Vermil-
lion, less clear than in hepatica and less
restricted, the sides being scarcely obscured by grayish ; the shade is also
continuous, the crissum being as intense as the throat. Above dull purplish
brown, more reddish on edges of primaries and tail feathers ; head above
strongly tinged with red ; lores and eyelids well defined dull white ; ear cov-
erts dull red. (Plumage of female unknown.)

This species, of which there is but one specimen in the collection, is most
nearly related to hepatica ; it differs from this, however, in smaller bill, with-

[June,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

133

out teeth ; less ashy color above, aud less restrictiou of the red below, the
whiter lores and more reddish cheeks.

/fa6.— Paraguay. Type 20996, J>. Expl. Parana, Capt. T. J. Page, U. S. N.

I do not feel entirely sure thai this bird is the species of D'Orbigny, nor
that it may not be undescribed. I present it, however, under the above name
for further consideration.
Pyranga testacea, Sclater and Salvin.

Pijranga testacea, Sclater and Salvin, Pr. Z. S. 1868, 388, Veragua.

Sp. ch. Wing 3-48, tail 3-12, culmen -TG, tarsus -80. Bill very large and
much swollen ; very broad at base,
becoming quickly compressed to-
ward tip; tooth on commissure ^^^ 's^ ^^^ (^
very prominent and conspicuous. (<Z~''^^ — -^_^ "^-C]^ > 52355
Upper mandible nearly pure black, ^""""^-..^ 7- ^'"^^■^^ C
lower more plumbeous. Color
generally very dark testaceous red,
becoming gradually purer brown-
ish scarlet medially beneath ; lores, suborbital space and extreme border of
chin grayish.

Female. — Olivaceous green above, and deep olivaceous orange anteriorly
beneath, the gradation of the tints exactly as in the male.

Hab. — Veragua, Costa Rica (Angostura), Rio Manati and Belize.

Described from a type specimen presented to the Smithsonian Institution
by Mr. Salvin.

3. The Smaller Quiscali of the United States.

In making an examination of a very large series of the smaller Grakles of
the United States, I was struck by a radical difference in form and color be-
tween specimens from the Atlantic and interior States, which I find to be
sufficiently constant to warrant the separation into two distinct varieties if not
species.

Professor Baird refers to this difference in his work on the Birds of N. Am.
(see p. 556), and mentions its constancy, which I have been able to confirm.

The following diagnoses are intended to express the distinctions referred to :

QuiscAiiUS puRPUREus, Bartram.

Gracula quiscala, Linn., Syst. Nat. ed. 10. I, 1758, \0Q {Monedula purpurea,
Cat.) — Wils. Am. Orn. Ill, 1811, 44, pi. 21, f. 4. Gracula purpurea, Bartram,
Travels Florida, 1791, 290. Quiscalus purpureus, Cassin, Pr. A. N. S. 1866,
403. Quiscalus versicolor, Vieillot, Nouv. Diet. 28, 1819, 488— Baird, B. N. A.
555.

Fig. 1.

Sp. ch. Length about 12-50, wing 5-50, tail 4-92, culmen 1-24, tarsus 1-28.
Second quill longest, hardly perceptibly (only -07 of an inch) longer than the
first and third, which are equal; projection of primaries beyond secondaries
1-56; graduation of tail
•92. General appearance
glossy black ; whole
plumage, however,
brightly glossed with red-
dish violet, bronzed pur-
ple, steel blue and green ;
the head and neck with
purple prevailing, this
being in some individu-
als more blueish, in
others more reddish ;
where most blue this is ''■66^h7

1869.]

134

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

pi. vii ; Birds Amer. iv, pi. 221, (figure

purest anteriorly, becomiug more violet on the neck. On other portions of the
body the blue and violet forming an iridescent zone on each feather, the blue
first, the violet terminal ; sometimes the head is similarly marked. On the
abdomen the blue generally predominating, on the rump the violet ; -wings
and tail black, with violet reflection, more blueish on the latter; the wing
coverts frequently tipped with steel blue or violet. Bill, tarsi and toes pure
black ; iris sulphur yellow.

Hab. Atlantic and Gulf? States, north to Nova Scotia, west to the AUe-
ghanies.

This species is more liable to variation than any other ; the arrangement
of the metallic tints varies with the individual; there is never, however, an
approach to the sharp definition and symmetrical pattern of coloration char-
acteristic of the western species. One specimen (No. 31049, Washington,"
D. C.) is wonderfully similar, in the darkness and distribution of tints, to the
Q. ag/seus, Bd., but resembles this in these respects only.

Wilson's figure conveys a good idea of this spcies ; Audubon represents the
western style, although his description is of the eastern.

The exact name of this species is a matter of some question. It is undoubt-
edly the Gracula quiscala of Linnajus, as based on the purple jackdaw of
Catesby, which, although generally considered as the same with the common
crow blackbird of the northern States, is more like major. The Gracula pur-
purea of Bartram from Florida, again, though excluding major, may include
aglecus. Q. versicolor, of Vieillot, embraces various West Indian species, though
essentially belonging to the crow blackbird. On the whole, for the present,
at least, I will follow Mr. Cassin in retaining Bartram's name oi purpureus.

QciscALUs ^NEDS, Ridgway.

Quiscalus versicolor, Aud., Orn. Bio|
but not description).

Fig. 2.

Sp. ch. Length 12-50 to 13-50, wing 6-00, tail G-00, culmen 1-26, tarsus

1-32. Third and fourth
quills longest and equal ;
first shorter than fifth ;
projection of primaries
beyond secondaries 1-28;
graduation of tail 1-48.

Metallic tints rich, deep
and uniform. Head and
neck all round rich silky
steel blue, this strictly
confined to these por-
466*3 . ' tions, and abruptly de-

fined behind, varying in shade from an intense Prussian blue to brassy green-
ish, thelatter tint always, when present, most apparent on the neck, the head
always more violaceous ; lores velvety black. Entire body, above and below,
uniform continuous metallic brassy olive, varying to burnished golden olivace-
ous bronze, becoming gradually uniform metallic purplish or reddish violet on
wings and tail, the last most purplish ; primaries violet black ; bill, tarsi and
toes pure black ; iris sulphur yellow.

Habitat. — Mississippi region of U. S., east to Alleghany Mts., west to Ft.
Bridger; Saskatchewan Country, Hudson's Bay Territory, Labrador aud Maine
(52382, Calais, Me. G. A. Boardman).

This species may be readily distinguished from the preceding by the color
alone, independently of the differences of proportions.

The impression received from a casual notice of a specimen of the Q. pur-
pureus is that of a uniformly glossy black bird, the metallic tints being much
broken or irregularly distributed, being frequently or generally arranged in

[June,

NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA.

135

successive bands on the feathers over the whole body, pi-oducing a peculiar
iridescent effect. In the Q. xneus nothing of this character is seen ; for,
among a large series of western specimens, not one has the body other
than continuous bronze, the head and neck alone being green or blue, and
this sharply and abruptly defined against the very different tint of the other
portions. These colors of course have there extremes of variation, but the
change is only in the shade of the metallic tints, the precise pattern being
strictly retained. In the present species the colors are more vivid and silky
than in the eastern, and tiie bird is in fact a much handsomer one.

QniscALus AGLyEus, Baird.

Quiscalus baritus, Baird, B. N. A. 1838, 556, pi. 32, not of Lesson. — Quiscalus
afflseus, Baird, Am. Jour. 1866, 84— Cassin, Pr. A. N. S. 1866, 404.

Fig. 3.

Sp. cA— Length 11-00, wing 5-20, tail 5-12, culmen 1-24, tarsus 1-28. Sec-
ond and third quills equal and longest; first shorter than fourth ; projection
of primaries beyond secondaries 1-12; graduation of tail 1-00.

Bill very slender and elongated, the tip of upper mandible abruptly de-
curved ; commissure very reguhir.

Metallic tints very dark. Head and neck all round well defined violaceous
steel blue, the head most blueish ; body soft dull bronzy greenish black,
scarcely lustrous; wings, upper tail coverts and tail blackish steel blue, the
wing coverts tipped with vivid violet bronze ; belly and crissum glossed with
blue.

Hab.—Sonth. Florida.

This species is quite well marked, differing from the two preceding in much
smaller size, with more slender and more decurved bill.

The arrangement of the colors is much as in the larger western species,
while the tints are most liice those of the eastern. All the colors are, how-
ever, darker, but at the same time softer than in either of the others.

In form this species approaches nearest the western, agreeing with it in the
primaries, slender bill, and more graduated tail, and, indeed, its relations, in
every respect, appear to be with this rather than the eastern.

10311

July Gth.
The President, Dr. Hays, in the Chair.
Ten members present.

July ISth.
Dr. Bridges in the Chair.
Twelve members present.
869.]

136 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Mr. Meelian presented leaves of the Peach and Cherry, and said it had fallen
to him to point out that the leaf blades of plants were developed in propor-
tion as vigorous vitality was relaxed, and that they were adherent or decurrent
in proportion as vigor or vitality was thoroughly developed in the central
axis or stem. By following out the same line of observation he had dis-
covered the law which governed the production of sexes in plants, and he now
wished to call attention to the operation of the same cause in the production
of glands on the leaf stalks of the Peach and Cherry.

A careful examination of a gland-bearing variety of either of these would
show that these glands were simj)ly germs of the cellular matter which formed
the leaf blade. They maj^ be seen in every stage of development from dense
full globes on the petioles to very small dots on the apex of the tolerably well
expanded matter, and it will be further seen that in proportion as vitality is
weak are these germs and glands developed. Leaves from the shaded center
of the tree, or from shoots weak or enfeebled from any other cause, produce
glandless leaves, while the stronger the shoot, the stronger and more numer-
ous are the glands or undeveloped parts. Remembering that these glands are
but undeveloped leaf blades, and that I have proved in former pages that jilants
develop these less freely in proportion to a vigorous axial or stem growth, it
should necessarily follow that a weakened vitality would be indicated by an
absence of glands. That this is so in the cases before us, these weak and
glandless leaves show. But I have had a very remarkable confirmation of this
by the observations of Peach groovers who have had no knowledge of these
recent physiological discoveries. Many varieties of Peaches have no glands,
and these have been found by the growers of southern Illinois, as I am in-
formed by Dr. Hull, of Alton, in all cases to be the first to succumb to diseases
or unfavorable circumstances. It is very seldom that the developments of
science, and untutored observation, go along together and so thoroughly
accord. To me it is one of the most interesting facts I have met with in sup-
port of my theory — that the degree of separation of the leaf-blade from the
main stems is wholly a question of vitality.

Mr. Meehan exhibited some fibre obtained from Mr. Rcezel, of Vera Cruz,
which was fewer and stronger than that furnished by the "Ramie." Mr.
Eoezel obtained it from a plant which he had found in the Alleghani^s, and
which he believed to be a new species of Bathmeria. Mr. M. had, however,
since found it abundantly along the Missouri River, and it proves to be only
Urtica purpurascens, Nuttall.

■ July 20fh.

The President, Dr Hays, in the Chair.

Tlie pnblication of the Proceedings for January, February and
March, was announced.

July Tith.

Dr. Ruschenberger, A^ice-President, in the Chair.

Dr. Chas. L. Cassin, U. S. N., was elected a member.
On favorable report of the Committee, the following paper was
ordered to be printed ;

[July

NATUEAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 137

Descriptions of New Carboniferous FOSSILS from the Western States.

BY F. B. MEEK AND A. H. WORTHEN,

Of the Illinois State Geological Survey.

ECHINODEEMATA.

Genus POTERIOCRINITES, Miller.

The typical forms of this genus have a more or less obconical body, with a
protuberant base, strong rounded column, and generally long, stout, bifur-
cating arms, always composed each of a single series of pieces. The body is
composed of five basal pieces, alternating with five subradials, and five first
radials, all alternating with the latter, excepting one on the anal side, which
rests directly upon the upper truncated edge of one of the subradials.

The anal series consists, normally, of two alternating vertical ranges of
pieces, the lowest piece of which rests between the upper sloping sides of two
of the subradials, partly under one side of the first radial on the right, and
connects above its middle, on the left, with another resting on the upper
truncated edge of one of the subradials, and joining the first radial on the left,
while usually one or two more above these connect with others belonging
more properly to the b«se of the so-called proboscis. The primary radials
above the first are free, and generally smaller, and vary in number in the dif-
ferent rays of the same individual, from about two to eight, ten, twelve or
more, below the first bifurcation. The ventral part of the body is produced
upward in the form of a cylindrical, or more or less expanded proboscis (so
called), generally as wide as the whole space between the arms below, and
composed of regular hexagonal pieces, often with pores passing through the
sutures between. The opening is said to be near the top of the proboscis,
though we have never seen it in any of the numerous specimens we have ex-
amined.

In addition to the species agreeing in all respects with the characters above
given, there are numerous others which, although conforming in general
structure with the typical forms, still depart so widely in some of their char-
acters, that when the extremes are compared, it seems difficult to believe that
they can all belong to one genus. And yet they are all linked together by so
many intermediate gradations that, in the present state of our knowledge of these
fossils, we are at a loss to see how they can be separated more than subgene-
rically. For some of these types the names Scaphiocrinus, Zeacrinus, Coeliocrinus,
etc., have been proposed, either as subgenera or as distinct genera from Pote-
riocriniles. Adopting the former view, these groups may, in order to facilitate
their study, be arranged as follows, commencing with Foteriocrinites proper:
1. — Genus Poteeiocriniteb, Miller.

Represented by such forms as P. crassus, Miller, P. conicus, Phillips, P. Mis-
sourien.sis, Shumard, and P. Swallovi, M. and W".
2. — Subgenus Scaphiocrinus, Hall ; or Graphiocrinus, de Koninck and Le

Hon.-

The characters distinguishing this group, as it is generally understood, from
Poteriocrinites proper, may be stated as follows : Species generally of smaller
size and less robust habit, with only two (or rarely three) primary radial pieces

* It seems highly probable, as has been suggested by Mr. Lyon and Dr. Shumard, that
the type on which de Koninck and Le Hon founded their name GrapMocrinm, may have
five minute basal pieces hidden by the column in the concavity of the under side, within
the range apparently belonging to the basal series, as is the case with many American
forms. If so, the typical form of &t/y»/tiVjcnj!i<s would present no difference of even sub-
generic importance, and the name Scaphiocrinus would have to be abandoned ; in which
case the American species would have to be called Graphiocrinus simplex, G. spinobrachia-
tus, G. trirtuosus, &c,

1869.]

138 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

to each ray, excepting sometimes in the anterior ray. Second radial pieces
generally contracted in the middle, and usually separated from the first radials
by gaping sutures. Arms generally shorter and sometimes simple, often with
the pieces so arranged as to present a zigzag appearance. Body short and
rounded or concave below, or varying to an inverse bell shape or obconic
outline.* Anal pieces sometimes with only a single one included as a part of
the wall of the body.

Includes S. simplex (the type), S, spinobrachiatus, S. iortuosus, S. doris, S.
seqnalis, S. carinatus, S. dichotomus, S. dactyliformis, S- divaricatus, S. Jlalli, S.
nodohrachiatus, S. lyriope^ S. orbicularis, S. ramosus, S. robusivs, S. subcarinatus,
S. subtortuosus, S. uncus, and S. Whitei, Hall, as well as his Cyathocrinus macro-
pleurus. Also S. longidactylus, McChesney and S. decadactylus, S. macrodactyhis,
S. solidus, S. Wachsvmthi, S. Clio, S. Thetys, S. nanus, S. delicatus, S. penicilhis,
S. fiscellus, S. scalaris, S.Juvenis, S. rudis, S. liUiformis,-\ and S. noiabilis, M. and
W.

Poteriocriniles dactyloides, P. latifrons, of Austin, and P. te?iuis, of Miller,
would also fall into this section, giving it the limits usually admitted.
3. — Subgenus Zeacrinus, Troost.

Differs from Scaphiocrinus in having the body more generally rounded and
concave below, and always with more than one anal piece included as a part
of the walls of the bod}'. Also in having the arms generallj' more frequently
bifurcating and the inner divisions all simple, as well as in having the free
radials generally wider.

Includes -^. ma^?«oZ/(T/br?«M, Troost ; Z. elegans, Z. ramosus, Z. paternus, Z.
intermedins, Z. scoparius, and Z. Worlheni, Hall ; Z. bifurcatus, McChesney ; Z.
ovalis, Lyon and Cassiday ; Z. spi)iosus, Owen and Shumard ; and Z. discus, Z.
Troostanus, Z. scohina, Z. asper, and Z. lyra, M. and W. Also Z. perangulatus
and Z. sacculus. White.
4. — Subgenus C(eliocrinus, White.

Differs from Scaphiocrinus in having the ventral prolongation much inflated or
balloon shaped, instead of nearly cylindrical.

Includes Poteriocrinus dilatatus, and P. ventricosus, Hall.

POTERIOCRINITES? PERPLEXCS, M. and W.

Body small, somewhat cup shaped, with sides a little expanding above and
rounding to the column below; height to top of first radial pieces more than
half the breadth at the same point. Base small, much depressed, or nearly
flat, with a pentagonal outline. Subradial pieces each nearly as large as the
whole base, about as wide as long, three hexagonal and two heptagonal
(counting a very obtuse angle at the middle of the base of each). First radi-
als nearlj' twice as large as the subradial pieces, and proportionally wider,
pentagonal in form, and each with a moderately deep rounded sinus, rather
more than half the breadth of its upper margin, for the reception of the suc-

* It is worthy of note that the original tj'pical species of Scaphincrinus {S. simplex. Hall),
has its body much depressed and rounded, but not concave, below, with but one anal
piece only, included as part of the walls of the body. It also has but two radials to each
ray, with all the arms simple, and two from each ray, excepting in the anterior ray, which
supports only one arm. [This species is wrongly described, and illustrated by the cut,
in the text of the Iowa Report, part ii, vol. 1, p. 550 — 52, as having the arms double from
their origin on the second radials all around, there being but one arm in the anterior ray
in the type specimen now before us.] The group, however, has been extended by ProV.
Hall and others, so as to include species presenting all the characters given above, and
might be divided into several sections distinguislied from each other and from the typi-
cal form, on quite as good characters as those distinguishing the latter from Zfacritms.

t This is our Poteriocrinus carinatus, (Illinois Report, vol. iii, pi. 17, fig. 1). As Prof. Hall
had previously used the name carinatus for a Scaphiocrinus, it becomes necessary to give
our species a new name. At the time we referred it to Poteriocrinites proper we were not
aware that tliere is a little group of species having the other characters of Scaphiocrinus,
and yet with three radial pieces to each ray.

[July,

NATURAJO SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 139

ceeding radials. Anal pieces presenting the usual arrangement of a double
alternating series, the lowest being partly under one side of the first radial on
the right, while the next on the left of this rests on the truncated upper edge
of one of the subradials, and these connect with others above, that form the
base of the proboscidiform ventral extension. Second radials very small and
short, or scarcely more than filling the sinuses in the first. Third radials
nearly as wide as long, quadrangular and only about half as wide as the first
radials. Fourth radials a little larger than tlae third, pentagonal in form, and
supporting the arms on their superior sloping sides.

Arms slender, rounded and proportionally long, bifurcating first above the
last radial, generally on the third or fourth piece, above which each of the
subdivisions bifurcates again several times. Arm pieces generally about as
wide as long, and not wedge shaped.

Proboscidiform extension at least half (and perhaps more than half) as long
as the arms, entirely lateral, and not more than half as wide as the body,
below ; apparently somewhat thicker above. Body plates not convex, but
merely granular, and joined by close fitting sutures. Column slender, round,
and composed of nearly equal moderately thicli pieces, near the base.

Height to top of first radial pieces, about 0-15 inch; breadth, 0-24 inch ;
length of arms, about 0-95 inch.

This is one of those few intermediate types such as we occasionally meet
with in various departments of Natural History, when extensive collections
can be studied, connecting or standing, as it were, intermediate between two
genera. That is to say, it combines some of the characters usually regarded
as belonging especially to Poteriocrini'es with others equally characteristic of
Cyathocrinites. Its body has much the usual form of Cyathocrinites, with the
double alternating series of anal pieces precisely as we see in Poteriocrinites.
On the other hand, it has the narrow, decidedly lateral proboscidiform ventral
extension of Cyathocrinites, and might, with almost equal propriety, as far as
we yet know, be called Cyathocrinites ? perplexus. The existence of such a type
would, in the estimation of some naturalists, be regarded as a sufficient reason
for uniting the genera Poteriocrinites and Cyathocrinites. In this opinion, how-
ever, we cannot concur, for we believe that if all the genera thus connected by
a few obscure forms were united, it would be found impossible to fix any limits
whatever to such groups, with all the extinct types before us. Possibly char-
acters may be found, however, warranting the establishment of a new genus
for such forms.

Specifically this little Crinoid seems to be most nearly allied to our Cyatho-
crinus ? enormis, but it differs in the number and arrangement of its anal pieces,
as well as in having its arm pieces scarcely one-half as long in proportion to
thickness.

Locality and position. — Lower part Burlington group of the Lower Carbon-
iferous, Burlington, Iowa. No. 264 of Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

Subgenus SCAPHIOCRINUS, or GRAPHIOCRINUS.
ScAPHiocRiNus RUDis, M. and W.*

Body much depressed, about four times as wide as high, flat or a little con-
cave below, the flattened part including the basal, subradial, and about half
the length of the first radial pieces. Base very small, a little impressed, and
entirely hidden by the column. Subradial pieces of moderate size, extendieg
out horizontally from the column ; the one on the anal side, however, curving
up distinctly, and the others slightly, at the ends ; all flat, excepting the cur-
vature mentioned, and pentagonal in outline (the superior angle being rather
salient), excepting the one on the anal side, which is hexagonal, being trun-

* Although we write the names Scaphincrinus and Zeacrinus in tills paper for the sake
of brevity, as if they were regarded as distinct genera, we really use them as subgeneric
names under Poteriocrinites, as already explained.

1869.]

140 PKOCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

cated above for the reception of the anal piece. First radial pieces three or
four times as large as the subradials, twice as wide as long, very tumid in the
middle, and pentagonal in form, the lateral margins being longer than the
inferior, and the superior one straight, and equaling the entire breadth. Sec-
ond radial pieces of about the same size as the first, which they equal in
breadth below, though they are a little longer, and proportionally narrower
above, and have each a strong angle down the middle of the outer side ; all
pentagonal in outline (excepting the anterior one, which is quadrangular), the
superior angle being salient : each supporting two arms on the superior sloping
sides, excepting the anterior one, which bears but a single arm.

Of anal pieces one only is included as a part of the walls of the body, and
this one rests upon the upper truncated edge of the largest, curved subradial,
and connects on each side with a first radial. Succeeding anals unknown.

Arms moderately strong, simple, angular on the dorsal side, and composed
of sliort wedge shape pieces, alternately projecting out laterally on each side,
in the form of spine-like processes. Column small, round, and composed near
the base of pieces of moderate thickness, with each a projecting ridge around
its middle, and perforated by a minute round canal. Sutures between the first
and second radial pieces widely gaping when the arms are folded up verti-
cally.

Height of body, 0-08 inch to the top of first radials ; breadth, 33 inch; length
of remaining portions of arms, about 0-85 inch ; thickness of column at base,
0-17 inch.

This belongs to the typical section of Scaphiocrinu*, as it has but a single
anal piece included as a part of the body, and all its arms are simple. Speci-
fically it appears to be most nearly allied to S. spinobrachiatus, Hall (Bost. Jour.
Nat. Hist. vol. vii, p. 306), but differs in having its body much depressed, more
flattened below, and its base is so much smaller as to be entirely hidden by
the column, instead of projecting out around it. Its subradial pieces also
differ in not being more elevated than the others, nor impressed at the angles.
The arms in the specimen from which our description was drawn up, are not
quite complete at their ends, though from a slight tapering and appearance of
a tendency to curve together toward their extremities, it seems to be quite
probable that they were not more than an inch in length, while those of the
species spinobrachialiis are said to be about three inches in length, in the origi-
nal specimen, and still imperfect at the ends.

Locality and position. Upper division of the Burlington group, Burlington,
Iowa. Lower Carboniferous. No. 275 of Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

SCAPHIOCRINUS MACRODACTYLUS, M. and W.

Body obconical, or tapering rather gradually from the top of the first radials
to the column. Base about twice as wide at the top as long, truncated below,
the breadth of the column ; basal pieces a little longer than wide, pentagonal
in form, with the lateral margins longer than the upper sloping sides. Sub-
radial pieces once and a half to twice the size of the basals, hexagonal in form,
excepting one (or possibly two) on the anal side, which is larger than the others
and heptagoual, being truncated above for the reception of an anal piece.
First radial pieces wider and a little shorter than the subradials, and all wider
than long. Second radials distinctly longer than wide, rounded and con-
stricted in the middle, with a pentagonal outline (excepting the one in the
anterior ray, which is truncated above), and supporting the arms on their supe-
rior sloping sides. Arms nine or ten, simple from their origin, very long, slen-
der, rounded and composed of wedge form pieces, which have their longer side
about twice the lengtli of the shorter and equaling their breadth, but not i)ro-
jecting so as to give the arms a zigzag appearance. Pinnulaj long, moderately
stout, and composed of joints about twice as long as wide. Anal pieces un-
known.

[July,

NATUEAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 141

Surface finely granular. Column round, moderately stout and composed of
rather tliin pieces, of uniform size near the base, with a rather small, round or
subpentagonal central canal.

Length of body belovs' the summit of the first radial pieces, 0-40 inch, breadth
about 0-50 inch. Diameter of column at base, 0-18 inch. Entire length of arms
unknown, as they are all broken at the extremity, with the remaining portion
measuring 3-40 inches in length, with thickness of about 0-10 inch through-
out.

This species has the long straight arms, obconic body, protuberant base, and
general physiognomy of the typical forms of Potei-iocrhiites, but differs in having
but two primary radial pieces to each ray, with the sutures between them
somewhat gaping, as in Scaphiocrinus. Specifically it is not closely allied to
any of the other known species. In the form of its body it is most nearly allied
to our Pot. subimpressus, which Mr. Wachsmuth has ascertained probably has
only two primary radial pieces to each ray, and hence seems to fall into
Scaphiocrinus, giving that group the wide limits usually admitted. The species
here under consideration, however, will be readily distinguished from the Pot.
[Scaph.) subimpressus, by not having its body plates impressed at the corners,
and all distinctly thinner, as well as by its less robust general habit.

Locality arid position. Lower beds of the Burlington group, Burlington,
Iowa. Lower Carboniferous. No. 277 of Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

Scaphiocrinus nanus, M. and W.

Body very small, expanding rapidly from the column to the top of the first
radials, where it is about once and a half as wide as high. Base small, slightly
projecting, pentagonal in outline, and nearly covered by the round, flat facet
for the attachment of the column. Basal pieces showing a very short, minute
pentagonal facet above the column. Subradial pieces a little wider than long,
three with a pentagonal outline, and two on the anal side hexagonal, there
being no well defined angle visible at the middle of the under side of any of
them. First radials of about the size of the subradial pieces, a little wider
than long, pentagonal in form, and somewhat rounded on their outer sides, in
cousequence of the sutures between them being impressed. Second radials
longer than wide, or nearly twice as long as the first, all pentagonal in outline
and rounded and more or less constricted in the middle, each supporting two
arms on its upper sloping side.

Anal pieces consisting of a double alternating series, the lowest one of which
rests between the upper sloping sides of two of the subradials, and supports
one side of the first radial on the right, while on its left it connects, above the
middle, with another anal resting upon the truncated upper side of one of the
subradials. and connecting on its left with the first radial on that side; above
these three or four other pieces are seen between the arms extending up and
joining with the base of the so-called proboscis.

Arms somewhat rounded on the dorsal side, each bifurcating on the sixth or
seventh piece above the second primary radials, and composed of wedge form
pieces that are a little longer than wide on the longer side. Above the bifur-
cations these pieces are somewhat constricted and each one projecting laterally
above, on its longer side, for the reception of the pinnulas, so as to present a
rather zigzag appearance. Pinnule moderately stout, and rather distantly
separated from each other; composed of joints a little more than twice as long
as wide.

Surface of body plates even, and finely granular.

Height of body, 0-10 inch to top of first radial pieces, where it measures about
0-20 inch in breadth. Arms about 0-75 inch in length.

In size and general appearance this species is quite similar to S. dichotomus,
of Hall, with which it also agrees in having its arms bifurcating but once above
their origin on the second radials. It differs, however, in having its second
radial pieces rounded instead of angular, and distinctly longer in proportion to

1869.]

142 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

breadth, as is also the case with all the arm joints. It also differs in having
two arms to each ray, all around, instead of only one in the anterior ray, as
well as in the number of pieces in each arm below the bifurcations. Its arms
are likewise proportionally more slender.

Locality and position. Lower division of the Burlington group, at Bui-lington,
Iowa. Lower Carboniferous. Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

ScAPHiocRiNCS STRiATCS, M. and W.

Body below the top of the first radial pieces subhemispherical, being regu-
larly rounded below ; composed of thick plates, which are ornamented with
distinct, somewhat broken striae, running vertically, so as to radiate from the
base, but all parallel with each other on each individual plate. Basal pieces
hidden by the column externally. Subradials about as wide as long, five of
them showing a pentagonal outline (there being no visible angle at the middle
of their bases on the outside), and one on the anal side hexagonal, the latter
being a little larger than the others. First radial pieces slightly shorter than
the subradials, but about once and a half as wide, all having a general pentag-
onal form, being broadlj'' truncated their entire breadth above, and having the
articulating surfaces each marked with two very distinct transverse furrows.
First anal piece a little longer than wide, hexagonal in form, and resting upon
the truncated upper end of the odd subradial between two of the first radials,
beyond which it projects nearly half its length ; truncated above for the recep-
tion of a second anal. Other parts unknown.

Sutures distinctly channelled, so as to impart a moderate convexity to the
plates.

Height to top of first radials, 0-20 inch ; breadth, 0-46 inch.

This is a typical Scaphiocrinus, as far as its parts are known, and seems to be
most nearly related to S. simplex, of Hall, from which it may be at once distin-
guished, however, by its channelled sutures, convex plates and peculiar sculp-
turing.

Locality and position. Lower Burlington beds, of the Lower Carboniferous,
at Burlington, Iowa. No. 274 of Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

Scaphiocrinus penicillus, M. and AV.

Body small, somewhat basin shaped, or about three times as wide as the
height to the top of the first radial pieces, truncated and a little concave below.
Base very small, and nearly or quite hidden by ths column in the shallow con-
cavity of the under side. Subradials generally wider than long, with a pen-
tagonal outline, excepting one on the anal side, which has the upper angle a
little truncated, so as to make a sixth angle ; there is doubtless also another
obtuse angle at the middle of the lower side of each, covered by the column.
First radial pieces wider than high and pentagonal in form. Second radial
pieces nearly twice as long as wide, expanded at each end, and distinctly con-
stricted along the middle, where they are each somewhat carinated on the dor-
sal side ; all pentagonal in form and supporting each two arms on their sujje-
rior sloping sides, excepting in the anterior ray, where this piece is quadran-
gular and supports but one arm.

First anal piece wedged obliquelj'^ down in between two of the subradials,
under one side of the first radial, on its right, and connecting by its left side,
above the middle, with another anal resting on a very short truncated side of
one of the subradials, and connecting on the left with the first radial of that
side. Above these one or two other pieces are seen between the arms, con-
necting with the base of the proboscis.

Arms somewhat rounded, and bifurcating on the fifth or sixth piece above
the second radials; and in all but the anterior ray, one of the divisions (the
inner one) remains simple, and the other subdivides again on the sixth, seventh
or eighth piece, while the anterior arm bifurcates first on the sixth piece, and
each of its subdivisions again on the eighth or tenth piece above. First, and

[July

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 143

sometimes also the second arm pieces a little longer than wide, and slightly
constricted ; other arm pieces generally wider than long and wedge shaped,
but not arranged so as to impart a zigzag appearance to the arms. Oolumn
small, nearly or quite round, and composed near the base of alternately thin
and thick pieces.

Height of body to top of first radial pieces, 0-07 inch; breadth, 0-20 inch;
length of arms, about 0-70 inch.

This little species seems to be nearest like S. dichotomus, Hall (Iowa Report,
p. 553), with which it agrees in size and general appearance. It will be read-
ily distinguished, however, by the more frequent bifurcations of its arms,
which also differ in being more rounded and composed of proportionally longer
pieces, not arranged so as to present a slightly zigzag appearance, as in the
species dichotomus. It will also be distinguished from the last by having two
arms to each ray all around, as well as by its concave base.

Locality and position. Upper division of the Burlington group, at Burlington,
Iowa. Lower Carboniferous. No. 286 of Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

ScAPHiocRiNUS Tethys, M. and W.

Body under medium size, expanding rather rapidly from the column to the
top of the first radialFs, where it is about one-fourth wider than high. Base
small, twice to three times as wide as high. Basal pieces very small, wider
than high, and pentagonal in form. Subradial pieces slightly wider than long,
pentagonal, excepting two on the anal side, which are hexagonal, there being
no well defined angle at the middle of the base of any of them. First radials
larger than the subradials, a little wider than long, and all pentagonal. Sec-
ond radial pieces rather more than twice as wide as long, rounded and a little
constricted in the middle, and somewhat expanded at the ends ; all pentagonal
in outline, and each supporting two arms on its superior sloping sides.

Anal series consisting of two alternating vertical ranges of pieces, the first of
which rests between the two upper sloping sides of two of the subradials, and
supports an inferior sloping side of the first radial on the right, while its left
side above the middle connects with another anal resting upon the truncated
upper side of one of the subradials, and connecting with the first radial on the
right. Above these one or two ranges of similar pieces join with those form-
ing the base of the so-called proboscis.

Arms not positively known to bifurcate after their origin on the second radial
pieces ; composed of joints, the lower of which are twice to three times as long
as wide, and rounded or subangular, and narrower in the middle than at the
ends. Above these the pieces gradually become shorter, and more distinctly
expanded at the ends, with the upper lateral extremity of each somewhat pro-
jecting alternately on opposite sides, so as to present a distinct zigzag arrange-
ment, the projection being for the support of the pinnulas, which are compara-
tively rather stout, and composed of joints two or three times as long as wide,
and provided with deep ambulacra] furrows within.

Column comparatively rather stout; subpeutagonal near the base, but soon
tapering and becoming rounded below; composed below of uniform pieces ;
about one-third as thick as wide, but gradually becoming thinner near the base
of the body.

Length of body to top of first radial pieces, 0-17 inch; breadth about 0-22 inch;
length of arms, about 1-10 inch.

This species is related to that we have here described under the name S. na-
nus, but not only differs in having longer arms, but in having its second radial
pieces and all of its arm joints much longer in proportion, as well as present-
ing a more strongly zigzag arrangement. Its base is also more protuberant,
and the sutures between its body plates slightly impressed instead of even.

Locality and position. Upper division Burlington group, at Burlington, Iowa.
Lower Carboniferous. No. 298 of Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

1869.]

144 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

ScAPHiocRiNus DELiCATUS, M. and W.

Body very small, somewhat cup-shaped, once and a half as wide as the
height to the top of the first radials ; sides expanding rapidly upward from
about the middle of the subradials to the top of the first radial pieces, and
rounding under to the column below. Base very small, and nearly hidden by
the column, pentagonal in general outline. Basal pieces merely appearing as
minute trigonal facets around the top of the column, and curving upward a
little at the extremity. Subradial pieces of comparatively rather large size,
three or four of them hexagonal (counting a very obtuse angle at the middle
of the under side), and one or two heptagonal. First radial pieces of about
the size of the subradials, but shorter and wider, and all pentagonal in form;
facet of each for the reception of the second radials not occupying the entire
breadth above, and sloping outward. Second radials full twice as long as
wide, measuring the breadth at the widest part of the lower end; slender and
rounded in the middle, and enlarged at the ends, particularly below; each sup-
porting two arms on their upper sloping sides.

Anal plates arranged in a double alternating series, exactly as in the last
described species. Arms slender, rounded, and composed of joints, the lower
of which are about twice as long as wide, but those above gradually growing
shorter, until they become scarcely longer than wide, on the longer side ; and
owing to their oblique arrangement and projections for the support of the
pinnulas, presenting a zigzag appearance. At least one of the posterior arms
seen to bifurcate on the seventh piece. Pinnulse rounded, comparatively
rather stout, composed of joints two or three times as long as wide, and owing
to the length of the arm-pieces, widely separated from each other. Column
of moderate thickness, and apparently showing a tendency to assume a penta-
gonal outline near the base.

Height of body to the top of first radial pieces, 0-10 inch ; breadth of do.
0-15 inch ; length of arms about 0-75 inch.

This very delicate little species is nearest like that we have already described
under the name (S. nanus, but will be readily distinguished by its mucli more
slender second radial pieces and arms. This narrowness of the second radials
causes the intervening spaces to be wider than the second radial pieces them-
selves ; while in the i'. nanus these pieces are so wide as to be in contact with
each other all around, excepting on the anal side. These differences give to
each of these two forms more strongly marked distinctive features than would
probably be apparent from merely reading the descriptions without seeing the
fossils themselves.

Locality and position. Upper division of the Burlington group, at Burling-
ton, Iowa. Lower Carboniferous. No. 297 of Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

ScAPHiocRiNus Clio, M. and W.

Body inversely subcampanulate, somewhat truncated or more or less
rounded to the column below, and a little expanded at the top of the first radials,
where it is nearly twice as wide as high. Base very small, or almost entirely
hidden by the column, not projecting below the horizon of the next range of
pieces. Sabradial pieces slightly tumid, and owing to the small size of the
base forming most of the under side, as well as half of the height of the body, a
little longer than wide, and all (excepting probably one or two not seen on the
anal side) presenting a general pentagonal outline, there being no visible angle
at the middle of the under side in any of them. First radials larger than the
subradials, wider than long, pentagonal in form, and rounded or convex on the
outer side above. Second radials short, transverely oblong, or about twice as
wide as long, and all rounded on the outer side. Third radials (in four of the
rays seen) somewhat longer than the second, pentagonal in form, but with
their lateral margins so short as to appear nearly trigonal; supporting the
arms on their superior sloping sides. Anal pieces unknown.

[July,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 145

Arms rouml, rather slender, and after their origin on the third primary ra-
dials, bifurcating on the seventh, ninth or eleventh pieces in the different arms
seen, and beyond this, one arm is observed to bifurcate on the nineteenth
piece above ; all composed of slightly wedge-formed pieces, a little wider
than long.

Proboscis (so called), as observed nearly flattened by pressure, two-thirds
as wide as the body, and about four-fifths as long as the arms ; not expanded
at the summit ; composed of moderate sized hexagonal pieces indented (and
probably perforated) at the corners. Column subpentagonal near the base,
where it is composed of alternately thicker and thinner pieces, with a small
apparently pentagonal canal.

Height of body to top of first radials, 0-20 inch ; breadth, about 0-40 inch ;
length of arms, about 2-10 inches. Length of proboscis above first radials,
1-70 inches ; thickness of column at its connection with the base, 015 inch.

This species is related to such forms as .S*. carinalu-i and 5. dichotomiis, Hall ;
.S". rusticus, White, and 5. Wacksmuthi, M. and W., but differs from them all too
clearly to render a comparison necessary.

Locality and position. — Upper division of the Burlington group, at Burling-
ton, Iowa. Lower Carboniferous. No. 295 of Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

ScAPHiocRiNCS scALARis, M. and W,

Body small, somewhat cup-shaped, being broad below, and a little expanded
above ; about twice as wide as high at the top of the first radials. Base small
and hidden by the column in the concavity of the under side. Subradial pieces
tumid, wider than high, and arranged so that the body rests upon them, when
placed on a plane surface with the column removed ; all appearing as if penta-
gonal, excepting the two on the anal side, which seem to be hexagonal, but
they must all have each an additional obtuse angle at the middle of the under
side. First radials about of the same size as the subradials, wider than long
and pentaganal in form, though one on the anal side has one side so short as
to appear as if quadrangular ; each a little expanded above, so as to present,
with the broad excavations at their inferior lateral angles, a more or less con^
stricted appearance. Second radials smaller than the first, rounded on the
outer side, and a little constricted on the lateral margins, all wider than long,
with a quadrangular outline. Third radial pieces in all but the anterior ray.
nearly as'large as the first, but proportionally longer, rounded on the outer,
side, constricted in the middle, and pentagonal in form ; the superior lateral
sloping sides of each supporting an arm. In the anterior ray the third piece
is narrow and long, truncated above, and merely supports a single arm.

First anal piece smaller than the subradials, pentagonal in form, and resting
between the upper sloping sides of the two hexagonal subradials ; connecting
on the left with the second anal, and on the right with a first radial, while it
supports one side of another anal above. Second anal of nearly the same
size as the first, and resting upon the superior truncated side of the subradial
below. Above these, two alternating series of anal pieces are seen extend--
ing upward, to connect with the base of the so-called proboscis.

Arms nine, simple from their origin on the third radials, rather angular on
the back, and eacli composed of short wedge formed pieces, arranged some-,
what in zigzag, with their longer ends alternately on opposite sides, and pro-
jecting so as to support stout, rounded pinnuLT, composed of joints sometimes
nearly as long as wide. Pinnulse very regularly arranged, so as to leave in-
tervening spaces scarcely of their own breadth, and so stout as to present
rather the appearance of armlets, than what are usually called tentacles, in the
descriptions of fossil Crinoids ; all like the arms with the ambulacral furrows
comparatively deep and large.

Vault unknown; proboscis (so-called) about half as long as tbearms, com-
paratively rather slender until at the upper extremity, where it iS suddenly ex-
panded to nearly twice its breadth below, and somewhat fiattene4 onitop. The

1869.J 10

146 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP

expansion, however, seems to be mainly due to the greater thickness of the
plates here, than to a corresponding increase in the size of the cavity within.
Plates of the proboscis of moderate size, and all indented at their corners.

Height of body to the top of first radial pieces, 0-18 inch ; breadth about
0-32 inch ; length af arms beyond the top of the third radials, 1-68 inches;
length of proboscis above the first radials, 95 inch.

This species is so distinct from all others known to us, that it is scarcely neces-
sary to compare it with any of them. It seems to be most like S. Ilal/i, Hall,
but differs in having its subradials so tumid as to give the body a truncated
appearance below, instead of an inversely campanulate outline. Its pinnulae
are also much stouter and less oblique, while its arms are entirely without the
little flattened spine-like projections along their backs seen in that species.
The stout pinnulae as seen extending between the arms present, with the latter,
a peculiar scalariform appearance, that suggests the specific name.

Locality/ and position. Upper division of the Burlington group, at Burling-
ton, Iowa. Lower Carboniferous. No. 282 of Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

ScAPHiocRiNus FiscELLus, M. and W.

Body very small, somewhat cup-shaped, about once and a half as wide as
high, rather broad and subtruncated below, with moderately expanded sides.
Base very small, flat, and hidden by the column, when the latter is attached.
Subradial pieces convex, curving under to connect with the base and extend-
ing about half waj' up the sides ; three of them presenting a pentagonal out-
line, and two hexagonal, (that is without counting a very obtuse angle doubt-
less existing at the middle of the under side of each, but hidden by the column).
First radials about the size of the subradial pieces, and pentagonal in form,
the upper side always truncated the full breadth. Second radials quadran-
gular, constricted in the middle, and expanded at the ends ; separated from
each other by spaces nearly half their own breadth, measuring at the middle.
Third radial pieces a little longer and narrower than the second, abruptly di-
lated at the ends, and strongly contracted in the middle ; each, with apparent-
ly the exception of one in the anterior ray (which seems to bear only one
arm), supporting two arms on their superior strongly sloping sides.

Anal plates forming a double alternately arranged series, exactly as in the
last. Arms apparently simple from their origin on the third radials ; composed
of pieces as long as wide, or a little longer, and angular on the dorsal side ; each
piece always contracted in the middle, and expanded at the ends, particularly
at one of the upper lateral corners alternately on each side of the arm, for the
reception of the pinnulce, thus giving the arms a zigzag appearance. Pinnulaj
rather stout, and composed of pieces about as long as wide.

Surface of the body with deep indentations at the corners of all the plates,
so as to form a comparatively strong ridge radiating to each side of the subradial
pieces, to connect with a similar one on each of the adjacent pieces.

Height of body about 0-11 inch to the top of the first radial pieces, where
it measures about 0-17 inch in breadth ; length of arms, about 0'95 inch.

This species is nearly related to the last, but in addition to being much
smaller, it differs in the strong radiating costaj of its body plates, as well as
in having its subradial plates merely convex, instead of tumid. Its arm joints
also differ in being proportionally longer, and contracted in the middle.

Locality and poailion. — Lower division of the Burlington group; Burlington,
Iowa. Lower Carboniferous. No. 283 of Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

SCAPHIOCRINUS JUVENIS, M. and W.

Body small, expanding rather rapidly from the column, or presenting a.
short, obconic form, with rather distinct sinuses between the radial scries ;
nearly twice as wide at the top of the first radials, as the height to the same
point. Base small and short, or several times wider than high, but projecting

[July,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 147

below the subradials, truncated about three -fourths its breadth by the facet for
the attachment of the column. Basal pieces nearly twice as wide as long, and
pentagonal in form, but owing to the shortness of the lateral margins appear-
ing nearly trigonal. Subradial pieces a little wider than long, three pentago-
nal, and two on the anal side hexagonal (without counting a scarcely defined
angle at the middle of the under side of each). First radial pieces of about
the size of the subradials, generally wider than long, and pentagonal in form.
Second radials about as long as wide, distinctly rounded on the dorsal side,
and quadrangular in outline. Third radials somewhat larger than the second,
more or less expanded at the upper end, and rounded and contracted in the
middle ; each bearing two arms on its superior sloping sides.

Anal plates forming a double alternating series of five or six pieces, as in
the last ; the lowest piece resting between the upper sloping sides of two of
the subradials, partly under the first radial on the right, and connecting on the
left above the middle, with another piece resting upon the upper truncated
edge of one of the subradials, and joining the first radial on the left.

Arms ten, simple from their origin on the third radials, composed of some-
what wedged-formed pieces, about as long as wide on the longer side, which
projects above, alternately on opposite sides of the arms, for the reception of
the pinnuljE, so as to present a somewhat zigzag appearance. Pinnulse stout,
arranged at intervals of near their own breadth apart, and composed of joints
that are about as long as wide. Surface granular ; bod}' plates even, and merely
separated by linear sutures. Column of comparatively moderate size, faintly
subpentagonal, near the base, and composed of rather thin, nearly equal plates,
with a very small central perforation.

Height of body to the top of first radial pieces, about 0-12 inch ; breadth,
0-20 inch ; length of arms, about 0-75 inch ; thickness of column at base, near
0-07 inch.

This species is related to the last two, but is readily distinguished by the
more conical form of its body, produced by the protuberance of its base, as
well as by having two arms to each ray all around, instead of only one in the
anterior ray. It also differs from both in having its body plates even, instead
of very convex, or tumid, as in S. scalaris, or costate, as in S. fiscellus.

Locality and position. — Lower division of the Burlington group, at Burling-
ton, Iowa. Lower Carboniferous. No. 284 of Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

ScAPHiocRiNUS N0TABILI3, M. and W.
Body large, obconic, or expanding gradually from the column to the middle
of the first radials, at which point these pieces are protuberant, so as to give
the general outline, (as seen in a side view) a tendency towards an inverted
bell-shape. Base of a deep cup form, less than twice as wide at the top as the
height, or about one-third as high as the body to the top of the first radials.
Basal pieces higher than wide, and pentagonal in form, the lateral margins
being longest. Subradial pieces nearly twice as long as the basal, hexagonal
in form, excepting the two on the anal side, which are heptagonal. First ra-
dials somewhat larger than the subradial pieces, slightly wider than long,
pentagonal in form, and each provided with a very profound sinus for the re-
ception of the second radials, more than one-third as wide as its upper edge,
and extending about halfway down its outer side. Second radial pieces com-
paratively very small, or about one-third as large as the first ; pentagonal in
form, about as wide as long, rounded on the outer side, and so deeply inserted
in the sinus of the first radials on a kind of shoulder-like projection, that their
mesial angle above scarcely rises beyond the upper margins of the first radials,
each supporting two arms on its superior sloping sides, and separated from
that of the next ray on each side, by an interradial space of about one and a
half its own breadth. Anal plates two and about half of the third, included as a
part of the walls of the body, hexagonal in form, and having the usual arrange-
ment of those of Fot&riocrimtes, in a double, vertical, alternating series.

1869.]

148 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Arms very long, slender and rounded; one of them seen to bifurcate first on
the sixth, two others on the eighth, and another on the tenth piece, above the
second radials. Beyond these bifurcations it is evident from the number of
slender branches seen, that there must be other subdivisions, but the specimen
is not in a condition to show the details of the bifurcations. Arm pieces gen-
erally longer on the longer side than wide, but not arranged in zigzag; the
first two of each arm twice as long as wide, and somewhat contracted around
tlie middle. Proboscidiform extension very long, or nearly or quite equaling
the length of the arms, and somewhat narrowed at the extremity.

Surface of the first radial plates strengthened by prominent, rounded, ra-
diating costie, two of which diverge downward from the mesial prominence
under the sinus for the second radials, to connect with others on the subra-
dials, so as to inclose profound triangular pits at the upper corners of the
latter ; while two similar ridges run laterally on each side of the sinus,
paraller to the upper margin, to connect with those similarly situated on each
adjacent first radial. On each subradial, the ridge extending down the middle
widens and becomes nearly obsolete at the base, where it connects with seve-
ral slender lines that continue on down converging toward the lower part of
each basal piece ; there being no pits or impressions at the meeting of the
corners of the basal and subradial pieces.

Height of body to the top of the first radial, 0-96 inch ; breadth across at
the most protuberant part of the first radials, about one inch. Length of
arms from their origin on the second radials, about four inches. Length of
proboscidiform ventral extension, 3 85 inches.

This fine species departs very widely from the typical forms of Scaphiocri-
nus in its large size, obconic body, strongly costate body plates, long bifurca-
ting arms, and particularly in having its second radial pieces so narrow in pro-
portion to the first, as to be separated from each other by interradial spaces,
wider than the second radial pieces themselves. Its anal series, although in-
cluding more pieces than we see in the typical Scaphiocrinus (being like that
of Poteriocrinites proper), does not differ from that of a large proportion of the
species usually included in Scaphiocrinus, with which the species agrees in hav-
ing onlj' two radial pieces to each ray.

Specifically it is related to such forms as Cyathocrinun macropleurus, Hall,
and Poteriocrinus obuncus, White ; but it differs too widely from these and all
the other similar forms known to us, to render a comparison necessary. Cyatho-
crinus macropleurus was described from a specimen not showing either the anal
pieces or second radials, or the arms; Mr. Wachsmuth has specimens, however,
showing that it has several anal pieces, and two radials to each ray. He also has
specimens of the P. obuncus (which was also described from a specimen not
showing the arms and second radials), indicating that it agrees in these char-
acters with Scaphiocrinus It is possible such species should form a separate
section, or subordinate group.

Locality and position. — Lower division of the Burlington group. Burlington,
Iowa. Lower Carboniferous. No. 303 of Mr. Wachsrauth's collection.

Scaphiocrinus Coreyi, M. and W.

Body of medium size, basin-shaped, or about twice as wide as high, rounded
and distinctly concave below. Base small, and nearly or quite hidden by the
column in the concavity of the under side. Subradial pieces comparatively
rather large, curving under to connect with the base, all presenting a general
hexagonal outline, excepting two on the anal side, which are heptagonal ; they
must each, however, have another obscure angle below. First radial pieces
about equaling in size the subradials, but proportionally wider, being some-
times slightly more than twice as wide as long, all pentagonal in form, the
upper side being much the longest, and the lateral margins short. Secoud
radials a little longer than the first, but narrower above, and more or less con-

[July

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 149

stricted around the middle ; pentagonal in form, the upper angle being rather
salient, and each supporting an arm on each of their superior sloping sides.
First anal piece about one-third as large as one of the subradials, hexagonal
in form, and resting between the upper sloping sides of two of the subradials,
and partly under one side of one of the first radials on the right ; while it sup-
ports another anal piece above, and connects with a third on the left, which
rests upon the upper truncated side of one of the subradials.

Arms moderatelj'long, carinated along the middle of the outer side, and
after the first division on the second radials dividing again on the sixth or
eighth piece, beyond which they are all simple ; each composed of alternating
wedge-shaped pieces, which are a little wider than long, and each projecting
on alternate sides above for the reception of tentacles, which are stout, angu-
lar, and composed of pieces nearly twice as long as wide.

Breadth of body, 0-55 inch ; height to top of first radials, about 0-20 inch.

This species is remarkable for the curious rough appearance of the arms,
produced by the projection of the pieces alternately on each side, and the in-
terruption of the carina along the dorsal side, which is not continuous, but looks
as if the pieces had been slipped a little alternately to opposite sides.

Locality and position. — Crawfordsville, Indiana. Keokuk division of the
Lower Carboniferous.

Subgenus ZEACRIXUS.

Zeacrinus scobina, M. and W.

Body very much depressed, or about four times as wide as high, to the top
of the first radial pieces, and concave in the middle below. Base small, and
hidden by the column in the concavity of the under side. Subradial pieces
curving in to the concavity of the under side, and extending outward
around the column ; all presenting a nearly pentagonal general outline,
with short lateral edges, excepting the one on the anal side, which seems to
be hexagonal, (each being without a visible angle at the middle of the under
side). First radials three or four times as large as the subradials, near twice
as wide as long, pentagonal in form, with lateral and inferior margins of nearly
equal length, and upper edge equaling the entire breadth. Second radials
as wide as the first and nearly twice as long, all pentagonal in form, the supe-
rior angle being salient, and also projecting outward, while a strongly defined
mesial angle extends down the middle of the dorsal or outer side to the base
of each, the surface on each side of this angle being distinctly concave.

Anal pieces small, and owing to the rough surface of the plates, and the in-
distinctness of the sutures, without very clearly defined outlines. As near as can
be made out, the first one seems to be somewhat cuneiform, and wedged in
obliquely under one side of the first radial on the right ; on its left it connects
above the middle, apparently with another resting upon a very short upper
side of one of the subradials. Above these other anal pieces are seen between
the arms, but their exact arrangement cannot be made out from the specimen
studied.

Arms, after their origin on the second radials, each bifurcating on the sixth
piece (excepting those of the anterior ray, which divide first on the eleventh
piece), the inner division of each being smaller than the other, and remaining
simple ; while the outer or main arm gives off another division on the inner
side on the eighth piece above the first bifurcation, and still another on the
ninth or tenth piece above the latter, which is as far as the arms can be
clearly traced in the specimen, though there is some appearance of a fourth
bifurcation in one of the arms. Arm pieces short, or from twice to three
times as wide as long, and not in the slightest degree wedge-shaped ; each with
lateral edges sharp and a little projecting, and provided with a little pointed
process on the middle of the dorsal side. These little asperities, and the bev-
eled character of the sutures between the arm joints, give the arms a rough,

1869.]

•150 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

rasp-like appearance, which has suggested the specific name. The body plates
are also rendered very rough by a ridge extending from the middle of the up-
per edge of each first radial to connect \yith others on the subradials, and the
presence of other irregular asperities. Sutures between the first and second
radials widely gaping when the arms are folded together. Column of moderate
size, and composed of thin, nearly round pieces, with projecting rough edges,
and a rather small subpentagonal central perforation.

Height of body to the top of the first radials, 0-10 inch : breadth, about 0-42
inch ; length of arms, about 170 inch.

This species is related to Zeacrinus ])erangnlatus, of Dr. White, but differs in
having its arms longer and less tapering, as well as bifurcating more fre-
quently; also in having each inner division of each arm smaller than the
outer. The bifurcating pieces of its arras are likewise proportionally smaller,
and not protuberant as in that species. In the species perangulatus the arm
pieces are also merely angular along the middle, while in that under consider-
ation there is, instead of a continuous angle, a row, of little pointed isolated
protuberances, presenting a crenate appearance as seen in outline.

Locali/i/ a7id position. Upper division of the Burlington group, Burlington,
Iowa. Lower Carboniferous. No. 321 of Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

Zeacrinus aspeb, M. and W.

Body small, much depressed, or twice and a half as wide as high, broadly
truncated and concave below, the concavity including the base and about half
the length of each subradial piece. Base small and nearly or quite hidden by
the column. Subradial pieces very abruptly geniculated in the middle, the
lower or inner half forming a part of the concavity of the under side, and the
upper a part of the outer wall of the bodj^, while their prominent middle forms
the margin of the concavity below, each presenting a pentagonal outline, ex-
cepting one on the anal side, which is hexagonal. First radial pieces about
twice as long as the subradials, and twice as wide as long, all pentagonal in
form, with the upper truncated side equaling the full breadth. Second radial
pieces as wide and once and a half as long as the first, pentagonal in form
(unless the anterior one, which has not been seen, may be an exception), and
supporting the arms on their superior sloping sides, each with a very promi-
nent sharp carina extending up the middle, while the surface on each side of
the carina is deeply concave, excepting at the lower margin, along which there
is also a transverse ridge or carina.

Anal plates arranged as iu the last described species, in a double alternating
series, the lower one being placed obliquely under one side of the first radial
on the right, while the next rests upon a short end of one of the subradials,
the two connecting together and supporting the others above.

Arms, after their origin on the second radial pieces, each bifurcating on the
fcixth piece, the two divisions of each being of equal size, but the inner one is
simple, while the outer bifurcates again on the sixth, seventh, eighth or ninth
piece above the first division, beyond which the two equal divisions are
simple as far as the}' can be traced in the specimens examined. Arm pieces
short, or nearly twice as wide as long, wedge form, and each strongly project-
ing on the longer side, alternatelj-, so as to present a zigzag appearance ; bifur-
cating pieces all larger than the others, and extending out, on the dorsal side
of the arms, into pointed prominences, sometimes assuming the character of
short spines, which, with the lateral processes of the other pieces, give the
arms a very rough, harsh appearance.

Surface of the body plates with deep excavations at the corners, and strong
ridges or cariufe between the excavations. Of these carina?, two descend di-
verging from the middle of the upper side of the first radials (along which
there is also a transverse ridge), to connect with others on tlie subradial
pieces. Sutures between the first and second radial jiieces very widely gaping.
Column round and very slender near the base, where it is composed of pieces

[July,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 151

of moderate thickness, everj' Hllernate or third one of which projects out
distinctly beyond the others. Central canal minute and apparently round.

Height of body to the top of the first radial pieces, O-IO inch; breadth, 0-31
incli ; length of arms, about 1 inch.

This is another species related to Zeacrinus spinobrachiatus, of Dr. White, but
it differs in having decidedly more slender arms below the bifurcations, with
the arm pieces, particularly above the first bifurcation, arranged much more in
zigzag, and their thicker ends more projecting on each side. It is one of the
forms combining some of the characters of Zeacrinus and Scophiocrinus.

Locality and position. Upper division of the Burlington group, Burlington,
Iowa. Lower Carboniferous. No. 323 of Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

Zeacrixus serratus, M. and W.
Body small, much depressed, or about three times as wide as high, broadly
truncated and concave below. Base very small, and nearly or quite concealed
by the column in the concavitj' of the under side. Subradials a little tumid,
curving abruptly into the" concavitj- of the under side, and extending about
half way up the lateral walls of the body ; three or four pentagonal and one or
two on the anal side hexagonal (not counting a very obtuse angle doubtless
existing at the middle of 'the under side of each). First radials somewhat
larger than the subradials, nearly twice as wide as high, and all pentagonal in
form, with the upper side equaling the entire breadth. Second radials as wide
at the base as the first, and nearly twice as long, each pentagonal in form and
supporting two arms, excepting that of the anterior ray, which is quadrangular
and supports but a single arm; each with a prominent, well defined, sharp
carina extending up the middle, and the dorsal surface on each side of this
carina is distinctly concave. Anal pieces arranged in a double alternating series
almost exactly as in the last.

Arms (excepting in the anterior ray) bifurcating first on the sixth piece
above their origin on the second radials, the inner division being slightly
smaller than the other, and simple to the end, while the outer division bifur-
cates again on the seventh piece above, and a third time on the eighth piece
above the latter, the inner divisions being all simple. Arm pieces very short,
or two or three times as wide as long, and scarcely showing any tendency to
assume a wedge shaped outline ; each one with a small pinched or angular
projection on the middle of the dorsal side, giving the arms a subcarinated
apiiearance ; but these projections are not continuous, being separated by
notches at the sutures between the pieces, and a little inclined upward, so as
to impart to the dorsal side of the arms a serrated appearance, as seen in an
outline lateral view. Axillary pieces at all the bifurcations of the arms larger
than the other arm pieces, and more prominent and angular.

Surface of body plates merely convex, or somewhat tumid, and without
costte or carinte. Column very small, round or subpentagonal, and composed,
near the base, of nearly equal rather thin pieces, with a very minute central
perforation. Sutures between the first and second radial pieces widely
gaping.

Height of body, 0-07 inch; breadth, about 22 inch ; length of arms, about
0-60 inch.

In several respects this species agrees almost exactly with Z. rar/wsus, of
Hall, which has the same proportion?, with its arms bifurcating in exactly the
same way, and composed of similar short pieces, showing no tendency to a
weilge formed outline. On comparison with the original typical specimen of
that species, however, now before us, the species under consideration is found
to differ in having its second radial pieces each provided with a sharp, strongly
defined mesial carina, and the surface on each side of the carina distinctly
coucave, instead of having these pieces merely obtusely rounded. The same
or a similar difference is also seen in the arm pieces, each of which is provided
with one or more little projections on the dorsal side, instead of being smoothly

1869.]

152 PEOCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

rounded or somewhat flattened, as in Z. ramosus. If it were not for the fact
that the tjpical ?[>eeimen of Z. ramosi/s has the surface well preserved, we
would be led to think it might possibly have possessed the sharp carina of the
second radials, and the projecting points of the arm pieces, seen in the species
under consideration, and that they might have been removed by accidental
abrasion. The fact, however, that it has the surface of its arms, second radi-
als and other parts so well preserved as to show the original fine, delicate
granulations over the whole, demonstrates that it could never have possessed
the characters mentioned in the species we have here described ; and as we
have never seen varieties of a species, in this or any of the allied groups, dif-
fering to this extent in such characters, we can but regard the ditferences as
being specific.

It will be observed that the character of the arm and second radial pieces,
mentioned as distinguishing this species from Z. ramosus, also occur in the
species described in this paper under the name Z. scolind. That species, how-
ever, differs from this in having its first radials and subradial plates strongly
costate, while its arms are jjroportionally longer and ditt'er in being somewhat
serrated on each side. It also differs in having two arms, instead of only one,
from the anterior ray, as in this, and more divisions in its arms, which divisions
are given off at greater intervals.

Locality and position. Burlington group, at Burlington, Iowa. Lower Car-
boniferous. Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

Zeacrinus LYRA, M. and W.

Body short obconical, or expanding very rapidly from the column to the top
of the first radial pieces, where it is about twice as wide as high. Base not
concave but somewhat projecting, and about one-third as high as wide ; trun-
cated near three fourths its breadth by the slightly concave facet for the
attachment of the column. Basal pieces presenting a small pentagonal facet
above the column, two or three times as wide as long, with lateral margins so
short as to appear nearly triangular. Subradial pieces of moderate size, about
as wide as long, three hexagonal and two on the anal side heptagonal. First
radial pieces generally about twice as large as the subradials, near once and a
half as wide as long, and all pentagonal, with the upper side equaling the
entire breadth. Second radial pieces of very nearly the same size and form as
the first, though the fifth angle and sloping sides are of course above instead of
below; each supporting two arms, all around. Anal plates nearly all hexago-
nal, and, as usual, ari'anged in a double alternating series, the first resting
between the superior sloping sides of two of the subradials, under one side of
the first radial on the right, and connecting above the middle on the left, with
another resting on the superior truncated side of one of the heptagonal subra-
dials, and joining the first radial on the left. Above these the others extend
up to connect with the proboscis (so called).

Arms all distinctly rounded, and after their origin on the second radial
pieces each bifurcating first on the fifth, sixth, seventh or eighth piece, above
which the outer division bifurcates (or gives off an arm en the inner side)
twice or three times at more or less nearly equal distances, all the inner arms
continuing simple throughout their entire length, and equaling the outer divi-
sions in thickness. Arm jjieces short and very distinctlj' wedge formed, each
having a moderately stout tentacle at its larger end, along the inner lateral
margins of the arms; axillary or bifurcating pieces a little larger than the
others, but not more convex. Tentacles composed of joints about twice as long
as wide.

Body plates not convex, and merely separated by linear sutures, which are
not gaping even between the first and second radials ; entire surface more or
less granular.

Height of body to top of first radials, about 0-25 inch ; breadth, about 0-50
inch ; length of arms, apparently nearly 2 inches.

[July,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 153

This species is related to Potcriocrbws hursxformis, of White, which has its
body formed exactly as in Foteriocrinus, with its arms and primary radials pre-
senting all the characters of Zeacrhnis, as was noticed by Dr. White ; thus
showing, with the species under consideration and some others, that Zeacnnus
can scarcely be regarded as more than a subgenus under Poteriocrinites. The
form that we have here described diifers, however, specifically from Dr. White's
species, in having its body proportionally shorter and smaller. Its arms also
differ in being very distinctly rounded instead of fiat, while its anterior ray
supports two arras directly on the second radial piece, as in all the other rays,
instead of having the first bifurcation in that ray on the fourth piece.

The specimens are not in a condition to show much of the ventral prolonga-
tion, but one of them shows that it is very nearly as long as the arms, and
somewhat expanded and crowned with short spines at the upper extremity.

Locality and position. Upper division of the Burlington group, at Burlington,
Iowa. Lower Carboniferous. No. 319 of Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

Genus ACTINOCRINITES, Miller.

In the second volume of the Illinois Reports, published in 1866, after admit-
ting as distinct genera from Aciinocrinites the groups 3Iegistocrinus, Agaricocri-
nus, Amphoracrinus and some others, we also separated under the name Stroto-
crinus a group of remarkable American Carboniferous species, of which Acti-
nocr. perumbrosun, Hall, was regarded as the type. At the same time that we
made this separation there were amongst the collections before us specimens
of another allied type, in regard to the proper disposition of which we were in
considerable doubt. These belong to the group of which A. vmtricosus, Hall,
may be regarded as an example. We readily observed that while in some of
their characters they agree most nearly with Slrotocrimis, that in others they
seemed to be more closely allied to Actinocrinites, and at one time we were
very much inclined to the opinion that a strictly systematic definition of all the
different genera of the Crinoidea would require their separation as a distinct
intermediate genus. Wishing to avoid disturbing the existing nomenclature,
however, as much as possible, we finally concluded to place this group pro-
visionally as a section under Aciinocrinites.

Since that time we have had an opportunity to study an extensive series of
these and the allied groups, in Mr. Wachsmuth's collection, and have been led
to the conclusion that if this type does not form a separate genus, holding an
intermediate position between Strotocrinus and Actinocrinit€s,^lhvii it should be
placed as a distinct subgenus under the former. Adopting this view, and ad-
mitting, as we have elsewhere done, that the Batocrimts and Dorgcrinus groups
should stand as distinct genera, the genus Actinocrinites vtoxxlA be left to include
two sections ;* that is, the typical forms, such as Miller's A. triacontadactylus
and A. polydactylus, and de Koninck's A. slellaris, A. diversiis, A. deornatus and
A. armatiis, with various others ; and the group including A. inullihraehiatus
and its allies.

The typical forms of Aciinocrinites, which agree almost exactly with all the
other genera mentioned, as well as with the A. muUibrachiatus group, in the
number and arrangement of the pieces composing the walls of the body below
the bifurcations of the rays, are distinguished by the following characters,
never found all combined in any one of the other groups :

In the first place, they have the arm bases, or brachial pieces, and adjacent
parts (sometimes as far in as the third primary radials) grouped together so as
to form five more or less protuberant 1 obes,f and so far as yet known to us, at

• There are doubtless other sections, but we allude here to the forms we have had an

opportunity to study.

t Since these remarks were in type, we observe, on consulting Miller's Nat. Hist, of the
Crinoidea, to which we had not previously had access for many years past, that he seems
to have confounded two very distinct forms under the one name of his typical species,
Actinocrinites triacontadactylus. One of these, if correctly ie2>resented on plati I of his work,

1869.]

154 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

least a part of the arms bifurcating after becoming free, and always each com-
posed of a single series of pieces below each bifurcation, as well as generally
for some little distance above. They also combine with these characters a
more or less produced central or subcentral tube or proboscis, and have the
second primary radial pieces nearly always normally hexagonal.

The other group represented by A. multihrachiaius differs from the typical
forms of Actinocrinites in having the arm bases arranged in a nearly or quite
continuous series all around, and the arms wfrer bifurcating tf/"if«r becoming
free, as well as in nearly always having normally the same number of arms in
each ray. The species of this group also more generally have the vault higher
in proportion to the body below the arms, but there are a few exceptions to
this in both groups. In a few species of typical Actinocriles the arm bases are
less distinctly grouped, and not so protuberant as in others, but so far as we
have yet seen they can readily be distinguished by the structure and bifurca-
tions of their arms, where specimens retaining them can be seen, and nearly
always, even where the arms are broken away, by their wider interradial and
anal sinuses and other peculiarities of general physiognomy, apparent enough
to the eye but difficult to express in words.

In having the arm bases arranged in a nearly or quite continuous series all
around, and the arms never bifurcating after becoming free, the A. muUihra-
chiatus group agrees with Bafocrinun, but it differs from that group in having
longer arms in proportion to the length of the proboscis, which in Batocrinus,
when entire, protrudes from one-fourth to one-half its entire length beyond the
extreme length of the arms.* They also difter from Balocrinus and agree with
Actinocrinites in nearly always (perha[)S always normally) having the second
radial pieces hexagonal instead of quadrangular, while their body plates are
more or less sculptured (generally strongly so) into radiating costre, usually
consisting of a single rib for each side of each plate, instead of having the
plates even and smooth, merely convex or tumid. In short, the species of these
two groups can be distinguished at a glance from specimens even showing the
body only.f

As thus limited, the genus Actinocrinites would include, along with a number
of foreign species, the following American Carboniferous forms :J

1. Actinocrinites, Miller. Section (a).

A. verrucosus {= A. asterius, McC), A. chloris (= A. ienuisculptus, McC), A.
lobatus, A. Ilumboldtianus, A. jugosus, A. pernodosus, A. unicostalus, A. Loivei,
A. hrojitcs, &c., cff Hall. Also, A. Yandelli and A. multiradiatus, Shumard ; A.
Wachsmtithi^ White; and A. scitulus, M. and W. (= A. riisticus, Hall, and ^4.
Sillimani, M. and W.); as well as our A. penicillus and A. delicatus, of this
paper, and A. Jndianensis, L. and C, with perhaps several others with which
we are not very well acquainted.^

2. Section (b).

A. multibrachiatus, A. proboscidialis,\\ A. cselatus, A. clavus, A. limibrachiatus,

must belong to an entirely different species from that figured under the same name on his
plate II, as it is represented as having its arm-bases and contiguous parts, not forming five
widely separated protuberant lobes, but arranged more like those in the American section
represented by such forms as A. multil>racltiutus, though its arms clearly bifurcate after
becoming tree.

* See figs. 1 and 2, pi. 11, Iowa Geo'l Report, vol. 1, pt. ii.

f See pi. X, fig. 10, Iowa Geol. Report, vol. 1, pt. ii. For other examples of this group see
figs. 13 & 14 same plate, where they may be compared with figs. 7 & 9 of the same plate,
representing two species of true Actinocrinus, with arm bases grouped into 5 protuberant
lobes.

J There are ^ome other described .American species not mentioned in this list, which is
only intended to include such species as we have had an opportunity to study.

^ t)r. Shumard's A. concimis belongs here, if not a Stfganocriniis. We have not yet seen a
specimen of it showing the rays far enough out to decide positively to which of these
groups it belongs.

Ij A. quatemartus, A. quaternarius var. spiniferus and A. Themis. HM, are believed to be va-
rieties of his A. proboscidians.

[July,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 155

A. ovaius, A. securus, A. opusculus, A. excerphis, A. infrequens, A. t/uilia, A. the-
tis, A. tfioas, A. locellus, A. sexarmatus, A. reiiculalus, all described under Ac/i-
nocrimis by Prof. Hall. Also, A. Fosleri and A. Ilurdianus, McChesney, and our
A. longus of this paper.

It is worthy of note that all the known Burlington species of this group came
from the Lower Burlington beds, as has been determined by Mr. Wachsniuth,
by careful observations continued through many years.

ACTINOCRINITES. Section (a).

ACTINOCRINITES PENICILLUS, M. & W.

Body small, inversely campanulate, or with sides expanding rapidly from the
truncated base to the secondary radius, which with the brachial pieces curve
a little outward. Base much depressed, or about four times as wide as high,
broadly truncated and but slightly concave below; margin more or less ex-
panded horizontally, and deeply notched at the sutures. First radial plates
comparatively rather large, and about twice as wide as high. Second radials
near half as large as the first, about twice as wide as high. Third radials a
little larger than the second, wider than long, and pentagonal iu form, the
lateral margins being short, each supporting on each of its superior sloping
sides a secondary radial of about its own size, which in its turn supports two
free arms.

Anal pieces unknown above the second range ; first one smaller (particu-
larly narrower) than the first radials, and supporting two others of its own size
in the next range. Interradial pieces three to five in each space ; first one as
large as the second radials, hexagonal in form, and bearing upon its upper
sloping sides two smaller pieces, above which there is generally one or two
minute pieces.

Arms free from their origin on the secondary radials, and composed below
of slender rounded pieces, the first of which is about twice as long as wide,
and more or less constricted in the middle ; beyond this the lateral arm on
each side of each ray is simple, with its second piece like the first, and fol-
lowed by two or three other shorter wedge formed pieces before passing into a
double series of small, alternately arranged pieces. Inner arms of each ray
bifurcating on the first piece, and one of the subdivisions in one or both bifur-
catiHg again on the first piece, thus making from seven to eight arms to each
ray, or from thirty-five to forty in the entire series. The single piece below
and the first above each division, is slender, rounded, and more or less con-
stricted, and generally two or three wedge formed pieces follow the latter be-
fore the commencement of the double series of alternating pieces, above which
the arms are a little wider and of moderate length. Vault unknown ; probos-
cis very slender at the upper end, and apparently of about the same length as
the arms.

Surface of all the body plates deeply excavated at the corners, and promi-
nent in the middle, the prominence of the first radials usually forming a
transverse ridge, from which a single more or less defined vertical ridge as-
cends the second radials to the middle of the third, from which it bifur-
cates and continues to the secondary radials.

Height of body to the top of secondary radials, about 0-22 inch; breadth at
the top of secondary radials, 0-40 inch ; length of arms if straightened out,
about 0-*?0 inch; breadth of do. at the widest part near the middle, 0-05
inch.

This little species is allied to A. lucina, Hall, which, before seeing specimens
showing the arms, we had supposed to belong to the A. multibraehiatiis group,
but which is a true Actinocrinites. Our species differs, however, in having
the arms more frequently and ditferently bifurcating, so as to make from
thirteen to fifteen more in the entire series. Its arms also difier in not being
subspinous on their margins.

1869.]

156 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Locality and position. Lovrer Burlington beds of Lower Carboniferous, Bur-
lington, Io^ya. No. 38 of Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

AcTiNOCRiNiTEs DELiCATcs, M. and W.

Bod}' small, subturbinate, or widening rather rapidly from the somewhat
truncated base to the top of the third radials. Base depressed, or about four
or five times as wide as high, with slightly expanded margins notched at the
sutures. First radial pieces of moderate size, a little wider than long, and,
as usual, two heptagonal and three hexagonal. Second radial pieces a little
smaller than the first, more or less regularly hexagonal, the superior lateral
sides, however, being sometimes very short. Third radials about as large as
the second, normally pentagonal, but sometimes with the lateral angles trun-
cated so as to give them an irregular heptagonal outline. Secondary radials
resting one upon each superior sloping side of each third primary radial,
which they exceed in length ; more or less prominent, curving outward, and
generally constricted and rounded in the middle, though not entirely free
from the walls of the body, excepting on the upper side ; supporting on each
of their superior (free) sloping sides the first divisions of the arms. First
interradial pieces about as large as the first radials, hexagonal, and support-
ing two smaller pieces in the next range, which connect with others above,
belonging apparently more properly to the vault. First anal piece nearly as
large as the first radials, heptagonal in form, and supporting in the second
range two pieces, one of which (in the typical specimeu) is as large as the
first ; above these there are four or five smaller irregular pieces in the third
range, and above the latter others belonging apparently to the vault.

Arms slender, rounded, and composed below of distinctly constricted pieces
longer than wide, and, after the first division on the secondary radials, the
inner ones bifurcating on the second piece, and one or both of these subdi-
visions divide again on the second piece, above which they still continue to
be composed of a single range of rounded pieces for a short distance, and
then pass gradually through a few wedge-formed pieces into a double series
of alternating pieces ; above this they are all a little stouter than below, and
show a very slight tendency to become somewhat flatter toward their upper
extremities. So far as can be seen, the two outer arms of each ray are simple
from their origin on the secondary radials, and composed of a single series
of rounded and constricted pieces as far up as the last bifurcations of the
other arms ; consequently there appear to be eight ultimate divisions, or
arms, to each ray. (Vault unknown.)

Surface apparently minutely granular, and with a small, more or less de-
fined ridge extending from the base up the primary radials to the third radi-
al, on which it bifurcates and sends a branch to the base of each of the two
main arms. On the first radials, as well as the anals, there is also some ten-
dency to send off an obscure ridge across from one to another, on each side.
None of the body plates are tumid, though they are generally very slightly
convex.

Height of body from bottom of base to the top of secondary radials, 16 ;
breadth, about 0-30 inch.

This species is related to A. chloris, Hall, but is much smaller, and differs
in having its body, belo\f the arms, merely rather rapidly expanding, with
nearly straight sides, instead of being hemispherical. Its arms also bifurcate
differently. In the choris, for instance, they all (or at any rate, the inner
ones), after their origin on the secondary radials, bifurcate once on the first
piece beyond, while in our species the inner arms bifurcate on the second
piece, and the outer of those subdiv.sions again on the second piece.

Locality a7id position. — Upper division of the Burlington member of the
Lower Carboniferous at Burlington, Iowa. Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

[July.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 157

ACTINOCRINITES. Section {b).
AcTiNOCRiNiTES LONGUS, M. and W.

Body rather elongate-obconic below the arms, the sides expanding gradu-
ally, with a moderately convex outline from the base to the tertiary radial
pieces, which, with the brachial pieces, curve very slightly outward. Base
about twice and a half as wide as high, not thickened or expanded below,
and but very slightly notched at the sutures; facet for the reception of the
column large and moderately concave, with a rather large central perforation.
First radials comparatively large, very nearly or quite as long as wide.
Second radials scarcely half as large as the first, about as wide as long,
quadrangular, pentagonal or unequally six-sided. Third radials of about the
same size as the second, pentagonal, hexagonal, or heptagonal, and each
bearing on its superior sloping sides two secondary radials of near its own
size, each of which supports, on its outer sloping upper side, brachial pieces,
leading to an arm, and on its inner side, above, a small tertiary radial giving
origin to two arms, thus making three arms to each main division, and six to
each ray, or thirty to the entire series. (Arms unknown.)

Anal plates five or six, the first being of the same size as the smaller first
radials, hexagonal in form, and a little longer than wide ; second anals two,
about two-thirds as large as the first, and irregularly heptagonal or octago-
nal ; above these there are two smaller pieces in the third range, and one
or two still smaller pieces above the latter, the upper one being barely large
enough to separate the posterior lateral brachial pieces of the two posterior
rays. First interradial pieces about half as large as the first radials, heptag^o-
nal, and supporting two smaller pieces in the second range, above which there
are one or two still smaller pieces in the third, and a minute piece over the
latter, wedged in between the brachial pieces. In each interaxillary space
there are usually two intercalated pieces, the lower of which is sometimes as
large as one of the tertiary radials, while the upper is very small, and wedged
in between the brachial pieces.

Vault conical, and nearly three-fourths as high as the body below the
arms ; composed of irregular pieces of moderate size, some of which project
in the form of small pointed nodes or short spines, passing gradually into a
rather large subcentral proboscis.

Surface of all the body plates rather distinctly convex, but not properly tumid,
and showing but the faintest traces of an effort to form, on some of the small-
er pieces, an obscure radiating ridge near each side. In most cases, how-
ever, these are entirely obsolete, and the plate seems to be merely evenly
convex.

Height of body to arm bases, \-2) inch; breadth of do. at arm bases, 1-40
inch ; height of vault, about 0-80 inch.

In the structure of its body, as well as in its arm formula, this species
agrees with Actinocrinus clavus^ of Hall. It differs, however, greatly in form,
as well as in the surface characters of its body plates, being rather elongate
obconical below the arms, instead of " very broadly subturbinated, and
spreading more rapidly above the third radial plates;" while its body plates
are merely convex, instead of being " elevated into strong angular nodes, some
sometimes marked by low ridges on the lower part," and by "strong angular
ridges " on the upper part.

Its elevated conical vault, passing gradually into the nearly central pro-
boscis, and narrow obconic body below the arms, give it a peculiar fusiform
outline. In the nature of its vault it resembles quite nearly A. coslatus of
Hall, from which, however, it differs widely in other respects.

Locality and position. — Lower beds Burlington group of Lower Carbonife-
rous, Burlington, Iowa. Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

1869.]

158 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Genus STROTOCRINUS, M. and W. 1866 *

Extending the genus Strotocrinus so as to include, as already suggested, the
Act. ventricosus group as a subgenus, we will have, first, the typical urn-
shaped species, such as S. perumbrosus and S. liratus, with the structure of
Actinocrinites up to the divisions of the rays, but with the body comparatively
long and narrow below, and the secondary and other succeeding supplement-
ary radials, brachial and intermediate pieces, connected laterally all around,
and spreading out horizontally far beyond the limits of the body, so as to
form, with the flat or much depressed vault, a broad, more or less distinctly
ten-angled disc, from the margins of which the numerous long, slender arras
arise, without bifurcating after becoming free.f Indeed, with rare exceptions,
the rays can scarcely be said to bifurcate, properly, after the division on the
third primary radials, though each main division continues on out, throwing
off alternately on each side brachial pieces in close contact with each other,
until, at last, it terminates in a single free arm. Each of the arms commences
abruptly as a double series of small alternating pieces immediately on the
last fixed brachial piece, without an intermediate series of free single pieces
extending entirely across. Some of the species, such as S. perumbrosus, have
but a very small simple opening situated subcentrally, or more or less excen-
trically towards the anal side, and penetrating the flattened vault obliquely,
so as to be directed forward or away from the anal side ; while others, like
S. Z/ra/ws, have a long erect, subcentral tube, or so-called proboscis, sometimes
recurved at the end. The column is known, at least in the species provided
with a proboscis, to be peculiar in being composed of very thin segments, a
part of which, at regular intervals, project out beyond the others, and send
up and down, at equal distances all around, five external, thickened processes
or ribs, apparently as a natural provision to give it strength, without destroy-
ing its flexibility.

Then we have the Act. ventricosus group, which not only agrees with the S.
pertwibrosus section of Strotocrinus in having merely a very small subcentral
or excentric opening in the vault, without any traces of a proboscis, but also,
to a considerable extent, in the manner in which the subdivisions of the rays
are given off," but differs in having these subdivisions not in contact so as
to form a disc, but divided by narrow interradial, anal, axillary, and some-
times interbrachial sinuses, the former of which often extend quite in to the
body. The species of this group also diff'er from the typical forms of Stroto-
crinus in having the body shorter below the arms, and the vault generally
more ventricose, and provided with external furrows radiating from the mid-
dle to the anal and interradial sinuses. So far as yet known, the species of
this type have rather stouter and less numerous arms than we see in Stroto-
crinns proper, but generally more than we see in Actinocrinites. In both groups
of Strotocrinus the arms are, as in Actinocrinites, provided with numerous pin-
nule, or so-called tentacles, but here they seem to be always armed with mi-
nute spines directed more or less obliquely upward from their upper margins.

From Actinocri7iites the A. ventricosus group not only differs in being without
any traces of a proboscis, but in having its ventricose, furrowed vault com-
posed of numerous minute pieces; and the divisions of its rays, although not
forming a continuous disc as in Strotocrinus proper, not grouped into five
lobes. Its arms also differ in never bifurcating after becoming free. For
this group we propose the name Pkysetocrinus (^Da-xToc, puffed up ; xpivov, a
lily, in allusion to the ventricose vault of the typical species, Act. ventricosus,
Hall.)t

The genus Strotocrinus, as here defined, would include the following spe-
cies, all peculiar to the lower Carboniferous rocks of America :

♦Second vol. Illinois Report, p. 18S, 1860.

+ Some of the species have as many as seventy to eighty arms.

J Iowa Geological Report, vol. 1, part PalaeonU, pi. 11, tig. 6, a b,

[July,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 159

1. — Strotocrinus, M. and W. (proper.)

Section (a). Species without a proboscis. — S. periimbrosus* S. recalls and -S^.
gli/plus, all described under Actinocrinus by Prof. Hall.

Section (b). Species with a proboscis. — S . agilops, S. rudis, S. liratus, S.
w7ibrosus,f S. tenuiradiatus, S. tholus and S. insculpms, all described by Prof.
Hall under Actinocrinus. It may also probably include his Act. glans. His A.
clavis is believed to be synonymous with his iS. xgilops (sp.), and his Act.
subumbrosus a variety of his S. liratus (sp.)

2. Subgenus Phtsktocrinps, M. and W.

r. ventricosus, P. cancellatus^ P. ornatus and P. reticulatus, all described by
Prof. Hall nnder Actinocrinus ; a.\so P. subventricosus, described by Professor
McChesney under Actinocrinus. The proposed species senarius, Hall, is be-
lieved to be a variety of his A. ornatus.

In the single character of having only a simple opening in the vault, with-
out the slightest indications of a proboscis, the Physeiocrinus group would
agree more nearly with the typical section (a) of Strotocrinus than the section
(b) does, but in all other characters it is more distinct.

Section (C).
Strotocrinus ectypcs, M. and W.

Body depressed, very rapidly expanding to the third radials, above which
the seconaary and tertiary radials and brachial pieces curve out horizon-
tally. Base about twice and a half as wide as high, truncated, slightly con-
cave, and not expanded or thickened below, but with small nodes around the
margin of the under side, placed one at the termination of each of the costte.
First radial pieces wider than high, two heptagonal and three hexagonal.
Second radials one-half to two-thirds as large as the first, wider than high,
hexagonal, or in part (sometimes) pentagonal, the superior lateral sides
being short. Third radials wider than long, pentagonal, hexagonal, or irreg-
ularly heptagonal, and supporting on each superior sloping side a secondary
radial, each of which gives origin to brachial pieces leading to an arm on
the outer side, and supports on its inner sloping side a tertiary radial, which
gives origin to two arms, thus making three arms to each main division, or
six to each ray, and thirty to the entire series.

First anal piece a little longer than wide, hexagonal, and supporting two
pieces of about half its own size in the next range : between the superior
sloping inner sides of these there is one small piece, and above these three
or four other small pieces, one or two of which extend up so as to separate
slightly the outer brachial pieces of the adjacent rays. Interradial pieces
four or five to each area, the upper of which is narrow and extends up so as
to separate slightly the brachial pieces above. In each interaxillary space
there is usually an elongated intercalated piece, sometimes large enough to
truncate slightly the upper margin of the third primary radial, while it con-
tinues upward so as to separate the brachial pieces above.

Vault much depressed, and composed of numerous, irregular, slightly con-
vex pieces of moderate size, and provided with a rather stout subcentral pro-
boscis, composed near the base of unequal pieces, some of which are distinct-
ly protuberant.

Surface of all the body plates moderately convex, or sometimes a little
angular in the centre, and ornamented with distinct radiating costte, extend-
ing from the middle to the sides of each piece, so as to divide the whole into
numerous triangles. These costae are also more or less compound, so as to
form a secondary or (below the middle of the first radials) a tertiary series of
smaller, less defined triangles within those formed by the principal costae.

*See vol. ii, Geological Report Illinois, p. 188, 1866.
t Iowa Report, part 11, pi. ii, fig. 3, a b.

18690

160 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Height of body to horizon of arm openings, 0-70 inch ; breadth at same, 1-60
inches.

This species resembles in the sculpturing of its body plates S. fflt/ptui, Hall
(sp.), but has a more depressed body, and is also at once distinguished by
having a proboscis, while the S. glyplus belongs to the section of the genus
with merely a simple opening in the vault. From S. xgilops it will readily be
distinguished by its shorter, more rapidly expanding body and less numerous
arms, as well as by its different sculpturing. Although its brachial pieces
are a little separated over the anal, interradial, and axillary spaces, there are
no distinct sinuses at these points in the margins of the disc, as the little
intercalated pieces separating the brachial pieces at these places extend out
as far as the latter, so th\t when the arms are removed the outline of the disc
presents only an obscurely subpeutagonal outline.

Locality and position. Lower division Burlington beds of Lower Carbonif-
erous, at Burlington, Iowa. No. 59 of Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

Strotocrinus ? ASPERRiMus, M. and W.

Body under medium size, urn-shaped, being a little wider at the top
of the third radials than high, with the secondary radials and succeeding
parts spreading out horizontally, but divided by narrow anal and interradial
sinuses quite in to the body ; sides ascending with a gradual expansion to the
top of the third radials, with a moderately convex outline below the middle.
Base about twice and a half as wide as high, not thickened or spreading
below, but projecting downward a little around the column, in the form of
little nodes, formed by deep notches at the sutures and smaller ones between.
First radials generally wider than long. Second radial pieces somewhat
smaller than the first, wider than long, some hexagonal and others pentago-
nal. Third radials a little smaller than the second, generally pentagonal and
bearing on each superior sloping side a secondary radial, each of which sup-
ports one or more brachial pieces, leading to an arm on its outer sloping
side and a small tertiary radial on its inner, each of which evidently sup-
ported two other pieces above, one or both of which were probably brachi-
als. If both sides bore brachials it would make six arms to the ray, but if
one side bore an axillary piece it would make eight to the ray or forty in the
whole series.

First anal piece of about the same size as the smaller first radials, slightly
longer than wide, hexagonal in form, and succeeded by two smaller hexago-
nal or heptagonal pieces in the second range, above which there seems to be
about four other smaller pieces Subradials three or four to an area, the
first one about as large as the second radials, hexagonal or heptagonal in
form, and supporting two smaller pieces in the next range ; above this there
seems to be one, or possibly sometimes two other smaller pieces. Axillary
spaces sometimes occupied by one or two small pieces.

Vault much depressed, or rising little above the horizon of the arms, com-
posed of irregular small and moderate sized pieces, and provided with a
nearly central proboscis, which in the typical specimen is composed of very
small pieces at the base, and a little inclined to one side.

Surface of body plates all prominent and angular in the middle, and pro-
vided with well defined, sharp radiating costse, which are compound on the
first radial and first anal pieces, but generally consist of a single rib, extend-
inf from the middle to each of the sides of the others. The mesial promi-
nence on each of the first and second radials is pinched out so as to form a
prominent sharp, transversely arranged ridge, while on each of the smaller
plates it is a rounded, rather pointed node, the whole presenting a very rough
appearance.

Height of body ta the horizon of the arms, 0-74 inch ; do. to top of vault,
0-88 inch ; greatest breadth at the top of third radials, 0-80 inch.

In general form and surface markings this species resembles the following,

[July,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 161

but its body is more spreading above and it has ten or more arms less, while
its vault is much more depressed and provided with a proboscis. It seems
to bear much the same relations to the section (b) of the genus Stroioc7-inus
that the subgenus Physetocrimts bears to the typical forms of Strotocrimts.

Locality and posUion. Burlington Limestone of the Lower Carboniferous at
Quincy, Illinois.

Subgenus PHYSETOCRLVUS, M. and W.

Strotockinus (Physetocrinus ?) ASPER, M. and W.

Body somewhat urn-shaped, being obconical below, with nearly straight,
gradually expanding sides, and rather ventricose vault. Base about ihree
times as wide as high, truncated below and angular, though not thickened or
properly expanded around the lower margin, which is so broadly and deeply
notched at the sutures as to present a trilobate appearance as seen from be-
neath. First radials wider than high, and as usual two heptagonal and three
hexagonal. Third radials of the same size as the second, and bearing on each
of their superior sloping sides a somewhat smaller secondary radial, each of
which bears on its outer sloping side a series of bracliial pieces, leading to
an arm, while on its inner sloping side it supports a small tertiary radial,
bearing on its inner side brachial pieces leading to an arm, and on its outer
a small quaternary radial, bearing on its outer side a brachial piece, and on
its inner another axillary piece, giving origin to two arms, thus making, as
far as can tie determined, ten arms to each ray, or fifty to the entire series.

First anal piece as long as the first radials, but narrower, heptagonal in
form, and supporting one small piece over its middle and a larger one on each
upper sloping side in the second range; in the third range there are three,
in the fourth two pieces, and above these, three smaller pieces extending up
so as to connect with the vault. First interradial pieces of about the size of
the third radials, hexagonal in form, and bearing two smaller pieces in the
second range, above which there are some five or six very small, irregular
pieces, some of the upper of which extend up and connect with the vault.

Vault rather ventricose, or more than one-third as high, near the middle, as
the body below the horizon of the arms ; composed of irregular nearly flat
pieces of moderate size ; opening apparently simple, at the highest point
atiout one-third of the distance from the middle towards the posterior side.

All the body plates are protuberant and sharply angular in the middle, the
angular part, especially on the larger plates, forming a sharp transverse ridtje.
From the under side of this transverse ridge two or three others extend
downward on the first radial and first anal pieces, so as to connect with oth-
ers on the basal pieces. The second and third radial pieces have each about
three small pointed nodes, arranged transversely, while from the third radials
narrow ridges extend up to the secondary radials, thence up all the branches
to each arm base. All the smaller body plates also have a more or less pro-
jecting angular point in the middle.

Notwithstanding the number of arms, the narrow anal and interradial
sinuses extend in so as to divide the disc quite in to the body, while even the
interbrachial sinuses extend nearly in to the body. The column is of mode-
rate thickness near the base, where it is round and composed of thin pieces
with shrirp projecting edges, pierced by a nearly round central canal.

Height to horizon of arras, 73 inch ; breadth across at the interradial
sinuses, 0-90 inch ; height of vault, 046 inch.

This species has its plates sculptured in nearly the same way, and present-
ing much the same roughened appearance seen in S. ffli/ptus, Hall (sp.), but
it differs materially from that and all of the othfr species known to us, that
resemble it in other respects, in having deep interradial and anal sinuses in
its disc, as in the subgenus Pht/xetocrinu's, with which it also appears to agree
in its ventricose vault. It is the only species known to us, however, appa-

1869.] 11

"162 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

rently belonging to that group, that has its body so narrow and produced
below, and its body plates presenting the style of angularly sculpturing. If
the interradial and anal sinuses of its disc were filled with intercalated pieces
it would present nearly all the characters of a typical Strotocrinus. Conse-
quently it may be regarded as a connecting link between these groups, and
with a few others shows that they cannot be properly separated more thaa
subgenerically.

Locality and position. Upper beds Burlington group of Lower Carbonifer-
ous, at Burlington, Iowa. No. 67 of Mr. Waehsmuth's collection.

Strotocrinus (Physetocrincs) dilatatus, M. and "W.

Body rapidly expanding, with nearly straight sides, from the base to the
secondaiy radials, thence spreading more abruptly to the brachial pieces,
which are directed out nearly horizontally, and so closely crowded all around
as to come very nearly, or sometimes quite, in contact over the anal and in-
terradial areas. Base about three times as wide as high, not thickened or
expanded below, but provided with a large round perforation. First radial
pieces comparatively large, generally wider than high, two heptagonal and
three liexagonal. Second radials only about half as large as tlie first, some
of them quadrangular, and others with one or both of the upper lateral angles
a little truncated, so as to make them properly pentagonal or hexagonal.
Third radials larger than the second, wider than long, pentagonal, hexagonal
or heptagonal, and supporting on each superior sloping side a secondary ra-
dial, each of which gives origin on its outer side to brachial pieces leading to
an arm, while on its inner side a tertiary radial gives origin to two arms in
all but the two posterior rays, where one or sometimes both bear on one side
another axillary piece, making seven or eigbt arms in each of these rays, or,
in the latter cases, thirty-four arms to the entire series.

First anal piece as large as the largest first radial pieces, and bearing above
iwo heptagonal or octagonal pieces of near its own size in the second range,
with three smaller pieces in the third range, and two or three minute pieces
over these, one of which is wedged in between the brachial pieces above.
Pirst interradial pieces generally larger than the second radials, heptagonal
■ or octagonal, and surmounted by two smaller pieces in the second range, over
vwhich we usually see one or two small pieces wedged up between the outer
brachial pieces of the rays on each side. There is also usually a small inter-
axillary piece between the secondary radials of each ray, but it seems never
large enough to extend down so far as to truncate the upper angle of auy of
the third primary radials.

Arms stout, increasing a little upward for a distance of two and a half
inches (as far as they can be seen in the specimen), each passing directly into
a double series of very short pieces, from their origin on the last brachial
piece.

Surface of body plates merely finely granular where ncjt worn, slightly
convex, with shallow indentations at their corners. Vault unknown.

Height of body to the top of tertiary radials, 0-75 inch ; breadth, about 1'33
inch ; breadth of arms two inches above their bases, 0-'20 inch.

This species is related to S. [Fhysetocr.) subventricosuH, McChesney (sp.), but
differs in having its bodj^ much more rapidly expanding, and proportionally
•wider above, while its tertiary and brachial pieces curve much more strongly
outward. It also differs in the relative size and form of its second radial pieces,
which are proportionally smaller, and generally quadrangular, or only with
the upper lateral angles slightly truncated, instead of being larger and regu-
larly hexagonaL Its arras are likewise stouter than those of McChesney's
species, judging from the brachial pieces seen in specimens of the latter,
while it has one or two arms more in each of the posterior rays. Its surface
markings are also different, but this is a very variable character in this group.

[July,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 163

Locality and position. Lower beds of the Burlington group. Lower Car-
boniferous. No. 58 of Mr. Wachsmulli's collection.

Genus MEGISTOCRIXUS, 0. and S., 1850.

The type upon which this genus was founded {M. Evansii, 0. and S.""*) has a
short, broad, cup shaped body, with a depressed vault, and sides moderately
expanded above, and rounded under below to the flat anchylosed base, which
is usually a little impressed, or less prominent than the first radial and first
anal pieces extending horizontally outward all around it so as to form a part
of the under side. In some species the base is not properly impressed, though
it can rarely be said to project be3'ond the surrounding next range of pieces.
The body plates are moderately thiciv, and separated by well defined, or rather
deep sutures, so as to present a more or less convex surface, without sculp-
turing or radiating costifi, though there are rarely small indentations at the
corners of some of the plates.

The nearly or quite flat vault is composed of unequal, irregular, more or less
tumid or convex pieces, of moderate size, the middle one sometimes rising into
a prominent, rather pointed node, that may be, in some cases, even developed
into a short spine. The opening is decidedly lateral, often penetrating the
anal side beloio the horizon of the arm bases; sometimes it is on the same ho-
rizon as the arm openings, or rarely slightly above them. It is never situated
in a thickened protuberance, however, as in Dori/crinus and Agaricocrinus, but
always shows thin, broken, abruptly- projecting edges, as if, when entire, it had
been produced into a short, slender tube, or so-called proboscis, projecting out
horizontally backward.

In the number and arrangement of the pieces composing the walls of the
body, up to the third radial pieces inclusive, this genus presents no essential
differences from Actinocrinus, with which it also agrees in having the arm bases
more or less grouped, or separated by interradial and anal spaces, and never
forming a continuous series all around, as in £atocrinus,f nor an ex])anded
disc, as in Strotocrinus. It not only differs from Actinocrinus proper, however,
in general physiognomy and the nature and position of the opening, but par-
ticularly in having its arms each composed of a double series of alternating
pieces beloiu all the bifurcations, as in Amphoracriiius, from which, however, it
differs widely in other respects. This peculiarity of having the arms each
composed of a double series of alternating pieces below as well as above the
bifurcations, is not only continued down to the body, but in some species each
division of the rays included as a part of the walls of the body, has the same
structure nearly one-fourth of the way down the side, to within one or two
pieces of the third primary radials.

The six or seven known true typical species of this genus form so natural a
group that the}' can be readily distinguished at a glance from the allied genera
such as Amphoracrimis, Agaricocrinus, Dorycrinus^ Civlocrinus, Strotocrinvs, &c.
There is, however, at least one, and probably two, known Carboniferous spe-
cies, standing as it were between Megistocrinus and Saccocrinus, and combining
the characters of both to such an extent that one of them (Act. (3Ipgist.)
Whitei, Hall) was referred by Prof. Hall to Megistocrinus (which he seems to
regard as a section or subgenus of Aclinocrinns), while the name of the other
was written by us, Actinocrinus [Saccocrinus ?) amplus,\ because we were con-

* Owen's Geol. Report, Wisconsin, Iowa and Minnesota, pi. V, A, fig. 3.

t We cannot believe that those remarkable truncated forms, with arm bases in contact
all around, and an erect subcentral proboscis, such as M. spinnsus, of Lyon (Proe. Philad.
Acad. N. S. Deer. 1861, pi. iv, fig. 7), really belong to Megistocrinus.

X It is possible, as already intimated, that this may not be distinct from Prof. Hall's spe-
cies Wtiilei ; but as it is larger and more robust, however, and has its body plates more con-
vex, and without the ridge seen extending up the radial series of the species \Vliite>\ whicti
also differs in some other details, and came from the upper part of the Burlington beds,
and ours from the lower, while scarcely any species of Crinoids are believed to be common

1869.]

164 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

vinced that it is not a true Actinocrinus, and believed it related to Saccocrinus.
From direct comparisons with Prof. Hall's t.ypical specimens of the species M.
Whitei, in the Museum of the University of Michigan, Professors Winchell and
Marcy were also led to refer Silurian species of Saccocrhnis to Megistocrinus.

The Silurian typical forms of Saccocriuus have the same arm structure, as
well as essentially the same arraug-ement of body plates, as ^legistocrinus, but
differ in having a much more elongated narrow body, composed of thin even
plates (without excavated sutures) and a protuberant obconic, instead of a
flat or impressed base, also a subcentral opening (or proboscis?) instead of a
decidedly lateral proboscidiform opening in the vault, ^lius presenting a deci-
dedly different general physiognomy from the typical Carboniferous forms of
Megistocrinus. If we had only the typical forms of these two groups to deal
with, there would be no difficulty iu separating theiu. The two species, or
varieties, Whitei audi ampins, however, are not so easily disposed of, since they
have the same thin smooth plates, without impressed sutures, seen in Saccocri-
nus, and nearly as protuberant a base, while their body is exactly intermediate
in form,* and their arm structure the same as in both of these groups, with which
the}' also equally agree in the number and arrangement of the body plates.
We have never seen a specimen of any of the Silurian species of Saccocrinus
showing the vault, but all the casts we have examined seem to show that it
was nearly flat, and had either a subcentral opening or proboscis, and no
traces of a decidedly lateral opening as in typical forms of Megistocrinus. A
specimen figured by Dr. Roemer iu his work on the Silurian fossils of Tennes-
see, shows the vault to be protuberant in the middle and provided M'ith an
opening there, with some a])pearance of being surrounded by the remains of
the base of a proboscis, though it may possibly be only a simple opening in a
prominence. In the Carboniferous species Whitei, as already stated, there is a
small subcentral opening in the depressed vault, without any traces of a pro-
boscis, and we can now scarcely doubt that this is the case with the amplus,
and the vault of both these species also differs from that of the typical Megis-
tocrinus in being composed of innumerable minute pieces.

Although there are a few points in regard to the relations between these
groups that we have not yet been able .entirely to clear up, we are, from all
the facts now known to us, inclined to believe that Saccocrinus should be
ranged as a subgenus under Megistocrinus. At any rate, if the species Whiiei
and amplus are to be included under Megistocrinus at all, we think they should
certainly be at least placed in a separate subgenus from the typical forms, and un-
til these questions can be more definitely settled from the study of more extensive
collections we prefer to retain for this subgenus the name Saccocrinus. With
these limits the genus Megistocrinus would include the following American Car-
boniferous forms :
1. Megistocrinus, Owen and Shumard, 1850.

Body short, broad and composed of rather thick convex pieces ; base flat,

to these two horizons, we are not entirely convinced that they are identical. All the spe-
cimens of the species, or variety, amplus we have seen are in a more or less crushed con-
dition, which in some instances caused the vault to protrude in such a way as to lead us
tu believe it provided with a central or subcentral proboscis, especially as several of the
specimens clearly show that it certainly has no traces of a lateral opening anywhere near
the anal side, as in the typical forms of Mrgistocrinus. Mr. Waehsmuth informs us. how-
ever, that he has recently found a specimen of the species Wliilei showing that it has a
small subcentral simple opening, much as in Strolocrinus, section (a), and from the close
relations of our amplus to that species, it is highly probable that it also has a similar open-
ing, without a proboscis.

* It is proper that we should also state here that there are considerable differences of
form among the Silurian spe<aes o{ Saccocrinus; for instance, we have now before us, from
the Niagara beds of Chicago, rude natural casts, having all the characters apparently of
undescribed species of this group, that are as short and broad as even the typical Carbo-
niferous forms of il/c(;(stocn«i«s; wliile specimens of Saccocrinus Christi/i. Hall, now before
us, from the Niagara beds of Waldron, Indiana, have the body presenting almost exactly
the form of the typical specimens of the Carboniferous species ^\'liHei, with which, through
the politeness of Prof. Winchell, we have been able to compare them.

[July,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 165

impressed, or scarcely more prominent than the first anal and first radial
pieces; vault composed of moderate sized convex pieces ; opening decidedly
lateral, produced in the form of a small short proboscis? and directed posteri-
orly.*

Megistocrinus Uvamii, Owen and Shumard ; M. plenus, 31. crasstts, White ; and
M. brevicomis and 31. snperUtus, described by Prof. Hall under Acnnocri7ius.-\
Also our M. parmrostris of this paper. All of which are from the Lower Car-
boniferous.

? 2. Subgenus Saccocrinus, Hall, 1852.

Body usually more elongated, with a protuberant base ; body plates thin,
even, or not convex ; vault composed of small or minute pieces, and provided
with a small subcentral simple opening, or possibly sometimes with a pro-
boscis.

Aclinocrinus {Megistocrinus) Whitei, Hall, and Act. {Saccocri7ius1) amplus, M.
and W.

Megistocrinus parvieostris, M. and "W.

Body rather small, of the usual short cup shape, about one-fourth wider than
high. Base nearly even with the surrounding first radial and first anal pieces.
First radials near one-third wider than lon^. Second radials a little smaller
than the first, hexagonal in form. Third radials as wide as the first, but
shorter, pentagonal or hexagonal, and each supporting on each superior slop-
ing side two brachial pieces in direct succession, upon the last of which rest iwo
or three series of double alternating pieces before the commencement of the free
arms, making two arm openings to each ray, or ten to the entire series. First
anal piece wider and a little shorter than the first radials, supporting three
smaller pieces in the next range, above which there are four or five in the
third, and five in the fourth ranges, which latter connect with numerous very
small pieces forming and surrounding the little short proboscidiform opening.
First interradials about as large as the second radials, and bearing two smaller
pieces in the second range, three in the third and two or three in the fourth,
with a few minute pieces in the latter.

Vault a little convex, composed of moderate sized, convex or tuberculiform
pieces, the largest and most prominent of which is in the middle, and the others
surrounding it, while a few minute pieces are intercalated between and around
the latter, particularly on the anal side. Anal opening in a short, little pro-
boscidiform protuberance, placed entirely below the horizon of the arm bases,
and directed a little obliquely downward. Body plates, excepting the small
ones, connected with the opening, all rather tumid, and separated by exca-
vated sutures, somewhat indented at the corners of the plates. Arms and col-
umn unknown.

Height of body to top of central node of the vault, 0-80 inch ; breadth, 0-96
inch ; height to arm openings, 0-58 inch ; do. to anal opening, 0-38 inch.

• This diagnosis is not intended as a full description of the genus, but merely to give
the characters distinguishing the typical section of the genus. If such Devonian specsies
as M. I'llus, Hall, and Acliiiocrinus abnormis, Lyon, belong to this genus, they could not be

Eroperly included in the typical section with the Carboniferous species. They have the
road depressed form of Mftjisloeriiius proper, but differ in having thin even body plates,
without impressed sutures, and the first, at least, in having a subcentral opening in the
vault, while the plates of the species u/»i'*r//u's are, when well preserved, ornamented, even
on the vault, with delicate radiating stria. From the appearance of its arm bases, in the
specimens we have seen, they would seem to have also been constructed differently from
those of the Carboniferous species, while the arm openings present the curious character
of being each divided by a transverse horizontal septum into two distinct openings, one
directly over the other. The anal opening in this species, however, is lateral, and much
like that of the typical Jfe5'i'.s-«f)cr(H;(s. In each of tlie four specimens of this species we
have seen, from "the original locality, there are only the usual five series of radials (three
each) instead of six, as in that from which Mr. Lyon's description was drawn up.
f Art. minor, Hall, is believed to be the same as his A. brevicomis.

1869.]

166 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

This species is apparently most nearly allied to M. hrevicornis. Hall (sp.),
but differs in having a greater number of ranges of brachial pieces included as
a jjart of tlie walls of the body, and these pieces wider and commencing as
double series farther down. Its opening is also placed decidedly lower even
than the proposed species Act. minor, of Hall, being distinctly below the hori-
zon of tlie lower edge of the arm openings, and nearly halfway down the side,
measuring from the highest part of the vault. Its larger vault pieces, except-
ing the middle ones, are also more prominent and pointed. Its body and
vault plates are all much more convex, its arm bases stouter, its vault less
depressed, and its opening decidedly lower than in M. superlatus, Hall (sp.).

Locality and position. Upper Burlington beds of the Lower Carboniferous
at Burlington^ Iowa. No. 161 of Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

Genus DORYCRINUS, Roemer.

DORYCRINUS CANALICDLATUS, M. and W.

Body under medium size, cup-shaped below the arms, rather rapidly ex-
panding from the lower margins of the first radials to the arm bases. Base
extremely short, its entire height merely consisting of the thickness of the
plates, subhexagonal in outline, with small lateral notches at the sutures,
scarcely projecting below the first radial and first anal piece ; facet tor the
attachment of the column occupying about half the breadth of the base, round
and rather deeply impressed. First radial plates about once and a half as wide
as high, all very nearly hexagonal, there being scarcely any perceptible angle
at the middle of those over the sutures of the base. Second radials scarcely
half as large as the first, about once and a half as wide as long, and presenting
the usual quadrangular outline. Third radials a little wider and shorter than
the second, pentagonal in form, and bearing on their upper sloping sides, in
the posterior rays, two slightly smaller secondary radials, each of which sup-
ports two brachial pieces, thus giving origin to four arm openings to each of
these two rays ; while in the anterior ray one side of the third radial merely
bears a series of branchial pieces leading to an arm, and its other side a ter-
tiary radial, supporting two brachial pieces, thus making three arms to this
ray. In both anterior lateral rays each third radial bears on each side two
brachial pieces in direct succession, making only two arm openings to each of
these rays, or fifteen to the entire series.*

Anal pieces about eight, below the horizon of the arm openings ; first one as
■wide as the first radials, and a little longer, heptagonal in form, and bearing
three smaller pieces in the second range, above which there are five smaller
pieces in the third range, connecting with others extending up to the opening
of the vault. First interradials nearly half as large as the first radials, hepta-
gonal in form, and bearing two smaller pieces in the second range, above
which one or two small pieces intervene to separate the brachial pieces, and
connect with the vault.

Vault about two-thirds as high above the arm openings as the height of the
body below, provided with a single rather pointed and prominent central node
that may be in some instances developed into a short spine. Opening with
margins a little projecting and situated in a slightly impressed area above the
horizon of the arm openings.

Body plates convex, separated by deeply canaliculated sutures, and rough-
ened by a peculiar shallow pitting over the entire surface, but which is larger
and deeper at the edges of the larger plates, to which it imjiarts a slightly cre-
nate appearance. The plates of the vault are also defined by the same deeply
canaliculate sutures, and roughened by similar pitting to that on the body
plates, though they are not convex like the latter.

As we have not seen the arms of this species it is barely possible that it may

* Sixteen is probablv the normal number.

[July,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 167

be more properly an aberrant Agaricocrinus than a true Dorycrinus. Its arm
bases, however, or rather the brachial pieces, have not the breadth and stout-
ness seen even in the most aberrant species of the former group, such as Agar,
corniculus (= Act. corniculus, Hall), and from their appearance there is little
room for doubting that it had two slender arms from each arm opening, in-
stead of a single stout one as in Agaricocrinus, which, so far as we are aware,
never has more than three arm openings to each posterior ray and two or three
to each of the others. It is the only species we have ever seen of the Dorycrinus
group with the peculiar sculpturing of its body plates already mentioned. This
sculpturing, however, is very different from that seen on Agaricocrinus cornic-
iilus, which the species most nearly resembles in several respects, being a
peculiar pitting of the whole surface of each individual plate, with a few larger
marginal indentations. Its greater number of arm openings (four to each pos-
terior ray, and three to the anterior one, instead of two to each all around)
would alone at once distinguish it from that species, even in specimens with-
out the arms.

Locality and position. Lower bed of Burlington Limestone, Burlington, Iowa.
Lower Carboniferous. No. 150 of Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

Genus AGARICOCRINUS, Troost.
Agaricocrinus nodoscs, M. and W.

Body, without the arms, having a truncato-suborbicular general outline, be-
ing convex above and broadly truncated below; under side moderately con-
cave out to the second radial pieces inclusive. Base small, impressed deeper
than the general concavity of the under side, and entirely hidden by the col-
umn. First radial pieces extending out horizontally from the end of the col-
umn, and exposing a flat hexagonal surface nearly twice as wide as long.
Second radials nearly as large as the first, a little wider than long, and pre-
senting the usual quadrangular form. Third radials tumid, or projecting dis-
tinctly beyond the surface of the second and first; wider than long, larger
than the second, and pentagonal or hexagonal in form ; each bearing on its
outer sloping sides two series of tumid, stout alternating brachial pieces, di-
rected horizontally outward, and in all but the two posterior rays, forming the
base of two stout arms. In the posterior rays, intermediate brachial pieces are
intercalated between the others so as to give origin in each of these rays to
three arms, thus making twelve arms to the entire series.

First anal piece about as wide as long, heptagonal in form, with a fiat sur-
face entirely included within tlie concavity of the under side, supporting in the
next range three pieces, which are longer than v/ide, and curve up so as lo form
a part of the outer wall, but are not included within the concavity of the under
surface. (_)f these the lateral two have a general oval outline, with eight or
nine sides and a tumid surface, while the middle one is hexagonal, moderately
convex, and much narrower at tlie inner than the outer end. Above these are
three other smaller pieces, connecting with the vault. First interradial pieces
about once and a half as long as wide, M'ith nine sides, the inner half being
flat and included within the concavity, of the lower side, and the outer tumid.
Connecting with the outer end of each of these are two elongated narrow-
pieces in the second range, which are usually tumid at the lower end, and ex-
tend up between the brachial pieces, to connect with the vault. Arms un-
known.

Vault composed of irregular, unequal, tumid larger and smaller pieces. Of
the larger, more prominent pieces, one is situated over each ray, and another
at tlie middle; while a series of four or five somewhat smaller pieces immedi-
ately surround the anterior and lateral margins of the middle one. The inter-
mediate spaces are occupied by much smaller and less prominent pieces.
Opening nearly over the posterior side and penetrating a very prominent thick-
ened ridge, which extends from the middle to the anal side, and is composed
of comparatively large pieces for this part,

1869.]

168 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

Surface of all the plates, including those of the vault, regularly granular.
Column of moderate size, round, and composed near the base of alternately
thicker and thinner pieces, with radiately striated surfaces, and perforated by
a very small nearly rounded central canal.

Height of body to top of vault, 088 inch ; breadth, including three brachial
pieces on each side, 1-13 inches; breadth of concavity of underside, 0-57 inch;
thickness of column 0-40 inch from base, O-lTinch.

This species differs from all the others yet known from the Burlington group,
in having three arms to each posterior ray. It is most nearly allied to .-1. buL'
latus. Hall, a single individual of which, out of a considerable number in Mr.
Waclismuth's collection, has abnormally three arms in one of the posterior rays
all the others having two to each ray all around. It differs also from all of these,
however, as well as from the original type now before us, in having the conca-
vity of the under side less dee]), and all the pieces surrounding it more tumid,
wliile the form and proportions of its l)ody pieces are different, its anal region
much more protuberant, and its vault pieces less rounded and swelled. Its
surface is also more coarsely granular.

Locality and position. Highest part of the upper bed of the Burlington group
at Burlington, Iowa. Lower Carboniferous. No. 14'5 of Mr. Wachsmuth's col-
lection.

Genus PLATYCRINITES, Miller.

Platycrinites tenctibrachiatus, M. and W.

Body rather small, subglobose, being somewhat wider than high. Base
shallow, or dish shaped, with a subpentagonal outline and a ratlier broad
shallow concavity below, nearly twice as wide as the rather small round facet
for the attachment of the column. First radial pieces a little wider than high,
having a general quadrangular form, but with tlie superior lateral angles
slightly truncated for the reception of the interradial pieces, and the lower sides
a little convex in outline; sinus in the upper side of each equaling about half
its breadth, and extending down on the outer side about one-third to one-fourth
its length. Sutures channeled by the beveling of the edges of the plates.
Second radial pieces very small, wider than long, triagonal in form, and wedg-
ing out on each side so as to allow the first brachial pieces to come in contact
with the first radials at the lateral edges of the sinuses in the same.

First divisions of the rays, from their origin on the second radial pieces,
each round and composed of a single series of somewhat wedge shaped pieces
to the fourth piece, which has a pentagonal outline and gives origin to two
divisions, the inner one of which is smaller than the other and without farther
bifurcations, being a simple arm, composed below, for some little distance, of
a single series of wedge formed pieces, beyond which it passes gradually into
a double series of alternating pieces, while the outer division bifurcates on the
second piece, its outer subdivision remaining simple like the inner of the first
divisions, already described, and its inner division bifurcates again on the
fourth pieces, forming two arms like the others, thus making four arms to
each of the two main divisions of each ray, or forty arms to the entire series,
all of which are long, slender, and without spines or other asperities. PinnuUe,
or so-called tentacles, slender, rather crowded, and composed of joints that
are longer than wide and deeply furrowed within.

Surface of body plates marked with small rough ridges, which on the first
radial pieces run parallel to the lower and lateral margins, with more or less
irregularly disposed granules on the central region, sometimes showing a
tendency to radiate from the sinuses for the second radial pieces.

Height of body, 0-30 inch ; breadth of same, 0-50 inch ; length of arms, meas-
uring from the first divisions on the second primary radials, about 1-50 inch .
do. to first bifurcation above, 0-22 inch ; breadth of each individual arm above
all the bifurcations, 0-05 inch.

[July.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 169

This species is related to Platycrinus Aviericamis, of Owen and Slmraard,
with which it agrees in the size and form of its body. Its surface sculpturing,
iiowever, is somewhat different, that species having merely a nodular ridge
running along the lower and lateral margins of the first radial plates, and two
others starting from the lower lateral angles and converging to the sinuses in
the middle of the upper edge, with little isolated nodes on the intermediate
spaces ; while in the species under consideration there are merely three some-
what nodular ridges, parallel to the basal and lateral margins of these plates,
with more or less granules in the central region As such markings, however,
are subject to some variation in individuals of the same species of this group,
we should not have regarded the differences mentioned of sufficient importance
to warrant the establishment of another species, if it were not for the addi-
tional fact that Mr. Wachsmuth finds specimens agreeing exactly with Owen
and Shumard's species in the ornamentation of the body, and yet having only
six arms to each ray, or thirty in the entire series, instead of eight to each ray,
as in that under consideration.

P. Wort/ieni, Hall, agrees with this in having eight arras to the raj', but they
are much stouter, and differ in being roughened by numerous small asperities,
while its second radial pieces are much smaller, and each supports on each
side above only two very short pieces between it and the first bifurcations
above, instead of four. Similar differences are also seen in the details of the
other divisions, while the surface ornamentation of the two species is entirely
different, and the base of the Wortheni is flat or broadly concave, instead of
being moderately convex with merely a central concavity.

Locality and position. Upper beds of Burlington Limestone, Burlington,
Iowa. No. 218 of Mr. Wachsmuth's collection.

Genus PROTASTER, Forbes.
Protaster? gregarius, M. and W.

The disc of this species is circular in outline, slightly convex above, and
measures from 0-20 to 0-30 inch in diameter. In most cases it looks as if merely
covered by a smooth membranaceous integument. Some casts of its external
surface, however, seem to show traces of flat, nearly smooth, imbricating scales
above. The five arms are slender, flexible, and rather long in proportion to
breadth. In a specimen with a disc measuring 0-25 inch in breadth, the diaine-
ter of the arms near the disc is only 0-05 inch. None of the specimens show
the entire length of the arms, though some fragments of them were seen lying
detached in the matrix, about 0-55 inch in length, without being complete at
either end. From the breadth and gradual taper of these it would seem prob-
able that when entire they may have been 0-75 to 1 inch in length. Their
impressions in the matrix give no indications of a longitudinal furrow along
the under side, but show that there were about six pairs of arm pieces in a
length of 0-16 inch. These pieces appear to be nearly though not exactly
opposite, and each one provided below with a comparatively large, round, deep
pit or pore, near the middle of its anterior side. Along their lateral margins
there appear to be impressions in the matrix of very small spines (one to each,
arm piece), though if such they must have been extremely short. Impressions -
of the upper side of the slender arms show them to have been somewhat
rounded above, with the nearly square arm pieces slightly alternating. Some
of the impressions seem to show traces of central pores or pits, one at the mid- •
die of each pair of pieces, though in others no traces of these are visible.

We have numerous specimens of this little species before us, but as they
are all merely in the condition of casts and moulds in a very fine, somewhat
granular matrix, they do not show the details of its structure very clearly. As
tar as its structure can be made out, however, it seems to agree well with the
general features of the genus Protaster, as illustrated by Prof. Hall in the
Twentieth Report of the Regents of the University of N..Y..on.therSUte Cabi-.

1869. J 12

170 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

net of Nat. Hist., though not with Mr. Salter's figures of P. Miltoni. It will
probably be found to be genericallj distinct frona the iSilurian typical forms of
Protasfcr, but we prefer to place it provisionally in that genus for the present.
We are not aware that an}' well defined species of the genus Frotaster, how-
ever, have been found in Carboniferous rocks.

Locality and position. Crawfordsville, Indiana. Keokuk division of the
Lower Carboniferous series.

MOLLUSCA.
Genus CH^NOCARDIA, M. and W.

(;^^5t(Va), to gape ; K^fiia, the heart; in allusion to its gaping front and gene-
ral form).

Shell equivalve ? rather thin, verj' inequilateral, more or less oval, beaks
small, depressed and nearly terminal ; valves strongly gaping in front, and
closed behind ; hinge unknown, but short and without cardinal area ; surface
with concentric strias, crossed on the posterior dorsal region by faintly marked
radiating costte, and on the gaping front bj' radiating lines and costas.

Although we have not seen the hinge of this type and know very little of its
muscular* and pallial impressions, it differs so decidedly in its external
characters from all the established genera known to us, that we cannot doubt
the propriety of proposing a new genus for its reception. In the single char-
acter of having the valves distinctly gaping anteriorly, it resembles the Silu-
rian genus Hippomya of Salter, to which it may bear some relations. It
diflfers, however, in having the gaping part of the valves terminal, instead of
occupying the anterior ventral region, w hen placed with the hinge line in a
horizontal position, the margins of the gaping part (which are not thickened
and reflected as in Mr. Salter's genus), are found to slope slightly forward, as
if truncated, in that direction from immediately in front of the beaks, instead of
sloping posteriorly to the middle of the basal margin. Uur type also differs in
the possession of radiating markings, and much smaller umbones, as well as
in being less gibbous. It is true that some of these characters might be
merely specific, but we cannot believe they all are ; while the general physiog-
nomy of the two forms is so different as strongly to impress the mind with the
■idea of their belonging to entirely distinct genera.

Without a knowledge of its hinge and interior, it is not possible to arrive
at very satisfactory conclusions in regai'd to the family relations of this shell,
though we are inclined to believe it related to the Mi/tihdx. The gajjc of the
front was doubtless for the passage of a byssus, as it is too high up from the
antero^ventral margin to have been for the protrusion of a fool to be used in
^crawling about.

The description is made out from left valves only.

Ch^nocardia ovata, M. and W.

Shell obliquely ovate, more than two-thirds as wide as long, moderately
gibbous, the greatest convexity being a little in front of the middle. Posterior
outline rounding into the cardinal margin above, and into the base with a
broad subsemicircnlar curve ; deepest part of the base behind the middle, from
near which the anterior ventral margin ascends verj' abruptly and a little
otjliquely forward, with a slightly convex outline, to the lower part of the
anterior hiatus. Anterior gaping edge truncated, with a slightly convex out-
line and forward slope from immediately in front of the beaks, and defined, or
separated from the body of the shell by a faint sulcus, starting from the imme-
diate front of the beak, and curving downward so as to intersect the margin
at the base of the hiatus, which (supposing it to be equally developed in the

* One internal cast appears to show trace of a long narrow, anterior adductor muscu-
lar scar near the edge of the gaping part of the valve.

[July,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 171

right valve) is about twice as long as wide, and of a broad lance-ovatc form,
most angular at the base. Hinge line scarcely more than one-fourth the
greatest length of the shell, measuring obliquely from the anterior extremity
to the posterior basal margin, and ranging at an angle of about 45° to the
longer axis of the valves. Beaks very small, incurved, and depressed almost
to the cardinal margin ; located nearlj- over the anterior edge. Surface with
concentric striie obscure ; radiating costte of the posterior dorsal region very
faintly marked, and broader than the slight furrows between, while very
obscure traces of fine longitudinal strife may be seen on some of them ; radia-
ting cost88 of the anterior, fine, and rather sharply defined on the gaping edge,
back of which a few larger obscure ribs may be seen, the posterior one of
which is larger than the others, and curves down from the anterior side of
the beak so as to intersect the margin of the valve a little below the lower
end of the hiatus.

Length, 2 inches ; height, measuring at right angles to the greatest length,
1-48 inch ; convexity of the left valve, 0-50 inch ; length of anterior hiatus,
0-G3 inch ; breadth of do. in same, 0-J6 inch.

This shell differs so widelj' from all others known to us from our Carboni-
ferous rocks, that acomparison is unnecessary. Indeed we know of no other
form liable to be confounded with it, from rocks of any age.

Locality and position. — West Pecan Creek, Grundy County, from the lower
part of the Coal Measures.

Genus ALLORISMA, King.
Allorisma costata, M. and W.

Shell under medium size, longitudinally oblong, the length being more than
twice the height, very thin, rather convex in the central and umbonal regions ;
anterior margin rather short, closed and narrowly rounded; basal margin
forming a long nearly semi-elliptic curve, with a very slight sinuosity in front
of the middle ; posterior side compressed ; but apparently a little gaping and
distinctly truncated, nearly vertically, from the base about half way up, and
thence a little obliquely forward and upward to the dorsal margin ; posterior
dorsal region compressed aVjove the uubonal ridge; cardinal margin equaling
about two-thirds the entire length of the shell, very nearly straiglit, and inflec-
ted so as to form a narrow or lance-linear corselet, extending its whole length;
beaks convex, rising a little above the cardinal margin, and placed slightly
more than one-sixth the length of the valves behind the anterior extremity;
lunule well defined and lance-ovate in form. Surface ornamented by about
twenty-five very regularly arranged, distinctly elevated concrntric cost*,
which commence near the lunule, and extend backward parallel to the base, to
the well defined, angular ural)onal ridge, leading from the beaks to the
posterior basal extremity, at which ridge they become suddenly obsolete, or
very nearly so, being mainly represented on the more compress posterior dorsal
region by distinct lines of growth, which are crossed on the middle of this
area by a second oblique linear ridge extending from the beaks to the middle
of the posterior margin. Some indications of the usual minute surface gran-
ules appear to be visible in some of the moulds left in the matrix.

Length, about 1-20 inch; height, 0-53 inch ; convexity, 0-44 inch.

This is a very neat, elegant species, of the type A. ekffans^ Kiug, and A.
Geinitzii, Meek, (^=E. elegans, Geinitz,* not King). It is a more slender species,
however, with much more sharply elevated, and more regularly disposed costae
than the former ; while it will also be readily distinguished from the latter by
its costae, and much more depressed umbones. wider (higher) posterior ex-
tremity, &c. The regularity and prominence of its concentric cost;ie, and their
very abrupt termination along the umbonal ridge or carina, are remarkable

* Carbon f. und Dyas iu Nebraska.

1869.]

172 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

characters that give the posterior half of the valves much the appearance of
some types of Trigonia.

Locality and position. — Found by Mr. Green, of the Illinois Survey, in Warren
County, Illinois, in a black bituminous limestone near the base of the Coal-
measure, associated with Lima retifera, and Cardiomorpha Missouriensis. Shu-
mard, Aviculopecten ? carbonarius, Stevens, sp., [=Peclen Broadheadii, Svrallow,
= P. Hawni, Gein.), Spiriferina Kcntucfcensis, Shumard, Vhonetiis mesoloba,
N. & P., Schizodus curtus, M. & W., and various other species, many of which
have been generally, until recently, supposed to be mainly confined to the
upper part of the Coal-measures.* Mr. Broadhead also found it associated
with many of the same fossils near the upper part of the Coal-measures in
Fayette countv, Illinois.

August od.
The President, Dr. Hays, in the Chair.
Twelve members present.

August lOfJi.
The President, Dr. Hays, in the Chair.
Eighteen members present.

August 17 tJi,
The President, Dr. Hays, in the Chair.
Sixteen members present.

On motion, it was resolved, that the Academy take part in the
Centennial Anniversary of Humboldt's Birthday, to be held on the
13th and 14th of September. Dr. H. C. Wood, Jr., was appointed
by the Academy as orator, to deliver an address on the occasion.

The following paper was offered for publication : " On Brevoor-
tia," by Alphonzo Wood.

August Slsf.
Dr. Mayburry, in the Chair.
Eighteen members present.

* 1 have also been interested to see amongst the Illinois State Collections from the
shale associated with the coal-bed at Danville, in that State, a new type of bivalves
I had never before seen from any other locality tlian Nebra.ska City, Nebraska, where it
occurs in the Upper Coal-measure beds referred by Prof. Marcou to the horizon of the
Permian. It is a small, smooth, compressed, elongated, equivalve bivalve, with nearly
parallel, straight upper and lower margins, and a distinct, rather large rectangular
notch in the anterior ventral margin, forrning a hiatus similar to that seen in the .
genus A'ylojihar/a, though it evidently has no relations to that group, but seems to be
allied to the Snlmidie. In Dr. Hayden's report on the Geology of Nebraska, I have propo.sed
for this genus the name Prntlv/ris.

From the same bed at Danville, HI., I have likewise seen in the State Collection, speci-
mens of Prof. Geinitz's Nebraska species GcrvilUa longa, one of which shows the hinge
to have none of the characters of Gervillia or Bithevellia, since it has no trace of the row
of cartilage pits characterizing those genera. On the contrary, it seems to agree well
iu its hinge characters with the genua Avicula.

F. B. Meek.

[August,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 173

The following gentlemen were elected membei's :

Dr. John C. Spear, U. S. N. ; Jas. Lauman Harmar ; Dr. Fausto
E. Rendon.

The following were elected Correspondents :

Prof A. KoUiker, of Wurzburg, and N. H. Bishop.

The Committee to which was referred the paper by Alphonzo
Wood, entitled " On Brevoortia," reported in favor of its publica-
tion in the Journal.

On favorable report of the Committee, the following papers were
ordered to be published :

The Auroral Display of April 15, 1869.
BY J. ENNIS.

This auroral displaj was the brightest that has appeared at Philadelphia
eince the memorable one on the evening of August 28, 1859. On both these
occasions the light was most beautiful and striking, and during the iuterval
between the two no display occurred at all to be compared to these in bright-
ness, in beauty, in variety of coloring, and in general grandeur and magnifi-
cence of view. They both began just as the twilight was dying away. The
former slightly exceeded in gorgeous coloring, and the latter in duration, for
it continued to be still strikingly grand until after midnight. On both occa-
sions the chief colors were pale rose and pale green, but though pale in tint
they were very bright, clear and impressive.

The cause of the aurora borealis is generally admitted to be the passage of
electricity from the northern region of the globe toward the south. This pass-
age I suppose to be constant, and in three different paths : the lower,
through the surface of the earth ; the middle, along the top of the atmosphere ;
and the higher, along what are called the magnetic curves ; the earth being
considered as a great magnet, with the poles north and south.

The lower path becomes evident by studying the disturbances of the mag-
netic needle. Mr. Charles V. Walker came to the conclusion, from magnetic
irregularities, that over the south-eastern portion of the New England States
there is a stream of electricity of indefinite width drifting across the country,
moving to and fro in a line from N. 42 E. to S. 42 W.* Professor Loomis, of
Yale College, in discussing the great auroral display of 1859, says he found
similar magnetic disturbances over the continent of Europe, and that they are
propagated in a direction from N. 28 E. to S. 28 W. He intimates that per-
haps more observations would show the directions in Europe and America to
be the sanie.f Probably the electric currents on both continents would be
found floating more nearly north and south. All the facts of these magnetic
disturbances coincide with the idea that the electric stream is through the
earth's surface, the actual position of the magnets irregubirly deflected.

The necessity for such a current through the earth's surface southwardly
becomes evident from the fact that the solid portion of the globe is constantly
robbing the atmosphere of its Electricity. We behold the tendency of this
fluid to come down in a thunder shower ; and sometimes, though rarely, the
thunder and lightning will fall from a cloud without any rain. I know an
instance, witnessed by several credible persons in the north-eastern part of
New Jersey, where a lightning stroke, with a loud report, and without anj-
rain, fell from a small summer cloud and struck one of the cattle in the field,
which had a bell at its neck. The solder of the bell was partly melted, and
the animal was killed. In all ordinary good weather, the higher we ascend
in the air the more strongly do we find it charged with electricity. The under

* Amer. Journ. Sci. and Arts, vol. 32, p. 326. t Ibid, p. 334.

1869.]

174 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

side of any stratum, say two hundred feet thick, is always negative to the
upper side ; and at the same time it is positive to the upper side of a stratum
directly below. The lower side of this lower stratum is positive to the solid
earth below, which is negative to tiie air above. From this condition in the
air, and the relative condition between the air and the ground, there must be
a constant passage of electricity more or less from the atmosphere to the
earth. As the extra accumulation is at the north, it must go south through
the earth for the equilibrium. This extra accumulation in the north is proved
by the visible aurora iiorealis.

The second path southward of the superabundant electricity at the north is
along the top, or through the exceedingly rare upper regions of the atmos-
phere. The auroral arch has in some cases been found to be about forty
miles above the earth's surface. We may say it is at or near the top of the
atmosphere possessing an appreciable density. This arch always moves to-
wards the south. While it moves it seems to part with portions of Itself in
the form of " streamers," — far extending lines upward, — in the directions of
the magnetic curves. The "streamers" cease to be visible before they reach
low southern latitudes, and so does the arch ; but the want of visibility, either
in the streamers or In the arch, is no reason why the electric fluid does not
continue to flow In both cases towards the equator. Streamers cannot be
supposed to rise from the arch in the lower latitudes, because there the mag-
netic curves coincide so nearly with the horizon ; and the parting of the
streamers may perhaps cause the visibility of the arch.

Nearly twenty years ago 1 had a very distinct view of the electric fluid
flashing along the top of the atmosphere. It consisted of sheets of flame,
thin and broken, darting from north to south. I was standing on the back
platform of the last car of a train travelling from New York to Newark, N. J.,
where I then resided. The sky was perfectly clear, and I think, though I am
not certain, it was bright moonlight. I remember very distinctly that no
aurora borealls was seen, — at least such as the aurora generally ajjpears. But
in looking towards the east I saw at intervals bright patches of flaiue shooting
from north to south. These fiery patches were not the mild faint glow of the
ordinary aurora, but bright like flame, though very much broken and ragged,
evidently very thin, and about eight or ten degrees in diameter. Their course
before disappearance ran through an arc a little longer. It was as though
something was passing rapidly through the atmosphere along its top, and by
friction was grating fire now and then as it passed. A few others saw the
display, and I believed then, as 1 believe now, that I saw the frlctlonal effect
of the electric fluid against the atmosphere while flowing from the jjolar to-
ward the equatorial regions. The direction of the passage was not towards
the zenith to form a corona, but from north to south, while appearing in the
eastern sky at an elevation of from 30 to 40 degrees.

During the display of April 15, 1869, one of the most remarkable features
was the quick passage offtakes of the light glowing aurora from the northern
horizon to the zenith, and sometimes fifteen or twenty degrees beyond. The
transfer of the electric matter through this entire space occupied only the
fraction of a second. For distinctness of appearance I could not help com-
paring these passages with those of breezes of wind across the surface of the
water, or over a wheat field when seen from a neighboring elevation. As
there are successive flaws of wind, one chasing another, so there were suc-
cessive and frequent flaws or discharges of electricity. The next day an ob-
server, quite a young man, remarked to me that it was wonderful to see the
white clouds rise up from the north and fly swiftly overhead. This very ra-
pidity, moving through such an arc In a fraction of a second, shows these
clouds to have been electric. It was impossible for me then to conceive how
they could have been mere flashes of light. They were not intense in bright-
ness like those I saw twenty years ago, but the pale auroral glow as seen in
the artificial auroral tube. I gazed at them lung and often, with the profound

[August,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 175

conviction that T actually saw electricity, whatever that may be, transferred
bodily from north to south. But did these mild but swift electric clouds
take the path along the top of the atmosphere, or along the magnetic curves ?
They were certainly quite distinct from the tall continuous streamers. I in-
cline to believe that they ran along the top of the atmosphere, and that they
were nearer than the streamers. But by mere vision the relative nearness of
such objects cannot well be distinguished; we cannot tell the relative near-
ness of a planet and a fixed star by simple inspection, although the one may
be several hundred thousand times farther otf than the other.

In Prof. Loomis's description of the great auroral display of Aug. 28, 1859,
he records some very remarkable observations, and reproduces the diagrams
fihosving the deflected course {lursued by some streams and flashes of electric-
ity.* Such tortuous streams would be impossible in the magnenc curves. But
they are what should be occasionally looked for when the electric fluid passes
through and over the upper regions of the atmosphere. That atmosphf^re we
know is composed of various strata and various currents, some dry and some
moist, some moving one way and some another, and some charged with
electricity more than others. Therefore a stream of electricity floating
through or over the rare upper regions of the atmosphere, and meeting these
various strata and currents, must be affected differently, and sometimes made
to produce just such curved phenomena as are presented in those descriptions.

Lightning down the side of a tree takes a tortuous path from the grain of
the wood, or even of the bark.

The upper path, the magnetic curves far away above the atmosphere, pur-
sued by the electric fluid in passing from the north to the south, I do not now
discuss. Like many other kindred auroral topics, it is not within the scope
of this short paper. That path has been ably treated by B. V. Mersh, Esq., of
this city, and by Prof. Loomis of Yale College, when describing the great
auroral display of 1859 in the American Journal of Science and Arts, where
both those gentlemen have given references to other authors.

The CONSTANT passage of the electric fluid from north to south is indicated
by the frequent irregular deflections of the magnetic needle, and by the fre-
quent auroral displays in high northern latitudes. Prof. Loomis portrays a
zone around the northern region of the globe, where the aurora is seen eighty
times in a year, as the highest maximum average. But this number seems to
me to be too small. Many observers speak of their appearance almost nightlv.
In latitude 70° X., at Bossekop, in Alten Bay, on the coast of West Finmark,
M. Lottin observed one hundred and forty-three auroras during an interval of
two hundred and six days, between September, 1838, and April, 1839. During
the long niglit of seventy times twenty-four hours, from Nov. 17 to Jan. 25,
the aurora was visible sixty-four times. On other occasions within that same
period, when the sight of the aurora was impossible on account of thick
clouds, it was proved to exist by disturbances of the magnetic needle. At
Fort York, in 1780, Umfreville says " there were very few nights without an
aurora." Chapell in 1814, when giving his experience, says "the nights were
constan'ly illumined by the aurora." Henderson says he saw the auroras in
Iceland in 1814-15 almost every clear night. Such is the testimony of others,
but in this short paper 1 cannot quote. In Prof. Loomis's collections about
the great display in 1859, several similar expressions may be found, and also
in the collection of Mr. Peter Force in the 8th volume of the Smithsonian
Contributions. During the summer of 1868 I spent six weeks on the Sague-
nay river or its near vicinity in Cannda. being part of the time at Grand Bay
and Chicoutimi, more than a hundred miles due north of Quebec. There the
aurora appeared almost every evening ; indeed, its appearance was the rule
and its absence the exception. But the displays were not strikingly grand.
I remarked that on the Saguenay they were much more frequent than when I

* Am. Journal of Science and Arts, vol. 31, pp. 84, 85.

1869.]

176 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

was at Montreal, either the same summer or in that of 1858, when I spent
more than a month in or near that city. That difference of latitude, about
three degrees, made what appeared to me a disproportionate difference in the
frequency of auroral displajs, — a difference, however, not as great as that be-
tween Montreal and Philadelphia, which is again a difference of latitude about
five and a half degrees.

In high northern latitudes the auroral phenomena are rendered invisible a
very large part of the year by twilight. At Montreal the twilight lasts until
10 o'clock and begins at 2 ; and on the Saguenay it ends at 11 o'clock and
begins at 1. In latitude near 60° N. many jears ago, in the month of June, I
could read very easily at midnight by the light of the sun, which luminary
seemed, by his bright rosy reflections against the clouds, to be but very little
below the northern horizon. Plainly there can be but little chance for the
electric aurora to shine among the rosy fingers of the due northern solar
aurora. As in those regions the electric process causing the aurora occurs
almost every night when there is little or no twilight, so we may presume the
same process continues when a strong twilight hides the boreal aurora, espe-
cially since we know that auroras may be indicated by the magneiic needle
when they are not actually visible to the eye. Our present reports from the
far north lead to the supposition that the auroral process is more frequent on
some meridians of longitude than on others, and that it is effected by geogra-
phical causes. Probably also many reporters, being exploring travellers and
not scientific observers, have thought the fainter and less conspicuous auroras
unworthy of record ; and hence Prof. Loomis' small number of eighty per
annum for the maximum average in any zone.

Both Capt. Franklin and Dr. Richardson testify that "the auroral pheno--
mena are frequently seated within the region of the clouds." Hood states that
he saw the aurora several times only six or seven miles above the earth's
surface; among others, on Oct. 23, 1819, and June 13, 1820. I have observed
similar cases. All the facts agree best with the idea that the liberation of the
electricity causing the aurora takes place daily within the atmosphere, and
that thence it escapes southerly by the three paths I have mentioned. The
constant flow of electricity from the north requires in that region a constant
supply. This supply must be afforded by the constant flow of the atmosphere
to the north from the equatorial regions, where at its very start it is charged
with electricity by simple evaporation from the saline waters of the oceans.
For it is a well known fact that positive electricity abounds in all vapors from
waters only slightly saline. It has long been remarked that terrestrial mag-
netism and atmospheric electricity seem intimately connected. They cannot
depend on geological causes, for we see nothing in the mineral constitution
of the globe to produce such variable phenomena. They must depend on the
radiations from the sun, either directly in part by changes of temperature, as
Faraday thought, or indirectly by some other means, such as evaporation,
condensation, friction of atmospheric strata, and the like. Mysterious as the
whole subject now appears, it is nevertheless plainly a soluble question, and
awaits only the coming man armed fully with physical and meteorological
science, and having patience to give the problem a few years of undivided
attention.

On the production of BEACTEA in LARIX.

BY THOMAS MEEHAN.

I have no desire to press with undue force on my fellow-students in Bota-
ny the importance of the discovery I made last year, that many of the great
differences we see in varieties, species or even genera in Uonifera-, are
resolvable into the simple question of axial vigor ; but the key it furnished
enables me frequently to unlock some heretofore secret and mysterious

[Atigust

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 177

cabinet of nature, and I have, therefore, to keep referring to it as the
means to still more important ends.

Last year I had progressed only so far as to learn that foliage was governed
by this law. I have since been able to show that the production of the sexes
is governed in the same way. I can now show that the same law prevails in
determining the form of the parts of fructification.

Larix Europica, as in these cones exhibited, has the bractea scarcely as long
as the scales, but I also exhibit other cones from the same tree in which
the bractea are double the length of the scales, and some of them inclined to
recurve in such manner that thej' much more nearly resemble the cones of
Larix Griffithii oi the Himalayas than they_do those of the species to which
they belong. In order more clearly to explain the law of their production,
I will go over again part of the ground I have before explored, in order to
make more clear the connection between past discoveries and the present
one.

In the first year of infant life, vitality is not strong. The Larix is no ex-
ception. As a consequence of this light hold on life, the leaves are all en-
tirely free from cohesion with the main stem or axis. The next year life is
more powerful, — the axis thickens, and the leaves become mostly adherent,
having only the foliaceous awns free. The Larch, of all trees, devotes the
most of its strength to its main axis or stem. Year by year it accumulates
strength in it, until by ten or twelve years of age it will frequently be able to
make a growth of five or six feet in height of a single season. At this — the
height of its vigor — the reproductive age commences.

The greatest stream of vitalitj' flowing through the main axis, the side
branches have a very weak development. In many cases the buds cannot
push forth into shoots at all, but in such cases that law which gives corres-
ponding strength to the leaves in proportion as it is abstracted from the axis,
causes the leaves — true leaves — to grow in tufts or verticils, on small woody
spurs. The axis in these spurs elongates every year ; by slitting them, the
annual gains of growth can be readil_y seen. Occasionally, bj' the accidental
breaking of the point of the branchlet along which these verticils are situ-
ated, or from some other cause, the stream of vitality along that line is checked,
it will flow again into these verticils or arrested axes, and though they may
have been in the condition of spurs for ten or twenty years, they will again
develop into branchlets, with adherent leaves, as in the regular course of
things.

Coming now to the bearing age, we find along a branchlet of the preced-
ing year's growth, before the growing season commences, numerous buds
at irregular distances along its length. The stoutest of these buds branch
out into new branchlets ; the rest remain as spurs. None of these produce
flowers on this, the shoot of the preceding year ; but the next year a few of
the strongest again develop into branchlets, a few more into verticils of true
leaves on the spurs, more into female, and the balance into male flowers. All
these different grades of vigor, and the consequences of the various grades
are apparent in these specimens (exhibited). The highest grade, the devel-
opment of the axis with adnate leaves, — the next spurs with free leaves, — the
third with fruiting cones, — the fourth with a vitality so weak that, after the
production of the pollen, the flower and whole woody axis immediately dies
altogether.

Let us now pass from the Larch to a law of vigor recognized by every
observer as common to all trees. If two branches push out together, and the
one happen to get a little the start of the other in vigor, the stream of vitality
in that will be continually getting wider and stronger; and just in proportion
will the other lose. The strong branch in time will often take all, absorbing
all the feeders into itself, leaving the other side stream dry. Thus the inside
branches of trees, deprived of light and air, get weaker ; and the more fortu-
nate ones thrive in proportion. In the Larch this is beautifully illustrated.

1869.]

178 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

The inside branchlets get gradually weaker, until spur after spur in succes-
sive j'ears loses the power of forming verticillate leaves, produces male flowers,
the last effort of life, and then expires. Clear as I think the illustrations
in my previous paper were to show that the production of male and
female flowers in Conifers was a mere question of a relative flow of vital
force, nothing can better illustrate it than this one of the Larch.

I now come to the chief point of the present paper — the influence of these
laws of vigor in the modification of the parts of fructification. You will
see in some of these weaker shoots, which in the production of male flowers
most of the spurs have performed the last sad offices of life, a few have had
just enough extra vigor vouchsafed to them to produce female cones, and
that it is just these weak cones lohich produce the lengthened bracts. I have com-
pared with those of Larix Griffithii.

I have said in my paper on " Taxodium and Penus," in reply to an objec-
tion that my point as regards Glfiptostrobus sinensis and Taxodium disltchum
being the same thing, is probably wrong, because the parts of fructification dif-
fer in each, — that as these parts of fructification are but modified leaves, the
game law of change ought to operate on them as well. This instance of
Larix proves it to be so. The bracts in Coniferic are modified leaves, and the
carpellary scales modifications of the woody axis. According to our now
fully demonstrated theory, the leaves of Conifera; are free, and become fully
developed just in proportion to the weakness of the woody or axillary parts.
This law might be expected to show itself in force in the bracts of the cone,
as it is seen it really does in the specimens before us.

I am often asked what influence this law of vigor, as modifying form, is to
have on our ideas of specific character? To me it seems the tendency will
be to make our recognition of distinct things clearer, rather than to confuse
them. As it is now, science on its present basis contradicts our senses. Every
one knows a larch, a spruce, a fir, or a cedar, almost instinctively at sight;
but no sooner were the rules of our best botanists applied to them, than no
one knows which is which, and they are all thrown together in one genus.
By pointing out the directions of change on one unvarying law, applicable
equally to a whole genus or natural order, certainly affinities must be brought
clearer and closer together, than by the present system of conjoining a few
special points, many of which have no physiological relation to one another.

Sej)tember 7th.
Dr. Ruschenberger, Vice-President, in the Chair.
Twenty-one members present.

Thomas Meehan said it was well known that all vegetable physiologists
taught there were two classes of buds in plants, one called adventitious buds
which had a kind of nomadic existence, springing anywhere from root or
branch in apparent defiance of law or order, — the other axillary buds which
were supposed to owe their origin to the leaf from the base of which they
spring. It was customary to speak of these as the " parent leaves of the
axillary buds." He would show that the leaf not only did not aid the axillary
bud formation, but was rather a foe to bud development. He exhibited vig-
orous shoots of the Kentucky Ooft'ee Tree, Honey Locust, Virginia Itea, Hick-
ories and Walnuts, showing what had either been entirely overlooked by
other botanists or passed over as of no importance, that there were in these
two or three buds instead of the usual single axillary bud, one above another
in a direct line, and that in all these instances the one the farthest removed
from the base of the leaf, and of course the one the least under its influence,
was the largest and best developed. These facts he had already incorporated
in a paper read before the American Association at Salem last mouth. He

[August,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 179

had since extended the observations so as to get proofs of the same principle
from single bud cases. He exhibited specimens of some maple shoots of the
present season's growth and showed that there was a gradual diminution of
strength in the leaves from the early spring to the present time ; hut just in
proportion as the leafiest in vigor the itxillury buds c/ained in strenr/th. The upper
buds were large and plump, the lower scarcely discernible. The inference
was made clear, from these illustrations, that whatever may be the cause of the
simultaneous appearance of leaves and axillary buds, they were not in har-
mony together.

He further suggested how very important it was that botanists should note
well the most trivial phenomenon. These facts, which bid fair to revolutionize
one of the most popular dogmas in vegetable physiology, had all originated
from the single observation that the glands on the leaf stalks of the common
wild senna weed, Cassia marilandica, Avere not always in one fixed position,
and could not, therefore, be an elementary part of the regular leaf system.
They were afterwards found to be buds which had been devoured, as it were,
by the leaf, and actually absorbed into its structure.

Mr. Kedfield uoticed the finding of Aspidium aculeatum in the
Catskill Mountains, two degrees farther south than it had heretofore
been observed.

Sfptemhcr \-itli.
Dr. LeConte in the Chair.
Nine members present.

Scptemher list.
Dr. Ruschenberger, Vice-President, in the Chair.
Sixteen members present.

September 28#/i.

Dr. Bridges in the Chair.

Twenty members present.

The following gentlemen were elected Members :
Jas. Cummisky, M. D. ; T. H. Struts ; Nathaniel E. Macomber ;
Wm. H. Fynn.

Prof. Geo. H. Cook, of Princeton, N. J., was elected a Corres-
pondent.

Oct bth.
Dr. Ruschenberger, Vice-President, in the Chair.
Eighteen members present.

The following papers were presented for publication :
" Meteors, their composition and the cause of their ignition and of
their white trails." By Jacob Ennis.

" On the variations of the Genus ^giothus." By Elliott Coues,
A.M.
1869.]

180 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

The publication of No. 2 of the Proceedings for 1869 was an-
nounced.

Oct. 12th.
The President Dr. Hayes, in the Chair.

Twenty-eight members present.

The following paper was presented for publication: "On the Law
of Development in the flowers of Ambrosia artemisitefolia." By
Thomas Meehan.

The death of Mr, Frederick Klett was announced.

Oct. \mh.

Dr. Bridges in the Chair.
Fifteen members present.

Oct. 26th.
The President, Dr. Hayes, in the Chair.

Twenty-six members present.

The monthly report of the Biological and Microscopical Section
was presented.

On favorable report of the Committees, the following papers were
ordered to be published :

On variation in the Genus iEGIOTHUS •
BY ELLIOTT CODES, A.M., PH.D.

Study of this genus will show a series of facts apparently of some general
application, on the question of the mutual relations, if not actually of the ori-
gin, of the various forms, usually held to be species, that compose associations
of corresponding grade. It is not to be supposed that this genus has labored
under any peculiar or isolated conditions, or been subject to any special laws
of development that have resulted in the state of things that is found to obtain.
Whatever these conditions and laws may have been, they are presumably — in
fact, almost certainly — equally operative upon more or less allied groups.
Though it seemed to the writer, at one time, that there was something peculiar
in the kind of variation to which Red-polls are subject, later investigations
render it probable that such is not the case. Analysis, therefore, of the phe-
nomena of this one group, carried into details, may be the means of deducing
some generalizations not wanting in import.

It is not proposed to consider how the genus j'Egiolhus became what it is, —
that is, by what means it secured individual existence as an entit3^ distinct
from all surrounds, differentiated by certain characters from the most nearly
and most remotely allied types ; that is a question of the origin of genera, f
foreign to the present subject. We are to take the genus as it now is, and
study characters of the grade next below generic, in the hope of tracing some
of the laws that have been etfective in sorting out, among the birds of the
group, the precise features they are found to possess.

*See these Proceedings, Nov. 1801, p. 373, ot seq.; and Feb. 1862, p. 40.
tSee Cope, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., Oct., 1868.

[Oct.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 181

It is immaterial what name is given to the several assemblages of individu-
als that make up the genus. Some authorities admit but one, or at most two,
"species"; others six or eight. With a common standard of reference, both
parties cannot be right. If there be sucli a standard in nature, not dependent
upon the minds of ornithologists, the difference clearly results from the
fluctuating position that the latter have assigned to it; and a human fallacy,
one way or the other, is implied. If, on the contrary, no such standard exists,
one of the above mentioned views is as true as the other. As will be seen in
the sequel, the probability is that the latter proposition comes nearest the
truth. At any rate, during tliis discussion, until some conclusions are reached,
the terms "variety," "race," and " species" will be used interchangeably, as
may be most convenient for the designation of such groups as it may be
necessary to speak of, — not in the conventional sense that these words have
gained. And by the term ^'^■Ec/iothus " I wish to be understood as referring,
not to the abstract idea of the genus so designated, but collectively to the
million or more individual birds that are to day living upon the earth, as the
concrete expression of the genus they constitute.

It is demonstrable, I believe, that these birds constitute a genus ; that is;
that they are separable from all other birds whatsoever, by a set of characters
of higher grade than those by which they have up to this time been differenti-
ated among themselves. There is no break or flaw in the bird by which it is
possible to circumscribe them. There is no shading into or graduating towards
this or that allied generic group. No bird has yet been discovered of which it
cannot be predicated, without qualification, that it either is, or is not, one of
the ^^giothi. If it is, it will be found to exhibit the following combination of
characters : and no bird, not presenting just this combination, is an jEgiothus :

The culnien barely or not curved, as long as the middle toe without its claw,
and not over four-tenths of an inch long ; the upper mandible beset at base
with retrorse plumules, more or less concealing the nostrils ; the lower man-
dible without ridges ; the point of the wing formed by four primaries, of
nearly or absolutely equal lengths ; the length of the wing from carpus to tip
barely exceeding one-half the total length from tip of bill to end of tail ; the
tail four-fifths to five-sixths of the length, forked, with broad, rounded feath-
ers ; the middle toe without its claw uot over two-thirds as long as the tarsus ;
the hind claw longer than its digit ; the crown of the head some sliade of
crimson ; the colors of th» back not in well-defined areas ; the rump lighter
colored than the rest of the upper parts; the adult male with the breast of
some shade of red, and the throat unstreaked.

It is common to speak of the " type of a genus," and in this instance A. li-
nariu.% is generally held to be such But it is evident that if the above charac-
ters of the genus were to be drawn exclusively from this species, they would
be rather specific than generic, and would require qualification. A diagnosis
drawn as closely from linarius alone as the foregoing is drawn from the six or
eight forms together, would exclude at least two, — rosfratus and canescens. In
fact, if such expression be allowable, it may be said that linarius rather ex-
aggerates than typifies ^■Egiolhm ; that is, makes ^32giothus out to be more dif-
ferent from other birds than it really is ; for rostratus, for instance, in the
features of size and shape of bill, more nearly resemble Linota or Leucosticte
than linarius does. It is only by weighing all the phases of the genus together,
taking an average, and weighing this against other averages, that a diagnosis
of the genus can be obtained. Upon this muthod I have framed the foregoing
definition, which I believe applies to JEgiothus alone ; and, as has been pre-
mised, it is highly satisfactory to find that the subject in hand may be so
definitely limited. I see no " type" of this genus, except in an ideal — certainly
no known existing— bird, that combines the attributes of all, without present-
ing exclusively the special characters of any, of the species.

If there was ever a time when all the then existing ^■Egiothi resembled each
other as closely as those now called " linarius " do, — in other words, if the ge-

1869.]

182 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

nus was ever unispecific, and has since by whatever causes been made other-
wise by differentiation of several phases, then linaiius was perhaps the actual
type of the genus. But as at such time the genus was then rather forming
than formed, it is more probable that the characters of linarius (i. e., of ^Effio-
ihus in its entirety) were then specific only in relation to such types as Linola,
Leucoslicte., Chnjsomitris, &c. So at any given moment in bird-life, a generic
type or plan is an ideal induction of ours, rather than a material existence.

It is true, nevertheless, that at present Unarms is the most common and
widely distributed aspect of j:'Egiolhus, and that it comprehends a larger per
centum of j.Egioihus than any other form. Were it the only phase of ^■Ec/iothiis
now living, we could handle the genus in much the same manner as we shall
have occasion to with consideration of other forms. I shall for the present
assume that linarius is ^Egiothns, and see if it is possible, upon this hypothesis,
to account for the balance of ^E'^w^/ms that are now living more rationally
and naturally than they can be accounted for upon any other premise.

It is specifically characteristic of the " typical" (f. e., normal, or most usual
and general) ^«w(n-2i/s to be, 1, under six and not under five inches long ; 2,
with a wing 2-75 — 3-00 inches long; 3, a tail 2-25 — 2-65 inches long; 4, a
tarsus equal to the middle toe and its claw ; 5, a bill compressed-conic, very
acute, with not appreciably curved culmen, and never wholly yellow or
wholly blackish ; 6, the light and dark streaks of the back about equal in
amount, and mingled with an intermediate color; 7, the rump never wholly
unstreaked, yet always lighter than the back; 8, the male sex indicated by a
bright color on the breast and rump that is between deep crimson and pale
rose, yet not reaching, under mature conditions, either of these extremes.

It is to be observed, in the first place, that a large per cent. — perhaps -50 or
more — of ^^?o/'/hm have preserved these special conditions inviolate. Upon
these birds neither geographical regions, latitude, longitude, climate, or any
other perturbating influences have exercised the slightest appreciable effect.
Specimens from all parts of Europe, from Hudson's Bay, New York, Southern
States, Kansas, Oregon, Sitka (and Asia?), may be found as closely resembling
each other as birds from the same nest ever do. In short, there are no differ-
ences. As similar ^-Eyiothi as I ever compared were from, respectively, Ger-
many and the Rocky Mountains ; and probably more than half the specimens
at present existing in all the collections in the world will be found thus cor-
related. So it is a fact that, whatever influences have been brought to bear
upon ^Egiotkus, tending to produce, or producing its differentiation or forking
into several recognizable channels, such influences have been nilin effect upon
most individuals.

This is the first broad fact to be remembered. It is not an isolated one. On
the contrary, it is one of a parallel series of large extent. In the cases of a
number of l3oreal and arctic types, as Ngclea, Suriiia, Finicola, Ampelis sp., and
Plectrophanes sp., among land birds, and still more among natatores, as the
glacial Lacidm, Anatidte, Alcidrr, &c., we find the Nearctic the same as the Palne-
arctic; and generally, the more nearly circum-polar tj^pes are, the more likely
it is, aeieris parihi/.f, that distinctions between these two regions will be re-
duced to zero. It is to be observed, further, that linarius, besides being in
longitude the most widelj' dispersed phase of ^Egiothus, is at the same time
the most restless element of its genus. It has properly no special abiding
place ; its movements are irregular, almost spasmodic ; it is found as far north
as most, if not' any, other forms ; and, at least in the United States, ranges
further south than any. I think it probable that the clue to its singular con-
stancy is to be found in this fact: individuals not being subjected through
series of generations to precisely the same climatic and other influences, in
consequence of which the equilibrium, so to speak, is preserved, and variation
in this or that special direction opposed. This inference seems just, and is
corroborated by the fact, about to appear, that the more geographically re-

[August,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 183

stricted a certain per cent, of ^Effiotlnis is, the more decidedly and extremely
does such per cent, differ from the rest.

I. To take up this point next; A certain T[)avi of jEgioihuK — perhaps only one
or two per cent.— now live, and probably always have lived, in Greenland. A
few years ago this fraction of the genus received from Mr. Gould the name of
" canesc«ns," in reference to a certain condition of plumage. By this word we
may summarily imply the fact that these birds differ from linarius in the fol-
lowing particulars: 1, larger size, averaging six inches in length, with wings
and tail to correspond ; 2, a less compressed, less acute, more regularly conic
bill, differently colored, with heavier nasal plumules; 3, not correspondingly
enlarged feet, tiie toes, especially, being relatively shorter; 4, marked de-
ticieucy in coloring matter of the feathers, which makes the whole plumage a
more hoary-whitish, leaves the rump pure white, reduces the streaking of the
under parts, and lightens the red of the adult (^ to a pale rosy. These are simply
observed /ac/5, not open to cavil. It is also a fact that these physical condi-
tion of Greenland yEffiot/nis represent the extreme of differentiation that ^Egio-
thus has yet attained ; for no known bird of the genus differs so much from the
common standard, Imarius as canescens does. These facts are to be reasoned
upon in connection with the following considerations :

As just slated, canescens is the most local, as well as the most boreal, demon-
stration of the genus. It is confined to Greenland ; at least, it only reaches
its characteristic manifestation in that country. Though quoted from North
America, the citation is held, upon the best of grounds, to be erroneous. It is
recorded from Northern Europe ; I have seen no typical specimens from such
localities; ifrenlly occurring, they can scarcely be regarded as more than ad-
ventitious. All other styles of jEffiolhvs range over more ground than this
one ; if then, according to any laws whatsoever, extraneous influences
effect permutation of individual characters after a sufficient nuiuber of genera-
tions, we should expect such causes to be more efficiently operative in the
case of the Greenland birds than in any other. Such is found to have been
the case. Canescens has for an indefinite time been subjected to certain spe-
cial, if not exceptional, conditions, with the witnessed result as above detailed ;
which is tantamount to a demonstration of the assertion already made, that
the most local ^'Eyiolhi are the most specialized ones.

The fact of this greatest differentiation settled, we have next to inquire how
far the particular Amc/ of modification that has been brought about is amenable
to certain laws that have been found of extensive applicability. I think that,
with perhaps one exception, all the distinctive features that canescens presents
are explainable by reference to some of these known laws.

An increase of size, coincidently with increase of latitude, has been shown
by Baird* and others to be of wide application in the cases of species ranging
over many degrees of latitude. It is unnecessary to cite examples. Th c case
of canescens vs. linarius is a parallel one. If it be objected that in this case we
are dealing with two distinct " species,'' instead *)f variations in a single spe-
cies, it is to be replied that the "specific" distinctness of canescens is precisely
the point at issue, not a proven theorem. Moreover, it is to be observed that
this distinction in size is one especially marking, not birds that migrate over
a great extent of country-, but those resident species, individuals of which are
comparatively stationary, some living north, others south. It is here that the
law comes most clearly into play, and canescens is the only set of individuals
that conforms to this requirement ; the others (with possibly one exception)
are more or less migratory. So we can see whj' linarius taken at Hudson's
Bay and in Carolina should be of the same size, while canescens surpasses their
dimensions.

Whether as effect of climate, adaptative modification, or pure incidence (but
more reasonably the former), the fact remains that a large number of genera

' Baird, B. N. A., passim, and Am. Journ. Sci, and Arts, 180G, p. 20.

1869.]

184 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

more or less arctic present white forms. Among mammals it is only necessary
to allude to iJ'rsus, Ccntis, Lepus, &c. Among birds may be cited the Lagopus
from the Tetraoninw^ Hieroftilco and Nyctea among raptores, and in the present
family of the Frivgillidm certain species of Plectrophanes. Looking to water-
birds, it is observed that in the large cosmopolitan genus Larus, nearly if not
all the tropical and temperate zone species of which have the back black or
blue, and the primaries crossed with black, the glacial species {■:. g., glav.cus,
leucopterus, &c.) have not this color on the wings, and the mantle is very pale,
or even white, as in the case of L. Imtc/iinsii ; the exclusively boreal Larine
genus Pagojihila is all white. It is the same with the most boreal geese, as
hyperborean, rossii, &c. Among Procellarndie the most glacial genus, Fulmarus,
is the palest ; and an antarctic species, ThahiKsoica antarclica, is similarly paler
than most of its allies. The modifications of color that the Greenland ^-Eyiothi
have sustained are exactly homologous. This is too evident to call for argu-
ment. Moreover, besides the whitening of color, it is a matter of common ob-
servation that pelage of mammals and plumage of birds is likely to be increased
or otherwise modified in cold regions, or even at colder seasons of the year, for
an evident purpose. The covering of the skin is increased in two ways : by
thickening over parts already covered, and by extension over parts ordinarily
naked. The feet of the Ptarmigan, of the Snowy Owl, of the Northern Hare,
are good illustrations of the last. Now in canescens we see both these methods
in play. There is a peculiar soft thick mollipitose condition of the plumage,
not seen in other species, and the little modified feathers that surround the
base of the upper mandible are lengthened and thickened till they form a
dense rutf concealing the nostrils. It may be also remarked, by the way, that
this ruff is one of the diagnostic characters of a large group, although a true
subfamily, oi FringUlidse, many if not most of the species of which are more
or less boreal birds.

One other feature of ca>iesce7is, — the want of enlargement of the feet in cor-
respondence with increase in other dimensions, — I shall revert to in another
connectioH.

As the case stands with canescens, few if any ornithologists would deny this
fraction of jFgiothus " specific " rank. But if the laws that we have just been
noticing have any meaning, — if they are not mere word-formulas, shadowy and
insubstantial, — there is no reason to suppose that canescens was not at one
time linarius ; nor that, if the physical barriers — the geographical restrictions
— that now hedge it about were taken away, and it were permitted free mi-
gration and unrestrained commingling with other ^-Egiothi, it would not revert
to linarius in the same length of time, or less, that was required for its aberra-
tion.

It seems to me that the special conditions and relations of JEgiothus canescens
give it forcible bearing upon the generic question of the origin of species ; and
it is evident on which side it stands as witness.

II. A correlation of species in the matter of size, other than that just spoken
of as dependent upon latitude, is frequent among birds. It may be accompa-
nied by apparently unimportant, and certainly not very noticeable, differences
in color, proportions of parts, &c. ; a correspondent variation of the bill being
among the more common This law, so to speak, reaches a maximum, as the
writer has shown,* in certain pygopodous birds. In the families Coh/mbidx
and Podicipidx, in fact, it is possible to range the species in two parallel se-
ries, one of which is the counterpart of the other in case of almost every spe-
cies, in nearly everything but size. Thus there is a larger (C. Adamsii) and
smaller (6'. for^Ma^Ms) Loon ; a larger («riic««) and smaller [pacijicus) Black-
throated Diver; a larger [hoLbvellt) and smaller (griseigena) Red-necked Grebe,
and so on. The three North American species, so called, of Accipiter, are ad-
mirable illustrations. Examples without number could be advanced, but

•Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad. 1862, p. 228.

[August,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 185

these will suffice. In all these instances the foregoing law of increase in size
with latitude has no part ; for these birds always may be, and, as a matter of
fact, usually are, more or less associated. The genus ^Egiothus is also obnoxious
to this special kind of variation, which remains as yet unexplained.

There are in Euroi)e, and probably also in America, two races, or varieties,
of Redpolls, that differ from the ordinary style of ^-Effiothus in little except size.
One is smaller, the olher larger. The latter has, in addition, a somewhat (but
barely appreciably) larger and more yellowish bill than average linarius ; but
none of these points, even that of size, are sufficiently marked to be obvious
and unmistakeable except in the extreme they have as yet reached ; that is,
intermediate individuals now living complete a gradation back to linarius.
This form is called ^-'Egiothus holhoeUi, after Boehm ; it has been on record but
a few years. It is found in northern and western Europe, associated with li-
narius ; and I have seen identical samples from Canada. The smaller race
has been longer known. Though usually credited, as Fringilla rufescens, to
Vieillot, somewhere about 1817, it was an old entry in the books at that date.
Brisson describes it with his usual accuracj-; Miiller has it in his Supplement,
of 1776, as F. cabaret. Although authors speak of a notable amount of rufous
in the plumage, over and above that commonly exhibited by linarius^ there is
reason to suspect that this is exaggerated. Very young linarius is largely
rufous ; and it is credible that, age for age, and season for season, the differ-
ence in the colors of rnfescens and linarius is not very tangible. Difference in
size, then, is the main if not the onlj' point in this, as in the former case ; and
rufescens, as surely as holboelli, grades in this respect with linarius.

Were these larger and smaller birds separated from each other and from li-
narius by geographical range, and particularly by a difference in latitude, we
could argue more plausibly concerning them. In such case, even the slight
difference that exists might be traced to some cause, and be really of more
consequence, in a classificatory point of view, than it now appears to be. In
the larger bill of holboelli we might see the operation of tlie same class of causes
(however obscure their special determination maj- be) as those that, e. y.^ have
sharpened the bills of all the White-bellied Nuthatches west of a certain me-
ridian, enlarged the Florida Crows' bills, turned the California Magpies' bills
yellow, strengthened the claws of the Arizona black Pipilos, drawn out the
tails of western Mocking Thrushes, put warts on the bill oi Anser rossii, VlX\^
produced a thousand modifications corresponding in degree, though so differ-
ent in kind. As the case stands, we are totally in the dark. We had best,
perhaps, content ourselves with bare statement of the fact that a certain per
cent, oi M'jiothi have proven susceptible to some special unknown influences
and have consequently undergone certain modifications that the rest, though
similarly exposed, have successfully resisted. If we go further, it must be
upon speculative grounds. We may conjecture that these two races are form-
ing species : that they began to be differentiated within the last few thousand
years, more or less; and that in the process of time they will either become
jiermanently distinct, the differences that they have become possessed of being
of advantage to them ; or that they will eventually revert to an original stand-
ard, such differences proving useless. A supposition as little likely to be sub-
stantiated as refuted, except by analogical reasoning.

At present, ornithologists are very properly indisposed to look upon rufescens
and holboelli as anything more than " varieties " of linarius, and as not even
very satisfactorily defined varieties. But I hold it to be demonstrable that
the characters that separate these birds from linarius are of the same kind
(though of different degree, or intensity, so to speak) as those distinguishing
the Greenland Red-polls from linarius. The characters of all the ^'Egiothi, once
reduced, as they can be, to the same level, and shown to differ only by varying
force of expression, I see no means of distinguishing any set of the birds from
the rest, as species. Intermediate links of the chain are easily found, — links
that bind the whole so firmly that there is no break in the series between the

1869.J 13

186 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

smallest and darkest, and largest and lightest sets of individuals as yet dis-
covered. To prove this I must bring forward the curious variations that
^giothus has sustained in northern North America.

III. I discovered in Labrador, in 1860, and soon after published a description
of, a small Red-poll that I cnW^d fuscescens on account of its color. Specimens
had before, however, been collected, and I am inclined to think this form is
the one figured by Audubon for the common species ; \mi fuscesctnn is, as far
as known, its earliest designation. These Red-polls have since been traced
quite across the continent, in British America, to Sitka ; specimens are con-
tained in nearly all the collections from the interior. With this extensive
range in longitude, the birds' latitudinal dispersion is rather unusually limited.
They appear to be mostly confined to boreal America, rarely entering the
United States, and then only along its northern border; at least, I have seen
no good examples taken further south. Throughout British and Russian
America they are liable to be associated with true linarius at any point. In
Labrador, however, they are the prevailing, if not the only form. They are
also associated in the interior and on the west coast with another "species,"
to be noticed presently. It is difficult to estimate their numbers relative to
those of the two otiier species ; perhaps they are one for ten or twentj-, or even
in less proportion. These birds differ from linarius in, 1, smaller size, though
this is not very evident except on striking averages ; 2, in relatively and abso-
lutely larger, heavier, and wholly blackish bill, furnished with unusually
short and sparse jilumules ; 3, in color, which is above dusky, scarcely relieved
by lighter streaks, the rump only a trille lighter than the rest of the upper
parts, the sides very heavily streaked with dusky, and the red of the male
breast intense crimson.

The form is not to my knowledge found in Europe. Whatever causes have
operated to produce this special modification in linarius^ they have not been
effective in Europe, and have moreover in America only affected a small per
cent, of the total number of individuals. The resulting changes I cannot at-
tempt to explain. Besides being not referable to any known general laws,
they are in direct opposition to these. Climate, geographical position, &c.,
should, as we saw so satisfactorily in the case oi cajiescens, have enlarged and
blanched these birds, and given them heavier plumules, whereas we have the
contrary condition. We might suppose, indeed, that the wide dispersion and
irregular movements of the Dusky Red-polls may have interfered with the
equable operation of the laws just alluded to, but this does not account for the
diametrically opposite result attained.

The relations of this style to typical linari>is may be briefly exposed. So far
as known, it is decidedly more different from the latter than either of the two
forms last considered are. Out of several hundred specimens examined, there
are a few that cannot be refeired without a query to either species : these are all
from the interior of British America, and most of them are immature individu-
als. Except in these rare instances, the line between the two kinds is dis-
tinctly drawn. There is just a possibility that these dusky birds represent a
seasonal eispect of linarius ; but almost everything is against the suggestion.
On this supposition, the dusky birds ought to be found, at times, wherever
linarixis occurs, — which is not the case, as far as known. Tlie difference in
the average size, and particularly in the size and slope of the bill, is not satis-
factorily disposed of in this way.

If I were to venture an hypothesis in this case, I sliould be inclined to frame
one looking to such a class of causes, as, for example, that which has operated
in the Colorado desert in bleaching birds. As is well known, several birds
chiefly confined to that region are paler and grayer than their congeners (con-
species?) elsewhere. An influence of this class, working in an opposite direc-
tion, may have modified a certain fraction of northern ^giothus, such as
character of the forest or shrubbery mainly inhabited by these birds, the

[Oct.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 187

nature of the food obtained there, &;c. I noticed nothing, however, in Labra-
dor, that seemed sufficient for such end. It would be interesting to have in-
formation upon this point from observers in the interior of Arctic America.

If ca}icsce?is has been shown to have probably been at one time linarius, and
subsequently modified, as we have seen, by the operation of known laws, I see
no reason for supposing that /i/scwcen* is more distinct because we cannot so
readily trace the laws under which it has been made what it is. We have only
to take for granted, in this case, either a later departure from the common
standard, or, what is more probable, a less regular, continuous, and cousenta- .
neons operation of modif^'ing influences. In rufescens and holboeUi the effect
of these influences is as yet barely apparent ; \vl Juscescenn \l is already very
evident.

In Greenland, side by side with the blanched raollipilose canescpns, we have
a few singular ^Egiothi. It seems as if they had sprung like offshoots from
fuKccscens. and there in Greenland, stationary or nearly so, and isolated, the law
of latitude had come into play to enlarge them; but that further interference
with fnscescent features had not been experienced. These ^-Egiothi, that I call
rostralus, are : 1, as large as, or scarcely less than canescens (about six inches
long) ; 2, with a bill that is even an exaggeratiou of that offuscescens, being
still larger, thicker, more turgid, with short plumules, and black in color ; 3,
with the colors of fuscescens, the heavy stripes on the side being sometimes
carried quite across the belly. There appear to be fewer of these than of any
other JEgiothits ; I have not seen a dozen in all, and none except from Green-
land. One or two of these are appreciably lighter than the rest, and in fact,
shape of bill and total size apart, rather recall dull plumaged linarius. I
scarcely know what to make of this form, after accounting for its size as above,
and prefer to leave it with this simple statement of fact. In a classificatory
point of view, it appears to hold somewhat the relation \o fuscesceni that canes-
cens (or possibly rather only holboeUi) does to linarius. Though I did not reach
such opinion in my monograph of 1861, I should now, in spite of its several
very obvious peculiarities, consider its characters, in relation to those of /««-
cescens or liniarius, as ofless systematic value than those of any " species " ex-
cept rufescens and holboeUi. The small number of specimens at my command
will not allow me to expose the precise degree in vrhich it graduates towards
fascescens ; but it is probable that some such assimilation occurs, and that no-
thing but the birds' i|plation in Greenland prevents them from shading insen-
sibly mio fuscescejis.

lY. Perhaps the most interesting modification of JEyiothus remains to be
noticed ; I refer to what I call exilipes. Audubon figures it by mistake for
canescens, which I presume he never saw; and Elliot has recently given another
illustration. It is the " mealy red-poll " of American, but not of European,
writers. The peculiarities oi exilipes do not occur, so far as known, ia Asia,
Europe, or -Greenland, but they are characteristic of a large number — perhaps
the majority — of boreal and arctic American ^-Egiothus. These modified .S^io-
thi do not come so far south as linarius does ; in general they may be said to
be confined to British and Russian America, though some appear to occasion-
ally pass the northern boundaries of the United States in winter. They are
very generally dispersed, being contained in almost every collection sent from
the interior and the north-west coast, but are perhaps more abundant westward.
They are migratory, if irregularly so. The}- sometimes seem, judging from
collections, to be the only form in some localities, but more generally they are
associated, if not at the same season of the year, with linarius AnAfuscescens, —
sometimes both. It seems as if there were a wave of linarius swaying north
and south, between certain parallels of latitude ; another of exilipes between
certain higher parallels ; yet the two regularly meeting on common ground,
and each sending and preying still further in the direction of the other.

The characters of exilipes are these : 1, size of linariut ; 2, colors (very

1869.]

188 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

nearly) of canescens ; 3, a smaller, more regularly conic bill than linarius,
generally rather dusky than yellow, and with extremely heavy plumules ; 4,
remarkably small feet, produced mainly by absolute shortening of the toes.
We have here a unique assemblage of characters ; the modification that this
per centum of ^'Egiolhiis have undergone is not just like that of any other. Cli-
mate, apparently, has, as in the case of canescens, done what might have been
expected in respect to color: it has bleached the tints into the semblance of
those of canescens, taken away the stripes from the rump, leaving this largely
and purely white, and reduced those on the sides to a minimum; whitened the
edges of the wing and tail feathers ; made the rosy paler, and thickened the
nasal plumules. Latitude, on the other hand, has not efiected any perceptible
increase in size. This is curious, viewed beside the case of ro stratus, in which
size is increased, but color unaffected. Superadded to these changes is the
singular modification of the feet.

As is well known, absolute size of these members, and relative proportions
of the toes to each other, as well as to the length of tarsus, are among the
more constant features that birds present. Only a narrow margin seems to be
allowed, in the same species, for variation in these respects. In fact, looking
over the annals of ornithology, one is struck with the number of proposed
species called " longipes," " brevipes," " brachydactylus," etc., that have sub-
sequently been shown to be only accidental, or very partial modifications, not
holding good as a general rule. There are a great number of synonyms of this
particular class, needing no more than this allusion. At the same time, it is
equally well known that certain closely allied birds do really difl'er in precisely
tills particular, — sometimes with other peculiarities superadded, sometimes
with scarcely any, or none. A more or less decidedly terrestrial or arboreal
mode of life may reasonably be presumed, if not logically inferred, to have
something to do with this change. The case is better illustrated in comparing
allied genera. Thus Mimus is an eminently bush- and tree-living genus ; the
species of its nearest ally, Harporhi/nchtis, spend much of their time on the
ground, walking and scratching among leaves, &c. The feet of the latter are
correspondingly larger and stronger than those of the former. The same is
the case regarding P^jo/Zo, as compared with other allied genera less eminently,
or scarcely, terrestrial in habit. If such modification can be traced in this
grade of forms, I see no reason why it should not be exhibited, in however
much less degree, between congeneric species that differ in a more or less de-
cidedly arboreal mode of life. Admitting, then, possible modifications of the
feet, in specific as well as generic grades, — modifications correspondent to the
nature of the foot-hold that the birds habitually take, — there seems no reason
why the argument by analogy should not be carried a step further, and made
to include possible results from a difference in the kind of trees or bushes, or
the kind of ground that arboreal or terrestrial species respectively frequent.
Terrestrial sparrows of muddy situations will probably be found to have some
modifications of the feet not shared by those of sandy deserts, or of rocky
gorges. Rush-sparrows, as Ammodromi, that climb up perpendicular swaying
stems, have not the same feet as their nearest allies among bush-sparrows that
habitually rest upon horizontal and less yielding twigs. These are merely
illustrations in point of what I wish to propose, — namely, that the small feet
of ^4. exi/ipes may be due to a difference in the size, texture, &c., of the trees or
bushes that they habitually frequent, or are really confined to, as compared
with the greatly varying range of footholds that linarius, in its extensive move-
ments, necessarily takes. It does not seem irrational to suppose that the
stunted resinous conifers that form so marked a feature of the northern flora
may have produced, in the course of time, the modification that is now wit-
nessed. However well or ill grounded the suggestion may be, it is at least a
fair inference ; and, at any rate, I know of no other assignable cause for the
observed fact.

As intimated when canescens was spoken of, it is interesting to note that the

[Oct.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 189

same condition of feet is found in that species. The feet, indeed, are larger
than those of exiUpes, and the tarsi, particuhirlj, are long; but the toes are
still notably short, in a relative sense, not having increased pari passu with
enlargement in other respects. I would attempt to explain this fact in the
same way.

So far as I know, the claws of j^Egiothus have not been modified coincident-
ally with those changes that have made the several races what they are. The
claws of exiUpes and canesccns, indeed, are longer, compared with the toes, than
those of other forms ; but this a relative, not absolute difference. The claws
of all the species are liable to vary within rather wide limits, — this discrepancy
belonging clearly, however, to the class of individual peculiarities.

The conclusions to be drawn from the foregoing facts are obvious. We have
seen that canescens, the form most strongly differentiated at present, is also the
one most easily accounted for by the operation of certain known laws that
produce variation in species. If this were not a separate and independent
creation, it must have been evolved at some time out of Unarms. The ques-
tion of its specific distinction, then, is merely a question of time ; we can only
say that it has divaricated further than any other known forms from the
original standard, and that, though it has reached a point where most orni-
thologists would draw a dividing line qua species, yet it is reallj' only a va-
riety of Unarms. A fortiori, in the case of all the other above described modifi-
cations of Unarius, we have varieties, not species. Simply, they have not
progressed so far in the process of differentiation ; they either began to be
modified later, or the modifying influences have not been so effectual towards
that end. But if canescens is a " species," so also is each of the others. There
are only involved differences in degree, not in kind.

The Law of Development in the Flowers of AMBROSIA AETEMISI.EFOLIA.
BY THOMAS MEEHAN.

In the fruit of Ambrosia artemisixfoUa the perigynium is crowned with a
series of horns. I propose to show that these are all that remains of other
flower buds, which have been absorbed by their elder sister during infancy.

It is not generally known that this species is occasionally dioecious, though
Dr. Darlington in his Flora ce.itrica makes note of the fact ; nor is it known
to the mass of botanists that a peculiar form of neutral flower exists, though
many years ago Torrey & Gray (Flora of North America) briefly alluded to it.
These dioecious forms and neutral flowers afford the key to the whole struc-
ture.

In the regular form of this species the sequence of the flowers is according
to the laws recently developed in my papers on sex. The female flowers re-
ceive the plants' first and greatest care, and always appear in the lines of
strongest vitality, of which a vigorous axial development is one striking type.
The male flowers only appear in the weaker lines, after the cohesive force so
essential in building up the woody axis has been considerably spent. In the
purely pistillate forms we almost always observe an unusual axial activity.
The female flowers in the regular forms are sessile in the axils of the leaves ;
but in the mostly pistillate forms they are generally elevated on short pedun-
cles, giving the plants a peculiar twiggy appearance. On the other hand, the
nearly male plants, which by the way are rarely seen, present characteristics
the reverse of these. The heads, usually female, wlien appearing as male
flowers, exist as large burrs tightly set in the axils, without the slightest ten-
dency to pedunculation. Though varying in intensity, and occasionally inter-
mingling, no one can fail to see that these forces prevail in these forms — the
feminine, in connection with cohesive and vital activity in the axillary parts
— the masculine, with weakened axillary activity, and individualization.

The flowers themselves, however, afford a better illustration of this than the

1869.]

190 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

supporting parts. The male flowers are five to eight in each involucral cup.
— in the female they are single ; but in place of flowers the female has five to
eight horns on the perigynium. The want of correspondence in number in
parts which were uo doubt embryologically the same, together with a corres-
pondence in the number of the horns on the perigynium, would naturally sug-
gest to one acquainted with the absorbing or coherent power of the female influ-
ence that the primordial bud had absorbed the rest, of which all that remained
were these horns. This I subsequently proved to be more likely by the dis-
covery of i'»ro/o?-?«s o/^^er^'j/y/jia. Occasionally three female flowers appear in
one involucral cup. In such cases the two lateral ones have, mostly, no
horns, or rarely one or two ; while the central one has but from four to 'six —
evidently a less number than others which have no side flowers with them.
In the male flower we find two forms ; the perfect ones with five broad an-
thers, abundantly polleniferous, without horns, and without any attempt at
producing a style. The other class has anthers which seem never to produce
perfect ])olleu, but are projected into a " setiform inflexed appendage" or
horn, and have a single sterile style which is capped by a numerously rayed
stellate apex. Torrey & Gray {Flora N. M. Page 290) notice this form of
flower, but err in evidently believing it universal; while other authors seem
to refer to the former, ignoring or ignorant of the existence of the latter.

The absence of a style in connection with perfect anthers, and the attempted
production combined with the dificiency of pollen in the neutral ones, show
an evident progress towards a female stage ; and also it is clear that with this
progression is a tendency to cornution in the parts absorbed. I pointed out to some
of our botanical friends in the Academy some weeks ago, that from these cir-
cumstances the horus on the perigynium could scarcely be anything else but
the ren*ains of absorbed floicer buds,

I have now found a specimen Avhich affords the practical demonstration of
these truths — a female plant not a foot high, with enough of the cohesive
power to give it an entire female character, but not to the same extent that
more vigorous forms possess. The horns are in every state of gradation from their
usual condition on the perfect perygnia to petaloid scales, down to perfect flowers
with the regular twin styles; though adherent by their bases to the central or
main flower. Only for this early cohesion with, and thus a reception of the
female influence, the lower ones would undoubtedly have been male flowers.
I present this specimen, together with a suite of the others referred to, for
the Society's herbarium.

I may be again permitted to repeat what I have frequently said already in
papers before this and kindred associations, that there are probably in plants
two distinct principles going along together — the one hereditary — a conserva-
tive, coherent, female force, which, as the very existence of all things de-
pends on it, nature throws in and around it her strongest vital powers ; — and
variation a progressive, radical principle, the only object of which is to pre-
vent stagnation, — to seggregate and disperse rather than unite and preserve, —
and by giving varied form to matter, is the source of the endless changes which
give beauty and interest to the other; — less vital, less essential, less cared
for by nature because she reproduces herself by buds, tubers, suckers, roots,
and many other ways tvheii she does not care for variety, without it, but not less
essential to our pleasures and intellectual progress, and indeed the eternal
progress of all things.

I submit this paper as another contribution to a theory which may not yet
appear to others so clearly a law, as it continues by almost daily observations
to grow on myself.

iVoy. 2nd, 1869.
Mr. Isaac Lea in the Chair.
Twenty-nine members present.
The death of Dr. T. H. Turner, U.S.A., was announced.

[Nov.

h-:^ A\'S Phik'. 1860

Fig.l

'^

\ , /

/ ^

/ \

Fl 9'

I \l'

■'^ Fifi

V

/ \ ''

.^3 '■

MICROSCOPIC OTr'STALS IN GEMS,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 191

Kov. dfh.
The President, Dr. Hays, in the Chair.
Twenty-nine members present.

Nor. im.

Dr. Ruschenberger, Vice-President, in the Chair.
Twelve members present.

Nov. 23d.
Dr. Ruschenberger, Vice-President, in the Chair.
Twenty-six members present.

Nov. 30th.

Dr. Ruschenberger, Vice-President, in the Chair.

Twenty-five members present.

The following gentlemen were elected Members :

Rev. Z. M. Humphrey and Henry C. Miller.

JDec. 7th, 1869.
The President, Dr. Hays, in the Chair.
Twenty-one members present.

Dec. Uth.

The President, Dr. Hays, iu the Chair.

Twenty-nine members present.

The death of Benj. D. Walsh was announced.

I Dec. 21st.

Dr. Ruschenberger, Vice-President, in the Chair.

Twenty-three members present.

The following papers were presented for publication:

"On the Classification of Water Birds." By Elliott Coues. M. D.,

U.S. a;-

" Characters of some new Hepaticse, mostly North American, to-
gether with notes on a few imperfectly described species." By
C. F. Austin. ,

Prop. Cope made some remarks on a cranium of the Uyperaodon bidens,Svom
the coast of Rhode Island, presented by Samuel Powell, of Newport. He
stated that it was a female, which entered the harbor of the latter place with
a calf. A male was some time after cast ashore dead near Dennis, Mass., and

1869.J 14

192 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

was preserved complete in the Mus. Comp. Zoology, Cambridge. (See Allen,
Mammals Massachusetts.) He said that the muzzle of the female was longer
than represented for European specimens, but that that of the male was as
short, and that no difference conld be detected in the skeleton of either. He
therefore retained the name of//. bide?is. He stated that Mesoplodon soiverbien-
tis also occurred on the coast of Nantucket.

He next exhibited the left ramus of the mandible of a finner whale, from the
miocene of Edgecombe Co., North Carolina. He pointed out that its charac-
ters were nearest those of the Eschrichtius ccphalus, but that there was a groove
inside the upper edge of the jaw, that the nutritious foramina were much more
numerous, etc., etc. He called it Eschrichtius polyporits.

He exhibited a number of remains of fossil reptiles, from Sampson Co., North
Carolina, of cretaceous age, which were intrusive in miocene beds. Among
these were humerus, tibia, fibula, metatarsus, caudal vertebra, and perhaps
cervical vertebrae and ungueal phalange of a Dinosaur, discovered together by
Prof. W. C. Kerr, Director of the Geological Survey of North Carolina. The
remains indicated a species having the same general form and size as the Ha-
drosaiirus foulkei. The caudal vertebra was of very different form, and resem-
bled more that of Bi/!ceosaurus, minus the diapophyses. This vertebra was
elongate, depressed and ahgulate. The animal presented various other points
distinguishing it from Iladrosaurus, and was named Hypsibema crassicanda.

Two caudal vertebrae of another animal from the same County, but different
locality, indicated a true Hndrosaurus. One, near the thirtieth caudal, was
twice the size of that oi H. foulkei, the vertical diameter of the centrum being
4-5 inches. It presented so many peculiarities of form that Prof. Cope thought
it to have belonged to a species distinct from H. foulkei. A caudal, apparent-
ly terminal, was shorter than the same in that species. He named it Iladro-
saurus tripos.

Another reptile from the same locality was indicated by an elongate, conic
tooth, and perhaps by others, which had the cone in cone structure of those
of the species of the Crocodilian genus, Thecachampsa. It differed from all these
in the removal of the usually opposite dividing cutting ridges to a position
near together on the inner face of the crown, and the slight median contrac-
tion of the crown, which produced an appearance of enlargements a short
distance above the base and below the tip of the crown. Crown conic; length
2 in., 6 lines. He named it Polydectes biturgidus.

Dec. 28tk
Dr. Ruschenberger, Vice-President, in the Chair.

Thirty-eight members present.

The Report of the Biological and Microscopical Section was re-
ceived.

The publication of Dr. Leidy's Extinct Mammalian Fauna of
' Dakota and Nebraska, constituting the seventh volume of the Jour-
nal, was announced.

The following gentlemen were elected members: Capt. George
Wright, U. S. A., Wilbur F. Horn and Rev. Theodore W. J.
Wylie.

On favorable repoVt of the committees the following papers were
ordered to be printed :

[Dec.

NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 193

On the Classification of WATER BIRDS.*

BY ELLIOTT COUES, A.M., M.D., PH.D.

Captain and Assistant Surgeon, U. S. Army.

By " water birds " is meant tiie swimmers proper, as distinguislied from
aquatic, or even natatorial, Grallse. That the Natatores, so accepted, are one
of three primary divisions of birds, at least of carinate birds, is held to be de-
monstrable. I shall attempt the proof, and endeavor to define the natural
orders and families of the sub-class. I am authorized to state that the classifi-
cation here proposed has been adopted without modification by the Smith-
sonian Institution, in the arrangement of the Natatores in its museum.

Not to allude to early classificatory schemes that the progress of ornithology
has shown to be impossible, nor to those late systems, based upon the inesti-
mrtble labors of Miiller, Burmeister, Sundevall, Gabanis and others, that relate
mainly to the arrangement of the higher groups, there still remain several that
must be taken into the present consideration. Notablj', those of Nitzsch,
Vigors, Bonaparte, Lilljeborg and Huxley, which bear directly upon the sub-
ject in hand ; notice of which is necessarj'^ before defining the modification of
one of them that it is the design of the present paper io establish.

It maj' be here premised, and safely asserted, that heretofore no two orni-
thologists, bringing original research, and the conclusions deduced from it,
into action, have been able to agree closely in classification. There are as
many systems as there have been leaders in the science. But conflict in the
field of taxonomy has been chiefly along the line of the higher groups, — more
particularly Passeres. Respecting the Natatores, a singular unanimity has
prevailed in the definition of the group; and in the main, similar subdivisions
have been recognized, however diff"erently these have been collocated, and
estimated in the scale. Intermediate or " doubtful" forms are limited to two
or three families. Only one author stands far apart from the rest in the dis-
tribution of natatorial families, assigning part of them among what are known
as " Grallae," and the others with certain insessorial types. These facts have
perhaps another significance than that of simple matters of ornithological
record.

Referring to the authors just mentioned, we find four principal methods of
primary division of birds : (I) a dichotomous arrangement in two "parallel se-
ries,'" based upon one physiological character, — Bonaparte; (2) a trichoto-
mous, founded upon very general considerations, — Nitzsch, and after him Lillje-
horg ; (3) a quinary, a modification of the second, by dividing two of the three
divisions into two each, and with minor changes, — Vigors, and manj' others ;
(4) another trichotomous, but from a totally diff'erent standpoint — recognition
of birds as modified reptiles — and carried out with special reference to one
anatomical character, afi'orded by certain cranial bones, — Huxley.

After Oken's generalizations upon the condition of newly-hatched birds,
Bonaparte made the scheme of Altrices and Priecoces his own by strenuous, un-
qualified advocacy, and elaboration of details with surprising care and skill.
The system took strong root, and is held by many as the key-note of the
natural classification, comparable, in equivalency, to such profound divisions
as e. g., Exogens and Endogens among flowering plants, or riacentalia and Mono-
tremata among mammals. That the system has been unduly stretched may
perhaps be shown.

Comparison, for instance, of Bonaparte's two subclasses M'ith those of pla-
cental and implacental mammals, may show how far the former may be

*Con.«iderable time has passed between the preparation and the publication of this
paper ; in revising the proofs I have added foot-notes, where comment or explanation
seemed desirable, in preference to altering the original text; this is left untouched.

1869.]

194 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

carried. There is, I believe, a perfect parallelism in the physiological point
involved between mammals and birds ; but it does not reach to the grade just
supposed. In Marsupials, the condition of the young at birth is associated
with a radical modification of the generative apparatus in both sexes. The
sexual organs alone would enable us to predicate, regarding the condition of
the foetus at term, a departure from the ordinary standard obtaining in higher
orders, even were we unable to say in what the difference would consist. It
is not so with birds ; if there be any structural modifications correspondent to
altricial and praecocial nature, they remain to be discovered. From nothing
now known could either be predicated, in any given instance ; our inferences
would be purely upon consideration of known allied forms.

Marsupials are so far " synthetic " that they comprehend the semblances of
other mammalian orders. There are carnivorous, herbivorous, quadrumanous,
etc., marsupials. The number of forms that a given group may represent or
repeat under modifications peculiar to itself, is a well-known test of the char-
acter of such assemblage, and in a measure of its grade in a taxonomy, only
inferior to that afforded by the modifications themselves. Marsupials and
Monotremes conform in both ways to the requirements of a primary division
of mammals. But among birds, altricial and prsecocial orders must be so
drawn that, while they are mutually representative to a degree, as wholes, they
do not include, each in itself, modified representations of each other. Thus,
e. ff., in Bonaparte's parallel of altricial Gavix and prfficocial Anseres, among
swimmers, it is impossible to find families representing each other to anything
like the degree, or in anything like the number of cases, that may be shown
when Natalores are divided upon another basis, and the families differently
worked out.

If helplessness at birth, compared with precocity, means, among birds,
" high " as opposed to " low " in the scale, then either the reverse is the case
with mammals, or else we must compare altricial Insessores with marsupials,
and prsecocial Natatores with the higher orders : a dilemma, either horn of
which is sufficiently difficult.

I believe that the strongest analogy, if not actual homology and exact
parallelism, between the altricial and praecocial series of birds, and certain
conditions of mammals, really does exist. My meaning will be evident, if I
simply refer to the difference between a kitten or puppy at birth, and a newly-
born calf or colt. If all mammals are "altrices" by their very nature, as ex-
pressed in their name, there is a distinction with a difference in the two modes
of exhibiting this nature. The young of one series of mammals are born weak
and helpless, unable to stand, often blind and naked ; the nipple must be
brought to these. In the other series, the young walk or swim at birth, are
clothed like the parents, and can see ; these betake themselves to the nipple.
Here is the mammalian representation of the two avian series. This is so
evident and so certain that it must have been already recognized, though it is
original so far as the writer is concerned.* As among birds, moreover, this
distinction marks, iu a general way, large groups ; even orders might be based
upon it. But it would not suffice for a primary dichotomous division of mam-
malia, even of placental mammals ; nor, should occasion arise, as when its
requirements did not accord with structural modifications, would it take pre-
cedence over the latter, to the dismemberment or inversion of natural groups.

In opposing undue estimate of the value of this physiological character, I
am far from underrating, still less ignoring, its import. As collateral testimony
in the formation of orders and location of families, it has much weight; and

*I find exact expre.ssion of the case: — " The differences in degree of individual develop-
ment attained at l)irtli parallel, in Mammals, those in Birds expressed by the terms altrices
Hnd prucoce.s. The hoofed quadruped enters the world with the use of all its .senses; in
a few hour.s can follow the dam, and keep pace with her if she sees cause for flight: the
feline is born Mind and helpless; some days elapse ere the commissure of the eyes is un-
sealed."— Owen, on membrana impillaris, Comp. Anat. and Phys. Vert, iii, p. 754, 1808.

[Dec.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 195

certain doubtful cases will probably be decided by reference to it. It draws a
sharp, if here and there a broken, line between Gallinie and Columbx. It sepa-
rates, with precision. Herons and their allies from other Grallce. It goes some
way in distinguishing lamellirostral from other Natatores ; and other instances
of its application might be cited.

Some other points are to be considered in this connection. The various
conditions of single, double, and middle monogamy, and polygamy, are to be
regarded. Some generalizations, apparently important, may be drawn from
the comparative size of the air-space in the eggs of the two series.* AUriccs
usually lay few eggs, Prascoces many; an evident ^adaptation to facilities of
caring for young under the two regimes. Yet an immense group of prascoces
— Grallx — lay but four, which is below the average of altricial Insessores.
There are also many families among Rasores and higher Grollse, — too many to
be considered as exceptions proving a rule, — in which altricial or prtecocial
characters are but doubtfully e.xpressed, or else do not agree with unquestion-
able affinities in other respects. Finally, it should be observed that, as all
Insessores are altrices, no parallelism exists between the great majority of ex-
isting birds and the priEcocial series of walkers, waders and swimmers, the
relationships between which and Insessores, if any, are only of remote analogy,
not affinity. To speak figuratively : we come a long way, — the greater part
of the whole way — down the bird scale, before meeting with any indications
of difference in this physiological point. Arrived at the lower walkers, and
higher waders, we first dimly see a certain principle striving, with uncertain
results, to assert itself. Wavering for a while, at length it gains force and
effects fissuration of birds into two or more "parallel" — i. e., self-repeating or
self-representing — series; the main stem continues unaltered, through wading
Herons to swimming Tolipalmi, Longipenncs, kc. ; the fork, first distinct among
some walkers, thence continuing through the smaller Grallie, &c., to anatiform
swimmers. This is a matter of observation, not an hypothesis; is it sufficient
basis for a primarj^ division of birds ?

In the application of Bonaparte's principle to our subject of swimming birds,
the results are seen to be no better than was to have been expected. It is diffi-
cult to say which one of this author's many schedules, variously modified,
should be held most expressive of his views. That given in the Comptes
Rendus of Oct.31, 1853, probablydoes his^classification the most justice. Here
water birds form his sixth order, Gavix, comprehending Tolipalmi and Longi-
pennes, and his tenth, Anseres, including all other Natatores. The two groups
are separated by all the Rasores, the Struthious birds, and all the Grallse ex-
cept Herons. Beyond question, swimming birds, however viewed as to their
subdivisions, cannot be separated thus ; the steganopodous and macropterous
Natatores cannot be separated from others by three, or by any, orders. Here
they are made to differ more from other swimmers than the Gallinaceous and
Grallatorial birds do. The structural differences between a penguin and a
duck are certainly as great as those between an auk and a cormorant ; yet in
one instance the birds stand side by side in the system, in the other they are
divided by intervention of three diverse orders. But a more serious objection
to this schedule, and one, too, coming from the author's own side of the ques-
tion, is found in the fact that Urinatores are not all Prsecoces, as they were
in this place represented. They were consequently subsequently referred to
Gavice, and the penguins made a distinct order. But it so happens, unfortu-
nately or otherwise, that neither are the Urinatores, with or without tlie pen-
guins, all Altrices. In short, birds will not lie conformably disposed in the
two Procrustean beds of Altrices and Friecoces. As far as known, all Insessores
(qu. Columbie ?), Herodiones, Steganopodes, and Longipennes are Altrices ; St?-ti-
thiones and Lamellirostres are Prrecoces ; beyond these, neither can be safely
predicated of groups of higher rank than families, without exceptions and re-
servations.

1869.]

* Cf., e. g., G. A. Lewis' Lectures on Ornithology, pt. i, p. 17.

196 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP

As the sura of the criticism I would be disposed to offer on Bonaparte s ar-
rangement, I would say : Not to refer to Rasores, Grallse and Natatores as vary-
ing exponents of two primes, altrices and prsecoces, but to regard the former
as themselves the integers, of which " aliricial " or " precocial '' are predicable
as exponents of modifications of which the three are alike susceptible. So,
therefore, altricial or praecocial Natatores, not natatorial Altrices or Priecoces.^

Nitzsch's earlier classificationf was a dichotomous division of Aves into
Carriatee aud Ratitse, after Merrem ; an arrangement that anticipated the later
one of Prof. Huxley in sepai-ating the struthious birds from those with a keeled
sternum. He afterwards J became satisfied that Strut hionidce et aff. should
come among Cursores, and divided all bii'ds into Av. Aerese, Av. Terrestres, and
Av. Aquaticm, — birds of the air, earth and water. These are difficult of precise
definition in terms descriptive of structural modifications, in consequence of
the occurrence of intermediate and aberrant forms, that furnish exceptions to
almost any possible diagnosis. But it comprehends a broad, well-founded
generalization, violates the requirements of no natural groups, and largely
fulfils the main conditions of a natural system. If the point be well taken, it
follows that birds — that Carinate birds at any rate — are modelled after three
types, that, however modified or even changed into Ihe semblance of each
other in some cases, retain definite tangible characters. Tlie system appears
susceptible of a crucial test. If it be true, each one of the three main stems
of the bird type must repeat or represent, with unquestioned fidelity, in some
one or more of its branches, the other two. Among the orders and families
into which, e. c/., Natatores are differentiated and specialized, representations
of Aerete and Terrestres must be found; the relationships, of course, not of
actual affinity, but of analogical resemblance. I think that the system will
stand such test, and shall in the sequel apply it in some detail. Establish-
ment of one of the three groups is tantamount to fixing the other two.

Nitzsch's Natatores are a suborder Av. aquat. palmatw, as distinguished from
Av. aq. grallce. He adopts five "families," two of which are rather associa-
tions of families {Stegaiiopodes and Pygopodes). He places the Flamingoes
(called Odontoglossie) in Gralhc. Podoa he adds to Stcganopodes.

The quinary system of Vigors, || in its primary divisions, is a modification of
the trichotomous just noticed. Disregarding subclasses, he proceeds at once to
five orders. The two first are a division of ^y. Aerece into Raptores and Inses-
iores, according as the birds are habitues of the upper air or of the trees more par-
ticularly, — a distinction better borne out by actual structure of the birds than
bj' reference to this assumed difference. Nitzsch's two divisions of Av. aq.
Grallce and Palmatai give, with scarcely a variation. Vigors' two last orders
GraUa/ores and Natatores. Vigors' middle order, Rasores, comprehends galli-
naceous birds and pigeons. That these divisions are in the main strictly natu-
ral, is probably not open to serious question. A chief defect is in theinequiva-
lency of the five orders. Thus Rasores contains types more dissimilar from each
other than Raptores are from (other) Insessores ; and this, too, without taking
Ratitm into consideration. If he would make ordinal distinction of Raptores
and Insessores, pari passu he should have separated Columhie from Galliiice. His
Insessores, again, contain types as mutually dissimilar as either of them are
from Raptores. Without opening here the question of Ratilcc, nor of recogniz-
ing, aside from ostriches, groups higher than orders, it may be said that this
system requires modification in the adoption of several more orders, — his Ra-
sores and J?i.sessores especially demanding dismemberment into two or three.

* In this discussion of Bonaparte's scheme, it might be objected that I galvanize a dead
body in order to kill it over again. But doubtless my objectors can call to mind several
signal instances where, within the last few years, Bonaparte's system has been accorded
the importance which is here criticised.

fObserv. de Av. Art. Carot. Comm. 1829.

X Pterylographie, etc., 1840.

II Obs. on the Nat.Atfin. that connect Ord. and Fam. of Birds. Trans. Linn. Soc.xix, 1827.

[Dec.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 197

By this means we should arrive at about a dozen orders of apparently the
same taxouomic value.

With endless minor modifications at different hands, yet with main points
intact, this system has come into general use, holding its own against many
technical objections, with a vitality something remarliable in the history of
the science. There is that about it that appeals strongly to general opinion,
representing average " common sense," and commands assent, however quali-
fied and guarded. The most extensively used, it is also the best abused sys-
tem of all, particularly in that phase it gained at the hands of Swainson et aff.
Much argument, and not a little invective, has been wasted, or worse, upon
the various " quinary," " septenary," " circular," &c., systems that have re-
volved like satellites around Vigors' standpoint. It must be vital, or it would
before this have been buried. It must be weak at points, or it could not have
been so successfully attacked. It appears to have suffered more from the in-
discretion of its friends than the hostility of its enemies.

The child's " classification " is the placing of objects in a line one after the
other. A step in advance is their arrangement in several contiguous lines,
straight or waved, parallel, oblique or crossing. The insurmountable difficulty
is that these lines lead anywhere, — nowhere in particular. Any linear arrange-
ment is so clearly impossible, that I only excuse myself for alluding to it at
all by taking it as the initial point of departure in this portion of the present
essay. It was a stride onward when the idea was conceived of making these
lines return upon themselves. Not only were otherwise inevitably bizarre
juxtapositions dene away with, but a greater end, the production of surfaces
instead of lines, was secured. Anywhere in these planes, from centre or type-
point to periphery or aberrant points, forms could be located. With the
" circle," an indefinite number of points of contact or inosculation became
possible. The circularian could bring his three, five, seven, or other " sub-
typipal" forms around his " type circle," weigh the importance of each by the
size of his circles, and grade relationships from near affinity to remote analogy.
The elastic sj-stem seemed perfect with its machinery of "wheels witliin wheels."
Criticism of this scheme has too often ended in a smile or a sneer, yet without
touching upon the really vulnerable pomt. A system that disposes objects in
circumscribed planes is a great advance over a linear arrangement, but it
stops half-way to the goal. The third dimension is needed ; to length and
breadth must be added thickness ; the circle must become a sphere.

Thus I conceive that every group of birds, from the assemblage of indi-
viduals called a species, to the very highest, constitutes or represents a solid of
the three dimensions. We cannot predicate affinity or analogy only to the
right or left, — the top or bottom, — but must take it that all groups, near or
remote, may approach, touch, or fuse with each other, along the axis of either
of the thiee possible diameters. With whatever result in our attempt to pro-
ject an ornithological system on flat paper, yet we cannot imagine the groups
to be all distributed in one plane surface, or even in several " higher ' or
"lower" parallel planes. Just as the stars, that appear scattered on a con-
cave surface, are harmoniously distributed throughout space in its three ex-
tensions, so, types of birds with reference to each other. The avenues of
mutual approach, whatever their number, do not all lie in one plane, but may
lie in any of the perpendicular planes whose intersection generates a solid.

I used the word " sphere " merely as the general expression of solids with
indefinite number of sides ; not presuming to say that this is the real shape
either of birds as a unit, or of their subdivisions. Birds could only assume
this shape if developed equally in all directions, which apparenllj', I may say
certainij^, is not the case. The figure may be conoidal, like half an hour-glass,
whose other half is reptiles, or only the Pterosaurian type of that class ; the
two meeting at a point, perhaps Archseoj^teryz. Speculations upon the contour
of the figure are, however, out of place. Again, the superficies of this solid,
whatever its form, is not necessarily, nor even probably, smooth. We may

1869.]

198 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF

conceive of it as presenting irregular saliencies drawn out even into arm-like
processes, reaching toward, or touching, mammalian, reptilian and piscine
groups ; or reentrances, into which are extended corresponding-outgrowths from
other forms of life. Classification is not the laying side by side of plane
figures, circular or otherwise ; but the piling over against each other of
variously shaped solids, that meet and fit at mutually conformed and adapted
points or surfaces of contact. The bird is laid against the mammal' at the
point Slrulhio ; against the reptile at the point Archfeopte7-i,z, or rather by a
surface of which this type was one point; against the fish (probably the Elas-
mobranchiate fish) at the point Sjj/ieniscus, and so on. Inside the figure Aves,
everywhere from centre to superficies, lie piled in certain order, all lesser
figures, from species to sub-class, mutually fitting on every side. The problem
is to discover, as nearly as may be, the plan according to which the several
stones are shapen, coaptated in the building of the solid structure. We do
not deal with an empty shell.*

Professor Huxley's classificationf is materially difl^erent from any other. It is
probably the most stirring ornitholgical event since the discovery of Archceop-
teryx. It is an attempt to classif}^ birds with reference to a single set of charac-
ters — the modifications of certain cranial bones. The test is critically applied
and rigidly carried out, necessitating a new division of the class, bj' breaking
up most of the higher groups usually recognized, substititting others, and call-
ing for a hitherto unsuspected sequence of orders and families. The primary
division is into three " orders," apparently correspondent in taxonomic value
with the "sub-classes" of most writers. Saururx, represented by the Archm-
opteryx alone : Ratitse, including Struthiones et afif., seemingly about equivalent
to Plniysteriue Nitz., Brevipenne.s Lillj., Cursores s. Curretitcs alior.; and C'arinatie,
embracing all other existing birds, that agree in the possession of a keeled
sternum. This initial step, however, is taken upon other grounds than the
characters of the palatal, &c., bones alone ; and its adoption may be found
imperative. I am not prepared to otter anything upon the question, Carinaiie
only falling within the scope of the present paper. These are divided into four
orders, correspondently with as many main modifications of the bony palate,
that only exceptionally merge into each other. Dicholophus, Crax (^ylobicera)
and Picidie are the only intermediate forms known to the author. The two
first may be regarded " as transitional between the Schizognathous and
Desmognathous sections, or, at any rate, as approaching the latter division"
(1. c, p. 455). The woodpeckers " are in fact not Desmognathous, the palate
in these birds exhibiting rather a degradation and simplification of. the
Aegithognathous structure," (p. 468.) The fact then is unquestionable, that
C'arinatie may be divided into four groups by certain characters, the value of
which, as affording correct indications of natural affinities or not, is the point
at issue.

It will scarcely be questioned hj any, that groups, to be taxonomically
equivalent, should be separated from each other by characters of equal or
corresponding value ; that is, the sum total or average of distinctive features
should be as nearly as possible of the same amount or degree. An inequality
in this respect of the groups formed under this system is evident. Not to refer
to the primary divisions, in the next lower scale, that of " sub-orders," one
family stands apart from all other Carinatie — the Tinamous alone representing
Drovieeognathoi. As the author ivnlj says, " the small actual extent of the group
in which " the dromaiognathous structure obtains, is no argument against
its validity as a sub-order. While this would be conceded, issue would be

* The three foregoing paragraphs are allowed to stand as they were written, with some
misgivings; not lest the thoughts that prompted them be not well enough, but lest the
expressions used may fail to convey to others exactly the idea desired to be advanced. I
do not expect to be lipre accused of using the imaginative in place of the reasoning facul-
ties, unless I am misunderstood.

t P. Z. S., 18G7, p. 415.

\P

ec

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 199

taken upon the question whether any other characters separate the Tinamous
as widely from tlie Ka-'iores with which they were associated, as the latter are
separated from the birds of other orders ; or, in a wider sense, are the Tinamous
as different from all other Caritiatse as any Schizognathous bird, e. g. a plover,
gull or dove, is from any desmognathous bird, as a hawk, parrot or cuckoo?
If not, an inequivalency of value between the sub-orders is implied, without
any reference of course to their comparative extent. Aside from the fact ihat
the Tinamous have " a completely struthious palate," it would probably be
denied by none — not even by the author himself — that no characters can be
found whereby to separate Tmamus from other GaUinie as a group of higher
rank than a family ; and further, tliat its peculiarities are of that kind or grade
usuall}- held throughout the ornithological system to be of family consequence.*
But if Tinamus can sustain an order Dromieognaihie, the rest must follow. It
is a fair test, apparently, of the real value of the basis of the system. Seeing
that here the characters of the palate bones are at variance with all others, it
is next to be inquired how far they agree with the indications of natural
affinity, afforded in other instances by general characters.

The schizognathous structure obtainsf in all Rasorcs (excl. Tinamus) in
Cohnnbx, in most Gralbn, and about half of Natatores. The desmognathous
prevails in other Natatores, in Herodiones of Grallce, in all Raptures, and
part of higher Insessores, (not necessary to particularize here,) tlie rest of
the latter being aegithognathous. If the palate characters are sure
indices of affinity, the two large groups of Grallee and Natatores must be
dismissed as unnatural, and their components rearranged in two other series,
in each of which occurs a serial relation of families usually held to be widely
separated, or, in some cases to represent nearly extremes of form. A cor-
morant or gannet comes next to the birds of prej', which only separate them
from parrots. A goose is nearer to an eagle than to a gull. A pigeon comes
nearer to a penguin or crane than to an insessorial bird. An albatross
is more nearly related to a peacock than to a pelican. These, it is true, are
among extreme instances ; but the extremes as well as the means are a part
of the system. In Schizognathce., a sequence of groups is Rallidse, Laridse
et aif., Spheniscidse., Rasorcs; in Desmognathm, a sequence is Herodionex,
Stega?iojwdes, Raptores. Discussion of these points is unneeded, as it would
be merely a rehearsing of the principles that have hitherto guided all orni-
thologists in framing classifications. Here, characters of every sort are made
subservient to one. The arrangement has the appearance — be it real or simu-
lated— of a cryptogram, to which an arbitrary standard is the only key.

But ex parte statements do not do the subject justice ; views for as well as
against the system should be presented. Prof. Huxley considers Charadrio-
morpheeas a central group of Schizognaths, leading outward by three " distinct
series or gradations." In one of these, Oiididse lead from plovers to cranes,
and such genera as Psophia and R/unochwtus, thence to rails. In another,
Hemipodius is intermediate between plovers and GalUnie ; whence Syrrhaptes
leads to pigeons. A third series begins with the gulls, leads through petrels
to auks, and so to penguins ; " the osteological resemblances between a plover,
a gull," &c., " being so close that it is utterly out of the c^uestion to regard
these birds as members of different orders," (p. 455.) Conceding these series
and relationships to exist, without reservation, still another point is easily
raised. Passing from plovers to cranes and rails, in the manner indicated,
the general affinities of some of the latter lead quite as naturally to certain
Desraognaths, as herons and Totipalmates. I may instance Heliornithidce,
really ralloid, as Brandt has shown, if osteology' goes for any criterion, but

* I hold Tinamus et aff. to be the expression of the gallinaceous process towards, or ten-
dency to inosculate with, Ratitse; i. e., a struthious phase of development or modification
of a strictly rasorial idea.

flam indebted throughout to Prof. Huxley's paper for statements of facts respecting
palatal characters.

1869.]

200 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

related to Steganopods, at Plotits. From plovers again, a pure grallatorial
form, Recurvirostra, shows transition at least as sure as others claimed, to
other palmate Grallce as Phanicoplerus, and so to Lamellirostres, of Desmognathce.
In another series certain Procellariidce lead into desmognatbous groups. Prion
has a lamellated bill, like that of a duck. Ilalodroma has a gular pouch
like the Steganopods ; these last are directly affined to the herons by Balamiceps
and Cdncroma. In many general features an albatross is like a pelican. An-
other Cecomorph, Colymbus, is really totipalmate, like all Dysporomorphs ; the
hallux Vjeing lateral and connected with the base of the second digit ; were
its hind toe as long as a cormorant's and the webbing increased jxtri passu,
it would be stegauopodous. The relationships of the longest-winged Dysporo-
morph, Tachypetes, with the similarly constituted gulls and petrels, will
scarcely be denied. In an opposite direction, the relations of some short-winged
Cecomorphs, as auks and grebes, with similarly modified Dysporomorphs,
as cormorants and darters, will hardly be overlooked. Not to multiply ex-
amples of these transitions, in another direction than that according with
the requirements of the sj'stem, it does not appear that the links by which
Schizognathsand Desmognaths are bound to each other are weaker than those
by which either of the two is held together ; or so weak as those connecting,
for example, Raptores with Steganopods. And however the present argument
may be invalidated by insufficient or injudicious advocacy, the above given
broad facts of comparative degrees of relationship remain.

Since palatal modifications do not indicate groups of the taxonomic grade
we have been considering, it remains to enquire how far they avail in the con-
struction of lower associations. No one will question how nearly Prof. Hux-
ley's subdivisions agree with natural families, or orders, as the case may be.
CharadriomorpJise correspond very nearly with that eminentlj' natural assem-
blage of smaller Grallx, called Limicolse, or Scolopaces. Geranomorphie are as
nearly Paludicolie or Fulices : with the addition of Grus, kc, which is here
much more naturally assigned them among the herons. Cecomoi-phie compre-
hend both macropterous and brachypterous swimmers ; but though the asso-
ciation may seem at first sight to be a little forced, really it is not so. Longi-
pennes and Urinatores come next each other in any system, and some forme
actually inosculate : e. g. Ilalodroma with Mergidus, Pvffinus with Culy/nbidce,
(tibial apophysis, &c.) Spheniscomorphce are penguins alone — order Pldopteri
Bp,, tribe NuUipennes s. Impennes alior., 'Spheniseidx auct. ; touching Ceco-
morphs at the point Alca impennis. Alectoromorphse are GaUinic, excl. Tina-
rnus ;■ and it is interesting, moreover, that the palate bones allow separation of
Peristeromorphse. The unnatural nature of too intimate association of pigeons
with the true scratchers is borne out by appeals to every character, it would
seem. Chenomorphie are precisely lamellirostral or anatiform Natatores, a
group respecting the boundaries of which there is no dispute. The Flamin-
goes, as might have been anticipated, are found to require Janus- like division —
Amphimorphx. Pelargomorphx are precisely Herodiones : Dysporomorphx are
exactly Steyanopodes. And so on.

Prof Huxley has laid ornithologists under twofold obligations : First, he has
pointed out in elaborate detail a certain character, the value of which was not
only unknown, but also unsuspected before ; and has shown how perfectly it
marks groups of a certain grade. Secondly, he has demonstrated once more —
and, it is to be hoped, for the last time — the futility of attempting to found
such fundamental divisions upon any one single character.

What has gone before is possibly an estimate of the value and office of pala-
tal structure not very different from what the general verdict of ornithologists
will be. That the palate bones afford nearly always correct indications up to a
certain point ma}^ be regarded as demonstrated by Prof. Huxley's researches.
That they may be taken as the basis of the primary division of Caritiatte will
probal)ly never be generally admitted. In ambiguous cases appeal to them
may turn a nicely-balanced scale, and prove invaluable iu limiting certain

[Dec.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 201

groups. But fiiual appeal must not be made from all other characters to these ;
but from these— as one of many sets— as collateral testimony — to the total of
the rest. As the sole basis for a system of ornithological classification, the
scheme will probably remain in critical abeyance only until the time when its
brilliancy shall have been forgotten, and its unsoundness alone be remem-
bered.*

Professor Lilljeborg's systemf begins with the same three primary divisions
that Nitzsch adopted after abandoning Ratitce, and reducing them to an order
of Cursores. Further, however, it differs materially and is in some respects
unique. It is particularly to be observed of this system, that no single set of
characters — no special theory — guided its formation. The author takes a
general average of characters, and seeks to harmonize, as far as passible, con-
flicting views of such ornithologists as have been led to propose schemes
based upon special investigations. Bonaparte's ideas respecting Altrices and
PrcBcoces; Nitzsch's researches on the Carotids and Pterylosis ; Siindevall's re-
sults regarding wing-coverts and flexor muscles of the feet ; Cabanis' studies
on the scutellation of the tarsus and other points ; Muller's generalizations re-
specting the lower larynx; not to mention other data, have all been brought
into use, judiciously estimated, and carefully coordinated. It is certainly the
most ' catholic' system that has ever been proposed ; there are intrinsic rea-
sons why we might anticipate its high excellence.

Having already given some reasons for my belief that all carinate birds at
least may be primarily divided into three groups, I need not Repeat them, in
assenting unreservedly to the way in which Professor Lilljeborg draws the
lines dividing Natatores, Cursores and Insessores. There are a few ambiguous
forms : Phoenicopleridie and Heliornithidoe are among them, coming between
the first and second ; some of the more terrestrial pigeons, or gallinaceous
birds with barely elevated hind toe, may be others, coming between the
second and the last. These may be noticed as well here as anywhere.

The Flamingoes are purely " grallatorial " in general conformation, but
they are palmate, with duck-bill ; and their internal structure is said to re-
semble that of Anseres more than Herons. Too much stress must not be laid
upon the webbed feet, for some undoubted Grallae are palmate, and all Natatores
are not. The carotids show nothing, for they are exceptional in the class of
birds. The balance is very even ; there is perhaps no more purely transitional
type. The palate bones would carry them near Chenoviorphs; ; the birds are said,
also, to be pracocial, another indication to the same efi'ect. But as the author
takes the condition of the thigh and cms with reference to the body as a
primary feature, he consequently assigns Phcenicopierus to Cursores. Heliorni-
thidoe. are, has been said, pretty conclusively fulicarious ; the author does not
specially refer to them. Pigeons, usually placed in Rasores as a suborder, are
here made an order of Insessores. They are palpable intermediate connecting
forms; some terrestrial ones inosculating with Jiasores, others, truly arboreal,
as evidently coming under Insessores ; a few are analogized if not actually af-
fined with Accipitres. Now it is characteristic of Cursores to walk on the ground ;

*I should remark that the.se paragraphs were written before I had seen any of the
many criticisms that Prof. Huxley's article has called forth. I am more gratified than
surprised to find how nearly the views of some authors for whom I entertain high respect
agree with my own. I make no change whatever in consequence of what I have lately
read ; for though I might now be inclined to add considerably to the above, the appear-
ance of the very articles in question has rendered unnecessary what more I should have
to say.

A correspondent, whose name, were I authorized to use it in this connection, would be
recognized as that of an eminent ornithologist, writes just now: — " Inasmuch as [this sys-
tem] is based upon a single set of characters, it cannot be otherwise than arbitrary, and
hence unsatisfactory. So far as the anatomical facts presented are concerned, it has some
value; but the arrangement I deem to be on the whole far from a natural one. In short,
I cannot regard it as other than a retrograde step, notwithstanding the excellent charac-
ter of the author as a naturalist. It is, it seems to me, far inferior to others of a much
earlier date."

f English reprint of original Swedish: P. Z. S., Jan. 1866.

1869.]

202 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

of Insessores to hop. Pigeons are cursorial iu that they (invariably I believe)
walk : and other rasorial features need not be dwelt upon. They are also
schizognathous, like Rasores. On the other hand, it is a fundamental character-
istic of 'Cursored to have the hallux elevated, though Herodiones are a single
exception. This feature is not presented by the pigeons, which are moreover
mostly as truly arboricole as the majority of Tnsessores. They are mostly Al-
trices, like the last. The balance appears in favor of their being Tnsessores, as
the author holds them.

The Ostriches and affines are in this arrangement reduced to an order
Brevipennes of Cursores. Archseopteryx is not noticed, as may be said of other
extinct forms.

Twelve orders succeed to the three sub-classes ; agreeing in the main with
divisions almost universally recognized, and defined iu an unusually satisfac-
tory manner. A notable point of difference between this and other systems
lies in the tenth order, Strisores, which, as framed, does not largely accord
with any previously established group. It is " a polymorphic group." as the
author says, not easy to define by positive characters An order Zygodactyli,
equivalent to Scansores auct. is retained ; here, if anywhere, ulterior revision
and decided modifications may be required. The zygodactyle birds appear to
have so long had their place as a distinct order more because it has not been
clear what to do with them" if dismembered, than anything else. Toes iu pairs
is a thoroughlj^artiticial character, as used; it is universally allowed that it
unites birds otherwise widely dissimilar. It seems to be really only a modifi-
cation to which any one family or genus of several groups is liable ; if so
its value has been largely overrated. It is most probable that the "order"'
Scansores or Zygodachjli will be broken up, in time, or at least restricted to
some one of the types — perhaps the parrots, — now included under it; more
fitting places being found for the cuckoos, trogans, toucans, woodpeckers, &c.

Regarding Prof, Lilljeborg's Natatores, I may express my conviction that
the four orders he defines are the only natural ones, and that as such they
must ultimately prevail. 1 only criticise the division of these four orders
into two "groups;" an intercalation between the subclass and the orders
that is at least superfluous. Not that all the distinctions implied in the
terms " Simplicirostres" and '^ LameUirostres " do not obtain ; but that the
groups are inequivalent. Lamelliroslres are not more different from the Sim-
plicirostres than the several components of the latter are from each other.
A goose, e. g., is not more different from a gannet than a penguin is. On
this ground I hold the division to be unnatural as well as unnecessary. The
two groups are further redundant, in that they have no analogues in other
parts of Prof. Lilljeborg's admirable system.*

With the foregoing qualificaiions I follow this arrangement very closely.
But I think that ornithologists will find it necessary to adopt many more
families and sub-families than this author does, particularly among higher
groups. I find it so even among Natatores, as will appear in the sequel.

NATATORES.

Relations and analogies of the sub-class.
Swiming-birds are so definitely circumscribed, that there appear to be but
two types liolding disputable place. Phoenicopteridie have just been noticed.
Helio'rnithidw. have been located with the Grebes, by Schlegel and others, ap-
parently on account of the lobed feet. But this is surely an error ; the rela-
tionship is of analogy, not affinity. They have been referred to Steganopodes,
next to Flofidsc, by Bonaparte and others; upon what ground does not
appear. As already said, osteology carries them to fulicarious Grallx. It

* I doubt, too, that the definitions of these groups will .«tand test without qualification.
In general, as claimed, one is altricial, the other prrecocial ; but among Pygopmles are
instiinfcs of botli. Lamellation of the bill is a very general distinction ; but Prion.
among " Simplieirostres " has laminte.

[Dec.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 203

would be interesting to know whetlier they are altrices or praecoces, and how
far the pah^te agrees with that of Geranomorphie.

The " naturalness " of the division as a sub-class is sustained in a satis-
factory if not conclusive manner, by the large number of types that Na-
tatores include under natatorial modification ; the open passages that lead
from it to the other groups ; the number of points where other groups in-
fringe upon it ; and especially the highly instructive way in which its four
primary subdivisions repeat each other. I shall endeavor to point out the
principal of each of these.

The passage from anserine swimmers to heron-like waders is so obviously
through and by Fhoenicopterus, that the poiut need not be dwelt upon.

The passage from totipalmate swimmers to the same waders is unques-
tionably through the Pelecanidie and Cancromidfe. The affinities of Balieruceps
and Cancroma among herons, with pelicans, have long been recognized and
universally allowed.

The passage from urinatorial swimmers to certain of the Grallee takes place
from the poiut Podicipidse, through Heliornithidie, to fulicarious or paludicole
waders, and from the same point through Phalaropodidfe to scolopacine or
limicole waders. In each of these cases we have almost the only — if there
be indeed any other — examples of the lobiped structure — a comparatively
rare modification of the swimming foot. The phalaropes, besides being ex-
cellent swimmers, are further exceptional in their own sub-class in the texture
of the plumage, which is completely duck-like.

The passage from longipennine swimmers to Grallre, if not so evident, is
nevertheless clear, in the osteological and pterylographic characters that are
respectively more or less common to a gull, e. g., and the plover or snipe-like
waders, as Nitzsch and Huxley have pointed out. Certain small petrels again,
as Oceanifis, Fregetta and Pelayodroma, are exceptionally " grallatorial " in
length of leg.

The waders coming next to swimmers, it is not to be expected that higher, i. e.
rasorial, Cursores, still less a further removed sub-class, Insessores, should
afford direct transitions ; but as I shall endeavor to show, the swimmers give
analogues to the main types of each of these sub-classes. Foreshadowing of
the mammals in birds does not occur within the range of Nnlatores, unless
the duck-like bill of Ornithorhynchus is a case in point. It really takes place
at the point Ratitx. It is among NatuloreH,&s the lowest birds, that the coun-
terfeit of another vertebrate type is found. The mocking analogy with fish
is complete in the penguins.

The raptorial modification of Na/atores is seen in the sub-family Lestridinie
of Laridx. The habitus of these is that of land birds of prey — a univer-
sally recognized resemblance. In their food the Jaegers are vulturine. Phy-
siological analogy is borne out by physical characters. Jaegers are the only
cered swimmers, as Accipitres are the principal cered perchers. The claws
of Lesfndime are more " raptorial " than those of any other swimmers. A
singular rugosity of the tarsi is shared by the Jaegers and the most aquatic
genus of Accipitres — Pandion.

The rasorial modification occurs in urinatO'rial swimmers. All these have
short, more or less concave, wings that are rapidly vibrated, and fly with
great impetus ; very gallinaceous features. Some Alcidie employ the char-
acteristic habit of Gailinm in constructing their nests ; rasorial has developed
into fossorial. Other auks, notably Phalaridines, instantly recall quails by
their general aspect; a species has been named from the circumstance. The
bill of 3Iergulus repeats a partridge's. Absence of tlie hallux that marks all
Alcidie, though sufficiently frequent in scolopaceous Cursores, is rare among
the alectoromorph Cursores; yet it characterizes a family — Turnicidie. One of
the rarest modifications, viz., abortion of rectrices, that marks a family of
Urinatores, is only again found in soiue representatives of a rasorial family —
Crypturidse.

Tubular nostrils are not a very common feature. It is the prime characteris-

1869.]

204 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

tic of the longest-winged and best flying family (Frocellariidse) of swimmers.
Among higher birds it again occurs in certain Strisorcs, especially Caprimul-
ffidcc, as well seen in Siphonorhis. It is interesting to observe that these birds,
like the petrels, are among the longest winged and best flying of their own
sub-class. And further, that they mock the swimmers in the elevation
and sometimes lateral position of the hind toe, together with the presence
of a membrane between the toes not to be distinguished from a true " web,"
and equal in amount to that of many " semipalmate" waders. This is entirely
dift'erent from the actual cohesion of the toes that obtains in many Insessores.
The obliquity of the hind toe, too, is the necessary antecedent feature to its
union by webbing with the second toe, as in all steganopods. Pectination of
the middle toe is another feature of these long winged Strisores, repeated in
the lougest winged swimmer — Tachypetes. Finally, the characteristic gular
pouch of all totipalmates is represented virtually, if not actually, in the
broad-mouthed, loose-throated Goatsuckers, &c.

The scapsorial type is exemplified in certain swimmers. One of its essen-
tial features is such construction of the tail as will allow of this being used
as an additional means of support, as best illustrated in the woodpeckers.
It is repeated in the cormorants ; birds with long, strong, stiff tail feathers,
that use the tail as a third-base of support when standing on level ground,
and exactly as woodpeckers do, when clinging to rocky ledges. Phalacro-
coracidx a.ve scansorial Naiatores.

A certain family of higher " land"-birds is purely aquatic, deriving its whole
subsistance from the water. I refer to the kingfishers. Their characteristic
habit of sitting on projecting branches watching for their prey, and darting
into the water to secure it, are repeated in the Flotidie. In both families
progression on land is almost denied.

The term " sea-swallow," universally applied in our own and other lan-
guages ("Hirondelle-de-mer," " Meerschwalbe,"&c.) to the Stcrninx, is expres-
sive of a strong analogy, traceable both in general conditions and special
characters. As to the former, I need only refer to mode of flight, and man-
ner of hunting for prey, especially in such small delicate species as Hydro-
clielidonfissipes, e. g. The " skimming" of the swallow in the air, and its atti-
tudes on the ground, are repeated in the tern. As to special physical points,
I may instance shape of wing, and relative length of that member ; length
and furcation of the tail; and the remarkable shortness of the legs that in
both groups readers walking difficult and unusual.

In the active pursuit of prey under water, the very highest Oscines are
brought into analogical resemblance with the lowest swimmers, by the sin-
gular genus Cinclus.

I do not observe any special analogies of anatiform swimmers with higher
birds; though some might possibly be traced. This strictly monomorphic
family seems specially reserved as the means of perfect transit from swim-
mers to waders through PhoRnicopterus.

Characters of the sub-class.
No one character can define Nntatores. Covering of the knee by the skin
of the body is the most general one, and one probably not found outsidethe
sub-class ; but it varies down to a minimum, ceasing to be diagnostic in cer-
tain Longipcnnes. Web-footedness is not an infallible indication ; some
Grallx are palmiped, some Naiatores are not. But these two, with qualified
reference to two others, furnish the desired definition. Thus Xatatores are
palmiped with the knee internal ; or, if external, the bill neither recurved nor
abruptly decurved ; or lobiped, with the tail rudimentary.*

* It might be advanced here, that I am liable to the charge of doing what I have above
criticized others for doing, i. e.., making a division upon a single feature. But there is a
distinction between simple "detinition" (». e. limiting) of a group, and its "characteriza-
tion" in full. The foregoing phrase is merely a convenient word-formula for the ready
recognition of any Natatorial bird, which could only be " characterized " by reference to
several other features.

[Dec.

NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 205

This expression is absolutely diagnostic ; it marks every swimmer, and ex-
cludes all other birds. Reference to the bill is necessary to exclude the web-
footed Gralke. Nothing can be predicated from the wing-coverts, which are
similar in Cursores and Natatores ; nor from the carotids, which are double in
liearly all of both sub-classes, the Podkipidw. alone furnishing an exception in
Natatores. So with most other single characters useful or indispensable in
arranging higher groups. We must chiefly rely upon special comhinalions of
common or general characters.

The statement that all Natatores possess the oil-gland, which has its circlet
of feathers, has no known exceptions. The gland usually has two openings ;
frequently more among Steganopodes and Procellariidce. Powder-down tracts
have not been observed in any. The pterylosis of the sub-class adheres
closely to a particular type, in the breadth of the tracts, that are " strong" and
definite, and in narrowness of the spaces. The inferior tract, as a rule, has no
free outer branch ; the dorsal is not interrupted by a true gap. Laridce fur-
nish exceptions to both these statements, in their scolopacine pterylosis ;
Diomedea, Colymbus and Podicepa have the dorsal gap ; Uria, Alca, and Fra-
tercula have a half-free outer branch reaching to the knee-covert. There is
also a trace of this in Anatidie, increased in Procellnriidx. " In all these cases
the ventral portion, which is often independent only from the extremity of
the sternum, is usually not only very broad but dilated towards the sides in
the middle of belly ; a structure which occurs only in water birds, and has
already been ver}- distinctly recognized among the Scolopacina'." (Nitzsch.)
The contour feathers are placed in regularly parallel, oblique rows, not sepa-
rated by a space along the median line of the body. Notwithstanding the
denseness of the plumage the ptilosis is not so continuous, even in the pen-
guins, as in some Insessorial groups. The spaces are all covered with down-
feathers, perhaps double. The contour feathers are so situated that every
contiguous four form a rhombus, made quincuncial by a down-feather in the
centre. Other smaller down-feathers are frequently intercalated in the rows
of contour feathers. The latter are furnished with an extensive series of
comparatively large cutaneous muscles, of which each feather may have
several. Each contour feather has its accompanying filoplumes, which may
be as many as ten, as e. g. in the goose. The modified diversely colored
feathers about the head of cormorants (and some auks?) are believed to be
filoplumaceous. The feathers are frequenilj^ devoid of after shafts, which
appear, in general, to be complementary to down-feathers.*

The wings of Natatores &vq remarkably diverse in size and shape ; the modi-
fications are scarcely or not diagnostic of either orders or families. Thus
the wings of certain Procellariidce are exactly those of some Alcidx ; those
of some Pygopodes and Lamellirostres are alike. In this sub-class we find all
gradations between the two possible extremes ; albatrosses, e. g., are the
best flyers of any, and have the most remiges (50) ; penguins have none, af-
fording the only instance in the class of abortion of quills ; though other
birds share the deprivation of flight. Tachypetes again vies with Diomedea,
The Natatorial average of remiges is about 30 ; the number may fall to 25,
and frequently ranges up to 40. Notwithstanding this, the primaries are
constant, 10 ; the first of these, as a rule, is longest, but there are many ex-
ceptions. Macropterous swimmers, as a rule, have flat, narrow, pointed
wings ; brachj^pterous, concave, broad rounded ones. Tachypetes and Podiceps
best represent the two extremes. Alca impennis furnishes a singular wing ;
useless for flight, yet morphologically perfect. The greater wing coverts
are always longer than half the secondary remiges. The tail varies as much
as the wings, both in shape and character of rectrices. As a general rule,
the tail is small and rounded, with many short, rather soft rectrices ; this may
be called its typical condition. Abortion of rectrices definitely characterizes

* This paragraph is compiled from Nitzsch's Pterylography, Ray Soe. Ed. pp. 139-141.

1869.]

206 NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

one whole fiiraily — Podicipidce ; in all others rectrices occur. A small, definite
number of rectrices may be observed to be in inverse ratio to the size of the
tail as a whole. The number is ordinarily 12, in those forms with well-de-
veloped tail ; as in all Laridcc, most Frocellariidw, most Phalacrocoracidce, the
genus Plotus. A few Petrels, as some of the little Procellarice proper [Thalas-
sidroma auct.) are said to have only 10 ; the statement requires confirmation ;
most of them, as Cymochoreay mihi, and Oceanites K. and B.. have 12. Many
larger Petrels, as Fulmarus, Daplion, &c., have 14; Ossifraga giyantea has 16.
Among Cormorants the number of rectrices seems to be scarcely generic ;
some species having 12, others 14. As a rule Alcidcc have definitely 12 rec-
trices. A. impennis is said to have 18. I'haelhon has 16. Sulkke have 12 and
14. Tacliypetes has 12. Other genera included in the Spheniscidw, Colymbidw,
Pelecanidce and Anatidce have a number varying from 12 to 32, though rarely
over 24, and in instances where the larger numbers are approached or reached
the tail may have an odd number, as 21, 23.* Not taking into account the
small, short, rounded tails above mentioned as " typical," the Natatores furnish
great variations in shape of the tail as a whole. It may be long and deeply
forked, with more or less filamentous rectrices, as in nearly all Sterninse, some
Larinw, the Rhynchopince, and more particularly the Tachypetidx. It is large
and square in most Larince ; of corresponding size, and more rounded, or
even approaching a wedge-shape, in many ProccUariidie. It is moderate or
rather large and cuneate, in one g\x\\, Rhodosiethia rosea, and one Petrel, Ilalo-
cyptena mkrosoina. In certain terns [Anoiit>) it is both forked and cuneate,
i. e., lateral feathers graduated, central pair shorter than the next. It is short
and cuneate in some ducks, and in Spiheniscidie : certain of the latter, how-
ever, have much better developed tail, with fewer rectrices, than others. The
tail is long, broad, and fan-shaped in Plotida and Phalacrocoracidce, where,
moreover, the rectrices are exceptionally stiff. Finally, a few swimmers have
curiously modified central rectrices. Thus in Ilarelda glacialis these are long-
exserted and filamentous ; a condition exaggerated in most Lestridince and
carried to an extreme in P/iaethontidce.

There are few other modifications of the feathery covering that require
notice. Some swimmers are ornamented with singularly modified feathers,
chiefly about the head. Many Spheniscidw, and most Alcidie, especially phal-
eridine forms, have curiously colored and shaped crests. Nearly if not all
Podicipidce are instructed with conspicuous ruffs of long, loose feathers ; when
these are deficient, as in Podilymbus, stiff bristles occurr. The bars of stripes
on the neck of Colymbidce are of keel-shaped feathers. Cormorants have
colored filoplumes about the head ; other, perhaps similar, patches are found
on the thighs. Some Anatidx, as Aix, and most Meryince, are conspicuously
crested. Petecanidx are crested, and have similarly elongated feathers on
other parts, as the breast. The scapular feathers of many Fulifftilince are pe-
culiarly curved ; one or two genera of this sub-family have velvety-piled
plumage. The well-known general condition of the plumage of penguins has
suggested the name " Squamipennes." In many families or genera, plumage
extends on the bill in varying degree ; it usually, but not always, reaches the
ankle joint, but the tarsus is never feathered, except in one genus, Tacliypetes,
and there only partially. No part of the body proper is naked, with the re-
markable exception of the gular pouch oi Steganopodes,c&VT\&(i to a maximum in
Pelicanus. Other dermal outgrowths ihan feathers are rare; but an example
of horny development is seen in the spur-winged genus Pkctropterus.

The highly interesting modifications that make the swimming foot what it
is, affect the whole limb from hip-joint downward. The legs as a rule are
placed further back than in Insessorial and purely Cursorial forms. But there
is great difference in this respect among Natatores, and a regular gradation

* I am again indebted to Nitzsch's incomparable work for part of the data for these
generalizations regarding numbej of wing and tail feathers.

1869.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 207

may be observed. la the hisrbest forms, as Anatiche, the feet are brought
under the centre of equilibrium, and the body is consequently supported with
its long axis horizontal. Some Steganopods — the next order — have much
the same condition ; in others, as Cormorants, the legs are much further back,
and the body must be held almost upright. Most Longipennes are like Anatidse
in this respect, but here Halodromince- offer almost the other extreme. In
Pygopodous families the maximum of backward position of the legs and up-
right position of body is attained. A few or several Alcidce stand and walk
tolerably well, but all Colymhidce, Podicipidce and Spheniscidi^. must rest nearly
upright on the rump, and progress on land with extreme difficulty. Burial of
the thighs and more or less of the crura in the skin of the body is ordinarily
in direct ratio to backward ])osition of the legs, and in inverse proportion to
ease of walking. Nevertheless, some good walkers, as geese, have less free
legs than i-ertain small petrels that scarcely walk. As a rule, utility of the
feet as pedestals and as paddles is directly complementary. The most adroit
and untiring swimmers, and those that progress under as well as on the
water with ease, are the poorest walkers. Compare a goose with a loon, e.g.
In one order, Steganopods, we have the fact illustrated in contiguous fami-
lies ; pelicans do not follow their prey under water; cormorants do ; there
is a precisely corresponding angle of inclination of the body in each case.
To avoid interference of the broad- webbed feet the legs are widely separated ;
a divarication begins in the axis of the femur, and is increased in other seg-
ments. Hence the characteristic "waddle'' of ducks, &c. ; their gait, com-
pared with that of true walkers, corresponds somewhat to the difference that
may be observed in the sexes of our own species, arising from difference in
width of pelvis. There are many other interesting items in the construction
of a perfect pair of paddles, too numerous to note here. A loon's legs may
be taken as the type. Some time ago I worked out all the details, as seemed
to me, in this case, and may be permitted to give the reference, in place of
further observations.*

The tarsus most commonly presents no special noteworthy features. Oc-
casionally it is extremely compressed, as among loons and grebes. Its horny
covering has nothing of the importance that attaches to it among Oscinc.t, for
example, though the two primary types of reticulation and scutellation some-
times mark natural groups, as geese as distinguished from ducks. The tarsal
envelope is fused in one genus.

The toes may be three or four ; if the former, it is alwaj'S the hallux that
aborts. All have the normal numtier of phalanges, the relative lengths of
which usually, if not always, conform to a general rule. In comparative
length as wholes the hallux is always shortest ; the others usually run 2d, 4th,
3d in length, but not rarely '2d, 3d, 4th. There is often only a very slight
inequality in the 3d and 4th, exactly compensated by complementary differ-
ence in length of claw, so that the claw-tips fall together, e. g. many
Procellariidce. The hallux, as a rule, is present; its absence or rudimentary
condition marks one whole family, Alcidce^ two sub-families, DlomedeincE and
HalodromirKB, of Procellariidce, and one species of one genus {Rissa tridactj/laf) of

* Osteology, Ac, of Coli/mlnis torquatus, Mem. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist.. I, pt. ii, Nov..I8CG, p. 131.

tin examinin.^ a great many Rissfe from the North Pacific, I have found a hitherto un-
noticed and probablv unsuspected state of things. Tliere are in that region two perfectly-
distinct species of Kittivvake. One is iii'ssu brack jrluincha, Gould, {^K. brfvirnslna, Bi'andt.)
with coral-red or yellow legs, yellow bill, &c., &e. This has a very small hallux : but still
one bearing a minute claw, that looks like a little blactc speck on the extremity of the
knob. The other is the R. kotzebni, Bonaparte, or at any rate the bird I identified and de-
scribed under that name some years since. Bonaparte's diagnosis is simply ^'■halluce magis
explicatn." Now this form is identical with and not tiistinguished from E. tridactyla. ex-
cept in and by the hind toe. The hallux is almost always larger and better formed ; and
it ranges from a state scarcely or not different from that of H. tridactyla, up to a perfectly
developed conditinn. claiv and all. In some specimens the hind toe and claw are a.'* large,
comparatively, as those of any if rws I ever saw! The distinctive feature of the genus Rixs i
has disappeared. What makes the North Pacific Kittiwakes vary thus, while the Atlantic
birds are constant, as far as Ijuowd ?

1869.] 15

208 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Laridie. la the other sub-families of Procellariidx it is scarcely more than an
immovable sessile claw. When present, its condition varies. Withoutexception,
it is raised above the level of the anterior digits ; but the elevation is slight in all
Totipalmi, among which are found the most arboricole swimmers, just as in
Ardcidce, of Cursores, which are pretty good perchers. Its direction is ordi-
narily straight backward ; to which the best exception is seen in its oblique
inward position in all Stegnnopodcs, where, likewise, this toe is much longer
than elsewhere. In Spheniscidsc the hallux is very small, lateral and elevated.
As to its connection with the other toes or the tarsus, we find several modi-
fications. In the first place, we have the condition in J'rocellariinee. of sessile
inmobility. Next a lengthening and freeing, as in Ltiridce and Atiatinx,
Then with slight increase, or none, in length, there may be a broad membra-
nous lobe depending from it, e. ff.. FuligulitKP, I'odicipidce. This lobe, again,
may unite it at base with the tarsus or inner toe, as in Coli/mbidx ; a condition
intermediate between the foregoing modification and the only other one to
be noticed, viz., that characterizing the Stega/wpodes, when the very long hind
toe completes, by webbing to the claws with the inner one, the totipalmate
foot. In most or all those cases where the hallux aborts, I think its acces-
sory metatarsnl is still to be found beneath the skin of the tarso-metatarse.
I have never sought for it in vain.*

Palmation is undoubtedly the prime characteristic of the swimming foot;
yet it does not always obtain. Lobation marks one whole family (the Grebes.)
But in Podilymhus, at least, there is a sort of compromise between the two
styles ; the toes being perfectly lobed, yet webbed at base. More or less im-
perfection of the webs in truly palmate forms exceptionally occurs. Ilydro-
chelidon fissipes, e. g., has the webs so deeply incised that it is scarcely more
palmate than sucli grallatorial genera as Symphemia, Ereimetes, &c. Some
Anserine genera are defective in this respect. But ordinarily the free margin
of the two or three webs departs but little (and that in concavity) from a
straight line between the ends of the toes; it is sometimes a little convex.

The claws as a rule offer nothing of importance. They are small, short,
stout, little curved, not very acute. One or two genera of Alcidoi have a claw on
the second toe differing in all these respects from the others ; it is ordinarily,
also, laid fiat, not upright. Rarely the middle claw is dilated and pectinated
(Tachype/es) us in tferons. Goat-suckers, &c. The Grebes offer exceptional
claws ; these are broad, flat, and squarish in shape, much like human nails.
Rissa tridaciyla offers perhaps the only instance of a toe without a well formed
claw.

The bill of Natatores is so variable in all its features that it is best consid-
ered under heads of the several orders and families. I may remark here that
it appears under two principal forms: lamellate in all Anatiformes and one or
two genera of Petrels; simple in all other swimmers ; but in these its tomia
may be serrate. In a great number of cases, it bears a nail at the end, of
varying size, large or small, and in either case liable to be either very distinct
or lost by fusion. This nail, it should be observed, is an affair of the horny
covering altogether ; not dependent upon the condition of the premaxillaries.
The horny case is ordinarily continuous ; but sometimes, as in Jaegers and
Petrels, it consists of many pieces. f In Anatiformes it is softer, more like
ordinary skin than elsewhere, whence ^^ Dermorhynchi " as a name of the
family.

Anaiidiv, Laridic, ProceUaritdx and Podkipidir are cosmopolitan ; but Petrels
abound most and in greatest variety in Southern seas. Most Steganopodes are
wide-spread, but Tachypttidte. Phneihontidae and Plotidic are chiefly tropical.
C'oli/mbidce belong to the Northern Hemisphere. Alcidx are Palte-Ne-arctic,
'focussing in the North Pacific, replacing Spheniscida;, which are exclusively

* So, also, I find it in Calidris arenaria, a. 3-toed .sandpiper, in tlie jJCgialites, Ac.

tCf. the writer's "Review of Procellariidie,''^ part v, Pr. A. N. S., Pliila., May, 1865, p. 175.

[Dec.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 209

Southern, and essentially Antarctic. Nearly all Natalores are either largely
migratory, or else are widely wandering pelagic birds.

Subdivisions of the Subclass.*

Assembled in such variety of character, swimmers may be easily and con-
veniently divided in several ways, according to the standard taken. But I
presume only one of these can be the right {i. e. the natural) way ; and further,
that cceteris paribus, the scheme that takes into consideration the greatest
nunaber of characters will come nearer the truth than one that proceeds upon
isolated grounds. A sine qud non of any scheme must be equivalency of value
of the groups to which the same taxonomic rank is accorded.

There is no safe stepping-stone between the subclass and its orders. There
are four orders, i. e., four modes of expression of the Natatorial plan or idea.
In the following definitions of these, diagnostic or more important characters
are italicized : —

Ord. I. Pygopodes. — Legs jwsterior, horizontal position of axis of body impos-
sible ; most of cms as well as femur buried. Brachypteroiis ; wings short,
never reaching end oi very short, many-feathered tail, that is sometimes wanting.
Body depressed. Feet tetra- or tri-dactyle, lobatc or palmate, never totipal-
mate ; hallux elevated, functional or not. Bill not lamellate nor serrate ; wholly
corneous, entire. Nostrils lateral, mostly basal, well formed, never tubular. No
gular pouch. Tibia often with a long apophysis. Carotids single or double.
Schizognathous. Altrical or Prrecofial. Scarcely ambulatorial ; sometimes
not flying at all ; urinatorial ; swim under as well as on the water; lie deep on
the water. Heavy, clumsy on land. Natatorial Natatores.

Ord. II. LoNGiPENNES — Legs near centre of equilibrium, horizontal position of body
usual. Femur buried ; crus largely (or wholly 1) free. 3Licropterous ; wings long,
pointed, surpassing the base, and often the tip, of the large well formed few-feathered
tail. Feet tetra- or tri-dactyle ; always palmate, never totipalmale ; hallux, when
present, free, elevated, very short, fanctionless. Bill ivholly corneou'*, entire or
pieced, unguiculate or not, 7iever laminate (exc. Prion, &c.) nor serrate. Nostrils
variously, but always well-formed,la.iQViil or superior. None, or only a rudimentary
gular pouch. Tibia with or without apophysis. Carotids double. Schizognathotts.
Altrices. The majority ambulatorial; all highly volucral ; none urinatorial;
all rest shallow and swim easily on the water. Light, elegant in all three
elements. f Volucral Natatores.

Ord. III. Steganopodes. — Position of legs variable ; generally well posterior,
but sometimes approaching the preceding. Wings variable, but generally long
and pointed, approaching or equaling the preceding. Tail variable, sometimes
short and indefinitely feathered, usuall_v long and few-feathered ; cuueate

* Reduce to an order, and pari passu reduce the value of subordinate group.s, if Saururse.,
Ratitie and Carinatse be accepted as sub-classes.

With such reduction in value, Insessores, Cursores and Naiaiorfs would become " orders"
of Carinatie. and the four " orders" indicated below would be suborders or "tribes," — i.e.,
simply collocations of families. Throughout this article I call Natatores a "subclass " in
a conventional sense only, as indicating one of the first divisions of a class Aves, as
usually held.

Even with this depreciation in the scale, I do not suppose that the Avian groups have
the value of those of the same name in other classes of vertebrates. Birds adhere so
closely to a common type, that the extremes of difference in form found among them
scarcely seem to indicate divisions of a higher grade than those marking orders in lower
vertebrates ; in fact, it is a question whether Aves as a whole are nriore different from some
other vertebrates than certain (''.^. reptilian) "orders " are from each other. But, how-
ever variously vertebrates may be primarily divided (as into Hiematotherma and Hiemato-
crya, into Icthhyopsida, Sauropsida, &.C., &c.), the four " classes" of Pisces. Rcplilia, Aves and
Mammalia will probably always endure, and be virtually our taxonomically equivalent
points of departure for further divisions. Therefore, as it seems to me, the rank of Nata-
tores only hinges upon the question of Carinalie, &c., as the primary divisions of Aves.

t To most of these characters flatotiroma is a signal exception. But its tubular nostrils
define its position.

1869.]

210 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

forked, rounded, or fan-shaped. Feet always tetra-dactyle, toiipalmate, hallux
dejyressed, lateral, long, functional. Bill wholly corneous, never lamellate; tomia
serrate or not ; its covering continuous or not, with or without a nail ; external
nares very small or abortive. A gular pouch. Tibia simple. Carotids double.
Desmognathous. Altrices. Ambulatorial, or scarcely so; generally powerful
flj-ers ; often good per chers ; urinatorial or not. Heavy, if not clumsy on land.
Insessorial Natatores.

Ord IV. Lamellirostres. — Legs, as in Longipennes, near centre of equilihrium ;
position of axis of body in walking horizontal. Wings constant, moderate,
reaching to, but not bej'ond, the short rounded (exceptionally long cuneate)
many- feathered tail. Feet always tetradactyle, and palmate ; never totipalmate :
hallux elevated, moderate, free, simple or lobed, probably functional in all
cases. Bill lamellate, but tomia not serrate, covered with soft skin in greater
part, ivith more or less distinct nail at tip. Nostrils constant, well formed, latero-
superior, subbasal or median. No gular pouch. Tibia simple. Two carotids.
Desmognathous. Proecoces. Highly ambulatorial ; good flyers ; excellent swim-
mers ; poor divers. Heavy, though not clumsy, in either element. Cursorial
Natatores.

The sequence of these orders is fixed. Pygopodes are first or lowest ; Lam-
ellirostres last or highest, beyond question. It might seem, on several accounts,
particularly position of legs, that Steganopodes should come next to Pygopodes.
But we cannot put anything between Longipennes und Pggojwdes, for they touch
if not inosculate at the points Halodroma and 3Iergulus. Moreover, other
ProcellariidcB have the long tibial apophysis that characterizes divers, but
disappears higher in the series.

Families and subfamilies of PYGOPODES.

The Penguins might be considered as presenting differences of more than
family grade ; they have been made a tribe or suborder [Impennes, Nullipennes,
Squamijyennes, Ptilopleri, auctt.) Thus they are unique in possessing no
remiges, scaly feathers, not entirely connate metatarsals, flat pterygoids and
arm-bones, and peculiar elbow-joint.* not to mention other lesser features. But
their characters are mostly of degree, not of kind ; and above all, the link
between them and Alcidx is so close and complete by ^4^c(7 ?wjoen?z/s, (extending
even to elbow joint and metatarsals) that the differences are really not so
great as appears at first sight.

Three other families are not open to question. The four are thus distin-
tinguished, by external characters alone :

Fam. Spheniscid.15. — Feathers scaly. No remiges ; wings useless for flight.
Hallux minute, elevated, lateral, functionless. Feet palmate. Tail many
feathered (with thirty or more rectrices, but sometimes fewer.) Usually with
modified feathers on head. Bill various. Altrices.

I doubt there beihg two or more subfamilies ; that is, I think we must pass
directly to the genera (technically though one subfamily), all of which differ
from each other by characters of about the same value. The genera are few
— perhaps only two or three — based chiefly upon the bill and tail. These
birds are specially related only to the next.

Fam. AhCiDAi.-f — Plumage normal. Remiges present, well developed (except
in one instance.) No hind toe. Feet palmate. Tail small, but definitely few-
feathered. Usually with modified feathers about head. Bill singularly various.
Altricial and Pra^cocial?

Auks vary in details of form, particularly of the bill, with almost every

• But I do not believe that either of the two little boues at the elbow of these birds, as
well as of Guillemots, represents a "detached oleocranou;" 1 hold them for true sesa-
moids,

t Cf. writer's monograph Alcidie, Pr. A. N. S., Phila., 18U8.

[Dec.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 211

species. The genera are numerous ; all apparently safely grounded. It is
rather difficult to group them satisfactorily into subfamilies; but there do
seem to be three series of genera, the components of each of which are de-
cidedly more intimately correlated with each other than with any of the
genera of either of the other two series. We have therefore three subfamilies,
as follows : —

Subfam. Alcinx. — Ptilosis reaching to or bej'ond linear nostrils ; no crests ;
tail cuneate ; bill sulcate, cultriform. Typical " Auks ;" connecting with
Penguins. Genera : Alca, Utamania.

Subfam. Phaleridinse. — Ptilosis not reaching various nostrils ; 'mostly crested ;
bill various, but always compressed, somewhat cultriform, often api)endaged ;
tail squarish or rounded. A middle group, leading nowhere ; sometimes under
a quail-like mask. Genera: Fratercida^ Ltinda, Ceratorhx/ncha, Sagmulorrhina,
Simorhynchus, Plycliorhamphus ; the first named nearest Utamania, the last next
to Mergulus.

Subfam. Uriiner,. — Ptilosis reaching to linear or rounded nostrils ; bill conic
or subcylindric, simple, usually much elongated ; tail rounded or pointed ;
head not crested (exc. one species). " Guillemots." Genera ; ilergulus, Si/n-
thliborhamphus, Uria, Lomvia. The last named repeating Alcinie in coloration ;
grading towards Cob/nibidx in the chars, of bill. The first i^Mergulus) in quail-
guise ; and forming the inosculating point of the present order with Longipennes
by means of Halodroma.

Fam. Colymbid;e. — Plumage normal. Ptilosis reaching nostrils. Hallux
well formed, semi-lateral, joined to base of inner toe. Wings pointed. Feet
palmate ; fourth digit lengthened. Tarsi flat, reticulate, their posterior edge
smooth. No crests. Lores feathered. Tail short, but well formed. Bill
constant, long-conico-compressed, simple. Nostrils linear, lobed. Claws
narrow.

A small family, of (technically) one subfamily and only one genus, Colym-
bus, with some half-dozen species. Related to auks through Lomvia. Repre-
senting, by its quasi-totipalmate feet, the Sleganopods among Pggopodes ! But
affinities really closest with the next family.

Fam. PoDiciPiDyi';. — Plumage normal. Ptilosis not reaching nostrils ; lores
naked. Nostrils lanceolate, &c., not lobed. Wing rounded. Hallux well
formed, lobed. Feet lobate, or lobate-semipalmate. Tarsi flat, their poste-
rior edge serrate. Conspicuous' crests, or modified feathers about head. Tail
rudimentary. Bill simple, variable, stout or slender, conico-compressed, long
or short Claws subquadrate, flat.

A family unique among water birds in its single carotid, lobed feet, abort-
ive tail, and flat nails. Nearest Colymbidx in afilnity ; replacing, in its sub-
class, fulicarious Grallce, — in fact, linked therewith by Heliornithidie. Coun-
terfeiting some Crypturidfp, of gallinaceous birds. Its longest-billed and
-necked genus representing in its own family the place oi P lotus among Ste-
ganopods.

But one subfamily is usually recognized. There maybe two, for one genus
differs more from the rest than any of the latter do from each other. The
following would be the diagnoses, but I scarcely think it necessary to make
this distinction with such little difference :

Subfam. Fodilymbinie. — Bill stout, almost hooked. Nostrils sub-circular.
Lores broadly naked. Frontal feathers bristly ; no decided crests. Tarsus
not three-fourths of the middle toe. Feet semipalmate, as w'ell as lobed ;
hallux narrowly lobed. Genus: Podilymbus.

Subfam. Podicipinse — Bill slender, straight at tip. Nostrils linear. Lores
narrowly naked. Frontal feathers simple ; usually conspicuous crests and
ruffs. Tarsus three-fourths or more of the middle toe. Feet with only a
small basal web in addition to the lobes ; hallux broadly lobed. Genera ;

1869.]

212 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

u'Echm,ophoTUs, Podiceps, Sylbeocyclus ; possibly one or two others, but most of
tbe genera invented or used by Kaup, Bonaparte, and others, are untenable,
representing only specific characters. Sylbeocyclus (type S. minor) is the con-
necting linlv between the two subfamilies.

Families and subfamilies o/LONGIPENNES.

There are but two families of macropterous swimmers, that moreover shade
into each other so insensibly and completely that the condition of the nostrils
is sometimes almost the only character. Thus Thalassoica glacialoides is a pure
gull, even to colors, with tubular nostrils. In fact, I know of no positive un-
qualified character but this that will reach through the whole of the two
families as a distinguishing mark. Still there are others of greater or less
significance. Both the families are clearly difl'erentiated into several sub-
families, which are much easier to define.

Fam. Procellariid^. — Nostrils tubular, lateral or superior, united or sepa-
rate. Bill variable in shape, always hooked; its corneous envelope (always?)
iu several pieces ; rarely laminate. Wings long and pointed (one exc.) Tail
variable in shape; usually small, never very long, of 12 — 16 (rarely 10??)
rectrices, of which the central are never suddenly long-exserted. Feet pal-
mate ; hallux present, minute, functionless, or absent. Tarsal envelope
sometimes continuous (a unique feature among swimmers I). Truly pelagic
birds, independent of land. Al trices.

Three strongly marked subfamilies, thus:

Subfam, DiomedeiiiK. — Nostrils lateral, disjoined, horizontal. Feet tridac-
tyle. Wings extreme, in length of humerus and ulna, and with highest num-
ber of remiges (fifty) known among birds, but only ten primaries, as usual.
Genera : Diomectea, Phcebelria, founded on sulcation of mandible and shape of
tail.

The albatrosses, in size, contour, and length of wing, repeat the Pelecanidse
in their own family; in length of wing they are only otherwise approached by
another Steganopod family, — Tachypelidce. But still a constricted group, with
no aberrant forms.

Subfam. Procellariince. — Nostrils superior, horizontal, united in one double-
barrelled tube. Too various in other respects to be concisel}' characterized.
Still, the central or typical aspect of the family ; throwing out feelers in
several directions.

One group comprises the smallest species, T^ith pointed wings, elastic flexi-
ble primaries, rather long tail, variable in shape; the most slender and long-
est legs of the family. These birds are pelagic Cypselidx ! Genera: Oceano-
droma, Cymochorea ( = Thalassidroma Bp. nee. Vig.), Ilalocyptena (cauda
cuneata), Procellaria (ex hinn. = Thalassidroma Vig. auctt.), Oceaniles (i)odo-
theca continua), Fregetta, Pelayodroma.

Another comprises heavier Ijirds, of medium size, with long hooked bills,
long, strong, pointed wings, and short rounded (rarely pointed) tail. It seems
to occupy the very centre of the family. But it has a strong pygopodous
feature in the tibial apophysis of at least some of its members, thus pointing
to the Loons and Grebes. These are "Shearwater" Petrels. Genera: Maja-
queus, P'riofinus (= Adamastor Bp.), approaching Fulmar Petrels, and Piiffinus
(including Nectris), from which Thiellus only differs iu a longer, more pointed
tail.

A third group consists of the gull-like Petrels, called " Fulmars." Tliese
are among the largest of the family ; stout, thick-set ; tail of 14 — 16 rectrices,
well-formed ; wings moderate, tor this family ; bill stout, moderately hooked.
A group scarcely worth retaining as distinct from the last, for of its three
genera, Fulmarus and Thalitssoica are almost side by side with Priofinus ; and
the other, Ossifraga, with Majaqueus. Ossifraga points to the albatrosses, Tha-
lassoica to the gulls ; the last hardly differs from Fulmarus.

[Dec.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 218

A fourth group is represented bj' three genera, JEstrelata., Fagodrorna and
Daplion, each distinctly characterized. The two last are unispecific. In the
first I throw the very many species agreeing in medium size, strong largely-
hooked bill, long wedge-shaped tail, and rather short wings. Its species have
received a dozen, more or less, generic names. There are about a score of
them. Daption is peculiar in its wide bill, with rudimentary lamella' and
quasi-gular pouch, indicating Auseres and Steganopods. Payodroma is among
petrels much what Gggis is among terns, and Pagophila among gulls.

The last group, called Prionem, is remarkably distinguished by the lamina-
tion of the bill, equal, in one genus, to that of Lamellirostres, and only here
found outside that order. There is also a shape of bill in Prion corresponding
to Cancroma among Herons ! and the throat is somewhat pouched. One square-
tailed, light-colored form llalohwna recalls the Gulls. Genera : Ilulobxna,
Pseudoprion Prion.

Subfam. Halodrominx. — Nostrils superior, vertical, united, on the culmen at
base. Mandibular sj^ace wide, with a distensible skin. Feet tridactyle. Wings
and tail, and general form, of AlcidcE ! Genus: Pelecanoides (Lacep., about
1800 ; = Halodroma, 111. 1811, et auctt )

A singularly aberrant form, only Procellaridian in the uostrils ; standing at
a point where Lonffipeiuie.s, Steffanopodes and Pi/yopodes meet; Steganopodous in
its dilatable throat, &c. ; Pygipodous in feet, wings aud tail. It is almost a
3fer(/idus.

Fam. Larid.*:. — Bill generally with continuous covering. Nostrils always
lateral, linear, or lance-linear. Wings always long and pointed, reaching far
beyond base of tail. Tail alwa3-s well developed, definitely few-feathered (12
rect.), but of varying shape. Feet always tetradactyle ; hallux small, simple,
elevated, apparently never functional. Strong dashing flyers, good light
swimmers, poor divers. Altrices.

A definitel}' circumscribed gronp, without any remarkably' aberrant forms.
Sharply divided bj' characters of bill, &c., into four subfamilies, thus :—

Subfam. Lestridince — Covering of bill not continuous ; upper mandible in-
structed with a distinct cere; bill epignathous.* Tail squarish, but median
rectrices abruptlj^ long-exserted. Head never crested. Tarsi rugose ; feet
arabulatorial. Genera: Biiphaffus,f Stercorarius.f

Comprehending the " Jaegers," or "Skua Gulls." Affording the only in-
stances in the subclass of a cered bill. In this partition of the rostral envelope
we have an interesting approach to an essential character of the preceding
family, — an affinity borne out by the pterylosis. For, says Nitzsch, in the
Proceilariidse " the tract formation of Leatris is elevated into the type of a
group '■ The peculiar construction of the tail is only elsewhere met with
among water birds in the Anserine genus Harelda and the Steganopodous one
Phaethon. The Jaegers are marine Accipitres !

* There are only four possible conditions of the bill, with reference to the relaticm of the
tips of the mandibles to each other. (1) the upper mandible overreaches the under, and
is deflected over it; (2) the under mandible extends beyond the upper; (3) the two meet
at a point; (4) the points of the mandibles cross each other. I propose to call these con-
ditions rpif/nathous, hypofjnathnus. piiragtiathnns and mHagnathous respectively. Tlie first is,
exemplified by all the Raptomx, J'.-iittaci, ProceMariidse. &c., &c. The second is exemplified
by the Bhynchopinte. The majority of birds, especially Passeres, exhibit the third. Of
the fourth I only Ivnow one instaace, — the Cross-bills (C(o-(u')-o.5<ra .Scop. = ioxm auctt.1
The family Laridse is the only one that comprehends examples of three of these forms ;
and here they are, as we have seen, almost diagnostic of the subfamilies.

In respect of the epignathous type, it should be noted that to constitute this form thf
modification should affect the premaxillary ilself, and be perceptible in the skeleton ;
mere ileflection of a point or margin of the corneous envelope of the bill is not sufficient;
e. fif., Empidonace.s are paragnathous.

That singular bird, the il«aW/.i/nc/i2<.'t. might be thought to repres^ent a fifth kind ; V>ut I
should judge it to be paragnathous. The modification in this case is of a different kind
altogether; a species of bilateral asymmetry, like the bent vomer of certain cetaceans.

fif Mcehring's and Brisson's genera camnot obtain, we must take Cu^/iaracto, Brunn„type
C. skua, Brtinn., and Lestris, 111., type L. parasitica, Linn.

1869.]

214 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Subfam. Larinie. — Covering of bill continuous: bill epignatbous. Tail
usually squarish ; rarely forked or wedged. Head never crested. Hallux in
one speciesimperfect. Tarsi almost alwayssmooth. Feetambulatorial. Genera:
Larus (possibly with a few divisions), Rissa, Pagophila, Chrcecocephalus, Rhodo-
stethia, Xenia^ Creagrus.

The central group of the family : all the genera closely related. Distinct,
on the one hand, from Leslr/diiue, but on the other shading into S/erninie,
through the smaller, hooded, forked-tailed. &c , species, the bill of which in-
sensibly passes into the tern-like form. Altogether too many genera have
been invented, not discovered, in the genus Larus. I would unite under this
name all the large square-tailed, unhooded forms, of whatever color, doing
iivrixj with Blasipiis, Adelarus, &c,, not to mention a number of worthless
'• coups," as M. Temminck would justly call them. Rissa is dififeient in its
feet, at least in the type of the genus. Pagophild is well marked in several
respects; it correspond*' to Gygis among Terns, a.w\ Pugodroma among Petrels.
Chrcecocephalus may well embrace all the smaller square-tailed "hooded"
Gulls; these go into the tern-like shape of bill. The ottier genera above
named are based mainly upon shape of tail.

Subfam. Sterninie. — Covering of bill continuous. Bill paragnatlious.
Wings extremely long and' pointed. Tail generally long ; commonly forked,
but of other shapes. Hallux constant. Tarsi smoothish ; feet small, scarcely
ambulatorial. Head often crested ; sometimes singularly so. Genera :
Gelochelidon, Thalasseus, Fhcetusa, Sterna, Ilydrochelidon, Haliplana, Anoiis,
Inca, Gygis.

Adhering well to a recognizable type, but varying in details of form, whence
the numerous genera. GelocheUdon is gull-l\ke, especially iu bill. Thalasseus
comjjrises the largest robust species, with a soft, flowing occipital crest.
PhaUisa has large southern species with great turgid bill. Sterna is central,
wiih many deeplj'-forked tailed species like hirundo, &c. Ilydrochelidon is
singularly fissiped, from defect of webs. Haliplana is nearly Sterna, but with
different bill, feet and coloration. Anousis a singular form, with a long forked-
graduated tail ; i. e., central feathers shorter than next, others again graduated.
Inca comes near it, but has unique, curly plumes on the side of the head, as
in the Cormorants, and especially some Auks ! Gygis is the Tern expression
of the idea of the Gull Pagophila and the Petrel Pugodroma. The Terns are
marine Hirundinidx !

■ Subfam. Rhynchopince. — Bill cultrate, hypognathous ; otherwise as iu the
preceding subfamily. Genus Rhynchops.

The single genus is a Tern in everything but the anomalous bill. The
light cancellated internal structure of the turgid part of the upper mandible
suggests that of Rhamphastidie. The Skimmers feed as whales do.

Families of STEGANOPODES.

This order contains no less than six families, none of which have more than
a single subfamily. Regard for equivalency of groups necessitates this view.
For if we institute two families, upon whatever basis, as some have done, we
shall find that their subfamilies are fully as different from each other as the
families are. Recognition of six families here, and only one with numerous
subfamilies among Lav.ellirostres, might not seem at first sight to be based
upon parity of reasoning. But I think the distinction is one with a differ-
ence ; and one too for which a good reason can be shown. S/eganopodcs are
compounded from other Natatores, that is, forms have been taken from other
orders, furnished with a pouch, wefebed hallux and abortive nostrils, and
otherwise modified to make up tliis order. Hence the dissimilar types, each
representing a family. This is not so with Anseres. I cannot find the centre
of Steganopodes ; the families seem all peripheral, looking towards other
groups. They show no tendency to merge into each other ; they represent

[Dec.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 215

a scattering group. And in general among birds, the closer the inter rela-
tion of forms included in a group of any grade, the more definitely circum-
scribed is that group from its surroundings ; and conversely.

Fam. ScuD.E. — Bill very short, serrate, decurved at tip, but not hooked
with a distinct nail ; its covering continuous. Nostrils abortive. Gular sac
undeveloped. Wings mediocre. Tail large, cuneate, definitely few (12 — 14)-
feathered. Head not crested. Feet ambulatorial. Body with remarkable
pneumaticity ; not much depressed. Taken from* Geese. Technically one
sub-family. Genus : Sula ; perhaps another sufficiently distinct.

Evidently anserine in form and general appearance, as well as many details.^
The serrated simulates the lamellaied bill. The wings are like a goose's ;
the tail of few leathers repeats that of some Anatidse ; the feet are strongly
ambulatorial.

Fam. Pelecanidje. — Bill very long, slender, but strong; its covering not
continuous ; not serrate ; distinctly hooked with a nail. Nostrils rudimentary.
Gular sac at a maximum. Wings extremely long, with upwards of forty
remiges. Tail short, rounded, indefinitely many-feathered. Head crested.
Legs columnar, very stout. Body with unusual pneumaticity: moderately
depressed. Taken from Albatrosses. Technically one subfamily. Genus :
Pelecanns ; perhaps another.

The immense, many-feathered wings, and the size and general appearance
of these birds, recall the Albatrosses. So does the hamulate, broken-covered,
non-serrate bill. Progression in either of the three elements is similar ; neither
of the birds can swim under water. The enormous pouch represents the ex-
treme of development in the order. Yet some of the family to which Alba-
trosses belong have it; witness the genus Pelecaiioides.

Fam. PHALACROCORACiD.?i. — Bill mediocre in length, rather slender, strongly
hamulate, non-serrate, but its covering scarcely broken. Nostrils obliterated,
at least in the adult state. Gular sac moderate. Wings short or medium.
Tail large, fan-shaped, very stiff, definitely few (12 — 14) feathered. Head
with curiously modified feathers. Legs far back, not ambulatorial : upright
position necessitated. Pneumaticity slight. Body greatly depressed. Heavy
flyers; excellent divers. Taken from Auks. Technically one subfamily.
Genus: I'halacrocorax ; but probably capable of well-founded divisions.

These are palpably pygopodous ; representing the extreme, in this respect,
of the present order. They are forced to stand upright, and use the tail as
additional support. They progress under water better than any other toti-
palniate birds, except the Ploiidce. The curious colored feathers about the
head are those of Auks and Penguins. By remote analogy, there is a resem-
blance to Scansores.

Fam. Plotid^e. — Bill very slender, straight, not hooked, sharply paragna-
thous, subserrate, its covering continuous.. Nostrils minute. Gular sac
small. Wing short. Tail large, fan-shaped, 12-feathered. Legs far back ;
used on land chiefly in perching ; position more or less upright. Pneumaticity
ordinary. Body depressed. Poor flyers; unsurpassed divers. Taken from
Grebes. Technically one subfamily. Genus: Plotus.

The analogy, if not actual affinity, is very striking in this case. Physic-
ally, the long neck, style of bill, shape of wings and position of feet, are like
the same parts in PodidpidcR. Physiologically the Darters share with the
Grebes a habit almost confined to these two families: that of sinking back
quietly in the water, leaving only the ^bill exposed. Both are unrivalled
divers. Moreover, we have in that singular family, the HeliornitJiidce^ an
actual link between Grebes and Darters ; further carried to falicarious
forms.

* Not actually, of course, but potentially, or ideally.

1869.]

216 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Fam. Tachypetid^. — Bill rather long, stout, strongly hooked, its covering
not continuous. Nostrils very small. Gular sac highly developed.* Wings
and tail excessively long and strong; the latter deeply forked, r2-feathered.
Legs extraordinarily! short, well forward, but scarcely used. Tarsi plumose :
middle claw pectinated. Unsurpassed flyers: scarcely swimmers ; not divers.
Taken from Petrels. Technically one subfamily. Genus : Tachj/petes.

The tarsal ptilosis, and pectination of the middle claw, are unique in the
subclass ; the webs are more deeply incised than usual. In wings, tail and
bill these birds are modified Petrels.

^ Fam. Phaethontid/e. — Bill medium, stout, straight, sub-serrate, paragna-
thous, its covering continuous. Nostrils small, but pervious. Gular sac smallest
in the order ; wholly feathered. Wings long and pointed. Tail moderate,
but with long-exserted, filamentous median rectrices ; 16-feathered. Feet
well forward, short and stout; horizontal position of body necessitated. Ex-
cellent flyers ; good swimmers ; not divers. Taken from Terns. Technically
one subfarailj'. Genus : Phoelhon.

The gular sac is scarcely more than rudimentary, and it is fully feathered ;
the nostrils are comparatively well developed. The bill is almost exactly
that of a Tern. The filamentous tail feathers are rarely found outside
Sternince. The general resemblance to a Tern, in physical characters, as well
as mode of life, is too obvious to require further comment.

So we see that each main group of water birds has been laid under contri-
bution to form this scattering polymorphic family, a comprehensive mask for
the rest.

Family and suhfaviilies of LAMELLIROSTRES.

A completely circumscribed group, of onl}' one family, Anatithe, whose
characters are those of its order. The only break in the family is at the point
of departure from JVatatores to Grallatores, where the way is opened for the
passage from Anatidx by Fha-nicopterzia. There are six subfamilies, just as
there are six families of the preceding order. These are mainly distinguished
by the varying combination of characters common to several ; but some intro-
duce peculiar features. Of t'ae latter, Mergmia are the furthest removed, perhaps,
from all the rest. They have consequently been considered by some as a
separate family. But a merganser is scarcely or not more different from a
duck than a swan is. Regard for equivalency of groups therefore requires it
to be placed as a subfamily of Analidie.

Fam. ANATIDJil (chars, as above).

Subfam. Ci/ffninx. — Neck of extreme length for this family. Rill stout, high,
and compressed at base, wide and depressed at tip, longer than head, sides
])arallel. Nail narrow. Lamelhe of upper mandible vertical, in one row. Soft
skin of bill reaching towards, or to, eyes. J Wings ample : the inner remiges
highly developed. Tail short, rounded, indefinite!}' many {20-l-)-feaihered.
Tarsus short, reticulate. Feet large ; webs always full. Hallux small,
elevated, with a small lobe. Trachea convolute, entering sternum (always?).
Sexes similar. Species of largest size in the family, proverbially elegant
swimmers, strong flyers, poor walkers; do not dive. Genera: Cyt/nus, Olor,
Coscoroba, Chenopsis.

Subfam. Anserincn. — Neck lengthened; shorter than in the foregoing, longer

* The Frigate-birds have more of a pouch than they are usually given credit for. Mr.
Oassiri's figure, in Oillis' U. S. Naval .\stroa. Exp., is not exaggerated.

t The abbreviation of the tarsus in this case probably represents the extreme of tliis
feature in tlie class Avts.

J The genus (Jhoristnpus, Eyton, apparently Anserine rather than Cygnine, is said to pos-
sess this character ("rostrum longum acuminatum (^era ad oculos tenJente." — Eytou,
Mon. Anat.) If so, the character is not unexceptionable.

[Deo.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 217

than in any of the following. Bill much as in foregoing, but generally not
longer than head, sides converging, l)ase very high, nail at end large, generally
forming the whole tip. Lamella as before. Lores definitely feathered (al-
Avays?). Wings mediocre, sometimes appendaged. Tail short, rounded, rather
many (IC-f )-feathered. Tarsus reticulate ; longer than middle toe (always? ?).
Feet moderate, webs sometimes defective. Trachea simple, at least not en-
tering sternum. Sexes usually similar. Of large and medium size; strong
flyers, good swimmers, and especiallj- good walkers ; do not dive. Genera :
Anser, Bernicla, Chloephaga, Chcniscus, Chenalopex, Vlectropterus, Clioristopus, Ce-
reopsis, Sarkidiornis, Anseranas, Dendrocygna; but some of these may be only
subgenera, on synonyms.

A rather large group ; none are entirely swan like, but on the other hand
some forms grade toward the ducks, and their position is open to discussion.
Such especially is Dendrocijgna, but its reticulati;,', not scutellate, tarsi, appa-
rently define its position. Plectropterus is the only armed-wiuged swimmer.
Chla'phaga and Anseranas have more or less defective webs. The body is not
so depressed in the geese as in other subfamilies ; the feet are perhaps further
forward; the species stand higli, and walk better than any other AnaHdic.
Some are more or less arboricole, like many ducks.

Subfam. Analinx. — Averaging smaller than either of the preceding ; neck
usually much shorter. Bill broad and depressed towards tip ; rarely or never
so high at base as in Anserinx; of various details of shape, but rarely if ever
gibbous. Lamellaa vertical, in single row. Wings mediocre ; the scapulars
or tertials never curly. Tail short, usually rounded, sometimes longer, and
pointed ; of varying number of, but generally few, feathers ; its coverts always
ample. Feet moderate, rather further forward than in the succeeding ; hallux
simple. Body depressed. Head sometimes crested. Sexes dissimilar. Strong
flyers, good swimmers, poor walkers, scarcely diving at all ; many are arbori-
cole. Genera: Tadorna, Casarca, Lepiotarsis, Anas ci (ijf., Spatula, Aix, Cairina,
and others.

The river ducks have been so extensively subdivided, that many of the dis-
tinctions commonly claimed as generic are not of more than specific value.
Some of these genera, so-called, could not stand a moment did they not take
color from the birds' colors. I think the number must be reduced, and that
Anas can conveniently hold some half-dozen of them.

Suhfam. Fuligulince. — With the characters in general of Anatinfe, hut the feet
placed further back and wider apart, apparently, and much larger, with
broader webs ; the tarsi short. Hallux with a large hanging lobe. Tail
sometimes narrowly long-pointed, its coverts always normal. Scapulars
or tertials often curly. Bill frequently gibbous. Strong flyers, very poor
walkers, excellent swimmers, and the majority dive well; decidedly marine.
Genera: FuUgula et aff., Oidemia el aff., Somateria, and others.

The sea ducks form a group usually distinguishable on sight from the pre-
ceding, and well characterized; yet it is difficult to find any positive feature
applicable to all, except the large-lobed hallux ; this is simple in the river
ducks. But the feet are comparatively much larger. The species are mostly
marine, diving well, and scarcely walking. As in the preceding group, the
genera are altogether too many; but, likewise as in that case, I am not pre-
pared to speak authoritatively as to the amount of reduction that would be
desirable. Above, I only indicate principal series or sets of genera. Thus
FuUgula has grouped about it Fulix, Aythya, Nyroca, Clangula, &c., just as Anas
has Netlion, Querquedula, Mareca, IJaJila, Chaulelasmus, &c. Oidemia might
contain all the "Scoters," as Felionetla, Melanetla, &c. Another central point
has grouped about it forms like Ilistrionicus, Folysticta, Camptolipmus, Harelda,
&c. Somaleria will embrace all the '' Eiders " with gibbous, partly feathered
bill. This is merely an indication of the grade of differences that I would
be inclined to consider generic.

1869.]

218 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Subfam. Erismaturinm. — As in Fuligulince\ but the rectrices rigid, lance-linear,
acute, the coverts extremely short. Nail of bill chiefly inferior. Genera :
Eriamaiura (et Biziura alior.) ; and Thalnssornisl

A group of one, perhaps two, genera, and upwards of a dozen species, like
ordinary sea-ducks, but differing in the curious condition of the tail, which
corresponds to that of the Cormorants in their order.

Subfam. Merffince. — Bill long, slenderer and narrower, more nearly cylindric
in its coutinuity, than in either of the foregoing. The nail narrow, forming
a true hook. Upper mandible with a double series of lamiuffi on each side,
set obliquely backwards like saw-teeth, the single row in the under mandible
fitting between them. Otherwise much as iu Fulu/ulinm. Mostly crested.
Sexes dissimilar. General habitus as iu the sea ducks. Genera : Mergus,
Aleryanetta, Lophodytes, Mergellus.

A small group, well characterized by the bill. It offers the most conspicu-
ously crested members of the family. The habits of the " fishing-ducks," as
they are called, are much the same as those of the sea ducks.

Characters of some new HEPATICa; (mostly North American), together with
Notes on a few imperfectly described Species.

BY COE F. AUSTIN.

SCAPANIA PeCKII, AuSt.

S. minuta, compacte cfEspitosa, valde surculosa ; caule subsimplici serpen-
tino-erecto vel adscendente 3 — 4 lin. longo sursum accrescenti laxe vel sub-
imbricante foliato ; foliis integerrimis obtuse complicatis bilobis, lobis sub-
conformibus late ovatis plerumc{ue obtusis apiculatisque, dorsali parce miuori;
surculis sursum subdecrescentibus dissite foliatis, foliis subditformibus acute
bilobis varie modo directis complicatisque suberectis vel plerumque e basi
erecto patuli-recurvis nonnullis interdum explan.atis ; perianthio parvo sub-
cuneato terminali et laterali sessili valde compresso, ore truncato integerrimo
saepe subreourvo ; foliis involucralibus conformibus nonnullo subdenticulatis ;
rete foliorura e cellulis minutis subrotundis hyalinis poriformibus, iutersticiis
latissimis fulgido-pellucidis confluentibus instructo. — llep. Bor. Amer. Exsic.
ined.. No. 20.

On old logs in woods, near Belleville, Canada West, John Macoun (1865).
Adirondack Mountains, New York, Prof. C. H. Peck (1867) ; also about Jor-
dansville, N. Y. (Austin, 1868).

Remarkable for its minute size (being about the si^e of Jung ermannia llel-
lerianu), obtusely complicate leaves with the upper lobe sometimes small and
tooth-like, at other times nearly equalling the lower one ; and for the great
number of surculi, which are extremely variable in size, and clothed with
smallish leaves, which resemble very much those of Jungermannia Ilelleriaiia,
or J. mhiuta, and are very different from those of the main stems. The
gemmre bearing leaves occupy the middle of the stem, which is interrupted
on account of them ; they are usually ovate, subentire and subtruucate at the
apex, and closely wrapped about the stem.

Resembles small forms of S. exsecta (Schmid), but is readily distinguished
by its compressed perianth, never tridentate leaves, &c.

S. brevicauUs, Tayl., with which it may be possible to confound our species,
is larger, with much more condensed stems and vertical leaves, and is desti-
tute of surculi. Moreover, the perianth is very different, being scarcely more
compressed than in S. obtusifoUa.

ScAPANIA BOLANDERI, A.U3t. Mst. 1865.

S, caule subdichotomo-ramoso caespitoso subadscendente ; foliis acute
complicatis grosse ciliato- vel subinciso-dentatis siccate non mutantibus, loUo

[Dec.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 219

ventral! valde convexo oblique obovato-oblongo valde obtuso patenti-decurvo,
dorsali dimidio minori baud augustiori minus convexo erecto-subverticali vel
subappresso orbiculato vel late ovato, apice subacute grossius dentato leniter
iucurvo, margine externa ad basin longe producta ciliis valde longioribus
subdecompositis deflexis drnata ; perianthio compresso oblongo terminali, ore
subciliato. — -nep. Bor. Amer. Exsic. ined , No. 19.

On Redwood trees and stumps, California, Dr. H. N. Bolander.

Remarkable for the long, deflexed, often compound cilia3 on the attenuated
outer basal angle of the dorsal lobe of the leaf, and for the leaves retaining
their position and shape in drying. IXestmhles S. 7ieviorosa in general appear-
ance, but is rather smaller than the ordinary forms of that species, with longer
and narrower, more obovate, and much more coarsely-toothed leaves.

JUNGERMANNIA RIGIDA, Aust.

J. examphigastriata, subrobusta: caule decumbente flexuoso rigido nudo ex
apice prolifero ; foliis sursuni increscentibus erecto-conniventibus arete im-
bricatis oblique cordato-orbiculatis rotundntis integerrimis, margine flexuoso-
unduhitis prascipue dorsali subsinuatis ventrali intlexis ; perianthio terminali
mox laterali obovato-oblongo plurimum plicato demum versus basin nudo,
ore ciliato ; involucri foliis ciliatis.

Sandwich Islands. Communicated by Dr. H. N. Bolander, 1865.

Differs from J. flexicaulis, Nees., Syn. Hep. p. 8T, in the undulate leaves
— those of the involucre ciliate, and in the multi-plicate perianth.

J. colorata, Lehm., Syn. Hep., p. 86, differs in the leaves being more conni-
vent and orbicular, smaller, and not undulate, &c.

J. grandijlora, L. & G., Syn. Hep., p. 673, differs in its small subtrifid invo-
lucral leaves, connate with the amphigastria.

JUNGERMANNIA ROBUSTA, AuSt.

J. examphigastriata ; caule stricto vel subarcuato erecto ex apice prolifero-
continua e ventre toto longitudine radiculoso ; foliis pallidis exacte verticali-
bus late oblique cordato-ovatis rotundatis, toto margine niinutissime eroso-
dentatis dorsali undulatis subsinuatis subdecurrentibus ; perianthio terminali
subcylindrico triangulari-subcompresso basi nudo ore plicato subciliato ;
involucri foliis subbilobis, lobo ventrali subciliato-denticulato, altero integro.

Sandwich Islands. Communicated by Dr. H. N. Bolander, 1865.

Dilfers from J. rigida in its pale color, much larger size, more vertical
leaves eroded-dentate on the margin, in its bilobed involucral leaves, longer
and less plicated perianth, and radiculose stems.

J colorata, a closely related species, is smaller, with more orbicular and
connivent, reddish leaves not undulate on the dorsal margin.

JUNGERMANNIA CORIACEA, AuSt.

J. caule repente vel adscendeute subramoso radiculoso ; foliis subcoriaceis
rigidis arete imbricatis madefactis patulis siccatis subverticalibus ovato-ob-
longis obtusis planiusculis, margine subrepandis integerrimis dorsali subdecur-
rentibus ; perianthio magno cylindrico-oblongo subhievi, ore subplicato minute
ciliato ; foliis involucralibus subbilobis incisodentatis, basi ventrali minute
lobulatis, cum stipulis parcis lanceolatis vel oblongis acute bi-quadrifidis in-
termixtis.

Sandwich Islands. Communicated by Dr. H. N. Bolander, 1865.

Remarkable for its large size, and for the thick epidermis of the leaves,
■which are of a reddish color.

Diflftrs from J. grandiftora, L. & G., Syn. Hep., p. 673, in its oblong leaves,
those of the involucre slightly enlarged and not connate with the amphigas-
tria ; also in the radiculose stem. There are no amphigastria except at or
near the base of the perianth, and these (about four in number) are situated on

1869.]

220 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

at least two sides of the stem, and some of them below the two outer inrolu-
cral leaves, whi^ih are simply retuse at the apex and nearly entire, while the
two inner ones are unequally bilobed and lacerate- toothed.

JONUERMANNIA BFFORMIS, Aust.

J. caule dense caspitoso ralde intricato e ventre innovante pluries ramoso,
valde radiculoso, radiculis tenui^simis longissimis subfasciculatis supremis
nonnuUo rubris ; foliis succubis vix imbricatis subcomplanatis oblique semi-
circularibus vel late ovatis tenuibus, margine dorsali decurrentibus apice
integris retusisve, rete e cellulis magnis subrotundis hyalinis intersliciis .
angustissimis instnicto, surculorum foliis dimidio minoribus ovatis obovatisve
valde obtusis vix decurreutibus ; amphigastriis nullis ; fructu ignoto. — Hep.
Bor. Avier. Exsic. i?ied., No. 2G.

On wet rocks, at the Delaware Water Gap, New Jersey, 1867.

Remarkable for the closely entangled and matted stems and surculi, and
for the leaves of two forms. The texture of the leaves is much as in Oali/po-
geia Trichomams.

JUNGERMANNIA FOSSOMBRONIOIDES, AuSt.

J. caule dense casspitoso adscendente (radicibus purpureis subincrassatis)
valde radiculoso ; foliis disticho-subverticalibus arete imbricatis orbiculatis,
margine undulato-repandis, apice brevi uniplicatis leniter emarginatis patulo-
subrecurvis, basi subcordatis caulem amplcctentibus subventricosis radiculo-
sis, involucralibus conformibus cum perianthio alte connatis ; perianthio
maximo longiuscule exserto subcampanulato sex — decemplicato, ore hiante
profunde laciniato, laciniis integerrimis ; calyptra omnino violacea ; capsula
ovali. — Hep. Bor. Amer. Exsic incd., No. 32.

On rocks along a rivulet, near Closter, New Jersey.

Remarkable for its large, subcampanulate and multi-plicate perianth. Al-
lied to J. crenulata, Smith, but much larger, &c.

JUNGERifANNIA PORPHYROLEUCA, NceS, Var.

Caule dense lateque caespitoso prostrato innovante' ramoso crassiusculo
valde radiculoso, radiculis ad cauli insertionem rubris longissimis subfascicu-
latis, foliis plerumque rubris pallido viride plus minus variegatis subverticalibus
obtusissime subcomplicatis e basi erecta subrecurvis oblongo-quadratis sub-
cuneatisve emarginato-bilobis integerrimis, sinu obluso, lobis plerumque
acutis subinaequalibus incurvis ; perianthio adscendente subclavato valde
exserto a tergo ventreque subappresso apice obtuse 3 — 4-plicato ore con-
nivente subciliato ; foliis involucralibus parce majoribus, apice subtruncato
obtuse 3 — 4 lobulato et eodemque numero late plicato ; caule gemmifero
spiciformi attenuato rigido microphyllo, foliis bifariis arete imbricatis sub-
ovatis apice emarginatis eroso-dentatis subintegerrimisve, gemmis rubris. —
Hep. Bor. Amer. Exsic. ined., No. 42.

On old logs in the region of the White Mountains of New Hampshire, Oakes ;
also in Canada West, near Belleville, Macoun.

Remarkable for the usually variegated, often deep red color of the whole
plant, and for the cuneate-oblong shape of the leaves. Differs from J.
Michauxii, Web., in its usually smaller size, reddish color, prostrate and
densely radiculose stems, longer, narrower, subcuneate and vertical leaves,
with an obtuse and broad sinus, and shorter, less acute and less incurved
lobes, and in the obtusely 3 — 4-lobed, somewhat enlarged involucral leaves ;
also in the gemmiferous stems, which are almost precisely as in J. Helleriana.
Nees.

Ju.NGERMANNIA POLITA, NcCS.

J. amphigastriis nullis; caule subsimplici nudiusculo nigrescente flexuoso,
adscendente et fertili dissite repente imbricante foliato ; foliis nitidis ad

[Dec.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 221

caiileni oblique insertis undnlatis flexuoso-patulis late amplexicaulilnis (vix
complicatis) late cuneato-quadratis integerrimis truiicato bi — trilobis, margine
obtuse 1 — 3 undulato-plicatis (basi media vix saccatis) ; fructu terniinali
(in auctumno matur.), periantliio valde elongate (circa 3 lin. longo) subcylin-
drico nudo apice subplicato ore minute ciliato ; foliis involucralibus binis
latissimis brevissimis valde cristato-undulatis obtusissime plurinium lobulatis.
— Hep. Bor. Amer. Exsic , No. 46.

In a peat bog near Closter, New Jersey; growing among Sphagna, &n A
associated Avith J. Taylori, J. inflata, J. connivens, etc.

The sterile plant agrees perfectly with authentic European specimens. The
fruit appears to have been collected now for the first time, and is extremely
rare in our locality. The leaves on the horizontal and fertile stems are crisped
and wavy, much as in most Fossombronice. The former often bear little balls
of green gemmae on the apices of their lobes, and are subhori/.ontal and fre-
quently imbricated, while the latter, towards the perianth, are usually 1 — 3 lines
apart, subopposite and erect. The leaves, particularly on the erect stems, are
about as often two as three lobed, and can hardly be said to be complicate, or
either saccate at the base. The stem is usually very conspicuous on account
of its blackish color. The perianth is whitish or membranaceous above, and
at first subtriquetrous.

JUNGERMAX.VIA WaLLROTHIANA, NcCS.

"Nigricans, minutissima. Caule repente, adscendente, subsimplici vel
innovante ramoso, vix 5 — 1 linea longo, valde radiculoso ; radicibus crassis
papilliformibusque. Foliis diametro caulis latioribus, amplectentibus, firmis.
ovato-quadratis, arete imbricatis, semiverticalibus, concavis, sursuni conni-
ventibus, emarginato-bidentatis ; sinu vel obtuso in foliis inferioribus, vel
acuto in foliis superioribus ; dentibus obtusiusculis integerrimis; margine
pellucidis ; areolatione distincte, cellulis ovato polygonis, olivaceis, margine
tantum pellucidis. Foliis involucralibus majoribus, erectis, tridentatis, undato-
plicatis, basi connatis ; deniibus acutis vel obtusis. Perianthio ovali-cylindrico,
superne contracto, plicato ; ore subdentato, pellucido, inferne rubello."
(Lesqx. in Herb.)

On coarse sand, on the slopes of the White Mountains of New Hampshire,
Oakes.

A very minute species, but more than twice the size of./. SulUvantii, from
which it is also distinguished by its entire leaves, papillaeform rootlets, and
different perianth. Leaves round-ovate, thickish,^-bifid, the lobes triangular-
ovate, acute; cellules irregularly angled, subquadrate or oval, rather uniform,
largish for the size of the leaf (about ten across its widest part), opaque, with
broad hyaline spaces between. Apex of the lobes hyaline, often slightly
eroded on the margin. Color dark or olive-brown. Perianth terminal,
subpyramidal, cleft about one-third way into about six sublinear truncate
lobes, the apex white and pellucid, the middle and base dark brownish-red ;
the mouth crenulate by the protrusjon of the ends of the very large, oblong
cells, of which the upper portion of the perianth is composed. Leaves of the
involucre enlarged, entire on the margin.

JUNGERMANNIA SuLLIVANTII, Aust.

J. amphigastriata, minutissima, olivaceo-vel satur^ite viridis ; caule circa
\ — J lin. longo carnoso valde radiculoso, fructifero suberecto clavato, sterili
repente subfiliformi vel subjulaceo; foliis imbricatis caule ssepe angustioribus
ovato-orbiculatis vel subquadratis erecto-subverticalibus plus minus den-
tato-serratis bifidis, sinu acutiusculo, dentibus acutis ; amphigastris (solum
versus apicem in caule sterili observatis) lanceolato-ovatis strictis integris
(folii lobo fere sirailibus) suberectis ; perianthio circa I. linea longo late
ovali subobovatove obtuse parceque angulato, apice pauhun plicato truncato,

1869.]

222 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

ore connivente lobulato-dentato nonnullo auguste scarioso ; involucri foliis
tribus erectis baud coalitis ; pedicello longitudiae semilineari ; capsula ovali.
— Hej). Bor. Amer. Exsic. ined., No. 50.

J. divaricata, Sulliv, Muse. AUeghau. N. 239.

On very rottea wood uear Columbus, Obio, Sullivant. About Closter, New
Jersej', aud Jordansville, New York. Also near Belleville, Canada West,
Macoun.

Remarkable for its extremely minute size. Differs from J. divaricata, Engl.
Bot., in the much smaller size of the whole plant, particularly the perianth, in
the larger, sublanceolate amphigastria, in the discrete involucral leaves, and in
the roundish, less quadrate and less angular cells of the leaves.

JUNGERMANNIA j\rAC0nNIl, Aust.

J. caule compacte lateque caespitoso tenui valde innovante ramuloso,
ramulo fructifero brevissimo veutrali ; foliis caule latioribus subimbricatis
erecto-subverticalibus subcomplicato-concavis e basi angustiori subcuneato-
([uadratis ultra medium bifidis, siuu plerumque lato obtuso, laciniis triangulari-
lanceolatis vel subulatis rectiusculis sub pressura divaricatis, areolis parvius-
culis angularibus ; perianthio minuto albido subtrigono ovali obovato gibbo-
sitate subintiato, apice contracto subi)licato, ore denticulato ciliatove: involucri
foliis subovatis subinaequaliter bi-trifidis serratis longe ciliatisve. — Hep. Bor.
Amer. Exsic. ined., No. 55.

On decayed logs in woods, Canada West, John Macoun.

Differs from J. divaricata in the more matted stems, in the rather wider, more
complicate leaves with an obtuse sinus ; aud chiefly in the much shorter, white,
and differently shaped perianth, wliich is situated on a short ventral branch.
The habitat (old logs) is also different. Color very dark green, changing to
dark fuscous- or brownish-green in the herbarium. Perianth shaped much as
in J. Helleriana, Nees.

Jdngkrmannia pleniceps, Aust.

J. caule dense cffispitoso perbrevi e ventre valde radiculoso iunovanteque
ramoso ; foliis incrassatis orbiculatis valde concavis verticali-conniventibus
subsemiamplexicaulibus ad ^ bifidis, siuu acutinsculo obtusove, lobis ommino
acutis iucurvis valde conniventibus ; fructu in ramulo ventrali terminali,
perianthiis confertissimis magnis oblongo-cylindricis obtuse trigouis, ore
plicato denticulato hinc laciniato; involucri foliis rectis oblongis bi palmato-
quadrifidis nonnuUis stipuloideis ; rete folioruni e cellulis amplissimis subro-
tuudis hyalinis instracto.

Among Sphagna, White Mountains of New Hampshire, Oakes.

Remarkable for the very concave, upwardly conniveut and thick leaves,
whicli are composed of very large inflated cellules ; for the very short stems
with numerous ventral innovations, and for the very abundant fruit, — the
perianths completely covering the ccespites. Color pale or albescent. (Some of
the involucral leaves (the ventral ones) are amphigastria-like. Resembles /.
cojininens, Dicks., but is somewhat larger, with shorter stems, more vertical and
concave and thicker leaves, which are not decwrent, and a larger more cylindri-
cal perianth, which is not ciliate at the mouth. Perianth much as in J.
hicuspid'ila, but the shape of the leaves is quite different from the specimens of
that species collected by Oakes, in precisely similar situations ; the stems are
also shorter and the involucral leaves not spreading at the apex.

LoPHOCOLEA Hallii, Aust.

L. caule repente parcissime radiculoso; foliis subverticalibus oblongis in-
tegris vel subrepandis crenulatis fere ad medium bilobis, sinu obtuso, Inciniis
subreclis plerumque obtusis, rete e cellulis subparvis rotundis convexis hyalinis,
intersticiis augustissimis instructo ; amphigastriis inf'erioribns parvis profunde
bipartitis, sinu valde obtuso, laciniis subiequalibus terretiusculis patulis in-

[Dec

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 223

curvis, superioribus majoribus extrorsum utrinque unidentatis vel palmato
tri-quadripartitis, apicalibus sublanceolatis anguste bifidis extrorsum repando-
dentatis ; fructu .

On the ground, Illinois, E. Hall.

Remarkable for the obtusish lobes and crenulate margin of the leaves. A
Tery small species.

LoPHocoLEA Macocnii, Aust.

L. minutula, condensata, Isete viridis ; cauleperbrevi prostrate dense fascicu-
latira radiculoso inuovante raraoso ad apicem adscendentem incurviusculo ;
foliis erectiusculis ovato-subquadratis retusis vel emarginato-bilobis aut sfepe
integris, margine leniter repanda crenulatis, sinu lobisque obtusis vel acutius-
culis his rectis vel curviusculis, rete e cellulis magnis intersticiis angustissimis
hyalinis instructo ; amphigastriis profunde bifidis (trifidisve ?) sinu lato obtuso,
laciniis serie cellularuni 1 — 2 instructis filiformibus patulo-incurvis, colore
laete carjophylloideis ; perianthio subobovato leniter trigono, apice cristato-
dentato ssepe in uno latere profunde obtuseque inciso, angulis baud vel vi.t
alatis ; involucri foliis majoribus suboblongis subrepandis apice valde in«»-
qualiter 2 — 4 repando-dentatis ; amphigastriis valde majoribus lanceolatis
minus profunde bifidis repando-dentatis. — Hep. Bor. Amer. Ezsic. ined., No. f^G.

On old logs in woods, hidden among other Jiiti</ermannice, Canada, Macoun ;
also near Little Falls, New York.

About the size and with much the general appearance (when sterile) of
small forms of Jungermannia scutata, resembling it in the color, general form,
position, and in the areolation of the leaves. Remarkable, among other
things, for the light pink color of the amphigastria, with thread- or necklace-
form divisions (usually composed of a single row of cells.) Differs from the
preceding species in its much smaller size, densely radiculose stems, sliorter
and less deeply lobed leaves, &c, ; and from //. minor, Nees., in the more ob-
tusely lobed, often entire leaves. The lower leaves are usually rather deeply
and acutely lobed, while the upper ones are only emarginate or refuse, or
often quite entire at the apex.

? Gymnanthe Bolandeei, Aust.

? G. caule eradiculoso prostrato subimbricato e ventre innovante ramoso
complanate foliato ^ — J unciali ; foliis succubis stricte patentibus lineari-
oblongis subfalcatis integerrimis planis, apice rotundatis vel oblique subtrnn-
catis aut nonnuUo in.iequaliter emarginato-bilobis, margine dorsali subdecur-
rentibus; rete e cellulis laxis maximis heteromorphis discretis, intersticiis latis
hyalinis instructo ; amphigastriis (inferne obsoletis) minutis oblongo-ovati.s
longe bicornibus, sinu obtuso, laciniis subulatis paralellis ; fructu .

Sandwich Islands. Communicated by Dr. H. N. Bolander, (1865.)

A neat and pretty little plant, about the size of Lejeunia serpyllifolia ; the
form of the leaves suggesting a Plagiochila, but the general appearance of the
plant is still more suggestive of a Saccogyna, and, indeed, I am not sure but
that it ought rather to have been referred to this latter geuus than to Gymnan-
the. The cells of the leaves are very large and loosely arranged, and are
usually furnished with broad and short projecting points. They also vary
greatly in size and position, being roundish or oblong, and frequently some of
them are obliquely or even transversely disposed through the leaf. Those on
the margin are usually narrower than the others, and vary from subquadrate
to elongated-oblong or parallelogrammoid. The cells of the stem are also
very loosely disposed ; however, they are still larger than the leaf-cells, and
uniformly oblong.

Calypogeia bifurca, Aust.

C. albida, caespitosa, parvula ; caule prostrato e ventre apiceque valde
flagelifero-raraoso circa 3 — 5 lin. longo, dorso in statu siccati convexo {nee
canaliculato) ob cellulis oblongis eleganter striolato perspicue secus foliorum

1869.J 16

224 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

basin cum cellulis maximis oblongis hyalinis marginato ; foliis imbricatis
late et suboblique ovatis margine inf'eriori abrupte decurrentibus supra valde
convexis siccate nou mutantibus apice pro genere lato subcontractis emargi-
nato-bideutatis, dentibus triangulari-subulatis rectis vel plerumque divaricatis,
sinu plerumque lunulato ; rete e cellulis hexagonis magnis hyalinis, versus
basin oblongis, versus apieem rotuudatis ac sensim minoribus, secus raarginem
angustioribus plus minus quadrangularibus transversimque elongatis in-
striicto ; amphigastriis valde dissitis minutis caule angustioribus vel cum vix
excedentibus ovatis vel reniformi-rotundis obtuse profundeque bifidis, laciniis
rectis subulatis integrisque vel subrotuudis divaricatis ac iterum bifidis.
Sandwich Islands. Communicated by Dr. H. N. Bolander, (1865.)
A neat and pretty little species. Possibly too near the Mexican C. laxat
L. ^' (/., Syn. Hep. 2). 713, but nothing is there said about the flagiliferous
ramification, a striking feature of our plant; and the leaves are said to be lax
and minutely bidentate, characters which do not agree with our plant, whose
Ittaves do not change their shape in drying, and, for the genus, are pretty
strongly toothed. The peculiar bifurcation of most of the amphigastria, and
the transverse elongation of the marginal cells of the leaf, appear to be generic
characters (specific only in degree), as they occur (in a less degree) in C. Tri-
chomanis, and at least in two other species.

Physiotium subinflatdm, Aust.

Ph. foliorum lobulis subinsequalibus lanceolatis acurainatis circa J — f li-
beris ; dorsali convexo, margine exteriori versus basin inflexo subbidenticulato-
que, apice subconvoluto dentibus parvis rectis acutis minute bifido ; ven-
trali parce minori convoluto-concavo, basi ob margines coalescentes breviter
mbuloso non appendiculato, margine interior! subalato, ad apieem angustem
sublingulato obtusiusculo integro et integerrimo vel eroso-denticulato.
Sandwich Islands. Communicated by Dr. H. N. Bolander, (1865.)
Remarkable for the subequal acuminate lobes of the leaf; the lower one not
appendiculate, and inflated only at the base, convolute-concave above.

PoLYOTUs Peckianus, Aust.

P. caule repente pinnatim vel bi — tripinnatim ramoso, ramulis dissitiusculis
patuli-recurvis J| — f-uncialibus subattenuatis ; foliis arctissime imbricatis »ub-
ovatis obliquis convoluto-decurvis inwqualiter bi — trilobis integerrimis basi
utrinque auriculatis, sinu angusto, lobis ovatis acutis vel subapiculatis aut
rare obtusis inferioribus incurvis ; auriculis subparvis oblongo-lanceolatis
canaliculato-concavis, ventralibus stricte patentibus caulem arete amplectenti-
bus, dorsalibus plus minus deflexis cauli arete appressis ; amphigastriis
maximis oblongis profundius et cequaliter bifidis, basi ut in foliis auriculatis,
auriculis caulem utro-bique arete amplectentibus ; fructu in ramulo brevi poly-
phyllo ; involucri foliis valde majoribus oblongis basi parce longissimeque
ciliato-lobulatis profunde bifidis, laciniis ligulatis undulatis subdentatis canaii-
culatis.

Island of Mauritius. Communicated by Prof. C. H. Peck, (1868).

Remarkable for the bi — triiobed leaves, and for the very large bifid amphi-
gastria, which are auricled at the base in much the same manner as are the
leaves. The stems are about 2i inches long and rather widely branched. The
leaves do not change their shape in drying. In size the plant rather exceeds
frullania Tamarisci.

Sendtnera tristicha, Aust.

S. parvula, rufo-brunnea vel subnigra ; caule rigido parce ramoso tenui
subunciali ; foliis amphigastriisque exacte tristichis ovatolanceolatis falcato-
subsecundis apertis vel siccatis appressis apice ad i partem fissis, lobis acutis-
simis inwqualibus recto-conuiventibus f fructu .

[Dec.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 225

Sandwich Islands. Communicated bj Dr. H. N. Bolander, (1865).

Differs from S. Jiaa, Nees, in the leaves being much less deeply fissured
at the apex.

Phragmicoma elongata, Aust.

Ph. caule stricto parce innovante diviso subbiunciali ; foliis late subfalcato-
ovatis convexis patulirecurvis et decurvis fere linea longis apice serratis
subacutis vel obtusis, lobulo minute subinflato mutico in folii margiue trans-
euente ; amphigastriis squarrosis cauli duplo latioribus orbiculatis subreni-
formibusve subtus concavis, margiue omiiino minutissime serratis ; perianthio
parvo a lateribus com(iresso fere sessili subdecem-alato cneteroquin hevi.

Sandwich Islands. Communicated by Dr. H. N. Bolander, (1865).

A large species, being about the size of P.- sernireprdndu, Herb. Lehni., but
the leaves|are less strongly toothed, and the perianth more nuaierously angled,
the angles winged, &c.

Phragmicoma subsquarrosa, Aust.

Ph. caule brevi flexuoso compacte ca?spitoso rigido apice suberecto ; foliis
arctissime imbricatis in siccis subsquarrosis undulatisque obovato-rotundis
maxime areolatis, lobulo raajusculo semirotundo-ovato vix inflato ; amjihigas-
triis caule duplo vel triplo latioribus reniformibus apice subrecurvis ; perian-
thio obovato hand compresso circa 10-alato caUeroquin l*vi.

Sandwich Islands. Communicated by Dr. H. N. Bolander, (1865).

Perianth terminal, at length lateral, deeply and closely grooved or angled,
crowned with a very minute cylindrical tube. Calyptra crowned with a very
long style. Elaters very large, containing a single thick, imperfect fibre.
Leaves margined by a row of diminished, subequal cellules.

? LeJEUNIA BISERIATA, Aust.

? L. foliis rufo vel fusco-brunneis siccatis convoluto-adpressis madefactis
patentibus oblongo ovatis integris convexis, sui)ra minute eleganterque i)apil-
losis, toto margine inferior! late inflexis ; am[)higastriis biseriatis alternatis
foliorum medio oppositis basi ad caulem exacte diagone insertis erecto-
divaricatis lineari-oblongis obtusis in longitudine circa f folii metientibus ;
fructu —^ . «

Near Augusta, Georgia, Sulliv., (1845).

About the size and color of Frullania Virginica. Remarkable for the genuine
papilhe on the surface of the leaves and amphigastria,for the broadly inflexed
ventral margin of the leaf, and chiefly for the double row of amphigastria.
These are alternate with, and equal the leaves in number. They are f as long as
the leaves and less than i^ as wide, and are placed diagonally or obliquely
opposite them, and about midway between their upper and lower margin.
Areolation and texture of the leaves much as in Frullania Virginica. The
rootlets are remarkably stout, and of a brown color, and few in number ; and
proceed from the whole utider surface of the stem as well as from the base of
the amphigastria. A few stems on\y of the plant, without fruit, were found in
Mr. SuUivant's collection, mixed with L. serpgllifolia and //. Sullivantice. Dili-
gent but unsuccessful search was made for more of it, among numeroua speci-
mens from the same locality.

Frullania saxtcola, Aust. MSS., (1865.)

F. digyna: caule brevissimo arete repente vage innovanteque pluries ramose;
foliis orbiculatis (vix obliquis) planis vel subconvexis aut nonnuUo leniter
concavis subassurgentibus, auriculis cauli approximatis rarissime majusculis
subrotundis galeiformibusque autera fere semper parvis explanatisque ; am-
phigastriis minutis caule non vel parce latioribus subobovatis bifidis integer-
rimis, sinu lobisque plerumque obtusis ; perianthio compressiusculo oblongo
majusculo, ore brevissimo pateriformi papuloso, dorso convexo, ventre abrupte-

1869.]

226 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

lateque carinato, utrinque uni — plurinervoso, carina biangulata, nervis angu-
lisque plus minus alatis undulaiisque. — Hep.Bor. Amer. Exsic.ined., No. 104.

Closely adhering to the surface of steep shaded rocks, near Closter, New
Jersey ; very rare. Also, Texas, Wright in Herb. Sulliv.

Remarkable for the short, innovately much branched stems, and orbicular,
plane, subascending, scarcely if at all oblique leaves, with the auricle almost
always expanded into a small, oblong, concave, obtuse lamina. Areolation of
the leaves distinct, scarcely enlarged in the centre at the base. Perianth lon-
ger than in F. Viryinica and more exserted, but angled much in the same man-
ner ; however, the angles are never crested, and the " style " or mouth is very
diiferent ; (tubular and considerably elongated in F. Virginica). The stems
are much shorter, the leaves larger, and the perianth very different from /.
Eboraeeiisis.

Frullania Sullivantii, Aust.

F. digyna; caule arete adpresso vage breviter ramoso ; foliis subrotundig
convexis integerrimis obtusis, auricula magna galeata rotunda hititudinem folii
I aequante cauli adproximata ; amphigastriis obovatis obtuse bifidis subinte-
gerrimis caule parce latiorihus illis versus perianthiura oblongis cuneatisve,
lobis obtusissimis vel supr«mis acutis ; perianthio obovato subcompresso brevi
rostrato, dorso minute 1 ( — 2)-nervos0, ventre unicarinato, carina biangulata
bialatave ; involucri foliis rotundis cum perianthio et uno alterove cum amphi-
gastriis connatis, lobulis paralellis subrequalibus, (ventrali \ — J angustiori).

On the bark of trees, Georgia, SuUivaut ; also South Carolina, Curtis (in
Herb. Sulliv).

Differs from F. inflata, Nees, in the fewer and less distinct nerves on the
back of the much more compressed perianth, in the shorter amphigastria, in
the auricle placed close to the stem, «&c. ; and from F. Oakesiana in the differ-
ent perianth, smaller auricle, more unequal lobes of the involucral leaves, &c.

Frullania Oakesiana, Aust.

F. monogyna; caule vage ramoso intricato, ramulis fertilibus brevibus sub-
erectis ; foliis suboblicjue orbiculatis laxe imbricalis subconvexis raargine leni-
ter repandis, auriculis maximis (folia fere sequantibus) rotundatis cucullato-
galeatis cauli fere contiguis, lobulo dentiformi interjecto nullo vel fere
obsolete ; amphigastriis ovato-rotundis vel subobovatis caule parce latioribus
bifidis integerrimis subserratisve ; perianthio parvo subobovato subinflato
ventre late carinato, utrinque varie numero (1—7) nervoso vel alato, cietero-
quin Isevi ; involucri foliis bilobis integerrimis cum amphigastriis uno alterove
subalte conuatis, lobis ffiqualibus obtusis paralellis.

On the bark of Bctula excelsa, in the region of the White Mountains of New
Hampshire, Oakes.

A small species, scarcely as large as F. Eboracensis^ and of a reddish color.
Remarkable for the very large auricle (more than | the diameter of the leaf,)
for the more or less connate involucral leaves, and for the extremely variable
number of rib-like nerves of the small, subintlated perianth.

Frullania Bolanderi, Austin MSS., (1865.)
F. trigyna ? caule repente inordinate fasciculatim ramoso fiagelifero, ramia
fructif'eris adscendenti-erectis clavatis ; foliis parvis imbricatis oblique orbicu-
latis convexis marginatis, basi inauriculam magnam orbiculatamgaleatam com-
pressam (subtus concavam) margine crassiusculam basi integram compUcatis;
amphigastriis subpatentibus minimis orbiculatis subobovatisve bifidis, lobis
obtusis vel acutiusculis integerrimis vel plerumque repando-dentatis serratisve;
foliis involucralibus duplo vel triplo majoribus appressiusculis cum amphigas-
triis alte connatis ; perianthio potius magno comprcsso ina^qualiter triangulari
obovato-elliptico, dorso concavo vel demum convexiusculo leniter bicostato
versus apicem breviter et in;equaliter 2 — 4 nervoso, ventre obtuse unicarinato
versus apicem leniter bicostato, cffiteroquiu la?vi.

[Dee.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 227

On the bark of Negundo aceroides, " Tomales Bay," California, Bolander,
(1864).

The flagellae are nearly erect, about as high as the fertile branches, and
clothed on the underside with crowded, squarrose amphigastria, but are with-
out leaves except at the apex, where these are crowded into little tufts or heads,
and are not mixed with amphigastria.

A small species ; scarcely as large as F. Eboracensis (which has somewhat
similar flagellae), and differing from it chiefly in the 2 — 4 nerves on the back
of the perianth, in the involucral leaves connate with the amphigastria, and
in the compressed (much as in F. squarrosa) auricle of the leaf.

Frullania Leana, Aust.

F. pusilla, rufo-brunnea ; caule brevi ; foliis rotundato-ovatis obtusis

omnino crassiusculo apiculatis, auriculis fere raaximis subcj'lindricis obliquis a
caule valde distantibus oblongo-areolatis basi dependente distincte crenulato-
dentatis ; amphigastriis majusculis oblongis bifidis integerrimis planis rectis
caulis latitudinem parce excedentibus ; perianthio e basi subattenuata obovato-
oblongo multum exserto laevi dorso piano ventre unicarinato apice subtruncato,
rete ad basin maximo oblongo supra medium minuto heteromorpho maxime
stelliformi ; involucri foliis cum amphigastriis (semper?) connatis margine
sinuato-dentatis, lobulis plus minus iucisis erectis paralellis, amphigastriis
valde majoribus parce inciso-dentatis.

On trees near Cincinnati, Ohio, T. G. Lea (in Herb. Tayl. mixed with Lejeunin
longiflora).

Remarkable for the very large, oblong, distant auricle, obtusely dentate at
the base, and for the thickish, apiculate leaves.

A very small species, about the size of F. Duimmondii, Tayl.; from which,
however, it is readily distinguished by its more imbricated, apiculate leaves,
by the much larger auricle very distant from the stem, and with a very dis-
tinct tooth-like lobe on the margin of the leaf close to its base. The perianth
is also differently areolated, and the perichsetal leaves are toothed on the lower
lobe, oreven incised.

Frullania Mauritiana, Aust.

F. tetragyna (semper?) ; caule bi — tripinnato flexuoso ; foliis siccatis caulem
subcircumvolutis madefactis patentibus e basi valde angustata oblique (subfal-
cato-) ovatis, apice deflcxo-incurvis longiuscule acuminatis apiculatisve, rete
e cellulis (marginalibus subrotundis exceptis) angustis linearibus oblongisve
plus minus sinuosis in centro subhyalinis, intersticiis latissimis (quam cellulis
parce latioribus) obscuris confluentibus instructo ; auricula oblongo-cylindrica
mediocri oblique a caule distanti ; amphigastriis e basi angusta late obova-
tis planiusculis vel margine versus basin subrecurvis ad J — i bifidis, sinu au-
gustoobtuso, lobis acutis ; perianthio oblongo, dorso lasvi, ventre unicarinato,
apice loDge rostrato ; foliis amphigastriisque involucralibus erectis adpressis,
lobis ovatolauceolatis inciso-serratis.

Island of Mauritius. Communicated by Prof. Chas. H. Peck.

Readily recognized by the very narrow base, acuminate apex, and narrow
subsinuous cells of the subfalcate leaf; by the largish, subcylindrical, oblique
auricle distant from the stem ; by the nearly plane and strongly incised lobes
of the involucral leaves and amphigastria. The lower margin of .the leaf, be-
tween the auricle and the stem, is narrowly but distinctly inflexed ; it is also
furnished with a minute, cilia-like tooth, which is close to the auricle and
composed of about six roundish cellules arranged in a single row.

Frullania orbicularis, Aust.

F. monogyna; caule lato extenso bi — tripinnatim decomposite circa 3
unciali, ramulis plus minus divaricato-recurvis ; foliis laxe imbricatis majus-
culis oblique ovatis vel ovali-auriculseformibus convexis subpellucidig, apice

1869.]

228 PROCEEDIKGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

obtnso plus minus decurvis, rete e cellulis minutis subrotundis margine
sinuatis, illis ad basiu valde majoiibus obscuris, intersticiis latis subobscuris
instructo ; auricula tecta cucullata valde compressa parva subovali cauli ad-
proxiniata ; ampbigastriis magnis orbiculatis planis apice integris vel rare
subemarginatis margine leniter repandis ; perianthio oblongo subexserto, dorso
))lano convexove, ventre (carina valde compressa) unicarinato ; involucri foliis
semicordato-ovatis acutis integerrimis vel 5-ubundulato-repandis, lobulo
longiori lineari-setaceo canaliculate, ampbigastriis elongato-lanceolatis pro-
funde bifidis subintegerrimis.

Nepal. Herb. Snlliv.

Readily distinguished from F. iiitenristipula, Nees, by the fertile flower con-
taining but a single pistil, by the orbicular ampbigastria plane on the margins,
by the cucullate, suboval, compressed auricle, &c.

FOSSOMBRONIA CrISTULA, Aust.

F. minuta, albescens; caule perbrevi (1 — 2 lineas longo) arete repenti
furcatim vel fastigialim diviso, radicibus plerumque purpureis terram aflfixo ;
foliis angulariter lobulatis subintegrisve quadratis vel obovato-rotundis sub-
ditformibus plerumque basi subaugustatis atque apice valde undulato-crispatis;
perianthio fere ut in F.pusiUa ; involucro nullo ? capsulain pedicello brevissimo
immersa; sporis pallido-fuscis parce snbgrosseque tuberculatis circa 1-600 —
1-700 unc. metientibus ; elateribus delicatissimis hyalinis unicellularibus
brevibus crassiusculis plus minus difformibus, fibro tenuissimo pallido-fusco
annulari et spirali [plervmque partini annulari ac partim cpirali) depictis. — Hep.
Bor. Amer. Exsic. ined., No. 121.

On damp sand, associated with Dicranum. cerviculatum and Jiingermannia
crfinidala, in an unfrequented path, near Batsto, New Jersey, (Oct., 18G8).

Remarkable for its small size, and very delicate, often somewhat branched
elaters of more or less variable shapes (much as in the Anthocerotem), and with
the liingle fibre usually partly annular and partly spiral in the same example!
Antheridia few and large, oval or roundish obovate, nearly sessile on the back
of the stem. Pistillidia (about 20) somewhat crowded towards the apex of the
stem, above the antheridia, and just below the perianth, and partially immersed
in the stem ; not involucrate, or very imperfectly so.

AXDROCRYPHIA LONGISETA.

Fossombronia longiseta, Austin, MSS, 1864.

A. dioica ; caule suberecto vel depresso 3 — 4 lin. longo e dorso prolifero-
ramoso, radicibus purpureis terram affingenti ; foliis pallidis subimbricatis sub-
horizontalibus subquadratis lobis plerumque obtusis undulato-lobulatis subin-
tegrisve inferioribus nonnullis parvis, involucralibus plerumque valde
majoribus subflabelliformibus basi nonnullo attenutttis ac in tubulum cum
caulis apice confluentibus ; perianthio plerumque magno campanulato varie
modo ineiso vel subintegro ; pedicello longiusculo (4 — 6 lin. alt.) tenui basi
in caulis apice longe incluso ; capsula irregulariter lacera magna calyptram
(et nonnullo perianthium) implenenti ; sporis subangularibus subuigris valde
muricatis ; elateribus longiusculis bispiris.

€n the ground among mosses. California, Bolander; Texas, Wright.

A variable species. The perianth often smallish, but frequently very large ;
sometimes divided to the base into 2 — 3 flabelliform divisions and again nearly
entire, the smaller ones undulate and crisped at the mouth, the larger ones
often nearly entire and nearly plane at the mouth. The upper leaves are more
or less involucrate, with their bases often costa-form, and more or less united
into a tube and confluent into the stem. Pistillidia quite numerous, at first
naked and scattered on the back of the stem (as in Fossombronia). Stem
frequently' bearing a descending tuber underneath the perianth, and usually
considerably eitending beyond it. On the prostrate stems the leaves are often

[Dec.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADKLPHIA. 229

broader than long, and subhorizontal ; on the ascending ones the j are more
or less attenuated and 1 — 2 costate at the base, and erect or nearly so. In
length the style is IJ times, and the elaters 3 — 5 times, the diameter of aspoie.
Spores with more numerous and larger muriculje than in Fossombronia pusilla.
Separated from Fossombronia chiefly by its dioicious inflorescence, and by the
perianth being (apparently at least) an expansion of the apex of the stem.

Plagiochasma ertthrosperma, Sulliv. in Herb.

P. fronde expanso-obovata (3 — 5 lin. lat.) pallido-viridi rugulosa late
fuscescente marginata, subtus dense radiculosa squamosaque ; squamis albidis
setaceo-incisis versus apicem ultra marginem exstantibus ; pedunculo 5 — 8
lineas alto basi nudo apice paleaceo ; sporis aurantiaceo-rubris tuberculatis ;
elateribus 4-spiris.

Rocky Mountains, E. Hall.

Remarkable for the red spores, and for the white, fringe-like scales extending
beyond the margin of the frond towards the apex.

Sauteria limbata.
? Grimaldia limbata, Austin, MSS., 1865.

S. fronde obovato-oblonga subdichotoma concava reticulato-papulosa laete
viridi latissime marginata, subtus nigro-purpurea valde incrassata, margine
nigro-purpurea membranacea subplicata undulato-crenata involuto-incurva •
squamis arete imbricatis sanguineo-purpureis, inferioribus amplis obliquis
bicornibus nodoso-dentatis juxta marginem positis, superioribus majoribus
lanceolatis attenuatis frondis marginem superantibus incurvis; pedunculo
subunciali pallido nudo ; receptaculo femineo 1 — 3-carpo, subtus multum sed
breviter paleaceo.

Under wet rocks. California, Bolander. (No. 4619.)

Remarkable for the broad, wavy, dark purple, membranaceous margin of
the frond. The scales towards the apex of the frond increase in size and be-
come abruptly two-horned ; these horns (laciuite) are very long and narrow
and extend beyond the margin of the frond as a strongly inflexed fringe ; the
very apical ones are triangular-subulate or setaceous, bifid or entire, and
extend still farther beyond the margin of the frond, and in the fertile plant
they become (by age) whitish. Pedicel sulcate, naked at the base. Receptacle
very obtuse (l-iruited in our meagre specimen).

? Sauteria crassipes, Aust.

? S. fronde obcordata subcuneatave bifida fuscescente-purpurea vel viridi
supra subpapuloso-reticulata minutissime porosa, squamis ventralibus purpu-
reis apicem superantibus ; pedunculo breviusculo (6 — 8 lin. alto) parcissime
paleaceo, circa basin nudo vel parce barbato-involucrato, versus apicem in-
crassato ; receptaculo femineo 4 — 7 inciso-lobato, subtusque eodem numero
carpo brevissime submultumque paleaceo ; capsula firmiuscula distincte pedi-
cellata ; elateribus tri( — quadri?) spiris ; magis inimatura.

Japan, on hillsides. Com. Rodgers, N. Pac. Expl. Exped.

I have doubtfully referred this species to Sauteria. It resembles Preissia
y^Tj much, — also, in some respects, Duvalia. It is remarkable for the pedicel
being much thickened towards the apex. There are occasionally a i'^vf scale-
like palea on the peduncle, and a few filamentose scales or hairs on the frond
about its base. Involucre rather large, somewhat flattish, fuscous-green tinned
with purple, and it bears as many capsules, underneath around the margin, as
there are lobes. On account of the immature state of the specimens, it is not
possible to tell in what manner the capsule ruptures.

? Duvalia intermedia, Aust.
? D. fronde parviuscula obcordata subcuneatave subbifida concava (2 — 4 lin.
longa I — 2 lin. lata) laxe texta crassiuscula anguste albido submarginata

1869.]

230 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

vesciculoso-striolata in aetate valde fovelata, subtus plus minus purpurea et
squaiuigerula, squamis purpureis margine non attingentibus ; pedunculo frondi
coiitinuo longiusculo nigro-purpureo, basi apiceque multum ac toto longitudine
j)arcissime albo-paleaceo ; involucro hemisphaerico, apice papuloso-cavernoso ;
capsula sessili vel brevissime pedicellata supra medium deoperculata ; sporis
flavls tuberculatis subpellucido cinctis ; elateribus bispiris.

On dry hills. Com. Rodgers, N. Pac. Expl. Exped.

The general appearance of the peduncle and of the involucre is that of a
Grimaldia, but the loose texture of the involucre and of tiie frond are as in
JJuvalia, and it is difficult to decide to which of these, probably too closely
allied genera, our plant belongs.

FiMBBiARiA BoLANDERi, Austin, MSS. 186.5.

F. fronde anguste lineari (IJ — 2 lin. lata, 6 — 10 lin. longa) solida indis-
tincte porosa cineraceo-viridi depresso-canaliculata, subtus carinato incras-
sata nigro-purpurea squamosa, margine membranacea albido-pellucida vel
purpurea uudulato-crenata siccate arete convoluta ; squamis saturate purpu-
reis marginem non attingentibus ; fructu ex innovationis apice laterali, pe-
dunculo tenuissimo poUicari vel sesquipollicari pallido-purpureo versus basin
])arcissime piloso, receptaculo femineo parvo tetracarpo subconico siccate
subdepresso apice umbonuato subverrucoso, perianthiis subradiatis subglo-
bosis subdecerafidis albidis apice cohaerentibus.

Innovationes e ventre versus basin frondis egrediores, brevissimee (Ij — 2
lin. longse), subclavatse, subtus dense squamosa radiculosaeque, apice dilatato
emarginato-bilobae : plerumque masculares (vel steriles?). Elateres tri —
quaf'ri^piri. Sporae fuscae, papilloso-reticulatse, margine pellucida cinctae.

San Rafael, California. Dr. H. N. Bolander, 1865.

A small species, about the size of F. pilosa, Tayl. Remarkable for the
numerous ventral innovations, which bear the fruit and male flowers. F.
echinella, Gottsche de Mex. Leverm., p. 271 (F. violacea, Austin, MSS. 1866,)
which Dr. Bolander has also found in California, appears to be the only other
known species having this peculiar character.

FlMBRIARIA VESCICULOSA, Aust.

F. fronde carnosa vesciculosa incrassata subpalmatim vel furcatim lobata,
supra subelevato-papulosa eporosa, laciniis subobovatis madefactis margine
erecto-appressis vel subinvolutis ; squaaiis fusco-purpureis versus apicem
margines excedentibus ; pedunculis singulis vel binis circa |-uncialibus
robustis pluries canaliculato-striatis fere nudis, basi non involucratis ; recep-
taculo femineo depresso-hemisphaerico vesciculoso 3 — 6 (et ultra) -carpo ;
perianthiis breviusculis subovatis tenuissimis albidis subsex — octofidis,
laciniis subconcretis ; capsula subglobosa operculo subfusco crassiusculo
depresso instructa; sporis luteis grosse tuberculatis; elateribus trispiris.

Japan. Com. Rodgers, N. Pac. Expl. Exped,

Remarkable for the thick vesciculose frond, with the margins more strongly
erect or involute when moist than when dry ! (in fact, when moistened it is
with ditficulty that the frond can be flattened out) ; also for the about six-
fruited, flattish, fertile receptacle, and very delicate perianths, which some-
times burst through its upper surface.

Anthockros kcariosus, Aust.

Fronde pallido-viridi lacunoso-striata sublamellatave, laciniis flabelli-
formibus margine crenato-denticulatis lobatisve ; involucro pallido cylindrico
subclavatove 1 — IJ lineas longo longitudinaliter lamellato-striato, ore exacte
truncato aubcontracto latissime scarioso ; pedunculo brevi ; capsula subunci-
ali ; sporis nigris scaberrimis : (elateres sine fibra spirali.)

In grassy lawns. South Carolina, Ravenal.

[Dec.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 231

Remarkable forthe somewhat lamellated surface of the frond and involucre ;
the latter with a very broad, abrupt, subcontracted, scarious margin, which
usually forms nearly half its length.

CRYPTOCARPUS, (gen. nov.) Aust. MSS., 1864.

Frons laxe spongioso-reticulata. irregulariter subpalmatim lobata, tenuis,
epidermide baud distincta. Costa nulla. Radices intus non papillosi (ut in
jS'^A«rocar;7o),longissimi, intertexti. Fructus in frondis substantia immersus
(ut in Ricciu), Sporangia depresso-globosa, singulatim nata, non libera.
Calyptra stylo nigro persistente coronata. Sporse 4-jugse (ut in Sphairocarpo),
vix solutiB, in aspectu singular et profunde quadrilob*.

A genus intermediate between Riccia and Sphxrocarpus, having the char-
acters of vegetation and spores of the latter, while the fruit is immersed in
the frond as in the former genus. Represented by a single species, Avhich
occurs both in the Southern States and in France.

Cryptocarpus Ccrtisii, Aust. MSS., 1864.
Riccia Curtisst, James, in Herb, (fide Curtis).

Fronde caespitosa valde imbricata fibroso-papulata, laciniis inciso-lobulatis
margine crenatis ; sporangiis raaximis in statu siccati latentibus sed Irondes
humefactas sunt in substantia earum ut maculis nigris apparentibus ; sporis
fusco-nigris valde muricatis.

On moist ground, South Carolina, Ravenel (in Herb. SuUiv., 1849). North
Carolina, Curtis (1. c, 1853). " Montand apres Marseille " (Herb. Lanning,
'• ex Herb. Torrey ").

To the naked eye the dried specimens look like little heaps of some fila-
mentose conferva. In this state the frond is very brittle, and, on account of
its loose texture, appears to be deeply pitted and fibrose and papulose above.
Upon moistening the specimens the fronds become tough (much as in the
Anthocerotece), the upper surface looses its pitted appearance, and the inter-
stices (apparent fibres) between the large cells close up ; and the fruit, which
was completely hidden before, now appears as a black spot in the substance
of the frond. Upon re-drying the specimens the fronds become much thinner
than they were at first, and the fruit remains visible, protruding from the
upper surface. The frond is larger than in Sphcerocarpus 3Iichelii, from the
Southern States, but lobed and reticulated in the same manner. The extreme
apices of the lobes are often suddenly contracted and subsolid (much as is
often seen in the Anlhocerotece.) The base of the divisions are contracted
and subsolid, and the rootlets are smooth on the interior surface as in Sphiero-
carpus. The divisions are flabelliforra, and palmately or incised-lobed, and
lie so closely over one another as to be separated with difficulty, the upper ones,
by their numerous long rootlets, knitting firmly to the pitted surface of those
immediately beneath them. The lobes are crenate and obtuse, not emargi-
nate, extremely thin and hyaline. Spores firmly united in fours into a sort of
coccus which is deeply 4-iobed, and very beautiful under the lens, — more
deeply lobed than in Sphsxrocarpus terrestris and more finely reticulated and
papillose. [From narrowed places in the divisions (as it were sinuses) there
appears to arise young plants, folded over on the back of the parent frond in
such a manner that they seem to arise out of its back near the margin.
Whether this is really the case, or only apparent, can only be determined
by fresh specimens.]

Riccia albida, Sulliv., in Herb., 1853.

R. fronde solida albida alternatira bifurcatimve divisa ; lobis (J — J lin. lat.)
oblongis creberrimis anguste profundeque sulcatis, apice rotundatis sub-
emarginatis, subtus subsquemosis valde radiculosis ; epidermide superiore
(nisi in canalis fundo) spongioso-papulosa profunde foveolata quam frondis
substantia crassiori ; fructu ignoto.

Texas, Dr. Charles Wright.

1869.]

232 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

This species is remarkable for its thick, spongy epidermis of a whitish
color, much as in R. bullosa, Link. ; but that is a much larger species, with
the lobes of the frond not so much crowded, and with the upper surface
rugulose.

RicciA ARVENSis, Aust. MSS., 1863.

R. fronde solida subciliata incrassata orbiculari subradiatim pluries divisa
subgregario-imbricata in diaraetro 4 — 8 lineari, supra papuloso-reticulata
obscure viridi vel demum secus margines purpurea, subtus nuda vel obsolete
squamosa valde obtuseque carinato-incrassata ob sporangia tumentia valde
nodosa; lobis obtusiusculis obsolete emarginatis lineari-ellipticis vel fere
linearibus dichotomis versus apicem incrassatera leuiter dilatatis, apice in
statu junior! subadscendentibus vix canaliculatis, in ietate horizontalibus
subcompresso-acuminatis evidentius lateque sulcatis, margine planis acutis
(in adspectu incrassatis obtusisque) ; ciliis albidis brevissimis omnino incon-
spicuis subobsoletisve ; fructibus primum versus apicem loborum infra ca-
nalem agregatis, sporis angularibus fusco-atris reticulato-muricatis — Ilep.
Bor. Amer. Exsic. ined., No. 141.

Var /?, hirta. Statura majora, fronde subtus magis purpurea etsquamigerula
margine evidentius ciliata, supra omnino hirta. — llep. Bor. Amer. Exsic. ined.,
No. 142.— i?. hirta, Aust. MSS. 1864.

On damp ground in cultivated fields and (the var.) in rocky places about
Closter, New Jersey, common.

The canal occupies about ^ of the upper surface of the frond, and has a
plane or slightly convex bottom with abrupt sides. That portion of the frond
between the canal and the acute margin is slightly convex above as if thick-
ened. The typical form appears to be near R. paradoxa, De Not., but that is
described as being a smaller species, and the spores are said to be light-red.
The var. differs from R. cilifera. Link., in the fronds being purple and more or
less scale-bearing underneath, and not membranaceous on the margin. The
sporangia are placed rather towards the apex of the lobes as in R. palmata,
Lindbg. ; which appears to be a larger species, with the lobes of the frond
concave-canaliculate above, &c., and seems to be intermediate between this
and the following species :

RicciA Lescuriana, Aust. MSS., 1863.

R. fronde solida subciliata orbiculata stellatim vel subcruciatim divisa
incrassata, supra punctato-reticulata glauco vel cineraceo-viridi epidermide
macula purpurea supra fructum notata, subtus nuda concolore vel demum
purpurascente; laciniis bilobis vel di-trichotomis obcoidatis lineari-cuneatisve
(2 — 5 lin. longis 1 — 2 lin. latis) leniter concavo-canaliculatis, apice emarginatis
brevi sulcatis, margine hirsuto-ciliatis incrassatis obtusis subadscendentibus
ad apicem subinvolutis ; ciliis creberrimis brevibus albidis obtusis in statu
juniori subobsoletis ; fructibus sparsis nOn seriatis subbasilaribus, sporis
fusco-atris angularibus reticulatis : gemmis? numerosis ellipticis aterrimis
in frondis facie superior! versus loborum apicem jjositis quam sporis triple
minoribus. — Hep. Bor. Amer. Exsic. ined., N. 143.

Var. a, cruciata. Fronde cruciatim parce^ divisa, laciniis ciliisque brevis-
simis.

Var. /?, trichotoma. Fronde magis divisa, laciniis ciliisque longioribus.

The var at occurs almost exclusively on damp ground in cultivated fields ;
the var. /? on rocky soil, associated with the var. of the preceding species,
and with R. sorocarpa and R. lamellosa.

R. palmata, lAndhg., a closely related species, is described as having the
frond palmately lobed and the divisions broadl}' sulcate, with the ciliae ar-
ranged in a single series. R. Bischoffii, Huben , has the margin of the frond
membranaceous, the lobes much expanded, and sj ores twice as large ! The
var. a has much the appearance of R. bifurca, Hoffm., as figured in Lindbg.
Monogr. d. Rico. T. XX, f. 1, but that has the margin of the frond naked.

[Dec.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 233

RicciA SuLLivANTii, Austin MSS., 1863.

R. terrestris, velutina, valde cavernosa, fulgida, luteo-viridis ; fronde
orbiculari celluloso-siicculenta radiatim pluries divisa diametro subsemipoli-
cari ; laciniis di-trichotomis linearibus (vel in statu junior! subcuneatis)
subinibricatis canaliculatis, apice tenuiori angustiori emarginatis, subtus
carinato-incrassatis concoloribus nudis (vel ut in E. Jlitilcmte oh epidermide
evanida ad apicem minute squamigerulis), margine undique tenuibus sub-
hyalinis crispato-undulatis cum serie celluhirum singularum hyalinarum
circumdatis crenulatisque iu statu siccati omnino adscendentibus ad apicem-
que suberectis, carina cavernoso-striata copiose radiculosa ob sporangia subtus
tumenti ; fructibus copiosissimis e frondis pagina superior! prorunipenti-
bus ; sporangiis supra non prominentibus in carina immersis singulatim natis
Stylo longo nigro coronatis, sporis obscure angularibus reticulatis sub-
inuricatis luteo-fuscis vel nigris. — Jlep. Bor. Amer. Exsic. hied., No. 147. — R.
cryslallina, Sulliv. Mosses of the U. S. p. 84. pro parte.

On damp or wet ground, in fields and meadows, about Closter, New Jersey;
also Pennsylvania, Lesquereux.

E. Sullivayiiii resemhif'S both small forms of R crystallina and terrestrial
forms of R. Jiuitans, Linn., but the former is distinguished by its less divided
frond with the divisions plane above and expanded towards the apex ; and
the latter by its divaricate lobes somewhat thickened at the apex, by its fewer
and smaller air-cavities, and by its sporangia rupturing underneath the frond,
as well as by its shorter style and smoother spores.

[There are occasionally found, imbedded in largish cavities on the under
side of the frond, a bundle of rootlets, matted or coiled together. These
rootlets are apparently longer than those which fix the plants to the earth,
and have the interior surface papillose (a character common to the rootlets of
all Riccife). Their free end is much expanded and open at the extremity,
and towards this extremity they are filled with cubical green bodies, arranged
(mostly) in fours, and resembling the spores of a Conferva. What these bodies
are is doubtful ; it is barely possible that they are a sort of reproductive organ
belonging to the plant in whose tube-like rootlets they occur.]

RiCCIA TENUIS, AuSt.

R. fronde tenuissima valde cavernosa fibroso-nervosa saturate vel olivaceo-
viridi fulgida parce divisa, subtus parcissime squamosa concolore, squamis
albidis teniiissimis ligulatis ; laciniis rotundo-obovatis (2 — 4 lin. long. \h — 3
lin. lat.) planis, margine sinuato-undulatis, subtus ob costam tenuem anguste
carinatis, ad solum radicibus parcissimis tenuissimis aflfingentibus ; fructibus
in nervo sitis, sporangiis parvis depresso-globosis plerumque 2 — 4 aggregatis
in frondis pagina iuferiori protuberantibus sed e neutra prorumpeutibus,
calyptra tenuissima laxissime texta frondis substantiam arete adhserenti
stylo brevissimo apice praemorso (non dilatato) coronata, sporis parvis
globosis vel subovalibus fuscis valde echiuaceo-muricatis. — Hep. Bor. Amer.
Exsic. ined., No. 150.

On wet, broken ground in open woods, near Closter, New Jersey; also near
Lawrence, N. J., James.

The closely allied R membranacea, L. & G., differs in the SMfi-cavernous
frond with the lobes suddenly widened and subsulcate towards the apex, in
the oblong-rotund sporangia, and longer style dilated at the apex. R. nigrescens,
Mont., is doubtless also very near our plant, but the margins of the frond are
said to be ascending, — furthermore, the description is altogether too meagre.

RicciA NATANS, Linn.

The spores of this species vegetate upon mud in summer, and by autumn
the young plants become considerably developed : (vide Aust. Hep. Exsic. ined.
N. 144, B. ; also Lindbg. Monogr. d. Rico. t. 26, f. 1, under the name of R.

1869.]

234 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

lutesccns.) They are suborbicular in outline, lobed and rooting underneath,
as in the true terrestrial species. They also have rudimentary scales at the
apices of the lobes underneath. These fronds become immersed by the au-
tumn rains, and during the winter the apices of the lobes thicken and expand
greatly. These apices being destitute of rootlets and extremely buoyant,
gradually assume a vertical position in the bottom of the pool, and at length
(in the spring) become detached and rise to the surface of the water, (where
they float in a horizontal position,) often carrying with them portious of the
effete base of the frond. In the meantime the scales develop into long purple
fringes. Thesefioating apices alone constitute the L. natans of Linnseus and authors :
(vide Aust. Hep. Exsic. N. 144, A. ; also Lindbg. Monogr., p. 115, t. 31 and 32 ;
etc.) They fruit copiously in the vicinity of Albany, N. Y., in the months of
May and June (Prof. C. H. Peck). Sometimes the autumn fronds do not
become immersed, in this case they remain whole ; again the fertile fronds
are often left upon the mud by the dessication of the pool in summer ; in this
case they are plainly continuous from the apex: (vide Hep. Exsic. N. 145;
also Herb. Tayl. [in part), under the name of '■'■ Riccia velutina. — N. Amer. Drum-
mond."

Riccia lutescens, Schweinitz.

A single frond only of this species was found by me iu Sept. 1858, at Closter,
N. J. This frond contained a single sporangium I which is about as in R.
crjistallina. The spores are also as in that species. During the past eight years
I have not only watched this plant in all the stages of its growth, from the
time of its first appearance in the month of June, until its final disappear-
ance in winter, but have collected many specimens of it in the mature state.
I have also received numerous specimens of it from many localities, from
New England to Canada and Missouri ; but not a single one of these speci-
mens shows any trace either of fruit or other kind of reproductive organ
whatever ! and it is still a mystery how the plant reproduces itself. The
young plants make their appearance in great profusion, in the bottoms of
exsiccated ditches, &c., in the beginning of summer. These rapidly develop
into the sterile plant, which has been most accurately described and figured
by Mr SuUivant : {Mem. Amer. Acad. Arts cj- Sci. (Boston) 4, p. 176, t. 4.) No
rootlets are produced underneath the frond above the middle ; and asthe ditches
become filled with water late in autumn, the fragile laciniae break asunder
near the middle, in consequence of the extreme buoyancy of their apices. The
detached pieces (or apices) rise to the surface of the water, where they re-
main suspended in an oblique position (the extreme apex only reaching
the surface), until they become frozen up in the ice. Upon the ice disap-
pearing in the spring, no trace of any portion of the plant is to be found 1

The following reports were read, and referred to the Publication
Committee :

REPORT OF THE CURATORS.

In presenting the annual report, the Curators embrace the opportunity of
congratulating the Academy on the near prospect of procuring a new and
suitable building to accommodate its now crowded and ever increasing col-
lections, both of the museum and library. A plan of the building prepared
by Mr. Windrum, the architect, at the suggestion of and in conjunction with
a committee of the trustees of the building fund, has been approved by the
latter. It is proposed to commence with the foundation of the building, the
coming spring, on the fine property obtained by the contributors of the
building fund, on the southwest corner of 19th and Race streets, and oppo-
site the beautiful Logan Square. The style of the building is college gothic,

[Dec.

NATUEAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 235

180 feet in length on Race street, and 65 feet in breadth fronting on 19th
street. It is to be fire proof, and it is proposed to construct the walls of
green serpentine ornamented with Ohio stone. The estimated cost is about
$125, OOn, to which we hope an enlightened public, fully appreciating the im-
portance of such an institution as the Academy, will liberally contribute.

The collections of the museum are in their usual condition of preservation,
but for want of proper space generally excessively crowded, often partially
or totally unarranged, and in some cases in tbe utmost confusion. The
Museum is now too^extensive to depend wholly on voluntary labor for its
being properly arranged, labeled and catalogued. To accomplish this it ie
necessary to employ competent persons, and it is to be hoped that before long
an effort will be made on the part of the Academy to procure the means es-
sential to the purpose.

The increased attractiveness of the Museum of the Academy, and the almost
unrestricted admission of the public, have led to such an increase in the
number of visitors as greatly to endanger the condition of the more perisha-
ble portions of the collection. During the year the Museum, though open to
the public only two afternoons weekly, and though closed during August for
cleansing and repairs, was visited by nearly 100,000 persons. In a single
afternoon recently there were upwards of 4,500 persons admitted to the
Museum. In consequence of the very small amount of unoccupied room the
visitors move in nearly continued streams through the narrow intervals of
the cabinets, affording little opportunity for the examination of specimens.
Beside this disadvantage to those who would really wish to examine the col-
lections, the crowds lead to many accidents, the sum total of which amounts
to a considerable destruction of property, in the way of broken glass, light
wood work, &c. Further, the excessive clouds of dust produced by the mov-
ing crowds, rest upon the horizontal cases, obscuring from view their contents,
wbile it penetrates others much to the detriment of parts of the collection.
An annoyance arising from the great number of visitors is due to the neces-
sity of having tickets of admission, provided gratuitously from members
of the Academy or from agents authorized to issue them by the Curators.

In view of all these annoyances, inconveniences and detriment to the Mu-
seum, attendant on an excessive number of visitors, the Curators would sug-
gest to the Academy the propriety of making a small charge for admission,
as the best means of qualifjMng or removing the various difficulties indicated.

The Curators recommend the charge of a small fee, say ten cents, which
will probably be sufficient to moderate the crowds of visitors, and at thei
same time will be no obstruction to those who are desirous of seeing thje
Museum. Of course it is not intended te restrict the right of members to visit
the Academy in company with their friends at any and at all times according
to their convenience.

The donations during the year, to the different departments of the Museum,
are as follows :

Mammals. — Two skins and the skeleton of a Lemur, together with the skins
of several other mammals from Port Natal, Africa, were presented by the
Rev. S. A. Grout. Five other mammals were presented by Dr. James M.
Green, U. S. N., Prof. S. D. Gfoss, George Davidson and John Krider.

Birds. — A special report, on the condition of the ornithological cabinet, has
been prepared by the standing committee and is appended to the present one.

Two collections of bird skins from San Domingo, were jiresented by Wni.
M. Gabb J another from Port Natal by the Rev. S. A. Grout ; and a collection
from St. Martins, W. I., by Dr. H. E. van Rijgersma. A mounted specimen
of the Golden Eagle was presented by Frank L. Altemus ; a Lophophorus
impeyanus from Asia, by the Rev. J. L. Scott ; and a small collection of
birds, in alcohol, from South America, by Prof. E. D. Cope. Specimens of
birds were also presented by John Krider, Harvey E. Mole, W. P. Turnbull,

[1869.

236 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Mr. Haines and D. G. Elliot. A small collection of bird eggs, from Sable
Island, was presented by J. R. Willis.

Rfpliles. — A collection of fifteen species from Africa, thirteen from Asia,
and nine from Australia, together with five jars of specimens from Uraguay,
one jar from New Grenada and other specimens from South America were
presented by Prof. E. D. Cope. Two small collections, comprising eighteen
species from San Domingo, were presented by Wm. M. Gabb. A small col-
lectioti from St. Martins, W. I., was presented by Dr. Rijgersma ; another
from Port Natal, by Rev. S. A. Grout; and three jars from Venezuela, by L.
Morgan Davis. Specimens were likewise presented by George Davidson, Dr.
Hassler, L. P. Whiting, Capt. J. Barclay, John Krider, Joseph Jeanes and
Joseph A. Damon.

Fislies. — Two collections, one of forty-one specimens of twenty-five species,
and another of many specimens of sixteen species, from St. Martins, W. I.,
were presented by Dr. R. E. van Rijgersma of Philipsburg, St. Martins, W. I.
Other specimens were presented by Mr. Gabb, A. H. Smith, Dr. I. Hays, Dr.
Howel and Jos. Jeanes.

Mollusks. — For the principal donations we refer to the report of the Con-
servator of the Conchological Section of the Academy.

In addition there were presented two species of cephalopods by Dr. Rijgers-
ma, and small collections of shalls by Wm. M. Gabb, Rev. S. A. Grout, Dr.
Leconte and S. Powel.

Articulates. — Two collections, comprising seventy specimens of crustaceans,
two jars of spiders and one of insects from St. Martins, W. I., were presented
by Dr. R. E. van Rijgersma. A collection of myriapods and insects from
Port Natal, W. A., was presented by Rev. S. A. Grout; and ajar of myria-
pods, arachnides and insects from Lower California, by Alfred DuBois.
iSpecimens of Crustacea were also presented by George Davidson and Dr. F. A
Genth.

Radiates, ij-c. — A collection of twelve asterioids, six corals, a large Gorgonia
and five species of sponges, from St. Martins, were presented by Dr. Rijgersma.
Six species of Echini and Ophiura and a Madrepore, from San Domingo, were
presented by Wm. M. Gabb. Several corals were presented by Dr. Hassler,
several radiates by S. Powel, and two specimens of Euplectella by the latter
and Mr. Crawford Coates.

Fossils. — An additional portion of the Poirrier collection, of vertebrate re-
ilains from the miocene and post pliocene formations of the basin of the
Loire, France, was presented at the expense of Messrs. E. S. Whelan, Richard
Wood, Benjamin Marsh, S. Morris Wain and Wistar Morris. A collection
from France and Greece, consisting of remains of Mastodon angustidens, the
Cave Bear, Horse, Hipparion, Reindeer, and specimens of prehistoric works
of human art, together with casts in plaster of others, was presented by Prof.
Ed. Lartet of Paris. A collection of Devonian plants, twenty-four species,
from near St. John, N. B., was presented by the Natural History Society of
that place. A collection of corals from the corniferous limestone of Canada
West, many specimens of twenty-three species, presented by Prof. J. W. Daw-
son of Montreal. A collection of fragments of several species of extinct
turtles, the specimen from which the insectiverous mammal Oromys Car-
teri was described, and a slab of bituminous shale with clupeoid fishes from
near Fort Bridget, Wyoming, were presented by Mr. J. Van A. Carter. A
collection of fossil plants was presented by Dr. F. V. Hayden ; of infusorial
earths by the Smiibsonian Institution; of fossil corals by Mr. Sidney S.
Lyons; and of fossil cetacean bones from Ashley R., S. C, by Dr. James C.
Booth. Teeth of horses and sharks were presented by Thomas H. Streets,
H. W. Faucett, Charles Conrad and Dr. H. S. Chapman. Specimens of ceta-

[Dec.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 237

cean bones were presented by the latter and C. W. Matthews. Other fossil
specimens were presented by Col. James Greer, Wm. M. Gabb, Mr. Iloriibush,
W. Morrison, A. H. Smith, Dr. J. Leconte, T. H. Streets, T. Guilford S.uith,
Enoch L. Johnson, Louis Godey, P. T. Tyson and George Davidson.

Minerals. — A small collection was presented by T. Guilford Smith. Speci-
mens were also received from Alexander E. Doughertj', J. Blodget Britton, C.
W. Matthews, Joseph Wilcox, J. Lawrence Smith, Isaac Lea, John L. LeConte,
George Davidson, T. D. Rand, P. W. Sheaffer, Capt. J. Barclay, Mr. Tyson, W.
McKee Mason, W. L. Mactier and Joseph Leidy. A few others were also ob-
tained in exchange.

Botany. — A series of Junci representing the monograph of Dr. Engleman,
and a series of Potamogeton, collected by Dr. J. W. Robbins, were presented
by Mr. E. Durand. A rare fern was presented by Mr. Redfield.

Comparative Anatomy. — A skull of Hyperaodon bidens and other portions of
the skeleton, from Newport R. L, were presented by Samuel Powel. An arti-
ficially elongated human skull from the vicinity of Lake Titicaca, Bolivia,
was presented by Dr. J. M. Greene, U. S. N. A collection of bones of the
Bison, Wolf, Deer, &c., was presented by Prof. Hayden. Remains of Indian
skeletons were presented by Prof. Cope; the jaw of a Dolphin and several
teeth of the Sperm Whale, by Dr. Rijgersma, and portions of human muscles
with Trichintfi, by Dr. J. S. Hough.

Miscellaneous. — Nine jars of vertebrates from St. Martins, W. I., were pre-
sented by Dr. Rijgersma. Seven specimens were presented by Prof. S. D.
Gross, and several by unknown donors.

Respectfully submitted by Joseph Leidy,

Chairman of the Curators.

REPOET OF THE ORNITHOLOGICAL COMMITTEE.

The Committee begs leave to report that the following named donations to
the collection of birds have been made during the year 1869 :

March. — 2 specimens of Lagopus mutus, 1 specimen of Lagopus islandorum,
presented by D. G. Elliott. 1 specimen of Accipiter Cooperii, presented by
Mr. Haines.

April. — A specimen of Aythya Americana, (variety), 1 specimen of Corvus
Americanus, (albino), 1 specimen of Cairina moschata, 1 specimen of Gracula
musica, presented by Jno. Krider. 2 specimens of Picus albolarvatus, (^ 9
presented by Wm. P. Turnbull. 1 specimen of Lophophorus impeyanus, ^
presented by J. L. Scott.

May. — Sundry specimens in alcohol, presented by E. D. Cope. 1 mounted
specimen of Lams argentatus, presented by H. E. Mole. 6 mounted specimens
(5 species) of birds from St. Martins, W. D., presented by H. E. Van Rijgersma.

July. — A mounted specimen of Aquila chrysa;tos, presented by F. L. Al-
temus. And a collection of skins from Port Natal, Africa, presented by S.
A. Grout.

August. — Collection of 30 specimens of skins from St. Domingo, presented
by Wm. M. Gabb.

October. — Collection of eggs from Sable Island, presented by J. R. Millis.

December. — 21 specimens of skins from St. Domingo, presented by Wm. M.
Gabb.

The Committee would further state, that since last spring the work of over-

1869.]

238 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

looking and poisoning tiie entire collection of birds has been going on, and is
now nearly completed. Almost every mounted bird has been examined, dis-
infected and the cases cleaned. It was found that there was no time to lose in
this work, as many specimens had been attacked by insects, and further delay
might have occasioned the loss of a portion of our collection which could
probably never be replaced. The remaining cases will soon be gone through.

The Committee cannot too strongly urge the necessity of such an examina-
tion being made, if not annually, at least once in two years, even should it
involve some expense to the Academy to secure the preservation of the best
collection of birds on this continent, and, with one exception, the largest in
the world.

By permission and special 'rote of the Academy, a duplicate specimen of the
rare egg of the Great Auk {Alca impennis) was presented to the Smithsonian
Institution at Washington. In addition to some rare and valuable bird skins
this Institution intends giving us from late expeditions to Alaska and the
North-West, there is being made up for this Academy a collection of eggs,
many of value and interest, procured mostly from Arctic America. But we
are badly off for a place to put them, the present cabinets of eggs being nearly
full and in too dark a room to be of any use for study. We would, therefore,
ask that some appropriation be made for additional cabinets, and also that
the whole be placed in a more suitable part of the building.

The Committee recommends that permission be given to sell (or exchange)
the duplicate bird skins packed away in chests and drawers, some now in-
jured by insects, awd which, in a few years, may become seriously damaged ;
the proceeds of such sales to be appropriated to the purchase of specimens
wanted, and that might be procured in this way, and especially of newly
discovered species, our additions to which, for the last five or six years, have
been far behind other Ornithological Museums in this country and elsewhere,
and consequently has brought our collection to a comparative stand still.

The Committee would also call attention to that portion of the Library de-
voted to Ornithologj', Since the death of the late Dr. Wilson, only such books
on tbe subject then going on in parts, and for which he made appropriation,
have been continued, thereby causing some leading periodicals and other
works to be dropped, thus impairing the value of the whole as a Library of
reference. Very many important books published during the last lew years are
wanted, and to keep up with the present state of Ornithological Science
throughout the world, it is necessary that students should be able to refer to
the latest and best authors.

Respectfully submitted.

Bernard A. Hoopes, Chairman.
Wm. p. Turnbull,

Philadelphia, Dec. 28th, 1869. Edwin Sheppard.

LIBRARIAN'S REPORT.

The Librarian respectfully reports that the number of additions to the
Library from January to December, 18C9, inclusive, amounts to 1131.

Of these 185 were volumes, and 946 pamphlets and parts of periodicals.

They were derived from the following sources :

Societies, 440; Editors, 200; Authors, 102; Wilson Fund, 177; Library
Fund, 76; purchased, 51 : Norwegian Government, 13 ; Geo. W. Tryon, Jr., 10 ;
Jos. Jeanes, 8 ; Treasure' Department, 8 ; Pablishers, 6 : Minister of Public
Works in France, 6 ; John Warner, 4; Isaac Lea, 4 ; Messrs Townsend and
Adams, 7 ; Smithsonian Inst., 3 ; M. de Caligay, 4 ; Surgeon General, 1 ; J. D.
Whitney, 1 ; General Humphreys, 1 ; Thos. Meehan, 1 ; Department of Educa-

[Dec.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 239

tion, 1 ; Navy Department, 1 ; L. H. Morgan, 1 ; Dr. Hassler, 1 ; Sanitary Com-
mission, 1 ; Dr. H. C. Wood, Jr., 1 ; in exchange, 1 ; Don Rafael Arango, 1.
Total, 1131.

And were divided as follows :

Journals, 798 ; Conchology, 149 ; Geology, 46 ; General Natural History,
46 ; Botany, 21 ; Ornithology,' 20 ; Bibliography, 9 ; Entomology, 8 ; Anatomy
and Physiology. 7 ; Herpetology, 6 ; Physical Science, 5 ; Helminthology, 5 ;
Mineralogy, 3 ; Voyages and Travels, 3 ; History, 3 ; Chemistry, 2.

Of these 10 volumes and 91 pamphlets were received through the Concho-
logical Section.

The duplicate works which have accumulated from time to time have been
catalogued, priced and packed, preparatory to sending them to Wm. Wood &
Co., of New York, for sale. Selections from these duplicates to the value of
$150.00 have been exchanged by the Library Committee for a copy of Elliot's
Birds of North America.

During the year the books in the Conchological Department have been
newly catalogued and numbered. The latter arrangement has been produc-
tive of all the good results anticipated, and demonstrates the necessity of ex-
tending the same system of numbering throughout the entire library, at as
early a date as possible.

All of which is respectfully submitted.

Edw. J. Nolan, Librarian.

REPORT OF THE RECORDING SECRETARY.

During the year ending November 30th, 1869, there have been elected thirty-
threo members and eleven correspondents.

The death of the following members and correspondents have been an-
nounced.

Five members, namely : Mr. John Cassin, Mr. Chas. N. Bancker, Mr. Jason
L. Fenemore, Dr. Chas. D. Meigs, Mr. Fred. Klett.

Four correspondents, namely : Frederick Cailliaud, Herman Von Meyer,
Mr. George J. Durham, Dr. T, H. Turner, U. S. A.

The number of papers contributed and ordered to be printed in the Pro-
ceedings and Journal during the year has been thirty six, as follows :

In the Proceedings thirty-three, namely :

Prof. E. D. Cope 7

Thomas Meehau 4

Elliott Coues I

Isaac Lea 3

Capt. C. M. Scammon (edited bv

E. D. Cope) '... 1

Dr. C. Johnson... 1

Dr. J. G. Richardson i

Prof. Joseph Leidy

F. B. Meek & A. H. Wonhen 5

George N. Lawrence 1

Dr. John L. LeConte 3

John Cassin , I

Jacob Ennis 1

Dr. W. W. Keen 1

Robert Ridgway 1

In the Journal three, namely :

J. Barnard Davis, 1 ; Alphouzo Wood. 1 ; Jos, Leidy, including all the Nos.
of Vol. 7.

There were four papers recommended to be printed in the American Journal
of Medical Sciences, namely :

Dr. William Pepper... 1 1 Dr. Christopher Johnson I

Dr. James Tyson 1 | Dr. S. W. Mitchel , 1

One paper to be published in a Medical Journal to be selected by the author,
Dr. J. G. Richardson.

There were four papers withdrawn by their authors, namely : .

E. D. Cope, papers 16.5, 179 and 180.

Mr. Cassin's paper No. 168, withdrawn by Mr. B. A. Hoopes.

All of which is respectfully submitted.

Samuel B. Howell, Recording Serre/ary,

1869.] 17

240 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

REPORTS OF THE CONCHOLOGICAL SECTION.

RECORDER'S REPORT.

During the year ending Dec. 2d, 1869, there have been elected one member
and three correspondents.
One member has resigned.

Papers have been accepted for publication in the Journal, by the following
authors :

T.A.Conrad, 5 John H. Redfield 1

G. W. Tryon, Jr 9 S. R. Roberts 1

W. M. Gabb 5 Theo. Gill, M.D 1

AV. Harper Pease 3 W. H. Dall 1

Jas. Lewis, M.D 2 Ralph Tate 1

Temple Prime 1 Wesley Newcorab, M.D 2

Binney and Bland 1 J. G. Cooper, M.D 2

Respectfully submitted,

S. R. Roberts, Recorder.

CORRESPONDING SECRETARY'S REPORT.

To the Conchological Section of the Academy of Natural Sciences, Philadelphia :

The Corresponding Secretary would respectfully report that letters have
been forwarded and received as follows, viz. :

1868. Dec. 31. — To Dr. Leopold von Schrenck, St. Petersburg, with publi-
cations.

1869. Jan. 5. — To Hugh Nevill, F.R.A.S., Galle, Ceylon, accepting proposal?
for exchange.

May 13. — To Luigi Benoit, Messina, letter of acknowledgement.

May 21. — To Dr. H. E. v. Rijgersma, St. Martins, W. I., soliciting collec-
tions.

To W. B. Pryor, Esq., Shanghai, China, soliciting collections.

June 11. — To Prof. Joseph Henry, Smithsonian Institution, soliciting publi-
cations.

June 22. — To the Society Malacologique de Belgique, Bruxelles, exchange of
publications.

To E. A. Bielz, Hermanstadt, Transylvania, exchanges.

To Bulletino .Malacologico Italiano, Pisa, for exchange of publications.

June 23. — To R. J. Lechmere Guppj', Trinidad, exchange of specimens.

Nov. 5. — To Sylvanus Hanley, Middlesex, England, letter of acknowledge-
ment.

The following letters have been received :

1868. Dec. 29. — M. de Malzine, Bru.xelles, with publications.
Mons. Terver, Lyons, France, acknowledgment of election.
Dr. Leopold vou Schrenck, St. Petersburg, with publications.

1869. Jan. 7. — D. F. Heynemann, Frankfort, with publications.
Arthur Morelet, Dijon, France, letter of acknowledgment.
Mons. J. Crosse, Paris, with publications.

Frederick Calliaud, Nantes, France.

Feb. 4. — T. B. Bourningnat, acknowledgment.

Feb. 16. — F. M. Souverbie, Bordeaux, acknowledgment of election.

Capt. J. Mitchell, Madras, with publications.

March 4. — L. H. Abbott, Boston, letter of acknowledgment.

Philip Lutley Sclater, London, letter of acknowledgment.

Zoological Society, London, letter of acknowledgment.

March 30. — F. de Malzine, Brussels, proposals for exchange.

[Dec.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 241

May 6. — B. Westermann & Co , New York, publications.

S. L. Abbott, Boston, with publications.

E. C. Bolles, Portland, Me., acknowledgment of publications.

Leon Vaillant, Paris, acknowledgement of election.

Philip Lutley Sclater, London, acknowledgment of publications.

L. Chenu, Paris, acknowledgment of election.

Prof 0. A. L. Morch, Copenhagen, with paper for publication.

May 12. — Luigi Benoit, Messina, acknowledgment of case of shells.

August 5. — D. C. Gentiluomo, Pisa, exchange of publications.

Oct. 16. — Sj'lvanus Hanley, Middlesex, Eng., with case of shells.

E. A. Bielz, Hermanstadt, with publicg-tions.

Oct. 29. — W. A. Pryer, Shanghai, China, information as to collecting shells.

All of which is respectfully submitted.

Philad., Dec. 1, 1869. E. R. Beadle, Corres. Sec'y.

LIBRARIAN'S REPORT.

The Librarian respectfully reports that there have been presented during the
past year to the library of the Conchological Section 10 volumes, 91 pamphlets
and one map. Of these 34 were received from authors, 20 from editors, 30
from Societies, 5 from the Publication Committee, 1 from Wm. M. Gabb, 1
from Don Rafael Arango, 10 from George W. Tryon, Jr., and one from the
Smithsonian Institution.

In addition, thirty-two pamphlets, volumes and continuations of Concholo-
gical works have been received through the Academy.

During the year the Catalogue has been carefully revised, and the books
numbered, with the effect of greatly lessening the labor of those referring to
them.

Edw. J. Nolan, Librarian.

CONSERVATOR'S REPORT.

The Conservator of the Conchological Section respectfully reports that the
donations to the Cabinet during the year have been as follows :
From Isaac Lea. Nineteen species of Unionidee from Ouachita, Arkansas,.

Chamostrea albida, Roissy, with oscicle, from New South Wales, and twelve.

species of shells from the island of Andaman, Bay of Bengal.

E. R. Beadle. Three species of Unio, Auricula aurismidce, Lin., and two. un-
known species from Asia ; also a Trochus from the West Indies, and Trivia
sulcata, Dillw.

.John Ford. Seven specimens oi Busiconaruanum from Atlantic City, fine spe-
cimens of A^ai^ca Aeros from Brigantine Beach, N. J., and types of Aslarte
nubigena, Ford.

F. V. Hayden, M.D. Numerous specimens of Helix Cooperi, Bland, and H.
Haydeni, Gabb, from Weber Canon, near Salt Lake City.

Geo. W. Tryon, Jr. Eleven species from 0. A. L. Morch, of Copenhagen.

J. L. LeConte. Type specimens of five species of Melania described by Isaac.
Lea.

Wm. M. Gabb. Eleven species of Unio from Central America and twenty-four
species of land shells from San Domingo, personally collected, including
several undescribed species.

Ralph Tate. Seventy-seven species, numerous specimens of land and fresh-
water shells from Central America, Venezuela, Guayana and Nicaragua, in-
cluding tj-pes of several new species described in our Journal ; also nineteen
species of land shells from Venezuela and the island of San Lucia, W. I.,
mostly undescribed.

1869.]

242 PKOCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

W. H. Pease. Seventy-nine species of marine shells from the Polynesian

Seas, including types of new species.
R. E. C. Stearns. Sixty-four species of marine, fresh -water and land shells,

principally from California, Oregon, South Carolina and Florida, and seven

species from Tampa Bay.
P. A. Hassler, M.D. Fine specimen of Marginella carnea, Stcrer, fine series of

Linincea columella, and embryos of Vivipara Nolani and Busycon carica.
W. H. Dall. Five species of Lepitidoe, types of descriptions published in the

Journal.
W. S. W. RuscHENBERGER. Two hundred and twenty-seven species, princi-
pally marine mollusca, personally collected by the donor.
Dr. J. C. Cox. Two hundred and twenty-three species land, fresh-water and

marine shells of Australia, New Caledonia and adjacent islands, including

types of many new species.
W. H. Pease. Sixty-three species of marine shells from the Polynesian seas,

including types of new species published in the Journal.
Chicago Academy of Natural Sciences. Thirty-four species of Japanese

mollusca, collected by F. Bischoff.
Rev. Alden Grout. Eight species of land shells from Port Natal.
Smithsonian Institution. Five hundred land, fresh-water and marine shells,

carefully named by Mr. P. P. Carpenter.
LuiGi Benoit. One hundred and eighty-six species of land shells from Sicily,

including types of most of his descriptions.
J. H. Thomson. Cyprea picta, C. zotiata, C. annulus, C. obvelata and O. Beckii ;

Trivia candidula and T. pulex.
Sylvanus Hanley. Four hundred and four species of land, fresh-water and

marine shells, principally European, but including a number of rare East

Indian shells, some of them undescribed.
Paul Teevee. One hundred and seventy-six species of European land and

fresh-water shells.

Smaller collections have been received from Gabriel Duque, E. H. Jenks,
Prof. J. Powell, Edw. D. Cope, G. A. Lathrop, Mrs. Lewis, Dr. Jos. Leidy, 0.
W. Peale, Dr. James Lewis, Dr. Samuel Lewis, A. H. Smith, John Wolf, J. R.
Willis, Dr. Harrison Allen and W. L. Mactier.

The number of species presented during the year amounts to about 2150,
many of them new to the collection, and a yet greater number from localities
not heretofore represented.

The systematic arrangement of the collection has proceeded from the JPho-
ladidce to the end of the Tellinidm. The thanks of the Section are due to
Messrs. Parker, Roberts, and Hassler, who have devoted a considerable amount
of time to this work, and have succeeded in perfecting an arrangement of the
specimens which has been much admired for its neatness, as well as for the
opportunity it gives the student of studying, without disturbing the shells.

During the year we have continued to receive collections from many of our
foreign correspondents, as will be seen by reference to the list of donations
given above. The following collections have been sent in exchange by the
Section : One hundred species of American shells to Luigi Benoit, accompa-
nied by a list of Sicilian species desired by us ; eighty species to Aug. Brot,
and types of Mr. Gabb's new species to H. Crosse. A collection of our dupli-
cate Vmeridie has been forwarded to Dr. Edw. Romer, to assist him in pre-
paring for the Section a catalogue and synonymy of the Veneridiv, which work
he has kindly undertaken to perform.

All of which is respectfully submitted.

Edward J. Nolan, Conservator.

[Dec.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 243

The election of Officers for tlie ensuing year was held, in accord-
ance with the By-Laws, with the following result :

President W. S. W. Ruschenbekgee,M.D.,

Vice-Presidents Wm. S. Vaux,

Jos. Carson, M. D.

Corresponding Secretary Edw. D. Cope.

Librarian Edw, J. Nolan, M. D.

Treasurer Wm. C. Henszey.

Curators Jos. Leidy, M. D.,

Wm. S. Vaux,
Geo. W. Tryon,
Edw. D. Cope.

Council Isaac Lea,

Isaac Hayes, M. D.,
Robert Bridges, M. D.,
Edw. S. Whelen.

Puhlication Committee Jos. Leidy, M. D.,

Robt. Bridges, M. D.,

Wm. S. Vaux,

Jas. Tyson, M. D., '

Edw. J. Nolan, M. D.

Committee on Finance Robt. Bridges, M. D.,

Wm. S. Vaux,
A. H. Smith.

1869.]

244 ELECTIONS.

ELECTIONS FOR 1869.

Members and Correspondents of the Academy of Natural Sciences have
been elected as follows for the year 1869 :

MEMBERS.

Dec. 29, 1868.— Albert Peale, Edw. A. Spooner, M. D,, Franklin Piatt, Jr.

Jan. 26, 1869.— William M. Wilson, Caleb S. Hallowell, R. J. Levis, M. D.

Feh. 23. — Hector Tyndale, Theodore Cuyler, William Dulty, Charles Morris.

March 30. — John Birkinbine, James Greer, Dayton, 0., Douglass R. Bannan,
M, D., U. S. N., George C. Henszey.

April 27. — Isaac S. Fogg, J. S. Withron, John C. Sinclair.

June 29. — N. Roe Bradner, M. D.

April 27. — Henry Bower.

May 25. — William B. Corbit, William Rudder, Persifor Frazer.

June 29. — Harry Emlen, Charles B. Nancrede, M. D.

Sept. 28. — Thomas H. Streets, Smyrna, Del., Nathaniel G. Macomber.

July 29.— Chas. L. Cassin, M. D., U. S. N,

Aug. 31. — John C. Spear, M. D., U. S. N., James Lanman Harmar, Fausto
E. Rendon, M. D., Guayaquil.

Sept. 28.— W. H. Finn, M. D.

Nov. 30. — Henry C. Miller, Z. M. Humphrey.

Number of members elected in 1869 33

CORRESPONDENTS.

Dec. 29, 1868. — George Neville, Calcutta, E. I., Joseph F. Berg, New Bruns-
wick, N. J.

June 29, 1869. — Alexander Carte, Dublin.

Jan. 26.— William Blackmore, London, E. B. Carling, Fort D. A. Russel.

April 27.— F. Curtis, M. D.

May 25. — William H. Dale, Washington.

April 27. — Albany Hancock, New-Castle-upon-Tyne, Eng.

Aug. 31. — A. Kolliker, Nathaniel H. Bishop.

Sept. 28. — Geo. H. Cook, New Brunswick, N. J.

Number of correspondents elected in 1869 11

Members, 33 ; correspondents, 11. Total, 44.

CORRESPONDENCE.

245

CORRESPONDENCE OF THE ACADEMY,

For 1869.

January. — Dr. C. A. Martius, annouuciiig the death of Herr Dr. Carl Fried-
rich Philipp von Martius.

William M. Darlington, acknowledging receipt of notice of election as
member.

J. S. Wilson, acknowledging receipt of notice of election as correspondent.

John R. Willis, with collection of fishes forwarded.

R. Osten Sacken, asking that a wood cut be sent to A. S. Packard.

Joseph F. Berg, acknowledging receipt of notice of election as correspondent.

James Orton, acknowledging receipt of birds sent.

Wistar Morris, with check for $100, and making suggestions in regard to
the location of the proposed new building.

A. J. Morrison, returning thanks for permission to visit museum.

Elias Lewis, Jr., asking permission to visit museum and library.

H. V. Poiziez, in regard to sale of a collection of specimens.

Thos. Earkins, in regard to collection shipped from France.

John Tomes ;

A. Milne Edwards ;

Samuel Haughton ;

T. Spencer Cobbold ; severally acknowledging receipt of notice of election
as correspondent.

Royal Society of Edinburgh ;

Soci^t(5 Royale des Sciences a Upsal ;

Academic Royale des Sciences a Amsterdam ; severally acknowledging re-
ceipt of Journal and Proceedings.

Institut Imperial de France;

Bibliotheca Universetatis Lugduno-Batavse ; each acknowledging receipt of
Journal and Proceedings, and asking that deficiencies be supplied.

Societe de Physique et d'Histoire Naturelle de Geneve ;

L'Universite Royale de Norvege a Christiania; each with publications, and
also acknowledging receipt of Journal and Proceedings.

Smithsonian Institution ;

Die Gesellschaft fiir Beforderung der Naturwissenschaften zu Freiburg;

Die Naturforschende Gesellschaft des Osterlandes zu Altenburg ;

Die Naturforschende Gesellschaft zu Basel, Switzerland ;

Naturforschende Gesellschaft zu Halle ;

Bataafsch Genootschap der Proefondervindelijke Wijsbegeerte te Rotterdam ;

Die Konigliche Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften zu Gottingen ;

Museum at Bergen, Norway ;

Royal Society of Northern Antiquities at Copenhagen ;

City Library at Hannover ;

Koniglich Preufsischen Akademie der Wissenschaften ;

Die Naturforschende Gesellschaft zu Freiburg Leopoldino-Carolinische
Deutsche ;

Academie der Naturforscher ;

Academic Royale des Sciences a Amsterdam ;

Societe Royale des Sciences a Upsal ;

Der Naturforscher Vereia zu Riga ;

246 CORRESPONDENCE.

Soci^te Hollandaise des Sciences a Harlem ;

Miisee public de Buenos Aires ;

Kaiserliche Akademie der Wissenschaften ;

Fiirstlicli Jablonowshischen GesellschaCt zu Leipzig;

Societe Hollandaise des Sciences a Harlem ;

Konigliche otfentliche Bibliothek zu Dresden ; severally acknowledging re-
ceipt of Proceedings.

Prof. J. Henry, with specimens for microscopic examination.

Institut Royal Meteorologique des Pays-Bas, acknowledging receipt of do-
nation to library.

F. A. Randall, in regard to shells left at the Academy.

Henry Woodard, in regard to paying for fossils.

D. Lindley, with box of specimens sent.

B. Waterhouse Hawkins, acknowledging receipt of resolutions.

Kgl. Norske Universitet Christiania, asking for a duplicate set of the Acade-
m3''s publications.

February. — Der Naturwissenschaftliche Vereia fiir das Furstenthum Liine-
burg ;

Edinburgh Geological Society;

Gesellschaft Naturforschender Freunde zu Berlin ; severally with publica-
tions.

J. S. Latimer ;

A. A. Breneman ;

W. Kitchen Parker;

Dr. H. E. van Rijgersma; severally acknowledging receipt of notice of
election as correspondents.

Lyceum of Natural History;

Surgeon-General's Office ;

Library of Essex Institute ;

K. K. Zoologisch-botanische Gesellschaft in Wien ;

Verein fiir vaterlandische Naturkunde in Wiirttemburg ;

Smithsonian Institution ; severally acknowledging receipt of Proceedings.

E. B. Worthington, wishing to purchase glass eyes for bird skins.

F. W. Putnam, declining to print paper, etc.
A. S. Bickmore, asking for a lecturer.

C. T. Seiss, asking information in regard to membership.
C. Hering, asking for a specimen.

A. Boucard, offering to send specimens of insects, etc.

March. — Congres International d'Archeologie Pr^historique a Copenhague,
with organization, programme, etc.

Smithsonian Institution ;

Essex Institute ;

Lyceum of Natural History ;

American Antiquarian Society ; severally acknowledging receipt of Journal.

Die Naturforschende Gesellschaft in Dantzig;

Academie Royale des Sciences de Lisbonne ;

Utrecht Society of Arts and Sciences;

Academia Real das Sciencias de Lisboa ;

Naturhistorischer Verein der preussischen Rheinlande und Westphalens ;
severally acknowledging receipt of Journal and Proceedings.

Marquis de Caligney ;

Samuel Haughton ; each acknowledging receipt of diploma.

Theo. Cuyler, acknowledging receipt of notice of election.

Societe Linncenne de Bordeaux, asking for missing numbers of publications
of the Acad. Nat. Sci., and presenting publications.

Society Linncenne de Lyon ;

Institut Royal Meteorologique des Pays-Bas ; each with publications.

Edw. Rhoads, M.D., giving notice of change of residence.

CORRESPONDENCE.

247

Samuel Powell, calling; attention to a magic lantern.
Andrew Sherwood, offering to collect for the Acad. Nat. Sci.
Herman Poole, in regard to the formation of a Natural History Society in
Cornell University.

Geo. T. Knight, giving information of a collection for sale.
W. B. Pryer, in regard to collections at Shanghai.
J. E. LeCompt, in regard to Fin-back whale.
A. Horner, Jr., resignation of membership.
J. W. Dawson, with specimens for museum.

A. S. Bickmore, inquiring for Prof. Ebell.

Fniversite Catholique de Louvain, acknowledging receipt of Journal and
Proceedings.

Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften, with publications, and acknowledging re-
ceipt of Journal and Proceedings.

April. — Academie Royal des Sciences, des Lettres et des Beaux- Arts ;

Societe Entomologique de France ;

Boston Society of Natural History ; severally with publications.

Societe Imp^reale des Naturalistes de Moscou ;

Societe Lienneenne de Bordeaux ; each acknowledging receipt of Journal
and Proceedings.

Prof. Henry, in regard to skeletons of Batrachia, etc.

Geo. Neville, acknowledging receipt of notice of election as correspondent.

Wm. J[. Wilson, acknowledging receipt of notice of election as member.

Carrington & Co., in regard to sending freight to the Amazon.

Fred. Franck, in regard to sending freight to St. Domingo.

Wm. C. Henszey, Treas., with list of members who have paid initiation fee.

Auguste F. Miiller, in regard to Expedition to the Amazon.

E. P. Borden, in regard to bark "Trinity."

Jos. Jeanes, resignation of position as auditor.

Societe des Sciences, Physiques et Naturelles de Bordeaux, asking for miss-
ing numbers of publications of Acad. Nat. Sci.

May. — Lyceum of Natural History;

Portland Society of Natural History ;

Hof und Staatsbibliothek Miinchen ; each acknowledging receipt of Pro-
ceedings.

K. B. Akademie de Wissenschaften, acknowledging receipt of Journal and
Proceedings.

Smithsonian Institution, with collection of birds from Alaska.

Mrs. Willard Parker, in regard to box sent to the Acad. Nat. Sci.

John J. LaAvson, Sr., in regard to the skeleton of a whale.

Prof. Baird, in regard to monograph on Cetacea.

Jas. Orton, in regard to Hauxwell's collections.

Zool. Botan. Gesellschaft zu Wien, asking for missing numbers of the publi-
cations of the Acad. Nat. Sci.

Albany Hancock, acknowledging receipt of notice of election as corres-
pondent.

B. Waterhouse Hawkins, acknowledging receipt of notice of election as
member.

C. S. West, announcing the death of Geo. J. Durham, a correspondent of
the A.cad. Nat. Sci.

Manchester Scientific Students Association, with publications.

Antonio Stoppani, announcing the death of Abbe Joseph Stabile, a corres-
pondent of the Academy.

June. — Schweizerische Gesellschaft, Bern ;

Naturforschende Gesellschaft zu Bamberg;

Der Naturforscher-Verein zu Riga ;

Naturforschende Gesellschaft in Bern ; severally acknowledging receipt of
Proceedings.

248

COKRESPONDENCE.

Socidte Imp(5riale d'Agriculture de Lyon, with publications, and asking'for
missing numbers of the publications of the Acad. Nat. Sci.

Naturforschenden Gesellschaft in Bern, with publications.

L'Acad(5mie Royale Suedoise des Sciences, Stockholm, with publications,
and asking for missing numbers of Journal.

John Speechey Golch, in regard to making collections in Australia.

Chris. Riinnebaum.

July. — Smithsonian Institution. Magyar tudomanyos Academia, with do-
nation to Library.

New York State Library ;

Surgeon Gen. Office, War Dept. U. S. ;

Academic Royale des Sciences de Belgique, severally acknowledging the
receipt of Proceedings.

Boston Society of Natural History, acknowledging receipts of Journal and
Proceedings.

L. J. Deal, with resignation of J. J. Stephenson's membership.

Smithsonian Institution, thanks for egg of Great Auk.

Public Library of Boston, acknowledging receipts of two pamphlets.

Dr. J. S. Billings, asking to borrow books.

Harry Emlen, acknowledging receipt of notice of election as a member.

August. — Essex Institute, acknowledging receipt of Proceedings.

Akademie der Wissenschaften, Berlin ;

Naturhistorischer Verein in Ausburg ;

Naturforschende Gesellschaft zu Halle, severally with publications.

Literary and Philosophical Society of Manchester with publication, and
asking for missing numbers of publications of Acad. Nat Sci.

Soci(^t6 de Physique et d'Histoire Naturelle de Geneve with publication ,
and acknowledging receipt of Journal and Proceedings.

Geo. H. Cook, in regard to bones of Mosasaurus.

Vanderhorst & Boegler, package received from Holland for Acad. Nat. Sci.

Jas. Backhouse, in regard to naturalist in Australia.

D. H. Storer, in regard to report on fish of Massachusetts.

Chas. L. Cassin, M.D. ;

Wm. B. Corbit, each acknowledging receipt of notice of election as mem-
ber.

J. A. McNiel, Prof. Henry, 0. C. Marsh, 0. N. Bryan.

September. — Naturforschende Gesellschaft in Zurich, acknowledging receipt
of Proceedings.

H. W. Holiowbush, in regard to minerals.

J. Aitken Meigs, with address of F. E. Rendon, M.D.

J. C. Spear, acknowledging receipt of notice of election as member.

Geo. Davidson, with specimens sent Acad. Nat. Sci.

J. E. Hilgard, with report of the coast sui'vey.

Stettin Entomol. Verein, asking for missing numbers of Proceedings.

J. Wyman ;

Peabody Institute, each acknowledging receipt of Synopsis of Batra-
chia, etc.

J, Stauffer, S. Lockwood, 0. N. Bryan, E. Cones.

October. — Geo. H. Cook, acknowledging receipt of notice of election as
correspondent.

Samuel A. Harrison, in regard to a fossil bone.

Lyceum of Natural History, acknowledging receipt of Journal and Pro-
ceedings.

Essex Institute ;

Naturforschende Gesellschaft in Danzig, each acknowledging receipt of
Proceedings.

CORRESPONDENCE. 249

Naturforschende "Verein in Briinn, acknowledging receipt of Proceedings
and sending publication.
J. H. Blake;

J. A. Allen, each acknowledging receipt of paper on Cetacea.
E. N. Horsford, in regard to six-toed cat.
Vanderhorst & Boegler, in regard to package from Holland.
John T. Morris, invitation to see freezing apparatus.
A. M. Boyd, in regard to sending specimens.
Dr. J. T/Boynton.

J. R. Willis, asking that diploma be sent.
Thos. Meehan, with address of Dr. Mueller.

E. D. Bassett, in regard to collections in Hayti.
T. W. Hoyt, asking for copy of Constitution.

A. E. Verrell, in regard to Chinese reptiles.

B. F. Mudge, in regard to fossils in Kansas.

Dr. H. E. van Rijgersma, in regard to collections in St. Martins.

H. W. Hollowbush, in regard to fossil wood.

N. G. Macomber, acknowledging receipt of notice of election as member.

November. — New York State Library ;

Library of Congress, each acknowledging receipt of Journal.

J. W. Dowsing, M.D., offering to collect for Acad. Nat. Sci.

Wm. Smith, asking in what way he can serve the Acad. Nat, Sci.

Jas. Orton, asking in regard to specimens.

Edward Hitchcock, offering to lend fossil bones.

J. N. Joclyn, in regard to "Nature."

J. F. Peck, in regard to white fish.

J. A. Hauxwell, in regard to making collections.

W. H. Finn, M.D., acknowledging receipt of notice of election as member.

G. A. Williams, in regard to an exchange of specimens.

December. — Prof. Edward Hitchcock, with box of specimens.

F. W. Packard, in regard to the McNeil reptiles.

J. A. Allen, offering to send paper on Massachusetts Mammalia.
Prof. Henry, asking the return of skulls belonging to Smithsonian Insti-
tution.

Schweizerisch Naturforschender Gesellschaft Berne, with publication.
Christine Hood, in regard to six-toed cat.
J. A. Allen, with copy of paper.

G. H. Lawson, asking information in regard to the Acad. Nat. Sci.

Whole number of letters received during 1869, 218.
* " " " written " " 137.

Edward D. Cope,

Corresponding Secretary.

* Number of letters written in 1868 and not printed with the report last year, 153.

250 DONATIONS TO LIBRARY.

DONATIONS TO THE LIBRARY.

1869.

JOURNALS AND PERIODICALS.

SWEDEN.

Stockholm. Ofversigt af K. Vetenskaps-Akademiens Forbandlingar. Vols-
22—25. 1865—1868. From the Society.
Kongliga Svenska Yetenskaps Akademiens Handlingar. Ny Foljd, 1864

— 1867. From the Society.
Lefnadsteckningar ofver K. S. Vetenskaps Akademiens efter iir 1854.
Aflidna Ledamoter. Band I, Hiifte 1, 1869. From the Society.
Upsal. Nova Acta Regite Societatis Scientiarura, Upsaliensis. Seriei Tertije.
Vol. VI, Fasc. 2, 1868. From the Society.

NORWAY.

Christiania. Forhandlinger i Videnskabs-Selsdabet i Christiania, Aar 1867,

1868. From the Society.
Registre til Christiania Videnskabs selskabs Forhandlinger. 1858 — 1867.

From the Society.
Nyt Magazin for Naturvidenskaberne. Vols. 1 — 15. 1837 — 1868. From

the Royal Norwegian University.
Norsk Meteorologisk Aarbog for 1867, 1868. From the Meteorological

Society.
Meteorologiske Jagttagelser paa Christiania Observatorium, 1867 and

1868. From the Observatory.
Tre Akademiske Taler paa Universitets Aarsfest den 2dea September af

M. J. Mourad. 1863. From the Society.
Det K. Norske Frederiks Universitets aarsberetning for Aaret 1867 med

Bilage. 1868. From the University.

DENMARK.

Kiobenhaven. Oversigt over det K. d. Videnskabernes Selskabs Forhandlin-
ger. 1867, Nos. 6 and 7. 1868, Nos. 1—4. 1869, No. 1. 1867—1869.
From the Society.

Tillaeg til Aarbger for Nordiske Oldkyndighed og Histoire Aargang 1867
and 1868, ud givet af det K. Nordiske Oldskrift-Selskab. 1868, 1869.
From the Society.

Memoirs de la Soci6t6 Royale des Antiquaires du Nord. Nouvelle S^rie.
1867. From the Society.

RUSSIA.

Helsingfors. Ofversigt of Finska Vetenskaps-Societetens Forbandlingar. IX,
X, XI. 1867—1869. From the Society.
Bidrag till kiinnedom af Finlands natur och Folk utgifna af Finska Vetens-

kaps-Societeten. lie — 14e Haftet, 1868, 1869. From the Society.
Acta Societatis Scientiarum Fennicce. Tomus VIII. 1867. From the
Society.

DONATIONS TO LIBRARY. 251

Moscou. Bulletin de la Soci^telmperiale des Naturalistes de Moscou. Annee

1868. Nos. 1, 2 and 3. From the Society.

Riga. Arbeiten des Naturforscher-Vereins zu Riga. Neue Folge. 2es Heft.
From the Society.

St. Petersburg. Bulletin del' Academic Imperials des Sciences de St. Peters-
burg. Tome Xlll. Nos. 1 — 4. From the Society.
M^moires de I'Academie Imperiale des Sciences de St. Petersburg. Tome
XII, No. ], to Tome XIV, No. 2. From the Society.

HOLLAND.

Amsterdam. Verhandelingen der K. Akademie van Wetenschappen. Elfde

Deel. 1868. From the Society.
Verslagen en Mededeelingen der K. Akademie van Wetenschappen.

Afdeeliug Natuurkunde. Tweede Reeks. Tweede Deel, Afdeeling Let-

terkunde. Elfde Deel, 1868. From the Society.
Processen-Verbal van de Gewoiie Vergaderiagen der K. Akademie van

Wetenschappen. Afdeeling Natuurkunde Van Mei 1867 tot en met

April, 1868. From the Society.
Jaarbock van de Akademie van Wetenschappen gevestigd te Amsterdam.

1867. From the Society.

Annales Musei Botanici Lugduno-Batavi, edidit F. A. G. Miquel. Tome
III, Fasciculi VI— X. 1867. From the Editor.
Hague. Archives Neerlandaises des Sciences Exactes et Naturelles, publiees
par la Societe HoUandaise des Sciences a Harlem. Tome III, Ime —
5me Livrs. 1868. From the Society.
Harlem. Annalen der Sternwarte in Leiden, Herausgegeben von Dr. F. Kaiser.
Erster Band, 1868. From the Observatory.
Archives du Mus<ie Teyler. Vol. I, Ease. 4me. Vol. II, Fasc. 1 and 2me.

1869. From the Museum.

Natuurkundige Verhandlingen van de Hollandische Maatschappij der

Wetenschappen te Haarlem. Tweede Verzameling, 25e Deel. 1868.

From the Society.
Rotterdam. Nieuwe Verhandlingen van het Bataafsch Genootschap der Proe-

fonder-vindelijke Wijsbegeerte te Rotterdam. Tweede Reeks, Eerste

Deel, 1, 2 and 3 Stuk. 1867. From the Society.
Utrecht. Nederlandsch Meteorologisch Jaarboek voor 1867. Parts I and II,

1868, Iste Deel. Uitgegeven door het K. Nederlandsch Meteorologisch
Instituut, 1867. From the Institute.

GERMANY.

Altenburg. Mittheilungen aus dem Osterlande. 18er Band, 3es und 4es Heft.

1868. From the Society.

Augsburg. Zwanzigster Bericht des Naturhistorischen Vereins in Augsburg,

1869. From the Society.

Bamberg. Sechste, 7e und 8e Berichte der Naturforschenden Gesellschaft

zu Bamberg. 1863—1868. From the Society.
Berlin. Archiv fiir Naturgeschichte. Herausgegeben von Dr. F. H. Troschel.

33er Jahrg., 6es Heft, to 35er Jahrg., les Heft. From the Editor.
Monatsbericht der K. P. Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin. Aug.,

1868, to Oct., 1869. From the Society.
Physikalische und Mathematische Abhandlungen der K. Akademie der

Wissenschaften zu Berlin, 1869. From the Society.
Zeitschrift der Deutschen geologischen Gesellschaft. XX Band, 3 Heft,

to XXI Band, 3 Heft. From the Society.
Zeitschrift fi3r die Gesammten Naturwissenschaften. Herausgegeben von

dem Naturw. Vereine fur Sachsen und Thiiringen in Halle. Jahrg. 1368.

32er Band. 1868. From the Society.
Wochenschrift des Vereines zur Beforderung des Gartenbaues in den K.

252 DONATIONS TO LIBRARY.

Preussischen Staaten fur Giirtnerei und Pflanzenkunde. Nos. 29 et seq.

1868. From the Society.
Sitzungsberichte der Gesellschaft Naturforschender Freunde zu Berlin im

Jahre 1868, 1869. From the Society.
Mathematische und Physikalische Abhandlungen der K. Akademie der

Wissenschaften zu Berlin, 1867, 1868. From the Society.
Bonn. Verhandlungen des iS'aturhistorischen Vereines der Preussischen

Rheinlande und Westjibalens. 25er Jahrg. 1868. From the Society.
Bremen. Abhandlungen herausgegeben vom Naturwissenschaftlichen Vereine

zu Bremen. 2 Band, 1 Heft. Bremen, 1869. From the Society.
Briinn. Verhandlungen des Naturforschenden Vereines in Briinn. VI Band,

1867. From the Society.
Cassel. Journal fiir Ornithologie. Herausgegeben von Dr. Jean Cabanis.

XVI Jahrg., Heft 4, to XVII Jahrg., Heft 5. Purchased.
Malakozoologische Blatter. 15 Band, 6—11 Bog. Pp. 177 to 226. Pur-
chased.
Chemnitz. Erster und Zweiter Bericht der Naturwissenschaftlichen Gesell-
schaft zu Chemnitz. 1864—1868. 8vo Tract, 1868. From the Society,
Danzig. Schriften der Naturforschenden Gesellschaft in Danzig. Neue Folge.

2en Bandes, 2es Heft,, 1869. From the Society.
Novorum Actorum Academia; Ca'sareie Leopoldino-CaroliniE Germanicae

Naturaj Curiosorum. 34 Vol., 1868. From the Society.
Darmstadt. Notizblatt desVereins fiir Erdkunde und verwandte Wissenschaf-
ten zu Darmstadt und des Mittelrheinischen geologischen Verein. HI

Folge, 6 and 7 Heft. From the Society.
Dresden. Sitzungs-Berichte der Naturwissenschaftlichen Gesellschaft Isis in

Dresden. Jahrg. 1868, No. 10, to 1869, No. 6. From the Society.
Emden. Dreiundfunfzigster jahresbericht der Naturforschenden Gesellschaft

in Emden. 1867. From the Society.
Frankfurt-am-Main. Der Zoologische Garten. IX Jahrg., No. 7, to X Jahrg.,

No. 6. From the Editor.
Freiburg. Berichte iiber die Verhandlungen der Naturforschenden Gesellschaft

zu Freiburg, J. B. Band V, Heft 1, 1868. From the Society.
Giessen. Dreizehnter Bericht der Oberhessischen Gesellschaft fiir Natur und

Heilkunde, 1869. From the Society.
Gotha. Mittheilungen aus Justus Perthes Geographischer Anstalt. Von Dr.

A. Petermann. 1868. XI und XII Ergiinzungsheft, Nos. 24 and 25.

Purchased.
Gottingen. Nachrichten von der K. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften und der

Georg-Augusts-Uuiversitiit aus dem Jahre 1868. From the Society.
Giistrow. Archiv des Vereins der Freunde der Naturgeschichte in Meklen-

burg. 22 Jahr., 1869. From the Society.
Halle. Abhandlungen der Naturforschenden Gesellschaft zu Halle. lOer

Band, 3es und 4es Heft, and Her Band, les Heft. From the Society.
Leipzig. Archiv fiir Anatomic, Physiologic und Wissenschaftliche Medicin.

Herausgegeben von Dr. Carl B. Reichart und Dr. Emil du Bois-Rey-

mond. Jahrgang 1868. Hefts IV und VII, 1868. Purchased.
Jahrbiicher fiir wissenschaftliche Botanik. Herausgegeben von Dr. N.

Pringsheim. Vol. II to Vol. VII, Heft 2, 1859 — 1869. Purchased.
Preisschriften gekront und herausgegeben von der Fiirstlich Jablonow-

skischen Gesellschaft zu Leipzig. XIII. 1868. From the Society.
Zeitschrift fiir Wissenschaftliclie Zoologie. 18er Band, 4es Heft, to 19er

Band, 3es Heft. Purchased.
Luxembourg. Soci6t^ des Sciences Naturelles du Grand Duche de Luxem-
bourg. Tome lOme. Annees 1867 ct 1868. From the Society.
Mannheim. Vierunddreissegster Jahresbericht des Mannheimer Vereins fiir

Naturkunde. 1868. From the Society.
Munich. Sitzungsberichte der K. B. Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Miin-

chen. 1867, II, Heft 3, to 1868, II, Heft 4. 1867, 1868. From the Society.

DONATIONS TO LIBRARY. 253

Zur Geschichte der Museen der K. Akademie der Wissenschaften. I das

botauische Museum. From the Society.
Almanach der K. B. Akad. der Wissenschaften, 1867. From the Society.
Beobachtungen des Meteorologischen Observatoriums, voa 1851 — 1864

1869. From the Observatory.
Abhandlungen der Historischen Classe der K. B. Akademie der Wissen-
schaften. lOen Bandes, 3e Abth. Philosophisch-Philologischen Classe.

lien Bandes, 2e Abth. 1867. From the Society.
Nurnberg-. Abhandlungen der Naturhistorischen Gesellschaft zu Niirnberg.

IV Band, 1868. From the Society.
Ofifenbach-am-Main. Neuuter Bericht des Offenbacher Vereins fiir Naturkunde

iiber seine Thiitigkeit Offenbach-am-Main, 1868. From the Society.
Pest. A Magyar Tudomanjos Akademia Ertestoje. Elso-Evfolyam. 1 — 17.

Szam. Masodik Evfolyara, 1 — 8 Szam. 1867, 1868. From the Society.
M. Tudom. Akademia Almanach. 1867, 1868. From the Society.
Magyar Akademiai Ertesto. A Mathematikai es Termeszettaidomanyi.

Osztalyok Kozlonye. Hatodik Kotet. Elso & Masodik. Fiiget, 1866.

From the Society.
Mathematikai es Termeszettudomanyi Kazlemenyek vonatkozolag a hazai

Viszonyokra Kiadya a Magyar Tudom. Akad. IV. Kotet. 1865, 1866.

From the Society.
A. M. Tudom. Akad. Evkomjvei Tizenegyedik Kotet. IV and VI Darab.

1866, 1867. From the Society.
Ertekezesek a termeszettudomanyi Osztaly Korebol. I — XII Szam.

Mathematikan Osztaly Korebol. I and II Szam. 1867, 1868. From the

Society.
Legtiineli Eeszlektek. 1 Kotet, 1866. From the Hungarian Academy.
Prag. Sitzuugsberichte der K. B. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften in Prag.

Jahrg. 1868. Jan. — Dec. 1868, 1869. From the Society.
Abhandlungen der K. B. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften vom Jahre 1868.

6ste Folge, 2er Band. 1869. From the Society.
Regensburg. Flora oder allgemeine botanische Zeitung, herausgegeben von

der K. B. botanischen Gesellschaft in Regensburg. Neue Reihe. XXVI

Jahrg. 1868. From the Society.
Correspondenz-Blatt des Zoologisch-mineralogischen Vereines in Regens-
burg. 22er Jahrg., 1868. From the Society.
Stettin. Entomologische Zeitung. Herausgegeben von dem entomologischen

Vereine zu Stettin. 29er und 30er Jahrgang. 1868. From the Society.
Stuttgart. Neues Jahrbuch fiir Mineralogie, Geologie und Palteontologie.

1868, 6es, to 1869, 5es Heft. From the Editor.
Wiirtembergische Naturwissenschaftliche Jahreshefte. 25er Jahrg., les

Heft. 1869. From the Editors.
Wien. Jahrbuch der K. K. Geologischen Reichsanstalt. Jahrg. 1868. XVIII

Band, No. 3, to XIX Band, No. 2. From the Society.
Jahrbuch der K. K. Geologischen Reichsanstalt. Jahrg. 1868. XVIII

Band, No. 4, to XIX Band, No. 4. From the Society.
Verhandlungen der K. K. Geologischen Reichsanstalt. No. 6, 1869. From

the Society.
Verhandlungen der K. K. Zoologisch-botanischen Gesellschaft in Wien.

XVllI Baud, 1—4 Heft, 1868. From the Society.
Denkschriften der K. Akademie der Wissenschaften. Mathematisch-

Naturwissenschaftliche Classe. 2&er Band, 1868. From the Society.
Sitzungsbericht der K. Akademie der Wissenschaften, Mathematisch-
Naturwisseuschaftliche Classe. 57 Band. Erste Abtheil, 1 — 5 Heft.

Zweite Abtheil, 1—6 Heft. 58 Band. Zweite Abtheil., 1 Heft. 1868.

From the Society.
Wiirzburg. Verhandlungen der Physical-Medecin Gesellschaft in Wiirzburg.
Neue Folge, 1 Band, 2 und 3 Heft, 1868. From the Society.

254 DONATIONS TO LIBRARY.

SWITZERLAND.

Basel. Verhandlungen der Naturforschendeii Gesellscliaft in Basel. 5er

Tbeil, 2es Heft, 1869. From the Society.
Bern. Mittheilungen der Naturforschendea Gesellschaft in Bern aus dera

Jahre 1868. Nos. 654— 683. 1869. From the Society.
Einsieden. Verhandlungen der Schweizerischen Naturforschenden Gesellschaft

in Einsieden. 52 Jahresversammlung, 1868. From the Society.
Geneva. Bibliotheque Universelle et Revue Suisse. Nos. 131 to 142, wanting

No. 136. 1868. From the Editor.
Memoires de la Societe de Physique et d'Histoire Naturelle de Geneva.

Tome XIX, 2e Partie, and Tome XX, Ime Partie. From the Society. _
Lausanne. Bulletin de la Societe Vaudoise des Sciences Naturelles. Vol. IX,

No. 54, to Vol. X, No. 61. From the Society.
Neuchatel. Bulletin de la Societe des Sciences Naturelles des Neuchatel.

Tome VllI, ler Cahier. 1868. From the Society.
ZOrich. Vierteljahrsschrift der Naturforschenden Gesellschaft in Zurich. 12er

Jahrg., les and 2es Heft. 1867. From the Society.

BELGIUM.
Bruxelles. Annuaire de I'Academie Roj-ale des Sciences, des Lettres et des
Beaux-Arts de Belgique, 1869. 35me Ann^e. From the Society.
Bulletin of the same. 37me Ann^e. Vols. XXV and XXVI. 1868. From

the Society.
Memoires of the same. Tome XXXVII. 1869. From the Society.
Annales Meteorologique de I'Observatoire Royal de Bruxelles. 2me
Annee. 1868. From A. Quetelet.
Liege. Memoires de la Society Royale des Sciences de Li^ge. 2me Serie.

Tome II. 1867. From the Society.
Louvain. Annuaire de I'Universit^ Catholique de Louvain 1869. 33me
Annee. From the University.

FRANCE.
Angers. Memoires de la Societe Imperiale d' Agriculture, Sciences et Arts
d' Angers. Nouvelle Periode. Tome lime, Nos. 1 et 2. Tome 12me,
Nos. 1 et 2. From the Society.
Bordeaux. Memoires de la Societe des Sciences Physiques et Naturelles de
Bordeaux. Tome VI, ler et 2e Cahier. 1868.' From the Society.
Societe des Sciences Physiques et Naturelles de Bordeaux. Extrait des

Proces-Verbaux des Seances. 1869. From the Society.
Actes de la Societe Linneenne de Bordeaux. Tome 26,4 — 6me Livr. 1869.

From the Society.
Actes de I'Academie Imperiale des Sciences, Belles-Lettres et Arts de
Bordeaux. 3e Serie. 30e Annee, 1868. 1 et 2 Trimestres. 1868. From
the Society.
Lyon. Annales des Sciences Physiques et Naturelles d' Agriculture et d'lndus-
trie, publiees par la Society Imperiale d'Agriculture de Lyon. 3me
Serie, Tome XI. 1867. From the Society.
Annales de la Socii^t^ Linn6enne de Lyon. Tome Seizieme. 1868. From
the Society.
Orleans. Memoires de la Soci^t^ d'Agriculture Sciences, Belles Lettres et
Arts d'Orleans. Seconde Serie. Tome XI, No. 3. Tome XII, Nos. 1
et 2. From the Society.
Paris. Annales des Mines. 6me St^rie. 5e Livr., 18G8, to 4e Livr., 1869. From
the Minister of Public Works, France.
Nouvelles Archives du Museum d'Histoire Naturelle de Paris. Tomes 1,
2 and 3, and Tome 4, Fasc. Ime, to Tome 5me, Fasc. 2me. Purchased.
Annales des Sciences Naturelles. 5me Serie. Botanique. Tome VIII, No.
5. Tome IX, Nos. 1—6. Tome X, Nos. 1 et 2. Zoologie. Totne X,
Nos. 1 — 6. Purchased.

DONATIONS TO LIBRARY. 255

Bulletin Mensuel de la Societe Imperiale Zoologique d'Acclimatation.

2me Serie. Tome V, No. 12, to Tome VI, No. 11. From the Society.
Revue et Magazin de Zoologie, pure et appliquee. Recueil Mensuel, par

M. F. E. Guerin Meneville. 1868, No. 11, to 1869, No. 8. From the

Editor.
Nouvelles Meteorologique, publi^ea sous les auspices de la Societe Meteo-

rologique de France, 1868, 1869. Nos. 1 — 9. From the Society.
Journal de Concbyliologie. 3e S^rie. Tome VIII, No. 4, to Tome IX,

No. 3. From the Editor.
Bulletin des Stances de la Soci^t^ Imperiale et Centrale d'Agriculture de

France. 3e S^rie. Tome 3me, 1858. From the Society.
M^moires d'Agriculture, d'Economie rurale et domestique, publiees par la

Societe Imperiale et Centrale d'Agriculture de France. Annees 1863 —

1866. 1869. From the Society.

Annales de la Society Entomologique de France. 4me Serie. Tome 8me,

1868. From the Society.
Journal de I'Anatomie et de la Physiologie. Public par M. Chas Robin.
5me Ann^e. No. 6, 1868. Purchased.
Toulouse, Memoires de I'Academie Imperiale des Sciences Inscriptions et
Belles-Lettres de Toulouse. 6me Serie. Tome VI, 1868. From the
Society.

ITALY.

Napoli. Atti del Reale Instituto d'Incoraggiamento alle Scienze Natural!,

Economiche e Technologiehe di Napoli. 2me Serie, Tomo II etIV. 1867.

From the Society.
Palermo. Giornale di Scienze Natural! ed Economiche publicato per cura

del Consiglio di Perfezionamento annesso al R. Instituto Technico di

Palermo 1868. Vol. IV. From the Institute.
Torino. Memorie della Reale Accademia della Scienze di Torino. Serie Se-

conda. Tome 24, 1868. From the Society.
Atti della R. Accademia della Scienze di Torino. Vol. Ill, Disp. 1 — 7.

1867. From the Society.

Catalogo della Leoneidi o Stelle Meteoriche. Dal Prof. Allessandro Dorna.
From the Turin Academy.

PORTUGAL.

Lisboa. Jornal de Sciencias, Mathematicas, Physicas e Naturaes, publicado sob
OS auspices da Academia Real das Sciencias de Lisboa. Nos. 4, 5, 6.

1868. 1869. From the Society.

GREAT BRITAIN AND IRELAND.

Dublin. The Journal of the Royal Dublin Society. No. 37. 1868. From the

Society.
Durham. Natural History Transactions of Northumberland and Durham.

Part I, Vol. 3. 1869. From the Society.
Edinburgh. Transactions of the Edinburgh Geological Society. Vol. I, Pts.
1 and 2. 1868. From the Society.
Proceedings of the Royal Physical Society. Session 1865 and 1866. From

the Society.
Transactions of the Royal Society of Edinburgh. Vol. 25, Part 1. From

the Society.
Proceedings of the same. Vol. VI, No. 74. From the Society.
Leeds. Report of the Proceedings of the Geological and Polytechnic Society

of the West Riding of Yorkshire, 1868, 1869. From the Society.
Liverpool. Proceedings of the Literary and Philosophical Society of Liver-
pool. Nos. 20— 22. 1866—1868. From the Society.
London. Journal of the Statistical Society of London. Vol 32, Part III.
Sept., 1869. From the Society,

18

256 DONATIONS TO LIBRARY.

The Student and Intellectual Observer. Nos. 9 to 21. From the Editor.
Proceedings of the Scientific Meetings of the Zoological Society of London

for the year 1868, Parts II and III; 1869, Part 1. From the Society.
Transactions of the Zoological Society of London. Vol. VI, Part 8. From

the Society.
The Athenaeum Journal. Nos. 2132 to 2158, and 2162 to 2188. Fromthe

Wilson Fund.
Nature. A Weekly Illustrated Journal of Science. Nos. 1 — 4,1869. From

the Editor.
The Ibis. New Series. Nos 16 to 19. From the Wilson Fund.
The Journal of Travel and Natural History. Edited by Andrew Murray.

Nos. 1—6, Vol. I. 1868, 1869. Purchased.
The Annals and Magazine of Natural History. From Vol. II, No. 12, to

Vol. Ill, No. 17. 1868,1869. Purchased.
Trubner's American and Oriental Literary Record. Nos. 41 to 48. From

the Publishers.
Notes and Queries. Parts XI to XV. Nov., 1868, to March, 1869. From

the Editor.
The Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland.

New Series. Vol. HI, Part 2, and Vol. IV, Part 1. From the Society.
The Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society. Vol. XXIV, Part 4, to

Vol. XXV, Part 4. From the Society.
Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London. Vol. 158,

Parts 1 and 2. 1868, 1869. From the Society.
Proceedings of the Royal Society. Vol. XVI, Nos. 101 to 104. Vol. XVII,

Nos. 105 to 109. From the Society.
The London, Edinburgh and Dublin Philosophical Magazine and Journal

of Science. Fourth Series. From Vol. 36, No. 245, Dec, 1868, to Vol.

37, No. 250, May, 1869. Purchased.
Reports of the British Association for the Advancement of Science. 1865,

— 1868. Purchased.
The Journal of the Royal Horticultural Society of London. New Series.

Vol. II, No. 6. 1869. From the Society.
Royal Horticultural Society's Proceedings. Vol. I, New Series, No. 12.

1868. From the Society."
Proceedings of the Royal Geographical Society. Vol. XIII, No. 2. 1869.

From the Society.
The Journal of the Chemical Society. New Series. Vol. VI, October, to

Vol. VII, June. From the Society.
Palaeontographical Society's Publications. Vol. XXII. Issued for 1868.

From the Wilson Fund.
The Journal of the Society of Arts and of the Institution in Union. Vol.

XVI, 1868. From the Society.
The Journal of Anatomy and Physiology. Second Series, No. 3. Nov.,

1868, Purchased.
The Popular Science Review. No. 30. Jan., 1869. From the Library

Fund.
Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science. New Series, No. 32. Oct.,

1868. Purchased.
Manchester. Proceedings of the Literary and Philosophical Society of Man-
chester. Vols. V— VII. 1866 — 18G8. From the Society.
Memoirs of the same. Vol. III. Third Series. From the Society.
Report of the Manchester Scientific Students' Association for the years

1862 to 1867. From the Society.

UNITED STATES.
Boston. Proceedings of the Boston Society of Natural History. Vol. XII,
page 161, to Vol. XIII, page 160. From the Society.
Memoirs of the Boston Society of Natural History. Vol. I, Part 4. 1869.
From the Society.

DONATIONS TO LIBKARY. 257

Occasional Papers of the Boston Society of Natural History. I. Boston,

1869. Entomological Correspondence of Tbaddeus Wm. Harris, M.D.

Edited by S. H. iScudder. From the Society.
Second Annual Report of the Peabody Museum of American Archaeology

and Ethnology. 1869. From the Museum.
Sixteenth Annual Report of the Trustees of the Public Library. 1868.

From the Trustees.
Bulletin of the Public Library of the City of Boston. No. 8. From the

Trustees.
Cambridge. Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology. Nos. 6 — 8.

From the Director of the Museum.
Annual Report of the Trustees of the Museum of Comparative Zoology

for 1867. 1868. From the Trustees.
Proceedings of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences. Vol. XII,

p. 345 et seq. From the Society.
Chicago. The Pharmacist. Vol. I, No. i, and Vol. II, Nos. 1—3. From the

Editor.
New York. The Medical Record. Vol. IV, Nos. 2 to 18. From the Editor.
New York Medical Journal. Vol. VIII, No. 4, to Vol. X, No. 3. From

the Editor.
The Chemical News. Vol. IV, No. 1, to Vol. V, No. 5. From Messrs.

Townsend & Adams.
Annals of the Lyceum of Natural History of New York. Vol. IX, Nos. 1

— 5. From the Society.
The Medical News and Library. Vol. XXVII, Nos. 313 and 323. From

the Editor.
Eighty-first Annual Report of the Regents of the University of the State

of New York. From L. H. Morgan.
New Haven. The American Journal of Science -and Arts. Conducted by

Profs. Silliman and Dana. Second Series. Nos. 139 to 144. From the

Editors.
Philadelphia. The Gardener's Monthly. Vol. XI, Nos. 1 to 12. From the-

Editor.
American Journal of Pharmacy. Third Series. Vol. XVII, Nos. 1 to 6.

From the Editor.
The American Journal of the Medical Sciences. Edited by Isaac Hays,

M.D. Nos. 113 to 116. New Series. 1869. From the Editor.
The Dental Cosmos. New Series. Vol. XI, Nos. 1 to 12. From the

Editor.
Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society. Vol. X, Nos. 80 and

81. 1868. From the Society.
Transactions of the American Philosophical Society. Vol. XIII, Part 3.

From the Society.
Proceedings of the American Pharmaceutical Association at the 16th

Annual Meeting, 1869. From the Association.
The Practical Entomologist. Vols. I and II. From the Entomological

Society.
The Medical News and Library. Vol. XXVII, Nos. 313, 322 and 331.

From the Editor.
American Journal of Conchology. Vol. IV, Part 2, to Vol. V, Part 1.

1869 — 70. From the Publication Committee.
Transactions of the American Entomological Society. Vol. II, No. 2.

From the Society.
Portland. Proceedings of the Portland Society of Natural History. Vol. I,

Part 2. 1869. From the Society.
Salem. The American Naturalist. Vol. II, No. 11, to Vol. Ill, No. 10. From ,

the Librarj' Fund.
Bulletin of the Essex Institute. Vol. I, Nos. 1, 3. and 4. 1869. From the

Society.

258

DONATIONS TO LIBRARY.

Proceedings of the Essex Institute. Vol. V, No. 8. 1868. From the In-
stitute.

Memoirs of the Peabody Academy of Sciences. Vol. I, No, 1. 1869., From
the Society.

First Annual Report of the Trustees of the Peabody Academy of Sciences.
Jan., 1869. From the Society.
St. Louis. The American Entomologist. Vol. I, No. 1, to Vol. II, No. 2.
Purchased.

Annual Report of the Board of St. Louis Public Schools. 1867 — 68. From
the Board.
Washington. Monthly Report of the Bureau of Statistics. Treasury Depart-
ment. Jan., 1869, to No. 29. From the Department.
Worcester. Proceedings of the American Antiquarian Society at the Annual
Meetings held at the Hall of the Society of Worcester Oct. 21, 1868, and
April, 1869. From the Society.

CANADA.

Halifax, Nova Scotia. Proceedings and Transactions of the Nova Scotian In-
stitution of Natural Sciences. Vol. II, Part 2. From the Society.

Montreal. The Canadian Naturalist and Geologist. New Series. Vol. Ill,
Nos. 5 and 6, and Vol. IV, No. 2. From the Editors.

Quebec. Transactions of the Literary and Historical Society of Quebec. Ses-
sion 1867—1869. Part 6, 1869. From the Society.

Toronto. The Canadian Entomologist. Vol. I, No. 4, to Vol. II, No. 3. From
the Editor.
Constitution and By-Laws of the Entomological Society of Canada. To-
ronto. From the Society.
The Canadian Journal of Science, Literature and History. Vol. XII, Nos.
1 to 4. From the Editors.

OTHER SCIENTIFIC T^ORKS.

Allen, Harrison, M.D. Modern Methods of Investigation. From the Author.
Allen, J. A. Catalogue of the Reptiles and Batrachians found in the vicinity

of Springfield, Mass., with notices of all other species known to inhabit

the State. From the Author.
Notes on Birds observed in western Iowa in the months of July, August

and September. Boston, 1868. From the Author.
Astier, M. J. E. Catalogue descriptif des Ancyloceras appartenant a I'etage

N^ocomien D'Escragnolles etdes Basses-Alpes. Paris, 1851. Purchased.
Barbot, Charles. Guide practique du Joaillier on Traits Complet des Pierres

Pr^cieuses. Paris, 1858. Purchased.
Barboza, J. V. Eponges siliceuses nouvelles de Portugal et de I'lle St. Jago.

Par J. V. Barboza du Bocage. From the Author.
Bailey, Wm. H. Figures of Characteristic British Fossils. By Wm. Hellier

Bailey. Part II. London, 1869. From the Author.
Barrande, Joachim. I. Reapparition du Genre Arethusina, Barr. II. Fauue

Silurienne des environs de Hof en Baviere. Prague, 1868. From the

Author.
Benecke, Dr. E. W. Geognostiche-Paliiontologische Beitriige. 2er Band, I und

II Heft. Miinchen, 1869. From the Wilson Fund.
Bent, Silas. An address upon the Thermometric Gateways to the Pole. St.

Louis, 1869. From the Author.
Binney, W. G. Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections, Land and Fresh-water

Shells of North America, Part 1. Pulmonata, Geophila. By G. W.

Binney and F. Bland. Washington, 1869. From the Smithsonian Inst.
Binkhorst, J. J. T. Monographic des Gasteropodes et des Cephalopodes de la

Craie Superieure du Limbourg. Bruxelles, 1861. Purchased.

DONATIONS TO LIBRARY. 259

Brandt, J. F. Sjmbolas Sirenologicre. Fasc. II et III Sireniorum ordinus

Osteologie Comparata nee non Sireniorum generum MonographiaB.

Petropoli, 1861 — 1868. From the Author.
Brigham, Wm. F. Notes on Hesperomannia. Boston, 1869. From the

Author.
Bronn, H. G. Klassen und Ordnungen des Thierreichs, fortgesetzt von A.

Gerstaecker. Funfter Band. 7 Lief to 6er Band IV Abth, 2 Lief. From

the Wilson Fund.
Brown, Robert. The Miscellaneous Botanical Works of. Vol. III. Atlas of

Plates. Published for the Ray Society, London, 1868. From the

Wilson Fund.
Caligny M. De. Liste des Memoires et notes presentes a I'Academie des

Sciences ou publics dans divers recueils. From the Author.
Carus, Jul. Victor. Handbuch der Zoologie. Von Jul. Victor Cams und C.

E. A. Gerstaecker. ler Band, 1 H^ft. Leipzig, 1868. Purchased.
Catalogue and Synonymy of the Genera, Species and Varieties of Recent Mol-

lusca described prior to Jan. 1st, 1867. Part 2. Philadelphia, 1869.

From the Conchological Section.
Catalogue of Books added to the Library of Congress from Dec. 1, 1867, to

Dec. 1, 1868. Washington, 1869. From the Librarian.
Catalogue of Kentucky University. 1869. Lexington. From the University.
Catalogue of Scientific Papers. Compiled and published by the Royal Society

ofLondon. Vol II. London, 1868. From the Society.
Catalogues van de Bcekerij der K. Akad. der Wetenscbappen, gevestigd te

Amsterdam. Tweeden Deels Tweede Stick. Amsterdam, 1868. From

the Society.
Chemical Analysis of Louisiana Rock Salt. Nevr Orleans, 1869. From Dr.

Jos. Jones.
Circular No. 2. Surgeon-General's Office. Report on the Excisions of the

Head of the Femur for Gunshot Injury. From the Surgeon-Genl's.
Cobbold, T. Spencer. Entoza, being a Supplement of the Introduction to the

Study of Helminthology. London, 1869. From the Author.
Cook, Geo. H. Geology of New Jersey. Newark, 1868. One Volume Text

and one Volume Atlas. From the Author.
Cope, Edw. D. Seventh Contribution to the Herpetology of Tropical America.

From the Author.
Synopsis of the Extinct Batrachia, Reptilia and Aves of North America,

Part I. From the Author.
Cornelissen, J. E. Royal Meteorological Institute of the Netherlands. On

the Temperature of the Sea at the surface near the south point of

Africa. Utrecht. From the Institute.
Credner, Dr. H. Die Gliederung der eozoischen Formationsgruppe Nord

Amerikas. Halle, 1869. From the Author.
Dana, James Dwight. A System of Mineralogy. By James Dwight Dana,

aided by George Jarvis Brush. Fifth Edition. New York, 1869. From

Joseph Jeanes.
Dawson, J. W. Modern Ideas of Derivation. From the Author.

Acadian Geology. The Geological Structure, organic remains and min-
eral resources of Nova Scotia, New Brunswick and Prince Edward

Island. London, 1868. From Joseph Jeanes.
De Saussure, M. Henri. Etudes sur I'Aile des Orthopteres. From the Author.
Details of an unpaid claim on France for 24,000,000 Francs, guaranteed by

the Parole of Napoleon III. Philadelphia, 1869. From R. A. Parrish, Jr.
Dillwyn, L. W. Materials for a Fauna and Flora of Swansea and its Neigh-
borhood. 8vo. Swansea, 1848. From the Authors.
Dippel, Dr. L. Das Mikroskop und seine Anwendung. 2er Theil. Iste Abth.

Braunschweig, 1869. Purchased.
Dole, Sanford B. A Synopsis of the Birds of the Hawaiian Islands. Boston,

1869. From the Author.

260 DONATIONS TO LIBRARY.

D'Ourches, M. le Marquis. Inhumations Precipitees. St. Germain-en-Laye,
1869. From M. de Caligny.

Dozy, F. Bryologia Javanica, Antoribus F. Dozy, et J. H. Molkenbauer. Fasc.
58 — 60. Lugduni Batavorum, 1868. Purchased.

Dubois, Ch. F. Oiseaux de I'Europe. 236—239 Livr. From the Wilson Fund.

Dunker, Dr. W. Palceontographica. Beitriige zur Naturgeschichte der Vorwelt.
16er Band, 7er Lief. 17er Band, 2e and 3e Lief. 18er Band, 4— 8 Lief.
From the Wilson Fund.

Ehlers, Ernest. Die Borstenwiirmer Annelida Chaetopoda. Iste and 2e Abth.
Leipzig, 1868. Purchased.

Eight Theses. Louvain, 1868. From the University of Louvain.

Elettroscopio del Cav. Macedonio Melloni. Napoli, 1854. From the Author.

Elliot, D. G. The Birds of North America. Parts I to XV. New York, 1866
— 68. Obtained in Exchange.

Finsch, Dr. Otto. Die Papageneien. 2er Band. Leiden, 1868. From the

Karsten, H. Florae Columbias terarumque adiacentium specimina selecta
Tomi II, Fasc. 5. Berolini, 1869. From the Wilson Fund.

Gabb, Wm. M. Paheontology of California. Vol. II. Cretaceous and Ter-
tiary Fossils. 1869. From the Library Fund.

Geological Survey of Illinois. Vol. I. Geology, Vol. II. Palaeontology.
Chicago, 1866. From A. H. Worthen.

Gervais, Paul. Zoologie et Paleontologie generales. Premiere Serie. Livr.
8—11. Paris, 1869. From the Wilson Fund.

Gore, G. On Hydrofluoric Acid. From the Author.

Gould, Benj. Apthrop. Sanitary Memoirs of the War of the Rebellion, col-
lected and published by the United States Sanitary Commission. In-
vestigations in the Military and Anthropological Statistics of American
Soldiers New York, 1869. From the Commission.

Gould, J. The Birds of Great Britain. Parts XIII and XIV. Loudon, 1868.
From the Wilson Fund.
The Birds of Asia. Part XX. London, 1868. From the Wilson Fund.

Graesse. J. G. T. Tresor de Livres rares et precieux. Supplement. Tome
VII, Livr. 41. Dresde, 1869. From the Wilson Fund,

Giinther, Albert C. L. G. The Record of Zoological Literature. 1867. VoL
4th. London, 1868. Purchased.

Hayden, F. V., M D. Geological Reports of the Exploration of the Yellow-
stone and Missouri Rivers. 1859 — 60. Washington, 1869. From
Genl. Humphreys.

Hewitson, Wm. C. Exotic Butterflies. Parts 68—72. From the Wilson Fund.

Hiller, Prof. Cam. Die Zoophyten und Echinodermen des Adriatischen
Meeres. 8vo. Wien, 1868. From the Author.

Howard, John Eliot. The Quinology of the East Indian Plantations. London,
1869. From the Author.

Hoyt, Dr. J. W. Reports on the London and Paris International Exhibitions
of 1862 and 1867. Madison, Wis., 1869. From the Author.

Huxley, Prof. An Elementary Atlas of Comparative Osteology. The Objects
selected and arranged by Prof. Huxley. Drawn on stone by B. Water-
house Hawkins, Esq. London, 1864. From Joseph Jeanes.

Jan, M. Le Prof. Iconographie Gen. des Ophidiens. 29me — Slme Livr. From
the Wilson Fund.

JefiFreNS, John Gwyn. British Conchology. Vols. IV and V, Marine Shells.
London, 1867. Purchased.

Johnson, Edwin F. Northern Pacific Railroad Company. Report of Edwin
F. Johnson to the Board of Directors. Hartford, Nov., 1867. From
the Author.

Kuster, H. C. Systematisches Conchylien-Cabinet Von Martini und Chemnitz .
188—193 Lief. Nurnberg, 1869.

Lawes, J. W. On the Home Produce, Imports and Consumption of Wheat.
By J. W. Lawes and J. H. Gilbert. London, 1868. From the Authors.

DONATIONS TO LIBRAKY. 261

Lea, Isaac, L. L. D. Observations on the Genus Unio. Vol. XII. Philadel-
phia, 1869. From the Author.
Index to Vol. XII and Supplementary Index to Vol. I to XI of same.

Vol. II. Philadelphia, 1869. From the Author.
Le Maout, M. Traite general de Botanique descriptive et Analytique, par M.

M. Le JIaout et Decaisne. Paris, 1868. Purchased.
Le Spectacle de la Nature. 5 Vols, I2mo. Paris, 1765 — 66. Second Volume

wanting. From Isaac Lea.
Lischke, Dr. C. E. Novitates Coachologicse. Supplement IV. Japanische

Meeres — Conchylien. 1 — 4 Lief. Cassel. From the Wilson Fund.
Ltken, C. F. Additamenta ad historiam Ophiuridarum. Af Chr. Fr.

Liitken. Kiobenhavn, 1869. From the Author.
Manuscripts relating to the Early History of Canada. Quebec, 1866. From

the Historical Soc. of Quebec.
Masters, Maxwell F., M. D. Vegetable Teratology. An account of the prin-
cipal deviations from the usual construction of Plants. London, 1869.

From the Wilson Fund.
Maury, M. F. Physical survey of Virginia. Richmond, 1868. From the

Author.
Mayer, Alfred M. Lecture — Notes on Physics. Philadelphia, 1868. From

the Author.
Mayer, Charles. Catalogue Systematique et descriptif des Fossiles des Ter-
rains Tertiares qui retrouvant au Musee federal de Zurich. 2me et

3me Cahier. Zurich, 1867 — 68. Purchased.
Meyer, Adolf Bernhard. Ueber den Giftapparat der Schlangen insbesondere

liber den der Gattung Callophis (Gray). From the Author.
Moore, J. Scott. Pre-Glacial Man and Geological Chronology. Dublin, 1868.
Mortillet, Gabriel de. Materiaux pour 1' histoire primitive et philosophique

de r homme. 4me Annee, No. 5, to 5me Annee, No. 10. From the

Library Fund.
Naphegyi, G., M. D. Among the Arabs. A narrative of Adventures ii Al-
geria. Philadelphia, 1868. From the Author.
The Alphabets of the World. An extract from Naphegyi's Album of

Languages. From the Author.
Neilreich, Dr. A. Die Vegetationsverhaltnisse von Croatien. Wien, 1868.

From the Author.
Newberry, J. S. Notes on the later extinct floras of North America. From

the Author.
Niessel, G. V. Ueber Asplenium adulterinum, Milde. Briinn, 1868. From

the Author.
Nordenskiold, A. E. Sketch of the Geology of Spitzbergen. Stockholm,

1867. From the Author.
Norges Officielle Statistik. Udvidea i aaret 1867—1863. 13 Pamphlets.

From the Norwegian Government.
On the existence of rocks containing organic substances in the fundamental

gneiss of Sweden. From the Royal Swedish Academy.
Owen, Richard. On the Anatomy of Vertebrates. Vols. 1, 2 and 3. London,

1866—1868. From Joseph Jeanes.
Paladilhe, Mr. Nouvelles Miscellanees Malacologiques. 2me and 3me fasc.

Paris, 1868. From the Author.
Palaeontographica, Beitriige zur naturgeschichte der Vorwelt. 16er Band,

6ste Lief, 18er Band, 2e and 3e Lief. Cassel, 1868. From the Wilson

Fund.
Palseontological Memoires and Notes of the late Hugh Falconer, A. M. 2

Vols., 8vo. London, 1869. From the Library Fund.
Palffiontologie Francaise. Terrain Jurassique. Livrs. 15 — 18. Paris. From

the Wilson Fund.
Palmer, Gen. Wm. J. Reports of Surveys across the Continent in 1867 — 68.

Philadelphia, 1869. Frem the Author.

262 DONATIONS TO LIBRARY.

Payot, V. Catalogue de la S^rie des Roches de la Chaine du Mont Blanc, 4to.

Geneva, 1864. From John Warner.
Catalogue Phytostatique de Plantes Cryptogames Cellulaires du Mont

Blanc. From John Warner.
Enumeration des Mousses Nouvelles, rares et peu connues des Environs

du Mont Blanc. From John Warner.
Erpetologie, Malacologie et Paleontologie des Environs du Mont Blanc.

Lyon, 1864. From John Warner.
Perry, Rev. John B. Queries on the Red Sand Stone of Vermont, and its re-
lations to other Rocks. Boston, 1868. From the Author.
Pfeiffer, Dr. L. Novitates Conchologicas. I Abth, 33—35 Lief. Ill, 12—15.

Venus, pp. 137—145, Lfg. 16—19, IV, 1—4 Lief. Cassel. From the

Wilson Fund.
Pfeiffer, Ludovico. Monographia Heliceorum viventium. Vols. V and VI.

Lipsiffi, 1868. From the Wilson Fund.
Porter, Thos. C. An enumeration of indigenous and naturalized Plants

found growing in the County of Lancaster, Pa. From the Author.
Pouchet, F. A., M. D. The Universe, or the Infinitely Great and the Infinitely

Little. New York, 1870. Presented by Jos. Jeanes.
Pritzel, G. A. leonum Botanicarum Index. Pars Altera, 2er Theil. Pur-
chased.
Pursh, Fred. Journal of a Botanical Excursion in the North-eastern parts

of the States of Pennsylvania and New York, during the year 1807.

Philadelphia, 1869. From Thos. P. James.
Quetelet, M. Ad. Sur I'Homme et le development de ses Faculties. From

the Author.
Sur les Ph^nom^nes P^riodiques en General. From the Author.
Quaterfages, M. de. Observations relatives a un ouvrage de M. Claparede

intitule, ' Les Annelides Chetopodes du Golfe de Naples, et Reponse a

ses critiques.' From the Author.
Rapport sur une communication de M. Vall^s, faites a I'ecluse de I'Aubois,

pour determiner I'effet utile de I'appareil a I'aide duquel M. de Caligny

dimirure dans une proportion considerable la consommation d'eau dans

les canaux de Navigation. From M. de Caligny.
Rapport Verbal sur un ouvrage imprime de M. Gialdi intitule, ' Sul moto

ondoso del mare e su le correnti diesso, specialmente suquelle littorali.'

From M. de Caligny.
Raymond, Rossiter, W. Mineral resources of the States and Territories west

of the Rocky Mountains. Washington, 1869. From the Author.
Reeve, Lovell. Conchologia Iconica. Parts 274 — 281. London, 1868.
Register of the commissioned, warrant and volunteer officers of the Navy of

the United States, to Jan. 1, 1869. Washington, 1869. From the Navy

Department.
Reinwald, C. Catalogue Annual de la Libraire Franpaise. 1869. From the

Publisher.
Report of the Commissioner of Agriculture for the year 1866. Washington.

From Dr. Hassler.
[Report of the Commissioners of Education, June 2d, 1868. Washington, 1868.

From the Departmenl of Education.
Reports of the Librarian of Congress for the year ending Dec. 1, 1868.

Washington, 1868. From the Librarian.
Reports of the Secretary of the Treasury for the years 18G7 and 1868. Wash-
ington. From the Sec. of the Treasury.
Richthoffen, F. Baron v. First Preliminary Notice of Geological Explorations

in China. From J. D. Whitney.
Roberts, S. R. Catalogue and Synonymy of Porccllanidae and Amphiperasidae.

From the Author.
Sars, Geo. Ossian. Histoire Naturelle desCrustacds d'Eau Douce de Norwdge.

le Livr. Les Malacostraces. Christiania, 1867. From the Author.

DONATIONS TO LIBRARY. 263

Om de i Norge Forekommende Fossile Dyrelevninger fra Quartaerperioden

et Bidrag til vor Faunas Historic. From Dr. Jos. Leidj^
Memoires pour servir a laconnaissance des Crinoides Vivantes. Cliristia-
nia, 1867. From the Author.

Sclater, P. L. Exotic Ornitliology. By Philip Lutley Sclater and Osbert Sal-
vin. Parts VIII — XL Loudon. From the Wilson Fund.

Scudder, S. H. Catalogue of the Orthoptera of North America described pre-
vious to 1867. Washington, 18G8. From the Smithsonian Inst.
Entomological Notes. II. From the Author.

Schlegel, H. Recherches sur la Faune de Madagascar et des ses d^pendance.
Par. H. Schlegel et Francois P. L. Pollen. Leyden, 1868. From the
Wilson Fund.

Schramm, M. A. Catalogues des Coquilles et des Crustac^s de la Guadeloupe.
2me. Ed. Basse-Terre, 1869. From the Author.

Smith, Lloyd P. Address delivered at Haverford College before the Alumni
Association, at their Annual Meeting, Oct. 24, 1868. From the Author.

Stal, C. Hemiptera Africana descripsit. Tomi 1 — 4. Holmise, 1864—1866.
Purchased.

Stark, Robert M. A popular History of British Mosses. Second Edition.
London, 1860. From Thomas Meehan.

Sundevall, C. J. Conspectum Avium Picinarum. Stockholmice, 1866. Pur-
chased.
Die Thierarten des Aristoteles von den Klassen der Siiugethiere, Vogel,
Reptilien und Insekten. Stockholm, 1863.

Sumichrast, F. The Geographical Distribution of the Native Birds of the De-
partment of Vera Cruz, with a list of the Migratory Species. Translated
from the French by F. W. Brewer, M.D. Boston, 1869. From the
Translator.

Surveys of the Conneant and Pymatuniug Swamps in Crawford County. Re-
port of the Surveyor General of Pennsylvania. Harrisburg, 1869. From
the Authors.

S. Fregatten Eugenics resa omkring Jorden. Zoologi, VI. Stockholm.

Tschudi, J. J. von. Reisen durch Siid-America. Funfter Band. Leipzig,
1869. Purchased.

Turnbull, Wm. P. The Birds of East Pennsylvania and New Jersey. From
the Author.

Van Beneden, M. M. Osteographie desC^tac^s vivants et fossiles. Par M. M.
Van Beneden and Paul Gervais. Texte, Livr. 1 — 5. Atlas, Livr. 1 — 5.
Paris. Purchased.

Vogt, Carl. Kritische Darlegung der Urgeschichte des Menschen. From the
Author.

Walpers. Annales Botanices Systematicse. Tomi Septimi, Fasc. I — III. Auc-
tore Dr. C. Mueller. Lipsia;, 1868. From the Author.

Wolf, Joseph. Zoological Sketches. Second Series, Part XIII. London.

From the Wilson Fund.
Wood, Dr. H. C, Jr. Prodromus of a study of North American Fresh-water

Algse. From the Author.
Woodward, Dr. S. P. A Manual of the Mollusca ; a treatise of Recent and

Fossil Shells. Second Edition. London, 1868. Purchased.
Worsaae, J. J. A. Nordiske Oldsager i dei Kongelige Museum i Kjobenhaven.

Ordnede og forklarde. Kiobenhaven, 1854. From John Warner.
Wright, Wm. The Oil Regions of Pennsylvania. New York, 1865. From the
Library Fund.

264

INDEX TO GENERA.

INDEX TO GENERA.

Accipiter 184

Actinocrinites 153

Adelarus .... 214

^cbmoijhorus 212

^giotbus 180

^strelata 213

Agaplielus 14

Agaricocrinus 163, 167

Agelaius , 126

Aix 216

Alca 200, 205, 211

Allorisma 171

Amblyrbiza 92

Amblystoma 95

Amlrosia 189

Ampelis 182

Atnpboracrinus 163

Anaides 93, 94, 109

Anas 217

Andiocryphia 228

Anous 214

Anser 127,185, 217

Arcbaeocidaris 80

Arcbffiopteryx 197

Aspidium 179

Anseranas 217

Anthoceros 230

Avicula 172

Aviculopecten 172

Aytbya 217

Balaena 10, 14, 33, 38

Balseniceps 200

Baljenoptera.. 15, 52

Barycriiius 70

Batocrinus 163

Batracboseps 94, 98

Beluga 6, 23, 27, 57

Bernicla 127, 217

Blasipus 214

Boebmeria 136

Bupbagus. 213

Cairina 217

Calceocrinus 72

Camptolaeraus 217

Cancroma , 200, 213

Canis 184

Cardiomorpba 172

Carya 5

Casarca 217

Cassia 179

Catbaracta 213

Ceratorhyncha 211

Cereopsis 217

Cbjenocardia 170

Cbaulelasmus 217

Cheirocrinus 73

Cbenalopex 217

Cbeniscus 217

Cbenopsis 216

Cblaepbaga 217

Cbonetus 172

Cboristopus 217

Cbi-ffcocepbalus 214

Chrysomitris 126, 182

Cinclus... 204

Clangula 217

Codaster 84

Codonites 84

Coecilia 93

Coeliocrinus 138

Colaptes 126

Colymbus 200, 205

Comatula 86

Compsognatbus 123

Corema 91

Coscoroba 216

Crax 198

Creagrus 214

Crocodilus 67, 123

Cryptocarpus 231

Cyanocitta, 12 7

Cyanura 127

Cyathocrinus 70, 86

Cygnus 216

Cymnocboeca 206, 212

Dactylethra 94

Dafila 217

Calypogeia 223 Daption 206, 213

INDEX TO GENERA.

265

Delphinapterus 7, 22

Delphinus 22

Dendrocygna 21'7

Desmognathus 94, 112

Dichocrinus 69

Dicholophus 198

Dicotyles 3

Diemyctvlus 93

Diomedea 205, 212

Dorycriuus 163, 166

Duvalia 229

Echinus 81

Emj's 66

Eocidaris 78, 79

Ereunetes 208

' Erinaceus 64

Erismatura 18

Erisocrinus 70

Eschrichlius 7, 10, 14, 192

Eucheirocrinus 73

Fimbriaria 230

Fratercula 205, 211

Fregetta 203, 212

Friugilla 185

Frossombrouia 228

Frullania 225

Fuligula 217

Fulix 217

Fulmarus 184, 206

Galeopithecus 64

Galeris 64

Gelocbelidon 214

Geotriton 94,95, 102

Gervillia 172

Gilbertsocrinus 75

Globiocephalus 21, 58

Glyptostrobus 178

Goniasteroidocriuus 75, 88

Goniobasis 125

Granatocrinus 84, 88

Grapbiocrinus 137

Gygis 213

Gymnantbe 223

Gymnura .., 64

Gyrinophilus 95, 108, 118

Hadrosaurus 123, 192

Haliplana 214

Halobajna 213

Halocyptena 206, 212

Halodroma 200

Harelda 206, 213, 217

Harporhynchus 188

Heloderma 5

Hemiacis 3

Hemidactylium 94, 99

Hemipodius 199

Hemisalamaadra 93

Hierofulco 184

Histriouicus ■ 217

Holops 123

Hunterius 14

Hydrochelidon 204, 208, 214

Hylocicbla 127

Hjlonomus 93

Hyperaodon 31, 191

Hypsibema 192

IguanodoQ 123

Inca 214

Ixacanthus 6

Junco 126

Jungermannia 219

Lagopus 184

Larix 177

Laius 184, 214

Lejeunia 223

Lepidecbinus 77, 80

Lepidestbes 77

Lepidocentrus .... 77

Lepidodendron 79

Leptotarsus 217

Lepus 184

Lestris 213

Leucosticte 182

Lima 172

Linota 182

Lorn via 211

Lougipennes 213

Lophocetus 6

Lopbocolea 222

Lopbodytes 218

Loxomylus 92

Lunda 211

Macrorbinus 61

Macrosaurus 123

Majaqueus 212

Manculus 95, 101

Mareca 217

Melanetta 217

Megalonyx 3

Megaptera 10, 14, 19, 49

Megistocrinus 163

Merganetta 218

Mergellus 218

Mergulus 200, 203, 211

Mergus 218

Mesoplodon 192

Mimus 188

Mixophagus 3

Nanobyus 65

266

INDEX TO GENERA.

Nettion 217

Nucleorinus 84

Nyctea 182, 184

Njroca 217

Oceanites 203, 206, 212

Oceanodroma 212

(Edipus 95, 102

Oidemia 217

Olor 216

Omomys 63

Ouychaster 82

Opheobatrachus 94, 95, 101

Orca 22, 55

Ornitboryocbus 203

Ornitbotarsus 123

Ossifraga 206

Palsecbinus 81

Pagodroma 213

Pagopbila 184, 213, 214

Pelagodroma 203, 212

Pelecanoides 213, 215

Pelicanus 206, 215

Pelionetta 217

Pentremites 83

Periscbodomus 77

Pba?betria 212

Pbsetbon 206, 213, 216

Pbalacrocorax 215

Pbilocrinus 70

Pboca?na 23, 53

Pboenicopterus 204

Pboetusa 214

Pbolidocidaris 78

Pbragmicoma 225

Pbysa 125

Pbyseter 32, 59

Pbysetocrinus 158

Pbysiotium 224

Picus 126

Pinicola 182

Pinus 122

Pipilo 126, 188

Plagiocbasma 229

Plagiocbila 223

Platyceras 88

Platycrinites 168

Plectrophanes 182

Plectropterus 206, 217

Pletbodon 93, 99

Plotus 200, 215

Podiceps 205, 212

Podilymbus 206, 208, 211

Polydectes 192

Polyotus 224

Polysticta 217

Pontogeneus 6

Pontoporia 6

Poatomogale 64

Poteriocrinites 137

Preissia 229

Priofinus 212

Prion 202, 213

Priscodelpbinus 6, 10

Protaster 83, 169

Protbyris 172

Ptycliorbampus 211

Puffinus 2C0, 212

Pygopodes 213

Pyranga 129

Querquedula 217

Quiscalus 133

Rana 94

Rhabdosteus 6

Rbacbianectes 14, 40

Rbodostetbia 214, 206

Rbyiicbops 214

Riccia 231

Rissa 207, 214

Saccocrinus 163

Saccogynia 223

Sagmatorrbina 211

Salamandra 93

Sarkidiornis 217

Sauteria 229

Hendtnera 224

Scapania , 218

Scapbiocrinus 137

Scbiza^a 13

Scliizodus 172

Scbizostoma 125

Sciurus 3

Sibbaldius 15, 20, 51

Simorbyncbus 211

Sip b on orb is 204

Somateria 217

Sorex 64

Spatula 217

Spelerpes 93, 95, 104

Spbeuiscus 198

Spbyrapicus 126

Spiriferina 172

Steganocrinus 154

Steganopodes 206, 213

Stercorarius 213

Stereocbila 93, 94

Stereocbilus 190

Stereodectes 3

Sterna 214

Strotocriuus 158

Strutbio 198

Sturnella 126

Snla 215

Suruia 182

INDEX TO GENERA.

267

Sylbeocyclus 212

Symphemia 208

Synbathocrinus 67

Syuthliborharapus 211

Syrrhaptes 199

Tachypetes 200, 205

Tadorna 217

Tamias 3

Tapirus 3

Taxodium 178

Thalasseus 214

Thalassidroma 206

Thalassoica 184, 212

Thalassorais 218

Thecachampsa 11, 192

Thiellus 212

Thoracosaurus 123

Thorius Ill

Thuja 122

Tinamus 199

Tretosphys 6, 7

Trionyx 12, 66

Tupaia 64

Tardus 127

Unio 124

Uria 205, 211

Ursus 3, 184

TJrtica 136

Utamania 211

Xema 214

Xylophaga 172

Zarhachis 9

Zeacrinus 138, 149

Zonotrichia 126

GENERAL INDEX.

Austin, C. F., Characters of some new
Hepaticai (mostly North American),
together with notes on a few imper-
fectly described species, 218.

Bancker, Chas. N., Announcement of
death of, 3.

Cassin, John, Resolutions with refer-
ence to the death of, 1.

Committees, Standing, for 1869, 2.

Cope, E. D., Remarks on fossils from
the Southern States, 3 ; Third con-
tribution to the Fauna of the Mio-
cene Period of the United States, 4,
6 ; On the Cetaceans of the Western
Coast of North America, 5, 13; Re-
marks on Heloderma horridum, 5 ;
A review of the species of Pletho-
dontidae and Desmognathidte, 91,
93 ; Remarks on fossils from An-
guilla, W. I., 92 ; Remarks on Tho-
racosaurus, Ornithotarsus, and Ma-
crosaurus, 123; Ou the cranium of
Hyperaodon biden, and on Meso-
plodou, Eschrichtius, Hadrosaurus,
and Polydectes, 192.

Correspondence, 245.

Coues, E., On the variations of the
Genus Aegiothus, 179, 180; On the
classification of water birds, 191,
193.

Davis, J. B , An attempt to ascertain
the average weight of the brain in
different races of mankind, 93.

Donations to Library, 250.

Elections for 1869, 244.
Ennis, J., The auroral display of April
15, 1869, 173.

Index to Genera, 264.

Lea, Isaac, Note on microscopic crys-
tals contained in minerals 3, 4 ;
Further notes on microscopic crys-
tals, 92, 119; Description of six
new species of fresh water shells,
124.

Leidy, Jos., Notice of some extinct
vertebrata from Wyoming and Da-
kota, 12, 63.

Meehan, Thos., Sexual law in the Co-
nifera, 92, 121 ; On the production

of Bracteffi in Larix, 123, 176 ; On
the gland-bearing leaves on the
peach and cherry, 136; On the fibre
of Ramie, 136 ; Remarks on adven-
titious and axillary buds, 178 ; On
the law of development in the flow-
ers of Ambrosia anemisisefolia, 180,
189.

Meek, F. B. and A. H. Worthen, De-
scription of new Crinoidea and
Echinoidea from the carboniferous
rocks of the Western States, with a
note on the Genus Onychaster, 12,
67 ; Remarks on the Blastoidea,
with descriptions of new species,
12, 83; Description of new carbo-
niferous fossils from the Western
States, 123, 137.

Meigs, Dr. Chas. D., Announcement
of death of, 124.

Officers for 1870, 243.

Redfield, J. H., Note on Schizrea pu-
silla, 13 ; Note on Corema Conradii,
91 ; On Aspidium aculeatum, 179.

Report of Curators, 234.

Report of Ornithological Committee.
237.

Report of Librarian, 238.

Report of Recording Secretary, 239.

Reports of Conchological Section, 240.

Resolution regarding the Humboldt
festival, 172.

Ridgway, Robert, Notice of certain
obscurely known species of Ameri-
can birds, based on specimens in
the Museum of the Smithsonian In-
stitution, 124, 125.

Ruschenberger, Dr. W. S. W., Election
as President, 2.

Scammon, C. M., On the Cetaceans of
the Western Coast of North Ameri-
ca, 5, 13.

Tryon, Geo. W., Jr., Election as Cu-
rator, 3.

Walsh, B. D., Announcement of death
of, 191.

Wood, Alph., On Brevoortia, 172, 173.

Warner, John, Remarks upon the
mathematic represeutatioa of or-
ganic forms, 124.

BIOLOGICAL AND MICEOSCOPIOAL DEPAETMENT

ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES.

January 4th.

Mk. J. D. Sergeant in the Chair.

Twenty-one members present.

Dr. McQuillen remarked that, in conjunction with Mr. Walmsley, he had
made some attempts to mount blood corpuscles in such way as should main-
tain their natural shape. In solutions of glycerine and water, the form of
the corpuscle of the frog had rapidly altered, but Mr. Walmsley had mounted
some in glycerine jelly which remained unaltered up to date.

Dr. Tyson stated that to expect success with the aqueous preservative fluids
was scarcely reasonable, unless a menstruum were used identical in its
specific gravity with the liquor sanguinis of the blood. Such a solution can
be obtained with glycerine and distilled water, in the proportion about fzij
of Bourn's glycerine to f5iiss of distilled water, and if one part of carbolic
acid be added to 100 parts of the mixture, a suitable preservative fluid is ob-
tained for many animal tissues.

January 18th.
Director S. W. Mitchell, M. D., in the Chair.
Twenty-four members present.

Dr. Wood exhibited to the department four species of the genus Sirosiphon,
all of which he stated to be new to North America, and three entirely unde-
Bcribed. One of them had been found growing on the face of a wet rock on
the banks of the Wissahicon, by Dr. J. Gibbous Hunt, from whom he had
received specimens. These are referable to Sirosiphon pulvinatus of Europe.

Two of the new species were collected in South Carolina, by Prof. H. W.
Ravenel, who sent them to Dr. Billings, U. S. A., to whom Dr. W. stated he
was indebted for the specimens. The following are the descriptions :

S. LiGXicoLA. — S. strato expanso, tomentoso, atro ; trichomatibus ramo-
sissimis, arete intertextis : ramulis abbreviatis vel elongatis, subrectis aut
varie curvatis, apice obtuso rotundatis vel subacumiuatis ; trichomatura et
ramulorum cellulis internis uni-biseriatis, plerumque pachydermaticis, dilute
vel saturate ferugineis, enormibus, plerumque homogeneis terminalibus elon^

^ PEOCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

gatis, cylindricis, saepius nonnihil oscillarium modo articulatis, granulosis ;
vaginis sat amplis, baud acbrois, vel luteo brunneo, vel fuscentibus vel ferru-
gineis.

Diam. Tricb. C. V. max y^'oo^^

For the second species the specific name of guitnla was proposed, from its
habit of forming little drop like dots on the bark on which it grows. The
following is the specific description.

S. phloiophilum, in maculis subnigris, parvis, tenuibus, plerumque rotund-
atis, interdum enormibus, dispositnm ; trichomatibus arete intertextis,
ramossimis, rigidis, inaequalibus, subcylindricis, nonnihil contortis ; ramulis
abbreviatis vel nonnihil elongatis, apice obtuse rotundatis ; ramulorum et
trichomatum cellulis tri-multiseriatis, plerumque pachydermaticis, ferrugineo-
fuscis, enormiter globosis, homogeneis ; cellulis apiculibus interdum breve
cylindricis, baud articulatis ; vaginis sat amplis, luteo-brunneis vel dilute
fei rugineo-brunneis.

Diam. Max. trich. cum. vag. 7^0''''

The other new species had been found growing in some stagnant water,
with a number of other algae, in New Jersey. The filaments were widely
separated and were so large as to be visible to the naked eye. The follow-
ing is the specific description :

SiRORiPHON DisjuNCTUM. — S. trichoniatis subsolitariis, longis usque ad lineas
quatuor, cylindricis, ramossis ; ramulis singulis ; cytioplasmate interdum
ajrugiueo, plerumque aureo-brunneo, in ramulorum apice interdum nuUis
sed plerumque in cylindricis longis oscillarium nonnihil modo articulatis ;
cellulis internis uiiiseriatis, rare biseriatis, subglobosis, interdum sejunctis,
plerumque arete connectis et moniliformibus, modo confluentibus, baud
pachydermaticis ; cellulis interstitialibus nullis ; vaginis achroois, interdum
brunneis.

Diam. Trich. cum vag. ^io^^i ^■'^^ "^^S- To'oo^''

Mr. W. H.'Walmsley exhibited a slide showing an unrecognised
larva which he found infesting the potato, and which he believes to
be a cause of the potato rot, so common in the potatoes at present
in the market.

Dr. McQuillen exhibited specimens of Trichina spiralis, from a
patient recently dead of phthisis pulraonalis, at the Philadelphia
Hospital. They were detected by Dr. Hough, a resident physician
at the Hospital. No symptoms indicating their presence were noted
previous to death.

February 1st.
Director S. W. Mitchell, M. D., in the Chair.
Nineteen members present.

Dr. H. C. Wood exhibited to the section what he [believed to be a new
genus of fresh water algae. He found the plant floating upon the Schuylkill
River. It consists of a subglobular, bright green, firm, gelatinous thallus,
the outer portions of which are so condensed as to give the appearance of a
periderm, although there is no real periderm present. The trichomata or
filaments radiate from the inner part of the frond towards the outer surface,
but many of them have their origin in the outer parts of the thallus. They
are branched, and are remarkable for the fact, that they are furnished with

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 3

large globular heterocysts raised on short branches. No distinct sheaths were
visible ; everywhere between the filaments was a uniform jelly.
The following are the generic and specific characters :
Genus Nostochopsis. Thallus definitus, trichomata ramosa; cellulis perdur-
antibus in latere sessilibus ant in ramulis brevissimis superpositis.

C. LOBATA. — C. thallo viride aut luteo-viride, cavo, enormiter lobato,
natante, modice magno, (ad 05 unc in diametro) ; trichomatibus plenimque
longis, flexuo«is, viride, modo inarticulatis, partim articulatis, cylindricis aut
submoniliformibus, sparse granulatis.

February 15th.
Director S. W. Mitchell, M. D., in the Chair.
Twenty-two members present.

March Ist.
Director S. W. Mitchell, M. D., in the Chair.
Twenty-six members present.

Dr. R. J. Levis exhibited two pathological specimens illustrating embolism, —
one, an embolus, three inches long, from the external iliac artery; the geconrl, a
gangrenous hand, in which the condition was induced by embolism of the
brachial artery.

March 15th.
Director S. W. Mitchell, M. D., in the Chair.
Twenty-two members present.

April 5th.
Dr. Ruschenberger in the Chair.
Twenty-two members present.

Dr. J. G. Hunt remarked, that in a specimen of Cissus in his possession, he
had recently noticed in the leaves such an exuberant growth that the paren-
chyma actually burst througli the cuticle. That he had also noted, growing
in its vicinity, a specimen of the Cuscuta, which soon embraced the Cissus, and
by its parasitic rootlets planted itself upon the latter plant, in which ihe ex-
huberant growth was taking place, after which this excess of growth was
gradually checked. The Cuscuta is a parasite which never attaches to cryp-
togams; a fact probably indicating some undetected difference in the sap of
the flowering and the flowerless plant.

Ajyril Idth.
Director S. W. Mitchell, M. D., in the Chair.
Twenty-three members present.
Dr. J. G. Hunt presented the following :

Improved Microscopical Cement. — Dissolve old and hard Canada balsam in
chloroform until it is quite fluid ; then add enough oxide of zinc ground in

4 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

linseed oil to bring the mixture to the consistence of cream. If it dries too
quickly on the brush to work smoothly, add a small quantity of oil of turpen-
tine. Occasionally stir the mixture before using. This cement dries very
quickly and retains a fine polish, does not become brittle, and will not ruia in
under the thin glass cover If proper care be used, all ordinary danger from
leaking when objects are mounted in cells, can be obviated. It may be color-
ed if desirable.

An impression prevailed with some members that this was the form
of cement recommended by Dr. H. C. Bastian, in No. II of the new
"Monthly Microscopical Journal," of London, a cement much
used in Germany. With this cement, however, composed of solu-
tion of gum-mastic in chloroform, thickened with nitrate of bismuth,
Dr. Hunt was familiar, and having used it, finds it far inferior to
that made according to the formula furnished by him this evening.

Mr. Walmsley had used these cements, and accorded the supe-
riority to that of Dr. Hunt.

3Iay Zd.
Director S. W. Mitchell, M. D., in the Chair.
Twenty-six members present.

Dr. J. G. Richardson read a paper " On the detection of red and white blood
corpuscles in Blood titains," with experiments to prove that the colorless ma-
terial left after the action of pure water on dried blood clot is not simply
fibrous, as appears to have been hitherto supposed by Robin, Virchow, Flem-
ing and other authorities, but chiefly an aggregation of those external portions
of innumerable corpuscles, which probably correspond to and certainly con-
stitute their cell walls.

For paper, see Am. Jour. Med. Sciences, July, 18G9.

Dr. William Pepper presented a specimen of a small pedicellated cystic
body, attached near the free end of the right fallopian tube. This little cyst
is described by Virchow under the name of the " terminal hydatid :" it is a
normal, but by no means constant structure, and is thehomologue of the vesi-
cle of Morgagni, which appears as an appendix to the head of the epididymis.

The specimen was obtained from a young woman who died from ura>mia,
following granular degeneration of the kidneys. She is not known ever to have
presented any disturbance of menstruation.

Dr. H. C. Wood exhibited specimens of an undescribed species of (Edocjonium,
which he named 0. niirubile, Spiror/yrn Weheri and S. qiiinina, not previously
found in North America, and found by him in the vicinity of Philadelphia.

May nth.
Vice-Director W. Pepper, M. D., in the Chair.
Thirty members present.

June 1th.
Director S. W. Mitchell, M. D., in the Chair.
Twenty members present.
The following pajDer was read and ordered to be published

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

Sections of Hard Tissues and other Substances for the Microscope.
BY CHRISTOPHER JOHNSON, M. D.

As hard substances cannot be examined microscopically in their natural
state, they must undergo preparation by the investigator before the secrets of
their physical and vital condition can be mastered. The end or object of
this '• preparation " is the production of a lamina so thin as to be translu-
cent, and yet sufficiently thick to retain every physical characteristic. To
accomplish this desired end much patience is called for in each of the seve-
ral processes especially adapted to the particular and diflerent states of
hardness, with or -n-ithout brittleness, or toughness, and finally to the condi-
tion of preservation of objects, whether receut or fossil.

It must be evident to every student in microscopy, that certain qualities
of objects oppose a barrier to the facile disentanglement of their web and
woof, and such, for e.xample, is the absorption of light, as totally Jjy blnck or
partially by colored bodies. Wherefore a knowledge of these qualities is
requisite ; and success will reward the operator in proportion as he adapts
modes of preparation to tissues offered for examination, if he possess the
amount of skill and patience indispensable in delicate manipulations.

It may be observed, before proceeding to develop any method of section
making, thai perfect sections, even, of some objects, such as biliary and
vesical calculi, as well as certain pathological concretions, require the aid
of a suitable mounting before their intimate constitution can be exhibited;
so that the work of the microscopist does not always end with the production
of a successful section, but must not be regarded as complete until the prep-
aration be secured and displayed in some proper way upon a slide.

When I needed the aid of guides in directing ray unskilled manipulations
I was very often embarrassed by the meagreness of the assistance afforded by
authors of works on practical microscopy ; inexperienced readers, however,
will find in my attention to detail that help which will secure me exonora-
tion from the charge of tedious minuteness, and I beg to add that I theorize
in nothing, but give the results of my own personal experience.

Hard substances may be divided into two groups, ihe first comprising all
such as require the emery wheel for their reduction, and the second, all other
and less resisting structures. Among the former are to be found the flints and
siliceous petrifactions, as also very hard calcareous bodies, whether petrifac-
tions or of recent and normal constitution, as the porcelain-like shell of
many molluscs. In the succeeding group may be ranged recent or non-sili-
cified teeth and bone, calculi of various kinds, brain sand and calcareous de-
posits, hard seed capsules, and the like. Whatever be the process employed
to subdue these refractory substances, the resulting section must possess cer-
tain qualities or fulfil certain conditions. It must be perfectly flat, of suita-
ble and equal thinness, and ought, if possible, to be polished on both sides.
I say if possible, because there are many hard and tough substances which
are not susceptible of a polish ; and it is almost needless to add that, ia the
study of structure, sections cut in several directions are indispensable for its
correct appreciation.

The apparatus I have employed is of very simple description. For the
preparation of sections of objects of the^Vs^ class, I necessarily have recourse
to the lathe fitted with a " true " disc of thin soft steel, for emery on the side
or edge, as I might wish to grind a surface or cut a slice ; with an Ayrshire
stone for grinding, and a wooden disc cut across the grain to bear the polish-
ing powder, the tin powder in use by stone cutters. But to save time I
have frequently availed myself of the steadily revolving fine stones in a
glass-cutting establishment, which readily "cut" the chalk-flint by which
they are sharpened and corrected. The lathe is a part of a former watch-
maker's, and similar to those commonly in vogue with dentists. The emery

6 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

I use was sorted by eleutriation, a process indispensable before applying it to
the production of au acceptable and polish-bearing surface. This method
consists in shaking up good flour of emery with water in a tall cylindrical
jar, suffering the whole to stand in repose for, say, two seconds, and pouring
off into another jar the fluid overlying the sediment. The original deposit
may again be treated in the same way, and when the water shall have been
added to that first removed, the residual powder is collected, dried and labelled
1" emery.

The finer particles withdrawn in suspension into the second jar are shaken
up afresh, allowed to deposit for three seconds, are collected, dried and
labelled V emery ; while the finest dust, which subsides very slowly in the
decanted water, may be gathered as S^'' or 10''^ emery, the last being fine
enough for polishing.

For most purposes large portions of hard objects destined for microscopic
examination are unnecessary ; and besides, the grinding and other prepara-
tion of extensive slices involve a useless expenditure of time and patience.
Small sections made from fragments or pieces cut off by wheel from a cabinet
specimen are altogether satisfactory — indeed, chips flaked off with adroitness
are oftentimes extremely useful in directing investigation, and may even bear
mounting as permanent objects. »

As small particles or pieces cannot be readily manipulated in their inde-
pendent state, it is necessary to secure them in such manner as to insure the
success of their skillful reduction. This may be done by attaching them
singly by shellac or hardened balsam to pieces of heavy mirror glass of
about an inch in diameter and ground smooth on the edges. Thus fastened
a good surface may be obtained for one side. Then the object must be turned
over and again cemented by heating the shellac as before, and pressing the
prepared surface flat against the glass. Now, as the grinding progresses the
qualities of the section become apparent, and the degree of thinness deter-
mined by direct inspection of the section under the microscope.

Large sections, as of shells, can be made with as much precision as smaller
ones ; but no one can hope to emulate the late Mr. W. Glen, of Cambridge,
unless he have extraordinary skill, coupled with most extensive experience.

As to the manner of working the lathe and its wheels, 1 feel obliged to re-
frain from speaking; for nothing but repeated essays with that instrument,
or personal instruction of an adept, can assist the beginner more than the
bearing in mind of a few rules of universal application. First^ produce and
even, steady and not too rapid motion of the disc ; second, charge the wheel,
whether side or edge, with a moderate quantity of emery, or diamond dust,
at a time ; third, hold the otiject lightly against the cutting surface ; and
fourthly, change the position of the object by rotating it upon its flat surface,
and at short intervals, as the grinding progresses.

When ground and polished the specimen maj' be separated from the shellac
and glass by immersion in hot alcohol, and mounted, either by simply fasten-
ing it with balsam to a slide, or embalming it in that substance and covering
with a thin glass.

It is worthy of note that many objects which may technically be classed
among the hard substances, require for their reduction the intervention of a
cutting powder between themselves and the reducing surface, whether wheel
or stone. As instances I may mention biliary and other calculi, the dried
crystalline lens and phthisical or other calcareous concretions. No hone can
smoothly cut these bodies, for its grit soon becomes smoothed out by the
adherent debris, and the specimen is either not further att'ected or it is de-
stroyed by breaking. The powders I employ are the fine " silex '" of the
dentists, and the very fine dust of pumice made even by rubbing while
moistened between glass plates. A first surface should be secured by rub-
bing the specimen upon a hone made flat by means of emery and water and
a flat marble slab, and the coarser and then the finer powder are to be em-
ployed and kept moist with water. Now the object must be dried and after-

KATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 7

wards attached by moderately hard balsam to the slide on which it is to
remain, and the final surface will be reached by a repetition of the pro-
cess of grinding. And here I would call attention to some points in the
manipulation, which are that in reducing any substance to the condition of a
lamina, it should be poised securely with the fingers, whether it be free or
cemented upon glass; propelled along the face of the hone with a long, even
and steady sweep ; and turned repeatedly' upon its horizontal axis. A polish
may be given or not, according to the nature of the substance, and the sec-
tion may be regarded as finished if it bear a satisfactory examination under
the microscope. And it should not be forgotten that many specimens are
best prepared by working them up to the power under which they are des-
tined to be studied.

Hardened organic substances, as the crystalline, do not bear the heat ne-
cessary for attachment to a glass slide, wherefore the second surface must
be produced by fixing the first surface upon a bit of white wax by gentle pres-
sure.

Finally, after the grinding shall have been completed, it will be necessary
to clean the slide with water ; and after drying, to wash away the powder
and debris adherent to the surrounding film of balsam with chloroform passed
lightly over the slide by the finger covered with soft linen, or, if the section
will endure such treatment, the whole of the margined balsam may be
cleared away by pouring over the slide a stream of chloroform. But turpen-
tine should be used to detach a finished section from wax.

To mount such sections it will be found advantageous to moisten them with
turpentine before dropping on the thin balsam. The cover glass is to be
applied warm, and a small weight, as an inch or even a half inch screw placed
on it as eventually to press out superfluous balsam. I say eventually, because
such slides are unfit for use for several weeks.

When the balsam shall have become sufficiently tenacious the slide may be
cleaned by passing a knife blade, held fiat, from the cover glass into the cir-
cunivalhile cement, and then boldly away over the slide. What remains is
to be removed with a solution of caustic potash, which itself calls for a free
watery ablution, and then the slide needs nothing but the label.

This method o"f mounting sections is applicable to a great variety of ob-
jects, and will be found to yield the best results in the case of urinary crys-
tals, of the so-called heraatin crystals, or of the chitinous skeletons of insects
as actually practised by the incomparable Mr. T. W. Starr, of Philadelphia.

The preparation of objects of the second class is attended with difficulties,
some of which are to be overcome by means similar to those emploj'cd in
manipulating objects belonging to the former, and some, by reason of the na-
ture of the objects themselves, are to be surmounted by a resort to various
expedients. Thus, sections of spines of Echinodermata, as also of biliary
and other calculi, may be made in the same way as sections of harder sub-
stances ; that is, by grinding down a true surface by means of fine silex and
finer pumice with water, fixing that side, when dry, upon a slide with Canada
balsam hardened until it has become very " tacky," and then finishing the
second surface in the same manner as the first. But the calculi, generally,
must not be removed from the slide, although the marginal balsam may be
cleaned away by drops of chloroform ; and they must be covered with soft
balsam in situ and so covered. The spines, however, may and must be en-
tirely cleaned by repeated drops of chloroform, in which they are to be floated
away from their early attachment ; whereupon the slide being wiped clean in
the middle, the section is to be floated back to tlie central spot, suffered to
dry, then moistened with turpentine, and immediately overflowed with soft
balsam. Heat may or may not be employed before applying the cover glass.

The trick of sectionizing a very small spine of Echinus, or similar object,
consists in perforating a disc of a large spine, saturating it with hardened
balsam, and inserting the capillary spine into the perforation, aided by heat.
The two substances ought to be the same. Now grind down the large piece ;
and when finished and washed out, find, separate and mount the particle.

8 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

But structures such as recent teeth and bone, the hardened albumen of
kernels of such nuts as that of Phytclcphas macrocarpa, brain, sand, &c., bear
heat indifferently. They crack, but more provokingly warp, when attempts
are made to fix a first surface. Indeed, when not properly dried after the
performance of the first step of the process already described, they usually
warp so much as to render the making of a uniformly thin section impossible.
To remedy the defect of the heat process I found a matter of much difficulty ;
so I employed a new one, which I claim to be easy, certain and original.

To make sections by the method I have so successfully employed but little
apparatus is required. A couple of Arkansas hones, the one coarser, the other
very fine, and both kept^^o^ by rubbing upon a hard marble flag with flour of
emery and water, are of first necessity. I also recommend that the hones
while being "faced" should be pushed steadily along diagonally, first ono
way and then the other, so that the surface will be "set" or finished quin-
cuntially.

In the next place I mention fine Russian isinglass for glue, to be boiled,
strained, and dried in flakes upon a polished metal surface. Then thin letter
paper is to be jirovided ; several bits of thick mirror glass, for holders, ground
on the edges, of different sizes, from one inch square upwards, according to
the size of the projected section, as also sweet oil and a little chloroform. And
finally there will be needed some alcohol, and a small quantity of eleutriated
polishing putty, oxyd of tin, as used by stoue cutters.

As a preliminary it is desirable that some definite idea as to the plane of
the section be entertained, and this is possible for all except minute frag-
ments. Then the saw cuts out a small block, say of one-eighth inch in thick-
ness, or the file reduces a mass to near the desired level. Now the object is
moved steadily and rather lightly along over the coarser hone, wet with wa-
ter, and then over the finer one, the operator being careful to pass the object
evenly beckwards and forwards, to turn it about from tim^ to time, and to
examine the surface frequently with a lens to detect invidious scratches.
Teeth and similar objects should be pushed along in one direction only, the
enamel forward in the case of teeth, so as to avoid and prevent separation of
their different constituents.

When a perfect surface shall have been obtained let the specimen be
washed in water and then immediately dropped into alcohol, which, ab-
stracting water from every part alike, dries the object — so far as aqueous wet-
ting is concerned — and no warping occurs. Next, strain a bit of chamois
skin upon a block, sprinkle upon it a little of the polishing powder, moisten
all with alcohol, and polish tbe first surface by rubbing it with gentle force
upon the prepared skin. After receiving polish the specimen is to be restored
to its alcoholic bath.

The succeeding step of the operation consists in melting a little of the isin-
glass in a silver spoon or other more convenient metallic receptacle, making
a fluid of the consistence of cream, and adding, at the end, a few drops of
alcohol to increase the tenacity by making the thin glue take better to the
polished surface. Warm one of the glass bidders very slightly, with the fin-
ger varnish one of its faces over with the glue, prepare a bit of the thin paper
in like manner, and quickly cement the paper evenly upon the glass. Trim
awaj' the edges with scissors and the paper is ready for the guides^ which
are two little ribbons of paper about a quarter of an inch wide, and to be
glued on the paper-facing on opposite sides and touching the margins. The
thickness of the guides determines the thickness of the future section, for be-
tween them is left a gutter in which this section will lie. Now with the fin-
ger place a film of glue upon the paper between the guides; and, having pre-
viously wiped the object quickly dry, slightly moisten its surface and edges
with the isinglass, apply the s[)ecimen dexterously, make forcible pressure,
and confine it by wrapping it tightly with strong thread. -It is to be observed
that the isinglass should not exceed the area limited by the guides, nor should

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 9

it much surpass the contour of the specimen, otherwise difficulty will be
experienced in grinding the second surface.

In ten or twelve hours remove the binding string, and with a fine saw cut
away a portion of the block of matter, or with a file rasp down the adherent
piece. But here again method is everything; for a tooth, for example, must
be filed from the enamel towards the ivory, otherwise separation will occur.
And the same rule is to be observed in grinding down to the second surface.

lu ouce more resorting to the hones, which, by the way of reminder, ought
from time to time to be dressed afresh after the manner already pointed out,
it becomes apparent that oil and not witter should be used to moisten and
clean the surface. Consequently, the second grinding is. done in oil, and in
perfect safety, fur as that fluid exerts no influence upon the glue, the section
is retained in position upon the gla-s throughout the process. When, at
length, the desired thinness is reached, it will be perceived that the guide
papers as well as the section lie equally close upon the surface of the "trued"
fine hone, and that they somewhat, resi:?t the action of the stone; and the
ground edge of a clean slide applied across the face of the holder will assure
the equal thickness of the guide papers and the section itself. If an attempt
be made to push the operation farther the holder will be found to adhere some-
what tenaciously to the hone.

The holder must now be carefully wiped clean on all sides; whereupon,
after careful examination of the surface for scratches, a polish is to be
given. But scratches may be ground oft' with caution, or suftered to
remain if they do not compromise essential parts of the specimen.

With a bit of fine silk stuft' borne upon the finger end, and moistened
with oil, take up a little of very fine polishing putty, and rub the adher-
ing section quickly as well as briskly, for no heat must be evolved by
continued friction, otherwise portions of the specimen will rise in conse-
quence of warping, and be broken otf ; or else the polish may be given by
means of a small bit of chamois skin fastened upon the end of a phial
cork, dampened with oil, and armed with polishing powder.

Again wipe off the holder with clean soft cambric; then with the same
charged with alcohol; next wash the holder rapidly in soap and water,
using the finger the while; pour clean water over section and glass, and
finally deposit the holder in a glass dish filled with clean water.

Here let us pause while the water is detaching the section from the
paper, and softly liberating the unbroken contour of its margin. The
guides are set free, the subjacent paper quits the holder, and the section
is left alone by the withdrawal of both paper and glass.

Before proceeding further I desire to show how sections of very slender
rods, spicules, or teeth, such as those of the Bat, may be prepared with faci-
lity. As tht^se minute or delicate objects cannot be held by the fingers, the
expedient of glueing them to larger objects must be resorted to. But to secure
equality in the grinding, the two structures, the supporting and the supported,
must be the same. Thus, tooth must be attached to tooth, bone to bone, &c.
And as very fragile cancellated tissue will hardly bear the friction of the
hones, the meshes are to be filled up with isinglass glue, and the specimen
dried before the saw or the hone can be employed. Such specimens must be
ground in oil for the first surface ; afier which, when wiped off and robbed of
this oil by maceration in chloroform, they may bfe cemented with glue upon
the paper-faced holder, and the production of the second surface is accom-
plished after the manner already pointed out.

The support afforded to cancellated tissue by isinglass in the class of objects
at present under consideration may be found equally in hardened Canada
balsam for objects of another sort. The spines of some Echinoderms are so
brittle as not to endure handling in their natural state, but the most ghostly
of these, such as the hollow spines of Diadema, may be readily and safely held
and [Subjected to the process of grinding if their cancelli be filled with hardened
balsam, introduced, of course, while hot. And, to repeat, these small bodies

2

10 ' PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

must be cemented upon larger ones of the same kind if anything like trueism"
in the plane of the pection be attempted or required.

Our si)ecimen exists, but is still unfit for mounting, because it is saturated
with oil and retains small particles of the putty. To rid it of'the latter it may
be removed to a slide by forceps, or, if too delicate, must be floated on the
water by tilting the vessel, and then dipped up on a slide. A camel's hair
pencil iuU of water readily washes away all particles of paper or dust, espe-
cially if the lamina be held upon the slide by the flattened end of a match
stick ; and the other surface, being made uppermost by turning in water, is
to be prepared in the same way. Once more drop the section in water ; then
with fine forceps remove and let it fall into the alcohol ; now transfer it to
chloroform ; and finally place it between bits of smooth bibulous paper, which
again lie between a couple of clean slides. A pair of spring forceps will
maintain flatness until the now finished section is required for mounting.

After so much trouble it were a pity to lose a fine specimen by bad mount-
ing ; wherefore, and to prevent a loss of time and labor and much disap-
pointment, I beg leave to offer a few suggestions as to the manner of cageing
or embalming the result of our successful efforts.

In any case choose the better side of the section as the uppermost, and
this is commonly the first. Have ready, for the dry method, a slide cleaned
with dilute alcohol, and upon it a shallow circle of shellac, applied in alco-
holic solution by the aid of the Shadbolt turn-table. The shellac should be
nearly hard after a day's exposure. Wipe the slide with dry cambric over
the circular area, and clean a suitable cover glass which has been lying in
dilute alcohol. Warm the slide over a flame of a spirit lamp to drive off
moisture ; suffer it to cool perfectly ; place the section in the cell ; warm and
cool the cover ; lay the latter upon the cell ; on the cover put a bit of thin
paper, and over this a piece of a slide, finally clamping all together by spring
forceps. The slide must be held over the spirit flame until the softened
shellac adheres all around the circle to the cover and the section is pressed
and held flat.

When cold, the work is done.

The embalming process, like the one just described, requires a little prac-
tice to ensure success. As soft balsam pervades almost all structure, it is
generally inapplicable to the mounting of tissues, such as bone and tooth.
At any rate I have already spoken of the manner of its use. But where
tubuli, &c., are to be made conspicuous by retained air, hardened, not hard,
balsam must be employed.

To mount a section in such balsam I proceed as follows : On a slide free
from crocus-flaws pour a small quantity of so't balsam, and hold the same
over a spirit lamp until by vaporization the balsam shall have become tacky
when cold. The process is favored by tilting the slide to and fro. Let the
slide cool ; and ujion the end of a spatula blade prepare other balsam, but a
trifle less hard. The section being laid upon the cold balsam on the slide,
and this held between finger and thumb, the spatula blade is to be heated
until the balsam flows ; whereupon the blade is suddenly turned over and
made to press the hot cement upon the section for a moment. The heat strik-
ing through fixes the section ; and as the blade is withdrawn the slide must
instantly be held over the lamp until all the balsam melts. And here again
warpage is almost entirely prevented.

At this moment the cover-glass, made warm, is laid over the specimen, not
flatly but dipping at one edge, and hy pressure is made to assume its proper
position. It almost always happens, however, that too much balsam is included
between the cover and the slide, and that air bubbles appear in the field.
To remedy these evils, I resort to a process similar t(j that which I employ
when fastening a cover-glass upon the shellac margin of a cell. I first cut
avvay all possible hard balsam with a hot knife-blade. Then, the slide being
cold, a strip of fine paper is laid over the whole of it, and upon the paper
another slide. The two plates of glass are presently to be clamped together
with stout forceps, closing with a slide, and, holding by the forceps, both of

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

11

"the surfaces are exposed alternately to the heat of the spirit flame sufficiently
to melt the whole balsam. All superfluous balsam now runs out between the
principal slide and the paper, and usually bears with it the air-bubbles, so
that the section remains perfectly flat, and embedded in the smallest possible
quantity of balsam.

When perfectly cold the upper slide may be removed, the paper readily
stripped oS", and the mounting is accomplished.

To clean off the marginal hard balsam with a hot knife-blade, to clear
away residual streaks or border, and to wash to brightness both surfaces of
the slides with aqua ammonia on a bit of rag, occupy but a few minutes ; and
nothing remains to be done but attach the label duly inscribed.

There are those who prefer to ornament the edge of the cover with black
varnish, which certainly gives a pretty appearance to the slide ; but I would
recommend the previous protection of the margin of balsam below it by a
thin coat of shellac varnish, which effectually prevents penetration of the
black into the balsam, whether soft or in a hardened condition.

In reviewing this paper, I do not seek to excuse its prolixity, but to express
the hope that the methods and processes described in it may obtain the appro-
bation of others ; and that they may continue to give the very excellent re-
sults which have rewarded my labors, as well as of those friends who have
accepted my guidance in microscopical studies.

This paper was accompanied by thirty-eight preparations for ex-
hibition, including sections of teeth, shells and calculi.

Description of Machine for Grinding Sections of Hard Substances for Micro-
scopic Purposes.
BY COLEMAN SELLERS.
The preparation of thin sections of hard substances, such as bone, teeth,
stone, &c., for microscopic purposes is usually attended with more or less
trouble, and requires considerable skill on the part of the workman. The
chief difficulty is in securing uniformity of thickness in the specimen. A
machine lately devised by Mr. J. S. Bancroft, of Philadelphia and in use at
the establishment of Messrs. Wm. Sellers & Co., embodies a principle which,
applied to this purpose, facilitates the operation. This particular machine is
one of those improvements in the direction of enabling unskilled labor to
take the place of skilled labor, or to enable skilled workmen to do a greater
amount of good work in the same time. It is a well known fact that patient
industry combined with mechanical skill will enable marvels of good work-
manship to be produced, but those inventions are the most valuable which
with the least outlay of capital in costly machinery ena:bles unskilled work-
men to produce the same result more expeditiously and if possible more per-
fect. The contrivance of Mr. Bancroft was designed to produce a truly plane
surface on hardened metals. It consists of a plane metal table, the upper sur-
face of which is made accurately true. This plane surface or plate rests on

hinges at one end and is provided with
an adjusting screw under the other end.
In the middle of the table is an oblong
rectangular slat, say one inch wide, so
arranged as to allow the edge of an emery
wheel placed below the table to project
slightly above the surface of the plate.
The emery wheel, supported in suitable
bearings, is made to revolve rapidly on
its axis, and its periphery becomes an
abrading point in the centre of the plane
surface of the metal plate. By means of
the regulating screw the plate can be so

adjusted as to determine the distance

'n"!"'i':"!"[iWl that the edge of wheel shall project above

12 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

the plate. In use, the hardened metal to be ground true is pressed firmly by
the hands of the workman upon the plate, and passed with a sliding motion
in various directions over the wheel. The emery wheel touches the highest
places, and gradually reduces all to one uniform plane. With this machine
straight edges of hardened steel have been produced of such perfection that
when pressed together on the edges the one will lift the o her by cohesion,
without the intervention of a fluid.

This machine suggested to me an application of the same principle to the
preparation of microscopic objects. For the large plane table with the nar-
row opening in the machine, as described, I substitute a small plate of brass
or iron, with a circular opening in its centre of about If^'' diam. The emery
wheel is supported on a spindle and stand, such as can be purchased at any
of the dental depots, and intended for the purpose of rotating emery or corun-
dum wheels, &c. The table hinged above the wheel has an adjusting screw
to determine the height of its surface plane above the edge of the emery
wheel. In use, the specimen, ground and polished on one side, is then
mounted with hard balsam on the glass slide upon which it is to remain. It
may then he roughly ground down or filed down to any convenient thickness
short of that actually needed; then it is laid upon this grinding machine
(specimen down), the slide resting on each side of the centre hole in the
plate, the specimen touching the revolving emery wheel. Passing it back
and forth over the wheel, it is reduced to a plane parallel with the glass upon
which it is cemented, and its final thinness regulated by the adjustment of
the table. When thin enough for the purpose intended it may be smoothed
with a slip of Scotch stone and polished without fear of destroying the uni-
formity of thickness obtained by the section-grinding machine. In using the
instrument in the preparation of sections of ivory or bone I have found that
the grinding should be done with either a dry wheel or one moistened with
oil, as water will swell the specimen and crack it loose from its cement. The
wheels used bj' me are made of emery and glue, not the shellac corundum
wheels sold at the dental depots. It is probable that a circular file, /. e., a
steel wheel with teeth on its edge, would do well as a grinding wheel for
bones, in place of the emery wheel.

D. H. C. Wood exhibited slides of mycelium filaments and spores of a fun-
gus, which were found disseminated throughout a crust or scab, similar to
others expectoi-ated at different times during the past six months by a gentle-
man, who had sent the crust to Prof. Leidy. Dr. Wood promised to investi-
gate the subject further, but up to the present time could not speak precisely
as to the specific form. The filaments resembled those found by Virchow and
others in the lungs, and called by them aspergillus pulmonum.

June 21st.

Director S. W. Mitchell, M. D., in the Chair,

Eight members preseat.

Dr. W. W. Keen read a paper on the stibject, " Is Atropia an
Antidote to Hydrocyanic Acid?"

Dr. Mitchell desired to know whether the quantities used were at all com-
parable to those of Pryer.

Dr. Keen replied that this was the point most difficult to determine, but
having found by experiment that two minims of the oflicinal hydrocyanic acid
of our Pharmacopoeia was a lethal dose for rabbits, he had then sought to
make the quantities accord with those of Pryer.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 13

Sej^f. m, 1869.
Director, S. W. Mitchell, M.D., in the Chair.

Nineteen members present.

The Director, for the committee appointed at last meeting on Dr.
Keen's paper, reported that they had asked Dr. Keen to make some
further experiment?.

Dr. Keen read a supplement to his paper, in compliance %Yith this
recommendation.

Dr. Tyson read a paper entitled, " a Note on the Distribution of
Nerves to the Vessels in the Connective Tissue of the Pig's Kidney."
See Amer. Jour. Med. Sci., Oct., 1869.

Dr. W. Pepper exhibited some slides of muscular fibre removed,
post-mortem, from an emigrant girl, who died of typhoid fever.

The patient was a German girl, aet. 22, who had been in America but six
weeks. There bad been six deaths from fever on board the emigrant ship in
which she came to this country. She died on the nineteenth day.

Besides the ordinary lesions of the disease, the muscular tissue of both ven-
tricles of the heart presented a marked degree of friability, and, on microsco-
pic examination, was found to have undergone quite advanced granular de-
generation, as originally observed by Zenker.

The psoas and external oblique muscles of the right side were also examined,
but were found healthy.

Dh. Howell made some remarks on the application of photography to
microscopy. He spoke of the inexpensiveness of the apparatus necessary to
the work, and exhibited the results of his experiments with sunlight, and also
the magnesium light, as applied to micro-photography. The positive prints
were from photographs of sections of teeth, bone, cartilage, coal, &c.

Dr. H. Allen made some remarks upon the peculiarities in the construction
of inter-orbital space of the human skull. He demonstrated by outlines upon
the blackboard that these peculiarities may consist of the following plans:

(1.) Absence of nasal bones with vertical plate of ethmoid appearing be-
tween the nasal processes of the superior maxillae.

(2.) Absence of left nasal bone, its area being occupied by the nasal process
of the corresponding side.

(3.) Same as (1), with rudiments of nasal bones in position.

(4.) Ossification of inter-nasal septum.

Reference was made to Dr. Van der Hcjeven's paper on this subject in Siebold
and Kolliker Zeitschrift.

Sept. 20th, 1869.

Vice-Director, W. Pepper, M.D., in the Chair.

Twenty-two members present.

Dr, J. G. Richardson exhibited specimens of Sarcina ventriculi
found in the vomited matter of a patient.

He remarked that his observations tended to show that the divisions of the
Sarcina which were formerly figured by some as having central nuclei, are
now seen, under a higher power, to be divided into four parts, the junctions
of their separating fissures being apparently mistaken for their nuclei.

Dr. Wm. Pepper desired to place on record the following observa-
tions :

14 PROOEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

A young man suffering with acute tuberculosis presented, for two weeks be-
fore death, mild wandering delirium, and finally became almost unconscious,
with ecstatic expression and constant fumbling movements of the hands.

At the autopsy, a diffused proliferation of the cells of the perivascular sheath
of the meningeal arterioles was found, though not producing at any point
granulations visible to the naked eye; and in several of these vessels emboli
were found impacted.

Dr. Richardson stated that in examining the blood of a dog killed
by opium he had noted aggregations of white blood corpuscles float-
ing in the blood, but thought they might have occurred post mortem.

Oct. 4fh, 1869.
Director, S. ^Y. Mitchell, M.D., in the Chair.

Twenty members present.

Dr. Mitchell read a paper by Prof. Christopher Johnson, of Balti-
more, descriptive of a case of male hermaphr.odism and hypospodias.
See Journal of Academy,

Dr. Wm. Pepper made a verbal communication on the micro-
scopic characters of nerve fibrils after amputation.

Oct. 18 fh, 1869.
Director, S. W. Mitchell, M.D., in the Chair.

Nineteen members present.

Dr. J. G. Richardson read a paper entitled " Observations and
Experiments tending to prove the identity of the so-called Halford's
Corpuscles with White Blood Corpuscles."

Dr. Richardson also showed some of the blood of animals poisoned
by rattlesnake venom, in which the corpuscles of Halford were ren-
dered beautifully distinct by staining with aniline, and presented
all the characters of white blood corpuscles when treated by acetic
acid or water.

Dr. H. C. Wood stated that he had recently been engaged in some extended
observations on the effects of the recently discovered alkaloids of veratrum
viride, viridia and veratroidia. With regard to the former, he had noted that when
given in poisonous doses, the first change manifested by the animal poisoned,
a rabbit for instance, was a disposition to be quiet, — the quietness being the
result, not of any cerebral affection, but of weakness. After a while the animal
begins to tremble, and this trembling soon becomes peculiar ; so that when
the hand is placed over the body of the creature, a succession of thrills are
noticed to ])ass throughout it. Soon, the strength failing, the animal lies al-
most flat upon the ground. After this come convulsions, the animal scream-
ing and running along the ground ; extreme weakness being apparent in the
position maintained, the bellj' almost dragging on the ground. Finally the
debility becomes more marked, the animal lies on its back, and dies, — death
taking place from asphj'xia, induced by paralysis of the respiratory muscles.
In no instance was there vomiting or purging. On placing the ha?modynamo-
meter in the femoral artery; the first effect noted is a diminution of arterial
pressure, and subsequently diminution of the heart's contractions, the pulse
going down from 150 to 50 or GO ; but the heart always continues to act after
respiration ceases ; death never takes place through the circulation.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 15

After section of the pneumogastrics, the same effects follow the administra-
tion of viridia, showing that it is a direct depressor, either to the muscular
structure of the heart itself or to the ganglia contained in it. No effect follows
the introduction of viridia into the muscles of the thigh of the snapping turtle,
while a very small quantity introduced into the muscular structure of the
heart of the same creature acted promptly, showing the action to be a local
one.

Veratroidia produces death in the same way, but there is no trembling ; while it
always vomits and sometimes purges. The action of the heart is at first marked-
ly depressed, but this is followed bj' a rebound, the pulsations increasing in force
and frequency. Dr. Wood considers this rebound due to an accumulation of
carbonic acid in the structure of the heart, temporarily overcoming the de-
pressing effect of veratroidia. When the p